Datasheet PDF

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Data Sheet
28/40/44-Pin, Low-Power,
High-Performance Microcontrollers
with nanoWatt XLP Technology
 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B

Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices:
• Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet.
• Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the
intended manner and under normal conditions.
• There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our
knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data
Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property.
• Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code.
• Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not
mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”
Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our
products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts
allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act.
Information contained in this publication regarding device Trademarks

applications and the like is provided only for your convenience The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, dsPIC,
and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART,
ensure that your application meets with your specifications.
PIC32 logo, rfPIC and UNI/O are registered trademarks of
MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR
Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR
countries.
IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, FilterLab, Hampshire, HI-TECH C, Linear Active Thermistor,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL and The Embedded Control
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip
FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A.
arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard,
devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN,
the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, HI-TIDE, In-Circuit Serial
hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, Programming, ICSP, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified
suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, Octopus, Omniscient Code
conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip Generation, PICC, PICC-18, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit,
intellectual property rights. PICtail, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, Total Endurance,
TSHARC, UniWinDriver, WiperLock and ZENA are
trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated
in the U.S.A.
All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their
respective companies.
© 2010, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the
U.S.A., All Rights Reserved.
Printed on recycled paper.
ISBN: 978-1-60932-175-8
Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide
headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and
Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California
and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures
are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping
devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and
analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design
and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified.
DS41412B-page 2 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
28/40/44-Pin, Low-Power, High-Performance
Microcontrollers with nanoWatt XLP Technology
High-Performance RISC CPU: Extreme Low-Power Management
• C Compiler Optimized Architecture: with nanoWatt XLP:
- Optional extended instruction set designed to • Sleep mode: 20 nA, typical
optimize re-entrant code • Watchdog Timer: 300 nA, typical
• Up to 1024 Bytes Data EEPROM
• Timer1 Oscillator: 800 nA @ 32 kHz
• Up to 64 Kbytes Linear Program Memory
Addressing • Peripheral Module Disable
• Up to 3896 Bytes Linear Data Memory Address- Special Microcontroller Features:
ing
• Up to 16 MIPS Operation • Full 5.5V Operation – PIC18FXXK22 devices
• 16-bit Wide Instructions, 8-bit Wide Data Path • 1.8V to 3.6V Operation – PIC18LFXXK22 devices
• Priority Levels for Interrupts • Self-Programmable under Software Control
• 31-Level, Software Accessible Hardware Stack • High/Low-Voltage Detection (HLVD) module:
• 8 x 8 Single-Cycle Hardware Multiplier - Programmable 16-Level
- Interrupt on High/Low-Voltage Detection
Flexible Oscillator Structure:
• Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR):
• Precision 16 MHz Internal Oscillator Block: - With software enable option
- Factory calibrated to ± 1% - Configurable shutdown in Sleep
- Selectable frequencies, 31 kHz to 16 MHz • Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT):
- 64 MHz performance available using PLL – - Programmable period from 4 ms to 131s
no external components required • In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™):
• Four Crystal modes up to 64 MHz - Single-Supply 3V
• Two External Clock modes up to 64 MHz • In-Circuit Debug (ICD)
• 4X Phase Lock Loop (PLL)
• Secondary Oscillator using Timer1 @ 32 kHz Peripheral Highlights:
• Fail-Safe Clock Monitor:
- Allows for safe shutdown if peripheral clock • Up to 35 I/O Pins plus 1 Input-Only Pin:
stops - High-Current Sink/Source 25 mA/25 mA
- Two-Speed Oscillator Start-up - Three programmable external interrupts
- Four programmable interrupt-on-change
- Nine programmable weak pull-ups
Analog Features: - Programmable slew rate
• Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) module: • SR Latch:
- 10-bit resolution, up to 30 external channels - Multiple Set/Reset input options
- Auto-acquisition capability • Two Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) modules
- Conversion available during Sleep • Three Enhanced CCP (ECCP) modules:
- Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) channel - One, two or four PWM outputs
- Independent input multiplexing - Selectable polarity
• Analog Comparator module: - Programmable dead time
- Two rail-to-rail analog comparators - Auto-Shutdown and Auto-Restart
- Independent input multiplexing - PWM steering
• Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) module: • Two Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP)
modules:
- Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) with 1.024V,
2.048V and 4.096V output levels - 3-wire SPI (supports all 4 modes)
- 5-bit rail-to-rail resistive DAC with positive - I2C™ Master and Slave modes with address
and negative reference selection mask
• Charge Time Measurement Unit (CTMU) module:
- Supports capacitive touch sensing for touch
screens and capacitive switches
 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 3

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
• Two Enhanced Universal Synchronous
Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART)
modules:
- Supports RS-485, RS-232 and LIN
- RS-232 operation using internal oscillator
- Auto-Wake-up on Break
- Auto-Baud Detect
Program
Data Memory MSSP
A/D Channels(2)
Memory
(Half-Bridge)
(Full-Bridge)
Comparator
16-bit Timer
8-bit Timer
BOR/LVD
SR Latch
EUSART
# Single-Word
CTMU
ECCP
ECCP
10-bit
Instructions
I/O(1)
CCP
EEPROM
Device
(Bytes)
(Bytes)
(Bytes)
SRAM
Flash
I2C™
SPI
PIC18(L)F23K22 8K 4096 512 256 25 19 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 Y Y Y 3 4
PIC18(L)F24K22 16K 8192 768 256 25 19 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 Y Y Y 3 4
PIC18(L)F25K22 32K 16384 1536 256 25 19 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 Y Y Y 3 4
PIC18(L)F26K22 64k 32768 3896 1024 25 19 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 Y Y Y 3 4
PIC18(L)F43K22 8K 4096 512 256 36 30 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 Y Y Y 3 4
PIC18(L)F44K22 16K 8192 768 256 36 30 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 Y Y Y 3 4
PIC18(L)F45K22 32K 16384 1536 256 36 30 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 Y Y Y 3 4
PIC18(L)F46K22 64k 32768 3896 1024 36 30 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 Y Y Y 3 4
Note 1: One pin is input only.
2: Channel count includes internal FVR and DAC channels.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Pin Diagrams
28-pin PDIP, SOIC, SSOP
MCLR/VPP/RE3 1 28 RB7
RA0 2 27 RB6
RA1 3 26 RB5
RA2 4 25 RB4
PIC18(L)F2XK22
RA3 5 24 RB3
RA4 6 23 RB2
RA5 7 22 RB1
VSS 8 21 RB0
RA7 9 20 VDD
RA6 10 19 VSS
RC0 11 18 RC7
RC1 12 17 RC6
RC2 13 16 RC5
RC3 14 15 RC4
28-pin QFN, UQFN(1)

MCLR/VPP/RE3
RA1
RA0
RB7
RB6
RB5
RB4
28 27 26 25 24 23 22
RA2 1 21 RB3
RA3 2 20 RB2
RA4 3 19 RB1
RA5/ 4 PIC18(L)F2XK22 18 RB0
VSS 5 17 VDD
RA7 6 16 VSS
RA6 7 15 RC7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
RC6
RC3
RC4
RC5
RC0
RC1
RC2
Note 1: The 28-pin UQFN package is available only for PIC18(L)F23K22 and PIC18(L)F24K22.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Pin Diagrams
40-pin PDIP
MCLR/VPP/RE3 1 40 RB7
RA0 2 39 RB6/
RA1 3 38 RB5
RA2/ 4 37 RB4
RA3 5 36 RB3
RA4 6 35 RB2
RA5 7 34 RB1
PIC18(L)F4XK22
RE0 8 33 RB0
RE1 9 32 VDD
RE2/ 10 31 VSS
VDD 11 30 RD7
VSS 12 29 RD6
RA7 13 28 RD5
RA6 14 27 RD4
RC0 15 26 RC7
RC1 16 25 RC6
RC2 17 24 RC5
RC3 18 23 RC4
RD0 19 22 RD3
RD1 20 21 RD2

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Pin Diagrams (Cont.’d)
44-pin TQFP
RC6/TX1/CK1
RC5/SDO1
RC4
RD3
RD2
RD1
RD0
RC3
RC2
RC1
NC
41
40
39
37
36
35
34
42
44
43
38
RC7 1 33 NC
RD4 2 32 RC0
RD5 3 31 RA6
RD6 4 30 RA7
RD7 5 29 VSS
VSS 6 PIC18(L)F4XK22 28 VDD
VDD 7 27 RE2
RB0 8 26 RE1
RB1 9 25 RE0
RB2 10 24 RA5
RB3 11 23 RA4
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
RB6
RB7
RA3
RA0
RA1
RA2
RB5
MCLR/VPP/RE3
RB4
NC
NC
44-pin QFN
RD3
RD1
RD0
RC2
RC1
RC0
RC6
RC5
RC4
RD2
RC3
44
43
42
41
40
39
37
36
35
34
38
RC7 1 33 RA6
RD4 2 32 RA7
RD5 3 31 VSS
RD6 4 30 VSS
RD7 5 29 VDD
VSS 6 PIC18(L)F4XK22 28 VDD
VDD 7 27 RE2
VDD 8 26 RE1
RB0 9 25 RE0
RB1 10 24 RA5
RB2 11 23 RA4
22
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
RB5
RB6
RB7
RA2
RA0
RA1
RB4
RA3
NC
MCLR/VPP/RE3
RB3

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 1: PIC18(L)F2XK22 PIN SUMMARY

28-SSOP, SOIC
28-QFN, UQFN
Comparator
Reference
Interrupts
28-SPDIP
SR Latch
EUSART
(E)CCP
Analog
Pull-up
Timers
CTMU
MSSP
Basic
I/O
2 27 RA0 AN0 C12IN0-

3 28 RA1 AN1 C12IN1-
4 1 RA2 AN2 C2IN+ VREF-/
DACOUT
5 2 RA3 AN3 C1IN+ VREF+

6 3 RA4 C1OUT SRQ CCP5 T0CKI
7 4 RA5 AN4 C2OUT SRNQ HLVDIN SS1
10 7 RA6 OSC2/
CLKO
9 6 RA7 OSC1/
CLKI
21 18 RB0 AN12 SRI CCP4 SS2 INT0 Y
FLT0
22 19 RB1 AN10 C12IN3- P1C SCK2/ INT1 Y
SCL2
23 20 RB2 AN8 CTED1 P1B SDI2/ INT2 Y
SDA
24 21 RB3 AN9 C12IN2- CTED2 CCP2/ SDO2 Y
P2A(1)
25 22 RB4 AN11 P1D T5G IOC Y
26 23 RB5 AN13 CCP3/ T1G IOC Y
P3A(4) T3CKI(2)
P2B(3)
27 24 RB6 TX2/CK2 IOC Y PGC
28 25 RB7 RX2/DT2 IOC Y PGD
11 8 RC0 P2B(3) SOSCO/
T1CKI
T3CKI(2)
T3G
12 9 RC1 CCP2/ SOSCI
P2A(1)
13 10 RC2 AN14 CTPLS CCP1/ T5CKI
P1A
14 11 RC3 AN15 SCK1/
SCL1
15 12 RC4 AN16 SDI1/
SDA1
16 13 RC5 AN17 SDO1
17 14 RC6 AN18 CCP3/ TX1/CK1
P3A(4)
18 15 RC7 AN19 P3B RX1/DT1
1 26 RE3 MCLR/
VPP
8 5 VSS
19 16 VSS
20 17 VDD
Note 1: CCP2/P2A multiplexed in fuses.
2: T3CKI multiplexed in fuses.
3: P2B multiplexed in fuses.
4: CCP3/P3A multiplexed in fuses.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 2: PIC18(L)F4XK22 PIN SUMMARY
Comparator
Reference
Interrupts
SR Latch
44-TQFP
EUSART
40-PDIP
44-QFN
(E)CCP
Analog
Pull-up
Timers
CTMU
MSSP
Basic
I/O
2 19 19 RA0 AN0 C12IN0-
3 20 20 RA1 AN1 C12IN1-
4 21 21 RA2 AN2 C2IN+ VREF-
DACOUT
5 22 22 RA3 AN3 C1IN+ VREF+
6 23 23 RA4 C1OUT SRQ T0CKI
7 24 24 RA5 AN4 C2OUT SRNQ HLVDIN SS1
14 31 33 RA6 OSC2/
CLKO
13 30 32 RA7 OSC1/
CLKI
33 8 9 RB0 AN12 SRI FLT0 INT0 Y
34 9 10 RB1 AN10 C12IN3- INT1 Y
35 10 11 RB2 AN8 CTED1 INT2 Y
36 11 12 RB3 AN9 C12IN2- CTED2 CCP2/ Y
P2A(1)
37 14 14 RB4 AN11 T5G IOC Y
38 15 15 RB5 AN13 CCP3/ T1G IOC Y
P3A(4) T3CKI(2)
39 16 16 RB6 IOC Y PGC
40 17 17 RB7 IOC Y PGD
15 32 34 RC0 P2B(5) SOSCO/
T1CKI
T3CKI(2)
T3G
16 35 35 RC1 CCP2(1) SOSCI
P2A
17 36 36 RC2 AN14 CTPLS CCP1/ T5CKI
P1A
18 37 37 RC3 AN15 SCK1/
SCL1
23 42 42 RC4 AN16 SDI1/
SDA1
24 43 43 RC5 AN17 SDO1
25 44 44 RC6 AN18 TX1/
CK1
26 1 1 RC7 AN19 RX1/
DT1
19 38 38 RD0 AN20 SCK2/
SCL2
20 39 39 RD1 AN21 CCP4 SDI2/
SDA2
21 40 40 RD2 AN22 P2B(5)
22 41 41 RD3 AN23 P2C SS2
27 2 2 RD4 AN24 P2D SD02
28 3 3 RD5 AN25 P1B
29 4 4 RD6 AN26 P1C TX2
CK2
30 5 5 RD7 AN27 P1D RX2/
DT2
8 25 25 RE0 AN5 CCP3/
P3A(4)
Note 1: CCP2 multiplexed in fuses.
3: Pins are enabled on -ICE derivative only, otherwise they are No Connects.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 2: PIC18(L)F4XK22 PIN SUMMARY (CONTINUED)
Comparator
Reference
Interrupts
SR Latch
44-TQFP
EUSART
40-PDIP
44-QFN
(E)CCP
Analog
Pull-up
Timers
CTMU
MSSP
Basic
I/O
9 26 26 RE1 AN6 P3B
10 27 27 RE2 AN7 CCP5
1 18 18 RE3 Y MCLR/
VPP
11 7 7,8 VDD
32 28 28, 29 VDD
12 6 6 VSS
31 29 30, 31 VSS
— 12(3) —
(3)
— 13 —
— 33(3) —
— 34 13 NC
Note 1: CCP2 multiplexed in fuses.
3: Pins are enabled on -ICE derivative only, otherwise they are No Connects.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Table of Contents
1.0 Device Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................... 13
2.0 Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)...................................................................................................................... 27
3.0 Power-Managed Modes ............................................................................................................................................................ 47
4.0 Reset ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 59
5.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................ 69
6.0 Flash Program Memory............................................................................................................................................................. 95
7.0 Data EEPROM Memory .......................................................................................................................................................... 105
8.0 8 x 8 Hardware Multiplier......................................................................................................................................................... 111
9.0 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................................................................. 113
10.0 I/O Ports .................................................................................................................................................................................. 133
11.0 Timer0 Module ........................................................................................................................................................................ 157
12.0 Timer1/3/5 Module with Gate Control...................................................................................................................................... 161
13.0 Timer2/4/6 Module .................................................................................................................................................................. 173
14.0 Capture/Compare/PWM Modules ........................................................................................................................................... 177
15.0 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP1 and MSSP2) Module ............................................................................................. 207
16.0 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) .............................................................. 263
17.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module ............................................................................................................................. 291
18.0 Comparator Module................................................................................................................................................................. 305
19.0 Charge Time Measurement Unit (CTMU) ............................................................................................................................... 317
20.0 SR Latch.................................................................................................................................................................................. 333
21.0 Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) .............................................................................................................................................. 337
22.0 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) .......................................................................................................................................... 339
23.0 High/Low-Voltage Detect (HLVD)............................................................................................................................................ 343
24.0 Special Features of the CPU................................................................................................................................................... 349
25.0 Instruction Set Summary ......................................................................................................................................................... 367
26.0 Development Support.............................................................................................................................................................. 417
27.0 Electrical Characteristics ......................................................................................................................................................... 421
28.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables...................................................................................................................... 461
29.0 Packaging Information............................................................................................................................................................. 463
Appendix A: Revision History............................................................................................................................................................ 477
Appendix B: Device Differences ....................................................................................................................................................... 478
Index ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 479
The Microchip Web Site .................................................................................................................................................................... 489
Customer Change Notification Service ............................................................................................................................................. 489
Customer Support ............................................................................................................................................................................. 489
Reader Response ............................................................................................................................................................................. 490
Product Identification System ........................................................................................................................................................... 491

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS

It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip
products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and
enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced.
If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via
E-mail at docerrors@mail.microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150.
We welcome your feedback.
Most Current Data Sheet

To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at:
http://www.microchip.com
You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page.
The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000).
Errata
An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current
devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision
of silicon and revision of document to which it applies.
To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following:
• Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com
• Your local Microchip sales office (see last page)
• The Microchip Corporate Literature Center; U.S. FAX: (480) 792-7277
When contacting a sales office or the literature center, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include
literature number) you are using.
Customer Notification System

Register on our web site at www.microchip.com/cn to receive the most current information on all of our products.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW 1.1.2 MULTIPLE OSCILLATOR OPTIONS
AND FEATURES
This document contains device specific information for
the following devices: All of the devices in the PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 family
offer ten different oscillator options, allowing users a
• PIC18F23K22 • PIC18LF23K22 wide range of choices in developing application
• PIC18F24K22 • PIC18LF24K22 hardware. These include:
• PIC18F25K22 • PIC18LF25K22 • Four Crystal modes, using crystals or ceramic
• PIC18F26K22 • PIC18LF26K22 resonators
• PIC18F43K22 • PIC18LF43K22 • Two External Clock modes, offering the option of
using two pins (oscillator input and a divide-by-4
• PIC18F44K22 • PIC18LF44K22 clock output) or one pin (oscillator input, with the
• PIC18F45K22 • PIC18LF45K22 second pin reassigned as general I/O)
• PIC18F46K22 • PIC18LF46K22 • Two External RC Oscillator modes with the same
pin options as the External Clock modes
This family offers the advantages of all PIC18
microcontrollers – namely, high computational • An internal oscillator block which contains a
performance at an economical price – with the addition 16 MHz HFINTOSC oscillator and a 31 kHz
of high-endurance, Flash program memory. On top of LFINTOSC oscillator, which together provide 8
these features, the PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 family user selectable clock frequencies, from 31 kHz to
introduces design enhancements that make these 16 MHz. This option frees the two oscillator pins
microcontrollers a logical choice for many high- for use as additional general purpose I/O.
performance, power sensitive applications. • A Phase Lock Loop (PLL) frequency multiplier,
available to both external and internal oscillator
1.1 New Core Features modes, which allows clock speeds of up to
64 MHz. Used with the internal oscillator, the PLL
1.1.1 nanoWatt TECHNOLOGY gives users a complete selection of clock speeds,
All of the devices in the PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 family from 31 kHz to 64 MHz – all without using an
incorporate a range of features that can significantly external crystal or clock circuit.
reduce power consumption during operation. Key Besides its availability as a clock source, the internal
items include: oscillator block provides a stable reference source that
• Alternate Run Modes: By clocking the controller gives the family additional features for robust
from the Timer1 source or the internal oscillator operation:
block, power consumption during code execution • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: This option constantly
can be reduced by as much as 90%. monitors the main clock source against a
• Multiple Idle Modes: The controller can also run reference signal provided by the LFINTOSC. If a
with its CPU core disabled but the peripherals still clock failure occurs, the controller is switched to
active. In these states, power consumption can be the internal oscillator block, allowing for continued
reduced even further, to as little as 4% of normal operation or a safe application shutdown.
operation requirements. • Two-Speed Start-up: This option allows the
• On-the-fly Mode Switching: The power- internal oscillator to serve as the clock source
managed modes are invoked by user code during from Power-on Reset, or wake-up from Sleep
operation, allowing the user to incorporate power- mode, until the primary clock source is available.
saving ideas into their application’s software
design.
• Low Consumption in Key Modules: The
power requirements for both Timer1 and the
Watchdog Timer are minimized. See
Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics”
for values.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
1.2 Other Special Features 1.3 Details on Individual Family
• Memory Endurance: The Flash cells for both
Members
program memory and data EEPROM are rated to Devices in the PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 family are avail-
last for many thousands of erase/write cycles – up to able in 28-pin and 40/44-pin packages. The block dia-
10K for program memory and 100K for EEPROM. gram for the device family is shown in Figure 1-1.
Data retention without refresh is conservatively
The devices have the following differences:
estimated to be greater than 40 years.
• Self-programmability: These devices can write 1. Flash program memory
to their own program memory spaces under inter- 2. Data Memory SRAM
nal software control. By using a bootloader routine 3. Data Memory EEPROM
located in the protected Boot Block at the top of 4. A/D channels
program memory, it becomes possible to create
5. I/O ports
an application that can update itself in the field.
6. ECCP modules (Full/Half Bridge)
• Extended Instruction Set: The PIC18(L)F2X/
4XK22 family introduces an optional extension to 7. Input Voltage Range/Power Consumption
the PIC18 instruction set, which adds 8 new All other features for devices in this family are identical.
instructions and an Indexed Addressing mode. These are summarized in Table 1-1.
This extension, enabled as a device configuration The pinouts for all devices are listed in the pin summary
option, has been specifically designed to optimize tables: Table 1 and Table 2, and I/O description tables:
re-entrant application code originally developed in Table 1-2 and Table 1-3.
high-level languages, such as C.
• Enhanced CCP module: In PWM mode, this
module provides 1, 2 or 4 modulated outputs for
controlling half-bridge and full-bridge drivers.
Other features include:
- Auto-Shutdown, for disabling PWM outputs
on interrupt or other select conditions
- Auto-Restart, to reactivate outputs once the
condition has cleared
- Output steering to selectively enable one or
more of 4 outputs to provide the PWM signal.
• Enhanced Addressable EUSART: This serial
communication module is capable of standard
RS-232 operation and provides support for the LIN
bus protocol. Other enhancements include
automatic baud rate detection and a 16-bit Baud
Rate Generator for improved resolution. When the
microcontroller is using the internal oscillator
block, the EUSART provides stable operation for
applications that talk to the outside world without
using an external crystal (or its accompanying
power requirement).
• 10-bit A/D Converter: This module incorporates
programmable acquisition time, allowing for a
channel to be selected and a conversion to be
initiated without waiting for a sampling period and
thus, reduce code overhead.
• Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT): This
enhanced version incorporates a 16-bit
postscaler, allowing an extended time-out range
that is stable across operating voltage and
temperature. See Section 27.0 “Electrical
Characteristics” for time-out periods.
• Charge Time Measurement Unit (CTMU)
• SR Latch Output:

PIC18F23K22 PIC18F24K22 PIC18F25K22 PIC18F26K22 PIC18F43K22 PIC18F44K22 PIC18F45K22 PIC18F46K22
Features
PIC18LF23K22 PIC18LF24K22 PIC18LF25K22 PIC18LF26K22 PIC18LF43K22 PIC18LF44K22 PIC18LF45K22 PIC18LF46K22
Program Memory (Bytes) 8192 16384 32768 65536 8192 16384 32768 65536
Program Memory 4096 8192 16384 32768 4096 8192 16384 32768
TABLE 1-1:
(Instructions)
Data Memory (Bytes) 512 768 1536 3896 512 768 1536 3896
Data EEPROM Memory (Bytes) 256 256 256 1024 256 256 256 1024
I/O Ports A, B, C, E(1) A, B, C, E(1) A, B, C, E(1) A, B, C, E(1) A, B, C, D, E A, B, C, D, E A, B, C, D, E A, B, C, D, E
Capture/Compare/PWM Mod- 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
ules (CCP)
 2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

Enhanced CCP Modules (ECCP) 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
- Half Bridge
Enhanced CCP Modules (ECCP) 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
- Full Bridge
10-bit Analog-to-Digital Module 2 internal 2 internal 2 internal 2 internal 2 internal 2 internal 2 internal 2 internal
DEVICE FEATURES
(ADC) 17 input 17 input 17 input 17 input 28 input 28 input 28 input 28 input

Packages 28-pin PDIP 28-pin PDIP 28-pin PDIP 28-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP
28-pin SOIC 28-pin SOIC 28-pin SOIC 28-pin SOIC 44-pin QFN 44-pin QFN 44-pin QFN 44-pin QFN
28-pin SSOP 28-pin SSOP 28-pin SSOP 28-pin SSOP 44-pin TQFP 44-pin TQFP 44-pin TQFP 44-pin TQFP
28-pin QFN 28-pin QFN 28-pin QFN 28-pin QFN
28-pin UQFN 28-pin UQFN
Interrupt Sources 33
Timers (16-bit) 4
Serial Communications 2 MSSP,
2 EUSART
Preliminary
SR Latch Yes
Charge Time Measurement Unit Yes
Module (CTMU)
Programmable Yes
High/Low-Voltage Detect (HLVD)
Programmable Brown-out Reset Yes
(BOR)
Resets (and Delays) POR, BOR,
RESET Instruction,
Stack Overflow,
Stack Underflow
(PWRT, OST),
MCLR, WDT
Instruction Set 75 Instructions;
83 with Extended Instruction Set enabled
Operating Frequency DC - 64 MHz
Note 1: PORTE contains the single RE3 read-only bit.
DS41412B-page 15
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 1-1: PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 FAMILY BLOCK DIAGRAM
Data Bus<8>
Table Pointer<21>
8 8 Data Latch
inc/dec logic
Data Memory
21 PCLATU PCLATH
20 Address Latch PORTA
PCU PCH PCL RA0:RA7
Program Counter 12
Data Address<12>
31-Level Stack
Address Latch 4 12 4
BSR FSR0 Access
Program Memory STKPTR Bank
(8/16/32/64 Kbytes) FSR1
PORTB
FSR2 12
Data Latch RB0:RB7
inc/dec
8 logic
Table Latch
ROM Latch Address

Instruction Bus <16> Decode
PORTC
IR RC0:RC7
8
Instruction State machine
Decode and control signals
Control
PRODH PRODL
PORTD
8 x 8 Multiply RD0:RD7
3 8
BITOP W
8 8 8
OSC1(2) Internal
Oscillator Power-up
Timer 8 8
Block PORTE
(2) Oscillator
OSC2 ALU<8>
LFINTOSC Start-up Timer RE0:RE2
SOSCI Oscillator Power-on 8 RE3(1)
Reset
16 MHz
SOSCO Oscillator Watchdog
Timer
Precision FVR
Single-Supply Brown-out Band Gap
MCLR(1) Reset
Programming Reference
In-Circuit Fail-Safe
Debugger Clock Monitor
BOR Data Timer1 Timer2

Timer0 Timer3 Timer4 CTMU DAC
HLVD EEPROM
Timer5 Timer6
FVR ECCP1 CCP4

Comparators MSSP1 EUSART1 ADC FVR
ECCP2(3) SR Latch
DAC C1/C2 CCP5 MSSP2 EUSART2 10-bit
ECCP3
Note 1: RE3 is only available when MCLR functionality is disabled.

2: OSC1/CLKIN and OSC2/CLKOUT are only available in select oscillator modes and when these pins are not being used as digital I/O.
Refer to Section 2.0 “Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)” for additional information.
3: Full-Bridge operation for PIC18(L)F4XK22, Half-Bridge operation for PIC18(L)F2XK22.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 1-2: PIC18(L)F2XK22 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS

Pin Number
Pin Buffer
PDIP, Pin Name Description
QFN Type Type
SOIC
2 27 RA0/C12IN0-/AN0
RA0 I/O TTL Digital I/O.
C12IN0- I Analog Comparators C1 and C2 inverting input.
AN0 I Analog Analog input 0.
3 28 RA1/C12IN1-/AN1
4 1 RA2/C2IN+/AN2/DACOUT/VREF-
C2IN+ I Analog Comparator C2 non-inverting input.
DACOUT O Analog DAC Reference output.
VREF- I Analog A/D reference voltage (low) input.
5 2 RA3/C1IN+/AN3/VREF+
VREF+ I Analog A/D reference voltage (high) input.
6 3 RA4/CCP5/C1OUT/SRQ/T0CKI
CCP5 I/O ST Capture 5 input/Compare 5 output/PWM 5 output.
C1OUT O CMOS Comparator C1 output.
SRQ O TTL SR Latch Q output.
T0CKI I ST Timer0 external clock input.
7 4 RA5/C2OUT/SRNQ/SS1/HLVDIN/AN4
SRNQ O TTL SR Latch Q output.
SS1 I TTL SPI slave select input (MSSP1).
HLVDIN I Analog High/Low-Voltage Detect input.
10 7 RA6/CLKO/OSC2
CLKO O In RC mode, OSC2 pin outputs CLKOUT which has
1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction
cycle rate.
OSC2 O Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or
resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode.
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output; ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels;
I = Input; O = Output; P = Power.
Note 1: Default pin assignment for P2B, T3CKI, CCP3 and CCP2 when Configuration bits PB2MX, T3CMX, CCP3MX and
CCP2MX are set.
2: Alternate pin assignment for P2B, T3CKI, CCP3 and CCP2 when Configuration bits PB2MX, T3CMX, CCP3MX and
CCP2MX are clear.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 1-2: PIC18(L)F2XK22 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin Number
Pin Buffer
QFN Type Type
SOIC
9 6 RA7/CLKI/OSC1
CLKI I CMOS External clock source input. Always associated with
pin function OSC1.
OSC1 I ST Oscillator crystal input or external clock source input
ST buffer when configured in RC mode; CMOS
otherwise.
21 18 RB0/INT0/CCP4/FLT0/SRI/SS2/AN12
RB0 I/O TTL Digital I/O.
INT0 I ST External interrupt 0.
FLT0 I ST PWM Fault input for ECCP Auto-Shutdown.
SRI I ST SR Latch input.
22 19 RB1/INT1/P1C/SCK2/SCL2/C12IN3-/AN10
P1C O CMOS Enhanced CCP1 PWM output.
SCK2 I/O ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode
(MSSP2).
SCL2 I/O ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™ mode
(MSSP2).
23 20 RB2/INT2/CTED1/P1B/SDI2/SDA2/AN8
CTED1 I ST CTMU Edge 1 input.
P1B O CMOS Enhanced CCP1 PWM output.
SDI2 I ST SPI data in (MSSP2).
SDA2 I/O ST I2C™ data I/O (MSSP2).
24 21 RB3/CTED2/P2A/CCP2/SDO2/C12IN2-/AN9
P2A O CMOS Enhanced CCP2 PWM output.
CCP2(2) I/O ST Capture 2 input/Compare 2 output/PWM 2 output.
SDO2 O — SPI data out (MSSP2).
CCP2MX are set.
CCP2MX are clear.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Pin Number
Pin Buffer
QFN Type Type
SOIC
25 22 RB4/IOC0/P1D/T5G/AN11
IOC0 I TTL Interrupt-on-change pin.
P1D O CMOS Enhanced CCP1 PWM output.
T5G I ST Timer5 external clock gate input.
26 23 RB5/IOC1/P2B/P3A/CCP3/T3CKI/T1G/AN13
P2B(1) O CMOS Enhanced CCP2 PWM output.
P3A(1) O CMOS Enhanced CCP3 PWM output.
T3CKI(2) I ST Timer3 clock input.
27 24 RB6/IOC2/TX2/CK2/PGC
TX2 O — EUSART 2 asynchronous transmit.
CK2 I/O ST EUSART 2 synchronous clock (see related RXx/DTx).
PGC I/O ST In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP™ programming clock
pin.
28 25 RB7/IOC3/RX2/DT2/PGD
RX2 I ST EUSART 2 asynchronous receive.
DT2 I/O ST EUSART 2 synchronous data (see related TXx/CKx).
PGD I/O ST In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP™ programming data
pin.
11 8 RC0/P2B/T3CKI/T3G/T1CKI/SOSCO
RC0 I/O TTL Digital I/O.
T1CKI I ST Timer1 clock input.
SOSCO O — Secondary oscillator output.
12 9 RC1/P2A/CCP2/SOSCI
SOSCI I Analog Secondary oscillator input.
CCP2MX are set.
CCP2MX are clear.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Pin Number
Pin Buffer
QFN Type Type
SOIC
13 10 RC2/CTPLS/P1A/CCP1/T5CKI/AN14
CTPLS O — CTMU pulse generator output.
14 11 RC3/SCK1/SCL1/AN15
SCK1 I/O ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode
(MSSP2).
SCL1 I/O ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™ mode
(MSSP2).
15 12 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/AN16
16 13 RC5/SDO1/AN17
17 14 RC6/P3A/CCP3/TX1/CK1/AN18
(2)
CK1 I/O ST EUSART 1 synchronous clock (see related RXx/DTx).
18 15 RC7/P3B/RX1/DT1/AN19
DT1 I/O ST EUSART 1 synchronous data (see related TXx/CKx).
1 26 RE3/VPP/MCLR
RE3 I ST Digital input.
VPP P Programming voltage input.
MCLR I ST Active-Low Master Clear (device Reset) input.
CCP2MX are set.
CCP2MX are clear.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Pin Number
Pin Buffer
QFN Type Type
SOIC
20 17 VDD P — Positive supply for logic and I/O pins.
8, 19 5, 16 VSS P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins.
CCP2MX are set.
CCP2MX are clear.
TABLE 1-3: PIC18(L)F4XK22 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS

Pin Number Pin Buffer
Pin Name Description
PDIP TQFP QFN Type Type
2 19 19 RA0/C12IN0-/AN0
3 20 20 RA1/C12IN1-/AN1
4 21 21 RA2/C2IN+/AN2/DACOUT/VREF-
DACOUT O Analog DAC Reference output.
VREF- I Analog A/D reference voltage (low) input.
5 22 22 RA3/C1IN+/AN3/VREF+
VREF+ I Analog A/D reference voltage (high) input.
6 23 23 RA4/C1OUT/SRQ/T0CKI
SRQ O TTL SR Latch Q output.
T0CKI I ST Timer0 external clock input.
Note 1: Default pin assignment for P2B, T3CKI, CCP3/P3A and CCP2/P2A when Configuration bits PB2MX, T3CMX, CCP3MX
and CCP2MX are set.
2: Alternate pin assignment for P2B, T3CKI, CCP3/P3A and CCP2/P2A when Configuration bits PB2MX, T3CMX,
CCP3MX and CCP2MX are clear.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
7 24 24 RA5/C2OUT/SRNQ/SS1/HLVDIN/AN4
SRNQ O TTL SR Latch Q output.
HLVDIN I Analog High/Low-Voltage Detect input.
14 31 33 RA6/CLKO/OSC2
CLKO O — In RC mode, OSC2 pin outputs CLKOUT which
has 1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the
instruction cycle rate.
OSC2 O — Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or
resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode.
13 30 32 RA7/CLKI/OSC1
CLKI I CMOS External clock source input. Always associated
with pin function OSC1.
OSC1 I ST Oscillator crystal input or external clock source
input ST buffer when configured in RC mode;
CMOS otherwise.
33 8 9 RB0/INT0/FLT0/SRI/AN12
FLT0 I ST PWM Fault input for ECCP Auto-Shutdown.
SRI I ST SR Latch input.
34 9 10 RB1/INT1/C12IN3-/AN10
35 10 11 RB2/INT2/CTED1/AN8
36 11 12 RB3/CTED2/P2A/CCP2/C12IN2-/AN9
and CCP2MX are set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
37 14 14 RB4/IOC0/T5G/AN11
38 15 15 RB5/IOC1/P3A/CCP3/T3CKI/T1G/AN13
(2)
39 16 16 RB6/IOC2/PGC
PGC I/O ST In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP™ programming
clock pin.
40 17 17 RB7/IOC3/PGD
PGD I/O ST In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP™ programming
data pin.
15 32 34 RC0/P2B/T3CKI/T3G/T1CKI/SOSCO
SOSCO O — Secondary oscillator output.
16 35 35 RC1/P2A/CCP2/SOSCI
SOSCI I Analog Secondary oscillator input.
17 36 36 RC2/CTPLS/P1A/CCP1/T5CKI/AN14
CTPLS O — CTMU pulse generator output.
and CCP2MX are set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
18 37 37 RC3/SCK1/SCL1/AN15
SCK1 I/O ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI
mode (MSSP2).
SCL1 I/O ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™
mode (MSSP2).
23 42 42 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/AN16
24 43 43 RC5/SDO1/AN17
25 44 44 RC6/TX1/CK1/AN18
CK1 I/O ST EUSART 1 synchronous clock (see related RXx/
DTx).
26 1 1 RC7/RX1/DT1/AN19
DT1 I/O ST EUSART 1 synchronous data (see related TXx/
CKx).
19 38 38 RD0/SCK2/SCL2/AN20
RD0 I/O TTL Digital I/O.
SCK2 I/O ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI
mode (MSSP2).
SCL2 I/O ST Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™
mode (MSSP2).
20 39 39 RD1/CCP4/SDI2/SDA2/AN21
and CCP2MX are set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
21 40 40 RD2/P2B/AN22
RD2 I/O TTL Digital I/O
22 41 41 RD3/P2C/SS2/AN23
27 2 2 RD4/P2D/SDO2/AN24
28 3 3 RD5/P1B/AN25
29 4 4 RD6/P1C/TX2/CK2/AN26
CK2 I/O ST EUSART 2 synchronous clock (see related RXx/
DTx).
30 5 5 RD7/P1D/RX2/DT2/AN27
DT2 I/O ST EUSART 2 synchronous data (see related TXx/
CKx).
8 25 25 RE0/P3A/CCP3/AN5
RE0 I/O TTL Digital I/O.
9 26 26 RE1/P3B/AN6
and CCP2MX are set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
10 27 27 RE2/CCP5/AN7
CCP5 I/O ST Capture 5 input/Compare 5 output/PWM 5 output
1 18 18 RE3/VPP/MCLR
RE3 I ST Digital input.
VPP P Programming voltage input.
MCLR I ST Active-low Master Clear (device Reset) input.
11,32 7,28 7,8, VDD P — Positive supply for logic and I/O pins.
28,29
12,31 6,29 6,30,31 VSS P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins.
12,13, 13 NC
33,34
and CCP2MX are set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.0 OSCILLATOR MODULE (WITH The HFINTOSC, MFINTOSC and LFINTOSC are
factory calibrated high, medium and low-frequency
FAIL-SAFE CLOCK MONITOR) oscillators, respectively, which are used as the internal
clock sources.
2.1 Overview
The oscillator module has a wide variety of clock
sources and selection features that allow it to be used
in a wide range of applications while maximizing perfor-
mance and minimizing power consumption. Figure 2-1
illustrates a block diagram of the oscillator module.
Clock sources can be configured from external
oscillators, quartz crystal resonators, ceramic resonators
and Resistor-Capacitor (RC) circuits. In addition, the
system clock source can be configured from one of three
internal oscillators, with a choice of speeds selectable via
software. Additional clock features include:
• Selectable system clock source between external
or internal sources via software.
• Two-Speed Start-up mode, which minimizes
latency between external oscillator start-up and
code execution.
• Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) designed to
detect a failure of the external clock source (LP,
XT, HS, EC or RC modes) and switch
automatically to the internal oscillator.
• Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ensures stability
of crystal oscillator sources.
The primary clock module can be configured to provide
one of six clock sources as the primary clock.
1. RC External Resistor/Capacitor
2. LP Low-Power Crystal
3. XT Crystal/Resonator
4. INTOSC Internal Oscillator
5. HS High-Speed Crystal/Resonator
6. EC External Clock
The HS and EC oscillator circuits can be optimized for
power consumption and oscillator speed using settings
in FOSC<3:0>. Additional FOSC<3:0> selections
enable RA6 to be used as I/O or CLKO (FOSC/4) for
RC, EC and INTOSC Oscillator modes.
Primary Clock modes are selectable by the
FOSC<3:0> bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration
register. The primary clock operation is further defined
by these Configuration and register bits:
1. PRICLKEN (CONFIG1H<5>)
2. PRISD (OSCCON2<2>)
3. PLLCFG (CONFIG1H<4>)
4. PLLEN (OSCTUNE<6>)
5. HFOFST (CONFIG3H<3>)
6. IRCF<2:0> (OSCCON<6:4>)
7. MFIOSEL (OSCCON2<4>)
8. INTSRC (OSCTUNE<7>)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 2-1: SIMPLIFIED OSCILLATOR SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Secondary Oscillator(1)
Low-Power Mode
SOSCO
Secondary SOSCOUT Event Switch
Oscillator (SCS<1:0>)
(SOSC)
SOSCI
Primary Clock Module Secondary

Oscillator
PRICLKEN 01
PRISD PLL Select (3) (4)
EN FOSC<3:0>(5)
Clock Switch MUX

OSC2
Primary Primary Oscillator
Oscillator(2) 0 4xPLL 0 Primary
( OSC) Clock
OSC1 00
INTOSC
1 1
INTOSC
1x
Internal Oscillator
IRCF<2:0>
MFIOSEL
INTSRC
3 3
HF-16 MHZ
HFINTOSC HF-8 MHZ
(16 MHz) HF-4 MHZ
Internal Oscillator MUX(3)
HF-2 MHZ
HF-1 MHZ
INTOSC HF-500 kHZ
Divide HF-250 kHZ
HF-31.25 kHZ INTOSC
Circuit
MFINTOSC
(500 kHz)
MF-500 kHZ
MF-250 kHZ
MF-31.25 kHZ
LFINTOSC LF-31.25 kHz

(31.25 kHz)
Note 1: Details in Figure 2-4.

2: Details in Figure 2-2.
3: Details in Figure 2-3.
4: Details in Table 2-1.
5: The Primary Oscillator MUX uses the INTOSC branch when FOSC<3:0> = 100x.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.2 Oscillator Control 2.2.3 LOW FREQUENCY SELECTION
The OSCCON, OSCCON2 and OSCTUNE registers When a nominal output frequency of 31.25 kHz is
(Register 2-1 to Register 2-3) control several aspects selected (IRCF<2:0> = 000), users may choose
of the device clock’s operation, both in full-power which internal oscillator acts as the source. This is
operation and in power-managed modes. done with the INTSRC bit of the OSCTUNE register
and MFIOSEL bit of the OSCCON2 register. See
• Main System Clock Selection (SCS) Figure 2-2 and Register 2-1 for specific 31.25 kHz
• Primary Oscillator Circuit Shutdown (PRISD) selection. This option allows users to select a
• Secondary Oscillator Enable (SOSCGO) 31.25 kHz clock (MFINTOSC or HFINTOSC) that can
• Primary Clock Frequency 4x multiplier (PLLEN) be tuned using the TUN<5:0> bits in OSCTUNE
• Internal Frequency selection bits (IRCF, INTSRC) register, while maintaining power savings with a very
low clock speed. LFINTOSC always remains the
• Clock Status bits (OSTS, HFIOFS, MFIOFS,
clock source for features such as the Watchdog Timer
LFIOFS. SOSCRUN, PLLRDY)
and the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor, regardless of the
• Power management selection (IDLEN) setting of INTSRC and MFIOSEL bits
2.2.1 MAIN SYSTEM CLOCK SELECTION This option allows users to select the tunable and more
precise HFINTOSC as a clock source, while
The System Clock Select bits, SCS<1:0>, select the maintaining power savings with a very low clock speed.
main clock source. The available clock sources are
• Primary clock defined by the FOSC<3:0> bits of 2.2.4 POWER MANAGEMENT
CONFIG1H. The primary clock can be the primary The IDLEN bit of the OSCCON register determines
oscillator, an external clock, or the internal whether the device goes into Sleep mode or one of the
oscillator block. Idle modes when the SLEEP instruction is executed.
• Secondary clock (secondary oscillator)
• Internal oscillator block (HFINTOSC, MFINTOSC
and LFINTOSC).
The clock source changes immediately after one or
more of the bits is written to, following a brief clock
transition interval. The SCS bits are cleared to select
the primary clock on all forms of Reset.
2.2.2 INTERNAL FREQUENCY

SELECTION
The Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits
(IRCF<2:0>) select the frequency output of the internal
oscillator block. The choices are the LFINTOSC source
(31.25 kHz), the MFINTOSC source (31.25 kHz,
250 kHz or 500 kHz) and the HFINTOSC source
(16 MHz) or one of the frequencies derived from the
HFINTOSC postscaler (31.25 kHz to 8 MHz). If the
internal oscillator block is supplying the main clock,
changing the states of these bits will have an immedi-
ate change on the internal oscillator’s output. On
device Resets, the output frequency of the internal
oscillator is set to the default frequency of 1 MHz.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 2-2: INTERNAL OSCILLATOR FIGURE 2-3: PLL SELECT BLOCK
MUX BLOCK DIAGRAM DIAGRAM
IRCF<2:0> FOSC<3:0> = 100x

MFIOSEL PLLCFG
INTSRC
PLL
3
PLLEN Select
HF-16 MHZ
111
HF-8 MHZ 110
HF-4 MHZ 101
HF-2 MHZ 100
HF-1 MHZ 011
MF-500 KHZ
1 500 kHZ 010 INTOSC
HF-500 KHZ
0
MF-250 KHZ
1
250 kHZ 001
HF-250 KHZ
0
HF-31.25 KHZ 11
MF-31.25 KHZ 10 31.25 kHZ
000
LF-31.25 KHZ
0X
TABLE 2-1: PLL SELECT TRUTH TABLE

Primary Clock MUX Source FOSC<3:0> PLLCFG PLLEN PLL Select
FOSC (any source) 0000-1111 0 0 0
OSC1/OSC2 (external source) 0000-0111 1 x 1
1010-1111 0 1 1
INTOSC (internal source) 1000-1001 x 0 0
INTOSC (internal source) x 1 1

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 2-4: SECONDARY OSCILLATOR AND EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUTS
SOSCEN SOSCGO
T1SOSCEN
T3SOSCEN
T5SOSCEN
To Clock Switch Module
EN
SOSCI
Secondary SOSCOUT
Oscillator
SOSCO
1
T1CKI
T3G SOSCEN T1CLK_EXT_SRC
T3CKI 0
SOSCEN T1SOSCEN
T3G
SOSCEN
1
0 T3CLK_EXT_SRC
0
T3CKI 1
T3SOSCEN
T1G
T3CMX
T1G 1
T5CLK_EXT_SRC
T5CKI 0
T5SOSCEN
T5G T5G

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 2-1: OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R-q R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
IDLEN IRCF<2:0> OSTS(1) HFIOFS SCS<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ q = depends on condition
-n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown
bit 7 IDLEN: Idle Enable bit

1 = Device enters Idle mode on SLEEP instruction
0 = Device enters Sleep mode on SLEEP instruction
bit 6-4 IRCF<2:0>: Internal RC Oscillator Frequency Select bits(2)
111 = HFINTOSC – (16 MHz)
110 = HFINTOSC/2 – (8 MHz)
011 = HFINTOSC/16 – (1 MHz)(3)
If INTSRC = 0 and MFIOSEL = 0:

010 = HFINTOSC/32 – (500 kHz)
001 = HFINTOSC/64 – (250 kHz)
000 = LFINTOSC – (31.25 kHz)

010 = HFINTOSC/32 – (500 kHz)
001 = HFINTOSC/64 – (250 kHz)
000 = HFINTOSC/512 – (31.25 kHz)

010 = MFINTOSC – (500 kHz)
001 = MFINTOSC/2 – (250 kHz)
000 = LFINTOSC – (31.25 kHz)

010 = MFINTOSC – (500 kHz)
001 = MFINTOSC/2 – (250 kHz)
000 = MFINTOSC/16 – (31.25 kHz)
bit 3 OSTS: Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status bit
1 = Device is running from the clock defined by FOSC<3:0> of the CONFIG1H register
0 = Device is running from the internal oscillator (HFINTOSC, MFINTOSC or LFINTOSC)
bit 2 HFIOFS: HFINTOSC Frequency Stable bit
1 = HFINTOSC frequency is stable
0 = HFINTOSC frequency is not stable
bit 1-0 SCS<1:0>: System Clock Select bit
1x = Internal oscillator block
01 = Secondary (SOSC) oscillator
00 = Primary clock (determined by FOSC<3:0> in CONFIG1H).
Note 1: Reset state depends on state of the IESO Configuration bit.

2: INTOSC source may be determined by the INTSRC bit in OSCTUNE and the MFIOSEL bit in OSCCON2.
3: Default output frequency of HFINTOSC on Reset.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 2-2: OSCCON2: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER 2
R-0/0 R-0/q U-0 R/W-0/0 R/W-0/u R/W-1/1 R-x/u R-0/0
PLLRDY SOSCRUN — MFIOSEL SOSCGO(1) PRISD MFIOFS LFIOFS
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ q = depends on condition
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown
-n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets
bit 7 PLLRDY: PLL Run Status bit

1 = System clock comes from 4xPLL
0 = System clock comes from an oscillator, other than 4xPLL
bit 6 SOSCRUN: SOSC Run Status bit
1 = System clock comes from secondary SOSC
0 = System clock comes from an oscillator, other than SOSC
bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’.
bit 4 MFIOSEL: MFINTOSC Select bit
1 = MFINTOSC is used in place of HFINTOSC frequencies of 500 kHz, 250 kHz and 31.25 kHz
0 = MFINTOSC is not used
bit 3 SOSCGO(1): Secondary Oscillator Start Control bit
1 = Secondary oscillator is enabled.
0 = Secondary oscillator is shut off if no other sources are requesting it.
bit 2 PRISD: Primary Oscillator Drive Circuit Shutdown bit
1 = Oscillator drive circuit on
0 = Oscillator drive circuit off (zero power)
bit 1 MFIOFS: MFINTOSC Frequency Stable bit
1 = MFINTOSC is stable
0 = MFINTOSC is not stable
bit 0 LFIOFS: LFINTOSC Frequency Stable bit
1 = LFINTOSC is stable
0 = LFINTOSC is not stable
Note 1: The SOSCGO bit is only reset on a POR Reset.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.3 Clock Source Modes 2.4 External Clock Modes
Clock Source modes can be classified as external or 2.4.1 OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER (OST)
internal.
When the oscillator module is configured for LP, XT or
• External Clock modes rely on external circuitry for HS modes, the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) counts
the clock source. Examples are: Clock modules 1024 oscillations from OSC1. This occurs following a
(EC mode), quartz crystal resonators or ceramic Power-on Reset (POR) and when the Power-up Timer
resonators (LP, XT and HS modes) and Resistor- (PWRT) has expired (if configured), or a wake-up from
Capacitor (RC mode) circuits. Sleep. During this time, the program counter does not
• Internal clock sources are contained internally increment and program execution is suspended. The
within the Oscillator block. The Oscillator block OST ensures that the oscillator circuit, using a quartz
has three internal oscillators: the 16 MHz High- crystal resonator or ceramic resonator, has started and
Frequency Internal Oscillator (HFINTOSC), is providing a stable system clock to the oscillator
500 kHz Medium-Frequency Internal Oscillator module. When switching between clock sources, a
(MFINTOSC) and the 31.25 kHz Low-Frequency delay is required to allow the new clock to stabilize.
Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC). These oscillator delays are shown in Table 2-2.
The system clock can be selected between external or In order to minimize latency between external oscillator
internal clock sources via the System Clock Select start-up and code execution, the Two-Speed Clock
(SCS<1:0>) bits of the OSCCON register. See Start-up mode can be selected (see Section 2.10
Section 2.9 “Clock Switching” for additional “Two-Speed Clock Start-up Mode”).
information.
TABLE 2-2: OSCILLATOR DELAY EXAMPLES

Switch From Switch To Frequency Oscillator Delay
LFINTOSC 31.25 kHz
Sleep/POR MFINTOSC 31.25 kHz to 500 kHz Oscillator Warm-Up Delay (TWARM)
HFINTOSC 31.25 kHz to 16 MHz
Sleep/POR EC, RC DC – 64 MHz 2 instruction cycles
LFINTOSC (31.25 kHz) EC, RC DC – 64 MHz 1 cycle of each
Sleep/POR LP, XT, HS 32 kHz to 40 MHz 1024 Clock Cycles (OST)
Sleep/POR 4xPLL 32 MHz to 64 MHz 1024 Clock Cycles (OST) + 2 ms
LFINTOSC (31.25 kHz) LFINTOSC 31.25 kHz to 16 MHz 1 s (approx.)
HFINTOSC
2.4.2 EC MODE FIGURE 2-5: EXTERNAL CLOCK (EC)

The External Clock (EC) mode allows an externally MODE OPERATION
generated logic level as the system clock source. When
operating in this mode, an external clock source is Clock from OSC1/CLKIN
connected to the OSC1 input and the OSC2 is available Ext. System
for general purpose I/O. Figure 2-5 shows the pin PIC® MCU
connections for EC mode.
I/O OSC2/CLKOUT(1)
The External Clock (EC) mode offers a Medium Power
(MP) and a High Power (HP) option selectable by the
FOSC<3:0> bits. The MP selections are best suited for Note 1: Alternate pin functions are listed in
external clock frequencies between 4 and 16 MHz. The Section 1.0 “Device Overview”.
HP selection is best suited for clock frequencies above
16 MHz.
The Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) is disabled when
EC mode is selected. Therefore, there is no delay in
operation after a Power-on Reset (POR) or wake-up
from Sleep. Because the PIC® MCU design is fully
static, stopping the external clock input will have the
effect of halting the device while leaving all data intact.
Upon restarting the external clock, the device will
resume operation as if no time had elapsed.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.4.3 LP, XT, HS MODES
Note 1: Quartz crystal characteristics vary according
The LP, XT and HS modes support the use of quartz to type, package and manufacturer. The
crystal resonators or ceramic resonators connected to user should consult the manufacturer data
OSC1 and OSC2 (Figure 2-6). The mode selects a low, sheets for specifications and recommended
medium or high gain setting of the internal inverter- application.
amplifier to support various resonator types and speed.
2: Always verify oscillator performance over
LP Oscillator mode selects the lowest gain setting of the the VDD and temperature range that is
internal inverter-amplifier. LP mode current consumption expected for the application.
is the least of the three modes. This mode is best suited
3: For oscillator design assistance, refer to the
to drive resonators with a low drive level specification, for
following Microchip Application Notes:
example, tuning fork type crystals.
• AN826, “Crystal Oscillator Basics and
XT Oscillator mode selects the intermediate gain
Crystal Selection for rfPIC® and PIC®
setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. XT mode
Devices” (DS00826)
current consumption is the medium of the three modes.
This mode is best suited to drive resonators with a • AN849, “Basic PIC® Oscillator Design”
medium drive level specification. (DS00849)
• AN943, “Practical PIC® Oscillator
HS Oscillator mode offers a Medium Power (MP) and a
Analysis and Design” (DS00943)
High Power (HP) option selectable by the FOSC<3:0>
bits. The MP selections are best suited for oscillator • AN949, “Making Your Oscillator Work”
frequencies between 4 and 16 MHz. The HP selection (DS00949)
has the highest gain setting of the internal inverter-
amplifier and is best suited for frequencies above FIGURE 2-7: CERAMIC RESONATOR
16 MHz. HS mode is best suited for resonators that OPERATION
require a high drive setting. (XT OR HS MODE)
FIGURE 2-6: QUARTZ CRYSTAL PIC® MCU

OPERATION (LP, XT OR
HS MODE) OSC1/CLKIN
C1 To Internal
PIC® MCU Logic
RP(3) RF(2) Sleep

OSC1/CLKIN
C1 To Internal
Logic
C2 Ceramic RS(1) OSC2/CLKOUT
Quartz
RF(2) Sleep Resonator
Crystal
Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for

OSC2/CLKOUT ceramic resonators with low drive level.
C2 RS(1)
2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode
selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M.
Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for
3: An additional parallel feedback resistor (RP)
quartz crystals with low drive level.
may be required for proper ceramic resonator
2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode operation.
selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.4.4 EXTERNAL RC MODES 2.5 Internal Clock Modes
The external Resistor-Capacitor (RC) modes support The oscillator module has three independent, internal
the use of an external RC circuit. This allows the oscillators that can be configured or selected as the
designer maximum flexibility in frequency choice while system clock source.
keeping costs to a minimum when clock accuracy is not
required. There are two modes: RC and RCIO. 1. The HFINTOSC (High-Frequency Internal
Oscillator) is factory calibrated and operates at
2.4.4.1 RC Mode 16 MHz. The frequency of the HFINTOSC can
be user-adjusted via software using the
In RC mode, the RC circuit connects to OSC1. OSC2/ OSCTUNE register (Register 2-3).
CLKOUT outputs the RC oscillator frequency divided
2. The MFINTOSC (Medium-Frequency Internal
by 4. This signal may be used to provide a clock for
Oscillator) is factory calibrated and operates
external circuitry, synchronization, calibration, test or
at 500 kHz. The frequency of the MFINTOSC
other application requirements. Figure 2-8 shows the
can be user-adjusted via software using the
external RC mode connections.
OSCTUNE register (Register 2-3).
FIGURE 2-8: EXTERNAL RC MODES 3. The LFINTOSC (Low-Frequency Internal
Oscillator) is factory calibrated and operates at
31.25 kHz. The LFINTOSC cannot be user-
VDD
PIC® MCU adjusted, but is designed to be stable over
temperature and voltage.
REXT
OSC1/CLKIN Internal The system clock speed can be selected via software
Clock using the Internal Oscillator Frequency select bits
CEXT IRCF<2:0> of the OSCCON register.
The system clock can be selected between external or
VSS
internal clock sources via the System Clock Selection
FOSC/4 or OSC2/CLKOUT(1) (SCS<1:0>) bits of the OSCCON register. See
I/O(2) Section 2.9 “Clock Switching” for more information.
2.5.1 INTOSC WITH I/O OR CLOCKOUT

Recommended values: 10 k  REXT  100 k
CEXT > 20 pF Two of the clock modes selectable with the FOSC<3:0>
bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register configure
the internal oscillator block as the primary oscillator.
Note 1: Alternate pin functions are listed in
Section 1.0 “Device Overview”.
Mode selection determines whether OSC2/CLKOUT/
2: Output depends upon RC or RCIO clock mode.
RA7 will be configured as general purpose I/O (RA7) or
FOSC/4 (CLKOUT). In both modes, OSC1/CLKIN/RA7
is configured as general purpose I/O. See
2.4.4.2 RCIO Mode Section 24.0 “Special Features of the CPU” for more
In RCIO mode, the RC circuit is connected to OSC1. information.
OSC2 becomes a general purpose I/O pin. The CLKOUT signal may be used to provide a clock for
The RC oscillator frequency is a function of the supply external circuitry, synchronization, calibration, test or
voltage, the resistor (REXT) and capacitor (CEXT) values other application requirements.
and the operating temperature. Other factors affecting
the oscillator frequency are:
• input threshold voltage variation
• component tolerances
• packaging variations in capacitance
The user also needs to take into account variation due
to tolerance of external RC components used.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.5.1.1 OSCTUNE Register as the Power-up Timer (PWRT), Watchdog Timer
(WDT), Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and
The HFINTOSC/MFINTOSC oscillator circuits are
peripherals, are not affected by the change in frequency.
factory calibrated but can be adjusted in software by
writing to the TUN<5:0> bits of the OSCTUNE register The OSCTUNE register also implements the INTSRC
(Register 2-3). and PLLEN bits, which control certain features of the
internal oscillator block.
The default value of the TUN<5:0> is ‘000000’. The
value is a 6-bit two’s complement number. The INTSRC bit allows users to select which internal
oscillator provides the clock source when the
When the OSCTUNE register is modified, the
31.25 kHz frequency option is selected. This is covered
HFINTOSC/MFINTOSC frequency will begin shifting to
in greater detail in Section 2.2.3 “Low Frequency
the new frequency. Code execution continues during this
Selection”.
shift. There is no indication that the shift has occurred.
The PLLEN bit controls the operation of the frequency
The TUN<5:0> bits in OSCTUNE do not affect the
multiplier, PLL, in internal oscillator modes. For more
LFINTOSC frequency. Operation of features that
details about the function of the PLLEN bit, see
depend on the LFINTOSC clock source frequency, such
Section 2.6.2 “PLL in HFINTOSC Modes”
REGISTER 2-3: OSCTUNE: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER

R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
INTSRC PLLEN(1) TUN<5:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
bit 7 INTSRC: Internal Oscillator Low-Frequency Source Select bit

1 = 31.25 kHz device clock derived from the MFINTOSC or HFINTOSC source
0 = 31.25 kHz device clock derived directly from LFINTOSC internal oscillator
bit 6 PLLEN: Frequency Multiplier 4xPLL for HFINTOSC Enable bit(1)
1 = PLL enabled for HFINTOSC (8 MHz and 16 MHz only)
0 = PLL disabled
bit 5-0 TUN<5:0>: Frequency Tuning bits – use to adjust MFINTOSC and HFINTOSC frequencies
011111 = Maximum frequency
011110 =
•••
000001 =
000000 = Oscillator module (HFINTOSC and MFINTOSC) are running at the factory calibrated
frequency.
111111 =
•••
100000 = Minimum frequency
Note 1: The PLLEN bit is active only when the HFINTOSC is the primary clock source (FOSC<2:0> = 100X) and
the selected frequency is 8 MHz or 16 MHz (IRCF<2:0> = 11x). Otherwise, the PLLEN bit is unavailable
and always reads ‘0’.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.5.2 LFINTOSC 2.5.4.1 Compensating with the EUSART
The Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC) is An adjustment may be required when the EUSART
a 31.25 kHz internal clock source. The LFINTOSC is begins to generate framing errors or receives data with
not tunable, but is designed to be stable across temper- errors while in Asynchronous mode. Framing errors
ature and voltage. See Section 27.0 “Electrical Char- indicate that the device clock frequency is too high; to
acteristics” for the LFINTOSC accuracy adjust for this, decrement the value in OSCTUNE to
specifications. reduce the clock frequency. On the other hand, errors
The output of the LFINTOSC can be a clock source to in data may suggest that the clock speed is too low; to
the primary clock or the INTOSC clock (see Figure 2-1). compensate, increment OSCTUNE to increase the
The LFINTOSC is also the clock source for the Power- clock frequency.
up Timer (PWRT), Watchdog Timer (WDT) and Fail-
2.5.4.2 Compensating with the Timers
Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM).
This technique compares device clock speed to some
2.5.3 FREQUENCY SELECT BITS (IRCF) reference clock. Two timers may be used; one timer is
The HFINTOSC (16 MHz) and MFINTOSC (500 MHz) clocked by the peripheral clock, while the other is
outputs connect to a divide circuit that provides clocked by a fixed reference source, such as the
frequencies of 16 MHz to 31.25 kHz. These divide Timer1 oscillator.
circuit frequencies, along with the 31.25 kHz Both timers are cleared, but the timer clocked by the
LFINTOSC output, are multiplexed to provide a single reference generates interrupts. When an interrupt
INTOSC clock output (see Figure 2-1). The IRCF<2:0> occurs, the internally clocked timer is read and both
bits of the OSCCON register, the MFIOSEL bit of the timers are cleared. If the internally clocked timer value
OSCCON2 register and the INTSRC bit of the is greater than expected, then the internal oscillator
OSCTUNE register, select the output frequency of the block is running too fast. To adjust for this, decrement
internal oscillators. One of eight frequencies can be the OSCTUNE register.
selected via software:
2.5.4.3 Compensating with the CCP Module
• 16 MHz
in Capture Mode
• 8 MHz
• 4 MHz A CCP module can use free running Timer1, Timer3 or
Timer5 clocked by the internal oscillator block and an
• 2 MHz
external event with a known period (i.e., AC power
• 1 MHz (Default after Reset) frequency). The time of the first event is captured in the
• 500 kHz (MFINTOSC or HFINTOSC) CCPRxH:CCPRxL registers and is recorded for use later.
• 250 kHz (MFINTOSC or HFINTOSC) When the second event causes a capture, the time of the
• 31 kHz (LFINTOSC, MFINTOSC or HFINTOSC) first event is subtracted from the time of the second
event. Since the period of the external event is known,
2.5.4 INTOSC FREQUENCY DRIFT the time difference between events can be calculated.
The factory calibrates the internal oscillator block outputs If the measured time is much greater than the calcu-
(HFINTOSC/MFINTOSC) for 16 MHz/500 kHz. However, lated time, the internal oscillator block is running too
this frequency may drift as VDD or temperature changes. fast; to compensate, decrement the OSCTUNE register.
It is possible to adjust the HFINTOSC/MFINTOSC fre- If the measured time is much less than the calculated
quency by modifying the value of the TUN<5:0> bits in the time, the internal oscillator block is running too slow; to
OSCTUNE register. This has no effect on the LFINTOSC compensate, increment the OSCTUNE register.
clock source frequency.
Tuning the HFINTOSC/MFINTOSC source requires
knowing when to make the adjustment, in which direc-
tion it should be made and, in some cases, how large a
change is needed. Three possible compensation tech-
niques are discussed in the following sections. However,
other techniques may be used.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.6 PLL Frequency Multiplier 2.6.2 PLL IN HFINTOSC MODES
A Phase Locked Loop (PLL) circuit is provided as an The 4x frequency multiplier can be used with the
option for users who wish to use a lower frequency internal oscillator block to produce faster device clock
oscillator circuit or to clock the device up to its highest speeds than are normally possible with the internal
rated frequency from the crystal oscillator. This may be oscillator. When enabled, the PLL multiplies the
useful for customers who are concerned with EMI due HFINTOSC by 4 to produce clock rates up to 64 MHz.
to high-frequency crystals or users who require higher Unlike external clock modes, the PLL can only be
clock speeds from an internal oscillator. controlled through software. The PLLEN control bit of
the OSCTUNE register is used to enable or disable the
2.6.1 PLL IN EXTERNAL OSCILLATOR PLL operation when the HFINTOSC is used.
MODES
The PLL can be enabled for any of the external
oscillator modes using the OSC1/OSC2 pins by either
setting the PLLCFG bit (CONFIG1H<4>), or setting the
PLLEN bit (OSCTUNE<6>). The PLL is designed for
input frequencies of 4 MHz up to 16 MHz. The PLL then
multiplies the oscillator output frequency by 4 to
produce an internal clock frequency up to 64 MHz.
Oscillator frequencies below 4 MHz should not be used
with the PLL.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.7 Effects of Power-Managed Modes 2.8 Power-up Delays
on the Various Clock Sources Power-up delays are controlled by two timers, so that
For more information about the modes discussed in this no external Reset circuitry is required for most
section see Section 3.0 “Power-Managed Modes”. A applications. The delays ensure that the device is kept
quick reference list is also available in Table 3-1. in Reset until the device power supply is stable under
normal circumstances and the primary clock is
When PRI_IDLE mode is selected, the designated
operating and stable. For additional information on
primary oscillator continues to run without interruption.
power-up delays, see Section 4.5 “Device Reset
For all other power-managed modes, the oscillator
Timers”.
using the OSC1 pin is disabled. The OSC1 pin (and
OSC2 pin, if used by the oscillator) will stop oscillating. The first timer is the Power-up Timer (PWRT), which
provides a fixed delay on power-up. It is enabled by
In secondary clock modes (SEC_RUN and
clearing (= 0) the PWRTEN Configuration bit.
SEC_IDLE), the secondary oscillator (SOSC) is
operating and providing the device clock. The The second timer is the Oscillator Start-up Timer
secondary oscillator may also run in all power- (OST), intended to keep the chip in Reset until the
managed modes if required to clock Timer1, Timer3 or crystal oscillator is stable (LP, XT and HS modes). The
Timer5. OST does this by counting 1024 oscillator cycles
before allowing the oscillator to clock the device.
In internal oscillator modes (INTOSC_RUN and
INTOSC_IDLE), the internal oscillator block provides When the PLL is enabled with external oscillator
the device clock source. The 31.25 kHz LFINTOSC modes, the device is kept in Reset for an additional
output can be used directly to provide the clock and 2 ms, following the OST delay, so the PLL can lock to
may be enabled to support various special features, the incoming clock frequency.
regardless of the power-managed mode (see There is a delay of interval TCSD, following POR, while
Section 24.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)”, the controller becomes ready to execute instructions.
Section 2.10 “Two-Speed Clock Start-up Mode” and This delay runs concurrently with any other delays.
Section 2.11 “Fail-Safe Clock Monitor” for more This may be the only delay that occurs when any of the
information on WDT, Fail-Safe Clock Monitor and Two- EC, RC or INTIOSC modes are used as the primary
Speed Start-up). The HFINTOSC and MFINTOSC clock source.
outputs may be used directly to clock the device or may
When the HFINTOSC is selected as the primary clock,
be divided down by the postscaler. The HFINTOSC
the main system clock can be delayed until the
and MFINTOSC outputs are disabled when the clock is
HFINTOSC is stable. This is user selectable by the
provided directly from the LFINTOSC output.
HFOFST bit of the CONFIG3H Configuration register.
When the Sleep mode is selected, all clock sources are When the HFOFST bit is cleared, the main system
stopped. Since all the transistor switching currents clock is delayed until the HFINTOSC is stable. When
have been stopped, Sleep mode achieves the lowest the HFOFST bit is set, the main system clock starts
current consumption of the device (only leakage immediately.
currents).
In either case, the HFIOFS bit of the OSCCON register
Enabling any on-chip feature that will operate during can be read to determine whether the HFINTOSC is
Sleep will increase the current consumed during Sleep. operating and stable.
The LFINTOSC is required to support WDT operation.
Other features may be operating that do not require a
device clock source (i.e., SSP slave, PSP, INTn pins
and others). Peripherals that may add significant
current consumption are listed in Section 27.8 “DC
Characteristics: Input/Output Characteristics,
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22”.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 2-3: OSC1 AND OSC2 PIN STATES IN SLEEP MODE
OSC Mode OSC1 Pin OSC2 Pin
RC, INTOSC with CLKOUT Floating, external resistor should pull high At logic low (clock/4 output)
RC with IO Floating, external resistor should pull high Configured as PORTA, bit 6
INTOSC with IO Configured as PORTA, bit 7 Configured as PORTA, bit 6
EC with IO Floating, pulled by external clock Configured as PORTA, bit 6
EC with CLKOUT Floating, pulled by external clock At logic low (clock/4 output)
LP, XT, HS Feedback inverter disabled at quiescent Feedback inverter disabled at quiescent
voltage level voltage level
Note: See Table 4-2 in Section 4.0 “Reset” for time-outs due to Sleep and MCLR Reset.
2.9 Clock Switching After a Reset, the SCS<1:0> bits of the OSCCON
register are always cleared.
The system clock source can be switched between
external and internal clock sources via software using Note: Any automatic clock switch, which may
the System Clock Select (SCS<1:0>) bits of the occur from Two-Speed Start-up or Fail-Safe
OSCCON register. Clock Monitor, does not update the
SCS<1:0> bits of the OSCCON register.
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices contain circuitry to pre-
The user can monitor the SOSCRUN,
vent clock “glitches” when switching between clock
MFIOFS and LFIOFS bits of the
sources. A short pause in the device clock occurs dur-
OSCCON2 register, and the HFIOFS and
ing the clock switch. The length of this pause is the sum
OSTS bits of the OSCCON register to
of two cycles of the old clock source and three to four
determine the current system clock source.
cycles of the new clock source. This formula assumes
that the new clock source is stable.
2.9.2 OSCILLATOR START-UP TIME-OUT
Clock transitions are discussed in greater detail in STATUS (OSTS) BIT
Section 3.1.2 “Entering Power-Managed Modes”.
The Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status (OSTS) bit of
2.9.1 SYSTEM CLOCK SELECT the OSCCON register indicates whether the system
(SCS<1:0>) BITS clock is running from the external clock source, as
defined by the FOSC<3:0> bits in the CONFIG1H
The System Clock Select (SCS<1:0>) bits of the Configuration register, or from the internal clock
OSCCON register select the system clock source that source. In particular, when the primary oscillator is the
is used for the CPU and peripherals. source of the primary clock, OSTS indicates that the
• When SCS<1:0> = 00, the system clock source is Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has timed out for LP,
determined by configuration of the FOSC<3:0> XT or HS modes.
bits in the CONFIG1H Configuration register.
• When SCS<1:0> = 10, the system clock source is
chosen by the internal oscillator frequency
selected by the INTSRC bit of the OSCTUNE
register, the MFIOSEL bit of the OSCCON2
register and the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON
register.
• When SCS<1:0> = 01, the system clock source is
the 32.768 kHz secondary oscillator shared with
Timer1, Timer3 and Timer5.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.9.3 CLOCK SWITCH TIMING 2.10 Two-Speed Clock Start-up Mode
When switching between one oscillator and another, Two-Speed Start-up mode provides additional power
the new oscillator may not be operating which saves savings by minimizing the latency between external
power (see Figure 2-9). If this is the case, there is a oscillator start-up and code execution. In applications
delay after the SCS<1:0> bits of the OSCCON register that make heavy use of the Sleep mode, Two-Speed
are modified before the frequency change takes place. Start-up will remove the external oscillator start-up
The OSTS and IOFS bits of the OSCCON register will time from the time spent awake and can reduce the
reflect the current active status of the external and overall power consumption of the device.
HFINTOSC oscillators. The timing of a frequency
selection is as follows: This mode allows the application to wake-up from
Sleep, perform a few instructions using the HFINTOSC
1. SCS<1:0> bits of the OSCCON register are mod- as the clock source and go back to Sleep without
ified. waiting for the primary oscillator to become stable.
2. The old clock continues to operate until the new
clock is ready. Note: Executing a SLEEP instruction will abort
the oscillator start-up time and will cause
3. Clock switch circuitry waits for two consecutive
the OSTS bit of the OSCCON register to
rising edges of the old clock after the new clock
remain clear.
ready signal goes true.
4. The system clock is held low starting at the next When the oscillator module is configured for LP, XT or
falling edge of the old clock. HS modes, the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) is
enabled (see Section 2.4.1 “Oscillator Start-up Timer
5. Clock switch circuitry waits for an additional two
(OST)”). The OST will suspend program execution until
rising edges of the new clock.
1024 oscillations are counted. Two-Speed Start-up
6. On the next falling edge of the new clock the low mode minimizes the delay in code execution by
hold on the system clock is released and new operating from the internal oscillator as the OST is
clock is switched in as the system clock. counting. When the OST count reaches 1024 and the
7. Clock switch is complete. OSTS bit of the OSCCON register is set, program
See Figure 2-1 for more details. execution switches to the external oscillator.
If the HFINTOSC is the source of both the old and new 2.10.1 TWO-SPEED START-UP MODE
frequency, there is no start-up delay before the new CONFIGURATION
frequency is active. This is because the old and new
frequencies are derived from the HFINTOSC via the Two-Speed Start-up mode is enabled when all of the
postscaler and multiplexer. following settings are configured as noted:
Start-up delay specifications are located in • Two-Speed Start-up mode is enabled when the
Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics”, under AC IESO of the CONFIG1H Configuration register is
Specifications (Oscillator Module). set.
• SCS<1:0> (of the OSCCON register) = 00.
• FOSC<2:0> bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration
register are configured for LP, XT or HS mode.
Two-Speed Start-up mode becomes active after:
• Power-on Reset (POR) and, if enabled, after
Power-up Timer (PWRT) has expired, or
• Wake-up from Sleep.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.10.2 TWO-SPEED START-UP 2.10.3 CHECKING TWO-SPEED CLOCK
SEQUENCE STATUS
1. Wake-up from Power-on Reset or Sleep. Checking the state of the OSTS bit of the OSCCON
2. Instructions begin executing by the internal register will confirm if the microcontroller is running
oscillator at the frequency set in the IRCF<2:0> from the external clock source, as defined by the
bits of the OSCCON register. FOSC<2:0> bits in CONFIG1H Configuration register,
3. OST enabled to count 1024 external clock or the internal oscillator. OSTS = 0 when the external
cycles. oscillator is not ready, which indicates that the system
is running from the internal oscillator.
4. OST timed out. External clock is ready.
5. OSTS is set.
6. Clock switch finishes according to Figure 2-9
FIGURE 2-9: CLOCK SWITCH TIMING
High Speed Low Speed
Old Clock
Start-up Time(1) Clock Sync Running
New Clock
New Clk Ready
IRCF <2:0> Select Old Select New
System Clock
Low Speed High Speed
Old Clock
Start-up Time(1) Clock Sync Running
New Clock
New Clk Ready
IRCF <2:0> Select Old Select New
System Clock
Note 1: Start-up time includes TOST (1024 TOSC) for external clocks, plus TPLL (approx. 2 ms) for HSPLL mode.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2.11 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor 2.11.3 FAIL-SAFE CONDITION CLEARING
The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the device The Fail-Safe condition is cleared by either one of the
to continue operating should the external oscillator fail. following:
The FSCM can detect oscillator failure any time after • Any Reset
the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired. The • By toggling the SCS1 bit of the OSCCON register
FSCM is enabled by setting the FCMEN bit in the
CONFIG1H Configuration register. The FSCM is Both of these conditions restart the OST. While the
applicable to all external oscillator modes (LP, XT, HS, OST is running, the device continues to operate from
EC, RC and RCIO). the INTOSC selected in OSCCON. When the OST
times out, the Fail-Safe condition is cleared and the
device automatically switches over to the external clock
FIGURE 2-10: FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM
source. The Fail-Safe condition need not be cleared
Clock Monitor before the OSCFIF flag is cleared.
Latch
External
S Q
2.11.4 RESET OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP
Clock
The FSCM is designed to detect an oscillator failure
after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired.
LFINTOSC The OST is used after waking up from Sleep and after
÷ 64 R Q any type of Reset. The OST is not used with the EC or
Oscillator
RC Clock modes so that the FSCM will be active as
31 kHz 488 Hz soon as the Reset or wake-up has completed. .
(~32 s) (~2 ms)
Note: Due to the wide range of oscillator start-up
Sample Clock Clock times, the Fail-Safe circuit is not active
Failure during oscillator start-up (i.e., after exiting
Detected Reset or Sleep). After an appropriate
amount of time, the user should check the
OSTS bit of the OSCCON register to verify
2.11.1 FAIL-SAFE DETECTION the oscillator start-up and that the system
The FSCM module detects a failed oscillator by clock switchover has successfully
comparing the external oscillator to the FSCM sample completed.
clock. The sample clock is generated by dividing the
LFINTOSC by 64 (see Figure 2-10). Inside the fail
detector block is a latch. The external clock sets the Note: When the device is configured for Fail-
latch on each falling edge of the external clock. The Safe clock monitoring in either HS, XT, or
sample clock clears the latch on each rising edge of the LS oscillator modes then the IESO config-
sample clock. A failure is detected when an entire half- uration bit should also be set so that the
cycle of the sample clock elapses before the primary clock will automatically switch from the
clock goes low. internal clock to the external oscillator
when the OST times out.
2.11.2 FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
When the external clock fails, the FSCM switches the
device clock to an internal clock source and sets the bit
flag OSCFIF of the PIR2 register. The OSCFIF flag will
generate an interrupt if the OSCFIE bit of the PIE2
register is also set. The device firmware can then take
steps to mitigate the problems that may arise from a
failed clock. The system clock will continue to be
sourced from the internal clock source until the device
firmware successfully restarts the external oscillator
and switches back to external operation. An automatic
transition back to the failed clock source will not occur.
The internal clock source chosen by the FSCM is
determined by the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON
register. This allows the internal oscillator to be
configured before a failure occurs.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 2-11: FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM
Sample Clock
System Oscillator
Clock Failure
Output
Clock Monitor Output

(Q)
Failure
Detected
OSCFIF
Test Test Test
Note: The system clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in
this example have been chosen for clarity.
TABLE 2-4: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CLOCK SOURCES

Register
Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
on Page
INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 115
IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCL1IP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 128
OSCCON IDLEN IRCF<2:0> OSTS HFIOFS SCS<1:0> 32
OSCCON2 PLLRDY SOSCRUN — MFIOSEL SOSCGO PRISD MFIOFS LFIOFS 33
OSCTUNE INTSRC PLLEN TUN<5:0> 37
PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 124
PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 119
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by Clock Sources.
TABLE 2-5: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CLOCK SOURCES

Register
on Page
CONFIG1H IESO FCMEN PRICLKEN PLLCFG FOSC<3:0> 351
CONFIG2L — — — BORV<1:0> BOREN<1:0> PWRTEN 352
CONFIG3H MCLRE — P2BMX T3CMX HFOFST CCP3MX PBADEN CCP2MX 354
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for Clock Sources.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
3.0 POWER-MANAGED MODES 3.1.1 CLOCK SOURCES
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices offer a total of seven The SCS<1:0> bits allow the selection of one of three
operating modes for more efficient power manage- clock sources for power-managed modes. They are:
ment. These modes provide a variety of options for • the primary clock, as defined by the FOSC<3:0>
selective power conservation in applications where Configuration bits
resources may be limited (i.e., battery-powered • the secondary clock (the SOSC oscillator)
devices). • the internal oscillator block
There are three categories of power-managed modes:
3.1.2 ENTERING POWER-MANAGED
• Run modes
MODES
• Idle modes
• Sleep mode Switching from one power-managed mode to another
begins by loading the OSCCON register. The
These categories define which portions of the device SCS<1:0> bits select the clock source and determine
are clocked and sometimes, what speed. The Run and which Run or Idle mode is to be used. Changing these
Idle modes may use any of the three available clock bits causes an immediate switch to the new clock
sources (primary, secondary or internal oscillator source, assuming that it is running. The switch may
block). The Sleep mode does not use a clock source. also be subject to clock transition delays. Refer to
The power-managed modes include several power- Section 2.9 “Clock Switching” for more information.
saving features offered on previous PIC® microcontroller Entry to the power-managed Idle or Sleep modes is
devices. One of the clock switching features allows the triggered by the execution of a SLEEP instruction. The
controller to use the secondary oscillator (SOSC) in actual mode that results depends on the status of the
place of the primary oscillator. Also included is the Sleep IDLEN bit.
mode, offered by all PIC® microcontroller devices, where
all device clocks are stopped. Depending on the current mode and the mode being
switched to, a change to a power-managed mode does
not always require setting all of these bits. Many
3.1 Selecting Power-Managed Modes transitions may be done by changing the oscillator select
Selecting a power-managed mode requires two bits, or changing the IDLEN bit, prior to issuing a SLEEP
decisions: instruction. If the IDLEN bit is already configured
correctly, it may only be necessary to perform a SLEEP
• Whether or not the CPU is to be clocked
instruction to switch to the desired mode.
• The selection of a clock source
The IDLEN bit (OSCCON<7>) controls CPU clocking,
while the SCS<1:0> bits (OSCCON<1:0>) select the
clock source. The individual modes, bit settings, clock
sources and affected modules are summarized in
Table 3-1.
TABLE 3-1: POWER-MANAGED MODES
OSCCON Bits Module Clocking
Mode Available Clock and Oscillator Source
IDLEN(1) SCS<1:0> CPU Peripherals
Sleep 0 N/A Off Off None – All clocks are disabled
PRI_RUN N/A 00 Clocked Clocked Primary – LP, XT, HS, RC, EC and Internal
Oscillator Block(2).
This is the normal full-power execution mode.
SEC_RUN N/A 01 Clocked Clocked Secondary – SOSC Oscillator
RC_RUN N/A 1x Clocked Clocked Internal Oscillator Block(2)
PRI_IDLE 1 00 Off Clocked Primary – LP, XT, HS, HSPLL, RC, EC
SEC_IDLE 1 01 Off Clocked Secondary – SOSC Oscillator
RC_IDLE 1 1x Off Clocked Internal Oscillator Block(2)
Note 1: IDLEN reflects its value when the SLEEP instruction is executed.
2: Includes HFINTOSC and HFINTOSC postscaler, as well as the LFINTOSC source.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
3.1.3 MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS OF THE SOSCRUN bit is cleared, the OSTS bit is set and the
SLEEP COMMAND primary clock is providing the clock. The IDLEN and
SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up and the
The power-managed mode that is invoked with the
SOSC oscillator continues to run.
SLEEP instruction is determined by the value of the
IDLEN bit at the time the instruction is executed. If
IDLEN = 0, when SLEEP is executed, the device enters 3.2.3 RC_RUN MODE
the sleep mode and all clocks stop and minimum power In RC_RUN mode, the CPU and peripherals are
is consumed. If IDLEN = 1, when SLEEP is executed, clocked from the internal oscillator block using the
the device enters the IDLE mode and the system clock INTOSC multiplexer. In this mode, the primary clock is
continues to supply a clock to the peripherals but is shut down. When using the LFINTOSC source, this
disconnected from the CPU. mode provides the best power conservation of all the
Run modes, while still executing code. It works well for
3.2 Run Modes user applications which are not highly timing-sensitive
or do not require high-speed clocks at all times. If the
In the Run modes, clocks to both the core and
primary clock source is the internal oscillator block –
peripherals are active. The difference between these
either LFINTOSC or INTOSC (MFINTOSC or
modes is the clock source.
HFINTOSC) – there are no distinguishable differences
3.2.1 PRI_RUN MODE between the PRI_RUN and RC_RUN modes during
execution. Entering or exiting RC_RUN mode,
The PRI_RUN mode is the normal, full-power however, causes a clock switch delay. Therefore, if the
execution mode of the microcontroller. This is also the primary clock source is the internal oscillator block,
default mode upon a device Reset, unless Two-Speed using RC_RUN mode is not recommended.
Start-up is enabled (see Section 2.10 “Two-Speed
Clock Start-up Mode” for details). In this mode, the This mode is entered by setting the SCS1 bit to ‘1’. To
device is operated off the oscillator defined by the maintain software compatibility with future devices, it is
FOSC<3:0> bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration recommended that the SCS0 bit also be cleared, even
register. though the bit is ignored. When the clock source is
switched to the INTOSC multiplexer (see Figure 3-1),
3.2.2 SEC_RUN MODE the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is
cleared. The IRCF<2:0> bits (OSCCON<6:4>) may be
In SEC_RUN mode, the CPU and peripherals are modified at any time to immediately change the clock
clocked from the secondary external oscillator. This speed.
gives users the option of lower power consumption
while still using a high accuracy clock source. When the IRCF bits and the INTSRC bit are all clear,
the INTOSC output (HFINTOSC/MFINTOSC) is not
SEC_RUN mode is entered by setting the SCS<1:0> enabled and the HFIOFS and MFIOFS bits will remain
bits to ‘01’. When SEC_RUN mode is active, all of the clear. There will be no indication of the current clock
following are true: source. The LFINTOSC source is providing the device
• The device clock source is switched to the SOSC clocks.
oscillator (see Figure 3-1) If the IRCF bits are changed from all clear (thus,
• The primary oscillator is shut down enabling the INTOSC output) or if INTSRC or MFIOSEL
• The SOSCRUN bit (OSCCON2<6>) is set is set, then the HFIOFS or MFIOFS bit is set after the
• The OSTS bit (OSCCON2<3>) is cleared INTOSC output becomes stable. For details, see
Table 3-2.
Clocks to the device continue while the INTOSC source
Note: The secondary external oscillator should stabilizes after an interval of TIOBST.
already be running prior to entering
SEC_RUN mode. If the SOSCGO bit or If the IRCF bits were previously at a non-zero value, or
any of the TxSOSCEN bits are not set if INTSRC was set before setting SCS1 and the
when the SCS<1:0> bits are set to ‘01’, INTOSC source was already stable, then the HFIOFS
entry to SEC_RUN mode will not occur or MFIOFS bit will remain set.
until SOSCGO bit is set and secondary
external oscillator is ready.
On transitions from SEC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN
mode, the peripherals and CPU continue to be clocked
from the SOSC oscillator, while the primary clock is
started. When the primary clock becomes ready, a
clock switch back to the primary clock occurs (see
Figure 3-2). When the clock switch is complete, the

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
On transitions from RC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN mode,
the device continues to be clocked from the INTOSC
multiplexer while the primary clock is started. When the
primary clock becomes ready, a clock switch to the pri-
mary clock occurs (see Figure 3-3). When the clock
switch is complete, the HFIOFS or MFIOFS bit is
cleared, the OSTS bit is set and the primary clock is
providing the device clock. The IDLEN and SCS bits
are not affected by the switch. The LFINTOSC source
will continue to run if either the WDT or the Fail-Safe
Clock Monitor is enabled.
FIGURE 3-1: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SEC_RUN MODE

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3
SOSCI 1 2 3 n-1 n
OSC1 Clock Transition(1)
CPU
Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program
Counter PC PC + 2 PC + 4
Note 1: Clock transition typically occurs within 2-4 TOSC.
FIGURE 3-2: TRANSITION TIMING FROM SEC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE (HSPLL)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3
SOSC
OSC1
TOST(1) TPLL(1)
1 2 n-1 n
PLL Clock
Output
Clock
Transition(2)
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program PC PC + 2 PC + 4
Counter
SCS<1:0> bits Changed OSTS bit Set
Note1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale.
2: Clock transition typically occurs within 2-4 TOSC.
TABLE 3-2: INTERNAL OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY STABILITY BITS

IRCF<2:0> INTSRC MFIOSEL INTOSC Stability Indication
000 0 x MFIOFS = 0, HFIOFS = 0 LFINTOSC
000 1 0 MFIOFS = 0, HFIOFS = 1 HFINTOSC
000 1 1 MFIOFS = 1, HFIOFS = 0 MFINTOSC
010 or 001 x 0 MFIOFS = 0, HFIOFS = 1 HFINTOSC
010 or 001 x 1 MFIOFS = 1, HFIOFS = 0 MFINTOSC

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 3-3: TRANSITION TIMING FROM RC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3
INTOSC
Multiplexer
OSC1
TOST(1) TPLL(1)
1 2 n-1 n
PLL Clock
Output
Clock
Transition(2)
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program PC PC + 2 PC + 4
Counter
SCS<1:0> bits Changed OSTS bit Set
2: Clock transition typically occurs within 2-4 TOSC.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
3.3 Sleep Mode 3.4 Idle Modes
The Power-Managed Sleep mode in the PIC18(L)F2X/ The Idle modes allow the controller’s CPU to be
4XK22 devices is identical to the legacy Sleep mode selectively shut down while the peripherals continue to
offered in all other PIC® microcontroller devices. It is operate. Selecting a particular Idle mode allows users
entered by clearing the IDLEN bit of the OSCCON to further manage power consumption.
register and executing the SLEEP instruction. This shuts If the IDLEN bit is set to a ‘1’ when a SLEEP instruction is
down the selected oscillator (Figure 3-4) and all clock executed, the peripherals will be clocked from the clock
source status bits are cleared. source selected by the SCS<1:0> bits; however, the CPU
Entering the Sleep mode from either Run or Idle mode will not be clocked. The clock source status bits are not
does not require a clock switch. This is because no affected. Setting IDLEN and executing a SLEEP instruc-
clocks are needed once the controller has entered tion provides a quick method of switching from a given
Sleep. If the WDT is selected, the LFINTOSC source Run mode to its corresponding Idle mode.
will continue to operate. If the SOSC oscillator is If the WDT is selected, the LFINTOSC source will con-
enabled, it will also continue to run. tinue to operate. If the SOSC oscillator is enabled, it will
When a wake event occurs in Sleep mode (by interrupt, also continue to run.
Reset or WDT time-out), the device will not be clocked Since the CPU is not executing instructions, the only
until the clock source selected by the SCS<1:0> bits exits from any of the Idle modes are by interrupt, WDT
becomes ready (see Figure 3-5), or it will be clocked time-out, or a Reset. When a wake event occurs, CPU
from the internal oscillator block if either the Two-Speed execution is delayed by an interval of TCSD while it
Start-up or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor are enabled becomes ready to execute code. When the CPU
(see Section 24.0 “Special Features of the CPU”). In begins executing code, it resumes with the same clock
either case, the OSTS bit is set when the primary clock source for the current Idle mode. For example, when
is providing the device clocks. The IDLEN and SCS bits waking from RC_IDLE mode, the internal oscillator
are not affected by the wake-up. block will clock the CPU and peripherals (in other
words, RC_RUN mode). The IDLEN and SCS bits are
not affected by the wake-up.
While in any Idle mode or the Sleep mode, a WDT
time-out will result in a WDT wake-up to the Run mode
currently specified by the SCS<1:0> bits.
FIGURE 3-4: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SLEEP MODE

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
OSC1
CPU
Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Sleep
Program
Counter PC PC + 2

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 3-5: TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM SLEEP (HSPLL)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
OSC1
TOST(1) TPLL(1)
PLL Clock
Output
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program PC PC + 2 PC + 4 PC + 6
Counter
Wake Event OSTS bit set
3.4.1 PRI_IDLE MODE 3.4.2 SEC_IDLE MODE

This mode is unique among the three low-power Idle In SEC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the
modes, in that it does not disable the primary device peripherals continue to be clocked from the SOSC
clock. For timing sensitive applications, this allows for oscillator. This mode is entered from SEC_RUN by set-
the fastest resumption of device operation with its more ting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If
accurate primary clock source, since the clock source the device is in another Run mode, set the IDLEN bit
does not have to “warm-up” or transition from another first, then set the SCS<1:0> bits to ‘01’ and execute
oscillator. SLEEP. When the clock source is switched to the SOSC
PRI_IDLE mode is entered from PRI_RUN mode by oscillator, the primary oscillator is shut down, the OSTS
setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruc- bit is cleared and the SOSCRUN bit is set.
tion. If the device is in another Run mode, set IDLEN When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to
first, then clear the SCS bits and execute SLEEP. be clocked from the SOSC oscillator. After an interval
Although the CPU is disabled, the peripherals continue of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins exe-
to be clocked from the primary clock source specified cuting code being clocked by the SOSC oscillator. The
by the FOSC<3:0> Configuration bits. The OSTS bit IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up;
remains set (see Figure 3-6). the SOSC oscillator continues to run (see Figure 3-7).
When a wake event occurs, the CPU is clocked from the Note: The SOSC oscillator should already be
primary clock source. A delay of interval TCSD is running prior to entering SEC_IDLE mode.
required between the wake event and when code At least one of the secondary oscillator
execution starts. This is required to allow the CPU to enable bits (SOSCGO, T1SOSCEN,
become ready to execute instructions. After the wake- T3SOSCEN or T5SOSCEN) must be set
up, the OSTS bit remains set. The IDLEN and SCS bits when the SLEEP instruction is executed.
are not affected by the wake-up (see Figure 3-7). Otherwise, the main system clock will con-
tinue to operate in the previously selected
mode and the corresponding IDLE mode
will be entered (i.e., PRI_IDLE or
RC_IDLE).
FIGURE 3-6: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO IDLE MODE
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
OSC1
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program PC PC + 2
Counter

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 3-7: TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM IDLE TO RUN MODE
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
OSC1
TCSD
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program PC
Counter
Wake Event
3.4.3 RC_IDLE MODE Clocks to the peripherals continue while the

HFINTOSC source stabilizes. The HFIOFS and
In RC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the periph-
MFIOFS bits will remain set if the IRCF bits were
erals continue to be clocked from the internal oscillator
previously set at a non-zero value or if INTSRC was set
block from the HFINTOSC multiplexer output. This
before the SLEEP instruction was executed and the
mode allows for controllable power conservation during
HFINTOSC source was already stable. If the IRCF bits
Idle periods.
and INTSRC are all clear, the HFINTOSC output will
From RC_RUN, this mode is entered by setting the not be enabled, the HFIOFS and MFIOFS bits will
IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the remain clear and there will be no indication of the
device is in another Run mode, first set IDLEN, then set current clock source.
the SCS1 bit and execute SLEEP. It is recommended
When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to
that SCS0 also be cleared, although its value is
be clocked from the HFINTOSC multiplexer output.
ignored, to maintain software compatibility with future
After a delay of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU
devices. The HFINTOSC multiplexer may be used to
begins executing code being clocked by the
select a higher clock frequency by modifying the IRCF
HFINTOSC multiplexer. The IDLEN and SCS bits are
bits before executing the SLEEP instruction. When the
not affected by the wake-up. The LFINTOSC source
clock source is switched to the HFINTOSC multiplexer,
will continue to run if either the WDT or the Fail-Safe
the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is
Clock Monitor is enabled.
cleared.
If the IRCF bits are set to any non-zero value, or either
the INTSRC or MFIOSEL bits are set, the HFINTOSC
output is enabled. Either the HFIOFS or the MFIOFS
bits become set, after the HFINTOSC output stabilizes
after an interval of TIOBST. For information on the
HFIOFS and MFIOFS bits, see Table 3-2.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
3.5 Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes 3.5.2 EXIT BY WDT TIME-OUT
An exit from Sleep mode or any of the Idle modes is A WDT time-out will cause different actions depending
triggered by any one of the following: on which power-managed mode the device is in when
the time-out occurs.
• an interrupt
If the device is not executing code (all Idle modes and
• a Reset
Sleep mode), the time-out will result in an exit from the
• a Watchdog Time-out power-managed mode (see Section 3.2 “Run
This section discusses the triggers that cause exits Modes” and Section 3.3 “Sleep Mode”). If the device
from power-managed modes. The clocking subsystem is executing code (all Run modes), the time-out will
actions are discussed in each of the power-managed result in a WDT Reset (see Section 24.2 “Watchdog
modes (see Section 3.2 “Run Modes”, Section 3.3 Timer (WDT)”).
“Sleep Mode” and Section 3.4 “Idle Modes”). The WDT timer and postscaler are cleared by any one
of the following:
3.5.1 EXIT BY INTERRUPT
• executing a SLEEP instruction
Any of the available interrupt sources can cause the
device to exit from an Idle mode or the Sleep mode to • executing a CLRWDT instruction
a Run mode. To enable this functionality, an interrupt • the loss of the currently selected clock source
source must be enabled by setting its enable bit in one when the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled
of the INTCON or PIE registers. The exit sequence is • modifying the IRCF bits in the OSCCON register
initiated when the corresponding interrupt flag bit is set. when the internal oscillator block is the device
The instruction immediately following the SLEEP clock source
instruction is executed on all exits by interrupt from Idle
3.5.3 EXIT BY RESET
or Sleep modes. Code execution then branches to the
interrupt vector if the GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON Exiting Sleep and Idle modes by Reset causes code
register is set, otherwise code execution continues execution to restart at address 0. See Section 4.0
without branching (see Section 9.0 “Interrupts”). “Reset” for more details.
A fixed delay of interval TCSD following the wake event The exit delay time from Reset to the start of code
is required when leaving Sleep and Idle modes. This execution depends on both the clock sources before
delay is required for the CPU to prepare for execution. and after the wake-up and the type of oscillator. Exit
Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle delays are summarized in Table 3-3.
following this delay.
3.5.4 EXIT WITHOUT AN OSCILLATOR
START-UP DELAY
Certain exits from power-managed modes do not
invoke the OST at all. There are two cases:
• PRI_IDLE mode, where the primary clock source
is not stopped and
• the primary clock source is not any of the LP, XT,
HS or HSPLL modes.
In these instances, the primary clock source either
does not require an oscillator start-up delay since it is
already running (PRI_IDLE), or normally does not
require an oscillator start-up delay (RC, EC, INTOSC,
and INTOSCIO modes). However, a fixed delay of
interval TCSD following the wake event is still required
when leaving Sleep and Idle modes to allow the CPU
to prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes
on the first clock cycle following this delay.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 3-3: EXIT DELAY ON WAKE-UP BY RESET FROM SLEEP MODE OR ANY IDLE MODE
(BY CLOCK SOURCES)
Clock Source Clock Source Clock Ready Status
Exit Delay
before Wake-up after Wake-up Bit (OSCCON)
LP, XT, HS
Primary Device Clock HSPLL OSTS
TCSD(1)
(PRI_IDLE mode) EC, RC
HFINTOSC(2) IOSF
LP, XT, HS TOST(3)
HSPLL TOST + tPLL(3) OSTS
T1OSC or LFINTOSC(1)
EC, RC TCSD(1)
HFINTOSC(1) TIOBST(4) IOSF
LP, XT, HS TOST(4)
HSPLL TOST + tPLL(3) OSTS
HFINTOSC(2)
EC, RC TCSD(1)
HFINTOSC(1) None IOSF
LP, XT, HS TOST(3)
None HSPLL TOST + tPLL(3) OSTS
(Sleep mode) EC, RC TCSD(1)
HFINTOSC(1) TIOBST(4) IOSF
Note 1: TCSD is a required delay when waking from Sleep and all Idle modes and runs concurrently with any other
required delays (see Section 3.4 “Idle Modes”). On Reset, HFINTOSC defaults to 1 MHz.
2: Includes both the HFINTOSC 16 MHz source and postscaler derived frequencies.
3: TOST is the Oscillator Start-up Timer. tPLL is the PLL Lock-out Timer.
4: Execution continues during the HFINTOSC stabilization period, TIOBST.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
3.6 Selective Peripheral Module Setting the PMD bit for a module disables all clock
Control sources to that module, reducing its power
consumption to an absolute minimum. In this state, the
Idle mode allows users to substantially reduce power control and STATUS registers associated with the
consumption by stopping the CPU clock. Even so, peripheral are also disabled, so writes to these
peripheral modules still remain clocked, and thus, con- registers have no effect and read values are invalid.
sume power. There may be cases where the applica-
tion needs what IDLE mode does not provide: the
allocation of power resources to the CPU processing
with minimal power consumption from the peripherals.
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 family devices address this
requirement by allowing peripheral modules to be
selectively disabled, reducing or eliminating their
power consumption. This can be done with control bits
in the Peripheral Module Disable (PMD) registers.
These bits generically named XXXMD are located in
control registers PMD0, PMD1 or PMD2.
REGISTER 3-1: PMD0: PERIPHERAL MODULE DISABLE REGISTER 0
UART2MD UART1MD TMR6MD TMR5MD TMR4MD TMR3MD TMR2MD TMR1MD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 UART2MD: UART2 Peripheral Module Disable Control bit

1 = Module is disabled, Clock Source is disconnected, module does not draw digital power
0 = Module is enabled, Clock Source is connected, module draws digital power
bit 6 UART1MD: UART1 Peripheral Module Disable Control bit
bit 5 TMR6MD: Timer6 Peripheral Module Disable Control bit

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
MSSP2MD MSSP1MD — CCP5MD CCP4MD CCP3MD CCP2MD CCP1MD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 MSSP2MD: MSSP2 Peripheral Module Disable Control bit

bit 6 MSSP1MD: MSSP1 Peripheral Module Disable Control bit
bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4 CCP5MD: CCP5 Peripheral Module Disable Control bit

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — — CTMUMD CMP2MD CMP1MD ADCMD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’

bit 3 CTMUMD: CTMU Peripheral Module Disable Control bit
bit 2 CMP2MD: Comparator C2 Peripheral Module Disable Control bit
bit 1 CMP1MD: Comparator C1 Peripheral Module Disable Control bit
bit 0 ADCMD: ADC Peripheral Module Disable Control bit

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
4.0 RESET A simplified block diagram of the On-Chip Reset Circuit
is shown in Figure 4-1.
The PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices differentiate between
various kinds of Reset: 4.1 RCON Register
a) Power-on Reset (POR)
Device Reset events are tracked through the RCON
b) MCLR Reset during normal operation
register (Register 4-1). The lower five bits of the
c) MCLR Reset during power-managed modes register indicate that a specific Reset event has
d) Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset (during occurred. In most cases, these bits can only be cleared
execution) by the event and must be set by the application after
e) Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR) the event. The state of these flag bits, taken together,
f) RESET Instruction can be read to indicate the type of Reset that just
occurred. This is described in more detail in
g) Stack Full Reset
Section 4.6 “Reset State of Registers”.
h) Stack Underflow Reset
The RCON register also has control bits for setting
This section discusses Resets generated by MCLR, interrupt priority (IPEN) and software control of the
POR and BOR and covers the operation of the various BOR (SBOREN). Interrupt priority is discussed in
start-up timers. Stack Reset events are covered in Section 9.0 “Interrupts”. BOR is covered in
Section 5.1.2.4 “Stack Full and Underflow Resets”. Section 4.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”.
WDT Resets are covered in Section 24.2 “Watchdog
Timer (WDT)”.
FIGURE 4-1: SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT

RESET
Instruction
Stack Stack Full/Underflow Reset

Pointer
External Reset
MCLRE
MCLR
( )_IDLE
Sleep
WDT
Time-out
VDD POR
Detect
VDD
Brown-out
Reset
BOREN S
OST/PWRT
OST(2) 1024 Cycles
Chip_Reset
10-bit Ripple Counter R Q
OSC1
32 s
PWRT(2) 65.5 ms
LFINTOSC 11-bit Ripple Counter
Enable PWRT
Enable OST(1)
Note 1: See Table for time-out situations.

2: PWRT and OST counters are reset by POR and BOR. See Sections 4.3 and 4.4.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 4-1: RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/0 R/W-q/u U-0 R/W-1/q R-1/q R-1/q R/W-q/u R/W-0/q
(1) (2)
IPEN SBOREN — RI TO PD POR BOR
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets
x = Bit is unknown u = unchanged q = depends on condition
bit 7 IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit

1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts
0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16CXXX Compatibility mode)
bit 6 SBOREN: BOR Software Enable bit(1)
If BOREN<1:0> = 01:
1 = BOR is enabled
0 = BOR is disabled
If BOREN<1:0> = 00, 10 or 11:
Bit is disabled and read as ‘0’.
bit 4 RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit
1 = The RESET instruction was not executed (set by firmware or Power-on Reset)
0 = The RESET instruction was executed causing a device Reset (must be set in firmware after a
code-executed Reset occurs)
bit 3 TO: Watchdog Time-out Flag bit
1 = Set by power-up, CLRWDT instruction or SLEEP instruction
0 = A WDT time-out occurred
bit 2 PD: Power-down Detection Flag bit
1 = Set by power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction
0 = Set by execution of the SLEEP instruction
bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit(2)
1 = No Power-on Reset occurred
0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs)
bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit(3)
1 = A Brown-out Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only)
0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set by firmware after a POR or Brown-out Reset occurs)
Note 1: When CONFIG2L[2:1] = 01, then the SBOREN Reset state is ‘1’; otherwise, it is ‘0’.
2: The actual Reset value of POR is determined by the type of device Reset. See the notes following this
register and Section 4.6 “Reset State of Registers” for additional information.
3: See Table .
Note 1: Brown-out Reset is indicated when BOR is ‘0’ and POR is ‘1’ (assuming that both POR and BOR were set
to ‘1’ by firmware immediately after POR).
2: It is recommended that the POR bit be set after a Power-on Reset has been detected so that subsequent
Power-on Resets may be detected.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
4.2 Master Clear (MCLR) FIGURE 4-2: EXTERNAL POWER-ON
RESET CIRCUIT (FOR
The MCLR pin provides a method for triggering an
SLOW VDD POWER-UP)
external Reset of the device. A Reset is generated by
holding the pin low. These devices have a noise filter in
the MCLR Reset path which detects and ignores small VDD VDD
pulses. An internal weak pull-up is enabled when the
pin is configured as the MCLR input. PIC® MCU
D R
The MCLR pin is not driven low by any internal Resets, R1
including the WDT. MCLR
In PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices, the MCLR input can C
be disabled with the MCLRE Configuration bit. When
MCLR is disabled, the pin becomes a digital input. See
Section 10.6 “PORTE Registers” for more
Note 1: External Power-on Reset circuit is required
information.
only if the VDD power-up slope is too slow.
The diode D helps discharge the capacitor
4.3 Power-on Reset (POR) quickly when VDD powers down.
A Power-on Reset pulse is generated on-chip 2: 15 k < R < 40 k is recommended to make

sure that the voltage drop across R does not
whenever VDD rises above a certain threshold. This
violate the device’s electrical specification.
allows the device to start in the initialized state when
VDD is adequate for operation. 3: R1  1 k will limit any current flowing into
MCLR from external capacitor C, in the event
To take advantage of the POR circuitry either leave the of MCLR/VPP pin breakdown, due to
pin floating, or tie the MCLR pin through a resistor to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or Electrical
VDD. This will eliminate external RC components Overstress (EOS).
usually needed to create a Power-on Reset delay. A
minimum rise rate for VDD is specified. For a slow rise
time, see Figure 4-2.
When the device starts normal operation (i.e., exits the
Reset condition), device operating parameters (volt-
age, frequency, temperature, etc.) must be met to
ensure proper operation. If these conditions are not
met, the device must be held in Reset until the operat-
ing conditions are met.
POR events are captured by the POR bit of the RCON
register. The state of the bit is set to ‘0’ whenever a
POR occurs; it does not change for any other Reset
event. POR is not reset to ‘1’ by any hardware event.
To capture multiple events, the user must manually set
the bit to ‘1’ by software following any POR.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
4.4 Brown-out Reset (BOR) 4.4.2 SOFTWARE ENABLED BOR
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices implement a BOR circuit When BOREN<1:0> = 01, the BOR can be enabled or
that provides the user with a number of configuration and disabled by the user in software. This is done with the
power-saving options. The BOR is controlled by the SBOREN control bit of the RCON register. Setting
BORV<1:0> and BOREN<1:0> bits of the CONFIG2L SBOREN enables the BOR to function as previously
Configuration register. There are a total of four BOR described. Clearing SBOREN disables the BOR
configurations which are summarized in Table 4-1. entirely. The SBOREN bit operates only in this mode;
otherwise it is read as ‘0’.
The BOR threshold is set by the BORV<1:0> bits. If
BOR is enabled (any values of BOREN<1:0>, except Placing the BOR under software control gives the user
‘00’), any drop of VDD below VBOR for greater than the additional flexibility of tailoring the application to the
TBOR will reset the device. A Reset may or may not environment without having to reprogram the device to
occur if VDD falls below VBOR for less than TBOR. The change BOR configuration. It also allows the user to
chip will remain in Brown-out Reset until VDD rises tailor device power consumption in software by
above VBOR. eliminating the incremental current that the BOR
consumes. While the BOR current is typically very small,
If the Power-up Timer is enabled, it will be invoked after it may have some impact in low-power applications.
VDD rises above VBOR; it then will keep the chip in
Reset for an additional time delay, TPWRT. If VDD drops Note: Even when BOR is under software control,
below VBOR while the Power-up Timer is running, the the BOR Reset voltage level is still set by
chip will go back into a Brown-out Reset and the the BORV<1:0> Configuration bits. It
Power-up Timer will be initialized. Once VDD rises cannot be changed by software.
above VBOR, the Power-up Timer will execute the
additional time delay. 4.4.3 DISABLING BOR IN SLEEP MODE
BOR and the Power-on Timer (PWRT) are When BOREN<1:0> = 10, the BOR remains under
independently configured. Enabling BOR Reset does hardware control and operates as previously
not automatically enable the PWRT. described. Whenever the device enters Sleep mode,
however, the BOR is automatically disabled. When the
The BOR circuit has an output that feeds into the POR
device returns to any other operating mode, BOR is
circuit and rearms the POR within the operating range
automatically re-enabled.
of the BOR. This early rearming of the POR ensures
that the device will remain in Reset in the event that VDD This mode allows for applications to recover from
falls below the operating range of the BOR circuitry. brown-out situations, while actively executing code,
when the device requires BOR protection the most. At
4.4.1 DETECTING BOR the same time, it saves additional power in Sleep mode
When BOR is enabled, the BOR bit always resets to ‘0’ by eliminating the small incremental BOR current.
on any BOR or POR event. This makes it difficult to
4.4.4 MINIMUM BOR ENABLE TIME
determine if a BOR event has occurred just by reading
the state of BOR alone. A more reliable method is to Enabling the BOR also enables the Fixed Voltage
simultaneously check the state of both POR and BOR. Reference (FVR) when no other peripheral requiring the
This assumes that the POR and BOR bits are reset to FVR is active. The BOR becomes active only after the
‘1’ by software immediately after any POR event. If FVR stabilizes. Therefore, to ensure BOR protection,
BOR is ‘0’ while POR is ‘1’, it can be reliably assumed the FVR settling time must be considered when
that a BOR event has occurred. enabling the BOR in software or when the BOR is
automatically enabled after waking from Sleep. If the
BOR is disabled, in software or by reentering Sleep
before the FVR stabilizes, the BOR circuit will not sense
a BOR condition. The FVRST bit of the VREFCON0
register can be used to determine FVR stability.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 4-1: BOR CONFIGURATIONS

BOR Configuration Status of
SBOREN BOR Operation
BOREN1 BOREN0 (RCON<6>)
0 0 Unavailable BOR disabled; must be enabled by reprogramming the Configuration bits.
0 1 Available BOR enabled by software; operation controlled by SBOREN.
1 0 Unavailable BOR enabled by hardware in Run and Idle modes, disabled during
Sleep mode.
1 1 Unavailable BOR enabled by hardware; must be disabled by reprogramming the Configuration bits.
4.5 Device Reset Timers 4.5.3 PLL LOCK TIME-OUT

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices incorporate three With the PLL enabled, the time-out sequence following a
separate on-chip timers that help regulate the Power- Power-on Reset is slightly different from other oscillator
on Reset process. Their main function is to ensure that modes. A separate timer is used to provide a fixed time-
the device clock is stable before code is executed. out that is sufficient for the PLL to lock to the main
These timers are: oscillator frequency. This PLL lock time-out (TPLL) is
typically 2 ms and follows the oscillator start-up time-out.
• Power-up Timer (PWRT)
• Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) 4.5.4 TIME-OUT SEQUENCE
• PLL Lock Time-out On power-up, the time-out sequence is as follows:
4.5.1 POWER-UP TIMER (PWRT) 1. After the POR pulse has cleared, PWRT time-out
is invoked (if enabled).
The Power-up Timer (PWRT) of PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
2. Then, the OST is activated.
devices is an 11-bit counter which uses the
LFINTOSC source as the clock input. This yields an The total time-out will vary based on oscillator
approximate time interval of 2048 x 32 s = 65.6 ms. configuration and the status of the PWRT. Figure 4-3,
While the PWRT is counting, the device is held in Figure 4-4, Figure 4-5, Figure 4-6 and Figure 4-7 all
Reset. depict time-out sequences on power-up, with the
Power-up Timer enabled and the device operating in
The power-up time delay depends on the LFINTOSC
HS Oscillator mode. Figures 4-3 through 4-6 also
clock and will vary from chip-to-chip due to temperature
apply to devices operating in XT or LP modes. For
and process variation.
devices in RC mode and with the PWRT disabled, on
The PWRT is enabled by clearing the PWRTEN the other hand, there will be no time-out at all.
Configuration bit.
Since the time-outs occur from the POR pulse, if MCLR
4.5.2 OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER is kept low long enough, all time-outs will expire, after
which, bringing MCLR high will allow program
(OST)
execution to begin immediately (Figure 4-5). This is
The Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) provides a 1024 useful for testing purposes or to synchronize more than
oscillator cycle (from OSC1 input) delay after the one PIC® MCU device operating in parallel.
PWRT delay is over. This ensures that the crystal
oscillator or resonator has started and stabilized.
The OST time-out is invoked only for XT, LP and HS
modes and only on Power-on Reset, or on exit from all
power-managed modes that stop the external oscillator.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 4-2: TIME-OUT IN VARIOUS SITUATIONS
Oscillator Power-up(2) and Brown-out Exit from

Configuration PWRTEN = 0 PWRTEN = 1 Power-Managed Mode
(1)
HSPLL 66 ms + 1024 TOSC + 2 1024 TOSC + 2 ms(2) 1024 TOSC + 2 ms(2)
ms(2)
HS, XT, LP 66 ms(1) + 1024 TOSC 1024 TOSC 1024 TOSC
(1)
EC, ECIO 66 ms — —
RC, RCIO 66 ms(1) — —
INTIO1, INTIO2 66 ms(1) — —
Note 1: 66 ms (65.5 ms) is the nominal Power-up Timer (PWRT) delay.
2: 2 ms is the nominal time required for the PLL to lock.
FIGURE 4-3: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE < TPWRT)
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET
FIGURE 4-4: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 1
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 4-5: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 2
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET
FIGURE 4-6: SLOW RISE TIME (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE > TPWRT)
5V
VDD 0V
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 4-7: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POR W/PLL ENABLED (MCLR TIED TO VDD)
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
OST TIME-OUT TPLL
PLL TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET
Note: TOST = 1024 clock cycles.

TPLL  2 ms max. First three stages of the PWRT timer.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
4.6 Reset State of Registers Table 5-2 describes the Reset states for all of the
Special Function Registers. The table identifies
Some registers are unaffected by a Reset. Their status differences between Power-On Reset (POR)/Brown-
is unknown on POR and unchanged by all other Out Reset (BOR) and all other Resets, (i.e., Master
Resets. All other registers are forced to a “Reset state” Clear, WDT Resets, STKFUL, STKUNF, etc.).
depending on the type of Reset that occurred. Additionally, the table identifies register bits that are
Most registers are not affected by a WDT wake-up, changed when the device receives a wake-up from
since this is viewed as the resumption of normal WDT or other interrupts.
operation. Status bits from the RCON register, RI, TO,
PD, POR and BOR, are set or cleared differently in
different Reset situations, as indicated in Table 4-3.
These bits are used by software to determine the
nature of the Reset.
TABLE 4-3: STATUS BITS, THEIR SIGNIFICANCE AND THE INITIALIZATION CONDITION
FOR RCON REGISTER
Program RCON Register STKPTR Register
Condition
Counter SBOREN RI TO PD POR BOR STKFUL STKUNF
Power-on Reset 0000h 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
RESET Instruction 0000h u(2) 0 u u u u u u
Brown-out Reset 0000h u(2) 1 1 1 u 0 u u
MCLR during Power-Managed 0000h u(2) u 1 u u u u u
Run Modes
MCLR during Power-Managed 0000h u(2) u 1 0 u u u u
Idle Modes and Sleep Mode
WDT Time-out during Full Power 0000h u(2) u 0 u u u u u
or Power-Managed Run Mode
MCLR during Full Power 0000h u(2) u u u u u u u
Execution
Stack Full Reset (STVREN = 1) 0000h u(2) u u u u u 1 u
(2)
Stack Underflow Reset 0000h u u u u u u u 1
(STVREN = 1)
Stack Underflow Error (not an 0000h u(2) u u u u u u 1
actual Reset, STVREN = 0)
WDT Time-out during PC + 2 u(2) u 0 0 u u u u
Power-Managed Idle or Sleep
Modes
Interrupt Exit from PC + 2(1) u(2) u u 0 u u u u
Power-Managed Modes
Legend: u = unchanged
Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEH or GIEL bits are set, the PC is loaded with the
interrupt vector (008h or 0018h).
2: Reset state is ‘1’ for SBOREN and unchanged for all other Resets when software BOR is enabled
(BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01). Otherwise, the Reset state is ‘0’.
TABLE 4-4: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH RESETS

Register
on Page
RCON IPEN SBOREN — RI TO PD POR BOR 60
STKPTR STKFUL STKUNF — STKPTR<4:0> 72
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for Resets.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 4-5: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH RESETS

Register
on Page
CONFIG2L — — — BORV<1:0> BOREN<1:0> PWRTEN 352
CONFIG2H — — WDPS<3:0> WDTEN<1:0> 353
CONFIG4L DEBUG XINST — — — LVP — STRVEN 355
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for Resets.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION 5.1 Program Memory Organization
There are three types of memory in PIC18 Enhanced PIC18 microcontrollers implement a 21-bit program
microcontroller devices: counter, which is capable of addressing a 2-Mbyte
program memory space. Accessing a location between
• Program Memory
the upper boundary of the physically implemented
• Data RAM memory and the 2-Mbyte address will return all ‘0’s (a
• Data EEPROM NOP instruction).
As Harvard architecture devices, the data and program This family of devices contain the following:
memories use separate buses; this allows for
• PIC18(L)F23K22, PIC18(L)F43K22: 8 Kbytes of
concurrent access of the two memory spaces. The data
Flash Memory, up to 4,096 single-word instructions
EEPROM, for practical purposes, can be regarded as
a peripheral device, since it is addressed and accessed • PIC18(L)F24K22, PIC18(L)F44K22: 16 Kbytes of
through a set of control registers. Flash Memory, up to 8,192 single-word instructions
• PIC18(L)F25K22, PIC18(L)F45K22: 32 Kbytes of
Additional detailed information on the operation of the
Flash Memory, up to 16,384 single-word instruc-
Flash program memory is provided in Section 6.0
tions
“Flash Program Memory”. Data EEPROM is
discussed separately in Section 7.0 “Data EEPROM • PIC18(L)F26K22, PIC18(L)F46K22: 64 Kbytes of
Memory”. Flash Memory, up to 37,768 single-word
instructions
PIC18 devices have two interrupt vectors. The Reset
vector address is at 0000h and the interrupt vector
addresses are at 0008h and 0018h.
The program memory map for PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
devices is shown in Figure 5-1. Memory block details
are shown in Figure 20-2.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 5-1: PROGRAM MEMORY MAP AND STACK FOR PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 DEVICES
PC<20:0>
CALL,RCALL,RETURN 21
RETFIE,RETLW
Stack Level 1



Stack Level 31
Reset Vector 0000h
High Priority Interrupt Vector 0008h
Low Priority Interrupt Vector 0018h

On-Chip
Program Memory
1FFFh On-Chip
Program Memory
2000h
3FFFh On-Chip
PIC18(L)F23K22 Program Memory
4000h
PIC18(L)F43K22
User Memory Space

PIC18(L)F24K22 On-Chip
Program Memory
PIC18(L)F44K22
7FFFh
8000h
PIC18(L)F25K22
PIC18(L)F45K22
FFFFh
10000h
Read ‘0’ Read ‘0’ Read ‘0’
PIC18(L)F26K22
PIC18(L)F46K22
Read ‘0’
1FFFFFh
200000h
5.1.1 PROGRAM COUNTER The CALL, RCALL, GOTO and program branch
instructions write to the program counter directly. For
The Program Counter (PC) specifies the address of the
these instructions, the contents of PCLATH and
instruction to fetch for execution. The PC is 21 bits wide
PCLATU are not transferred to the program counter.
and is contained in three separate 8-bit registers. The
low byte, known as the PCL register, is both readable
5.1.2 RETURN ADDRESS STACK
and writable. The high byte, or PCH register, contains
the PC<15:8> bits; it is not directly readable or writable. The return address stack allows any combination of up
Updates to the PCH register are performed through the to 31 program calls and interrupts to occur. The PC is
PCLATH register. The upper byte is called PCU. This pushed onto the stack when a CALL or RCALL
register contains the PC<20:16> bits; it is also not instruction is executed or an interrupt is Acknowledged.
directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCU The PC value is pulled off the stack on a RETURN,
register are performed through the PCLATU register. RETLW or a RETFIE instruction. PCLATU and PCLATH
are not affected by any of the RETURN or CALL
The contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are transferred
instructions.
to the program counter by any operation that writes
PCL. Similarly, the upper two bytes of the program The stack operates as a 31-word by 21-bit RAM and a
counter are transferred to PCLATH and PCLATU by an 5-bit Stack Pointer, STKPTR. The stack space is not
operation that reads PCL. This is useful for computed part of either program or data space. The Stack Pointer
offsets to the PC (see Section 5.1.4.1 “Computed is readable and writable and the address on the top of
GOTO”). the stack is readable and writable through the Top-of-
Stack (TOS) Special File Registers. Data can also be
The PC addresses bytes in the program memory. To
pushed to, or popped from the stack, using these
prevent the PC from becoming misaligned with word
registers.
instructions, the Least Significant bit of PCL is fixed to
a value of ‘0’. The PC increments by 2 to address
sequential instructions in the program memory.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
A CALL type instruction causes a push onto the stack; 5.1.2.1 Top-of-Stack Access
the Stack Pointer is first incremented and the location
Only the top of the return address stack (TOS) is readable
pointed to by the Stack Pointer is written with the
and writable. A set of three registers, TOSU:TOSH:TOSL,
contents of the PC (already pointing to the instruction
hold the contents of the stack location pointed to by the
following the CALL). A RETURN type instruction causes
STKPTR register (Figure 5-2). This allows users to
a pop from the stack; the contents of the location
implement a software stack if necessary. After a CALL,
pointed to by the STKPTR are transferred to the PC
RCALL or interrupt, the software can read the pushed
and then the Stack Pointer is decremented.
value by reading the TOSU:TOSH:TOSL registers. These
The Stack Pointer is initialized to ‘00000’ after all values can be placed on a user defined software stack. At
Resets. There is no RAM associated with the location return time, the software can return these values to
corresponding to a Stack Pointer value of ‘00000’; this TOSU:TOSH:TOSL and do a return.
is only a Reset value. Status bits indicate if the stack is
The user must disable the Global Interrupt Enable (GIE)
full or has overflowed or has underflowed.
bits while accessing the stack to prevent inadvertent
stack corruption.
FIGURE 5-2: RETURN ADDRESS STACK AND ASSOCIATED REGISTERS
Return Address Stack <20:0>
11111
11110
Top-of-Stack Registers 11101 Stack Pointer
TOSU TOSH TOSL STKPTR<4:0>

00h 1Ah 34h 00010
00011
Top-of-Stack 001A34h 00010
000D58h 00001
00000
5.1.2.2 Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) If STVREN is cleared, the STKFUL bit will be set on the
31st push and the Stack Pointer will increment to 31.
The STKPTR register (Register 5-1) contains the Stack
Any additional pushes will not overwrite the 31st push
Pointer value, the STKFUL (stack full) Status bit and
and STKPTR will remain at 31.
the STKUNF (Stack Underflow) Status bits. The value
of the Stack Pointer can be 0 through 31. The Stack When the stack has been popped enough times to
Pointer increments before values are pushed onto the unload the stack, the next pop will return a value of zero
stack and decrements after values are popped off the to the PC and sets the STKUNF bit, while the Stack
stack. On Reset, the Stack Pointer value will be zero. Pointer remains at zero. The STKUNF bit will remain
The user may read and write the Stack Pointer value. set until cleared by software or until a POR occurs.
This feature can be used by a Real-Time Operating
Note: Returning a value of zero to the PC on an
System (RTOS) for return stack maintenance.
underflow has the effect of vectoring the
After the PC is pushed onto the stack 31 times (without program to the Reset vector, where the
popping any values off the stack), the STKFUL bit is stack conditions can be verified and
set. The STKFUL bit is cleared by software or by a appropriate actions can be taken. This is
POR. not the same as a Reset, as the contents
The action that takes place when the stack becomes of the SFRs are not affected.
full depends on the state of the STVREN (Stack Over-
flow Reset Enable) Configuration bit. (Refer to
Section 24.1 “Configuration Bits” for a description of
the device Configuration bits.) If STVREN is set
(default), the 31st push will push the (PC + 2) value
onto the stack, set the STKFUL bit and reset the
device. The STKFUL bit will remain set and the Stack
Pointer will be set to zero.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.1.2.3 PUSH and POP Instructions The PUSH instruction places the current PC value onto
the stack. This increments the Stack Pointer and loads
Since the Top-of-Stack is readable and writable, the
the current PC value onto the stack.
ability to push values onto the stack and pull values off
the stack without disturbing normal program execution The POP instruction discards the current TOS by decre-
is a desirable feature. The PIC18 instruction set menting the Stack Pointer. The previous value pushed
includes two instructions, PUSH and POP, that permit onto the stack then becomes the TOS value.
the TOS to be manipulated under software control.
TOSU, TOSH and TOSL can be modified to place data
or a return address on the stack.
REGISTER 5-1: STKPTR: STACK POINTER REGISTER
R/C-0 R/C-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
(1)
STKFUL STKUNF(1) — STKPTR<4:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented C = Clearable only bit
bit 7 STKFUL: Stack Full Flag bit(1)

1 = Stack became full or overflowed
0 = Stack has not become full or overflowed
bit 6 STKUNF: Stack Underflow Flag bit(1)
1 = Stack Underflow occurred
0 = Stack Underflow did not occur
bit 4-0 STKPTR<4:0>: Stack Pointer Location bits
Note 1: Bit 7 and bit 6 are cleared by user software or by a POR.
5.1.2.4 Stack Full and Underflow Resets while servicing a low priority interrupt, the stack register
values stored by the low priority interrupt will be
Device Resets on Stack Overflow and Stack Underflow
overwritten. In these cases, users must save the key
conditions are enabled by setting the STVREN bit in
registers by software during a low priority interrupt.
Configuration Register 4L. When STVREN is set, a full
or underflow will set the appropriate STKFUL or If interrupt priority is not used, all interrupts may use the
STKUNF bit and then cause a device Reset. When fast register stack for returns from interrupt. If no
STVREN is cleared, a full or underflow condition will set interrupts are used, the fast register stack can be used
the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit but not cause to restore the Status, WREG and BSR registers at the
a device Reset. The STKFUL or STKUNF bits are end of a subroutine call. To use the fast register stack
cleared by the user software or a Power-on Reset. for a subroutine call, a CALL label, FAST instruction
must be executed to save the Status, WREG and BSR
5.1.3 FAST REGISTER STACK registers to the fast register stack. A RETURN, FAST
A fast register stack is provided for the Status, WREG instruction is then executed to restore these registers
and BSR registers, to provide a “fast return” option for from the fast register stack.
interrupts. The stack for each register is only one level Example 5-1 shows a source code example that uses
deep and is neither readable nor writable. It is loaded the fast register stack during a subroutine call and
with the current value of the corresponding register return.
when the processor vectors for an interrupt. All inter-
rupt sources will push values into the stack registers.
The values in the registers are then loaded back into
their associated registers if the RETFIE, FAST
instruction is used to return from the interrupt.
If both low and high priority interrupts are enabled, the
stack registers cannot be used reliably to return from
low priority interrupts. If a high priority interrupt occurs

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
EXAMPLE 5-1: FAST REGISTER STACK 5.1.4.2 Table Reads and Table Writes
CODE EXAMPLE A better method of storing data in program memory
CALL SUB1, FAST ;STATUS, WREG, BSR allows two bytes of data to be stored in each instruction
;SAVED IN FAST REGISTER
location.
;STACK
 Look-up table data may be stored two bytes per
 program word by using table reads and writes. The
Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register specifies the byte
SUB1  address and the Table Latch (TABLAT) register
 contains the data that is read from or written to program
RETURN, FAST ;RESTORE VALUES SAVED
memory. Data is transferred to or from program
;IN FAST REGISTER STACK
memory one byte at a time.
Table read and table write operations are discussed
5.1.4 LOOK-UP TABLES IN PROGRAM
further in Section 6.1 “Table Reads and Table
MEMORY Writes”.
There may be programming situations that require the
creation of data structures, or look-up tables, in
program memory. For PIC18 devices, look-up tables
can be implemented in two ways:
• Computed GOTO
• Table Reads
5.1.4.1 Computed GOTO

A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset
to the program counter. An example is shown in
Example 5-2.
A look-up table can be formed with an ADDWF PCL
instruction and a group of RETLW nn instructions. The
W register is loaded with an offset into the table before
executing a call to that table. The first instruction of the
called routine is the ADDWF PCL instruction. The next
instruction executed will be one of the RETLW nn
instructions that returns the value ‘nn’ to the calling
function.
The offset value (in WREG) specifies the number of
bytes that the program counter should advance and
should be multiples of 2 (LSb = 0).
In this method, only one data byte may be stored in
each instruction location and room on the return
address stack is required.
EXAMPLE 5-2: COMPUTED GOTO USING

AN OFFSET VALUE
MOVF OFFSET, W
CALL TABLE
ORG nn00h
TABLE ADDWF PCL
RETLW nnh
RETLW nnh
RETLW nnh
.
.
.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.2 PIC18 Instruction Cycle 5.2.2 INSTRUCTION FLOW/PIPELINING
An “Instruction Cycle” consists of four Q cycles: Q1
5.2.1 CLOCKING SCHEME through Q4. The instruction fetch and execute are
The microcontroller clock input, whether from an pipelined in such a manner that a fetch takes one
internal or external source, is internally divided by four instruction cycle, while the decode and execute take
to generate four non-overlapping quadrature clocks another instruction cycle. However, due to the
(Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4). Internally, the program counter is pipelining, each instruction effectively executes in one
incremented on every Q1; the instruction is fetched cycle. If an instruction causes the program counter to
from the program memory and latched into the change (e.g., GOTO), then two cycles are required to
instruction register during Q4. The instruction is complete the instruction (Example 5-3).
decoded and executed during the following Q1 through A fetch cycle begins with the Program Counter (PC)
Q4. The clocks and instruction execution flow are incrementing in Q1.
shown in Figure 5-3.
In the execution cycle, the fetched instruction is latched
into the Instruction Register (IR) in cycle Q1. This
instruction is then decoded and executed during the
Q2, Q3 and Q4 cycles. Data memory is read during Q2
(operand read) and written during Q4 (destination
write).
FIGURE 5-3: CLOCK/INSTRUCTION CYCLE
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
OSC1
Q1
Q2 Internal
Q3 Phase
Clock
Q4
PC PC PC + 2 PC + 4
OSC2/CLKOUT
(RC mode)
Execute INST (PC – 2)
Fetch INST (PC) Execute INST (PC)
Fetch INST (PC + 2) Execute INST (PC + 2)
Fetch INST (PC + 4)
EXAMPLE 5-3: INSTRUCTION PIPELINE FLOW
TCY0 TCY1 TCY2 TCY3 TCY4 TCY5

1. MOVLW 55h Fetch 1 Execute 1
2. MOVWF PORTB Fetch 2 Execute 2
3. BRA SUB_1 Fetch 3 Execute 3
4. BSF PORTA, BIT3 (Forced NOP) Fetch 4 Flush (NOP)
5. Instruction @ address SUB_1 Fetch SUB_1 Execute SUB_1
All instructions are single cycle, except for any program branches. These take two cycles since the fetch instruction
is “flushed” from the pipeline while the new instruction is being fetched and then executed.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.2.3 INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM The CALL and GOTO instructions have the absolute
MEMORY program memory address embedded into the
instruction. Since instructions are always stored on word
The program memory is addressed in bytes.
boundaries, the data contained in the instruction is a
Instructions are stored as either two bytes or four bytes
word address. The word address is written to PC<20:1>,
in program memory. The Least Significant Byte of an
which accesses the desired byte address in program
instruction word is always stored in a program memory
memory. Instruction #2 in Figure 5-4 shows how the
location with an even address (LSb = 0). To maintain
instruction GOTO 0006h is encoded in the program
alignment with instruction boundaries, the PC
memory. Program branch instructions, which encode a
increments in steps of 2 and the LSb will always read
relative address offset, operate in the same manner. The
‘0’ (see Section 5.1.1 “Program Counter”).
offset value stored in a branch instruction represents the
Figure 5-4 shows an example of how instruction words number of single-word instructions that the PC will be
are stored in the program memory. offset by. Section 25.0 “Instruction Set Summary”
provides further details of the instruction set.
FIGURE 5-4: INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY

Word Address
LSB = 1 LSB = 0 
Program Memory 000000h
Byte Locations  000002h
000004h
000006h
Instruction 1: MOVLW 055h 0Fh 55h 000008h
Instruction 2: GOTO 0006h EFh 03h 00000Ah
F0h 00h 00000Ch
Instruction 3: MOVFF 123h, 456h C1h 23h 00000Eh
F4h 56h 000010h
000012h
000014h
5.2.4 TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS and used by the instruction sequence. If the first word
is skipped for some reason and the second word is
The standard PIC18 instruction set has four two-word
executed by itself, a NOP is executed instead. This is
instructions: CALL, MOVFF, GOTO and LSFR. In all
necessary for cases when the two-word instruction is
cases, the second word of the instruction always has
preceded by a conditional instruction that changes the
‘1111’ as its four Most Significant bits; the other 12 bits
PC. Example 5-4 shows how this works.
are literal data, usually a data memory address.
The use of ‘1111’ in the 4 MSbs of an instruction Note: See Section 5.6 “PIC18 Instruction
specifies a special form of NOP. If the instruction is Execution and the Extended Instruc-
executed in proper sequence – immediately after the tion Set” for information on two-word
first word – the data in the second word is accessed instructions in the extended instruction set.
EXAMPLE 5-4: TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS

CASE 1:
Object Code Source Code
0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 ; is RAM location 0?
1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; No, skip this word
1111 0100 0101 0110 ; Execute this word as a NOP
0010 0100 0000 0000 ADDWF REG3 ; continue code
CASE 2:
Object Code Source Code
0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 ; is RAM location 0?
1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; Yes, execute this word
1111 0100 0101 0110 ; 2nd word of instruction
0010 0100 0000 0000 ADDWF REG3 ; continue code

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.3 Data Memory Organization 5.3.1 BANK SELECT REGISTER (BSR)
Large areas of data memory require an efficient
Note: The operation of some aspects of data
addressing scheme to make rapid access to any
memory are changed when the PIC18
address possible. Ideally, this means that an entire
extended instruction set is enabled. See
address does not need to be provided for each read or
Section 5.5 “Data Memory and the
write operation. For PIC18 devices, this is accom-
Extended Instruction Set” for more
plished with a RAM banking scheme. This divides the
information.
memory space into 16 contiguous banks of 256 bytes.
The data memory in PIC18 devices is implemented as Depending on the instruction, each location can be
static RAM. Each register in the data memory has a addressed directly by its full 12-bit address, or an 8-bit
12-bit address, allowing up to 4096 bytes of data low-order address and a 4-bit Bank Pointer.
memory. The memory space is divided into as many as Most instructions in the PIC18 instruction set make use
16 banks that contain 256 bytes each. Figures 5-5 of the Bank Pointer, known as the Bank Select Register
through 5-7 show the data memory organization for the (BSR). This SFR holds the 4 Most Significant bits of a
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices. location’s address; the instruction itself includes the
The data memory contains Special Function Registers 8 Least Significant bits. Only the four lower bits of the
(SFRs) and General Purpose Registers (GPRs). The BSR are implemented (BSR<3:0>). The upper four bits
SFRs are used for control and status of the controller are unused; they will always read ‘0’ and cannot be
and peripheral functions, while GPRs are used for data written to. The BSR can be loaded directly by using the
storage and scratchpad operations in the user’s MOVLB instruction.
application. Any read of an unimplemented location will The value of the BSR indicates the bank in data
read as ‘0’s. memory; the 8 bits in the instruction show the location
The instruction set and architecture allow operations in the bank and can be thought of as an offset from the
across all banks. The entire data memory may be bank’s lower boundary. The relationship between the
accessed by Direct, Indirect or Indexed Addressing BSR’s value and the bank division in data memory is
modes. Addressing modes are discussed later in this shown in Figures 5-5 through 5-7.
subsection. Since up to 16 registers may share the same low-order
To ensure that commonly used registers (SFRs and address, the user must always be careful to ensure that
select GPRs) can be accessed in a single cycle, PIC18 the proper bank is selected before performing a data
devices implement an Access Bank. This is a 256-byte read or write. For example, writing what should be
memory space that provides fast access to SFRs and program data to an 8-bit address of F9h while the BSR
the lower portion of GPR Bank 0 without using the Bank is 0Fh will end up resetting the program counter.
Select Register (BSR). Section 5.3.2 “Access Bank” While any bank can be selected, only those banks that
provides a detailed description of the Access RAM. are actually implemented can be read or written to.
Writes to unimplemented banks are ignored, while
reads from unimplemented banks will return ‘0’s. Even
so, the STATUS register will still be affected as if the
operation was successful. The data memory maps in
Figures 5-5 through 5-7 indicate which banks are
implemented.
In the core PIC18 instruction set, only the MOVFF
instruction fully specifies the 12-bit address of the
source and target registers. This instruction ignores the
BSR completely when it executes. All other instructions
include only the low-order address as an operand and
must use either the BSR or the Access Bank to locate
their target registers.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 5-5: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18(L)F23K22 AND PIC18(L)F43K22 DEVICES
When ‘a’ = 0:
BSR<3:0> Data Memory Map
The BSR is ignored and the
00h 000h Access Bank is used.
= 0000 Access RAM 05Fh
Bank 0 The first 96 bytes are
GPR 060h
FFh 0FFh general purpose RAM
00h 100h (from Bank 0).
= 0001
Bank 1 GPR The second 160 bytes are
FFh 1FFh Special Function Registers
= 0010 00h 200h (from Bank 15).
Bank 2
FFh 2FFh When ‘a’ = 1:
= 0011 00h 300h
Bank 3 The BSR specifies the Bank
used by the instruction.
FFh 3FFh
00h 400h
= 0100 Bank 4
FFh 4FFh
= 0101 00h 500h
Bank 5
FFh 5FFh
= 0110 00h 600h
Bank 6
Access Bank
FFh 6FFh
= 0111 00h 700h 00h
Bank 7 Access RAM Low
5Fh
FFh 7FFh Access RAM High 60h
= 1000 00h 800h (SFRs)
Bank 8 FFh
FFh 8FFh
= 1001 00h Unused 900h
Bank 9 Read 00h
FFh 9FFh
00h A00h
= 1010
Bank 10
FFh AFFh
= 1011 00h B00h
Bank 11
FFh BFFh
= 1100 00h C00h
Bank 12
FFh CFFh
= 1101 D00h
Bank 13 00h
FFh DFFh
00h E00h
= 1110
Bank 14
FFh EFFh
00h F00h
= 1111 Unused
Bank 15 F37h
F38h
SFR(1) F5Fh Note 1: Addresses F38h through F5Fh are
also used by SFRs, but are not
F60h
part of the Access RAM. Users
must always use the complete
SFR
address or load the proper BSR
FFh FFFh value to access these registers.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
When ‘a’ = 0:
GPR 060h
= 0001
= 0010 00h 200h (from Bank 15).
Bank 2 GPR
= 0011 00h 300h
FFh 3FFh
00h 400h
= 0100 Bank 4
FFh 4FFh
= 0101 00h 500h
Bank 5
FFh 5FFh
= 0110 00h 600h
Bank 6
Access Bank
FFh 6FFh
= 0111 00h 700h 00h
5Fh
= 1000 00h 800h (SFRs)
Bank 8 FFh
FFh 8FFh
= 1001 00h Unused 900h
Bank 9 Read 00h
FFh 9FFh
00h A00h
= 1010
Bank 10
FFh AFFh
= 1011 00h B00h
Bank 11
FFh BFFh
= 1100 00h C00h
Bank 12
FFh CFFh
= 1101 D00h
Bank 13 00h
FFh DFFh
00h E00h
= 1110
Bank 14
FFh EFFh
00h Unused F00h
= 1111 F37h
Bank 15
F38h
SFR(1) Note 1: Addresses F38h through F5Fh are
F5Fh
also used by SFRs, but are not
F60h
SFR address or load the proper BSR
FFh value to access these registers.
FFFh

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
When ‘a’ = 0:
GPR 060h
= 0001
= 0010 00h 200h (from Bank 15).
Bank 2 GPR
= 0011 00h 300h
GPR
FFh 3FFh
00h 400h
= 0100 Bank 4 GPR
FFh 4FFh
= 0101 00h 500h
Bank 5 GPR
FFh 5FFh
= 0110 00h 600h
Bank 6
Access Bank
FFh 6FFh
= 0111 00h 700h 00h
5Fh
= 1000 00h 800h (SFRs)
Bank 8 FFh
FFh 8FFh
= 1001 00h 900h
Bank 9
FFh 9FFh
00h Unused A00h
= 1010
Bank 10 Read 00h
FFh AFFh
= 1011 00h B00h
Bank 11
FFh BFFh
= 1100 00h C00h
Bank 12
FFh CFFh
= 1101 D00h
Bank 13 00h
FFh DFFh
00h E00h
= 1110
Bank 14
FFh EFFh
00h F00h
= 1111 Unused
Bank 15 F37h
SFR(1)
F38h Note 1: Addresses F38h through F5Fh are
F5Fh also used by SFRs, but are not
F60h part of the Access RAM. Users
SFR address or load the proper BSR
value to access these registers.
FFh FFFh

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
When ‘a’ = 0:
GPR 060h
= 0001
= 0010 00h 200h (from Bank 15).
Bank 2 GPR
= 0011 00h 300h
GPR
FFh 3FFh
00h 400h
= 0100 Bank 4 GPR
FFh 4FFh
= 0101 00h 500h
Bank 5 GPR
FFh 5FFh
= 0110 00h 600h
Bank 6 GPR
Access Bank
FFh 6FFh
= 0111 00h 700h 00h
Bank 7 GPR Access RAM Low
5Fh
= 1000 00h 800h (SFRs)
Bank 8 FFh
GPR
FFh 8FFh
= 1001 00h 900h
Bank 9 GPR
FFh 9FFh
00h A00h
= 1010
Bank 10 GPR
FFh AFFh
= 1011 00h B00h
Bank 11 GPR
FFh BFFh
= 1100 00h C00h
Bank 12 GPR
FFh CFFh
= 1101 D00h
Bank 13 00h GPR
FFh DFFh
00h E00h
= 1110
Bank 14 GPR
FFh
00h F00h
= 1111 GPR F37h
Bank 15 F38h
SFR(1) Note 1: Addresses F38h through F5Fh are
F5Fh
F60h also used by SFRs, but are not
SFR must always use the complete
address or load the proper BSR
value to access these registers.
FFh FFFh

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 5-9: USE OF THE BANK SELECT REGISTER (DIRECT ADDRESSING)
BSR(1) Data Memory From Opcode(2)

7 0 000h 00h 7 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Bank 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FFh
100h 00h
Bank 1
Bank Select(2) 200h FFh
00h
Bank 2
300h FFh
00h
Bank 3
through
Bank 13
FFh
E00h
00h
Bank 14
F00h FFh
00h
Bank 15
FFFh FFh
Note 1: The Access RAM bit of the instruction can be used to force an override of the selected bank (BSR<3:0>) to
the registers of the Access Bank.
2: The MOVFF instruction embeds the entire 12-bit address in the instruction.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.3.2 ACCESS BANK 5.3.3 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER
While the use of the BSR with an embedded 8-bit FILE
address allows users to address the entire range of PIC18 devices may have banked memory in the GPR
data memory, it also means that the user must always area. This is data RAM, which is available for use by all
ensure that the correct bank is selected. Otherwise, instructions. GPRs start at the bottom of Bank 0
data may be read from or written to the wrong location. (address 000h) and grow upwards towards the bottom of
This can be disastrous if a GPR is the intended target the SFR area. GPRs are not initialized by a Power-on
of an operation, but an SFR is written to instead. Reset and are unchanged on all other Resets.
Verifying and/or changing the BSR for each read or
write to data memory can become very inefficient. 5.3.4 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS
To streamline access for the most commonly used data The Special Function Registers (SFRs) are registers
memory locations, the data memory is configured with used by the CPU and peripheral modules for controlling
an Access Bank, which allows users to access a the desired operation of the device. These registers are
mapped block of memory without specifying a BSR. implemented as static RAM. SFRs start at the top of
The Access Bank consists of the first 96 bytes of mem- data memory (FFFh) and extend downward to occupy
ory (00h-5Fh) in Bank 0 and the last 160 bytes of mem- the top portion of Bank 15 (F38h to FFFh). A list of
ory (60h-FFh) in Block 15. The lower half is known as these registers is given in Table 5-1 and Table 5-2.
the “Access RAM” and is composed of GPRs. This The SFRs can be classified into two sets: those
upper half is also where the device’s SFRs are associated with the “core” device functionality (ALU,
mapped. These two areas are mapped contiguously in Resets and interrupts) and those related to the
the Access Bank and can be addressed in a linear peripheral functions. The Reset and interrupt registers
fashion by an 8-bit address (Figures 5-5 through 5-7). are described in their respective chapters, while the
The Access Bank is used by core PIC18 instructions ALU’s STATUS register is described later in this
that include the Access RAM bit (the ‘a’ parameter in section. Registers related to the operation of a
the instruction). When ‘a’ is equal to ‘1’, the instruction peripheral feature are described in the chapter for that
uses the BSR and the 8-bit address included in the peripheral.
opcode for the data memory address. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, The SFRs are typically distributed among the
however, the instruction is forced to use the Access peripherals whose functions they control. Unused SFR
Bank address map; the current value of the BSR is locations are unimplemented and read as ‘0’s.
ignored entirely.
Using this “forced” addressing allows the instruction to
operate on a data address in a single cycle, without
updating the BSR first. For 8-bit addresses of 60h and
above, this means that users can evaluate and operate
on SFRs more efficiently. The Access RAM below 60h
is a good place for data values that the user might need
to access rapidly, such as immediate computational
results or common program variables. Access RAM
also allows for faster and more code efficient context
saving and switching of variables.
The mapping of the Access Bank is slightly different
when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST
Configuration bit = 1). This is discussed in more detail
in Section 5.5.3 “Mapping the Access Bank in
Indexed Literal Offset Mode”.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 5-1: SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP FOR PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 DEVICES

Address Name Address Name Address Name Address Name Address Name
(2)
FFFh TOSU FD7h TMR0H FAFh SPBRG1 F87h — F5Fh CCPR3H
FFEh TOSH FD6h TMR0L FAEh RCREG1 F86h —(2) F5Eh CCPR3L
FFDh TOSL FD5h T0CON FADh TXREG1 F85h —(2) F5Dh CCP3CON
FFCh STKPTR FD4h —(2) FACh TXSTA1 F84h PORTE F5Ch PWM3CON
FFBh PCLATU FD3h OSCCON FABh RCSTA1 F83h PORTD(3) F5Bh ECCP3AS
FFAh PCLATH FD2h OSCCON2 FAAh EEADRH(4) F82h PORTC F5Ah PSTR3CON
FF9h PCL FD1h WDTCON FA9h EEADR F81h PORTB F59h CCPR4H
FF8h TBLPTRU FD0h RCON FA8h EEDATA F80h PORTA F58h CCPR4L
(1)
FF7h TBLPTRH FCFh TMR1H FA7h EECON2 F7Fh IPR5 F57h CCP4CON
FF6h TBLPTRL FCEh TMR1L FA6h EECON1 F7Eh PIR5 F56h CCPR5H
FF5h TABLAT FCDh T1CON FA5h IPR3 F7Dh PIE5 F55h CCPR5L
FF4h PRODH FCCh T1GCON FA4h PIR3 F7Ch IPR4 F54h CCP5CON
FF3h PRODL FCBh SSP1CON3 FA3h PIE3 F7Bh PIR4 F53h TMR4
FF2h INTCON FCAh SSP1MSK FA2h IPR2 F7Ah PIE4 F52h PR4
FF1h INTCON2 FC9h SSP1BUF FA1h PIR2 F79h CM1CON0 F51h T4CON
FF0h INTCON3 FC8h SSP1ADD FA0h PIE2 F78h CM2CON0 F50h TMR5H
FEFh INDF0(1) FC7h SSP1STAT F9Fh IPR1 F77h CM2CON1 F4Fh TMR5L
FEEh POSTINC0(1) FC6h SSP1CON1 F9Eh PIR1 F76h SPBRGH2 F4Eh T5CON
FEDh POSTDEC0(1) FC5h SSP1CON2 F9Dh PIE1 F75h SPBRG2 F4Dh T5GCON
FECh PREINC0(1) FC4h ADRESH F9Ch HLVDCON F74h RCREG2 F4Ch TMR6
(1)
FEBh PLUSW0 FC3h ADRESL F9Bh OSCTUNE F73h TXREG2 F4Bh PR6
FEAh FSR0H FC2h ADCON0 F9Ah —(2) F72h TXSTA2 F4Ah T6CON
FE9h FSR0L FC1h ADCON1 F99h —(2) F71h RCSTA2 F49h CCPTMRS0
FE8h WREG FC0h ADCON2 F98h —(2) F70h BAUDCON2 F48h CCPTMRS1
FE7h INDF1(1) FBFh CCPR1H F97h —(2) F6Fh SSP2BUF F47h SRCON0
FE6h POSTINC1(1) FBEh CCPR1L F96h TRISE F6Eh SSP2ADD F46h SRCON1
FE5h POSTDEC1(1) FBDh CCP1CON F95h TRISD(3) F6Dh SSP2STAT F45h CTMUCONH
FE4h PREINC1(1) FBCh TMR2 F94h TRISC F6Ch SSP2CON1 F44h CTMUCONL
FE3h PLUSW1(1) FBBh PR2 F93h TRISB F6Bh SSP2CON2 F43h CTMUICON
FE2h FSR1H FBAh T2CON F92h TRISA F6Ah SSP2MSK F42h VREFCON0
FE1h FSR1L FB9h PSTR1CON F91h —(2) F69h SSP2CON3 F41h VREFCON1
FE0h BSR FB8h BAUDCON1 F90h —(2) F68h CCPR2H F40h VREFCON2
(1) (2)
FDFh INDF2 FB7h PWM1CON F8Fh — F67h CCPR2L F3Fh PMD0
FDEh POSTINC2(1) FB6h ECCP1AS F8Eh —(2) F66h CCP2CON F3Eh PMD1
FDDh POSTDEC2(1) FB5h —(2) F8Dh LATE(3) F65h PWM2CON F3Dh PMD2
FDCh PREINC2(1) FB4h T3GCON F8Ch LATD(3) F64h ECCP2AS F3Ch ANSELE
(1)
FDBh PLUSW2 FB3h TMR3H F8Bh LATC F63h PSTR2CON F3Bh ANSELD
FDAh FSR2H FB2h TMR3L F8Ah LATB F62h IOCB F3Ah ANSELC
FD9h FSR2L FB1h T3CON F89h LATA F61h WPUB F39h ANSELB
FD8h STATUS FB0h SPBRGH1 F88h —(2) F60h SLRCON F38h ANSELA
Note 1: This is not a physical register.

2: Unimplemented registers are read as ‘0’.
3: PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices only.
4: PIC18(L)F26K22 and PIC18(L)F46K22 devices only.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 5-2: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY FOR PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 DEVICES
Value on
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
POR, BOR
FFFh TOSU — — — Top-of-Stack, Upper Byte (TOS<20:16>) ---0 0000

FFEh TOSH Top-of-Stack, High Byte (TOS<15:8>) 0000 0000
FFDh TOSL Top-of-Stack, Low Byte (TOS<7:0>) 0000 0000
FFCh STKPTR STKFUL STKUNF — STKPTR<4:0> 00-0 0000
FFBh PCLATU — — — Holding Register for PC<20:16> ---0 0000
FFAh PCLATH Holding Register for PC<15:8> 0000 0000
FF9h PCL Holding Register for PC<7:0> 0000 0000
FF8h TBLPTRU — — Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte(TBLPTR<21:16>) --00 0000
FF7h TBLPTRH Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte(TBLPTR<15:8>) 0000 0000
FF6h TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte(TBLPTR<7:0>) 0000 0000
FF5h TABLAT Program Memory Table Latch 0000 0000
FF4h PRODH Product Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx
FF3h PRODL Product Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
FF2h INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 0000 000x
FF1h INTCON2 RBPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 — TMR0IP — RBIP 1111 -1-1
FF0h INTCON3 INT2IP INT1IP — INT2IE INT1IE — INT2IF INT1IF 11-0 0-00
FEFh INDF0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 not changed (not a physical register) ---- ----
FEEh POSTINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-incremented (not a physical register) ---- ----
FEDh POSTDEC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-decremented (not a physical register) ---- ----
FECh PREINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) ---- ----
FEBh PLUSW0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – ---- ----
value of FSR0 offset by W
FEAh FSR0H — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0, High Byte ---- 0000
FE9h FSR0L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
FE8h WREG Working Register xxxx xxxx
FE7h INDF1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 not changed (not a physical register) ---- ----
FE6h POSTINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-incremented (not a physical register) ---- ----
FE5h POSTDEC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-decremented (not a physical register) ---- ----
FE4h PREINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) ---- ----
FE3h PLUSW1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – ---- ----
FE2h FSR1H — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1, High Byte ---- 0000
FE1h FSR1L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
FE0h BSR — — — — Bank Select Register ---- 0000
FDFh INDF2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 not changed (not a physical register) ---- ----
FDEh POSTINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-incremented (not a physical register) ---- ----
FDDh POSTDEC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-decremented (not a physical register) ---- ----
FDCh PREINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) ---- ----
FDBh PLUSW2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – ---- ----
FDAh FSR2H — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2, High Byte ---- 0000
FD9h FSR2L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
FD8h STATUS — — — N OV Z DC C ---x xxxx
FD7h TMR0H Timer0 Register, High Byte 0000 0000
FD6h TMR0L Timer0 Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
FD5h T0CON TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS<2:0> 1111 1111
FD3h OSCCON IDLEN IRCF<2:0> OSTS HFIOFS SCS<1:0> 0011 q000
FD2h OSCCON2 PLLRDY SOSCRUN — MFIOSEL SOSCGO PRISD MFIOFS LFIOFS 00-0 01x0
Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition
Note 1: PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices only.
3: PIC18(L)F23/24K22 and PIC18(L)F43/44K22 devices only.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Value on
POR, BOR
FD1h WDTCON — — — — — — — SWDTEN ---- ---0

FD0h RCON IPEN SBOREN — RI TO PD POR BOR 01-1 1100
FCFh TMR1H Timer1 Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx
FCEh TMR1L Timer1 Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
FCDh T1CON TMR1CS<1:0> T1CKPS<1:0> T1SOSCEN T1SYNC T1RD16 TMR1ON 0000 0000
FCCh T1GCON TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GTM T1GSPM T1GGO/ T1GVAL T1GSS<1:0> 0000 xx00
DONE
FCBh SSP1CON3 ACKTIM PCIE SCIE BOEN SDAHT SBCDE AHEN DHEN 0000 0000
FCAh SSP1MSK SSP1 MASK Register bits 1111 1111
FC9h SSP1BUF SSP1 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register xxxx xxxx
FC8h SSP1ADD SSP1 Address Register in I2C Slave Mode. SSP1 Baud Rate Reload Register in I2C Master Mode 0000 0000
FC7h SSP1STAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 0000 0000
FC6h SSP1CON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM<3:0> 0000 0000
FC5h SSP1CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 0000 0000
FC4h ADRESH A/D Result, High Byte xxxx xxxx
FC3h ADRESL A/D Result, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
FC2h ADCON0 — CHS<4:0> GO/DONE ADON --00 0000
FC1h ADCON1 TRIGSEL — — — PVCFG<1:0> NVCFG<1:0> 0--- 0000
FC0h ADCON2 ADFM — ACQT<2:0> ADCS<2:0> 0-00 0000
FBFh CCPR1H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1, High Byte xxxx xxxx
FBEh CCPR1L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
FBDh CCP1CON P1M<1:0> DC1B<1:0> CCP1M<3:0> 0000 0000
FBCh TMR2 Timer2 Register 0000 0000
FBBh PR2 Timer2 Period Register 1111 1111
FBAh T2CON — T2OUTPS<3:0> TMR2ON T2CKPS<1:0> -000 0000
FB9h PSTR1CON — — — STR1SYNC STR1D STR1C STR1B STR1A ---0 0001
FB8h BAUDCON1 ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 0100 0-00
FB7h PWM1CON P1RSEN P1DC<6:0> 0000 0000
FB6h ECCP1AS CCP1ASE CCP1AS<2:0> P1SSAC<1:0> P1SSBD<1:0> 0000 0000
FB4h T3GCON TMR3GE T3GPOL T3GTM T3GSPM T3GGO/ T3GVAL T3GSS 0000 0x00
DONE
FB3h TMR3H Timer3 Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx
FB2h TMR3L Timer3 Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
FB1h T3CON TMR3CS<1:0> T3CKPS<1:0> T3SOSCEN T3SYNC T3RD16 TMR3ON 0000 0000
FB0h SPBRGH1 EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte 0000 0000
FAFh SPBRG1 EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte 0000 0000
FAEh RCREG1 EUSART1 Receive Register 0000 0000
FADh TXREG1 EUSART1 Transmit Register 0000 0000
FACh TXSTA1 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 0000 0010
FABh RCSTA1 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 0000 000x
FAAh EEADRH(5) — — — — — — EEADR<9:8> ---- --00
FA9h EEADR EEADR<7:0> 0000 0000
FA8h EEDATA EEPROM Data Register 0000 0000
FA7h EECON2 EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) ---- --00
FA6h EECON1 EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD xx-0 x000
FA5h IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP CTMUIP TMR5GIP TMR3GIP TMR1GIP 0000 0000
FA4h PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF CTMUIF TMR5GIF TMR3GIF TMR1GIF 0000 0000
FA3h PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE CTMUIE TMR5GIE TMR3GIE TMR1GIE 0000 0000

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Value on
POR, BOR
FA2h IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCL1IP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 1111 1111
FA1h PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 0000 0000
FA0h PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 0000 0000
F9Fh IPR1 — ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP -111 1111
F9Eh PIR1 — ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF -000 0000
F9Dh PIE1 — ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE -000 0000
F9Ch HLVDCON VDIRMAG BGVST IRVST HLVDEN HLVDL<3:0> 0000 0000
F9Bh OSCTUNE INTSRC PLLEN TUN<5:0> 00xx xxxx
F96h TRISE WPUE3 — — — — TRISE2(1) TRISE1(1) TRISE0(1) 1--- -111
F95h TRISD(1) TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 1111 1111
F94h TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 1111 1111
F93h TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 1111 1111
F92h TRISA TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 1111 1111
F8Dh LATE(1) — — — — — LATE2 LATE1 LATE0 ---- -xxx
F8Ch LATD(1) LATD7 LATD6 LATD5 LATD4 LATD3 LATD2 LATD1 LATD0 xxxx xxxx
F8Bh LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 xxxx xxxx
F8Ah LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 xxxx xxxx
F89h LATA LATA7 LATA6 LATA5 LATA4 LATA3 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0 xxxx xxxx
PORTE(2) — — — — RE3 — — — ---- x---
F84h
PORTE(1) — — — — RE3 RE2 RE1 RE0 ---- x000
F83h PORTD(1) RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 RD0 0000 0000
F82h PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 0000 00xx
F81h PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 xxx0 0000
F80h PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 xx0x 0000
F7Fh IPR5 — — — — — TMR6IP TMR5IP TMR4IP ---- -111
F7Eh PIR5 — — — — — TMR6IF TMR5IF TMR4IF ---- -111
F7Dh PIE5 — — — — — TMR6IE TMR5IE TMR4IE ---- -000
F7Ch IPR4 — — — — — CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP ---- -000
F7Bh PIR4 — — — — — CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF ---- -000
F7Ah PIE4 — — — — — CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE ---- -000
F79h CM1CON0 C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH<1:0> 0000 1000
F78h CM2CON0 C2ON C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH<1:0> 0000 1000
F77h CM2CON1 MC1OUT MC2OUT C1RSEL C2RSEL C1HYS C2HYS C1SYNC C2SYNC 0000 0000
F76h SPBRGH2 EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte 0000 0000
F75h SPBRG2 EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte 0000 0000
F74h RCREG2 EUSART2 Receive Register 0000 0000
F73h TXREG2 EUSART2 Transmit Register 0000 0000
F72h TXSTA2 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 0000 0010
F71h RCSTA2 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 0000 000x
F70h BAUDCON2 ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 01x0 0-00
F6Fh SSP2BUF SSP2 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register xxxx xxxx
F6Eh SSP2ADD SSP2 Address Register in I2C Slave Mode. SSP2 Baud Rate Reload Register in I2C Master Mode 0000 0000
F6Dh SSP2STAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 0000 0000
F6Ch SSP2CON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM<3:0> 0000 0000
F6Bh SSP2CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 0000 0000
F6Ah SSP2MSK SSP1 MASK Register bits 1111 1111
F69h SSP2CON3 ACKTIM PCIE SCIE BOEN SDAHT SBCDE AHEN DHEN 0000 0000

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Value on
POR, BOR
F68h CCPR2H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2, High Byte xxxx xxxx

F67h CCPR2L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
F66h CCP2CON P2M<1:0> DC2B<1:0> CCP2M<3:0> 0000 0000
F65h PWM2CON P2RSEN P2DC<6:0> 0000 0000
F64h ECCP2AS CCP2ASE CCP2AS<2:0> P2SSAC<1:0> P2SSBD<1:0> 0000 0000
F63h PSTR2CON — — — STR2SYNC STR2D STR2C STR2B STR2A ---0 0001
F62h IOCB IOCB7 IOCB6 IOCB5 IOCB4 — — — — 1111 ----
F61h WPUB WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0 1111 1111
SLRCON(2) — — — — — SLRC SLRB SLRA ---- -111
F60h
SLRCON(1) — — — SLRE SLRD SLRC SLRB SLRA ---1 1111
F5Fh CCPR3H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 3, High Byte xxxx xxxx
F5Eh CCPR3L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 3, Low Byte xxxx xxxx
F5Dh CCP3CON P3M<1:0> DC3B<1:0> CCP3M<3:0> 0000 0000
F5Ch PWM3CON P3RSEN P3DC<6:0> 0000 0000
F5Bh ECCP3AS CCP3ASE CCP3AS<2:0> P3SSAC<1:0> P3SSBD<1:0> 0000 0000
F5Ah PSTR3CON — — — STR3SYNC STR3D STR3C STR3B STR3A ---0 0001
F57h CCP4CON — — DC4B<1:0> CCP4M<3:0> --00 0000
F54h CCP5CON — — DC5B<1:0> CCP5M<3:0> --00 0000
F53h TMR4 Timer4 Register 0000 0000
F52h PR4 Timer4 Period Register 1111 1111
F51h T4CON — T4OUTPS<3:0> TMR4ON T4CKPS<1:0> -000 0000
F50h TMR5H Timer5 Register, High Byte 0000 0000
F4Fh TMR5L Timer5 Register, Low Byte 0000 0000
F4Eh T5CON TMR5CS<1:0> T5CKPS<1:0> T5SOSCEN T5SYNC T5RD16 TMR5ON 0000 0000
F4Dh T5GCON TMR5GE T5GPOL T5GTM T5GSPM T5GGO/ T5GVAL T5GSS 0000 0x00
DONE
F4Ch TMR6 Timer6 Register 0000 0000
F4Bh PR6 Timer6 Period Register 1111 1111
F4Ah T6CON — T6OUTPS<3:0> TMR6ON T6CKPS<1:0> -000 0000
F49h CCPTMRS0 C3TSEL<1:0> — C2TSEL<1:0> — C1TSEL<1:0> 00-0 0-00
F48h CCPTMRS1 — — — — C5TSEL<1:0> C4TSEL<1:0> ---- 0000
F47h SRCON0 SRLEN SRCLK<2:0> SRQEN SRNQEN SRPS SRPR 0000 0000
F46h SRCON1 SRSPE SRSCKE SRSC2E SRSC1E SRRPE SRRCKE SRRC2E SRRC1E 0000 0000
F45h CTMUCONH CTMUEN — CTMUSIDL TGEN EDGEN EDGSEQEN IDISSEN CTTRIG 0000 0000
F44h CTMUCONL EDG2POL EDG2SEL<1:0> EDG1POL EDG1SEL<1:0> EDG2STAT EDG1STAT 0000 0000
F43h CTMUICON ITRIM<5:0> IRNG<1:0> 0000 0000
F42h VREFCON0 FVREN FVRST FVRS<1:0> — — — — 0001 ----
F41h VREFCON1 DACEN DACLPS DACOE — DACPSS<1:0> — DACNSS 000- 00-0
F40h VREFCON2 — — — DACR<4:0> ---0 0000
F3Fh PMD0 UART2MD UART1MD TMR6MD TMR5MD TMR4MD TMR3MD TMR2MD TMR1MD 0000 0000
F3Eh PMD1 MSSP2MD MSSP1MD — CCP5MD CCP4MD CCP3MD CCP2MD CCP1MD 00-0 0000
F3Dh PMD2 — — — — CTMUMD CMP2MD CMP1MD ADCMD ---- 0000
F3Ch ANSELE(1) — — — — — ANSE2 ANSE1 ANSE0 ---- -111
F3Bh ANSELD(1) ANSD7 ANSD6 ANSD5 ANSD4 ANSD3 ANSD2 ANSD1 ANSD0 1111 1111

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Value on
POR, BOR
F3Ah ANSELC ANSC7 ANSC6 ANSC5 ANSC4 ANSC3 ANSC2 — — 1111 11--
F39h ANSELB — — ANSB5 ANSB4 ANSB3 ANSB2 ANSB1 ANSB0 --11 1111
F38h ANSELA — — ANSA5 — ANSA3 ANSA2 ANSA1 ANSA0 --1- 1111

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.3.5 STATUS REGISTER It is recommended that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF, MOVFF
and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS
The STATUS register, shown in Register 5-2, contains
register, because these instructions do not affect the Z,
the arithmetic status of the ALU. As with any other SFR,
C, DC, OV or N bits in the STATUS register.
it can be the operand for any instruction.
For other instructions that do not affect Status bits, see
If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruc-
the instruction set summaries in Table 25.2 and
tion that affects the Z, DC, C, OV or N bits, the results
Table 25-3.
of the instruction are not written; instead, the STATUS
register is updated according to the instruction per- Note: The C and DC bits operate as the borrow
formed. Therefore, the result of an instruction with the and digit borrow bits, respectively, in
STATUS register as its destination may be different subtraction.
than intended. As an example, CLRF STATUS will set
the Z bit and leave the remaining Status bits
unchanged (‘000u u1uu’).
REGISTER 5-2: STATUS: STATUS REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x
(1)
— — — N OV Z DC C(1)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4 N: Negative bit
This bit is used for signed arithmetic (two’s complement). It indicates whether the result was negative
(ALU MSB = 1).
1 = Result was negative
0 = Result was positive
bit 3 OV: Overflow bit
This bit is used for signed arithmetic (two’s complement). It indicates an overflow of the 7-bit magni-
tude which causes the sign bit (bit 7 of the result) to change state.
1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation)
0 = No overflow occurred
bit 2 Z: Zero bit
1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero
0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero
bit 1 DC: Digit Carry/Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW,SUBLW,SUBWF instructions)(1)
1 = A carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result
bit 0 C: Carry/Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW, SUBWF instructions)(1)
1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred
Note 1: For Borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the two’s complement of the
second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high-order or low-order
bit of the source register.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.4 Data Addressing Modes The Access RAM bit ‘a’ determines how the address is
interpreted. When ‘a’ is ‘1’, the contents of the BSR
Note: The execution of some instructions in the (Section 5.3.1 “Bank Select Register (BSR)”) are
core PIC18 instruction set are changed used with the address to determine the complete 12-bit
when the PIC18 extended instruction set is address of the register. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, the address is
enabled. See Section 5.5 “Data Memory interpreted as being a register in the Access Bank.
and the Extended Instruction Set” for Addressing that uses the Access RAM is sometimes
more information. also known as Direct Forced Addressing mode.
While the program memory can be addressed in only A few instructions, such as MOVFF, include the entire
one way – through the program counter – information 12-bit address (either source or destination) in their
in the data memory space can be addressed in several opcodes. In these cases, the BSR is ignored entirely.
ways. For most instructions, the addressing mode is The destination of the operation’s results is determined
fixed. Other instructions may use up to three modes, by the destination bit ‘d’. When ‘d’ is ‘1’, the results are
depending on which operands are used and whether or stored back in the source register, overwriting its origi-
not the extended instruction set is enabled. nal contents. When ‘d’ is ‘0’, the results are stored in
The addressing modes are: the W register. Instructions without the ‘d’ argument
have a destination that is implicit in the instruction; their
• Inherent
destination is either the target register being operated
• Literal on or the W register.
• Direct
• Indirect 5.4.3 INDIRECT ADDRESSING
An additional addressing mode, Indexed Literal Offset, Indirect addressing allows the user to access a location
is available when the extended instruction set is in data memory without giving a fixed address in the
enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). Its operation is instruction. This is done by using File Select Registers
discussed in greater detail in Section 5.5.1 “Indexed (FSRs) as pointers to the locations which are to be read
Addressing with Literal Offset”. or written. Since the FSRs are themselves located in
RAM as Special File Registers, they can also be
5.4.1 INHERENT AND LITERAL directly manipulated under program control. This
ADDRESSING makes FSRs very useful in implementing data struc-
tures, such as tables and arrays in data memory.
Many PIC18 control instructions do not need any argu-
ment at all; they either perform an operation that glob- The registers for indirect addressing are also
ally affects the device or they operate implicitly on one implemented with Indirect File Operands (INDFs) that
register. This addressing mode is known as Inherent permit automatic manipulation of the pointer value with
Addressing. Examples include SLEEP, RESET and DAW. auto-incrementing, auto-decrementing or offsetting
with another value. This allows for efficient code, using
Other instructions work in a similar way but require an
loops, such as the example of clearing an entire RAM
additional explicit argument in the opcode. This is
bank in Example 5-5.
known as Literal Addressing mode because they
require some literal value as an argument. Examples
include ADDLW and MOVLW, which respectively, add or EXAMPLE 5-5: HOW TO CLEAR RAM
move a literal value to the W register. Other examples (BANK 1) USING
include CALL and GOTO, which include a 20-bit INDIRECT ADDRESSING
program memory address. LFSR FSR0, 100h ;
NEXT CLRF POSTINC0 ; Clear INDF
5.4.2 DIRECT ADDRESSING ; register then
; inc pointer
Direct addressing specifies all or part of the source BTFSS FSR0H, 1 ; All done with
and/or destination address of the operation within the ; Bank1?
opcode itself. The options are specified by the BRA NEXT ; NO, clear next
arguments accompanying the instruction. CONTINUE ; YES, continue
In the core PIC18 instruction set, bit-oriented and byte-
oriented instructions use some version of direct
addressing by default. All of these instructions include
some 8-bit literal address as their Least Significant
Byte. This address specifies either a register address in
one of the banks of data RAM (Section 5.3.3 “General
Purpose Register File”) or a location in the Access
Bank (Section 5.3.2 “Access Bank”) as the data
source for the instruction.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.4.3.1 FSR Registers and the INDF 5.4.3.2 FSR Registers and POSTINC,
Operand POSTDEC, PREINC and PLUSW
At the core of indirect addressing are three sets of reg- In addition to the INDF operand, each FSR register pair
isters: FSR0, FSR1 and FSR2. Each represents a pair also has four additional indirect operands. Like INDF,
of 8-bit registers, FSRnH and FSRnL. Each FSR pair these are “virtual” registers which cannot be directly
holds a 12-bit value, therefore, the four upper bits of the read or written. Accessing these registers actually
FSRnH register are not used. The 12-bit FSR value can accesses the location to which the associated FSR
address the entire range of the data memory in a linear register pair points, and also performs a specific action
fashion. The FSR register pairs, then, serve as pointers on the FSR value. They are:
to data memory locations. • POSTDEC: accesses the location to which the
Indirect addressing is accomplished with a set of FSR points, then automatically decrements the
Indirect File Operands, INDF0 through INDF2. These FSR by 1 afterwards
can be thought of as “virtual” registers: they are • POSTINC: accesses the location to which the
mapped in the SFR space but are not physically FSR points, then automatically increments the
implemented. Reading or writing to a particular INDF FSR by 1 afterwards
register actually accesses its corresponding FSR • PREINC: automatically increments the FSR by 1,
register pair. A read from INDF1, for example, reads then uses the location to which the FSR points in
the data at the address indicated by FSR1H:FSR1L. the operation
Instructions that use the INDF registers as operands
• PLUSW: adds the signed value of the W register
actually use the contents of their corresponding FSR as
(range of -127 to 128) to that of the FSR and uses
a pointer to the instruction’s target. The INDF operand
the location to which the result points in the
is just a convenient way of using the pointer.
operation.
Because indirect addressing uses a full 12-bit address,
In this context, accessing an INDF register uses the
data RAM banking is not necessary. Thus, the current
value in the associated FSR register without changing
contents of the BSR and the Access RAM bit have no
it. Similarly, accessing a PLUSW register gives the
effect on determining the target address.
FSR value an offset by that in the W register; however,
neither W nor the FSR is actually changed in the
operation. Accessing the other virtual registers
changes the value of the FSR register.
FIGURE 5-10: INDIRECT ADDRESSING

000h
Using an instruction with one of the ADDWF, INDF1, 1 Bank 0
indirect addressing registers as the 100h
operand.... Bank 1
200h
Bank 2
300h
...uses the 12-bit address stored in FSR1H:FSR1L
the FSR pair associated with that
7 0 7 0
register.... Bank 3
x x x x 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 through
Bank 13
...to determine the data memory

location to be used in that operation.
In this case, the FSR1 pair contains E00h
ECCh. This means the contents of Bank 14
location ECCh will be added to that F00h
of the W register and stored back in Bank 15
ECCh. FFFh
Data Memory

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Operations on the FSRs with POSTDEC, POSTINC 5.5.1 INDEXED ADDRESSING WITH
and PREINC affect the entire register pair; that is, roll- LITERAL OFFSET
overs of the FSRnL register from FFh to 00h carry over
Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set changes
to the FSRnH register. On the other hand, results of
the behavior of indirect addressing using the FSR2
these operations do not change the value of any flags
register pair within Access RAM. Under the proper
in the STATUS register (e.g., Z, N, OV, etc.).
conditions, instructions that use the Access Bank – that
The PLUSW register can be used to implement a form is, most bit-oriented and byte-oriented instructions –
of indexed addressing in the data memory space. By can invoke a form of indexed addressing using an
manipulating the value in the W register, users can offset specified in the instruction. This special
reach addresses that are fixed offsets from pointer addressing mode is known as Indexed Addressing with
addresses. In some applications, this can be used to Literal Offset, or Indexed Literal Offset mode.
implement some powerful program control structure,
When using the extended instruction set, this
such as software stacks, inside of data memory.
addressing mode requires the following:
5.4.3.3 Operations by FSRs on FSRs • The use of the Access Bank is forced (‘a’ = 0) and
Indirect addressing operations that target other FSRs • The file address argument is less than or equal to
or virtual registers represent special cases. For 5Fh.
example, using an FSR to point to one of the virtual Under these conditions, the file address of the
registers will not result in successful operations. As a instruction is not interpreted as the lower byte of an
specific case, assume that FSR0H:FSR0L contains address (used with the BSR in direct addressing), or as
FE7h, the address of INDF1. Attempts to read the an 8-bit address in the Access Bank. Instead, the value
value of the INDF1 using INDF0 as an operand will is interpreted as an offset value to an Address Pointer,
return 00h. Attempts to write to INDF1 using INDF0 as specified by FSR2. The offset and the contents of
the operand will result in a NOP. FSR2 are added to obtain the target address of the
On the other hand, using the virtual registers to write to operation.
an FSR pair may not occur as planned. In these cases,
the value will be written to the FSR pair but without any 5.5.2 INSTRUCTIONS AFFECTED BY
incrementing or decrementing. Thus, writing to either INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE
the INDF2 or POSTDEC2 register will write the same Any of the core PIC18 instructions that can use direct
value to the FSR2H:FSR2L. addressing are potentially affected by the Indexed
Since the FSRs are physical registers mapped in the Literal Offset Addressing mode. This includes all
SFR space, they can be manipulated through all direct byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost
operations. Users should proceed cautiously when one-half of the standard PIC18 instruction set.
working on these registers, particularly if their code Instructions that only use Inherent or Literal Addressing
uses indirect addressing. modes are unaffected.
Similarly, operations by indirect addressing are generally Additionally, byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions
permitted on all other SFRs. Users should exercise the are not affected if they do not use the Access Bank
appropriate caution that they do not inadvertently change (Access RAM bit is ‘1’), or include a file address of 60h
settings that might affect the operation of the device. or above. Instructions meeting these criteria will
continue to execute as before. A comparison of the
5.5 Data Memory and the Extended different possible addressing modes when the
extended instruction set is enabled is shown in
Instruction Set Figure 5-11.
Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set (XINST Those who desire to use byte-oriented or bit-oriented
Configuration bit = 1) significantly changes certain instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode should
aspects of data memory and its addressing. Specifi- note the changes to assembler syntax for this mode.
cally, the use of the Access Bank for many of the core This is described in more detail in Section 25.2.1
PIC18 instructions is different; this is due to the intro- “Extended Instruction Syntax”.
duction of a new addressing mode for the data memory
space.
What does not change is just as important. The size of
the data memory space is unchanged, as well as its
linear addressing. The SFR map remains the same.
Core PIC18 instructions can still operate in both Direct
and Indirect Addressing mode; inherent and literal
instructions do not change at all. Indirect addressing
with FSR0 and FSR1 also remain unchanged.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 5-11: COMPARING ADDRESSING OPTIONS FOR BIT-ORIENTED AND
BYTE-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS (EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ENABLED)
EXAMPLE INSTRUCTION: ADDWF, f, d, a (Opcode: 0010 01da ffff ffff)
000h
When ‘a’ = 0 and f  60h:
060h
The instruction executes in
Direct Forced mode. ‘f’ is inter- Bank 0
preted as a location in the 100h

Access RAM between 060h 00h
Bank 1
and 0FFh. This is the same as through 60h
locations F60h to FFFh Bank 14
Valid range
(Bank 15) of data memory. for ‘f’
Locations below 60h are not FFh
F00h Access RAM
available in this addressing
Bank 15
mode.
F60h
SFRs
FFFh
Data Memory
When ‘a’ = 0 and f5Fh: 000h

Indexed Literal Offset mode. ‘f’ 060h
Bank 0
is interpreted as an offset to the
100h 001001da ffffffff
address value in FSR2. The
two are added together to Bank 1
obtain the address of the target through
Bank 14
register for the instruction. The
address can be anywhere in FSR2H FSR2L
the data memory space.
F00h
Note that in this mode, the Bank 15
correct syntax is now: F60h
ADDWF [k], d SFRs
where ‘k’ is the same as ‘f’. FFFh
Data Memory
BSR
When ‘a’ = 1 (all values of f): 000h 00000000

060h
Direct mode (also known as
Bank 0
Direct Long mode). ‘f’ is inter- 100h
preted as a location in one of
the 16 banks of the data Bank 1 001001da ffffffff
memory space. The bank is through
Bank 14
designated by the Bank Select
Register (BSR). The address
can be in any implemented F00h
bank in the data memory Bank 15
space. F60h
SFRs
FFFh
Data Memory

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
5.5.3 MAPPING THE ACCESS BANK IN Remapping of the Access Bank applies only to opera-
INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE tions using the Indexed Literal Offset mode. Operations
that use the BSR (Access RAM bit is ‘1’) will continue
The use of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode
to use direct addressing as before.
effectively changes how the first 96 locations of Access
RAM (00h to 5Fh) are mapped. Rather than containing
just the contents of the bottom section of Bank 0, this 5.6 PIC18 Instruction Execution and
mode maps the contents from a user defined “window” the Extended Instruction Set
that can be located anywhere in the data memory
Enabling the extended instruction set adds eight
space. The value of FSR2 establishes the lower bound-
additional commands to the existing PIC18 instruction
ary of the addresses mapped into the window, while the
set. These instructions are executed as described in
upper boundary is defined by FSR2 plus 95 (5Fh).
Section 25.2 “Extended Instruction Set”.
Addresses in the Access RAM above 5Fh are mapped
as previously described (see Section 5.3.2 “Access
Bank”). An example of Access Bank remapping in this
addressing mode is shown in Figure 5-12.
FIGURE 5-12: REMAPPING THE ACCESS BANK WITH INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET
ADDRESSING
Example Situation:
ADDWF f, d, a 000h
FSR2H:FSR2L = 120h
Bank 0
Locations in the region
from the FSR2 pointer 100h
(120h) to the pointer plus Bank 1
120h
05Fh (17Fh) are mapped Window
17Fh 00h
to the bottom of the
Bank 1
Access RAM (000h-05Fh). 200h Bank 1 “Window”
Special File Registers at 5Fh
60h
F60h through FFFh are
mapped to 60h through Bank 2
FFh, as usual. SFRs
through
Bank 0 addresses below Bank 14
5Fh can still be addressed FFh
by using the BSR. Access Bank
F00h
Bank 15
F60h
SFRs
FFFh
Data Memory

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
6.0 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY 6.1 Table Reads and Table Writes
The Flash program memory is readable, writable and In order to read and write program memory, there are
erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD two operations that allow the processor to move bytes
range. between the program memory space and the data RAM:
A read from program memory is executed one byte at • Table Read (TBLRD)
a time. A write to program memory is executed on • Table Write (TBLWT)
blocks of 64 bytes at a time. Program memory is
The program memory space is 16 bits wide, while the
erased in blocks of 64 bytes at a time. The difference
data RAM space is 8 bits wide. Table reads and table
between the write and erase block sizes requires from
writes move data between these two memory spaces
1 to 8 block writes to restore the contents of a single
through an 8-bit register (TABLAT).
block erase. A bulk erase operation can not be issued
from user code. The table read operation retrieves one byte of data
directly from program memory and places it into the
Writing or erasing program memory will cease
TABLAT register. Figure 6-1 shows the operation of a
instruction fetches until the operation is complete. The
table read.
program memory cannot be accessed during the write
or erase, therefore, code cannot execute. An internal The table write operation stores one byte of data from the
programming timer terminates program memory writes TABLAT register into a write block holding register. The
and erases. procedure to write the contents of the holding registers
into program memory is detailed in Section 6.5 “Writing
to Flash Program Memory”. Figure 6-2 shows the
A value written to program memory does not need to be operation of a table write with program memory and data
a valid instruction. Executing a program memory RAM.
location that forms an invalid instruction results in a
Table operations work with byte entities. Tables
NOP.
containing data, rather than program instructions, are
not required to be word aligned. Therefore, a table can
start and end at any byte address. If a table write is being
used to write executable code into program memory,
program instructions will need to be word aligned.
FIGURE 6-1: TABLE READ OPERATION
Instruction: TBLRD*
Program Memory
Table Pointer(1)
Table Latch (8-bit)
TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL
TABLAT
Program Memory
(TBLPTR)
Note 1: Table Pointer register points to a byte in program memory.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 6-2: TABLE WRITE OPERATION
Instruction: TBLWT*
Program Memory Holding Registers
Table Pointer(1) Table Latch (8-bit)

TBLPTRU TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TABLAT
Program Memory
(TBLPTR<MSBs>)
Note 1: During table writes the Table Pointer does not point directly to Program Memory. The LSBs of TBLPRTL
actually point to an address within the write block holding registers. The MSBs of the Table Pointer deter-
mine where the write block will eventually be written. The process for writing the holding registers to the
program memory array is discussed in Section 6.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”.
6.2 Control Registers The FREE bit allows the program memory erase
operation. When FREE is set, an erase operation is
Several control registers are used in conjunction with initiated on the next WR command. When FREE is
the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These include the: clear, only writes are enabled.
• EECON1 register The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation.
• EECON2 register The WREN bit is clear on power-up.
• TABLAT register The WRERR bit is set by hardware when the WR bit is
• TBLPTR registers set and cleared when the internal programming timer
expires and the write operation is complete.
6.2.1 EECON1 AND EECON2 REGISTERS
Note: During normal operation, the WRERR is
The EECON1 register (Register 6-1) is the control read as ‘1’. This can indicate that a write
register for memory accesses. The EECON2 register is operation was prematurely terminated by
not a physical register; it is used exclusively in the a Reset, or a write operation was
memory write and erase sequences. Reading attempted improperly.
EECON2 will read all ‘0’s.
The EEPGD control bit determines if the access will be The WR control bit initiates write operations. The WR
a program or data EEPROM memory access. When bit cannot be cleared, only set, by firmware. Then WR
EEPGD is clear, any subsequent operations will bit is cleared by hardware at the completion of the write
operate on the data EEPROM memory. When EEPGD operation.
is set, any subsequent operations will operate on the Note: The EEIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR2
program memory. register is set when the write is complete.
The CFGS control bit determines if the access will be The EEIF flag stays set until cleared by
to the Configuration/Calibration registers or to program firmware.
memory/data EEPROM memory. When CFGS is set,
subsequent operations will operate on Configuration
registers regardless of EEPGD (see Section 24.0
“Special Features of the CPU”). When CFGS is clear,
memory selection access is determined by EEPGD.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 6-1: EECON1: DATA EEPROM CONTROL 1 REGISTER

R/W-x R/W-x U-0 R/W-0 R/W-x R/W-0 R/S-0 R/S-0
EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit
S = Bit can be set by software, but not cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
bit 7 EEPGD: Flash Program or Data EEPROM Memory Select bit

1 = Access Flash program memory
0 = Access data EEPROM memory
bit 6 CFGS: Flash Program/Data EEPROM or Configuration Select bit
1 = Access Configuration registers
0 = Access Flash program or data EEPROM memory
bit 4 FREE: Flash Row (Block) Erase Enable bit
1 = Erase the program memory block addressed by TBLPTR on the next WR command
(cleared by completion of erase operation)
0 = Perform write-only
bit 3 WRERR: Flash Program/Data EEPROM Error Flag bit(1)
1 = A write operation is prematurely terminated (any Reset during self-timed programming in normal
operation, or an improper write attempt)
0 = The write operation completed
bit 2 WREN: Flash Program/Data EEPROM Write Enable bit
1 = Allows write cycles to Flash program/data EEPROM
0 = Inhibits write cycles to Flash program/data EEPROM
bit 1 WR: Write Control bit
1 = Initiates a data EEPROM erase/write cycle or a program memory erase cycle or write cycle.
(The operation is self-timed and the bit is cleared by hardware once write is complete.
The WR bit can only be set (not cleared) by software.)
0 = Write cycle to the EEPROM is complete
bit 0 RD: Read Control bit
1 = Initiates an EEPROM read (Read takes one cycle. RD is cleared by hardware. The RD bit can only
be set (not cleared) by software. RD bit cannot be set when EEPGD = 1 or CFGS = 1.)
0 = Does not initiate an EEPROM read
Note 1: When a WRERR occurs, the EEPGD and CFGS bits are not cleared. This allows tracing of the
error condition.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
6.2.2 TABLAT – TABLE LATCH REGISTER When a TBLRD is executed, all 22 bits of the TBLPTR
determine which byte is read from program memory
The Table Latch (TABLAT) is an 8-bit register mapped
directly into the TABLAT register.
into the SFR space. The Table Latch register is used to
hold 8-bit data during data transfers between program When a TBLWT is executed the byte in the TABLAT
memory and data RAM. register is written, not to Flash memory but, to a holding
register in preparation for a program memory write. The
6.2.3 TBLPTR – TABLE POINTER holding registers constitute a write block which varies
REGISTER depending on the device (see Table 6-1).The 3, 4, or 5
LSbs of the TBLPTRL register determine which specific
The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register addresses a byte
address within the holding register block is written to.
within the program memory. The TBLPTR is comprised
The MSBs of the Table Pointer have no effect during
of three SFR registers: Table Pointer Upper Byte, Table
TBLWT operations.
Pointer High Byte and Table Pointer Low Byte
(TBLPTRU:TBLPTRH:TBLPTRL). These three regis- When a program memory write is executed the entire
ters join to form a 22-bit wide pointer. The low-order holding register block is written to the Flash memory at
21 bits allow the device to address up to 2 Mbytes of the address determined by the MSbs of the TBLPTR.
program memory space. The 22nd bit allows access to The 3, 4, or 5 LSBs are ignored during Flash memory
the device ID, the user ID and the Configuration bits. writes. For more detail, see Section 6.5 “Writing to
Flash Program Memory”.
The Table Pointer register, TBLPTR, is used by the
TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These instructions can When an erase of program memory is executed, the
update the TBLPTR in one of four ways based on the 16 MSbs of the Table Pointer register (TBLPTR<21:6>)
table operation. These operations on the TBLPTR point to the 64-byte block that will be erased. The Least
affect only the low-order 21 bits. Significant bits (TBLPTR<5:0>) are ignored.
Figure 6-3 describes the relevant boundaries of
6.2.4 TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES TBLPTR based on Flash program memory operations.
TBLPTR is used in reads, writes and erases of the
Flash program memory.
TABLE 6-1: TABLE POINTER OPERATIONS WITH TBLRD AND TBLWT INSTRUCTIONS
Example Operation on Table Pointer
TBLRD*
TBLPTR is not modified
TBLWT*
TBLRD*+
TBLPTR is incremented after the read/write
TBLWT*+
TBLRD*-
TBLPTR is decremented after the read/write
TBLWT*-
TBLRD+*
TBLPTR is incremented before the read/write
TBLWT+*
FIGURE 6-3: TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES BASED ON OPERATION
21 TBLPTRU 16 15 TBLPTRH 8 7 TBLPTRL 0
TABLE ERASE/WRITE TABLE WRITE

TBLPTR<21:n+1>(1) TBLPTR<n:0>(1)
TABLE READ – TBLPTR<21:0>
Note 1: n = 6 for block sizes of 64 bytes.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
6.3 Reading the Flash Program The internal program memory is typically organized by
Memory words. The Least Significant bit of the address selects
between the high and low bytes of the word. Figure 6-4
The TBLRD instruction retrieves data from program shows the interface between the internal program
memory and places it into data RAM. Table reads from memory and the TABLAT.
program memory are performed one byte at a time.
TBLPTR points to a byte address in program space.
Executing TBLRD places the byte pointed to into
TABLAT. In addition, TBLPTR can be modified
automatically for the next table read operation.
FIGURE 6-4: READS FROM FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
Program Memory
(Even Byte Address) (Odd Byte Address)
TBLPTR = xxxxx1 TBLPTR = xxxxx0
Instruction Register TABLAT

FETCH TBLRD
(IR) Read Register
EXAMPLE 6-1: READING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WORD

MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; Load TBLPTR with the base
MOVWF TBLPTRU ; address of the word
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_HIGH
MOVWF TBLPTRH
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF TBLPTRL
READ_WORD
TBLRD*+ ; read into TABLAT and increment
MOVF TABLAT, W ; get data
MOVWF WORD_EVEN
TBLRD*+ ; read into TABLAT and increment
MOVFW TABLAT, W ; get data
MOVF WORD_ODD

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
6.4 Erasing Flash Program Memory 6.4.1 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
ERASE SEQUENCE
The minimum erase block is 32 words or 64 bytes. Only
through the use of an external programmer, or through The sequence of events for erasing a block of internal
ICSP™ control, can larger blocks of program memory program memory is:
be bulk erased. Word erase in the Flash array is not 1. Load Table Pointer register with address of
supported. block being erased.
When initiating an erase sequence from the 2. Set the EECON1 register for the erase operation:
microcontroller itself, a block of 64 bytes of program • set EEPGD bit to point to program memory;
memory is erased. The Most Significant 16 bits of the • clear the CFGS bit to access program memory;
TBLPTR<21:6> point to the block being erased. The
• set WREN bit to enable writes;
TBLPTR<5:0> bits are ignored.
• set FREE bit to enable the erase.
The EECON1 register commands the erase operation.
3. Disable interrupts.
The EEPGD bit must be set to point to the Flash
program memory. The WREN bit must be set to enable 4. Write 55h to EECON2.
write operations. The FREE bit is set to select an erase 5. Write 0AAh to EECON2.
operation. 6. Set the WR bit. This will begin the block erase
The write initiate sequence for EECON2, shown as cycle.
steps 4 through 6 in Section 6.4.1 “Flash Program 7. The CPU will stall for duration of the erase
Memory Erase Sequence”, is used to guard against (about 2 ms using internal timer).
accidental writes. This is sometimes referred to as a 8. Re-enable interrupts.
long write.
A long write is necessary for erasing the internal Flash.
Instruction execution is halted during the long write
cycle. The long write is terminated by the internal
programming timer.
EXAMPLE 6-2: ERASING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY BLOCK

MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; load TBLPTR with the base
MOVWF TBLPTRU ; address of the memory block
MOVWF TBLPTRH
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF TBLPTRL
ERASE_BLOCK
BSF EECON1, EEPGD ; point to Flash program memory
BCF EECON1, CFGS ; access Flash program memory
BSF EECON1, WREN ; enable write to memory
BSF EECON1, FREE ; enable block Erase operation
BCF INTCON, GIE ; disable interrupts
Required MOVLW 55h
Sequence MOVWF EECON2 ; write 55h
MOVLW 0AAh
MOVWF EECON2 ; write 0AAh
BSF EECON1, WR ; start erase (CPU stall)
BSF INTCON, GIE ; re-enable interrupts

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
6.5 Writing to Flash Program Memory The long write is necessary for programming the
internal Flash. Instruction execution is halted during a
The programming block size is 64 bytes. Word or byte long write cycle. The long write will be terminated by
programming is not supported. the internal programming timer.
Table writes are used internally to load the holding The EEPROM on-chip timer controls the write time.
registers needed to program the Flash memory. There The write/erase voltages are generated by an on-chip
are only as many holding registers as there are bytes charge pump, rated to operate over the voltage range
in a write block (64 bytes). of the device.
Since the Table Latch (TABLAT) is only a single byte,
Note: The default value of the holding registers on
the TBLWT instruction needs to be executed 64 times
device Resets and after write operations is
for each programming operation. All of the table write
FFh. A write of FFh to a holding register
operations will essentially be short writes because only
does not modify that byte. This means that
the holding registers are written. After all the holding
individual bytes of program memory may be
registers have been written, the programming
modified, provided that the change does not
operation of that block of memory is started by
attempt to change any bit from a ‘0’ to a ‘1’.
configuring the EECON1 register for a program
memory write and performing the long write sequence. When modifying individual bytes, it is not
necessary to load all holding registers
before executing a long write operation.
FIGURE 6-5: TABLE WRITES TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
TABLAT
Write Register
8 8 8 8
TBLPTR = xxxx00 TBLPTR = xxxx01 TBLPTR = xxxx02 TBLPTR = xxxxYY(1)
Holding Register Holding Register Holding Register Holding Register
Program Memory
Note 1: YY = 3F for 64 byte write blocks.
6.5.1 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE 8. Disable interrupts.

SEQUENCE 9. Write 55h to EECON2.
The sequence of events for programming an internal 10. Write 0AAh to EECON2.
program memory location should be: 11. Set the WR bit. This will begin the write cycle.
1. Read 64 bytes into RAM. 12. The CPU will stall for duration of the write (about
2. Update data values in RAM as necessary. 2 ms using internal timer).
3. Load Table Pointer register with address being 13. Re-enable interrupts.
erased. 14. Verify the memory (table read).
4. Execute the block erase procedure. This procedure will require about 6 ms to update each
5. Load Table Pointer register with address of first write block of memory. An example of the required code
byte being written. is given in Example 6-3.
6. Write the 64-byte block into the holding registers Note: Before setting the WR bit, the Table
with auto-increment. Pointer address needs to be within the
7. Set the EECON1 register for the write operation: intended address range of the bytes in the
• set EEPGD bit to point to program memory; holding registers.
• clear the CFGS bit to access program memory;
• set WREN to enable byte writes.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
EXAMPLE 6-3: WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
MOVLW D'64’ ; number of bytes in erase block
MOVWF COUNTER
MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH ; point to buffer
MOVWF FSR0H
MOVLW BUFFER_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF FSR0L
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; Load TBLPTR with the base
MOVWF TBLPTRH
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF TBLPTRL
READ_BLOCK
TBLRD*+ ; read into TABLAT, and inc
MOVF TABLAT, W ; get data
MOVWF POSTINC0 ; store data
DECFSZ COUNTER ; done?
BRA READ_BLOCK ; repeat
MODIFY_WORD
MOVWF FSR0H
MOVWF FSR0L
MOVLW NEW_DATA_LOW ; update buffer word
MOVWF POSTINC0
MOVLW NEW_DATA_HIGH
MOVWF INDF0
ERASE_BLOCK
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER ; load TBLPTR with the base
MOVWF TBLPTRH
MOVLW CODE_ADDR_LOW
MOVWF TBLPTRL
BSF EECON1, FREE ; enable Erase operation
MOVLW 55h
Required MOVWF EECON2 ; write 55h
Sequence MOVLW 0AAh
BSF EECON1, WR ; start erase (CPU stall)
TBLRD*- ; dummy read decrement
MOVWF FSR0H
MOVWF FSR0L
WRITE_BUFFER_BACK
MOVLW BlockSize ; number of bytes in holding register
MOVWF COUNTER
MOVLW D’64’/BlockSize ; number of write blocks in 64 bytes
MOVWF COUNTER2
WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS
MOVF POSTINC0, W ; get low byte of buffer data
MOVWF TABLAT ; present data to table latch
TBLWT+* ; write data, perform a short write
; to internal TBLWT holding register.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
EXAMPLE 6-3: WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY (CONTINUED)
DECFSZ COUNTER ; loop until holding registers are full
BRA WRITE_WORD_TO_HREGS
PROGRAM_MEMORY
MOVLW 55h
Required MOVWF EECON2 ; write 55h
Sequence MOVLW 0AAh
BSF EECON1, WR ; start program (CPU stall)
DCFSZ COUNTER2 ; repeat for remaining write blocks
BRA WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS ;
BCF EECON1, WREN ; disable write to memory
6.5.2 WRITE VERIFY 6.5.4 PROTECTION AGAINST

Depending on the application, good programming SPURIOUS WRITES
practice may dictate that the value written to the To protect against spurious writes to Flash program
memory should be verified against the original value. memory, the write initiate sequence must also be
This should be used in applications where excessive followed. See Section 24.0 “Special Features of the
writes can stress bits near the specification limit. CPU” for more detail.
6.5.3 UNEXPECTED TERMINATION OF 6.6 Flash Program Operation During

WRITE OPERATION
Code Protection
If a write is terminated by an unplanned event, such as
loss of power or an unexpected Reset, the memory See Section 24.3 “Program Verification and Code
location just programmed should be verified and Protection” for details on code protection of Flash
reprogrammed if needed. If the write operation is program memory.
interrupted by a MCLR Reset or a WDT Time-out Reset
during normal operation, the WRERR bit will be set
which the user can check to decide whether a rewrite
of the location(s) is needed.
TABLE 6-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY
Reset
Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Values on
page
TBLPTRU — — Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<21:16>) —
TBPLTRH Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) —
TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) —
TABLAT Program Memory Table Latch —
EECON2 EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) —
EECON1 EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD 97
IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 128
PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 119
PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 124
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used during Flash/EEPROM access.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
7.0 DATA EEPROM MEMORY The EECON1 register (Register 7-1) is the control
register for data and program memory access. Control
The data EEPROM is a nonvolatile memory array, bit EEPGD determines if the access will be to program
separate from the data RAM and program memory, or data EEPROM memory. When the EEPGD bit is
which is used for long-term storage of program data. It clear, operations will access the data EEPROM
is not directly mapped in either the register file or memory. When the EEPGD bit is set, program memory
program memory space but is indirectly addressed is accessed.
through the Special Function Registers (SFRs). The
Control bit, CFGS, determines if the access will be to
EEPROM is readable and writable during normal
the Configuration registers or to program memory/data
operation over the entire VDD range.
EEPROM memory. When the CFGS bit is set,
Four SFRs are used to read and write to the data subsequent operations access Configuration registers.
EEPROM as well as the program memory. They are: When the CFGS bit is clear, the EEPGD bit selects
• EECON1 either program Flash or data EEPROM memory.
• EECON2 The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation.
• EEDATA On power-up, the WREN bit is clear.
• EEADR The WRERR bit is set by hardware when the WR bit is
• EEADRH set and cleared when the internal programming timer
expires and the write operation is complete.
The data EEPROM allows byte read and write. When
interfacing to the data memory block, EEDATA holds Note: During normal operation, the WRERR
the 8-bit data for read/write and the EEADR:EEADRH may read as ‘1’. This can indicate that a
register pair hold the address of the EEPROM location write operation was prematurely termi-
being accessed. nated by a Reset, or a write operation was
The EEPROM data memory is rated for high erase/write attempted improperly.
cycle endurance. A byte write automatically erases the The WR control bit initiates write operations. The bit
location and writes the new data (erase-before-write). can be set but not cleared by software. It is cleared only
The write time is controlled by an on-chip timer; it will by hardware at the completion of the write operation.
vary with voltage and temperature as well as from chip-
to-chip. Please refer to the Data EEPROM Memory Note: The EEIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR2
parameters in Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteris- register is set when the write is complete.
tics” for limits. It must be cleared by software.
Control bits, RD and WR, start read and erase/write

7.1 EEADR and EEADRH Registers
operations, respectively. These bits are set by firmware
The EEADR register is used to address the data and cleared by hardware at the completion of the
EEPROM for read and write operations. The 8-bit operation.
range of the register can address a memory range of The RD bit cannot be set when accessing program
256 bytes (00h to FFh). The EEADRH register expands memory (EEPGD = 1). Program memory is read using
the range to 1024 bytes by adding an additional two table read instructions. See Section 6.1 “Table Reads
address bits. and Table Writes” regarding table reads.
7.2 EECON1 and EECON2 Registers The EECON2 register is not a physical register. It is
used exclusively in the memory write and erase
Access to the data EEPROM is controlled by two sequences. Reading EECON2 will read all ‘0’s.
registers: EECON1 and EECON2. These are the same
registers which control access to the program memory
and are used in a similar manner for the data
EEPROM.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 7-1: EECON1: DATA EEPROM CONTROL 1 REGISTER

R/W-x R/W-x U-0 R/W-0 R/W-x R/W-0 R/S-0 R/S-0
EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit W = Writable bit
S = Bit can be set by software, but not cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
bit 7 EEPGD: Flash Program or Data EEPROM Memory Select bit

1 = Access Flash program memory
0 = Access data EEPROM memory
bit 6 CFGS: Flash Program/Data EEPROM or Configuration Select bit
1 = Access Configuration registers
0 = Access Flash program or data EEPROM memory
bit 4 FREE: Flash Row (Block) Erase Enable bit
1 = Erase the program memory block addressed by TBLPTR on the next WR command
(cleared by completion of erase operation)
0 = Perform write-only
bit 3 WRERR: Flash Program/Data EEPROM Error Flag bit(1)
1 = A write operation is prematurely terminated (any Reset during self-timed programming in normal
operation, or an improper write attempt)
0 = The write operation completed
bit 2 WREN: Flash Program/Data EEPROM Write Enable bit
1 = Allows write cycles to Flash program/data EEPROM
0 = Inhibits write cycles to Flash program/data EEPROM
bit 1 WR: Write Control bit
1 = Initiates a data EEPROM erase/write cycle or a program memory erase cycle or write cycle.
(The operation is self-timed and the bit is cleared by hardware once write is complete.
The WR bit can only be set (not cleared) by software.)
0 = Write cycle to the EEPROM is complete
bit 0 RD: Read Control bit
1 = Initiates an EEPROM read (Read takes one cycle. RD is cleared by hardware. The RD bit can only
be set (not cleared) by software. RD bit cannot be set when EEPGD = 1 or CFGS = 1.)
0 = Does not initiate an EEPROM read
Note 1: When a WRERR occurs, the EEPGD and CFGS bits are not cleared. This allows tracing of the
error condition.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
7.3 Reading the Data EEPROM Additionally, the WREN bit in EECON1 must be set to
Memory enable writes. This mechanism prevents accidental
writes to data EEPROM due to unexpected code
To read a data memory location, the user must write the execution (i.e., runaway programs). The WREN bit
address to the EEADR register, clear the EEPGD con- should be kept clear at all times, except when updating
trol bit of the EECON1 register and then set control bit, the EEPROM. The WREN bit is not cleared by
RD. The data is available on the very next instruction hardware.
cycle; therefore, the EEDATA register can be read by
After a write sequence has been initiated, EECON1,
the next instruction. EEDATA will hold this value until
EEADR and EEDATA cannot be modified. The WR bit
another read operation, or until it is written to by the
will be inhibited from being set unless the WREN bit is
user (during a write operation).
set. Both WR and WREN cannot be set with the same
The basic process is shown in Example 7-1. instruction.
At the completion of the write cycle, the WR bit is
7.4 Writing to the Data EEPROM cleared by hardware and the EEPROM Interrupt Flag
Memory bit, EEIF, is set. The user may either enable this
interrupt or poll this bit. EEIF must be cleared by
To write an EEPROM data location, the address must
software.
first be written to the EEADR register and the data writ-
ten to the EEDATA register. The sequence in
Example 7-2 must be followed to initiate the write cycle. 7.5 Write Verify
The write will not begin if this sequence is not exactly Depending on the application, good programming
followed (write 55h to EECON2, write 0AAh to practice may dictate that the value written to the
EECON2, then set WR bit) for each byte. It is strongly memory should be verified against the original value.
recommended that interrupts be disabled during this This should be used in applications where excessive
code segment. writes can stress bits near the specification limit.
EXAMPLE 7-1: DATA EEPROM READ

MOVLW DATA_EE_ADDR ;
MOVWF EEADR ; Data Memory Address to read
BCF EECON1, EEPGD ; Point to DATA memory
BCF EECON1, CFGS ; Access EEPROM
BSF EECON1, RD ; EEPROM Read
MOVF EEDATA, W ; W = EEDATA
EXAMPLE 7-2: DATA EEPROM WRITE

MOVLW DATA_EE_ADDR_LOW ;
MOVWF EEADR ; Data Memory Address to write
MOVLW DATA_EE_ADDR_HI ;
MOVWF EEADRH ;
MOVLW DATA_EE_DATA ;
MOVWF EEDATA ; Data Memory Value to write
BCF EECON1, EEPGD ; Point to DATA memory
BCF EECON1, CFGS ; Access EEPROM
BSF EECON1, WREN ; Enable writes
BCF INTCON, GIE ; Disable Interrupts
MOVLW 55h ;
Required MOVWF EECON2 ; Write 55h
Sequence MOVLW 0AAh ;
MOVWF EECON2 ; Write 0AAh
BSF EECON1, WR ; Set WR bit to begin write
BSF INTCON, GIE ; Enable Interrupts
; User code execution

BCF EECON1, WREN ; Disable writes on write complete (EEIF set)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
7.6 Operation During Code-Protect The write initiate sequence and the WREN bit together
help prevent an accidental write during brown-out,
Data EEPROM memory has its own code-protect bits in power glitch or software malfunction.
Configuration Words. External read and write
operations are disabled if code protection is enabled.
7.8 Using the Data EEPROM
The microcontroller itself can both read and write to the
internal data EEPROM, regardless of the state of the The data EEPROM is a high-endurance, byte
code-protect Configuration bit. Refer to Section 24.0 addressable array that has been optimized for the
“Special Features of the CPU” for additional storage of frequently changing information (e.g.,
information. program variables or other data that are updated often).
When variables in one section change frequently, while
variables in another section do not change, it is possible
7.7 Protection Against Spurious Write
to exceed the total number of write cycles to the
There are conditions when the user may not want to EEPROM without exceeding the total number of write
write to the data EEPROM memory. To protect against cycles to a single byte. Refer to the Data EEPROM
spurious EEPROM writes, various mechanisms have Memory parameters in Section 27.0 “Electrical
been implemented. On power-up, the WREN bit is Characteristics” for write cycle limits. If this is the case,
cleared. In addition, writes to the EEPROM are blocked then an array refresh must be performed. For this
during the Power-up Timer period (TPWRT). reason, variables that change infrequently (such as
constants, IDs, calibration, etc.) should be stored in
Flash program memory.
A simple data EEPROM refresh routine is shown in
Example 7-3.
Note: If data EEPROM is only used to store
constants and/or data that changes rarely,
an array refresh is likely not required. See
specification.
EXAMPLE 7-3: DATA EEPROM REFRESH ROUTINE

CLRF EEADR ; Start at address 0
BCF EECON1, CFGS ; Set for memory
BCF EECON1, EEPGD ; Set for Data EEPROM
BCF INTCON, GIE ; Disable interrupts
BSF EECON1, WREN ; Enable writes
Loop ; Loop to refresh array
BSF EECON1, RD ; Read current address
MOVLW 55h ;
MOVWF EECON2 ; Write 55h
MOVLW 0AAh ;
MOVWF EECON2 ; Write 0AAh
BSF EECON1, WR ; Set WR bit to begin write
BTFSC EECON1, WR ; Wait for write to complete
BRA $-2
INCFSZ EEADR, F ; Increment address
BRA LOOP ; Not zero, do it again
BCF EECON1, WREN ; Disable writes

BSF INTCON, GIE ; Enable interrupts

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 7-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH DATA EEPROM MEMORY

Register
on Page
EEADR EEADR7 EEADR6 EEADR5 EEADR4 EEADR3 EEADR2 EEADR1 EEADR0 —
(1)
EEADRH — — — — — — EEADR9 EEADR8 —
EEDATA EEPROM Data Register —
EECON2 EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) —
EECON1 EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD 106
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used during EEPROM access.
Note 1: PIC18(L)F26K22 and PIC18(L)F46K22 only.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
8.0 8 x 8 HARDWARE MULTIPLIER EXAMPLE 8-1: 8 x 8 UNSIGNED
MULTIPLY ROUTINE
8.1 Introduction MOVF ARG1, W ;
MULWF ARG2 ; ARG1 * ARG2 ->
All PIC18 devices include an 8 x 8 hardware multiplier ; PRODH:PRODL
as part of the ALU. The multiplier performs an unsigned
operation and yields a 16-bit result that is stored in the
product register pair, PRODH:PRODL. The multiplier’s EXAMPLE 8-2: 8 x 8 SIGNED MULTIPLY
operation does not affect any flags in the STATUS ROUTINE
register.
MOVF ARG1, W
Making multiplication a hardware operation allows it to MULWF ARG2 ; ARG1 * ARG2 ->
be completed in a single instruction cycle. This has the ; PRODH:PRODL
advantages of higher computational throughput and BTFSC ARG2, SB ; Test Sign Bit
reduced code size for multiplication algorithms and SUBWF PRODH, F ; PRODH = PRODH
allows the PIC18 devices to be used in many applica- ; - ARG1
MOVF ARG2, W
tions previously reserved for digital signal processors.
BTFSC ARG1, SB ; Test Sign Bit
A comparison of various hardware and software
SUBWF PRODH, F ; PRODH = PRODH
multiply operations, along with the savings in memory ; - ARG2
and execution time, is shown in Table .
8.2 Operation
Example 8-1 shows the instruction sequence for an 8 x 8
unsigned multiplication. Only one instruction is required
when one of the arguments is already loaded in the
WREG register.
Example 8-2 shows the sequence to do an 8 x 8 signed
multiplication. To account for the sign bits of the
arguments, each argument’s Most Significant bit (MSb)
is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done.
TABLE 8-1: PERFORMANCE COMPARISON FOR VARIOUS MULTIPLY OPERATIONS

Program Time
Cycles
Routine Multiply Method Memory
(Max) @ 64 MHz @ 40 MHz @ 10 MHz @ 4 MHz
(Words)
Without hardware multiply 13 69 4.3 s 6.9 s 27.6 s 69 s
8 x 8 unsigned
Hardware multiply 1 1 62.5 ns 100 ns 400 ns 1 s
8 x 8 signed
Hardware multiply 6 6 375 ns 600 ns 2.4 s 6 s
16 x 16 unsigned
Hardware multiply 28 28 1.8 s 2.8 s 11.2 s 28 s
16 x 16 signed
Hardware multiply 35 40 2.5 s 4.0 s 16.0 s 40 s

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Example 8-3 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 EQUATION 8-2: 16 x 16 SIGNED
unsigned multiplication. Equation 8-1 shows the MULTIPLICATION
algorithm that is used. The 32-bit result is stored in four ALGORITHM
registers (RES<3:0>). RES3:RES0 = ARG1H:ARG1L  ARG2H:ARG2L
= (ARG1H  ARG2H  216) +
EQUATION 8-1: 16 x 16 UNSIGNED (ARG1H  ARG2L  28) +
MULTIPLICATION (ARG1L  ARG2H  28) +
(ARG1L  ARG2L) +
ALGORITHM
(-1  ARG2H<7>  ARG1H:ARG1L  216) +
RES3:RES0 = ARG1H:ARG1L  ARG2H:ARG2L
(-1  ARG1H<7>  ARG2H:ARG2L  216)
= (ARG1H  ARG2H  216) +
(ARG1H  ARG2L  28) +
(ARG1L  ARG2H  28) + EXAMPLE 8-4: 16 x 16 SIGNED
(ARG1L  ARG2L) MULTIPLY ROUTINE
MOVF ARG1L, W
EXAMPLE 8-3: 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1L * ARG2L ->
MULTIPLY ROUTINE ; PRODH:PRODL
MOVFF PRODH, RES1 ;
MOVF ARG1L, W
MOVFF PRODL, RES0 ;
MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1L * ARG2L->
;
; PRODH:PRODL
MOVF ARG1H, W
MOVFF PRODH, RES1 ;
MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1H * ARG2H ->
MOVFF PRODL, RES0 ;
; PRODH:PRODL
;
MOVFF PRODH, RES3 ;
MOVF ARG1H, W
MOVFF PRODL, RES2 ;
MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1H * ARG2H->
;
; PRODH:PRODL
MOVF ARG1L, W
MOVFF PRODH, RES3 ;
MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1L * ARG2H ->
MOVFF PRODL, RES2 ;
; PRODH:PRODL
;
MOVF PRODL, W ;
MOVF ARG1L, W
ADDWF RES1, F ; Add cross
MULWF ARG2H ; ARG1L * ARG2H->
MOVF PRODH, W ; products
; PRODH:PRODL
ADDWFC RES2, F ;
MOVF PRODL, W ;
CLRF WREG ;
ADDWFC RES3, F ;
;
ADDWFC RES2, F ;
MOVF ARG1H, W ;
CLRF WREG ;
MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1H * ARG2L ->
ADDWFC RES3, F ;
; PRODH:PRODL
;
MOVF PRODL, W ;
MOVF ARG1H, W ;
MULWF ARG2L ; ARG1H * ARG2L->
; PRODH:PRODL
ADDWFC RES2, F ;
MOVF PRODL, W ;
CLRF WREG ;
ADDWFC RES3, F ;
;
ADDWFC RES2, F ;
BTFSS ARG2H, 7 ; ARG2H:ARG2L neg?
CLRF WREG ;
BRA SIGN_ARG1 ; no, check ARG1
ADDWFC RES3, F ;
MOVF ARG1L, W ;
SUBWF RES2 ;
Example 8-4 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 MOVF ARG1H, W ;
signed multiply. Equation 8-2 shows the algorithm SUBWFB RES3
used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers ;
(RES<3:0>). To account for the sign bits of the argu- SIGN_ARG1
ments, the MSb for each argument pair is tested and BTFSS ARG1H, 7 ; ARG1H:ARG1L neg?
BRA CONT_CODE ; no, done
the appropriate subtractions are done.
MOVF ARG2L, W ;
SUBWF RES2 ;
MOVF ARG2H, W ;
SUBWFB RES3
;
CONT_CODE
:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
9.0 INTERRUPTS 9.2 Interrupt Priority
The PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices have multiple The interrupt priority feature is enabled by setting the
interrupt sources and an interrupt priority feature that IPEN bit of the RCON register. When interrupt priority
allows most interrupt sources to be assigned a high or is enabled the GIE/GIEH and PEIE/GIEL global inter-
low priority level (INT0 does not have a priority bit, it is rupt enable bits of Compatibility mode are replaced by
always a high priority). The high priority interrupt vector the GIEH high priority, and GIEL low priority, global
is at 0008h and the low priority interrupt vector is at interrupt enables. When set, the GIEH bit of the
0018h. A high priority interrupt event will interrupt a low INTCON register enables all interrupts that have their
priority interrupt that may be in progress. associated IPRx register or INTCONx register priority
bit set (high priority). When clear, the GIEH bit disables
There are 19 registers used to control interrupt
all interrupt sources including those selected as low pri-
operation.
ority. When clear, the GIEL bit of the INTCON register
These registers are: disables only the interrupts that have their associated
• INTCON, INTCON2, INTCON3 priority bit cleared (low priority). When set, the GIEL bit
• PIR1, PIR2, PIR3, PIR4, PIR5 enables the low priority sources when the GIEH bit is
also set.
• PIE1, PIE2, PIE3, PIE4, PIE5
• IPR1, IPR2, IPR3, IPR4, IPR5 When the interrupt flag, enable bit and appropriate
Global Interrupt Enable (GIE) bit are all set, the
• RCON
interrupt will vector immediately to address 0008h for
It is recommended that the Microchip header files sup- high priority, or 0018h for low priority, depending on
plied with MPLAB® IDE be used for the symbolic bit level of the interrupting source’s priority bit. Individual
names in these registers. This allows the assembler/ interrupts can be disabled through their corresponding
compiler to automatically take care of the placement of interrupt enable bits.
these bits within the specified register.
In general, interrupt sources have three bits to control 9.3 Interrupt Response
their operation. They are:
When an interrupt is responded to, the Global Interrupt
• Flag bit to indicate that an interrupt event Enable bit is cleared to disable further interrupts. The
occurred GIE/GIEH bit is the global interrupt enable when the
• Enable bit that allows program execution to IPEN bit is cleared. When the IPEN bit is set, enabling
branch to the interrupt vector address when the interrupt priority levels, the GIEH bit is the high priority
flag bit is set global interrupt enable and the GIEL bit is the low
• Priority bit to select high priority or low priority priority global interrupt enable. High priority interrupt
sources can interrupt a low priority interrupt. Low
9.1 Mid-Range Compatibility priority interrupts are not processed while high priority
interrupts are in progress.
When the IPEN bit is cleared (default state), the interrupt The return address is pushed onto the stack and the
priority feature is disabled and interrupts are compatible PC is loaded with the interrupt vector address (0008h
with PIC® microcontroller mid-range devices. In or 0018h). Once in the Interrupt Service Routine, the
Compatibility mode, the interrupt priority bits of the IPRx source(s) of the interrupt can be determined by polling
registers have no effect. The PEIE/GIEL bit of the the interrupt flag bits in the INTCONx and PIRx
INTCON register is the global interrupt enable for the registers. The interrupt flag bits must be cleared by
peripherals. The PEIE/GIEL bit disables only the software before re-enabling interrupts to avoid
peripheral interrupt sources and enables the peripheral repeating the same interrupt.
interrupt sources when the GIE/GIEH bit is also set. The
GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON register is the global The “return from interrupt” instruction, RETFIE, exits
interrupt enable which enables all non-peripheral the interrupt routine and sets the GIE/GIEH bit (GIEH
interrupt sources and disables all interrupt sources, or GIEL if priority levels are used), which re-enables
including the peripherals. All interrupts branch to interrupts.
address 0008h in Compatibility mode. For external interrupt events, such as the INT pins or
the PORTB interrupt-on-change, the interrupt latency
will be three to four instruction cycles. The exact
latency is the same for one-cycle or two-cycle

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
instructions. Individual interrupt flag bits are set,
regardless of the status of their corresponding enable
bits or the Global Interrupt Enable bit.
Note: Do not use the MOVFF instruction to modify
any of the interrupt control registers while
any interrupt is enabled. Doing so may
cause erratic microcontroller behavior.
FIGURE 9-1: PIC18 INTERRUPT LOGIC
Wake-up if in
INT0IF Idle or Sleep modes
INT0IE
TMR0IF
TMR0IE
TMR0IP
(1)
RBIF
RBIE
RBIP
INT1IF Interrupt to CPU
PIR1<6:0> INT1IE Vector to Location
PIE1<6:0> INT1IP 0008h
IPR1<6:0>
INT2IF
PIR2<7:0> INT2IE
PIE2<7:0> INT2IP
IPR2<7:0>
GIEH/GIE
PIR3<7:0>
PIE3<7:0>
IPR3<7:0> IPEN
PIR4<2:0>
PIE4<2:0> IPEN
IPR4<2:0> GIEL/PEIE
PIR5<2:0> IPEN
PIE5<2:0>
IPR5<2:0>
High Priority Interrupt Generation
Low Priority Interrupt Generation

PIR1<6:0>
PIE1<6:0>
IPR1<6:0>
PIR2<7:0>
PIE2<7:0>
IPR2<7:0>
PIR3<7:0>
PIE3<7:0>
IPR3<7:0> Interrupt to CPU
TMR0IF Vector to Location
PIR4<2:0> TMR0IE 0018h
PIE4<2:0> TMR0IP
IPR4<2:0>
PIR5<2:0> (1)
PIE5<2:0> RBIF
RBIE
IPR5<2:0> RBIP GIEH/GIE
GIEL/PEIE
INT1IF
INT1IE
INT1IP
INT2IF
INT2IE
INT2IP
Note 1: The RBIF interrupt also requires the individual pin IOCB enables.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
9.4 INTCON Registers Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt
The INTCON registers are readable and writable condition occurs, regardless of the state of
registers, which contain various enable, priority and its corresponding enable bit or the global
flag bits. enable bit. User software should ensure
the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear
prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature
allows for software polling.
REGISTER 9-1: INTCON: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-x
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 GIE/GIEH: Global Interrupt Enable bit

When IPEN = 0:
1 = Enables all unmasked interrupts
0 = Disables all interrupts including peripherals
When IPEN = 1:
1 = Enables all high priority interrupts
0 = Disables all interrupts including low priority
bit 6 PEIE/GIEL: Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit
When IPEN = 0:
1 = Enables all unmasked peripheral interrupts
0 = Disables all peripheral interrupts
When IPEN = 1:
1 = Enables all low priority interrupts
0 = Disables all low priority interrupts
bit 5 TMR0IE: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the TMR0 overflow interrupt
0 = Disables the TMR0 overflow interrupt
bit 4 INT0IE: INT0 External Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the INT0 external interrupt
0 = Disables the INT0 external interrupt
bit 3 RBIE: Port B Interrupt-On-Change (IOCx) Interrupt Enable bit(2)
1 = Enables the IOCx port change interrupt
0 = Disables the IOCx port change interrupt
bit 2 TMR0IF: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit
1 = TMR0 register has overflowed (must be cleared by software)
0 = TMR0 register did not overflow
bit 1 INT0IF: INT0 External Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The INT0 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared by software)
0 = The INT0 external interrupt did not occur
bit 0 RBIF: Port B Interrupt-On-Change (IOCx) Interrupt Flag bit(1)
1 = At least one of the IOC<3:0> (RB<7:4>) pins changed state (must be cleared by software)
0 = None of the IOC<3:0> (RB<7:4>) pins have changed state
Note 1: A mismatch condition will continue to set the RBIF bit. Reading PORTB will end the
mismatch condition and allow the bit to be cleared.
2: RB port change interrupts also require the individual pin IOCB enables.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 9-2: INTCON2: INTERRUPT CONTROL 2 REGISTER

R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1
RBPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 — TMR0IP — RBIP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 RBPU: PORTB Pull-up Enable bit

1 = All PORTB pull-ups are disabled
0 = PORTB pull-ups are enabled provided that the pin is an input and the corresponding WPUB bit is
set.
bit 6 INTEDG0: External Interrupt 0 Edge Select bit
1 = Interrupt on rising edge
0 = Interrupt on falling edge
bit 2 TMR0IP: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 0 RBIP: RB Port Change Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt

condition occurs, regardless of the state of
its corresponding enable bit or the global
enable bit. User software should ensure

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 9-3: INTCON3: INTERRUPT CONTROL 3 REGISTER

R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
INT2IP INT1IP — INT2IE INT1IE — INT2IF INT1IF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 INT2IP: INT2 External Interrupt Priority bit

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6 INT1IP: INT1 External Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt

condition occurs, regardless of the state of
its corresponding enable bit or the global
enable bit. User software should ensure

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
9.5 PIR Registers Note 1: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt
The PIR registers contain the individual flag bits for the condition occurs, regardless of the state
peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral of its corresponding enable bit or the
interrupt sources, there are five Peripheral Interrupt Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE/GIEH of
Request Flag registers (PIR1, PIR2, PIR3, PIR4 and the INTCON register.
PIR5). 2: User software should ensure the appropri-
ate interrupt flag bits are cleared prior to
enabling an interrupt and after servicing
that interrupt.
REGISTER 9-4: PIR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 1

U-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6 ADIF: A/D Converter Interrupt Flag bit
1 = An A/D conversion completed (must be cleared by software)
0 = The A/D conversion is not complete or has not been started
bit 5 RC1IF: EUSART1 Receive Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The EUSART1 receive buffer, RCREG1, is full (cleared when RCREG1 is read)
0 = The EUSART1 receive buffer is empty
bit 4 TX1IF: EUSART1 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The EUSART1 transmit buffer, TXREG1, is empty (cleared when TXREG1 is written)
0 = The EUSART1 transmit buffer is full
bit 3 SSP1IF: Master Synchronous Serial Port 1 Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The transmission/reception is complete (must be cleared by software)
0 = Waiting to transmit/receive
bit 2 CCP1IF: CCP1 Interrupt Flag bit
Capture mode:
1 = A TMR1 register capture occurred (must be cleared by software)
0 = No TMR1 register capture occurred
Compare mode:
1 = A TMR1 register compare match occurred (must be cleared by software)
0 = No TMR1 register compare match occurred
PWM mode:
Unused in this mode
bit 1 TMR2IF: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Flag bit
1 = TMR2 to PR2 match occurred (must be cleared by software)
0 = No TMR2 to PR2 match occurred
1 = TMR1 register overflowed (must be cleared by software)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 9-5: PIR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 2

OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 OSCFIF: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit

1 = Device oscillator failed, clock input has changed to HFINTOSC (must be cleared by software)
0 = Device clock operating
bit 6 C1IF: Comparator C1 Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Comparator C1 output has changed (must be cleared by software)
0 = Comparator C1 output has not changed
bit 5 C2IF: Comparator C2 Interrupt Flag bit
1 = Comparator C2 output has changed (must be cleared by software)
0 = Comparator C2 output has not changed
bit 4 EEIF: Data EEPROM/Flash Write Operation Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The write operation is complete (must be cleared by software)
0 = The write operation is not complete or has not been started
bit 3 BCL1IF: MSSP1 Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit
1 = A bus collision occurred (must be cleared by software)
0 = No bus collision occurred
bit 2 HLVDIF: Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Flag bit
1 = A low-voltage condition occurred (direction determined by the VDIRMAG bit of the
HLVDCON register)
0 = A low-voltage condition has not occurred
1 = TMR3 register overflowed (must be cleared by software)
bit 0 CCP2IF: CCP2 Interrupt Flag bit
Capture mode:
1 = A TMR1 register capture occurred (must be cleared by software)
0 = No TMR1 register capture occurred
Compare mode:
1 = A TMR1 register compare match occurred (must be cleared by software)
0 = No TMR1 register compare match occurred
PWM mode:
Unused in this mode.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 9-6: PIR3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT (FLAG) REGISTER 3

SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF CTMUIF TMR5GIF TMR3GIF TMR1GIF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SSP2IF: Synchronous Serial Port Interrupt Flag bit

1 = The transmission/reception is complete (must be cleared in software)
0 = Waiting to transmit/receive
bit 6 BCL2IF: MSSP2 Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit
1 = A bus collision has occurred while the SSP2 module configured in I2C master was transmitting
(must be cleared in software)
0 = No bus collision occurred
bit 5 RC2IF: EUSART2 Receive Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The EUSART2 receive buffer, RCREG2, is full (cleared by reading RCREG2)
0 = The EUSART2 receive buffer is empty
bit 4 TX2IF: EUSART2 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The EUSART2 transmit buffer, TXREG2, is empty (cleared by writing TXREG2)
0 = The EUSART2 transmit buffer is full
bit 3 CTMUIF: CTMU Interrupt Flag bit
1 = CTMU interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = No CTMU interrupt occurred
bit 2 TMR5GIF: TMR5 Gate Interrupt Flag bits
1 = TMR gate interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = No TMR gate occurred

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — — — CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2 CCP5IF: CCP5 Interrupt Flag bits
Capture mode:
1 = A TMR register capture occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = No TMR register capture occurred
Compare mode:
1 = A TMR register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = No TMR register compare match occurred
PWM mode:
Unused in PWM mode.
bit 1 CCP4IF: CCP4 Interrupt Flag bits
Capture mode:
Compare mode:
PWM mode:
Unused in PWM mode.
bit 0 CCP3IF: ECCP3 Interrupt Flag bits
Capture mode:
Compare mode:
PWM mode:
Unused in PWM mode.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — — — TMR6IF TMR5IF TMR4IF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = TMR6 to PR6 match occurred (must be cleared in software)
1 = TMR5 register overflowed (must be cleared in software)
1 = TMR4 to PR4 match occurred (must be cleared in software)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
9.6 PIE Registers
The PIE registers contain the individual enable bits for
the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of
peripheral interrupt sources, there are five Peripheral
Interrupt Enable registers (PIE1, PIE2, PIE3, PIE4 and
PIE5). When IPEN = 0, the PEIE/GIEL bit must be set to
enable any of these peripheral interrupts.
REGISTER 9-9: PIE1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE (FLAG) REGISTER 1
U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6 ADIE: A/D Converter Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the A/D interrupt
0 = Disables the A/D interrupt
bit 5 RC1IE: EUSART1 Receive Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the EUSART1 receive interrupt
0 = Disables the EUSART1 receive interrupt
bit 4 TX1IE: EUSART1 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the EUSART1 transmit interrupt
0 = Disables the EUSART1 transmit interrupt
bit 3 SSP1IE: Master Synchronous Serial Port 1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the MSSP1 interrupt
0 = Disables the MSSP1 interrupt
bit 2 CCP1IE: CCP1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the CCP1 interrupt
0 = Disables the CCP1 interrupt
bit 1 TMR2IE: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt
0 = Disables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 OSCFIE: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 6 C1IE: Comparator C1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 5 C2IE: Comparator C2 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 4 EEIE: Data EEPROM/Flash Write Operation Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 3 BCL1IE: MSSP1 Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 2 HLVDIE: Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE CTMUIE TMR5GIE TMR3GIE TMR1GIE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SSP2IE: TMR5 Gate Interrupt Enable bit

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 6 BCL2IE: Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 5 RC2IE: EUSART2 Receive Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 4 TX2IE: EUSART2 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 3 CTMUIE: CTMU Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 2 TMR5GIE: TMR5 Gate Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — — — CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — — — TMR6IE TMR5IE TMR4IE
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:


PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
9.7 IPR Registers
The IPR registers contain the individual priority bits for the
peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral
interrupt sources, there are five Peripheral Interrupt
Priority registers (IPR1, IPR2, IPR3, IPR4 and IPR5).
Using the priority bits requires that the Interrupt Priority
Enable (IPEN) bit be set.
REGISTER 9-14: IPR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 1
— ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6 ADIP: A/D Converter Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 RC1IP: EUSART1 Receive Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4 TX1IP: EUSART1 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 SSP1IP: Master Synchronous Serial Port 1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 2 CCP1IP: CCP1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1 TMR2IP: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCL1IP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 OSCFIP: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Priority bit

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6 C1IP: Comparator C1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 C2IP: Comparator C2 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4 EEIP: Data EEPROM/Flash Write Operation Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 BCL1IP: MSSP1 Bus Collision Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 2 HLVDIP: Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP CTMUIP TMR5GIP TMR3GIP TMR1GIP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SSP2IP: Synchronous Serial Port 2 Interrupt Priority bit

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6 BCL2IP: Bus Collision 2 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5 RC2IP: EUSART2 Receive Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4 TX2IP: EUSART2 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3 CTMUIP: CTMU Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 2 TMR5GIP: TMR5 Gate Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — — — CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — — — TMR6IP TMR5IP TMR4IP
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
9.8 INTn Pin Interrupts 9.9 TMR0 Interrupt
External interrupts on the RB0/INT0, RB1/INT1 and In 8-bit mode (which is the default), an overflow in the
RB2/INT2 pins are edge-triggered. If the corresponding TMR0 register (FFh  00h) will set flag bit, TMR0IF. In
INTEDGx bit in the INTCON2 register is set (= 1), the 16-bit mode, an overflow in the TMR0H:TMR0L regis-
interrupt is triggered by a rising edge; if the bit is clear, ter pair (FFFFh 0000h) will set TMR0IF. The interrupt
the trigger is on the falling edge. When a valid edge can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit,
appears on the RBx/INTx pin, the corresponding flag TMR0IE of the INTCON register. Interrupt priority for
bit, INTxF, is set. This interrupt can be disabled by Timer0 is determined by the value contained in the
clearing the corresponding enable bit, INTxE. Flag bit, interrupt priority bit, TMR0IP of the INTCON2 register.
INTxF, must be cleared by software in the Interrupt See Section 11.0 “Timer0 Module” for further details
Service Routine before re-enabling the interrupt. on the Timer0 module.
All external interrupts (INT0, INT1 and INT2) can wake-
up the processor from Idle or Sleep modes if bit INTxE 9.10 PORTB Interrupt-on-Change
was set prior to going into those modes. If the Global
An input change on PORTB<7:4> sets flag bit, RBIF of
Interrupt Enable bit, GIE/GIEH, is set, the processor
the INTCON register. The interrupt can be enabled/
will branch to the interrupt vector following wake-up.
disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, RBIE of the
Interrupt priority for INT1 and INT2 is determined by INTCON register. Pins must also be individually
the value contained in the interrupt priority bits, INT1IP enabled with the IOCB register. Interrupt priority for
and INT2IP of the INTCON3 register. There is no prior- PORTB interrupt-on-change is determined by the value
ity bit associated with INT0. It is always a high priority contained in the interrupt priority bit, RBIP of the
interrupt source. INTCON2 register.
9.11 Context Saving During Interrupts

During interrupts, the return PC address is saved on
the stack. Additionally, the WREG, STATUS and BSR
registers are saved on the fast return stack. If a fast
return from interrupt is not used (see Section 5.1.3
“Fast Register Stack”), the user may need to save the
WREG, STATUS and BSR registers on entry to the
Interrupt Service Routine. Depending on the user’s
application, other registers may also need to be saved.
Example 9-1 saves and restores the WREG, STATUS
and BSR registers during an Interrupt Service Routine.
EXAMPLE 9-1: SAVING STATUS, WREG AND BSR REGISTERS IN RAM

MOVWF W_TEMP ; W_TEMP is in virtual bank
MOVFF STATUS, STATUS_TEMP ; STATUS_TEMP located anywhere
MOVFF BSR, BSR_TEMP ; BSR_TMEP located anywhere
;
; USER ISR CODE
;
MOVFF BSR_TEMP, BSR ; Restore BSR
MOVF W_TEMP, W ; Restore WREG
MOVFF STATUS_TEMP, STATUS ; Restore STATUS

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 9-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH INTERRUPTS

Register
on Page
ANSELB — — ANSB5 ANSB4 ANSB3 ANSB2 ANSB1 ANSB0 153
INTCON2 RBPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 — TMR0IP — RBIP 116
INTCON3 INT2IP INT1IP — INT2IE INT1IE — INT2IF INT1IF 117
IOCB IOCB7 IOCB6 IOCB5 IOCB4 — — — — 156
IPR1 — ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 127
IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP CTMUIP TMR5GIP TMR3GIP TMR1GIP 129
IPR4 — — — — — CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 130
IPR5 — — — — — TMR6IP TMR5IP TMR4IP 130
PIE1 — ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 123
PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE CTMUIE TMR5GIE TMR3GIE TMR1GIE 125
PIE4 — — — — — CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 126
PIE5 — — — — — TMR6IE TMR5IE TMR4IE 126
PIR1 — ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 118
PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF CTMUIF TMR5GIF TMR3GIF TMR1GIF 120
PIR4 — — — — — CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 121
PIR5 — — — — — TMR6IF TMR5IF TMR4IF 122
PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 151
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for Interrupts.
TABLE 9-2: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH INTERRUPTS

Register
on Page
CONFIG4L DEBUG XINST — — — LVP — STRVEN 355

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
10.0 I/O PORTS 10.1 PORTA Registers
Depending on the device selected and features PORTA is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The
enabled, there are up to five ports available. All pins of corresponding data direction register is TRISA. Setting
the I/O ports are multiplexed with one or more alternate a TRISA bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTA
functions from the peripheral features on the device. In pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). Clearing a
general, when a peripheral is enabled, that pin may not TRISA bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTA pin
be used as a general purpose I/O pin. an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the
contents of the output latch on the selected pin).
Each port has five registers for its operation. These
registers are: Reading the PORTA register reads the status of the
pins, whereas writing to it, will write to the PORT latch.
• TRIS register (data direction register)
• PORT register (reads the levels on the pins of the The Data Latch (LATA) register is also memory mapped.
device) Read-modify-write operations on the LATA register read
and write the latched output value for PORTA.
• LAT register (output latch)
• ANSEL register (analog input control) The RA4 pin is multiplexed with the Timer0 module
clock input and one of the comparator outputs to
• SLRCON register (port slew rate control)
become the RA4/T0CKI/C1OUT pin. Pins RA6 and
The Data Latch (LAT register) is useful for read-modify- RA7 are multiplexed with the main oscillator pins; they
write operations on the value that the I/O pins are are enabled as oscillator or I/O pins by the selection of
driving. the main oscillator in the Configuration register (see
A simplified model of a generic I/O port, without the Section 24.1 “Configuration Bits” for details). When
interfaces to other peripherals, is shown in Figure 10-1. they are not used as port pins, RA6 and RA7 and their
associated TRIS and LAT bits are read as ‘0’.
FIGURE 10-1: GENERIC I/O PORT The other PORTA pins are multiplexed with analog
OPERATION inputs, the analog VREF+ and VREF- inputs, and the
comparator voltage reference output. The operation of
RD LAT TRISx pins RA<3:0> and RA5 as analog is selected by setting
the ANSELA<5, 3:0> bits in the ANSELA register which
Data is the default setting after a Power-on Reset.
Bus D Q
Pins RA0 through RA5 may also be used as comparator
WR LAT I/O pin(1)
or Port
inputs or outputs by setting the appropriate bits in the
CK CM1CON0 and CM2CON0 registers.
Data Latch
Note: On a Power-on Reset, RA5 and RA<3:0>
D Q
ANSELx
are configured as analog inputs and read
as ‘0’. RA4 is configured as a digital input.
WR TRIS
CK
The RA4/T0CKI/C1OUT pin is a Schmitt Trigger input.
TRIS Latch Input All other PORTA pins have TTL input levels and full
Buffer
CMOS output drivers.
RD TRIS
The TRISA register controls the drivers of the PORTA
pins, even when they are being used as analog inputs.
Q D The user should ensure the bits in the TRISA register
are maintained set when using them as analog inputs.
ENEN
RD Port
EXAMPLE 10-1: INITIALIZING PORTA
MOVLB 0xF ; Set BSR for banked SFRs
Note 1: I/O pins have diode protection to VDD and VSS. CLRF PORTA ; Initialize PORTA by
; clearing output
; data latches
CLRF LATA ; Alternate method
; to clear output
; data latches
MOVLW E0h ; Configure I/O
MOVWF ANSELA ; for digital inputs
MOVLW 0CFh ; Value used to
; initialize data
; direction
MOVWF TRISA ; Set RA<3:0> as inputs
; RA<5:4> as outputs

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-1: PORTA I/O SUMMARY

TRIS ANSEL Pin Buffer
Pin Name Function Description
Setting Setting Type Type
RA0/C12IN0-/AN0 RA0 0 1 O DIG LATA<0> data output; not affected by analog input.
1 0 I TTL PORTA<0> data input; disabled when analog input
enabled.
C12IN0- 1 1 I AN Comparators C1 and C2 inverting input.
AN0 1 1 I AN Analog input 0.
RA1/C12IN1-/AN1 RA1 0 1 O DIG LATA<1> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
RA2/C2IN+/AN2/ RA2 0 1 O DIG LATA<2> data output; not affected by analog input; disabled
DACOUT/VREF- when DACOUT enabled.
enabled; disabled when DACOUT enabled.
C2IN+ 1 1 I AN Comparator C2 non-inverting input.
AN2 1 1 I AN Analog output 2.
DACOUT x 1 O AN DAC Reference output.
VREF- 1 1 I AN A/D reference voltage (low) input.
RA3/C1IN+/AN3/ RA3 0 1 O DIG LATA<3> data output; not affected by analog input.
VREF+ 1 0 I TTL PORTA<3> data input; disabled when analog input enabled.
C1IN+ 1 1 I AN Comparator C1 non-inverting input.
VREF+ 1 1 I AN A/D reference voltage (high) input.
RA4/CCP5/ RA4 0 1 O DIG LATA<4> data output.
C1OUT/SRQ/ 1 0 I TTL PORTA<4> data input; default configuration on POR.
T0CKI
CCP5 0 1 O DIG CCP5 Compare output/PWM output, takes priority over
RA4 output.
1 0 I ST Capture 5 input/Compare 5 output/ PWM 5 output.
C1OUT 0 1 O DIG Comparator C1 output.
SRQ 0 1 O DIG SR Latch Q output; take priority over CCP 5 output.
T0CKI 1 0 I ST Timer0 external clock input.
RA5/C2OUT/ RA5 0 1 O DIG LATA<5> data output; not affected by analog input.
SRNQ/SS1/ 1 0 I TTL PORTA<5> data input; disabled when analog input enabled.
HLVDIN/AN4
C2OUT 0 1 O DIG Comparator C2 output.
SRNQ 1 O DIG SR Latch Q output.
SS1 1 0 I TTL SPI slave select input (MSSP1).
HLVDIN 1 1 I AN High/Low-Voltage Detect input.
AN4 1 1 I AN A/D input 4.
Legend: AN = Analog input or output; TTL = TTL compatible input; HV = High Voltage; OD = Open Drain; XTAL = Crystal; CMOS
= CMOS compatible input or output; ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels; I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with
I2C.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-1: PORTA I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED)
RA6/CLKO/OSC2 RA6 0 1 O DIG LATA<6> data output; enabled in INTOSC modes when
CLKO is not enabled.
1 0 I TTL PORTA<6> data input; enabled in INTOSC modes when
CLKO is not enabled.
CLKO x 1 O DIG In RC mode, OSC2 pin outputs CLKOUT which has 1/4 the
frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction cycle rate.
OSC2 x x O XTAL Oscillator crystal output; connects to crystal or resonator in
Crystal Oscillator mode.
RA7/CLKI/OSC1 RA7 0 1 O DIG LATA<7> data output; disabled in external oscillator modes.
1 0 I TTL PORTA<7> data input; disabled in external oscillator
modes.
CLKI x 1 I AN External clock source input; always associated with pin
function OSC1.
OSC1 x x I XTAL Oscillator crystal input or external clock source input ST
buffer when configured in RC mode; CMOS otherwise.
= CMOS compatible input or output; ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels; I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with
I2C.
TABLE 10-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTA

Register
on Page
ANSELA — — ANSA5 — ANSA3 ANSA2 ANSA1 ANSA0 152
CM1CON0 C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH<1:0> 310
VREFCON1 DACEN DACLPS DACOE — DACPSS<1:0> — DACNSS 341
VREFCON2 — — — DACR<4:0> 342
HLVDCON VDIRMAG BGVST IRVST HLVDEN HLVDL<3:0> 343
PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 151
SLRCON — — — SLRE SLRD SLRC SLRB SLRA 156
SRCON0 SRLEN SRCLK<2:0> SRQEN SRNQEN SRPS SRPR 335
SSP1CON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM<3:0> 256
T0CON TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS<2:0> 157
TRISA TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 154
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for PORTA.
TABLE 10-3: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTA

Register
on Page
CONFIG1H IESO FCMEN PRICLKEN PLLCFG FOSC<3:0> 351
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for PORTA.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
10.1.1 PORTA OUTPUT PRIORITY
Each PORTA pin is multiplexed with other functions.
The pins, their combined functions and their output
priorities are briefly described here. For additional
information, refer to the appropriate section in this data
sheet.
When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin
control goes to the peripheral with the higher priority.
Table 10-4 lists the PORTA pin functions from the
highest to the lowest priority.
Analog input functions, such as ADC and comparator,
are not shown in the priority lists.
These inputs are active when the I/O pin is set for
Analog mode using the ANSELx registers. Digital
output functions may control the pin when it is in Analog
mode with the priority shown below.
TABLE 10-4: PORT PIN FUNCTION PRIORITY

Port Function Priority by Port Pin
Port bit
PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD(2) PORTE(2)
0 RA0 CCP4(1) SOSCO SCL2 CCP3(8)
RB0 P2B(6) SCK2 P3A(8)
RC0 RD0 RE0
1 RA1 SCL2(1) SOSCI SDA2 P3B
SCK2(1) CCP2(3) CCP4 RE1
P1C(1) P2A(3) RD1
RB1 RC1
2 RA2 SDA2(1) CCP1 P2B CCP5
P1B(1) P1A RD2(4) RE2
RB2 CTPLS
RC2
(1)
3 RA3 SDO2 SCL1 P2C MCLR
CCP2(6) SCK1 RD3 VPP
P2A(6) RC3 RE3
RB3
4 SRQ P1D(1) SDA1 SDO2
C1OUT RB4 RC4 P2D
(1)
CCP5 RD4
RA4
Note 1: PIC18(L)F2XK22 devices.
2: PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices.
3: Function default pin.
4: Function default pin (28-pin devices).
5: Function default pin (40/44-pin devices).
6: Function alternate pin.
7: Function alternate pin (28-pin devices).
8: Function alternate pin (40/44-pin devices)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-4: PORT PIN FUNCTION PRIORITY (CONTINUED)
Port Function Priority by Port Pin
Port bit
PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD(2) PORTE(2)
5 SRNQ CCP3(3) SDO1 P1B
C2OUT P3A(3) RC5 RD5
RA5 P2B(1)(4)
RB5
6 OSC2 PGC TX1/CK1 TX2/CK2
CLKO TX2/CK2(1) CCP3(1)(7) P1C
RA6 RB6 P3A(1)(7) RD6
ICDCK RC6
7 RA7
OSC1 PGD RX1/DT1 RX2/DT2
(1)
RA7 RX2/DT2 P3B(1) P1D
RB7 RC7 RD7
ICDDT
3: Function default pin.
4: Function default pin (28-pin devices).
5: Function default pin (40/44-pin devices).
6: Function alternate pin.
7: Function alternate pin (28-pin devices).
8: Function alternate pin (40/44-pin devices)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
10.2 PORTB Registers 10.3 Additional PORTB Pin Functions
PORTB is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The PORTB pins RB<7:4> have an interrupt-on-change
corresponding data direction register is TRISB. Setting option. All PORTB pins have a weak pull-up option.
a TRISB bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTB
pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). Clearing a 10.3.1 WEAK PULL-UPS
TRISB bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTB Each of the PORTB pins has an individually controlled
pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the weak internal pull-up. When set, each bit of the WPUB
contents of the output latch on the selected pin). register enables the corresponding pin pull-up. When
The Data Latch register (LATB) is also memory cleared, the RBPU bit of the INTCON2 register enables
mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATB pull-ups on all pins which also have their corresponding
register read and write the latched output value for WPUB bit set. When set, the RBPU bit disables all
PORTB. weak pull-ups. The weak pull-up is automatically turned
off when the port pin is configured as an output. The
EXAMPLE 10-2: INITIALIZING PORTB pull-ups are disabled on a Power-on Reset.
MOVLB 0xF ; Set BSR for banked SFRs Note: On a Power-on Reset, RB<5:0> are
CLRF PORTB ; Initialize PORTB by configured as analog inputs by default and
; clearing output read as ‘0’; RB<7:6> are configured as
; data latches
digital inputs.
CLRF LATB ; Alternate method
; to clear output When the PBADEN Configuration bit is set
; data latches to ‘1’, RB<5:0> will alternatively be
MOVLW 0F0h ; Value for init configured as digital inputs on POR.
MOVWF ANSELB ; Enable RB<3:0> for
; digital input pins 10.3.2 INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE
; (not required if config bit
; PBADEN is clear) Four of the PORTB pins (RB<7:4>) are individually
MOVLW 0CFh ; Value used to configurable as interrupt-on-change pins. Control bits
; initialize data in the IOCB register enable (when set) or disable (when
; direction clear) the interrupt function for each pin.
MOVWF TRISB ; Set RB<3:0> as inputs
; RB<5:4> as outputs When set, the RBIE bit of the INTCON register enables
; RB<7:6> as inputs interrupts on all pins which also have their
corresponding IOCB bit set. When clear, the RBIE bit
disables all interrupt-on-changes.
10.2.1 PORTB OUTPUT PRIORITY
Only pins configured as inputs can cause this interrupt
Each PORTB pin is multiplexed with other functions. to occur (i.e., any RB<7:4> pin configured as an output
The pins, their combined functions and their output is excluded from the interrupt-on-change comparison).
information, refer to the appropriate section in this data For enabled interrupt-on-change pins, the values are
sheet. compared with the old value latched on the last read of
PORTB. The ‘mismatch’ outputs of the last read are
When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin OR’d together to set the PORTB Change Interrupt flag
control goes to the peripheral with the higher priority. bit (RBIF) in the INTCON register.
Table 10-4 lists the PORTB pin functions from the
highest to the lowest priority. This interrupt can wake the device from the Sleep
mode, or any of the Idle modes. The user, in the
Analog input functions, such as ADC, comparator and Interrupt Service Routine, can clear the interrupt in the
SR Latch inputs, are not shown in the priority lists. following manner:
These inputs are active when the I/O pin is set for a) Any read or write of PORTB to clear the mis-
Analog mode using the ANSELx registers. Digital match condition (except when PORTB is the
output functions may control the pin when it is in Analog source or destination of a MOVFF instruction).
b) Execute at least one instruction after reading or
writing PORTB, then clear the flag bit, RBIF.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
A mismatch condition will continue to set the RBIF flag bit. 10.3.3 ALTERNATE FUNCTIONS
Reading or writing PORTB will end the mismatch
PORTB is multiplexed with several peripheral functions
condition and allow the RBIF bit to be cleared. The latch
(Table 10-5). The pins have TTL input buffers. Some of
holding the last read value is not affected by a MCLR nor
these pin functions can be relocated to alternate pins
Brown-out Reset. After either one of these Resets, the
using the Control fuse bits in CONFIG3H. RB5 is the
RBIF flag will continue to be set if a mismatch is present.
default pin for P2B (28-pin devices). Clearing the
Note: If a change on the I/O pin should occur P2BMX bit moves the pin function to RC0. RB5 is also
when the read operation is being executed the default pin for the CCP3/P3A peripheral pin. Clear-
(start of the Q2 cycle), then the RBIF ing the CCP3MX bit moves the pin function to the RC6
interrupt flag may not get set. Furthermore, pin (28-pin devices) or RE0 (40/44-pin devices).
since a read or write on a port affects all bits Two other pin functions, T3CKI and CCP2/P2A, can be
of that port, care must be taken when using relocated from their default pins to PORTB pins by
multiple pins in Interrupt-on-change mode. clearing the control fuses in CONFIG3H. Clearing
Changes on one pin may not be seen while T3CMX and CCP2MX moves the pin functions to RB5
servicing changes on another pin. and RB3, respectively.
The interrupt-on-change feature is recommended for
wake-up on key depression operation and operations
where PORTB is only used for the interrupt-on-change
feature. Polling of PORTB is not recommended while
using the interrupt-on-change feature.
TABLE 10-5: PORTB I/O SUMMARY

Pin Function Description
RB0/INT0/CCP4/ RB0 0 1 O DIG LATB<0> data output; not affected by analog input.
FLT0/SRI/SS2/
1 0 I TTL PORTB<0> data input; disabled when analog input
AN12
enabled.
INT0 1 0 I ST External interrupt 0.
CCP4(3) 0 1 O DIG Compare 4 output/PWM 4 output.
1 0 I ST Capture 4 input.
FLT0 1 0 I ST PWM Fault input for ECCP auto-shutdown.
SRI 1 0 I ST SR Latch input.
SS2(3) 1 0 I TTL SPI slave select input (MSSP2).
RB1/INT1/P1C/ RB1 0 1 O DIG LATB<1> data output; not affected by analog input.
SCK2/SCL2/ 1 0 I ST PORTB<1> data input; disabled when analog input
C12IN3-/AN10 enabled.
INT1 1 0 I ST External Interrupt 1.
P1C(3) 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP1 PWM output 3.
SCK2(3) 0 1 O DIG MSSP2 SPI Clock output.
1 0 I ST MSSP2 SPI Clock input.
SCL2(3) 0 1 O DIG MSSP2 I2CTM Clock output.
1 0 I I2C MSSP2 I2CTM Clock input.
Legend: AN = Analog input or output; TTL = TTL compatible input; HV = High Voltage; OD = Open Drain; XTAL = Crystal; CMOS =
CMOS compatible input or output; ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels; I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with I2C.
CCP2MX are set.
CCP2MX are clear.
3: Function on PORTD and PORTE for PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-5: PORTB I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED)
RB2/INT2/CTED1/ RB2 0 1 O DIG LATB<2> data output; not affected by analog input.
P1B/SDI2/SDA2/
1 0 I ST PORTB<2> data input; disabled when analog input
AN8
enabled.
INT2 1 0 I ST External interrupt 2.
CTED1 1 0 I ST CTMU Edge 1 input.
P1B(3) 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP1 PWM output 2.
SDI2(3) 1 0 I ST MSSP2 SPI data input.
(3)
SDA2 0 0 O DIG MSSP2 I2CTM data output.
1 0 I I2C MSSP2 I2CTM data input.
RB3/CTED2/P2A/ RB3 0 1 O DIG LATB<3> data output; not affected by analog input.
CCP2/SDO2/ ST
1 0 I PORTB<3> data input; disabled when analog input
C12IN2-/AN9 enabled.
CTED2 1 0 I ST CTMU Edge 2 input.
P2A 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP1 PWM output 1.
SDO2(2) 0 1 O DIG MSSP2 SPI data output.
RB4/IOC0/P1D/ RB4 0 1 O DIG LATB<4> data output; not affected by analog input.
T5G/AN11
enabled.
IOC0 1 0 I TTL Interrupt-on-change pin.
P1D 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP1 PWM output 4.
T5G 1 0 I ST Timer5 external clock gate input.
RB5/IOC1/P2B/ RB5 0 1 O DIG LATB<5> data output; not affected by analog input.
P3A/CCP3/T3CKI/ 1 0 I ST PORTB<5> data input; disabled when analog input
T1G/AN13
enabled.
IOC1 1 0 I TTL Interrupt-on-change pin 1.
P2B(1)(3) 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP2 PWM output 2.
P3A(1) 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP3 PWM output 1.
T3CKI(2) 1 0 I ST Timer3 clock input.
CCP2MX are set.
CCP2MX are clear.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-5: PORTB I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED)
RB6/KBI2/PGC RB6 0 1 O DIG LATB<6> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
TX2(3) 0 1 O DIG EUSART 2 asynchronous transmit data output.
CK2(3) 0 1 O DIG EUSART 2 synchronous serial clock output.
1 0 I ST EUSART 2 synchronous serial clock input.
PGC x x I ST In-Circuit Debugger and ICSPTM programming clock input.
RB7/KBI3/PGD RB7 0 1 O DIG LATB<7> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
RX2(2), (3) 1 0 I ST EUSART 2 asynchronous receive data input.
DT2(2), (3) 0 1 O DIG EUSART 2 synchronous serial data output.
1 0 I ST EUSART 2 synchronous serial data input.
PGD x x O DIG In-Circuit Debugger and ICSPTM programming data output.
x x I ST In-Circuit Debugger and ICSPTM programming data input.
CCP2MX are set.
CCP2MX are clear.
TABLE 10-6: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTB

Register
on Page
ECCP2AS CCP2ASE CCP2AS<2:0> P2SSAC<1:0> P2SSBD<1:0> 205
CCP2CON P2M<1:0> DC2B<1:0> CCP2M<3:0> 201
INTCON3 INT2IP INT1IP — INT2IE INT1IE — INT2IF INT1IF 117
IOCB IOCB7 IOCB6 IOCB5 IOCB4 — — — — 156
LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 155
PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 151
SLRCON — — — SLRE(1) SLRD(1) SLRC SLRB SLRA 156
T1GCON TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GTM T1GSPM T1GGO/DONE T1GVAL T1GSS<1:0> 171
T3CON TMR3CS<1:0> T3CKPS<1:0> T3SOSCEN T3SYNC T3RD16 TMR3ON 170
T5GCON TMR5GE T5GPOL T5GTM T5GSPM T5GGO_DONE T5GVAL T5GSS 171
TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 154
WPUB WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0 155
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for PORTB.
Note 1: Available on PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-7: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTB

Register
on Page
CONFIG4L DEBUG XINST — — — LVP(1) — STRVEN 355
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for PORTB.
Note 1: Can only be changed when in high voltage programming mode.
10.4 PORTC Registers EXAMPLE 10-3: INITIALIZING PORTC

PORTC is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The
CLRF PORTC ; Initialize PORTC by
corresponding data direction register is TRISC. Setting ; clearing output
a TRISC bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTC ; data latches
pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). Clearing a CLRF LATC ; Alternate method
TRISC bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTC ; to clear output
pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the ; data latches
contents of the output latch on the selected pin). MOVLW 0CFh ; Value used to
; initialize data
The Data Latch register (LATC) is also memory ; direction
mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATC MOVWF TRISC ; Set RC<3:0> as inputs
register read and write the latched output value for ; RC<5:4> as outputs
PORTC. ; RC<7:6> as inputs
MOVLW 30h ; Value used to
PORTC is multiplexed with several peripheral functions
; enable digital inputs
(Table 10-8). The pins have Schmitt Trigger input buf-
MOVWF ANSELC ; RC<3:2> dig input enable
fers. ; No ANSEL bits for RC<1:0>
Some of these pin functions can be relocated to alter- ; RC<7:6> dig input enable
nate pins using the Control fuse bits in CONFIG3H.
RC0 is the default pin for T3CKI. Clearing the T3CMX 10.4.1 PORTC OUTPUT PRIORITY
bit moves the pin function to RB5. RC1 is the default pin
for the CCP2 peripheral pin. Clearing the CCP2MX bit Each PORTC pin is multiplexed with other functions.
moves the pin function to the RB3 pin. The pins, their combined functions and their output
Two other pin functions, P2B and CCP3, can be relo- information, refer to the appropriate section in this data
cated from their default pins to PORTC pins by clearing sheet.
the control fuses in CONFIG3H. Clearing P2BMX and
CCP3MX moves the pin functions to RC0 and RC6(1)/ When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin
RE0(2), respectively. control goes to the peripheral with the higher priority.
Table 10-4 lists the PORTC pin functions from the
When enabling peripheral functions, care should be highest to the lowest priority.
taken in defining TRIS bits for each PORTC pin. The
EUSART and MSSP peripherals override the TRIS bit Analog input functions, such as ADC, comparator and
to make a pin an output or an input, depending on the SR Latch inputs, are not shown in the priority lists.
peripheral configuration. Refer to the corresponding These inputs are active when the I/O pin is set for
peripheral section for additional information. Analog mode using the ANSELx registers. Digital
Note: On a Power-on Reset, these pins are con-
figured as analog inputs.
The contents of the TRISC register are affected by

peripheral overrides. Reading TRISC always returns
the current contents, even though a peripheral device
may be overriding one or more of the pins.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-8: PORTC I/O SUMMARY

Setting setting Type Type
RC0/P2B/T3CKI/T3G/ RC0 0 1 O DIG LATC<0> data output; not affected by analog input.
T1CKI/SOSCO 1 0 I ST PORTC<0> data input; disabled when analog input
enabled.
T3CKI(1) 1 0 I ST Timer3 clock input.
T1CKI 1 0 I ST Timer1 clock input.
SOSCO x — O XTAL Secondary oscillator output.
RC1/P2A/CCP2/SOSCI RC1 0 1 O DIG LATC<1> data output; not affected by analog input.
1 0 I ST PORTC<1> data input; disabled when analog input
enabled.
SOSCI x — I XTAL Secondary oscillator input.
RC2/CTPLS/P1A/ RC2 0 1 O DIG LATC<2> data output; not affected by analog input.
CCP1/T5CKI/AN14 1 0 I ST PORTC<2> data input; disabled when analog input
enabled.
CTPLS 0 1 O DIG CTMU pulse generator output.
CCP1 0 1 O DIG Compare 1 output/PWM 1 output.
T5CKI 1 0 I ST Timer5 clock input.
RC3/SCK1/SCL1/AN15 RC3 0 1 O DIG LATC<3> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
SCK1 0 1 O DIG MSSP1 SPI Clock output.
SCL1 0 1 O DIG MSSP1 I2C™ Clock output.
1 0 I I2C MSSP1 I2C™ Clock input.
RC4/SDI1/SDA1/AN16 RC4 0 1 O DIG LATC<4> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
SDI1 1 0 I ST MSSP1 SPI data input.
SDA1 0 0 O DIG MSSP1 I2C™ data output.
1 0 I I2C MSSP1 I2C™ data input.
CCP2MX are set.
CCP2MX are clear.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-8: PORTC I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED)
RC5/SDO1/AN17 RC5 0 1 O DIG LATC<5> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
SDO1 0 1 O DIG MSSP1 SPI data output.
AN17 I AN Analog input 17.
RC6/P3A/CCP3/TX1/ RC6 0 1 O DIG LATC<6> data output; not affected by analog input.
CK1/AN18 1 0 I ST PORTC<6> data input; disabled when analog input
enabled.
P3A(2), (3) 0 1 O CMOS Enhanced CCP3 PWM output 1.
CCP3(2), (3) 0 1 O DIG Compare 3 output/PWM 3 output.
TX1 0 1 O DIG EUSART 1 asynchronous transmit data output.
CK1 0 1 O DIG EUSART 1 synchronous serial clock output.
RC7/P3B/RX1/DT1/ RC7 0 1 O DIG LATC<7> data output; not affected by analog input.
AN19 1 0 I ST PORTC<7> data input; disabled when analog input
enabled.
P3B 0 1 O CMOS Enhanced CCP3 PWM output 2.
RX1 1 0 I ST EUSART 1 asynchronous receive data in.
DT1 0 1 O DIG EUSART 1 synchronous serial data output.
CCP2MX are set.
CCP2MX are clear.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-9: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTC

Register
on Page
ANSELC ANSC7 ANSC6 ANSC5 ANSC4 ANSC3 ANSC2 — — 153
CTMUCONH CTMUEN — CTMUSIDL TGEN EDGEN EDGSEQEN IDISSEN CTTRIG 329
LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 155
PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 151
RCSTA1 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 273
T3GCON TMR3GE T3GPOL T3GTM T3GSPM T3GGO/DONE T3GVAL T3GSS 171
T5CON TMR5CS<1:0> T5CKPS<1:0> T5OSCEN T5SYNC T5RD16 TMR5ON 170
TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 154
TXSTA1 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 272
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for PORTC.
TABLE 10-10: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTC

Register
on Page
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for PORTC.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
10.5 PORTD Registers 10.5.1 PORTD OUTPUT PRIORITY
Each PORTD pin is multiplexed with other functions.
Note: PORTD is only available on 40-pin and 44-
The pins, their combined functions and their output
pin devices.
PORTD is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The information, refer to the appropriate section in this data
corresponding data direction register is TRISD. Setting sheet.
a TRISD bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTD When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin
pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). Clearing a control goes to the peripheral with the higher priority.
TRISD bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTD Table 10-4 lists the PORTD pin functions from the
pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and put the highest to the lowest priority.
contents of the output latch on the selected pin).
Analog input functions, such as ADC, comparator and
The Data Latch register (LATD) is also memory SR Latch inputs, are not shown in the priority lists.
mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATD
register read and write the latched output value for These inputs are active when the I/O pin is set for
PORTD. Analog mode using the ANSELx registers. Digital
All pins on PORTD are implemented with Schmitt mode with the priority shown below.
Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually
configurable as an input or output.
All of the PORTD pins are multiplexed with analog and
digital peripheral modules. See Table .
Note: On a Power-on Reset, these pins are
configured as analog inputs.
EXAMPLE 10-4: INITIALIZING PORTD

CLRF PORTD ; Initialize PORTD by
; clearing output
; data latches
CLRF LATD ; Alternate method
; to clear output
; data latches
MOVLW 0CFh ; Value used to
; initialize data
; direction
MOVWF TRISD ; Set RD<3:0> as inputs
; RD<5:4> as outputs
; RD<7:6> as inputs
; enable digital inputs
MOVWF ANSELD ; RD<3:0> dig input enable
; RC<7:6> dig input enable

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-11: PORTD I/O SUMMARY

RD0/SCK2/SCL2/AN20 RD0 0 1 O DIG LATD<0> data output; not affected by analog input.
1 0 I ST PORTD<0> data input; disabled when analog input
enabled.
SCK2 0 1 O DIG MSSP2 SPI Clock output.
SCL2 0 1 O DIG MSSP2 I2C™ Clock output.
1 0 I I2C MSSP2 I2C™ Clock input.
RD1/CCP4/SDI2/SDA2/ RD1 0 1 O DIG LATD<1> data output; not affected by analog input.
AN21 1 0 I ST PORTD<1> data input; disabled when analog input
enabled.
SDI2 1 0 I ST MSSP2 SPI data input.
SDA2 0 0 O DIG MSSP2 I2C™ data output.
1 0 I I2C MSSP2 I2C™ data input.
RD2/P2B/AN22 RD2 0 1 O DIG LATD<2> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
RD3/P2C/SS2/AN23 RD3 0 1 O DIG LATD<3> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
P2C 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP2 PWM output 4.
SS2 1 0 I TTL MSSP2 SPI slave select input.
RD4/P2D/SDO2/AN24 RD4 0 1 O DIG LATD<4> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
SDO2 0 1 O DIG MSSP2 SPI data output.
RD5/P1B/AN25 RD5 0 1 O DIG LATD<5> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
P1B 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP1 PWM output 2.
AN25 I AN Analog input 25.
= CMOS compatible input or output; ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels; I2CTM = Schmitt Trigger input with I2C.
CCP2MX are set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-11: PORTD I/O SUMMARY
RD6/P1C/TX2/CK2/ RD6 0 1 O DIG LATD<6> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
P1C 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP1 PWM output 3.
TX2 0 1 O DIG EUSART 2 asynchronous transmit data output.
CK2 0 1 O DIG EUSART 2 synchronous serial clock output.
RD7/P1D/RX2/DT2/ RD7 0 1 O DIG LATD<7> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
RX2 1 0 I ST EUSART 2 asynchronous receive data in.
DT2 0 1 O DIG EUSART 2 synchronous serial data output.
CCP2MX are set.
TABLE 10-12: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTD

Register on
Page
ANSELD(1) ANSD7 ANSD6 ANSD5 ANSD4 ANSD3 ANSD2 ANSD1 ANSD0 153
BAUDCON2 ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 274
CCP4CON — — DC4B<1:0> CCP4M<3:0> 201
LATD(1) LATD7 LATD6 LATD5 LATD4 LATD3 LATD2 LATD1 LATD0 155
PORTD(1) RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 RD0 151
(1)
SLRCON — — — SLRE SLRD SLRC SLRB SLRA 156
TRISD(1) TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 154
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for PORTD.
TABLE 10-13: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTD

Register
on Page
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for PORTD.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
10.6 PORTE Registers 10.6.2 PORTE ON 28-PIN DEVICES
Depending on the particular PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 For PIC18F2XK22 devices, PORTE is only available
device selected, PORTE is implemented in two when Master Clear functionality is disabled
different ways. (MCLR = 0). In these cases, PORTE is a single bit,
input only port comprised of RE3 only. The pin operates
10.6.1 PORTE ON 40/44-PIN DEVICES as previously described.
For PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices, PORTE is a 4-bit 10.6.3 RE3 WEAK PULL-UP

wide port. Three pins (RE0/P3A/CCP3/AN5, RE1/P3B/
The port RE3 pin has an individually controlled weak
AN6 and RE2/CCP5/AN7) are individually configurable
internal pull-up. When set, the WPUE3 (TRISE<7>) bit
as inputs or outputs. These pins have Schmitt Trigger
enables the RE3 pin pull-up. The RBPU bit of the
input buffers. When selected as an analog input, these
INTCON2 register controls pull-ups on both PORTB
pins will read as ‘0’s.
and PORTE. When RBPU = 0, the weak pull-ups
The corresponding data direction register is TRISE. become active on all pins which have the WPUE3 or
Setting a TRISE bit (= 1) will make the corresponding WPUBx bits set. When set, the RBPU bit disables all
PORTE pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). weak pull-ups. The pull-ups are disabled on a Power-
Clearing a TRISE bit (= 0) will make the corresponding on Reset. When the RE3 port pin is configured as
PORTE pin an output (i.e., enable the output driver and MCLR, (CONFIG3H<7>, MCLRE=1 and
put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). CONFIG4L<2>, LVP=0), or configured for Low Voltage
TRISE controls the direction of the REx pins, even Programming, (MCLRE=x and LVP=1), the pull-up is
when they are being used as analog inputs. The user always enabled and the WPUE3 bit has no effect.
must make sure to keep the pins configured as inputs
when using them as analog inputs. 10.6.4 PORTE OUTPUT PRIORITY
The Data Latch register (LATE) is also memory Each PORTE pin is multiplexed with other functions.
mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATE The pins, their combined functions and their output
register read and write the latched output value for priorities are briefly described here. For additional
PORTE. information, refer to the appropriate section in this data
sheet.
Note: On a Power-on Reset, RE<2:0> are
When multiple outputs are enabled, the actual pin
configured as analog inputs.
control goes to the peripheral with the higher priority.
The fourth pin of PORTE (MCLR/VPP/RE3) is an input Table 10-4 lists the PORTE pin functions from the
only pin. Its operation is controlled by the MCLRE highest to the lowest priority.
Configuration bit. When selected as a port pin Analog input functions, such as ADC, comparator and
(MCLRE = 0), it functions as a digital input only pin; as SR Latch inputs, are not shown in the priority lists.
such, it does not have TRIS or LAT bits associated with its
operation. Otherwise, it functions as the device’s Master These inputs are active when the I/O pin is set for
Clear input. In either configuration, RE3 also functions as Analog mode using the ANSELx registers. Digital
the programming voltage input during programming. output functions may control the pin when it is in Analog
Note: On a Power-on Reset, RE3 is enabled as
a digital input only if Master Clear
functionality is disabled.
EXAMPLE 10-5: INITIALIZING PORTE

CLRF PORTE ; Initialize PORTE by
; clearing output
; data latches
CLRF LATE ; Alternate method
; to clear output
; data latches
CLRF ANSELE ; Configure analog pins
; for digital only
; initialize data
; direction
MOVWF TRISE ; Set RE<0> as input
; RE<1> as output
; RE<2> as input

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-14: PORTE I/O SUMMARY

RE0/P3A/CCP3/AN5 RE0 0 1 O DIG LATE<0> data output; not affected by analog input.
1 0 I ST PORTE<0> data input; disabled when analog input
enabled.
P3A(1) 0 1 O DIG Enhanced CCP3 PWM output.
RE1/P3B/AN6 RE1 0 1 O DIG LATE<1> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
P3B 0 x O DIG Enhanced CCP3 PWM output.
RE2/CCP5/AN7 RE2 0 1 O DIG LATE<2> data output; not affected by analog input.
enabled.
RE3/VPP/MCLR RE3 — — I ST PORTE<3> data input; enabled when Configuration bit
MCLRE = 0.
VPP — — P AN Programming voltage input; always available
MCLR — — I ST Active-low Master Clear (device Reset) input; enabled
when configuration bit MCLRE = 1.
Note 1: Alternate pin assignment for P3A/CCP3 when Configuration bit CCP3MX is clear..
TABLE 10-15: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTE

Reset
Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Values
on page
ANSELE(1) — — — — — ANSE2 ANSE1 ANSE0 154
(1)
LATE — — — — — LATE2 LATE1 LATE0 155
PORTE — — — — RE3 RE2(1) RE1(1) RE0(1) 152
TRISE WPUE3 — — — — TRISE2(1) TRISE1(1) TRISE0(1) 154
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for PORTE.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 10-16: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTE
Reset
on page
CONFIG4L (1)
DEBUG XINST — — — LVP — STRVEN 355
10.7 Port Analog Control 10.8 Port Slew Rate Control

Most port pins are multiplexed with analog functions The output slew rate of each port is programmable to
such as the Analog-to-Digital Converter and select either the standard transition rate or a reduced
comparators. When these I/O pins are to be used as transition rate of approximately 0.1 times the standard
analog inputs it is necessary to disable the digital input to minimize EMI. The reduced transition time is the
buffer to avoid excessive current caused by improper default slew rate for all ports.
biasing of the digital input. Individual control of the
digital input buffers on pins which share analog
functions is provided by the ANSELA, ANSELB,
ANSELC, ANSELD and ANSELE registers. Setting an
ANSx bit high will disable the associated digital input
buffer and cause all reads of that pin to return ‘0’ while
allowing analog functions of that pin to operate
correctly.
The state of the ANSx bits has no affect on digital
output functions. A pin with the associated TRISx bit
clear and ANSx bit set will still operate as a digital
output but the input mode will be analog. This can
cause unexpected behavior when performing read-
modify-write operations on the affected port.
All ANSEL register bits default to ‘1’ upon POR and
BOR, disabling digital inputs for their associated port
pins. All TRIS register bits default to ‘1’ upon POR or
BOR, disabling digital outputs for their associated port
pins. As a result, all port pins that have an ANSEL
register will default to analog inputs upon POR or BOR.
REGISTER 10-1: PORTX(1): PORTx REGISTER

R/W-u/x R/W-u/x R/W-u/x R/W-u/x R/W-u/x R/W-u/x R/W-u/x R/W-u/x
Rx7 Rx6 Rx5 Rx4 Rx3 Rx2 Rx1 Rx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 Rx<7:0>: PORTx I/O bit values(2)
Note 1: Register Description for PORTA, PORTB, PORTC and PORTD.

2: Writes to PORTx are written to corresponding LATx register. Reads from PORTx register is return of I/O
pin values.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 10-2: PORTE: PORTE REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-u/x R/W-u/x R/W-u/x R/W-u/x
— — — — RE3(1) RE2(2), (3) RE1(2), (3) RE0(2), (3)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3 RE3: PORTE Input bit value(1)
bit 2-0 RE<2:0>: PORTE I/O bit values(2), (3)
Note 1: Port is available as input only when MCLRE = 0.

2: Writes to PORTx are written to corresponding LATx register. Reads from PORTx register is return of I/O
pin values.
3: Available on PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices.
REGISTER 10-3: ANSELA – PORTA ANALOG SELECT REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
— — ANSA5 — ANSA3 ANSA2 ANSA1 ANSA0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5 ANSA5: RA5 Analog Select bit
1 = Digital input buffer disabled
0 = Digital input buffer enabled
bit 3-0 ANSA<3:0>: RA<3:0> Analog Select bit

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 10-4: ANSELB – PORTB ANALOG SELECT REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
— — ANSB5 ANSB4 ANSB3 ANSB2 ANSB1 ANSB0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-0 ANSB<5:0>: RB<5:0> Analog Select bit
REGISTER 10-5: ANSELC – PORTC ANALOG SELECT REGISTER

R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 U-0
ANSC7 ANSC6 ANSC5 ANSC4 ANSC3 ANSC2 — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-2 ANSC<7:2>: RC<7:2> Analog Select bit

REGISTER 10-6: ANSELD – PORTD ANALOG SELECT REGISTER

ANSD7 ANSD6 ANSD5 ANSD4 ANSD3 ANSD2 ANSD1 ANSD0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ANSD<7:0>: RD<7:0> Analog Select bit


PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 10-7: ANSELE – PORTE ANALOG SELECT REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
— — — — — ANSE2(1) ANSE1(1) ANSE0(1)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 ANSE<2:0>: RE<2:0> Analog Select bit(1)
Note 1: Available on PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices only.
REGISTER 10-8: TRISx: PORTx TRI-STATE REGISTER(1)

TRISx7 TRISx6 TRISx5 TRISx4 TRISx3 TRISx2 TRISx1 TRISx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 TRISx<7:0>: PORTx Tri-State Control bit

1 = PORTx pin configured as an input (tri-stated)
0 = PORTx pin configured as an output
Note 1: Register description for TRISA, TRISB, TRISC and TRISD.
REGISTER 10-9: TRISE: PORTE TRI-STATE REGISTER

R/W-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
(1) (1)
WPUE3 — — — — TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0(1)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 WPUE3: Weak Pull-up Register bits

1 = Pull-up enabled on PORT pin
1 = Pull-up disabled on PORT pin
bit 2-0 TRISE<7:0>: PORTE Tri-State Control bit(1)
1 = PORTE pin configured as an input (tri-stated)
0 = PORTE pin configured as an output

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 10-10: LATx: PORTx OUTPUT LATCH REGISTER(1)

R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u
LATx7 LATx6 LATx5 LATx4 LATx3 LATx2 LATx1 LATx0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 LATx<7:0>: PORTx Output Latch bit value(2)
Note 1: Register Description for LATA, LATB, LATC and LATD.

2: Writes to PORTA are written to corresponding LATA register. Reads from PORTA register is return of I/O
pin values.
REGISTER 10-11: LATE: PORTE OUTPUT LATCH REGISTER(1)

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x/u R/W-x/u R/W-x/u
— — — — — LATE2 LATE1 LATE0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 2-0 LATE<2:0>: PORTE Output Latch bit value(2)
2: Writes to PORTA are written to corresponding LATA register. Reads from PORTA register is return of I/O
pin values.
REGISTER 10-12: WPUB: WEAK PULL-UP PORTB REGISTER

WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 WPUB<7:0>: Weak Pull-up Register bits

1 = Pull-up enabled on PORT pin
1 = Pull-up disabled on PORT pin

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 10-13: IOCB: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE PORTB CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
IOCB7 IOCB6 IOCB5 IOCB4 — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-4 IOCB<7:4>: Interrupt-on-Change PORTB control bits

1 = Interrupt-on-change enabled(1)
0 = Interrupt-on-change disabled
Note 1: Interrupt-on-change requires that the RBIE bit (INTCON<3>) is set.
REGISTER 10-14: SLRCON: SLEW RATE CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1
— — — SLRE(1) SLRD(1) SLRC SLRB SLRA
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4 SLRE: PORTE Slew Rate Control bit(1)
1 = All outputs on PORTE slew at a limited rate
0 = All outputs on PORTE slew at the standard rate
bit 3 SLRD: PORTD Slew Rate Control bit(1)
1 = All outputs on PORTD slew at a limited rate
0 = All outputs on PORTD slew at the standard rate
bit 2 SLRC: PORTC Slew Rate Control bit
1 = All outputs on PORTC slew at a limited rate
0 = All outputs on PORTC slew at the standard rate
bit 1 SLRB: PORTB Slew Rate Control bit
1 = All outputs on PORTB slew at a limited rate
0 = All outputs on PORTB slew at the standard rate
bit 0 SLRA: PORTA Slew Rate Control bit
1 = All outputs on PORTA slew at a limited rate(2)
0 = All outputs on PORTA slew at the standard rate
Note 1: These bits are available on PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices.

2: The slew rate of RA6 defaults to standard rate when the pin is used as CLKOUT.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
11.0 TIMER0 MODULE The T0CON register (Register 11-1) controls all
aspects of the module’s operation, including the
The Timer0 module incorporates the following features: prescale selection. It is both readable and writable.
• Software selectable operation as a timer or A simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 8-bit
counter in both 8-bit or 16-bit modes mode is shown in Figure 11-1. Figure 11-2 shows a
• Readable and writable registers simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 16-bit
• Dedicated 8-bit, software programmable mode.
prescaler
• Selectable clock source (internal or external)
• Edge select for external clock
• Interrupt-on-overflow
REGISTER 11-1: T0CON: TIMER0 CONTROL REGISTER

TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA TOPS<2:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 TMR0ON: Timer0 On/Off Control bit

1 = Enables Timer0
0 = Stops Timer0
bit 6 T08BIT: Timer0 8-bit/16-bit Control bit
1 = Timer0 is configured as an 8-bit timer/counter
0 = Timer0 is configured as a 16-bit timer/counter
bit 5 T0CS: Timer0 Clock Source Select bit
1 = Transition on T0CKI pin
0 = Internal instruction cycle clock (CLKOUT)
bit 4 T0SE: Timer0 Source Edge Select bit
1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on T0CKI pin
0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on T0CKI pin
bit 3 PSA: Timer0 Prescaler Assignment bit
1 = TImer0 prescaler is NOT assigned. Timer0 clock input bypasses prescaler.
0 = Timer0 prescaler is assigned. Timer0 clock input comes from prescaler output.
bit 2-0 T0PS<2:0>: Timer0 Prescaler Select bits
111 = 1:256 prescale value

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
11.1 Timer0 Operation 11.2 Timer0 Reads and Writes in
Timer0 can operate as either a timer or a counter; the
16-Bit Mode
mode is selected with the T0CS bit of the T0CON TMR0H is not the actual high byte of Timer0 in 16-bit
register. In Timer mode (T0CS = 0), the module mode; it is actually a buffered version of the real high
increments on every clock by default unless a different byte of Timer0 which is neither directly readable nor
prescaler value is selected (see Section 11.3 writable (refer to Figure 11-2). TMR0H is updated with
“Prescaler”). Timer0 incrementing is inhibited for two the contents of the high byte of Timer0 during a read of
instruction cycles following a TMR0 register write. The TMR0L. This provides the ability to read all 16 bits of
user can work around this by adjusting the value written Timer0 without the need to verify that the read of the
to the TMR0 register to compensate for the anticipated high and low byte were valid. Invalid reads could
missing increments. otherwise occur due to a rollover between successive
The Counter mode is selected by setting the T0CS bit reads of the high and low byte.
(= 1). In this mode, Timer0 increments either on every Similarly, a write to the high byte of Timer0 must also
rising or falling edge of pin RA4/T0CKI. The increment- take place through the TMR0H Buffer register. Writing
ing edge is determined by the Timer0 Source Edge to TMR0H does not directly affect Timer0. Instead, the
Select bit, T0SE of the T0CON register; clearing this bit high byte of Timer0 is updated with the contents of
selects the rising edge. Restrictions on the external TMR0H when a write occurs to TMR0L. This allows all
clock input are discussed below. 16 bits of Timer0 to be updated at once.
An external clock source can be used to drive Timer0;
however, it must meet certain requirements (see
Table 27-11) to ensure that the external clock can be
synchronized with the internal phase clock (TOSC).
There is a delay between synchronization and the
onset of incrementing the timer/counter.
FIGURE 11-1: TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (8-BIT MODE)
FOSC/4 0
1
Sync with Set
1 Internal TMR0L TMR0IF
Programmable Clocks on Overflow
T0CKI pin 0
Prescaler
T0SE (2 TCY Delay)
8
T0CS 3
T0PS<2:0>
8
PSA Internal Data Bus
Note: Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 11-2: TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT MODE)
FOSC/4 0
1
Sync with Set
1 Internal TMR0
TMR0L High Byte TMR0IF
T0CKI pin Programmable 0 Clocks on Overflow
Prescaler 8
T0SE (2 TCY Delay)
T0CS 3 Read TMR0L
T0PS<2:0>
Write TMR0L
PSA
8
8
TMR0H
8
8
Internal Data Bus
Note: Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale.
11.3 Prescaler 11.3.1 SWITCHING PRESCALER

ASSIGNMENT
An 8-bit counter is available as a prescaler for the Timer0
module. The prescaler is not directly readable or writable; The prescaler assignment is fully under software
its value is set by the PSA and T0PS<2:0> bits of the control and can be changed “on-the-fly” during program
T0CON register which determine the prescaler execution.
assignment and prescale ratio.
Clearing the PSA bit assigns the prescaler to the 11.4 Timer0 Interrupt
Timer0 module. When the prescaler is assigned, The TMR0 interrupt is generated when the TMR0 reg-
prescale values from 1:2 through 1:256 in integer ister overflows from FFh to 00h in 8-bit mode, or from
power-of-2 increments are selectable. FFFFh to 0000h in 16-bit mode. This overflow sets the
When assigned to the Timer0 module, all instructions TMR0IF flag bit. The interrupt can be masked by clear-
writing to the TMR0 register (e.g., CLRF TMR0, MOVWF ing the TMR0IE bit of the INTCON register. Before
TMR0, BSF TMR0, etc.) clear the prescaler count. re-enabling the interrupt, the TMR0IF bit must be
cleared by software in the Interrupt Service Routine.
Note: Writing to TMR0 when the prescaler is
assigned to Timer0 will clear the prescaler Since Timer0 is shut down in Sleep mode, the TMR0
count but will not change the prescaler interrupt cannot awaken the processor from Sleep.
assignment.
TABLE 11-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0

Reset
on page
T0CON TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS<2:0> 157
TMR0H Timer0 Register, High Byte —
TMR0L Timer0 Register, Low Byte —
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by Timer0.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
12.0 TIMER1/3/5 MODULE WITH • Special Event Trigger (with CCP/ECCP)
GATE CONTROL • Selectable Gate Source Polarity
• Gate Toggle Mode
The Timer1/3/5 module is a 16-bit timer/counter with
• Gate Single-pulse Mode
the following features:
• Gate Value Status
• 16-bit timer/counter register pair (TMRxH:TMRxL)
• Gate Event Interrupt
• Programmable internal or external clock source
Figure 12-1 is a block diagram of the Timer1/3/5
• 2-bit prescaler
module.
• Dedicated Secondary 32 kHz oscillator circuit
• Optionally synchronized comparator out
• Multiple Timer1/3/5 gate (count enable) sources
• Interrupt on overflow
• Wake-up on overflow (external clock,
Asynchronous mode only)
• 16-Bit Read/Write Operation
• Time base for the Capture/Compare function
FIGURE 12-1: TIMER1/3/5 BLOCK DIAGRAM
TxGSS<1:0>
TxG 00 TxGSPM
Timer2/4/6 Match 01 0
TxG_IN Data Bus
PR2/4/6 0 TxGVAL
D Q
Comparator 1 10 Single Pulse RD
SYNCC1OUT(7) 1 TXGCON
Acq. Control Q1 EN
D Q 1
Comparator 2 11
SYNCC2OUT(7) Interrupt Set
CK Q TxGGO/DONE
TMRxON det TMRxGIF
R
TxGPOL TxGTM
TMRxGE
Set flag bit TMRxON
TMRxIF on To Comparator Module
Overflow TMRx(2),(4)
EN Synchronized
0 clock input
TMRxH TMRxL TxCLK
Q D
1
Secondary TMRxCS<1:0>
SOSCOUT TxSYNC
Oscillator
Module
See Figure 2-4 Reserved 11
Prescaler Synchronize(3),(7)
1 1, 2, 4, 8
TxCLK_EXT_SRC det
(5) ,(6) (1) 10
2
TxCKI 0
FOSC TxCKPS<1:0>
Internal 01
Clock FOSC/2
TxSOSCEN Internal Sleep input
FOSC/4 Clock
Internal 00
Clock
Note 1: ST Buffer is high speed type when using TxCKI.

2: Timer1/3/5 register increments on rising edge.
3: Synchronize does not operate while in Sleep.
4: See Figure 12-2 for 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Block Diagram.
5: T1CKI is not available when the secondary oscillator is enabled. (SOSCGO = 1 or TXSOSCEN = 1)
6: T3CKI is not available when the secondary oscillator is enabled, unless T3CMX = 1.
7: Synchronized comparator output should not be used in conjunction with synchronized TxCKI.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
12.1 Timer1/3/5 Operation 12.2.1 INTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE
The Timer1/3/5 module is a 16-bit incrementing When the internal clock source is selected the
counter which is accessed through the TMRxH:TMRxL TMRxH:TMRxL register pair will increment on multiples
register pair. Writes to TMRxH or TMRxL directly of FOSC as determined by the Timer1/3/5 prescaler.
update the counter. When the FOSC internal clock source is selected, the
When used with an internal clock source, the module is Timer1/3/5 register value will increment by four counts
a timer and increments on every instruction cycle. every instruction clock cycle. Due to this condition, a
When used with an external clock source, the module 2 LSB error in resolution will occur when reading the
can be used as either a timer or counter and Timer1/3/5 value. To utilize the full resolution of
increments on every selected edge of the external Timer1/3/5, an asynchronous input signal must be used
source. to gate the Timer1/3/5 clock input.
Timer1/3/5 is enabled by configuring the TMRxON and The following asynchronous sources may be used:
TMRxGE bits in the TxCON and TxGCON registers, • Asynchronous event on the TxG pin to Timer1/3/5
respectively. Table 12-1 displays the Timer1/3/5 enable Gate
selections. • C1 or C2 comparator input to Timer1/3/5 Gate
12.2.2 EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE

TABLE 12-1: TIMER1/3/5 ENABLE
SELECTIONS When the external clock source is selected, the
Timer1/3/5 module may work as a timer or a counter.
Timer1/3/5
TMRxON TMRxGE When enabled to count, Timer1/3/5 is incremented on
Operation
the rising edge of the external clock input of the TxCKI
0 0 Off pin. This external clock source can be synchronized to
0 1 Off the microcontroller system clock or it can run
1 0 Always On asynchronously.
1 1 Count Enabled When used as a timer with a clock oscillator, an
external 32.768 kHz crystal can be used in conjunction
with the dedicated secondary internal oscillator circuit.
12.2 Clock Source Selection
Note: In Counter mode, a falling edge must be
The TMRxCS<1:0> and TxSOSCEN bits of the TxCON
registered by the counter prior to the first
register are used to select the clock source for
incrementing rising edge after any one or
Timer1/3/5. The dedicated Secondary Oscillator circuit
more of the following conditions:
can be used as the clock source for Timer1, Timer3 and
Timer5, simultaneously. Any of the TxSOSCEN bits will • Timer1/3/5 enabled after POR
enable the Secondary Oscillator circuit and select it as • Write to TMRxH or TMRxL
the clock source for that particular timer. Table 12-2 • Timer1/3/5 is disabled
displays the clock source selections. • Timer1/3/5 is disabled (TMRxON = 0)
when TxCKI is high then Timer1/3/5
is enabled (TMRxON=1) when TxCKI
is low.
TABLE 12-2: CLOCK SOURCE SELECTIONS

TMRxCS1 TMRxCS0 TxSOSCEN Clock Source
0 1 x System Clock (FOSC)
0 0 x Instruction Clock (FOSC/4)
1 0 0 External Clocking on TxCKI Pin
1 0 1 Osc.Circuit On SOSCI/SOSCO Pins

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
12.3 Timer1/3/5 Prescaler 12.5.1 READING AND WRITING
TIMER1/3/5 IN ASYNCHRONOUS
Timer1/3/5 has four prescaler options allowing 1, 2, 4 or
COUNTER MODE
8 divisions of the clock input. The TxCKPS bits of the
TxCON register control the prescale counter. The Reading TMRxH or TMRxL while the timer is running
prescale counter is not directly readable or writable; from an external asynchronous clock will ensure a valid
however, the prescaler counter is cleared upon a write to read (taken care of in hardware). However, the user
TMRxH or TMRxL. should keep in mind that reading the 16-bit timer in two
8-bit values itself, poses certain problems, since the
12.4 Secondary Oscillator timer may overflow between the reads. For writes, it is
recommended that the user simply stop the timer and
A dedicated secondary low-power 32.768 kHz write the desired values. A write contention may occur
oscillator circuit is built-in between pins SOSCI (input) by writing to the timer registers, while the register is
and SOSCO (amplifier output). This internal circuit is to incrementing. This may produce an unpredictable
be used in conjunction with an external 32.768 kHz value in the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair.
crystal.
The oscillator circuit is enabled by setting the 12.6 Timer1/3/5 16-Bit Read/Write Mode
TxSOSCEN bit of the TxCON register, the SOSCGO bit
Timer1/3/5 can be configured to read and write all 16
of the OSCCON2 register or by selecting the
bits of data, to and from, the 8-bit TMRxL and TMRxH
secondary oscillator as the system clock by setting
registers, simultaneously. The 16-bit read and write
SCS<1:0> = 01 in the OSCCON register. The oscillator
operations are enabled by setting the RD16 bit of the
will continue to run during Sleep.
TxCON register.
Note: The oscillator requires a start-up and To accomplish this function, the TMRxH register value
stabilization time before use. Thus, is mapped to a buffer register called the TMRxH buffer
TxSOSCEN should be set and a suitable register. While in 16-Bit mode, the TMRxH register is
delay observed prior to enabling not directly readable or writable and all read and write
Timer1/3/5. operations take place through the use of this TMRxH
buffer register.
12.5 Timer1/3/5 Operation in When a read from the TMRxL register is requested, the
Asynchronous Counter Mode value of the TMRxH register is simultaneously loaded
If control bit TxSYNC of the TxCON register is set, the into the TMRxH buffer register. When a read from the
external clock input is not synchronized. The timer TMRxH register is requested, the value is provided
increments asynchronously to the internal phase from the TMRxH buffer register instead. This provides
clocks. If external clock source is selected then the the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of
timer will continue to run during Sleep and can the Timer1/3/5 value from a single instance in time.
generate an interrupt on overflow, which will wake-up In contrast, when not in 16-Bit mode, the user must
the processor. However, special precautions in read each register separately and determine if the
software are needed to read/write the timer (see values have become invalid due to a rollover that may
Section 12.5.1 “Reading and Writing Timer1/3/5 in have occurred between the read operations.
Asynchronous Counter Mode”). When a write request of the TMRxL register is
Note: When switching from synchronous to requested, the TMRxH buffer register is simultaneously
asynchronous operation, it is possible to updated with the contents of the TMRxH register. The
skip an increment. When switching from value of TMRxH must be preloaded into the TMRxH
asynchronous to synchronous operation, buffer register prior to the write request for the TMRxL
it is possible to produce an additional register. This provides the user with the ability to write
increment. all 16 bits to the TMRxL:TMRxH register pair at the
same time.
Any requests to write to the TMRxH directly does not
clear the Timer1/3/5 prescaler value. The prescaler
value is only cleared through write requests to the
TMRxL register.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 12-2: TIMER1/3/5 16-BIT 12.7.2 TIMER1/3/5 GATE SOURCE
READ/WRITE MODE SELECTION
BLOCK DIAGRAM The Timer1/3/5 Gate source can be selected from one
of four different sources. Source selection is controlled
From by the TxGSS bits of the TxGCON register. The polarity
Timer1/3/5
Circuitry for each available source is also selectable. Polarity
TMR1 Set selection is controlled by the TxGPOL bit of the
TMR1L High Byte TMR1IF
on Overflow TxGCON register.
8
Read TMR1L TABLE 12-4: TIMER1/3/5 GATE SOURCES

Write TMR1L TxGSS Timer1/3/5 Gate Source
8
8 00 Timer1/3/5 Gate Pin
TMR1H
01 Timer2/4/6 Match to PR2/4/6
(TMR2/4/6 increments to match PR2/4/6)
8
8 10 Comparator 1 Output SYNCC1OUT
Internal Data Bus (optionally Timer1/3/5 synchronized out-
put)
11 Comparator 2 Output SYNCC2OUT
12.7 Timer1/3/5 Gate (optionally Timer1/3/5 synchronized out-
put)
Timer1/3/5 can be configured to count freely or the
The Gate resource, Timer2 Match to PR2, changes
count can be enabled and disabled using Timer1/3/5
between Timer2, Timer4 and Timer6 depending on
Gate circuitry. This is also referred to as Timer1/3/5
which of the three 16-bit Timers, Timer1, Timer3 or
Gate Enable.
Timer5, is selected. See Table 12-5 to determine which
Timer1/3/5 Gate can also be driven by multiple Timer2/4/6 Match to PR2/4/6 combination is available
selectable sources. for the 16-bit timer being used.
12.7.1 TIMER1/3/5 GATE ENABLE

TABLE 12-5: GATE RESOURCES FOR
The Timer1/3/5 Gate Enable mode is enabled by
setting the TMRxGE bit of the TxGCON register. The
TIMER2/4/6 MATCH TO
polarity of the Timer1/3/5 Gate Enable mode is PR2/4/6
configured using the TxGPOL bit of the TxGCON Timer1/3/5 Gate Match
register. Timer1/3/5 Resource
Selection
When Timer1/3/5 Gate Enable mode is enabled, Timer1 TMR2 Match to PR2
Timer1/3/5 will increment on the rising edge of the
Timer3 TMR4 Match to PR4
Timer1/3/5 clock source. When Timer1/3/5 Gate
Enable mode is disabled, no incrementing will occur Timer5 TMR6 Match to PR6
and Timer1/3/5 will hold the current count. See
Figure 12-4 for timing details. 12.7.2.1 TxG Pin Gate Operation
The TxG pin is one source for Timer1/3/5 Gate Control.
It can be used to supply an external source to the
TABLE 12-3: TIMER1/3/5 GATE ENABLE
Timer1/3/5 Gate circuitry.
SELECTIONS
Timer1/3/5 12.7.2.2 Timer2/4/6 Match Gate Operation
TxCLK TxGPOL TxG
Operation The TMR2/4/6 register will increment until it matches
 0 0 Counts the value in the PR2/4/6 register. On the very next
increment cycle, TMR2/4/6 will be reset to 00h. When
 0 1 Holds Count
this Reset occurs, a low-to-high pulse will automatically
 1 0 Holds Count be generated and internally supplied to the Timer1/3/5
 1 1 Counts Gate circuitry. See Section 12.7.2 “Timer1/3/5 Gate
Source Selection” for more information.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
12.7.2.3 Comparator C1 Gate Operation 12.7.4 TIMER1/3/5 GATE SINGLE-PULSE
The output resulting from a Comparator 1 operation can MODE
be selected as a source for Timer1/3/5 Gate Control. When Timer1/3/5 Gate Single-Pulse mode is enabled,
The Comparator 1 output (SYNCC1OUT) can be it is possible to capture a single-pulse gate event.
synchronized to the Timer1/3/5 clock or left Timer1/3/5 Gate Single-Pulse mode is first enabled by
asynchronous. For more information see Section 18.8.4 setting the TxGSPM bit in the TxGCON register. Next,
“Synchronizing Comparator Output to Timer1”. the TxGGO/DONE bit in the TxGCON register must be
set. The Timer1/3/5 will be fully enabled on the next
12.7.2.4 Comparator C2 Gate Operation incrementing edge. On the next trailing edge of the
The output resulting from a Comparator 2 operation pulse, the TxGGO/DONE bit will automatically be
can be selected as a source for Timer1/3/5 Gate cleared. No other gate events will be allowed to
Control. The Comparator 2 output (SYNCC2OUT) can increment Timer1/3/5 until the TxGGO/DONE bit is
be synchronized to the Timer1/3/5 clock or left once again set in software.
asynchronous. For more information see Clearing the TxGSPM bit of the TxGCON register will
Section 18.8.4 “Synchronizing Comparator Output also clear the TxGGO/DONE bit. See Figure 12-6 for
to Timer1”. timing details.
12.7.3 TIMER1/3/5 GATE TOGGLE MODE Enabling the Toggle mode and the Single-Pulse mode
simultaneously will permit both sections to work
When Timer1/3/5 Gate Toggle mode is enabled, it is together. This allows the cycle times on the Timer1/3/5
possible to measure the full-cycle length of a Gate source to be measured. See Figure 12-7 for
Timer1/3/5 gate signal, as opposed to the duration of a timing details.
single level pulse.
The Timer1/3/5 Gate source is routed through a flip-flop 12.7.5 TIMER1/3/5 GATE VALUE STATUS
that changes state on every incrementing edge of the When Timer1/3/5 Gate Value Status is utilized, it is
signal. See Figure 12-5 for timing details. possible to read the most current level of the gate
Timer1/3/5 Gate Toggle mode is enabled by setting the control value. The value is stored in the TxGVAL bit in
TxGTM bit of the TxGCON register. When the TxGTM the TxGCON register. The TxGVAL bit is valid even
bit is cleared, the flip-flop is cleared and held clear. This when the Timer1/3/5 Gate is not enabled (TMRxGE bit
is necessary in order to control which edge is is cleared).
measured.
12.7.6 TIMER1/3/5 GATE EVENT
Note: Enabling Toggle mode at the same time as INTERRUPT
changing the gate polarity may result in
indeterminate operation. When Timer1/3/5 Gate Event Interrupt is enabled, it is
possible to generate an interrupt upon the completion
of a gate event. When the falling edge of TxGVAL
occurs, the TMRxGIF flag bit in the PIR3 register will be
set. If the TMRxGIE bit in the PIE3 register is set, then
an interrupt will be recognized.
The TMRxGIF flag bit operates even when the
Timer1/3/5 Gate is not enabled (TMRxGE bit is
cleared).
For more information on selecting high or low priority
status for the Timer1/3/5 Gate Event Interrupt see
Section 9.0 “Interrupts”.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
12.8 Timer1/3/5 Interrupt 12.10 ECCP/CCP Capture/Compare Time
The Timer1/3/5 register pair (TMRxH:TMRxL)
Base
increments to FFFFh and rolls over to 0000h. When The CCP modules use the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair
Timer1/3/5 rolls over, the Timer1/3/5 interrupt flag bit of as the time base when operating in Capture or
the PIR1/2/5 register is set. To enable the interrupt on Compare mode.
rollover, you must set these bits:
In Capture mode, the value in the TMRxH:TMRxL
• TMRxON bit of the TxCON register register pair is copied into the CCPRxH:CCPRxL
• TMRxIE bits of the PIE1, PIE2 or PIE5 registers register pair on a configured event.
• PEIE/GIEL bit of the INTCON register In Compare mode, an event is triggered when the value
• GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON register CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair matches the value in
The interrupt is cleared by clearing the TMRxIF bit in the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair. This event can be a
the Interrupt Service Routine. Special Event Trigger.
For more information on selecting high or low priority For more information, see Section 14.0
status for the Timer1/3/5 Overflow Interrupt, see “Capture/Compare/PWM Modules”.
Section 9.0 “Interrupts”.
12.11 ECCP/CCP Special Event Trigger
Note: The TMRxH:TMRxL register pair and the
TMRxIF bit should be cleared before When any of the CCP’s are configured to trigger a
enabling interrupts. special event, the trigger will clear the TMRxH:TMRxL
register pair. This special event does not cause a
12.9 Timer1/3/5 Operation During Sleep Timer1/3/5 interrupt. The CCP module may still be
configured to generate a CCP interrupt.
Timer1/3/5 can only operate during Sleep when setup In this mode of operation, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL
in Asynchronous Counter mode. In this mode, an register pair becomes the period register for
external crystal or clock source can be used to Timer1/3/5.
increment the counter. To set up the timer to wake the
device: Timer1/3/5 should be synchronized and FOSC/4 should
be selected as the clock source in order to utilize the
• TMRxON bit of the TxCON register must be set Special Event Trigger. Asynchronous operation of
• TMRxIE bit of the PIE1/2/5 register must be set Timer1/3/5 can cause a Special Event Trigger to be
• PEIE/GIEL bit of the INTCON register must be set missed.
• TxSYNC bit of the TxCON register must be set In the event that a write to TMRxH or TMRxL coincides
• TMRxCS bits of the TxCON register must be with a Special Event Trigger from the CCP, the write will
configured take precedence.
• TxSOSCEN bit of the TxCON register must be For more information, see Section 17.2.8 “Special
configured Event Trigger”.
The device will wake-up on an overflow and execute
the next instruction. If the GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON
register is set, the device will call the Interrupt Service
Routine.
The secondary oscillator will continue to operate in
Sleep regardless of the TxSYNC bit setting.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 12-3: TIMER1/3/5 INCREMENTING EDGE
TXCKI = 1
when TMRx
Enabled
TXCKI = 0
when TMRX
Enabled
Note 1: Arrows indicate counter increments.

2: In Counter mode, a falling edge must be registered by the counter prior to the first incrementing rising edge of the clock.
FIGURE 12-4: TIMER1/3/5 GATE ENABLE MODE
TMRxGE
TxGPOL
TxG_IN
TxCKI
TxGVAL
Timer1/3/5 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 12-5: TIMER1/3/5 GATE TOGGLE MODE
TMRxGE
TxGPOL
TxGTM
TxTxG_IN
TxCKI
TxGVAL
TIMER1/3/5 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 N+5 N+6 N+7 N+8
FIGURE 12-6: TIMER1/3/5 GATE SINGLE-PULSE MODE
TMRxGE
TxGPOL
TxGSPM
Cleared by hardware on
TxGGO/ Set by software falling edge of TxGVAL
DONE
Counting enabled on
rising edge of TxG
TxG_IN
TxCKI
TxGVAL
TIMER1/3/5 N N+1 N+2
Cleared by
TMRxGIF Cleared by software Set by hardware on software
falling edge of TxGVAL

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 12-7: TIMER1/3/5 GATE SINGLE-PULSE AND TOGGLE COMBINED MODE
TMRxGE
TxGPOL
TxGSPM
TxGTM
Cleared by hardware on
TxGGO/ Set by software falling edge of TxGVAL
DONE Counting enabled on
rising edge of TxG
TxG_IN
TxCKI
TxGVAL
TIMER1/3/5 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4
Set by hardware on Cleared by

TMRxGIF Cleared by software falling edge of TxGVAL software
12.12 Peripheral Module Disable

When a peripheral module is not used or inactive, the
module can be disabled by setting the Module Disable
bit in the PMD registers. This will reduce power con-
sumption to an absolute minimum. Setting the PMD
bits holds the module in Reset and disconnects the
module’s clock source. The Module Disable bits for
Timer1 (TMR1MD), Timer3 (TMR3MD) and Timer5
(TMR5MD) are in the PMD0 Register. See Section 3.0
“Power-Managed Modes” for more information.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
12.13 Timer1/3/5 Control Register
The Timer1/3/5 Control register (TxCON), shown in
Register 12-1, is used to control Timer1/3/5 and select
the various features of the Timer1/3/5 module.
REGISTER 12-1: TXCON: TIMER1/3/5 CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/0 R/W-0/u
TMRxCS<1:0> TxCKPS<1:0> TxSOSCEN TxSYNC TxRD16 TMRxON
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
u = Bit is unchanged x = Bit is unknown -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Resets
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7-6 TMRxCS<1:0>: Timer1/3/5 Clock Source Select bits

11 = Reserved. Do not use.
10 = Timer1/3/5 clock source is pin or oscillator:
If TxSOSCEN = 0:
External clock from TxCKI pin (on the rising edge)
If TxSOSCEN = 1:
Crystal oscillator on SOSCI/SOSCO pins
01 = Timer1/3/5 clock source is system clock (FOSC)
00 = Timer1/3/5 clock source is instruction clock (FOSC/4)
bit 5-4 TxCKPS<1:0>: Timer1/3/5 Input Clock Prescale Select bits
11 = 1:8 Prescale value
bit 3 TxSOSCEN: Secondary Oscillator Enable Control bit
1 = Dedicated Secondary oscillator circuit enabled
0 = Dedicated Secondary oscillator circuit disabled
bit 2 TxSYNC: Timer1/3/5 External Clock Input Synchronization Control bit
TMRxCS<1:0> = 1X
1 = Do not synchronize external clock input
0 = Synchronize external clock input with system clock (FOSC)
TMRxCS<1:0> = 0X
This bit is ignored. Timer1/3/5 uses the internal clock when TMRxCS<1:0> = 1X.
bit 1 TxRD16: 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit
1 = Enables register read/write of Timer1/3/5 in one 16-bit operation
0 = Enables register read/write of Timer1/3/5 in two 8-bit operation
bit 0 TMRxON: Timer1/3/5 On bit
1 = Enables Timer1/3/5
0 = Stops Timer1/3/5
Clears Timer1/3/5 Gate flip-flop

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
12.14 Timer1/3/5 Gate Control Register
The Timer1/3/5 Gate Control register (TxGCON),
shown in Register 12-2, is used to control Timer1/3/5
Gate.
REGISTER 12-2: TXGCON: TIMER1/3/5 GATE CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W-0/u R/W/HC-0/u R-x/x R/W-0/u R/W-0/u
TMRxGE TxGPOL TxGTM TxGSPM TxGGO/DONE TxGVAL TxGSS<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HC = Bit is cleared by hardware
bit 7 TMRxGE: Timer1/3/5 Gate Enable bit

If TMRxON = 0:
This bit is ignored
If TMRxON = 1:
1 = Timer1/3/5 counting is controlled by the Timer1/3/5 gate function
0 = Timer1/3/5 counts regardless of Timer1/3/5 gate function
bit 6 TxGPOL: Timer1/3/5 Gate Polarity bit
1 = Timer1/3/5 gate is active-high (Timer1/3/5 counts when gate is high)
0 = Timer1/3/5 gate is active-low (Timer1/3/5 counts when gate is low)
bit 5 TxGTM: Timer1/3/5 Gate Toggle Mode bit
1 = Timer1/3/5 Gate Toggle mode is enabled
0 = Timer1/3/5 Gate Toggle mode is disabled and toggle flip-flop is cleared
Timer1/3/5 gate flip-flop toggles on every rising edge.
bit 4 TxGSPM: Timer1/3/5 Gate Single-Pulse Mode bit
1 = Timer1/3/5 gate Single-Pulse mode is enabled and is controlling Timer1/3/5 gate
0 = Timer1/3/5 gate Single-Pulse mode is disabled
bit 3 TxGGO/DONE: Timer1/3/5 Gate Single-Pulse Acquisition Status bit
1 = Timer1/3/5 gate single-pulse acquisition is ready, waiting for an edge
0 = Timer1/3/5 gate single-pulse acquisition has completed or has not been started
This bit is automatically cleared when TxGSPM is cleared.
bit 2 TxGVAL: Timer1/3/5 Gate Current State bit
Indicates the current state of the Timer1/3/5 gate that could be provided to TMRxH:TMRxL.
Unaffected by Timer1/3/5 Gate Enable (TMRxGE).
bit 1-0 TxGSS<1:0>: Timer1/3/5 Gate Source Select bits
00 = Timer1/3/5 Gate pin
01 = Timer2/4/6 Match PR2/4/6 output (See Table 12-6 for proper timer match selection)
10 = Comparator 1 optionally synchronized output (SYNCC1OUT)
11 = Comparator 2 optionally synchronized output (SYNCC2OUT)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 12-6: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1/3/5 AS A TIMER/COUNTER
Reset
Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Values on
Page
PMD0 UART2MD UART1MD TMR6MD TMR5MD TMR4MD TMR3MD TMR2MD TMR1MD 56
T1GCON TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GTM T1GSPM T1GGO/DONE T1GVAL T1GSS<1:0> 171
TMRxH Timer1/3/5 Register, High Byte —
TMRxL Timer1/3/5 Register, Low Byte —
TABLE 12-7: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1/3/5

Reset
on Page

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
13.0 TIMER2/4/6 MODULE
There are three identical 8-bit Timer2-type modules
available. To maintain pre-existing naming conventions,
the Timers are called Timer2, Timer4 and Timer6 (also
Timer2/4/6).
Note: The ‘x’ variable used in this section is used
to designate Timer2, Timer4, or Timer6.
For example, TxCON references T2CON,
T4CON, or T6CON. PRx references PR2,
PR4, or PR6.
The Timer2/4/6 module incorporates the following
features:
• 8-bit Timer and Period registers (TMRx and PRx,
respectively)
• Readable and writable (both registers)
• Software programmable prescaler (1:1, 1:4, 1:16)
• Software programmable postscaler (1:1 to 1:16)
• Interrupt on TMRx match with PRx, respectively
• Optional use as the shift clock for the MSSPx
modules (Timer2 only)
See Figure 13-1 for a block diagram of Timer2/4/6.
FIGURE 13-1: TIMER2/4/6 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Sets Flag
TMRx
bit TMRxIF
Output
Prescaler Reset
FOSC/4 TMRx
1:1, 1:4, 1:16, 1:64
2 Postscaler
Comparator
EQ 1:1 to 1:16
TxCKPS<1:0>
PRx 4
TxOUTPS<3:0>

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
13.1 Timer2/4/6 Operation 13.2 Timer2/4/6 Interrupt
The clock input to the Timer2/4/6 module is the system Timer2/4/6 can also generate an optional device
instruction clock (FOSC/4). interrupt. The Timer2/4/6 output signal (TMRx-to-PRx
TMRx increments from 00h on each clock edge. match) provides the input for the 4-bit
counter/postscaler. This counter generates the TMRx
A 4-bit counter/prescaler on the clock input allows direct match interrupt flag which is latched in TMRxIF of the
input, divide-by-4 and divide-by-16 prescale options. PIR1/PIR5 registers. The interrupt is enabled by setting
These options are selected by the prescaler control bits, the TMRx Match Interrupt Enable bit, TMRxIE of the
TxCKPS<1:0> of the TxCON register. The value of PIE1/PIE5 registers. Interrupt Priority is selected with
TMRx is compared to that of the Period register, PRx, on the TMRxIP bit in the IPR1/IPR5 registers.
each clock cycle. When the two values match, the
comparator generates a match signal as the timer A range of 16 postscale options (from 1:1 through 1:16
output. This signal also resets the value of TMRx to 00h inclusive) can be selected with the postscaler control
on the next cycle and drives the output bits, TxOUTPS<3:0>, of the TxCON register.
counter/postscaler (see Section 13.2 “Timer2/4/6
Interrupt”). 13.3 Timer2/4/6 Output
The TMRx and PRx registers are both directly readable The unscaled output of TMRx is available primarily to
and writable. The TMRx register is cleared on any the CCP modules, where it is used as a time base for
device Reset, whereas the PRx register initializes to operations in PWM mode. The timer to be used with a
FFh. Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are specific CCP module is selected using the
cleared on the following events: CxTSEL<1:0> bits in the CCPTMRS0 and CCPTMRS1
• a write to the TMRx register registers.
• a write to the TxCON register Timer2 can be optionally used as the shift clock source
• Power-on Reset (POR) for the MSSPx modules operating in SPI mode by
setting SSPM<3:0> = 0011 in the SSPxCON1 register.
• Brown-out Reset (BOR)
Additional information is provided in Section 15.0
• MCLR Reset “Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP1 and
• Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset MSSP2) Module”.
• Stack Overflow Reset
• Stack Underflow Reset 13.4 Timer2/4/6 Operation During Sleep
• RESET Instruction
The Timer2/4/6 timers cannot be operated while the
Note: TMRx is not cleared when TxCON is written. processor is in Sleep mode. The contents of the TMRx
and PRx registers will remain unchanged while the
processor is in Sleep mode.
13.5 Peripheral Module Disable

When a peripheral module is not used or inactive, the
module can be disabled by setting the Module Disable
bit in the PMD registers. This will reduce power con-
sumption to an absolute minimum. Setting the PMD
bits holds the module in Reset and disconnects the
module’s clock source. The Module Disable bits for
Timer2 (TMR2MD), Timer4 (TMR4MD) and Timer6
(TMR6MD) are in the PMD0 Register. See Section 3.0
“Power-Managed Modes” for more information.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 13-1: TxCON: TIMER2/TIMER4/TIMER6 CONTROL REGISTER

— TxOUTPS<3:0> TMRxON TxCKPS<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6-3 TxOUTPS<3:0>: TimerX Output Postscaler Select bits
0000 = 1:1 Postscaler
bit 2 TMRxON: TimerX On bit
1 = TimerX is on
0 = TimerX is off
bit 1-0 TxCKPS<1:0>: Timer2-type Clock Prescale Select bits
00 = Prescaler is 1
01 = Prescaler is 4
1x = Prescaler is 16

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 13-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER2/4/6

Register
on Page
CCPTMRS0 C3TSEL<1:0> — C2TSEL<1:0> — C1TSEL<1:0> 204
CCPTMRS1 — — — — C5TSEL<1:0> C4TSEL<1:0> 204
PR2 Timer2 Period Register —
T2CON — T2OUTPS<3:0> TMR2ON T2CKPS<1:0> 170
TMR2 Timer2 Register —
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by Timer2/4/6.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.0 CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM
MODULES Note 1: In devices with more than one CCP
The Capture/Compare/PWM module is a peripheral module, it is very important to pay close
which allows the user to time and control different attention to the register names used. A
events, and to generate Pulse-Width Modulation number placed after the module acronym
(PWM) signals. In Capture mode, the peripheral allows is used to distinguish between separate
the timing of the duration of an event. The Compare modules. For example, the CCP1CON
mode allows the user to trigger an external event when and CCP2CON control the same
a predetermined amount of time has expired. The operational aspects of two completely
PWM mode can generate Pulse-Width Modulated different CCP modules.
signals of varying frequency and duty cycle. 2: Throughout this section, generic
This family of devices contains three Enhanced references to a CCP module in any of its
Capture/Compare/PWM modules (ECCP1, ECCP2, operating modes may be interpreted as
and ECCP3) and two standard Capture/Compare/PWM being equally applicable to ECCP1,
modules (CCP4 and CCP5). ECCP2, ECCP3, CCP4 and CCP5.
Register names, module signals, I/O pins,
The Capture and Compare functions are identical for all
and bit names may use the generic
CCP/ECCP modules. The difference between CCP
designator ‘x’ to indicate the use of a
and ECCP modules are in the Pulse-Width Modulation
numeral to distinguish a particular module,
(PWM) function. In CCP modules, the standard PWM
when required.
function is identical. In ECCP modules, the Enhanced
PWM function has either Full-Bridge or Half-Bridge
PWM output. Full-Bridge ECCP modules have four
available I/O pins while Half-Bridge ECCP modules
only have two available I/O pins. ECCP PWM modules
are backward compatible with CCP PWM modules and
can be configured as standard PWM modules. See
Table 14-1 to determine the CCP/ECCP functionality
available on each device in this family.
TABLE 14-1: PWM RESOURCES
Device Name ECCP1 ECCP2 ECCP3 CCP4 CCP5
PIC18(L)F23K22
PIC18(L)F24K22 Enhanced PWM Enhanced PWM Enhanced PWM Standard PWM
Standard PWM
PIC18(L)F25K22 Full-Bridge Half-Bridge Half-Bridge (Special Event Trigger)
PIC18(L)F26K22
PIC18(L)F43K22
PIC18(L)F44K22 Enhanced PWM Enhanced PWM Enhanced PWM Standard PWM
Standard PWM
PIC18(L)F45K22 Full-Bridge Full-Bridge Half-Bridge (Special Event Trigger)
PIC18(L)F46K22

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.1 Capture Mode Figure 14-1 shows a simplified diagram of the Capture
operation.
The Capture mode function described in this section is
identical for all CCP and ECCP modules available on
FIGURE 14-1: CAPTURE MODE
this device family.
OPERATION BLOCK
Capture mode makes use of the 16-bit Timer DIAGRAM
resources, Timer1, Timer3 and Timer5. The timer
Set Flag bit CCPxIF
resources for each CCP capture function are (PIR1/2/4 register)
Prescaler
independent and are selected using the CCPTMRS0
 1, 4, 16
and CCPTMRS1 registers. When an event occurs on
CCPx CCPRxH CCPRxL
the CCPx pin, the 16-bit CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pin
pair captures and stores the 16-bit value of the
and Capture
TMRxH:TMRxL register pair, respectively. An event is Enable
Edge Detect
defined as one of the following and is configured by the
TMR1/3/5H TMR1/3/5L
CCPxM<3:0> bits of the CCPxCON register:
CCPxM<3:0>
• Every falling edge System Clock (FOSC)
• Every rising edge
• Every 4th rising edge 14.1.1 CCP PIN CONFIGURATION
• Every 16th rising edge In Capture mode, the CCPx pin should be configured
When a capture is made, the corresponding Interrupt as an input by setting the associated TRIS control bit.
Request Flag bit CCPxIF of the PIR1, PIR2 or PIR4
Some CCPx outputs are multiplexed on a couple of
register is set. The interrupt flag must be cleared in pins. Table 14-2 shows the CCP output pin
software. If another capture occurs before the value in multiplexing. Selection of the output pin is determined
the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair is read, the old
by the CCPxMX bits in Configuration register 3H
captured value is overwritten by the new captured (CONFIG3H). Refer to Register 24-4 for more details.
value.
Note: If the CCPx pin is configured as an output,
a write to the port can cause a capture
condition.
TABLE 14-2: CCP PIN MULTIPLEXING

CCP OUTPUT CONFIG 3H Control Bit Bit Value PIC18(L)F2XK22 I/O pin PIC18(L)F4XK22 I/O pin
0 RB3 RB3
CCP2 CCP2MX (*)
1 RC1 RC1
0(*) RC6 RE0
CCP3 CCP3MX
1 RB5 RB5
Legend: * = Default
14.1.2 TIMER1 MODE RESOURCE 14.1.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE

The 16-bit Timer resource must be running in Timer When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture
mode or Synchronized Counter mode for the CCP interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the
module to use the capture feature. In Asynchronous CCPxIE interrupt enable bit of the PIE1, PIE2 or PIE4
Counter mode, the capture operation may not work. register clear to avoid false interrupts. Additionally, the
See Section 12.0 “Timer1/3/5 Module with Gate user should clear the CCPxIF interrupt flag bit of the
Control” for more information on configuring the 16-bit PIR1, PIR2 or PIR4 register following any change in
Timers. Operating mode.
Note: Clocking the 16-bit Timer resource from
the system clock (FOSC) should not be
used in Capture mode. In order for
Capture mode to recognize the trigger
event on the CCPx pin, the Timer resource
must be clocked from the instruction clock
(FOSC/4) or from an external clock source.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.1.4 CCP PRESCALER 14.1.5 CAPTURE DURING SLEEP
There are four prescaler settings specified by the Capture mode requires a 16-bit TimerX module for use
CCPxM<3:0> bits of the CCPxCON register. Whenever as a time base. There are four options for driving the
the CCP module is turned off, or the CCP module is not 16-bit TimerX module in Capture mode. It can be driven
in Capture mode, the prescaler counter is cleared. Any by the system clock (FOSC), the instruction clock (FOSC/
Reset will clear the prescaler counter. 4), or by the external clock sources, the Secondary
Switching from one capture prescaler to another does Oscillator (SOSC), or the TxCKI clock input. When the
not clear the prescaler and may generate a false 16-bit TimerX resource is clocked by FOSC or FOSC/4,
interrupt. To avoid this unexpected operation, turn the TimerX will not increment during Sleep. When the
module off by clearing the CCPxCON register before device wakes from Sleep, TimerX will continue from its
changing the prescaler. Example 14-1 demonstrates previous state. Capture mode will operate during Sleep
the code to perform this function. when the 16-bit TimerX resource is clocked by one of
the external clock sources (SOSC or the TxCKI pin).
EXAMPLE 14-1: CHANGING BETWEEN
CAPTURE PRESCALERS
#define NEW_CAPT_PS 0x06 //Capture
// Prescale 4th
... // rising edge
CCPxCON = 0; // Turn the CCP
// Module Off
CCPxCON = NEW_CAPT_PS; // Turn CCP module
// on with new
// prescale value
TABLE 14-3: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CAPTURE

Register
on Page
CCP4CON — — DC4B<1:0> CCP4M<3:0> 201
CCP5CON — — DC5B<1:0> CCP5M<3:0> 201
CCPR1H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte (MSB) —
CCPR1L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte (LSB) —
Legend: — = Unimplemented location, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by Capture mode.
Note 1: These registers/bits are available on PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 14-3: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CAPTURE (CONTINUED)
Register
on Page
PMD1 MSSP2MD MSSP1MD — CCP5MD CCP4MD CCP3MD CCP2MD CCP1MD 57
TMR1H Holding Register for the Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register —
TMR1L Holding Register for the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register —
TABLE 14-4: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CAPTURE

Register
on Page

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.2 Compare Mode 14.2.1 CCP PIN CONFIGURATION
The Compare mode function described in this section The user must configure the CCPx pin as an output by
is identical for all CCP and ECCP modules available on clearing the associated TRIS bit.
this device family. Some CCPx outputs are multiplexed on a couple of
Compare mode makes use of the 16-bit TimerX pins. Table 14-2 shows the CCP output pin
resources, Timer1, Timer3 and Timer5. The 16-bit Multiplexing. Selection of the output pin is determined
value of the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair is by the CCPxMX bits in Configuration register 3H
constantly compared against the 16-bit value of the (CONFIG3H). Refer to Register 24-4 for more details.
TMRxH:TMRxL register pair. When a match occurs, Note: Clearing the CCPxCON register will force
one of the following events can occur: the CCPx compare output latch to the
• Toggle the CCPx output default low level. This is not the PORT I/O
• Set the CCPx output data latch.
• Clear the CCPx output
14.2.2 TimerX MODE RESOURCE
• Generate a Special Event Trigger
In Compare mode, 16-bit TimerX resource must be
• Generate a Software Interrupt
running in either Timer mode or Synchronized Counter
The action on the pin is based on the value of the mode. The compare operation may not work in
CCPxM<3:0> control bits of the CCPxCON register. At Asynchronous Counter mode.
the same time, the interrupt flag CCPxIF bit is set.
See Section 12.0 “Timer1/3/5 Module with Gate
All Compare modes can generate an interrupt. Control” for more information on configuring the 16-bit
Figure 14-2 shows a simplified diagram of the TimerX resources.
Compare operation. Note: Clocking TimerX from the system clock
(FOSC) should not be used in Compare
FIGURE 14-2: COMPARE MODE mode. In order for Compare mode to
OPERATION BLOCK recognize the trigger event on the CCPx
DIAGRAM pin, TImerX must be clocked from the
instruction clock (FOSC/4) or from an
CCPxM<3:0>
Mode Select external clock source.
Set CCPxIF Interrupt Flag 14.2.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE

(PIR1/2/4)
CCPx 4 When Generate Software Interrupt mode is chosen
Pin CCPRxH CCPRxL (CCPxM<3:0> = 1010), the CCPx module does not
Q S assert control of the CCPx pin (see the CCPxCON
Output Comparator
Logic Match register).
R
TMRxH TMRxL
TRIS
Output Enable
Special Event Trigger
Special Event Trigger function on

• ECCP1, ECCP2, ECCP3, CCP4 and CCP5 will:
- Reset TimerX – TMRxH:TMRxL = 0x0000
- TimerX Interrupt Flag, (TMRxIF) is not set
Additional Function on
• CCP5 will
- Set ADCON0<1>, GO/DONE bit to start an ADC
Conversion if ADCON<0>, ADON = 1.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.2.4 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER 14.2.5 COMPARE DURING SLEEP
When Special Event Trigger mode is selected The Compare mode is dependent upon the system
(CCPxM<3:0> = 1011), and a match of the clock (FOSC) for proper operation. Since FOSC is shut
TMRxH:TMRxL and the CCPRxH:CCPRxL registers down during Sleep mode, the Compare mode will not
occurs, all CCPx and ECCPx modules will immediately: function properly during Sleep.
• Set the CCP interrupt flag bit – CCPxIF
• CCP5 will start an ADC conversion, if the ADC is
enabled
On the next TimerX rising clock edge:
• A Reset of TimerX register pair occurs –
TMRxH:TMRxL = 0x0000,
This Special Event Trigger mode does not:
• Assert control over the CCPx or ECCPx pins.
• Set the TMRxIF interrupt bit when the
TMRxH:TMRxL register pair is reset. (TMRxIF
gets set on a TimerX overflow.)
If the value of the CCPRxH:CCPRxL registers are
modified when a match occurs, the user should be
aware that the automatic reset of TimerX occurs on the
next rising edge of the clock. Therefore, modifying the
CCPRxH:CCPRxL registers before this reset occurs
will allow the TimerX to continue without being reset,
inadvertently resulting in the next event being
advanced or delayed.
The Special Event Trigger mode allows the
CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair to effectively provide a
16-bit programmable period register for TimerX.
TABLE 14-5: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARE

Register
on Page
CCP4CON — — DC4B<1:0> CCP4M<3:0> 201
CCP5CON — — DC5B<1:0> CCP5M<3:0> 201

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 14-5: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARE (CONTINUED)
Register
on Page

Register
on Page

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.3 PWM Overview FIGURE 14-3: CCP PWM OUTPUT SIGNAL
Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) is a scheme that Period
provides power to a load by switching quickly between
fully on and fully off states. The PWM signal resembles Pulse Width
TMRx = PRx
a square wave where the high portion of the signal is
considered the on state and the low portion of the signal TMRx = CCPRxH:CCPxCON<5:4>
is considered the off state. The high portion, also known
TMRx = 0
as the pulse width, can vary in time and is defined in
steps. A larger number of steps applied, which
lengthens the pulse width, also supplies more power to
the load. Lowering the number of steps applied, which
FIGURE 14-4: SIMPLIFIED PWM BLOCK
shortens the pulse width, supplies less power. The DIAGRAM
PWM period is defined as the duration of one complete CCPxCON<5:4>
cycle or the total amount of on and off time combined. Duty Cycle Registers
PWM resolution defines the maximum number of steps CCPRxL

that can be present in a single PWM period. A higher
resolution allows for more precise control of the pulse
width time and in turn the power that is applied to the
load. CCPRxH(2) (Slave)
CCPx
The term duty cycle describes the proportion of the on
time to the off time and is expressed in percentages, Comparator R Q
where 0% is fully off and 100% is fully on. A lower duty
cycle corresponds to less power applied and a higher TMRx (1) S
duty cycle corresponds to more power applied. TRIS
Figure 14-3 shows a typical waveform of the PWM
signal. Comparator
Clear Timer,
toggle CCPx pin and
14.3.1 STANDARD PWM OPERATION PRx
latch duty cycle
The standard PWM function described in this section is

Note 1: The 8-bit timer TMRx register is concatenated
available and identical for CCP and ECCP modules.
with the 2-bit internal system clock (FOSC), or
The standard PWM mode generates a Pulse-Width 2 bits of the prescaler, to create the 10-bit time
modulation (PWM) signal on the CCPx pin with up to 10 base.
bits of resolution. The period, duty cycle, and resolution 2: In PWM mode, CCPRxH is a read-only register.
are controlled by the following registers:
• PRx registers 14.3.2 SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION
• TxCON registers
The following steps should be taken when configuring
• CCPRxL registers the CCP module for standard PWM operation:
• CCPxCON registers
1. Disable the CCPx pin output driver by setting the
Figure 14-4 shows a simplified block diagram of PWM associated TRIS bit.
operation. 2. Select the 8-bit TimerX resource, (Timer2,
Timer4 or Timer6) to be used for PWM genera-
tion by setting the CxTSEL<1:0> bits in the
Note 1: The corresponding TRIS bit must be
CCPTMRSx register.(1)
cleared to enable the PWM output on the
CCPx pin. 3. Load the PRx register for the selected TimerX
with the PWM period value.
2: Clearing the CCPxCON register will
4. Configure the CCP module for the PWM mode
relinquish control of the CCPx pin.
by loading the CCPxCON register with the
appropriate values.
5. Load the CCPRxL register and the DCxB<1:0>
bits of the CCPxCON register, with the PWM
duty cycle value.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
6. Configure and start the 8-bit TimerX resource: 14.3.5 PWM DUTY CYCLE
• Clear the TMRxIF interrupt flag bit of the The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing a 10-bit
PIR2 or PIR4 register. See Note 1 below. value to multiple registers: CCPRxL register and
• Configure the TxCKPS bits of the TxCON DCxB<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON register. The
register with the Timer prescale value. CCPRxL contains the eight MSbs and the DCxB<1:0>
• Enable the Timer by setting the TMRxON bits of the CCPxCON register contain the two LSbs.
bit of the TxCON register. CCPRxL and DCxB<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON
7. Enable PWM output pin: register can be written to at any time. The duty cycle
value is not latched into CCPRxH until after the period
• Wait until the Timer overflows and the
completes (i.e., a match between PRx and TMRx
TMRxIF bit of the PIR2 or PIR4 register is
registers occurs). While using the PWM, the CCPRxH
set. See Note 1 below.
register is read-only.
• Enable the CCPx pin output driver by
clearing the associated TRIS bit. Equation 14-2 is used to calculate the PWM pulse
width.
Note 1: In order to send a complete duty cycle
and period on the first PWM output, the Equation 14-3 is used to calculate the PWM duty cycle
above steps must be included in the ratio.
setup sequence. If it is not critical to start
with a complete PWM signal on the first EQUATION 14-2: PULSE WIDTH
output, then step 6 may be ignored.
Pulse Width =  CCPRxL:CCPxCON<5:4>  
14.3.3 PWM TIMER RESOURCE
T OSC  (TMRx Prescale Value)
The PWM standard mode makes use of one of the 8-bit
Timer2/4/6 timer resources to specify the PWM period.
Configuring the CxTSEL<1:0> bits in the CCPTMRS0 EQUATION 14-3: DUTY CYCLE RATIO
or CCPTMRS1 register selects which Timer2/4/6 timer
is used.  CCPRxL:CCPxCON<5:4> 
Duty Cycle Ratio = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
4  PRx + 1 
14.3.4 PWM PERIOD
The PWM period is specified by the PRx register of 8-bit
TimerX. The PWM period can be calculated using the The CCPRxH register and a 2-bit internal latch are
formula of Equation 14-1. used to double buffer the PWM duty cycle. This double
buffering is essential for glitchless PWM operation.
EQUATION 14-1: PWM PERIOD The 8-bit timer TMRx register is concatenated with either
the 2-bit internal system clock (FOSC), or 2 bits of the
PWM Period =   PRx  + 1   4  T OSC  prescaler, to create the 10-bit time base. The system
(TMRx Prescale Value) clock is used if the TimerX prescaler is set to 1:1.
When the 10-bit time base matches the CCPRxH and
Note 1: TOSC = 1/FOSC 2-bit latch, then the CCPx pin is cleared (see
Figure 14-4).
When TMRx is equal to PRx, the following three events
occur on the next increment cycle:
• TMRx is cleared
• The CCPx pin is set. (Exception: If the PWM duty
cycle = 0%, the pin will not be set.)
• The PWM duty cycle is latched from CCPRxL into
CCPRxH.
Note: The Timer postscaler (see Section 13.0

“Timer2/4/6 Module”) is not used in the
determination of the PWM frequency.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.3.6 PWM RESOLUTION EQUATION 14-4: PWM RESOLUTION
The resolution determines the number of available duty
cycles for a given period. For example, a 10-bit resolution log  4  PRx + 1  
Resolution = ------------------------------------------ bits
will result in 1024 discrete duty cycles, whereas an 8-bit log  2 
resolution will result in 256 discrete duty cycles.
The maximum PWM resolution is 10 bits when PRx is
255. The resolution is a function of the PRx register Note: If the pulse width value is greater than the
value as shown by Equation 14-4. period the assigned PWM pin(s) will
remain unchanged.
TABLE 14-7: EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS (FOSC = 32 MHz)

PWM Frequency 1.95 kHz 7.81 kHz 31.25 kHz 125 kHz 250 kHz 333.3 kHz
Timer Prescale (1, 4, 16) 16 4 1 1 1 1
PRx Value 0xFF 0xFF 0xFF 0x3F 0x1F 0x17
Maximum Resolution (bits) 10 10 10 8 7 6.6

PWM Frequency 1.22 kHz 4.88 kHz 19.53 kHz 78.12 kHz 156.3 kHz 208.3 kHz
Timer Prescale (1, 4, 16) 16 4 1 1 1 1
PRx Value 0xFF 0xFF 0xFF 0x3F 0x1F 0x17
Maximum Resolution (bits) 10 10 10 8 7 6.6

PWM Frequency 1.22 kHz 4.90 kHz 19.61 kHz 76.92 kHz 153.85 kHz 200.0 kHz
Timer Prescale (1, 4, 16) 16 4 1 1 1 1
PRx Value 0x65 0x65 0x65 0x19 0x0C 0x09
Maximum Resolution (bits) 8 8 8 6 5 5
14.3.7 OPERATION IN SLEEP MODE 14.3.9 EFFECTS OF RESET

In Sleep mode, the TMRx register will not increment Any Reset will force all ports to Input mode and the
and the state of the module will not change. If the CCPx CCP registers to their Reset states.
pin is driving a value, it will continue to drive that value.
When the device wakes up, TMRx will continue from its
previous state.
14.3.8 CHANGES IN SYSTEM CLOCK

FREQUENCY
The PWM frequency is derived from the system clock
frequency. Any changes in the system clock frequency
will result in changes to the PWM frequency. See
Section 2.0 “Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe
Clock Monitor)” for additional details.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 14-10: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH STANDARD PWM

Register
on Page
CCP4CON — — DC4B<1:0> CCP4M<3:0> 201
CCP5CON — — DC5B<1:0> CCP5M<3:0> 201
TMR2 Timer2 Period Register —

Register
on Page

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.4 PWM (Enhanced Mode) To select an Enhanced PWM Output mode, the
PxM<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON register must be
The enhanced PWM function described in this section is configured appropriately.
available for CCP modules ECCP1, ECCP2 and
ECCP3, with any differences between modules noted. The PWM outputs are multiplexed with I/O pins and are
designated PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD. The polarity of the
The enhanced PWM mode generates a Pulse-Width PWM pins is configurable and is selected by setting the
Modulation (PWM) signal on up to four different output CCPxM bits in the CCPxCON register appropriately.
pins with up to 10 bits of resolution. The period, duty
cycle, and resolution are controlled by the following Figure 14-5 shows an example of a simplified block
registers: diagram of the Enhanced PWM module.
• PRx registers Table 14-12 shows the pin assignments for various
Enhanced PWM modes.
• TxCON registers
• CCPRxL registers Note 1: The corresponding TRIS bit must be
• CCPxCON registers cleared to enable the PWM output on the
CCPx pin.
The ECCP modules have the following additional PWM
registers which control Auto-shutdown, Auto-restart, 2: Clearing the CCPxCON register will
Dead-band Delay and PWM Steering modes: relinquish control of the CCPx pin.
• ECCPxAS registers 3: Any pin not used in the enhanced PWM

mode is available for alternate pin
• PSTRxCON registers
functions, if applicable.
• PWMxCON registers
4: To prevent the generation of an
The enhanced PWM module can generate the following incomplete waveform when the PWM is
five PWM Output modes: first enabled, the ECCP module waits
• Single PWM until the start of a new PWM period before
• Half-Bridge PWM generating a PWM signal.
• Full-Bridge PWM, Forward Mode
• Full-Bridge PWM, Reverse Mode
• Single PWM with PWM Steering Mode
FIGURE 14-5: EXAMPLE SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE ENHANCED PWM MODE
DCxB<1:0> PxM<1:0> CCPxM<3:0>
Duty Cycle Registers
2 4
CCPRxL
CCPx/PxA CCPx/PxA
TRISx
CCPRxH (Slave)
PxB PxB
Output TRISx
Comparator R Q
Controller
PxC PxC(2)
TMRx (1)
S TRISx
PxD PxD(2)
Comparator
Clear Timer, TRISx
toggle PWM pin and
latch duty cycle
PRx PWMxCON
Note 1: The 8-bit timer TMRx register is concatenated with the 2-bit internal Q clock, or 2 bits of the prescaler to create the 10-bit time
base.
2: PxC and PxD are not available on Half-Bridge ECCP Modules.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 14-12: EXAMPLE PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR VARIOUS PWM ENHANCED MODES
ECCP Mode PxM<1:0> CCPx/PxA PxB PxC PxD
(1) (1) (1)
Single 00 Yes Yes Yes Yes(1)
Half-Bridge 10 Yes Yes No No
Full-Bridge, Forward 01 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Full-Bridge, Reverse 11 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Note 1: PWM Steering enables outputs in Single mode.
FIGURE 14-6: EXAMPLE PWM (ENHANCED MODE) OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-HIGH

STATE)
Pulse PRX+1
PxM<1:0> Signal 0
Width
Period
00 (Single Output) PxA Modulated

Delay(1) Delay(1)
PxA Modulated
10 (Half-Bridge) PxB Modulated
PxA Active
(Full-Bridge, PxB Inactive

01 Forward)
PxC Inactive
PxD Modulated
PxA Inactive
(Full-Bridge, PxB Modulated

11
Reverse)
PxC Active
PxD Inactive
Relationships:
• Period = 4 * TOSC * (PRx + 1) * (TMRx Prescale Value)
• Pulse Width = TOSC * (CCPRxL<7:0>:CCPxCON<5:4>) * (TMRx Prescale Value)
• Delay = 4 * TOSC * (PWMxCON<6:0>)
Note 1: Dead-band delay is programmed using the PWMxCON register (Section 14.4.5 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay
Mode”).

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 14-7: EXAMPLE ENHANCED PWM OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-LOW STATE)
Pulse PRx+1
PxM<1:0> Signal 0
Width
Period
00 (Single Output) PxA Modulated
PxA Modulated
Delay(1) Delay(1)
10 (Half-Bridge) PxB Modulated
PxA Active
(Full-Bridge, PxB Inactive

01 Forward)
PxC Inactive
PxD Modulated
PxA Inactive
(Full-Bridge, PxB Modulated

11
Reverse)
PxC Active
PxD Inactive
Relationships:
• Period = 4 * TOSC * (PRx + 1) * (TMRx Prescale Value)
• Pulse Width = TOSC * (CCPRxL<7:0>:CCPxCON<5:4>) * (TMRx Prescale Value)
• Delay = 4 * TOSC * (PWMxCON<6:0>)
Note 1: Dead-band delay is programmed using the PWMxCON register (Section 14.4.5 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay
Mode”).

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.4.1 HALF-BRIDGE MODE Since the PxA and PxB outputs are multiplexed with the
PORT data latches, the associated TRIS bits must be
In Half-Bridge mode, two pins are used as outputs to
cleared to configure PxA and PxB as outputs.
drive push-pull loads. The PWM output signal is output
on the CCPx/PxA pin, while the complementary PWM
output signal is output on the PxB pin (see Figure 14-9). FIGURE 14-8: EXAMPLE OF HALF-
This mode can be used for Half-Bridge applications, as BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT
shown in Figure 14-9, or for Full-Bridge applications, Period Period
where four power switches are being modulated with
two PWM signals. Pulse Width
In Half-Bridge mode, the programmable dead-band delay PxA(2)

can be used to prevent shoot-through current in Half- td
Bridge power devices. The value of the PDC<6:0> bits of td
the PWMxCON register sets the number of instruction PxB(2)
cycles before the output is driven active. If the value is
greater than the duty cycle, the corresponding output (1) (1) (1)
remains inactive during the entire cycle. See
Section 14.4.5 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay td = Dead-Band Delay
Mode” for more details of the dead-band delay Note 1: At this time, the TMRx register is equal to the
operations. PRx register.
2: Output signals are shown as active-high.
FIGURE 14-9: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE APPLICATIONS
Standard Half-Bridge Circuit (“Push-Pull”)
FET
Driver +
PxA
-
Load
FET
Driver
+
PxB
-
Half-Bridge Output Driving a Full-Bridge Circuit
V+
FET FET
Driver Driver
PxA
Load
FET FET
Driver Driver
PxB

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.4.2 FULL-BRIDGE MODE
In Full-Bridge mode, all four pins are used as outputs.
An example of Full-Bridge application is shown in
Figure 14-10.
In the Forward mode, pin CCPx/PxA is driven to its active
state, pin PxD is modulated, while PxB and PxC will be
driven to their inactive state as shown in Figure 14-11.
In the Reverse mode, PxC is driven to its active state, pin
PxB is modulated, while PxA and PxD will be driven to
their inactive state as shown Figure 14-11.
PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD outputs are multiplexed with
the PORT data latches. The associated TRIS bits must
be cleared to configure the PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD
pins as outputs.
FIGURE 14-10: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE APPLICATION

V+
FET QA QC FET
Driver Driver
PxA
Load
PxB
FET FET
Driver Driver
PxC
QB QD
V-
PxD

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 14-11: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT
Forward Mode
Period
(2)
PxA
Pulse Width
PxB(2)
PxC(2)
PxD(2)
(1) (1)
Reverse Mode
Period
Pulse Width
PxA(2)
PxB(2)
PxC(2)
PxD(2)
(1) (1)
Note 1: At this time, the TMRx register is equal to the PRx register.
2: Output signal is shown as active-high.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.4.2.1 Direction Change in Full-Bridge The Full-Bridge mode does not provide dead-band
Mode delay. As one output is modulated at a time, dead-band
delay is generally not required. There is a situation
In the Full-Bridge mode, the PxM1 bit in the CCPxCON
where dead-band delay is required. This situation
register allows users to control the forward/reverse
occurs when both of the following conditions are true:
direction. When the application firmware changes this
direction control bit, the module will change to the new 1. The direction of the PWM output changes when
direction on the next PWM cycle. the duty cycle of the output is at or near 100%.
A direction change is initiated in software by changing 2. The turn off time of the power switch, including
the PxM1 bit of the CCPxCON register. The following the power device and driver circuit, is greater
sequence occurs four Timer cycles prior to the end of than the turn on time.
the current PWM period: Figure 14-13 shows an example of the PWM direction
• The modulated outputs (PxB and PxD) are placed changing from forward to reverse, at a near 100% duty
in their inactive state. cycle. In this example, at time t1, the output PxA and
PxD become inactive, while output PxC becomes
• The associated unmodulated outputs (PxA and
active. Since the turn off time of the power devices is
PxC) are switched to drive in the opposite
longer than the turn on time, a shoot-through current
direction.
will flow through power devices QC and QD (see
• PWM modulation resumes at the beginning of the Figure 14-10) for the duration of ‘t’. The same
next period. phenomenon will occur to power devices QA and QB
See Figure 14-12 for an illustration of this sequence. for PWM direction change from reverse to forward.
If changing PWM direction at high duty cycle is required
for an application, two possible solutions for eliminating
the shoot-through current are:
1. Reduce PWM duty cycle for one PWM period
before changing directions.
2. Use switch drivers that can drive the switches off
faster than they can drive them on.
Other options to prevent shoot-through current may
exist.
FIGURE 14-12: EXAMPLE OF PWM DIRECTION CHANGE
Signal Period(1) Period
PxA (Active-High)
PxB (Active-High)
Pulse Width
PxC (Active-High)
(2)
PxD (Active-High)
Pulse Width
Note 1: The direction bit PxM1 of the CCPxCON register is written any time during the PWM cycle.
2: When changing directions, the PxA and PxC signals switch before the end of the current PWM cycle. The
modulated PxB and PxD signals are inactive at this time. The length of this time is (TimerX Prescale)/FOSC,
where TimerX is Timer2, Timer4 or Timer6.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 14-13: EXAMPLE OF PWM DIRECTION CHANGE AT NEAR 100% DUTY CYCLE
Forward Period t1 Reverse Period
PxA
PxB
PW
PxC
PxD PW
TON
External Switch C
TOFF
External Switch D
Potential T = TOFF – TON

Shoot-Through Current
Note 1: All signals are shown as active-high.

2: TON is the turn-on delay of power switch QC and its driver.
3: TOFF is the turn-off delay of power switch QD and its driver.
14.4.3 ENHANCED PWM AUTO- of each pin pair is determined by the PSSxAC<1:0> and
SHUTDOWN MODE PSSxBD<1:0> bits of the ECCPxAS register. Each pin
pair may be placed into one of three states:
The PWM mode supports an Auto-Shutdown mode that
will disable the PWM outputs when an external • Drive logic ‘1’
shutdown event occurs. Auto-Shutdown mode places • Drive logic ‘0’
the PWM output pins into a predetermined state. This • Tri-state (high-impedance)
mode is used to help prevent the PWM from damaging
the application.
The auto-shutdown sources are selected using the Note 1: The auto-shutdown condition is a level-
CCPxAS<2:0> bits of the ECCPxAS register. A based signal, not an edge-based signal.
shutdown event may be generated by: As long as the level is present, the auto-
shutdown will persist.
• A logic ‘0’ on the INT pin
2: Writing to the CCPxASE bit is disabled
• Comparator Cx
while an auto-shutdown condition
• Setting the CCPxASE bit in firmware persists.
A shutdown condition is indicated by the CCPxASE 3: Once the auto-shutdown condition has
(Auto-Shutdown Event Status) bit of the ECCPxAS been removed and the PWM restarted
register. If the bit is a ‘0’, the PWM pins are operating (either through firmware or auto-restart),
normally. If the bit is a ‘1’, the PWM outputs are in the the PWM signal will always restart at the
shutdown state. beginning of the next PWM period.
When a shutdown event occurs, two things happen:
The CCPxASE bit is set to ‘1’. The CCPxASE will
remain set until cleared in firmware or an auto-restart
occurs (see Section 14.4.4 “Auto-Restart Mode”).
The enabled PWM pins are asynchronously placed in
their shutdown states. The PWM output pins are
grouped into pairs [PxA/PxC] and [PxB/PxD]. The state

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 14-14: PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN WITH FIRMWARE RESTART (PXRSEN = 0)
Missing Pulse Missing Pulse

(Auto-Shutdown) (CCPxASE not clear)
Timer Timer Timer Timer Timer
Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow
PWM Period
PWM Activity
Start of
PWM Period
Shutdown Event
CCPxASE bit
PWM
Shutdown Shutdown Resumes
Event Occurs Event Clears CCPxASE
Cleared by
Firmware
14.4.4 AUTO-RESTART MODE If auto-restart is enabled, the CCPxASE bit will remain
set as long as the auto-shutdown condition is active.
The Enhanced PWM can be configured to
When the auto-shutdown condition is removed, the
automatically restart the PWM signal once the auto-
CCPxASE bit will be cleared via hardware and normal
shutdown condition has been removed. Auto-restart is
operation will resume.
enabled by setting the PxRSEN bit in the PWMxCON
register.
FIGURE 14-15: PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN WITH AUTO-RESTART (PXRSEN = 1)

Missing Pulse Missing Pulse
(Auto-Shutdown) (CCPxASE not clear)
Timer Timer Timer Timer Timer
Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow
PWM Period
PWM Activity
Start of
PWM Period
Shutdown Event
CCPxASE bit
PWM
Shutdown Resumes
Event Occurs
Shutdown CCPxASE
Event Clears Cleared by
Hardware

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.4.5 PROGRAMMABLE DEAD-BAND FIGURE 14-16: EXAMPLE OF HALF-
DELAY MODE BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT
In Half-Bridge applications where all power switches Period Period
are modulated at the PWM frequency, the power
Pulse Width
switches normally require more time to turn off than to
turn on. If both the upper and lower power switches are PxA(2)
switched at the same time (one turned on, and the td
other turned off), both switches may be on for a short
td
period of time until one switch completely turns off. PxB(2)
During this brief interval, a very high current (shoot-
through current) will flow through both power switches, (1) (1) (1)
shorting the bridge supply. To avoid this potentially
destructive shoot-through current from flowing during td = Dead-Band Delay
switching, turning on either of the power switches is
normally delayed to allow the other switch to Note 1: At this time, the TMRx register is equal to the
completely turn off. PRx register.
In Half-Bridge mode, a digitally programmable dead- 2: Output signals are shown as active-high.
band delay is available to avoid shoot-through current
from destroying the bridge power switches. The delay
occurs at the signal transition from the non-active state
to the active state. See Figure 14-16 for illustration.
The lower seven bits of the associated PWMxCON
register (Register 14-6) sets the delay period in terms
of microcontroller instruction cycles (TCY or 4 TOSC).
FIGURE 14-17: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE APPLICATIONS

V+
Standard Half-Bridge Circuit (“Push-Pull”)
FET
Driver +
PxA V
-
Load
FET
Driver
+
PxB V
-
V-

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.4.6 PWM STEERING MODE FIGURE 14-18: SIMPLIFIED STEERING
In Single Output mode, PWM steering allows any of the BLOCK DIAGRAM
PWM pins to be the modulated signal. Additionally, the STRxA
same PWM signal can be simultaneously available on
multiple pins. PxA Signal PxA pin
CCPxM1 1
Once the Single Output mode is selected
(CCPxM<3:2> = 11 and PxM<1:0> = 00 of the PORT Data
CCPxCON register), the user firmware can bring out 0
TRIS
the same PWM signal to one, two, three or four output STRxB
pins by setting the appropriate Steering Enable bits
(STRxA, STRxB, STRxC and/or STRxD) of the CCPxM0 1 PxB pin
PSTRxCON register, as shown in Table 14-13.
PORT Data 0
TRIS
Note: The associated TRIS bits must be set to STRxC
output (‘0’) to enable the pin output driver
in order to see the PWM signal on the pin. 1 PxC pin
CCPxM1
While the PWM Steering mode is active, CCPxM<1:0> PORT Data
bits of the CCPxCON register select the PWM output 0
TRIS
polarity for the PxD, PxC, PxB and PxA pins. STRxD
The PWM auto-shutdown operation also applies to
PWM Steering mode as described in Section 14.4.3 CCPxM0 1 PxD pin
“Enhanced PWM Auto-shutdown Mode”. An auto-
shutdown event will only affect pins that have PWM PORT Data 0
outputs enabled. TRIS
Note 1: Port outputs are configured as shown when

the CCPxCON register bits PxM<1:0> = 00
and CCPxM<3:2> = 11.
2: Single PWM output requires setting at least
one of the STRx bits.
14.4.6.1 Steering Synchronization

The STRxSYNC bit of the PSTRxCON register gives
the user two selections of when the steering event will
happen. When the STRxSYNC bit is ‘0’, the steering
event will happen at the end of the instruction that
writes to the PSTRxCON register. In this case, the
output signal at the PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD pins may
be an incomplete PWM waveform. This operation is
useful when the user firmware needs to immediately
remove a PWM signal from the pin.
When the STRxSYNC bit is ‘1’, the effective steering
update will happen at the beginning of the next PWM
period. In this case, steering on/off the PWM output will
always produce a complete PWM waveform.
Figures 14-19 and 14-20 illustrate the timing diagrams
of the PWM steering depending on the STRxSYNC
setting.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
14.4.7 START-UP CONSIDERATIONS modes must be enabled in the proper Output mode and
complete a full PWM cycle before enabling the PWM
When any PWM mode is used, the application
pin output drivers. The completion of a full PWM cycle
hardware must use the proper external pull-up and/or
is indicated by the TMRxIF bit of the PIR1, PIR2 or
pull-down resistors on the PWM output pins.
PIR5 register being set as the second PWM period
The CCPxM<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON register allow begins.
the user to choose whether the PWM output signals are
active-high or active-low for each pair of PWM output Note: When the microcontroller is released from
pins (PxA/PxC and PxB/PxD). The PWM output Reset, all of the I/O pins are in the
polarities must be selected before the PWM pin output high-impedance state. The external cir-
drivers are enabled. Changing the polarity cuits must keep the power switch devices
configuration while the PWM pin output drivers are in the Off state until the microcontroller
enable is not recommended since it may result in drives the I/O pins with the proper signal
damage to the application circuits. levels or activates the PWM output(s).
The PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD output latches may not be
in the proper states when the PWM module is
initialized. Enabling the PWM pin output drivers at the
same time as the Enhanced PWM modes may cause
damage to the application circuit. The Enhanced PWM
FIGURE 14-19: EXAMPLE OF STEERING EVENT AT END OF INSTRUCTION (STRxSYNC = 0)
PWM Period
PWM
STRx
P1<D:A> PORT Data PORT Data
P1n = PWM
FIGURE 14-20: EXAMPLE OF STEERING EVENT AT BEGINNING OF INSTRUCTION

(STRxSYNC = 1)
PWM
STRx
P1<D:A> PORT Data PORT Data
P1n = PWM

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 14-13: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ENHANCED PWM

Register
on Page
IPR1 — ADIP RCxIP TXxIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 127
PIE1 — ADIE RCxIE TXxIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 123
PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 124
PIR1 — ADIF RCxIF TXxIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 118
PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 119
PSTR1CON — — — STR1SYNC STR1D STR1C STR1B STR1A 206
PWM1CON P1RSEN P1DC<6:0> 206
TMR2 Timer2 Module Register —

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

Register
on Page
REGISTER 14-1: CCPxCON: STANDARD CCPx CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — DCxB<1:0> CCPxM<3:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
u = Bit is unchanged x = Bit is unknown -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Reset
bit 7-6 Unused

bit 5-4 DCxB<1:0>: PWM Duty Cycle Least Significant bits
Capture mode:
Unused
Compare mode:
Unused
PWM mode:
These bits are the two LSbs of the PWM duty cycle. The eight MSbs are found in CCPRxL.
bit 3-0 CCPxM<3:0>: ECCPx Mode Select bits
0000 = Capture/Compare/PWM off (resets the module)
0001 = Reserved
0010 = Compare mode: toggle output on match
0011 = Reserved
0100 = Capture mode: every falling edge

0101 = Capture mode: every rising edge
0110 = Capture mode: every 4th rising edge
1000 = Compare mode: set output on compare match (CCPx pin is set, CCPxIF is set)
1001 = Compare mode: clear output on compare match (CCPx pin is cleared, CCPxIF is set)
1010 = Compare mode: generate software interrupt on compare match (CCPx pin is unaffected,
CCPxIF is set)
1011 = Compare mode: Special Event Trigger (CCPx pin is unaffected, CCPxIF is set)
TimerX (selected by CxTSEL bits) is reset
ADON is set, starting A/D conversion if A/D module is enabled(1)
11xx =: PWM mode
Note 1: This feature is available on CCP5 only.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 14-2: CCPxCON: ENHANCED CCPx CONTROL REGISTER

R/x-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
PxM<1:0> DCxB<1:0> CCPxM<3:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
u = Bit is unchanged x = Bit is unknown -n/n = Value at POR and BOR/Value at all other Reset
bit 7-6 PxM<1:0>: Enhanced PWM Output Configuration bits

If CCPxM<3:2> = 00, 01, 10: (Capture/Compare modes)
xx = PxA assigned as Capture/Compare input; PxB, PxC, PxD assigned as port pins
Half-Bridge ECCP Modules(1):

If CCPxM<3:2> = 11: (PWM modes)
0x = Single output; PxA modulated; PxB assigned as port pin
1x = Half-Bridge output; PxA, PxB modulated with dead-band control
Full-Bridge ECCP Modules(1):

If CCPxM<3:2> = 11: (PWM modes)
00 = Single output; PxA modulated; PxB, PxC, PxD assigned as port pins
01 = Full-Bridge output forward; PxD modulated; PxA active; PxB, PxC inactive
10 = Half-Bridge output; PxA, PxB modulated with dead-band control; PxC, PxD assigned as port
pins
11 = Full-Bridge output reverse; PxB modulated; PxC active; PxA, PxD inactive
bit 5-4 DCxB<1:0>: PWM Duty Cycle Least Significant bits
Capture mode:
Unused
Compare mode:
Unused
PWM mode:
These bits are the two LSbs of the PWM duty cycle. The eight MSbs are found in CCPRxL.
Note 1: See Table 14-1 to determine Full-Bridge and Half-Bridge ECCPs for the device being used.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 14-2: CCPxCON: ENHANCED CCPx CONTROL REGISTER (CONTINUED)
bit 3-0 CCPxM<3:0>: ECCPx Mode Select bits
0000 = Capture/Compare/PWM off (resets the module)
0001 = Reserved
0010 = Compare mode: toggle output on match
0011 = Reserved
0100 = Capture mode: every falling edge

0101 = Capture mode: every rising edge
1000 = Compare mode: set output on compare match (CCPx pin is set, CCPxIF is set)
1001 = Compare mode: clear output on compare match (CCPx pin is cleared, CCPxIF is set)
1010 = Compare mode: generate software interrupt on compare match (CCPx pin is unaffected,
CCPxIF is set)
1011 = Compare mode: Special Event Trigger (CCPx pin is unaffected, CCPxIF is set)
TimerX is reset
Half-Bridge ECCP Modules(1):

1100 = PWM mode: PxA active-high; PxB active-high
1101 = PWM mode: PxA active-high; PxB active-low
1110 = PWM mode: PxA active-low; PxB active-high
1111 = PWM mode: PxA active-low; PxB active-low
Full-Bridge ECCP Modules(1):

1100 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-high; PxB, PxD active-high
1101 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-high; PxB, PxD active-low
1110 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-low; PxB, PxD active-high
1111 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-low; PxB, PxD active-low
Note 1: See Table 14-1 to determine Full-Bridge and Half-Bridge ECCPs for the device being used.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 14-3: CCPTMRS0: PWM TIMER SELECTION CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
C3TSEL<1:0> — C2TSEL<1:0> — C1TSEL<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-6 C3TSEL<1:0>: CCP3 Timer Selection bits

00 = CCP3 – Capture/Compare modes use Timer1, PWM modes use Timer2
11 = Reserved
bit 5 Unused
11 = Reserved
bit 2 Unused
11 = Reserved
REGISTER 14-4: CCPTMRS1: PWM TIMER SELECTION CONTROL REGISTER 1

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — — C5TSEL<1:0> C4TSEL<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

11 = Reserved
11 = Reserved

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 14-5: ECCPxAS: CCPX AUTO-SHUTDOWN CONTROL REGISTER

CCPxASE CCPxAS<2:0> PSSxAC<1:0> PSSxBD<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CCPxASE: CCPx Auto-shutdown Event Status bit

if PxRSEN = 1;
1 = An Auto-shutdown event occurred; CCPxASE bit will automatically clear when event goes away;
CCPx outputs in shutdown state
0 = CCPx outputs are operating
if PxRSEN = 0;
1 = An Auto-shutdown event occurred; bit must be cleared in software to restart PWM;
CCPx outputs in shutdown state
0 = CCPx outputs are operating
bit 6-4 CCxPAS<2:0>: CCPx Auto-Shutdown Source Select bits (1)
000 = Auto-shutdown is disabled
001 = Comparator C1 – output high will cause shutdown event
010 = Comparator C2 – output high will cause shutdown event
011 = Either Comparator C1 or C2 – output high will cause shutdown event
100 = FLT0 pin - low level will cause shutdown event
101 = FLT0 pin or Comparator C1 – low level will cause shutdown event
110 = FLT0 pin or Comparator C2 – low level will cause shutdown event
111 = FLT0 pin or Comparators C1 or C2 – low level will cause shutdown event
bit 3-2 PSSxAC<1:0>: Pins PxA and PxC Shutdown State Control bits
00 = Drive pins PxA and PxC to ‘0’
01 = Drive pins PxA and PxC to ‘1’
1x = Pins PxA and PxC tri-state
bit 1-0 PSSxBD<1:0>: Pins PxB and PxD Shutdown State Control bits
00 = Drive pins PxB and PxD to ‘0’
01 = Drive pins PxB and PxD to ‘1’
1x = Pins PxB and PxD tri-state
Note 1: If C1SYNC or C2SYNC bits in the CM2CON1 register are enabled, the shutdown will be delayed by
Timer1.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 14-6: PWMxCON: ENHANCED PWM CONTROL REGISTER

PxRSEN PxDC<6:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 PxRSEN: PWM Restart Enable bit

1 = Upon auto-shutdown, the CCPxASE bit clears automatically once the shutdown event goes
away; the PWM restarts automatically
0 = Upon auto-shutdown, CCPxASE must be cleared in software to restart the PWM
bit 6-0 PxDC<6:0>: PWM Delay Count bits
PxDCx = Number of FOSC/4 (4 * TOSC) cycles between the scheduled time when a PWM signal
should transition active and the actual time it transitions active
REGISTER 14-7: PSTRxCON: PWM STEERING CONTROL REGISTER(1)

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1
— — — STRxSYNC STRxD STRxC STRxB STRxA
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4 STRxSYNC: Steering Sync bit
1 = Output steering update occurs on next PWM period
0 = Output steering update occurs at the beginning of the instruction cycle boundary
bit 3 STRxD: Steering Enable bit D
1 = PxD pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0>
0 = PxD pin is assigned to port pin
bit 2 STRxC: Steering Enable bit C
1 = PxC pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0>
0 = PxC pin is assigned to port pin
bit 1 STRxB: Steering Enable bit B
1 = PxB pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0>
0 = PxB pin is assigned to port pin
bit 0 STRxA: Steering Enable bit A
1 = PxA pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0>
0 = PxA pin is assigned to port pin
Note 1: The PWM Steering mode is available only when the CCPxCON register bits CCPxM<3:2> = 11 and
PxM<1:0> = 00.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.0 MASTER SYNCHRONOUS The SPI interface supports the following modes and
features:
SERIAL PORT (MSSP1 AND
MSSP2) MODULE • Master mode
• Slave mode
15.1 Master SSPx (MSSPx) Module • Clock Parity
Overview • Slave Select Synchronization (Slave mode only)
• Daisy chain connection of slave devices
The Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSPx) module
is a serial interface useful for communicating with other Figure 15-1 is a block diagram of the SPI interface
peripheral or microcontroller devices. These peripheral module.
devices may be Serial EEPROMs, shift registers,
display drivers, A/D converters, etc. The MSSPx
module can operate in one of two modes:
• Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
• Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C™)
FIGURE 15-1: MSSPx BLOCK DIAGRAM (SPI MODE)
Data Bus
Read Write
SSPxBUF Reg
SDIx
SSPxSR Reg
SDOx bit 0 Shift
Clock
SSx SSx Control 2 (CKP, CKE)

Enable Clock Select
Edge
Select
SSPxM<3:0>
4
( TMR22Output )
SCKx
Edge Prescaler TOSC
Select 4, 16, 64
Baud Rate
Generator
TRIS bit (SSPxADD)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
The I2C interface supports the following modes and The PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 has two MSSP modules,
features: MSSP1 and MSSP2, each module operating indepen-
• Master mode dently from the other.
• Slave mode
• Byte NACKing (Slave mode) Note 1: In devices with more than one MSSP
• Limited Multi-master support module, it is very important to pay close
• 7-bit and 10-bit addressing attention to SSPxCONx register names.
• Start and Stop interrupts SSP1CON1 and SSP1CON2 registers
control different operational aspects of the
• Interrupt masking
same module, while SSP1CON1 and
• Clock stretching SSP2CON1 control the same features for
• Bus collision detection two different modules.
• General call address matching 2: Throughout this section, generic
• Address masking references to an MSSP module in any of
• Address Hold and Data Hold modes its operating modes may be interpreted as
• Selectable SDAx hold times being equally applicable to MSSP1 or
MSSP2. Register names, module I/O
Figure 15-2 is a block diagram of the I2C interface signals, and bit names may use the
module in Master mode. Figure 15-3 is a diagram of the generic designator ‘x’ to indicate the use
I2C interface module in Slave mode. of a numeral to distinguish a particular
module when required.
FIGURE 15-2: MSSPx BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2C™ MASTER MODE)
Internal
Data Bus [SSPxM 3:0]
Read Write
SSPxBUF Baud Rate

Generator
(SSPxADD)
SDAx Shift
SDAx in Clock
Clock Arbitrate/BCOL Detect
SSPxSR
Clock Cntl
(Hold off clock source)
MSb LSb
Receive Enable (RCEN)
Start bit, Stop bit,

Acknowledge
Generate (SSPxCON2)
SCLx
Start bit Detect,

Stop bit Detect
SCLx in Write Collision Detect Set/Reset: S, P, SSPxSTAT, WCOL, SSPxOV
Clock Arbitration Reset SEN, PEN (SSPxCON2)
Bus Collision State Counter for Set SSPxIF, BCLxIF
end of XMIT/RCV
Address Match Detect

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 15-3: MSSPx BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2C™ SLAVE MODE)
Internal
Data Bus
Read Write
SCLx SSPxBUF Reg
Shift
Clock
SSPxSR Reg
SDAx MSb LSb
SSPxMSK Reg
Match Detect Addr Match
SSPxADD Reg
Start and Set, Reset

Stop bit Detect S, P bits
(SSPxSTAT Reg)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.2 SPI Mode Overview During each SPI clock cycle, a full-duplex data
transmission occurs. This means that at the same time,
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus is a the slave device is sending out the MSb from its shift
synchronous serial data communication bus that register and the master device is reading this bit from
operates in Full-Duplex mode. Devices communicate that same line and saving it as the LSb of its shift
in a master/slave environment where the master device register.
initiates the communication. A slave device is
controlled through a chip select known as Slave Select. After 8 bits have been shifted out, the master and slave
have exchanged register values.
The SPI bus specifies four signal connections:
If there is more data to exchange, the shift registers are
• Serial Clock (SCKx) loaded with new data and the process repeats itself.
• Serial Data Out (SDOx)
Whether the data is meaningful or not (dummy data),
• Serial Data In (SDIx) depends on the application software. This leads to
• Slave Select (SSx) three scenarios for data transmission:
Figure 15-1 shows the block diagram of the MSSPx • Master sends useful data and slave sends dummy
module when operating in SPI Mode. data.
The SPI bus operates with a single master device and • Master sends useful data and slave sends useful
one or more slave devices. When multiple slave data.
devices are used, an independent Slave Select • Master sends dummy data and slave sends useful
connection is required from the master device to each data.
slave device.
Transmissions may involve any number of clock
Figure 15-4 shows a typical connection between a cycles. When there is no more data to be transmitted,
master device and multiple slave devices. the master stops sending the clock signal and it
The master selects only one slave at a time. Most slave deselects the slave.
devices have tri-state outputs so their output signal Every slave device connected to the bus that has not
appears disconnected from the bus when they are not been selected through its slave select line must disre-
selected. gard the clock and transmission signals and must not
Transmissions involve two shift registers, eight bits in transmit out any data of its own.
size, one in the master and one in the slave. With either
the master or the slave device, data is always shifted
out one bit at a time, with the Most Significant bit (MSb)
shifted out first. At the same time, a new Least
Significant bit (LSb) is shifted into the same register.
Figure 15-5 shows a typical connection between two
processors configured as master and slave devices.
Data is shifted out of both shift registers on the
programmed clock edge and latched on the opposite
edge of the clock.
The master device transmits information out on its
SDOx output pin which is connected to, and received
by, the slave’s SDIx input pin. The slave device trans-
mits information out on its SDOx output pin, which is
connected to, and received by, the master’s SDIx input
pin.
To begin communication, the master device first sends
out the clock signal. Both the master and the slave
devices should be configured for the same clock
polarity.
The master device starts a transmission by sending out
the MSb from its shift register. The slave device reads
this bit from that same line and saves it into the LSb
position of its shift register.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 15-4: SPI MASTER AND MULTIPLE SLAVE CONNECTION
SCLK SCLK
SPI Master
SDOx SDIx SPI Slave
SDIx SDOx #1
General I/O SSx
General I/O
General I/O SCLK
SDIx SPI Slave
SDOx #2
SSx
SCLK
SDIx SPI Slave
SDOx #3
SSx
15.2.1 SPI MODE REGISTERS 15.2.2 SPI MODE OPERATION

The MSSPx module has five registers for SPI mode When initializing the SPI, several options need to be
operation. These are: specified. This is done by programming the appropriate
• MSSPx STATUS register (SSPxSTAT) control bits (SSPxCON1<5:0> and SSPxSTAT<7:6>).
These control bits allow the following to be specified:
• MSSPx Control register 1 (SSPxCON1)
• MSSPx Control register 3 (SSPxCON3) • Master mode (SCKx is the clock output)
• MSSPx Data Buffer register (SSPxBUF) • Slave mode (SCKx is the clock input)
• MSSPx Address register (SSPxADD) • Clock Polarity (Idle state of SCKx)
• MSSPx Shift register (SSPxSR) • Data Input Sample Phase (middle or end of data
(Not directly accessible) output time)
• Clock Edge (output data on rising/falling edge of
SSPxCON1 and SSPxSTAT are the control and
SCKx)
STATUS registers in SPI mode operation. The
SSPxCON1 register is readable and writable. The • Clock Rate (Master mode only)
lower 6 bits of the SSPxSTAT are read-only. The • Slave Select mode (Slave mode only)
upper two bits of the SSPxSTAT are read/write. To enable the serial port, SSPx Enable bit, SSPxEN of
In one SPI Master mode, SSPxADD can be loaded the SSPxCON1 register, must be set. To reset or
with a value used in the Baud Rate Generator. More reconfigure SPI mode, clear the SSPxEN bit, re-initial-
information on the Baud Rate Generator is available in ize the SSPxCONx registers and then set the SSPxEN
Section 15.7 “Baud Rate Generator”. bit. This configures the SDIx, SDOx, SCKx and SSx
pins as serial port pins. For the pins to behave as the
SSPxSR is the shift register used for shifting data in
serial port function, some must have their data direction
and out. SSPxBUF provides indirect access to the
bits (in the TRIS register) appropriately programmed as
SSPxSR register. SSPxBUF is the buffer register to
follows:
which data bytes are written, and from which data
bytes are read. • SDIx must have corresponding TRIS bit set
In receive operations, SSPxSR and SSPxBUF • SDOx must have corresponding TRIS bit cleared
together create a buffered receiver. When SSPxSR • SCKx (Master mode) must have corresponding
receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPxBUF TRIS bit cleared
and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. • SCKx (Slave mode) must have corresponding
During transmission, the SSPxBUF is not buffered. A TRIS bit set
write to SSPxBUF will write to both SSPxBUF and • SSx must have corresponding TRIS bit set
SSPxSR.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Any serial port function that is not desired may be set. User software must clear the WCOL bit to allow the
overridden by programming the corresponding data following write(s) to the SSPxBUF register to complete
direction (TRIS) register to the opposite value. successfully.
The MSSPx consists of a transmit/receive shift register When the application software is expecting to receive
(SSPxSR) and a buffer register (SSPxBUF). The valid data, the SSPxBUF should be read before the
SSPxSR shifts the data in and out of the device, MSb next byte of data to transfer is written to the SSPxBUF.
first. The SSPxBUF holds the data that was written to The Buffer Full bit, BF of the SSPxSTAT register,
the SSPxSR until the received data is ready. Once the indicates when SSPxBUF has been loaded with the
8 bits of data have been received, that byte is moved to received data (transmission is complete). When the
the SSPxBUF register. Then, the Buffer Full Detect bit, SSPxBUF is read, the BF bit is cleared. This data may
BF of the SSPxSTAT register, and the interrupt flag bit, be irrelevant if the SPI is only a transmitter. Generally,
SSPxIF, are set. This double-buffering of the received the MSSPx interrupt is used to determine when the
data (SSPxBUF) allows the next byte to start reception transmission/reception has completed. If the interrupt
before reading the data that was just received. Any method is not going to be used, then software polling
write to the SSPxBUF register during transmission/ can be done to ensure that a write collision does not
reception of data will be ignored and the write collision occur.
detect bit, WCOL of the SSPxCON1 register, will be
FIGURE 15-5: SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION
SPI Master SSPxM<3:0> = 00xx SPI Slave SSPxM<3:0> = 010x

= 1010
SDOx SDIx
Serial Input Buffer Serial Input Buffer

(BUF) (SSPxBUF)
Shift Register SDIx SDOx Shift Register

(SSPxSR) (SSPxSR)
MSb LSb MSb LSb
Serial Clock
SCKx SCKx
Slave Select
General I/O SSx
Processor 1 (optional) Processor 2

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.2.3 SPI MASTER MODE The clock polarity is selected by appropriately
programming the CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register
The master can initiate the data transfer at any time
and the CKE bit of the SSPxSTAT register. This then,
because it controls the SCKx line. The master
would give waveforms for SPI communication as
determines when the slave (Processor 2, Figure 15-5)
shown in Figure 15-6, Figure 15-8 and Figure 15-9,
is to broadcast data by the software protocol.
where the MSB is transmitted first. In Master mode, the
In Master mode, the data is transmitted/received as SPI clock rate (bit rate) is user programmable to be one
soon as the SSPxBUF register is written to. If the SPI of the following:
is only going to receive, the SDOx output could be dis-
• FOSC/4 (or TCY)
abled (programmed as an input). The SSPxSR register
will continue to shift in the signal present on the SDIx • FOSC/16 (or 4 * TCY)
pin at the programmed clock rate. As each byte is • FOSC/64 (or 16 * TCY)
received, it will be loaded into the SSPxBUF register as • Timer2 output/2
if a normal received byte (interrupts and Status bits • FOSC/(4 * (SSPxADD + 1))
appropriately set).
Figure 15-6 shows the waveforms for Master mode.
When the CKE bit is set, the SDOx data is valid before
there is a clock edge on SCKx. The change of the input
sample is shown based on the state of the SMP bit. The
time when the SSPxBUF is loaded with the received
data is shown.
FIGURE 15-6: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (MASTER MODE)
Write to
SSPxBUF
SCKx
(CKP = 0
CKE = 0)
SCKx
(CKP = 1
CKE = 0)
4 Clock
SCKx Modes
(CKP = 0
CKE = 1)
SCKx
(CKP = 1
CKE = 1)
SDOx bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

(CKE = 0)

(CKE = 1)
SDIx
(SMP = 0) bit 7 bit 0
Input
Sample
(SMP = 0)
SDIx
(SMP = 1) bit 0
bit 7
Input
Sample
(SMP = 1)
SSPxIF
SSPxSR to
SSPxBUF

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.2.4 SPI SLAVE MODE 15.2.5 SLAVE SELECT
In Slave mode, the data is transmitted and received as SYNCHRONIZATION
external clock pulses appear on SCKx. When the last The Slave Select can also be used to synchronize
bit is latched, the SSPxIF interrupt flag bit is set. communication. The Slave Select line is held high until
Before enabling the module in SPI Slave mode, the clock the master device is ready to communicate. When the
line must match the proper Idle state. The clock line can Slave Select line is pulled low, the slave knows that a
be observed by reading the SCKx pin. The Idle state is new transmission is starting.
determined by the CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register. If the slave fails to receive the communication properly,
While in Slave mode, the external clock is supplied by it will be reset at the end of the transmission, when the
the external clock source on the SCKx pin. This exter- Slave Select line returns to a high state. The slave is
nal clock must meet the minimum high and low times then ready to receive a new transmission when the
as specified in the electrical specifications. Slave Select line is pulled low again. If the Slave Select
line is not used, there is a risk that the slave will even-
While in Sleep mode, the slave can transmit/receive
tually become out of sync with the master. If the slave
data. The shift register is clocked from the SCKx pin
misses a bit, it will always be one bit off in future trans-
input and when a byte is received, the device will gen-
missions. Use of the Slave Select line allows the slave
erate an interrupt. If enabled, the device will wake-up
and master to align themselves at the beginning of
from Sleep.
each transmission.
15.2.4.1 Daisy-Chain Configuration The SSx pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The
SPI must be in Slave mode with SSx pin control
The SPI bus can sometimes be connected in a daisy-
enabled (SSPxCON1<3:0> = 0100).
chain configuration. The first slave output is connected
to the second slave input, the second slave output is When the SSx pin is low, transmission and reception
connected to the third slave input, and so on. The final are enabled and the SDOx pin is driven.
slave output is connected to the master input. Each When the SSx pin goes high, the SDOx pin is no longer
slave sends out, during a second group of clock driven, even if in the middle of a transmitted byte and
pulses, an exact copy of what was received during the becomes a floating output. External pull-up/pull-down
first group of clock pulses. The whole chain acts as resistors may be desirable depending on the applica-
one large communication shift register. The daisy- tion.
chain feature only requires a single Slave Select line
from the master device. Note 1: When the SPI is in Slave mode with SSx
pin control enabled (SSPxCON1<3:0> =
Figure 15-7 shows the block diagram of a typical
0100), the SPI module will reset if the SSx
daisy-chain connection when operating in SPI Mode.
pin is set to VDD.
In a daisy-chain configuration, only the most recent
2: When the SPI is used in Slave mode with
byte on the bus is required by the slave. Setting the
CKE set; the user must enable SSx pin
BOEN bit of the SSPxCON3 register will enable writes
control.
to the SSPxBUF register, even if the previous byte has
not been read. This allows the software to ignore data 3: While operated in SPI Slave mode the
that may not apply to it. SMP bit of the SSPxSTAT register must
remain clear.
When the SPI module resets, the bit counter is forced
to ‘0’. This can be done by either forcing the SSx pin to
a high level or clearing the SSPxEN bit.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 15-7: SPI DAISY-CHAIN CONNECTION
SCLK SCLK
SPI Master
SDOx SDIx SPI Slave
SDIx SDOx #1
General I/O SSx
SCLK
SDIx SPI Slave
SDOx #2
SSx
SCLK
SDIx SPI Slave
SDOx #3
SSx
FIGURE 15-8: SLAVE SELECT SYNCHRONOUS WAVEFORM
SSx
SCKx
(CKP = 0
CKE = 0)
SCKx
(CKP = 1
CKE = 0)
Write to
SSPxBUF
Shift register SSPxSR
and bit count are reset
SSPxBUF to
SSPxSR
SDOx bit 7 bit 6 bit 7 bit 6 bit 0
SDIx bit 0
bit 7 bit 7
Input
Sample
SSPxIF
Interrupt
Flag
SSPxSR to
SSPxBUF

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 15-9: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 0)
SSx
Optional
SCKx
(CKP = 0
CKE = 0)
SCKx
(CKP = 1
CKE = 0)
Write to
SSPxBUF
Valid
SDIx
bit 7 bit 0
Input
Sample
SSPxIF
Interrupt
Flag
SSPxSR to
SSPxBUF
Write Collision
detection active
FIGURE 15-10: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 1)
SSx
Not Optional
SCKx
(CKP = 0
CKE = 1)
SCKx
(CKP = 1
CKE = 1)
Write to
SSPxBUF
Valid
SDIx
bit 7 bit 0
Input
Sample
SSPxIF
Interrupt
Flag
SSPxSR to
SSPxBUF
Write Collision
detection active

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.2.6 SPI OPERATION IN SLEEP MODE In SPI Master mode, when the Sleep mode is selected,
all module clocks are halted and the transmission/
In SPI Master mode, module clocks may be operating reception will remain in that state until the device
at a different speed than when in Full-Power mode; in wakes. After the device returns to Run mode, the
the case of the Sleep mode, all clocks are halted. module will resume transmitting and receiving data.
Special care must be taken by the user when the In SPI Slave mode, the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift
MSSPx clock is much faster than the system clock. register operates asynchronously to the device. This
In Slave mode, when MSSPx interrupts are enabled, allows the device to be placed in Sleep mode and data
after the master completes sending data, an MSSPx to be shifted into the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift
interrupt will wake the controller from Sleep. register. When all 8 bits have been received, the
If an exit from Sleep mode is not desired, MSSPx MSSPx interrupt flag bit will be set and if enabled, will
interrupts should be disabled. wake the device.
TABLE 15-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SPI OPERATION

Register
on Page
ANSELB — — ANSB5 ANSB4 ANSB3(1) ANSB2(1) ANSB1(1) ANSB0(1) 153
ANSELD ANSD7 ANSD6 ANSD5 ANSD4(2) ANSD3(2) ANSD2 ANSD1(2) ANSD0(2) 153
SSP1BUF SSP1 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register —
SSP1CON3 ACKTIM PCIE SCIE BOEN SDAHT SBCDE AHEN DHEN 259
SSP1STAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 255
TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3(1) TRISB2(1) TRISB1(1) TRISB0(1) 154
TRISD TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4(2) TRISD3(2) TRISD2 TRISD1(2) TRISD0(2) 154
Legend: Shaded bits are not used by the MSSPx in SPI mode.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.3 I2C MODE OVERVIEW FIGURE 15-11: I2C™ MASTER/
SLAVE CONNECTION
The Inter-Integrated Circuit Bus (I2C) is a multi-master
serial data communication bus. Devices communicate
in a master/slave environment where the master VDD
devices initiate the communication. A slave device is
controlled through addressing. SCLK SCLK
The I2C bus specifies two signal connections:
VDD
• Serial Clock (SCLx) Master Slave
• Serial Data (SDAx)
SDIx SDOx
Figure 15-11 shows the block diagram of the MSSPx
module when operating in I2C mode.
Both the SCLx and SDAx connections are bidirectional
open-drain lines, each requiring pull-up resistors for the The Acknowledge bit (ACK) is an active-low signal,
supply voltage. Pulling the line to ground is considered which holds the SDAx line low to indicate to the
a logical zero and letting the line float is considered a transmitter that the slave device has received the
logical one. transmitted data and is ready to receive more.
Figure 15-11 shows a typical connection between two The transition of data bits is always performed while the
processors configured as master and slave devices. SCLx line is held low. Transitions that occur while the
The I2C bus can operate with one or more master SCLx line is held high are used to indicate Start and
devices and one or more slave devices. Stop bits.
There are four potential modes of operation for a given If the master intends to write to the slave, then it
device: repeatedly sends out a byte of data, with the slave
responding after each byte with an ACK bit. In this
• Master Transmit mode
example, the master device is in Master Transmit mode
(master is transmitting data to a slave)
and the slave is in Slave Receive mode.
• Master Receive mode
(master is receiving data from a slave) If the master intends to read from the slave, then it
repeatedly receives a byte of data from the slave, and
• Slave Transmit mode
responds after each byte with an ACK bit. In this
(slave is transmitting data to a master)
example, the master device is in Master Receive mode
• Slave Receive mode and the slave is Slave Transmit mode.
(slave is receiving data from the master)
On the last byte of data communicated, the master
To begin communication, a master device starts out in device may end the transmission by sending a Stop bit.
Master Transmit mode. The master device sends out a If the master device is in Receive mode, it sends the
Start bit followed by the address byte of the slave it Stop bit in place of the last ACK bit. A Stop bit is
intends to communicate with. This is followed by a sin- indicated by a low-to-high transition of the SDAx line
gle Read/Write bit, which determines whether the mas- while the SCLx line is held high.
ter intends to transmit to or receive data from the slave
device. In some cases, the master may want to maintain con-
trol of the bus and re-initiate another transmission. If
If the requested slave exists on the bus, it will respond so, the master device may send another Start bit in
with an Acknowledge bit, otherwise known as an ACK. place of the Stop bit or last ACK bit when it is in receive
The master then continues in either Transmit mode or mode.
Receive mode and the slave continues in the comple-
ment, either in Receive mode or Transmit mode, The I2C bus specifies three message protocols;
respectively. • Single message where a master writes data to a
A Start bit is indicated by a high-to-low transition of the slave.
SDAx line while the SCLx line is held high. Address and • Single message where a master reads data from
data bytes are sent out, Most Significant bit (MSb) first. a slave.
The Read/Write bit is sent out as a logical one when the • Combined message where a master initiates a
master intends to read data from the slave, and is sent minimum of two writes, or two reads, or a
out as a logical zero when it intends to write data to the combination of writes and reads, to one or more
slave. slaves.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
When one device is transmitting a logical one, or letting 15.3.2 ARBITRATION
the line float, and a second device is transmitting a
Each master device must monitor the bus for Start and
logical zero, or holding the line low, the first device can
Stop bits. If the device detects that the bus is busy, it
detect that the line is not a logical one. This detection,
cannot begin a new message until the bus returns to an
when used on the SCLx line, is called clock stretching.
Idle state.
Clock stretching give slave devices a mechanism to
control the flow of data. When this detection is used on However, two master devices may try to initiate a
the SDAx line, it is called arbitration. Arbitration transmission on or about the same time. When this
ensures that there is only one master device occurs, the process of arbitration begins. Each
communicating at any single time. transmitter checks the level of the SDAx data line and
compares it to the level that it expects to find. The first
15.3.1 CLOCK STRETCHING transmitter to observe that the two levels don’t match,
loses arbitration, and must stop transmitting on the
When a slave device has not completed processing
SDAx line.
data, it can delay the transfer of more data through the
process of clock stretching. An addressed slave device For example, if one transmitter holds the SDAx line to
may hold the SCLx clock line low after receiving or a logical one (lets it float) and a second transmitter
sending a bit, indicating that it is not yet ready to holds it to a logical zero (pulls it low), the result is that
continue. The master that is communicating with the the SDAx line will be low. The first transmitter then
slave will attempt to raise the SCLx line in order to observes that the level of the line is different than
transfer the next bit, but will detect that the clock line expected and concludes that another transmitter is
has not yet been released. Because the SCLx communicating.
connection is open-drain, the slave has the ability to The first transmitter to notice this difference is the one
hold that line low until it is ready to continue that loses arbitration and must stop driving the SDAx
communicating. line. If this transmitter is also a master device, it also
Clock stretching allows receivers that cannot keep up must stop driving the SCLx line. It then can monitor the
with a transmitter to control the flow of incoming data. lines for a Stop condition before trying to reissue its
transmission. In the meantime, the other device that
has not noticed any difference between the expected
and actual levels on the SDAx line continues with its
original transmission. It can do so without any compli-
cations, because so far, the transmission appears
exactly as expected with no other transmitter disturbing
the message.
Slave Transmit mode can also be arbitrated, when a
master addresses multiple slaves, but this is less
common.
If two master devices are sending a message to two
different slave devices at the address stage, the master
sending the lower slave address always wins
arbitration. When two master devices send messages
to the same slave address, and addresses can
sometimes refer to multiple slaves, the arbitration
process must continue into the data stage.
Arbitration usually occurs very rarely, but it is a
necessary process for proper multi-master support.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.4 I2C MODE OPERATION TABLE 15-2: I2C™ BUS TERMS
TERM Description
All MSSPx I2C communication is byte oriented and
shifted out MSb first. Six SFR registers and 2 interrupt Transmitter The device which shifts data out
flags interface the module with the PIC® microcon- onto the bus.
troller and user software. Two pins, SDAx and SCLx, Receiver The device which shifts data in
are exercised by the module to communicate with from the bus.
other external I2C devices. Master The device that initiates a transfer,
15.4.1 BYTE FORMAT generates clock signals and termi-
nates a transfer.
All communication in I2C is done in 9-bit segments. A Slave The device addressed by the mas-
byte is sent from a master to a slave or vice-versa, ter.
followed by an Acknowledge bit sent back. After the Multi-master A bus with more than one device
8th falling edge of the SCLx line, the device outputting that can initiate data transfers.
data on the SDAx changes that pin to an input and
Arbitration Procedure to ensure that only one
reads in an acknowledge value on the next clock
master at a time controls the bus.
pulse.
Winning arbitration ensures that
The clock signal, SCLx, is provided by the master. the message is not corrupted.
Data is valid to change while the SCLx signal is low, Synchronization Procedure to synchronize the
and sampled on the rising edge of the clock. Changes clocks of two or more devices on
on the SDAx line while the SCLx line is high define the bus.
special conditions on the bus, explained below.
Idle No master is controlling the bus,
15.4.2 DEFINITION OF I2C TERMINOLOGY and both SDAx and SCLx lines are
high.
There is language and terminology in the description
Active Any time one or more master
of I2C communication that have definitions specific to
devices are controlling the bus.
I2C. That word usage is defined below and may be
used in the rest of this document without explana- Addressed Slave device that has received a
tion. This table was adapted from the Phillips I2C Slave matching address and is actively
specification. being clocked by a master.
Matching Address byte that is clocked into a
15.4.3 SDAx AND SCLx PINS Address slave that matches the value
stored in SSPxADD.
Selection of any I2C mode with the SSPxEN bit set,
forces the SCLx and SDAx pins to be open-drain. Write Request Slave receives a matching
These pins should be set by the user to inputs by address with R/W bit clear, and is
setting the appropriate TRIS bits. ready to clock in data.
Read Request Master sends an address byte with
Note: Data is tied to output zero when an I2C mode the R/W bit set, indicating that it
is enabled. wishes to clock data out of the
15.4.4 SDAx HOLD TIME Slave. This data is the next and all
following bytes until a Restart or
The hold time of the SDAx pin is selected by the Stop.
SDAHT bit of the SSPxCON3 register. Hold time is the Clock Stretching When a device on the bus holds
time SDAx is held valid after the falling edge of SCLx. SCLx low to stall communication.
Setting the SDAHT bit selects a longer 300 ns mini- Bus Collision Any time the SDAx line is sampled
mum hold time and may help on buses with large low by the module while it is out-
capacitance. putting and expected high state.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.4.5 START CONDITION 15.4.7 RESTART CONDITION
The I2C specification defines a Start condition as a A Restart is valid any time that a Stop would be valid.
transition of SDAx from a high-to -low state while SCLx A master can issue a Restart if it wishes to hold the
line is high. A Start condition is always generated by bus after terminating the current transfer. A Restart
the master and signifies the transition of the bus from has the same effect on the slave that a Start would,
an Idle to an active state. Figure 15-10 shows wave resetting all slave logic and preparing it to clock in an
forms for Start and Stop conditions. address. The master may want to address the same or
A bus collision can occur on a Start condition if the another slave.
module samples the SDAx line low before asserting it In 10-bit Addressing Slave mode a Restart is required
low. This does not conform to the I2C specification that for the master to clock data out of the addressed slave.
states no bus collision can occur on a Start. Once a slave has been fully addressed, matching both
high and low address bytes, the master can issue a
15.4.6 STOP CONDITION Restart and the high address byte with the R/W bit set.
A Stop condition is a transition of the SDAx line from a The slave logic will then hold the clock and prepare to
low-to-high state while the SCLx line is high. clock out data.
After a full match with R/W clear in 10-bit mode, a prior
Note: At least one SCLx low time must appear
match flag is set and maintained. Until a Stop
before a Stop is valid, therefore, if the SDAx
condition, a high address with R/W clear, or high
line goes low then high again while the SCLx
address match fails.
line stays high, only the Start condition is
detected. 15.4.8 START/STOP CONDITION INTERRUPT
MASKING
The SCIE and PCIE bits of the SSPxCON3 register

can enable the generation of an interrupt in Slave
modes that do not typically support this function. Slave
modes where interrupt on Start and Stop detect are
already enabled, these bits will have no effect.
FIGURE 15-12: I2C™ START AND STOP CONDITIONS
SDAx
SCLx
S P
Change of Change of
Data Allowed Data Allowed
Start Stop
Condition Condition
FIGURE 15-13: I2C™ RESTART CONDITION
Sr
Change of Change of
Data Allowed Data Allowed
Restart
Condition

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.4.9 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE 15.5 I2C SLAVE MODE OPERATION
The 9th SCLx pulse for any transferred byte in I2C is The MSSPx Slave mode operates in one of four
dedicated as an Acknowledge. It allows receiving modes selected in the SSPxM bits of SSPxCON1
devices to respond back to the transmitter by pulling register. The modes can be divided into 7-bit and 10-bit
the SDAx line low. The transmitter must release con- Addressing mode. 10-bit Addressing modes operate
trol of the line during this time to shift in the response. the same as 7-bit with some additional overhead for
The Acknowledge (ACK) is an active-low signal, pull- handling the larger addresses.
ing the SDAx line low indicated to the transmitter that
the device has received the transmitted data and is Modes with Start and Stop bit interrupts operated the
ready to receive more. same as the other modes with SSPxIF additionally
getting set upon detection of a Start, Restart, or Stop
The result of an ACK is placed in the ACKSTAT bit of condition.
the SSPxCON2 register.
15.5.1 SLAVE MODE ADDRESSES
Slave software, when the AHEN and DHEN bits are
set, allow the user to set the ACK value sent back to The SSPxADD register (Register 15-6) contains the
the transmitter. The ACKDT bit of the SSPxCON2 Slave mode address. The first byte received after a
register is set/cleared to determine the response. Start or Restart condition is compared against the
Slave hardware will generate an ACK response if the value stored in this register. If the byte matches, the
AHEN and DHEN bits of the SSPxCON3 register are value is loaded into the SSPxBUF register and an
clear. interrupt is generated. If the value does not match, the
module goes Idle and no indication is given to the
There are certain conditions where an ACK will not be
software that anything happened.
sent by the slave. If the BF bit of the SSPxSTAT
register or the SSPxOV bit of the SSPxCON1 register The SSPx Mask register (Register 15-5) affects the
are set when a byte is received. address matching process. See Section 15.5.9
“SSPx Mask Register” for more information.
When the module is addressed, after the 8th falling
edge of SCLx on the bus, the ACKTIM bit of the 15.5.1.1 I2C Slave 7-bit Addressing Mode
SSPxCON3 register is set. The ACKTIM bit indicates
the acknowledge time of the active bus. In 7-bit Addressing mode, the LSb of the received data
byte is ignored when determining if there is an address
The ACKTIM Status bit is only active when the AHEN match.
bit or DHEN bit is enabled.
15.5.1.2 I2C Slave 10-bit Addressing Mode
In 10-bit Addressing mode, the first received byte is
compared to the binary value of ‘1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 0’. A9
and A8 are the two MSb of the 10-bit address and
stored in bits 2 and 1 of the SSPxADD register.
After the acknowledge of the high byte the UA bit is set
and SCLx is held low until the user updates SSPxADD
with the low address. The low address byte is clocked
in and all 8 bits are compared to the low address value
in SSPxADD. Even if there is not an address match;
SSPxIF and UA are set, and SCLx is held low until
SSPxADD is updated to receive a high byte again.
When SSPxADD is updated the UA bit is cleared. This
ensures the module is ready to receive the high
address byte on the next communication.
A high and low address match as a write request is
required at the start of all 10-bit addressing
communication. A transmission can be initiated by
issuing a Restart once the slave is addressed, and
clocking in the high address with the R/W bit set. The
slave hardware will then acknowledge the read
request and prepare to clock out data. This is only
valid for a slave after it has received a complete high
and low address byte match.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.5.2 SLAVE RECEPTION 15.5.2.2 7-bit Reception with AHEN and DHEN
When the R/W bit of a matching received address byte Slave device reception with AHEN and DHEN set
is clear, the R/W bit of the SSPxSTAT register is operate the same as without these options with extra
cleared. The received address is loaded into the interrupts and clock stretching added after the 8th fall-
SSPxBUF register and acknowledged. ing edge of SCLx. These additional interrupts allow the
When the overflow condition exists for a received slave software to decide whether it wants to ACK the
address, then not Acknowledge is given. An overflow receive address or data byte, rather than the hard-
condition is defined as either bit BF of the SSPxSTAT ware. This functionality adds support for PMBus™ that
register is set, or bit SSPxOV of the SSPxCON1 regis- was not present on previous versions of this module.
ter is set. The BOEN bit of the SSPxCON3 register This list describes the steps that need to be taken by
modifies this operation. For more information see slave software to use these options for I2C
Register 15-4. communication. Figure 15-15 displays a module using
An MSSPx interrupt is generated for each transferred both address and data holding. Figure 15-16 includes
data byte. Flag bit, SSPxIF, must be cleared by the operation with the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2
software. register set.
When the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register is set, 1. S bit of SSPxSTAT is set; SSPxIF is set if
SCLx will be held low (clock stretch) following each interrupt on Start detect is enabled.
received byte. The clock must be released by setting 2. Matching address with R/W bit clear is clocked
the CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register, except in. SSPxIF is set and CKP cleared after the 8th
sometimes in 10-bit mode. See Section 15.2.3 “SPI falling edge of SCLx.
Master Mode” for more detail. 3. Slave clears the SSPxIF.
4. Slave can look at the ACKTIM bit of the
15.5.2.1 7-bit Addressing Reception
SSPxCON3 register to determine if the SSPxIF
This section describes a standard sequence of events was after or before the ACK.
for the MSSPx module configured as an I2C slave in 5. Slave reads the address value from SSPxBUF,
7-bit Addressing mode. All decisions made by hard- clearing the BF flag.
ware or software and their effect on reception. 6. Slave sets ACK value clocked out to the master
Figure 15-13 and Figure 15-14 is used as a visual by setting ACKDT.
reference for this description.
7. Slave releases the clock by setting CKP.
This is a step by step process of what typically must 8. SSPxIF is set after an ACK, not after a NACK.
be done to accomplish I2C communication.
9. If SEN = 1 the slave hardware will stretch the
1. Start bit detected. clock after the ACK.
2. S bit of SSPxSTAT is set; SSPxIF is set if 10. Slave clears SSPxIF.
interrupt on Start detect is enabled.
Note: SSPxIF is still set after the 9th falling edge of
3. Matching address with R/W bit clear is received. SCLx even if there is no clock stretching and
4. The slave pulls SDAx low sending an ACK to the BF has been cleared. Only if NACK is sent to
master, and sets SSPxIF bit. master is SSPxIF not set.
5. Software clears the SSPxIF bit. 11. SSPxIF set and CKP cleared after 8th falling
6. Software reads received address from edge of SCLx for a received data byte.
SSPxBUF clearing the BF flag. 12. Slave looks at ACKTIM bit of SSPxCON3 to
7. If SEN = 1; Slave software sets CKP bit to determine the source of the interrupt.
release the SCLx line. 13. Slave reads the received data from SSPxBUF
8. The master clocks out a data byte. clearing BF.
9. Slave drives SDAx low sending an ACK to the 14. Steps 7-14 are the same for each received data
master, and sets SSPxIF bit. byte.
10. Software clears SSPxIF. 15. Communication is ended by either the slave
11. Software reads the received byte from sending an ACK = 1, or the master sending a
SSPxBUF clearing BF. Stop condition. If a Stop is sent and Interrupt on
12. Steps 8-12 are repeated for all received bytes Stop detect is disabled, the slave will only know
from the master. by polling the P bit of the SSTSTAT register.
13. Master sends Stop condition, setting P bit of
SSPxSTAT, and the bus goes Idle.

FIGURE 15-14:
DS41412B-page 224
Bus Master sends
Stop condition
From Slave to Master
Receiving Address Receiving Data Receiving Data ACK = 1

SDAx
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCLx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S P
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
SSPxIF
SSPxIF set on 9th
Preliminary
Cleared by software Cleared by software falling edge of
SCLx
BF
First byte
SSPxBUF is read of data is
available
in SSPxBUF
SSPxOV
SSPxOV set because

SSPxBUF is still full.
ACK is not sent.
I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, RECEPTION (SEN = 0, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0)

FIGURE 15-15:
Bus Master sends

Stop condition
Receive Address Receive Data Receive Data ACK

SDAx A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 R/W=0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCLx S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SEN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SEN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P
Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’
SSPxIF
SSPxIF set on 9th

Cleared by software Cleared by software falling edge of SCLx
Preliminary
BF
First byte
of data is
SSPxBUF is read available
in SSPxBUF
SSPxOV
SSPxOV set because

SSPxBUF is still full.
ACK is not sent.
CKP
SCLx is not held

CKP is written to ‘1’ in software, CKP is written to 1 in software,
low because
releasing SCLx releasing SCLx
ACK= 1
DS41412B-page 225
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Master Releases SDAx Master sends
to slave for ACK sequence Stop condition
FIGURE 15-16:
SDAx Receiving Address Receiving Data ACK Received Data ACK=1
DS41412B-page 226
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCLx
S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P
SSPxIF
If AHEN = 1: SSPxIF is set on
SSPxIF is set 9th falling edge of Cleared by software No interrupt
SCLx, after ACK after not ACK
BF from Slave
Address is
read from Data is read from SSPxBUF
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
ACKDT SSBUF
Slave software
clears ACKDT to Slave software
ACK the received sets ACKDT to
CKP byte not ACK
Preliminary
When AHEN=1:
When DHEN=1: CKP set by software,
CKP is cleared by hardware
CKP is cleared by SCLx is released
and SCLx is stretched hardware on 8th falling
edge of SCLx
ACKTIM
ACKTIM set by hardware ACKTIM cleared by ACKTIM set by hardware

on 8th falling edge of SCLx hardware in 9th on 8th falling edge of SCLx
rising edge of SCLx
P

Master sends
FIGURE 15-17:
Stop condition
Master releases
R/W = 0 SDAx to slave for ACK sequence
Receiving Address Receive Data Receive Data ACK
SDAx ACK
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SCLx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P
S
SSPxIF
Cleared by software No interrupt after
if not ACK
from Slave
BF
Received
address is loaded into Received data is SSPxBUF can be
SSPxBUF available on SSPxBUF read any time before
next byte is loaded
ACKDT
Slave software clears

Slave sends
Preliminary
ACKDT to ACK not ACK
the received byte
CKP
When AHEN = 1; When DHEN = 1; CKP is not cleared
on the 8th falling edge on the 8th falling edge Set by software, if not ACK
of SCLx of an address of SCLx of a received release SCLx
byte, CKP is cleared data byte, CKP is cleared
ACKTIM
ACKTIM is set by hardware ACKTIM is cleared by hardware

on 8th falling edge of SCLx on 9th rising edge of SCLx
P
DS41412B-page 227
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.5.3 SLAVE TRANSMISSION 15.5.3.2 7-bit Transmission
When the R/W bit of the incoming address byte is set A master device can transmit a read request to a
and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the slave, and then clock data out of the slave. The list
SSPxSTAT register is set. The received address is below outlines what software for a slave will need to do
loaded into the SSPxBUF register, and an ACK pulse is to accomplish a standard transmission. Figure 15-17
sent by the slave on the ninth bit. can be used as a reference to this list.
Following the ACK, slave hardware clears the CKP bit 1. Master sends a Start condition on SDAx and
and the SCLx pin is held low (see Section 15.5.6 SCLx.
“Clock Stretching” for more detail). By stretching the 2. S bit of SSPxSTAT is set; SSPxIF is set if inter-
clock, the master will be unable to assert another clock rupt on Start detect is enabled.
pulse until the slave is done preparing the transmit 3. Matching address with R/W bit set is received by
data. the slave setting SSPxIF bit.
The transmit data must be loaded into the SSPxBUF 4. Slave hardware generates an ACK and sets
register which also loads the SSPxSR register. Then SSPxIF.
the SCLx pin should be released by setting the CKP bit 5. SSPxIF bit is cleared by user.
of the SSPxCON1 register. The eight data bits are
6. Software reads the received address from
shifted out on the falling edge of the SCLx input. This
SSPxBUF, clearing BF.
ensures that the SDAx signal is valid during the SCLx
high time. 7. R/W is set so CKP was automatically cleared
after the ACK.
The ACK pulse from the master-receiver is latched on
8. The slave software loads the transmit data into
the rising edge of the ninth SCLx input pulse. This ACK
SSPxBUF.
value is copied to the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2
register. If ACKSTAT is set (not ACK), then the data 9. CKP bit is set releasing SCLx, allowing the mas-
transfer is complete. In this case, when the not ACK is ter to clock the data out of the slave.
latched by the slave, the slave goes Idle and waits for 10. SSPxIF is set after the ACK response from the
another occurrence of the Start bit. If the SDAx line was master is loaded into the ACKSTAT register.
low (ACK), the next transmit data must be loaded into 11. SSPxIF bit is cleared.
the SSPxBUF register. Again, the SCLx pin must be 12. The slave software checks the ACKSTAT bit to
released by setting bit CKP. see if the master wants to clock out more data.
An MSSPx interrupt is generated for each data transfer Note 1: If the master ACKs the clock will be
byte. The SSPxIF bit must be cleared by software and stretched.
the SSPxSTAT register is used to determine the status
of the byte. The SSPxIF bit is set on the falling edge of 2: ACKSTAT is the only bit updated on the
the ninth clock pulse. rising edge of SCLx (9th) rather than the
falling.
15.5.3.1 Slave Mode Bus Collision 13. Steps 9-13 are repeated for each transmitted
A slave receives a Read request and begins shifting byte.
data out on the SDAx line. If a bus collision is detected 14. If the master sends a not ACK; the clock is not
and the SBCDE bit of the SSPxCON3 register is set, held, but SSPxIF is still set.
the BCLxIF bit of the PIRx register is set. Once a bus 15. The master sends a Restart condition or a Stop.
collision is detected, the slave goes Idle and waits to be 16. The slave is no longer addressed.
addressed again. User software can use the BCLxIF bit
to handle a slave bus collision.

Master sends
Stop condition
FIGURE 15-18:
Receiving Address Transmitting Data Automatic Transmitting Data ACK

R/W = 1 Automatic
SDAx A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCLx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S P

SSPxIF
Cleared by software
BF
BF is automatically
Received address Data to transmit is cleared after 8th falling
is read from SSPxBUF loaded into SSPxBUF edge of SCLx
CKP
When R/W is set CKP is not
SCLx is always held for not
held low after 9th SCLx Set by software ACK
falling edge
ACKSTAT
Preliminary
Masters not ACK
is copied to
ACKSTAT
R/W
R/W is copied from the
matching address byte
D/A
I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION (AHEN = 0)
Indicates an address
has been received
DS41412B-page 229
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.5.3.3 7-bit Transmission with Address
Hold Enabled
Setting the AHEN bit of the SSPxCON3 register
enables additional clock stretching and interrupt
generation after the 8th falling edge of a received
matching address. Once a matching address has
been clocked in, CKP is cleared and the SSPxIF
interrupt is set.
Figure 15-18 displays a standard waveform of a 7-bit
Address Slave Transmission with AHEN enabled.
1. Bus starts Idle.
2. Master sends Start condition; the S bit of
SSPxSTAT is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on
Start detect is enabled.
3. Master sends matching address with R/W bit
set. After the 8th falling edge of the SCLx line the
CKP bit is cleared and SSPxIF interrupt is
generated.
4. Slave software clears SSPxIF.
5. Slave software reads ACKTIM bit of SSPxCON3
register, and R/W and D/A of the SSPxSTAT
register to determine the source of the interrupt.
6. Slave reads the address value from the SSPxBUF
register clearing the BF bit.
7. Slave software decides from this information if it
wishes to ACK or not ACK and sets ACKDT bit
of the SSPxCON2 register accordingly.
8. Slave sets the CKP bit releasing SCLx.
9. Master clocks in the ACK value from the slave.
10. Slave hardware automatically clears the CKP bit
and sets SSPxIF after the ACK if the R/W bit is
set.
11. Slave software clears SSPxIF.
12. Slave loads value to transmit to the master into
SSPxBUF setting the BF bit.
Note: SSPxBUF cannot be loaded until after the
ACK.
13. Slave sets CKP bit releasing the clock.
14. Master clocks out the data from the slave and
sends an ACK value on the 9th SCLx pulse.
15. Slave hardware copies the ACK value into the
ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register.
16. Steps 10-15 are repeated for each byte
transmitted to the master from the slave.
17. If the master sends a not ACK the slave
releases the bus allowing the master to send a
Stop and end the communication.
Note: Master must send a not ACK on the last byte
to ensure that the slave releases the SCLx
line to receive a Stop.

Master sends
Master releases SDAx Stop condition
FIGURE 15-19:
to slave for ACK sequence

Receiving Address R/W = 1 Automatic Transmitting Data Automatic Transmitting Data ACK
SDAx ACK
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCLx
S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P
SSPxIF
Cleared by software
BF BF is automatically
Received address Data to transmit is cleared after 8th falling
is read from SSPxBUF loaded into SSPxBUF edge of SCLx
ACKDT
Slave clears
ACKDT to ACK
address
Preliminary
ACKSTAT
Master’s ACK
response is copied
to SSPxSTAT
CKP
When AHEN = 1; CKP not cleared
CKP is cleared by hardware When R/W = 1; Set by software, after not ACK
after receiving matching CKP is always releases SCLx
address. cleared after ACK
ACKTIM
I2C SLAVE, 7-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION (AHEN = 1)
ACKTIM is set on 8th falling ACKTIM is cleared

edge of SCLx on 9th rising edge of SCLx
R/W
D/A
DS41412B-page 231
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.5.4 SLAVE MODE 10-BIT ADDRESS 15.5.5 10-BIT ADDRESSING WITH ADDRESS OR
RECEPTION DATA HOLD
This section describes a standard sequence of events Reception using 10-bit addressing with AHEN or
for the MSSPx module configured as an I2C slave in DHEN set is the same as with 7-bit modes. The only
10-bit Addressing mode. difference is the need to update the SSPxADD register
Figure 15-19 and is used as a visual reference for this using the UA bit. All functionality, specifically when the
description. CKP bit is cleared and SCLx line is held low are the
same. Figure 15-20 can be used as a reference of a
This is a step by step process of what must be done by slave in 10-bit addressing with AHEN set.
slave software to accomplish I2C communication.
Figure 15-21 shows a standard waveform for a slave
1. Bus starts Idle. transmitter in 10-bit Addressing mode.
2. Master sends Start condition; S bit of SSPxSTAT
is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is
enabled.
3. Master sends matching high address with R/W
bit clear; UA bit of the SSPxSTAT register is set.
4. Slave sends ACK and SSPxIF is set.
5. Software clears the SSPxIF bit.
6. Software reads received address from SSPxBUF
clearing the BF flag.
7. Slave loads low address into SSPxADD,
releasing SCLx.
8. Master sends matching low address byte to the
slave; UA bit is set.
Note: Updates to the SSPxADD register are not
allowed until after the ACK sequence.
9. Slave sends ACK and SSPxIF is set.

Note: If the low address does not match, SSPxIF
and UA are still set so that the slave software
can set SSPxADD back to the high address.
BF is not set because there is no match.
CKP is unaffected.
10. Slave clears SSPxIF.
11. Slave reads the received matching address
from SSPxBUF clearing BF.
12. Slave loads high address into SSPxADD.
13. Master clocks a data byte to the slave and clocks
out the slaves ACK on the 9th SCLx pulse;
SSPxIF is set.
14. If SEN bit of SSPxCON2 is set, CKP is cleared
by hardware and the clock is stretched.
15. Slave clears SSPxIF.
16. Slave reads the received byte from SSPxBUF
clearing BF.
17. If SEN is set the slave sets CKP to release the
SCLx.
18. Steps 13-17 repeat for each received byte.
19. Master sends Stop to end the transmission.

FIGURE 15-20:
Master sends
Stop condition
Receive First Address Byte Receive Second Address Byte Receive Data Receive Data

SDAx
1 1 1 1
0 A9 A8 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK
SCLx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P
S
SCLx is held low
while CKP = 0
SSPxIF
Set by hardware Cleared by software
on 9th falling edge
BF
Data is read
Preliminary
If address matches Receive address is
SSPxADD it is loaded into read from SSPxBUF from SSPxBUF
SSPxBUF
UA
When UA = 1; Software updates SSPxADD
SCLx is held low and releases SCLx
CKP
When SEN = 1; Set by software,

CKP is cleared after releasing SCLx
9th falling edge of received byte
DS41412B-page 233
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Receive First Address Byte R/W = 0 Receive Second Address Byte Receive Data Receive Data
FIGURE 15-21:
SDAx 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5
DS41412B-page 234
SCLx S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 UA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 UA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
SSPxIF
Set by hardware Cleared by software Cleared by software
on 9th falling edge
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
BF
SSPxBUF can be Received data

read anytime before is read from
the next received byte SSPxBUF
ACKDT
Preliminary
Slave software clears
ACKDT to ACK
the received byte
UA
Update to SSPxADD is Update of SSPxADD,

not allowed until 9th
falling edge of SCLx clears UA and releases
SCLx
CKP If when AHEN = 1;

on the 8th falling edge Set CKP with software
of SCLx of an address releases SCLx
byte, CKP is cleared
ACKTIM
ACKTIM is set by hardware
on 8th falling edge of SCLx

FIGURE 15-22:
Master sends
Master sends Stop condition
Restart event Master sends
not ACK

Receiving Address R/W = 0 Receiving Second Address Byte Receive First Address Byte Transmitting Data Byte ACK = 1
SDAx 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCLx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P
S
Sr
SSPxIF
Set by hardware Cleared by software Set by hardware
BF
SSPxBUF loaded Received address is Data to transmit is

with received address read from SSPxBUF loaded into SSPxBUF
Preliminary
UA
High address is loaded
UA indicates SSPxADD After SSPxADD is back into SSPxADD
must be updated updated, UA is cleared
CKP and SCLx is released
When R/W = 1; Set by software

ACKSTAT CKP is cleared on releases SCLx
9th falling edge of SCLx
Masters not ACK

is copied
R/W
R/W is copied from the
matching address byte
D/A
Indicates an address
has been received
I2C SLAVE, 10-BIT ADDRESS, TRANSMISSION (SEN = 0, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0)
DS41412B-page 235
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.5.6 CLOCK STRETCHING 15.5.6.2 10-bit Addressing Mode
Clock stretching occurs when a device on the bus In 10-bit Addressing mode, when the UA bit is set, the
holds the SCLx line low effectively pausing communi- clock is always stretched. This is the only time the
cation. The slave may stretch the clock to allow more SCLx is stretched without CKP being cleared. SCLx is
time to handle data or prepare a response for the mas- released immediately after a write to SSPxADD.
ter device. A master device is not concerned with
Note: Previous versions of the module did not
stretching as anytime it is active on the bus and not
stretch the clock if the second address byte
transferring data it is stretching. Any stretching done
did not match.
by a slave is invisible to the master software and han-
dled by the hardware that generates SCLx. 15.5.6.3 Byte NACKing
The CKP bit of the SSPxCON1 register is used to
When the AHEN bit of SSPxCON3 is set; CKP is
control stretching in software. Any time the CKP bit is
cleared by hardware after the 8th falling edge of SCLx
cleared, the module will wait for the SCLx line to go
for a received matching address byte. When the
low and then hold it. Setting CKP will release SCLx
DHEN bit of SSPxCON3 is set; CKP is cleared after
and allow more communication.
the 8th falling edge of SCLx for received data.
15.5.6.1 Normal Clock Stretching Stretching after the 8th falling edge of SCLx allows the
Following an ACK if the R/W bit of SSPxSTAT is set, a slave to look at the received address or data and
read request, the slave hardware will clear CKP. This decide if it wants to ACK the received data.
allows the slave time to update SSPxBUF with data to 15.5.7 CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION AND
transfer to the master. If the SEN bit of SSPxCON2 is THE CKP BIT
set, the slave hardware will always stretch the clock
after the ACK sequence. Once the slave is ready; CKP Any time the CKP bit is cleared, the module will wait
is set by software and communication resumes. for the SCLx line to go low and then hold it. However,
clearing the CKP bit will not assert the SCLx output
Note 1: The BF bit has no effect on whether the low until the SCLx output is already sampled low.
clock will be stretched or not. This is Therefore, the CKP bit will not assert the SCLx line
different than previous versions of the until an external I2C master device has already
module that would not stretch the clock, asserted the SCLx line. The SCLx output will remain
clear CKP, if SSPxBUF was read before low until the CKP bit is set and all other devices on the
the 9th falling edge of SCLx. I2C bus have released SCLx. This ensures that a write
2: Previous versions of the module did not to the CKP bit will not violate the minimum high time
stretch the clock for a transmission if requirement for SCLx (see Figure 15-22).
SSPxBUF was loaded before the 9th fall-
ing edge of SCLx. It is now always cleared
for read requests.
FIGURE 15-23: CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TIMING
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
SDAx DX DX ‚ – 1
SCLx
Master device
CKP asserts clock
Master device
releases clock
WR
SSPxCON1

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.5.8 GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SUPPORT In 10-bit Address mode, the UA bit will not be set on
the reception of the general call address. The slave
The addressing procedure for the I2C bus is such that will prepare to receive the second byte as data, just as
the first byte after the Start condition usually it would in 7-bit mode.
determines which device will be the slave addressed
by the master device. The exception is the general call If the AHEN bit of the SSPxCON3 register is set, just
address which can address all devices. When this as with any other address reception, the slave
address is used, all devices should, in theory, respond hardware will stretch the clock after the 8th falling
with an acknowledge. edge of SCLx. The slave must then set its ACKDT
value and release the clock with communication
The general call address is a reserved address in the progressing as it would normally.
I2C protocol, defined as address 0x00. When the
GCEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register is set, the slave
module will automatically ACK the reception of this
address regardless of the value stored in SSPxADD.
After the slave clocks in an address of all zeros with the
R/W bit clear, an interrupt is generated and slave soft-
ware can read SSPxBUF and respond. Figure 15-23
shows a general call reception sequence.
FIGURE 15-24: SLAVE MODE GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SEQUENCE

Address is compared to General Call Address
after ACK, set interrupt
R/W = 0 Receiving Data ACK

General Call Address ACK D7
SDAx D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCLx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S
SSPxIF
BF (SSPxSTAT<0>)
Cleared by software
SSPxBUF is read
GCEN (SSPxCON2<7>)
’1’
15.5.9 SSPx MASK REGISTER
An SSPx Mask (SSPxMSK) register (Register 15-5) is

available in I2C Slave mode as a mask for the value
held in the SSPxSR register during an address
comparison operation. A zero (‘0’) bit in the SSPxMSK
register has the effect of making the corresponding bit
of the received address a “don’t care”.
This register is reset to all ‘1’s upon any Reset
condition and, therefore, has no effect on standard
SSPx operation until written with a mask value.
The SSPx Mask register is active during:
• 7-bit Address mode: address compare of A<7:1>.
• 10-bit Address mode: address compare of A<7:0>
only. The SSPx mask has no effect during the
reception of the first (high) byte of the address.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6 I2C MASTER MODE 15.6.1 I2C MASTER MODE OPERATION
Master mode is enabled by setting and clearing the The master device generates all of the serial clock
appropriate SSPxM bits in the SSPxCON1 register and pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is
by setting the SSPxEN bit. In Master mode, the SCLx ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start
and SDAx lines are set as inputs and are manipulated condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also
by the MSSPx hardware. the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will
not be released.
Master mode of operation is supported by interrupt
generation on the detection of the Start and Stop con- In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output
ditions. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from through SDAx, while SCLx outputs the serial clock. The
a Reset or when the MSSPx module is disabled. Con- first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the
trol of the I 2C bus may be taken when the P bit is set, receiving device (7 bits) and the Read/Write (R/W) bit.
or the bus is Idle. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic ‘0’. Serial data is
transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is transmit-
In Firmware Controlled Master mode, user code ted, an Acknowledge bit is received. Start and Stop
conducts all I 2C bus operations based on Start and conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the
Stop bit condition detection. Start and Stop condition end of a serial transfer.
detection is the only active circuitry in this mode. All
other communication is done by the user software In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted con-
directly manipulating the SDAx and SCLx lines. tains the slave address of the transmitting device
(7 bits) and the R/W bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be
The following events will cause the SSPx Interrupt Flag logic ‘1’. Thus, the first byte transmitted is a 7-bit slave
bit, SSPxIF, to be set (SSPx interrupt, if enabled): address followed by a ‘1’ to indicate the receive bit.
• Start condition detected Serial data is received via SDAx, while SCLx outputs
the serial clock. Serial data is received 8 bits at a time.
• Stop condition detected
After each byte is received, an Acknowledge bit is
• Data transfer byte transmitted/received transmitted. Start and Stop conditions indicate the
• Acknowledge transmitted/received beginning and end of transmission.
• Repeated Start generated A Baud Rate Generator is used to set the clock
Note 1: The MSSPx module, when configured in frequency output on SCLx. See Section 15.7 “Baud
I2C Master mode, does not allow queue- Rate Generator” for more detail.
ing of events. For instance, the user is not
allowed to initiate a Start condition and
immediately write the SSPxBUF register
to initiate transmission before the Start
condition is complete. In this case, the
SSPxBUF will not be written to and the
WCOL bit will be set, indicating that a write
to the SSPxBUF did not occur
2: When in Master mode, Start/Stop
detection is masked and an interrupt is
generated when the SEN/PEN bit is
cleared and the generation is complete.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.2 CLOCK ARBITRATION
Clock arbitration occurs when the master, during any

receive, transmit or Repeated Start/Stop condition,
releases the SCLx pin (SCLx allowed to float high).
When the SCLx pin is allowed to float high, the Baud
Rate Generator (BRG) is suspended from counting
until the SCLx pin is actually sampled high. When the
SCLx pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is
reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<7:0> and
begins counting. This ensures that the SCLx high time
will always be at least one BRG rollover count in the
event that the clock is held low by an external device
(Figure 15-25).
FIGURE 15-25: BAUD RATE GENERATOR TIMING WITH CLOCK ARBITRATION
SDAx DX DX ‚ – 1
SCLx deasserted but slave holds SCLx allowed to transition high

SCLx low (clock arbitration)
SCLx
BRG decrements on
Q2 and Q4 cycles
BRG
03h 02h 01h 00h (hold off) 03h 02h
Value
SCLx is sampled high, reload takes

place and BRG starts its count
BRG
Reload
15.6.3 WCOL STATUS FLAG
If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Start, Restart,

Stop, Receive or Transmit sequence is in progress, the
WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are
unchanged (the write does not occur). Any time the
WCOL bit is set it indicates that an action on SSPxBUF
was attempted while the module was not Idle.
Note: Because queueing of events is not
allowed, writing to the lower 5 bits of
SSPxCON2 is disabled until the Start
condition is complete.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.4 I2C MASTER MODE START by hardware; the Baud Rate Generator is suspended,
CONDITION TIMING leaving the SDAx line held low and the Start condition
is complete.
To initiate a Start condition, the user sets the Start
Enable bit, SEN, of the SSPxCON2 register. If the Note 1: If at the beginning of the Start condition,
SDAx and SCLx pins are sampled high, the Baud Rate the SDAx and SCLx pins are already sam-
Generator is reloaded with the contents of pled low, or if during the Start condition,
SSPxADD<7:0> and starts its count. If SCLx and the SCLx line is sampled low before the
SDAx are both sampled high when the Baud Rate SDAx line is driven low, a bus collision
Generator times out (TBRG), the SDAx pin is driven occurs, the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag,
low. The action of the SDAx being driven low while BCLxIF, is set, the Start condition is
SCLx is high is the Start condition and causes the S bit aborted and the I2C module is reset into its
of the SSPxSTAT1 register to be set. Following this, Idle state.
the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents 2: The Philips I2C Specification states that a
of SSPxADD<7:0> and resumes its count. When the bus collision cannot occur on a Start.
Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SEN bit of
the SSPxCON2 register will be automatically cleared
FIGURE 15-26: FIRST START BIT TIMING
Write to SEN bit occurs here Set S bit (SSPxSTAT<3>)
At completion of Start bit,

SDAx = 1,
SCLx = 1 hardware clears SEN bit
and sets SSPxIF bit
TBRG TBRG Write to SSPxBUF occurs here
SDAx 1st bit 2nd bit
TBRG
SCLx
S
TBRG

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.5 I2C MASTER MODE REPEATED SSPxCON2 register will be automatically cleared and
START CONDITION TIMING the Baud Rate Generator will not be reloaded, leaving
the SDAx pin held low. As soon as a Start condition is
A Repeated Start condition occurs when the RSEN bit detected on the SDAx and SCLx pins, the S bit of the
of the SSPxCON2 register is programmed high and the SSPxSTAT register will be set. The SSPxIF bit will not
master state machine is no longer active. When the be set until the Baud Rate Generator has timed out.
RSEN bit is set, the SCLx pin is asserted low. When the
SCLx pin is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is Note 1: If RSEN is programmed while any other
loaded and begins counting. The SDAx pin is released event is in progress, it will not take effect.
(brought high) for one Baud Rate Generator count 2: A bus collision during the Repeated Start
(TBRG). When the Baud Rate Generator times out, if condition occurs if:
SDAx is sampled high, the SCLx pin will be deasserted
(brought high). When SCLx is sampled high, the Baud • SDAx is sampled low when SCLx
Rate Generator is reloaded and begins counting. SDAx goes from low-to-high.
and SCLx must be sampled high for one TBRG. This • SCLx goes low before SDAx is
action is then followed by assertion of the SDAx pin asserted low. This may indicate that
(SDAx = 0) for one TBRG while SCLx is high. SCLx is another master is attempting to
asserted low. Following this, the RSEN bit of the transmit a data ‘1’.
FIGURE 15-27: REPEAT START CONDITION WAVEFORM
S bit set by hardware

Write to SSPxCON2
occurs here At completion of Start bit,
SDAx = 1, SDAx = 1,
hardware clears RSEN bit
SCLx (no change) SCLx = 1 and sets SSPxIF
TBRG TBRG TBRG
SDAx 1st bit
Write to SSPxBUF occurs here

TBRG
SCLx
Sr TBRG
Repeated Start

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.6 I2C MASTER MODE TRANSMISSION 15.6.6.3 ACKSTAT Status Flag
Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address or the In Transmit mode, the ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2
other half of a 10-bit address is accomplished by simply register is cleared when the slave has sent an
writing a value to the SSPxBUF register. This action will Acknowledge (ACK = 0) and is set when the slave
set the Buffer Full flag bit, BF, and allow the Baud Rate does not Acknowledge (ACK = 1). A slave sends an
Generator to begin counting and start the next trans- Acknowledge when it has recognized its address
mission. Each bit of address/data will be shifted out (including a general call), or when the slave has
onto the SDAx pin after the falling edge of SCLx is properly received its data.
asserted. SCLx is held low for one Baud Rate Genera-
15.6.6.4 Typical Transmit Sequence:
tor rollover count (TBRG). Data should be valid before
SCLx is released high. When the SCLx pin is released 1. The user generates a Start condition by setting
high, it is held that way for TBRG. The data on the SDAx the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register.
pin must remain stable for that duration and some hold 2. SSPxIF is set by hardware on completion of the
time after the next falling edge of SCLx. After the eighth Start.
bit is shifted out (the falling edge of the eighth clock),
3. SSPxIF is cleared by software.
the BF flag is cleared and the master releases SDAx.
This allows the slave device being addressed to 4. The MSSPx module will wait the required start
respond with an ACK bit during the ninth bit time if an time before any other operation takes place.
address match occurred, or if data was received prop- 5. The user loads the SSPxBUF with the slave
erly. The status of ACK is written into the ACKSTAT bit address to transmit.
on the rising edge of the ninth clock. If the master 6. Address is shifted out the SDAx pin until all 8 bits
receives an Acknowledge, the Acknowledge Status bit, are transmitted. Transmission begins as soon
ACKSTAT, is cleared. If not, the bit is set. After the ninth as SSPxBUF is written to.
clock, the SSPxIF bit is set and the master clock (Baud 7. The MSSPx module shifts in the ACK bit from
Rate Generator) is suspended until the next data byte the slave device and writes its value into the
is loaded into the SSPxBUF, leaving SCLx low and ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register.
SDAx unchanged (Figure 15-27). 8. The MSSPx module generates an interrupt at
After the write to the SSPxBUF, each bit of the address the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the
will be shifted out on the falling edge of SCLx until all SSPxIF bit.
seven address bits and the R/W bit are completed. On 9. The user loads the SSPxBUF with eight bits of
the falling edge of the eighth clock, the master will data.
release the SDAx pin, allowing the slave to respond 10. Data is shifted out the SDAx pin until all 8 bits
with an Acknowledge. On the falling edge of the ninth are transmitted.
clock, the master will sample the SDAx pin to see if the
11. The MSSPx module shifts in the ACK bit from
address was recognized by a slave. The status of the
the slave device and writes its value into the
ACK bit is loaded into the ACKSTAT Status bit of the
ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register.
SSPxCON2 register. Following the falling edge of the
ninth clock transmission of the address, the SSPxIF is 12. Steps 8-11 are repeated for all transmitted data
set, the BF flag is cleared and the Baud Rate Generator bytes.
is turned off until another write to the SSPxBUF takes 13. The user generates a Stop or Restart condition
place, holding SCLx low and allowing SDAx to float. by setting the PEN or RSEN bits of the
SSPxCON2 register. Interrupt is generated once
15.6.6.1 BF Status Flag the Stop/Restart condition is complete.
In Transmit mode, the BF bit of the SSPxSTAT register
is set when the CPU writes to SSPxBUF and is cleared
when all 8 bits are shifted out.
15.6.6.2 WCOL Status Flag

If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a transmit is
already in progress (i.e., SSPxSR is still shifting out a
data byte), the WCOL is set and the contents of the
buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur).
WCOL must be cleared by software before the next
transmission.

FIGURE 15-28:
Write SSPxCON2<0> SEN = 1 ACKSTAT in

Start condition begins SSPxCON2 = 1
From slave, clear ACKSTAT bit SSPxCON2<6>
SEN = 0

Transmitting Data or Second Half
Transmit Address to Slave R/W = 0
of 10-bit Address ACK
SDAx A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK = 0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SSPxBUF written with 7-bit address and R/W

start transmit
SCLx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S P
SCLx held low
while CPU
responds to SSPxIF
SSPxIF
Cleared by software service routine
Cleared by software from SSPx interrupt
Cleared by software
Preliminary
BF (SSPxSTAT<0>)
SSPxBUF written SSPxBUF is written by software

SEN
After Start condition, SEN cleared by hardware
PEN
R/W
I2C MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (TRANSMISSION, 7 OR 10-BIT ADDRESS)
DS41412B-page 243
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.7 I2C MASTER MODE RECEPTION 15.6.7.4 Typical Receive Sequence:
Master mode reception is enabled by programming the 1. The user generates a Start condition by setting
Receive Enable bit, RCEN, of the SSPxCON2 register. the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register.
Note: The MSSPx module must be in an Idle 2. SSPxIF is set by hardware on completion of the
state before the RCEN bit is set or the Start.
RCEN bit will be disregarded. 3. SSPxIF is cleared by software.
The Baud Rate Generator begins counting and on each 4. User writes SSPxBUF with the slave address to
rollover, the state of the SCLx pin changes (high-to-low/ transmit and the R/W bit set.
low-to-high) and data is shifted into the SSPxSR. After 5. Address is shifted out the SDAx pin until all 8 bits
the falling edge of the eighth clock, the receive enable are transmitted. Transmission begins as soon
flag is automatically cleared, the contents of the as SSPxBUF is written to.
SSPxSR are loaded into the SSPxBUF, the BF flag bit 6. The MSSPx module shifts in the ACK bit from
is set, the SSPxIF flag bit is set and the Baud Rate the slave device and writes its value into the
Generator is suspended from counting, holding SCLx ACKSTAT bit of the SSPxCON2 register.
low. The MSSPx is now in Idle state awaiting the next 7. The MSSPx module generates an interrupt at
command. When the buffer is read by the CPU, the BF the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the
flag bit is automatically cleared. The user can then SSPxIF bit.
send an Acknowledge bit at the end of reception by set-
8. User sets the RCEN bit of the SSPxCON2 regis-
ting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN, of
ter and the Master clocks in a byte from the slave.
the SSPxCON2 register.
9. After the 8th falling edge of SCLx, SSPxIF and
15.6.7.1 BF Status Flag BF are set.
10. Master clears SSPxIF and reads the received
In receive operation, the BF bit is set when an address
byte from SSPxUF, clears BF.
or data byte is loaded into SSPxBUF from SSPxSR. It
is cleared when the SSPxBUF register is read. 11. Master sets ACK value sent to slave in ACKDT
bit of the SSPxCON2 register and initiates the
15.6.7.2 SSPxOV Status Flag ACK by setting the ACKEN bit.
In receive operation, the SSPxOV bit is set when 8 bits 12. Masters ACK is clocked out to the slave and
are received into the SSPxSR and the BF flag bit is SSPxIF is set.
already set from a previous reception. 13. User clears SSPxIF.
14. Steps 8-13 are repeated for each received byte
15.6.7.3 WCOL Status Flag from the slave.
If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a receive is 15. Master sends a not ACK or Stop to end
already in progress (i.e., SSPxSR is still shifting in a communication.
data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the
buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur).

Write to SSPxCON2<4>
to start Acknowledge sequence
SDAx = ACKDT (SSPxCON2<5>) = 0
Write to SSPxCON2<0>(SEN = 1),
FIGURE 15-29:
begin Start condition ACK from Master Set ACKEN, start Acknowledge sequence
Master configured as a receiver SDAx = ACKDT = 0 SDAx = ACKDT = 1
SEN = 0 by programming SSPxCON2<3> (RCEN = 1)
PEN bit = 1
Write to SSPxBUF occurs here, RCEN cleared RCEN = 1, start RCEN cleared
ACK from Slave next receive automatically written here
start XMIT automatically
Transmit Address to Slave R/W = 0 Receiving Data from Slave Receiving Data from Slave

SDAx A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK
Bus master
ACK is not sent terminates
transfer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SCLx S P
Data shifted in on falling edge of CLK Set SSPxIF at end
of receive Set SSPxIF interrupt
Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of Acknow-
Set SSPxIF interrupt ledge sequence
at end of receive at end of Acknowledge
SSPxIF sequence
Set P bit
Cleared by software Cleared by software Cleared by software Cleared by software (SSPxSTAT<4>)
SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 Cleared in
while CPU software and SSPxIF
responds to SSPxIF
BF
Preliminary
(SSPxSTAT<0>) Last bit is shifted into SSPxSR and
contents are unloaded into SSPxBUF
SSPxOV
SSPxOV is set because

SSPxBUF is still full
ACKEN
RCEN
I2C™ MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS)
Master configured as a receiver RCEN cleared ACK from Master RCEN cleared
by programming SSPxCON2<3> (RCEN = 1) automatically SDAx = ACKDT = 0 automatically
DS41412B-page 245
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.8 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE 15.6.9 STOP CONDITION TIMING
TIMING A Stop bit is asserted on the SDAx pin at the end of a
An Acknowledge sequence is enabled by setting the receive/transmit by setting the Stop Sequence Enable
Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN, of the bit, PEN, of the SSPxCON2 register. At the end of a
SSPxCON2 register. When this bit is set, the SCLx pin is receive/transmit, the SCLx line is held low after the
pulled low and the contents of the Acknowledge data bit falling edge of the ninth clock. When the PEN bit is set,
are presented on the SDAx pin. If the user wishes to the master will assert the SDAx line low. When the
generate an Acknowledge, then the ACKDT bit should SDAx line is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is
be cleared. If not, the user should set the ACKDT bit reloaded and counts down to ‘0’. When the Baud Rate
before starting an Acknowledge sequence. The Baud Generator times out, the SCLx pin will be brought high
Rate Generator then counts for one rollover period and one TBRG (Baud Rate Generator rollover count)
(TBRG) and the SCLx pin is deasserted (pulled high). later, the SDAx pin will be deasserted. When the SDAx
When the SCLx pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), pin is sampled high while SCLx is high, the P bit of the
the Baud Rate Generator counts for TBRG. The SCLx pin SSPxSTAT register is set. A TBRG later, the PEN bit is
is then pulled low. Following this, the ACKEN bit is auto- cleared and the SSPxIF bit is set (Figure 15-30).
matically cleared, the Baud Rate Generator is turned off
and the MSSPx module then goes into Idle mode 15.6.9.1 WCOL Status Flag
(Figure 15-29). If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Stop sequence
is in progress, then the WCOL bit is set and the
15.6.8.1 WCOL Status Flag contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does
If the user writes the SSPxBUF when an Acknowledge not occur).
sequence is in progress, then WCOL is set and the
contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does
not occur).
FIGURE 15-30: ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE WAVEFORM

Acknowledge sequence starts here, ACKEN automatically cleared
write to SSPxCON2
ACKEN = 1, ACKDT = 0
TBRG TBRG
SDAx D0 ACK
SCLx 8 9
SSPxIF
Cleared in
SSPxIF set at software
the end of receive Cleared in
software SSPxIF set at the end
of Acknowledge sequence
Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 15-31: STOP CONDITION RECEIVE OR TRANSMIT MODE
Write to SSPxCON2, SCLx = 1 for TBRG, followed by SDAx = 1 for TBRG
set PEN after SDAx sampled high. P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) is set.
Falling edge of PEN bit (SSPxCON2<2>) is cleared by

9th clock hardware and the SSPxIF bit is set
TBRG
SCLx
SDAx ACK
P
TBRG TBRG TBRG
SCLx brought high after TBRG
SDAx asserted low before rising edge of clock
to setup Stop condition
Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period.
15.6.10 SLEEP OPERATION 15.6.12 MULTI-MASTER MODE

While in Sleep mode, the I2C slavemodule can receive In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the
addresses or data and when an address match or detection of the Start and Stop conditions allows the
complete byte transfer occurs, wake the processor determination of when the bus is free. The Stop (P) and
from Sleep (if the MSSPx interrupt is enabled). Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the
MSSPx module is disabled. Control of the I 2C bus may
15.6.11 EFFECTS OF A RESET be taken when the P bit of the SSPxSTAT register is
A Reset disables the MSSPx module and terminates set, or the bus is Idle, with both the S and P bits clear.
the current transfer. When the bus is busy, enabling the SSPx interrupt will
generate the interrupt when the Stop condition occurs.
In multi-master operation, the SDAx line must be
monitored for arbitration to see if the signal level is the
expected output level. This check is performed by
hardware with the result placed in the BCLxIF bit.
The states where arbitration can be lost are:
• Address Transfer
• Data Transfer
• A Start Condition
• A Repeated Start Condition
• An Acknowledge Condition

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.13 MULTI -MASTER COMMUNICATION, If a Start, Repeated Start, Stop or Acknowledge
BUS COLLISION AND BUS condition was in progress when the bus collision
ARBITRATION occurred, the condition is aborted, the SDAx and SCLx
lines are deasserted and the respective control bits in
Multi-Master mode support is achieved by bus the SSPxCON2 register are cleared. When the user
arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and
onto the SDAx pin, arbitration takes place when the if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume
master outputs a ‘1’ on SDAx, by letting SDAx float high communication by asserting a Start condition.
and another master asserts a ‘0’. When the SCLx pin
floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data The master will continue to monitor the SDAx and SCLx
on SDAx is a ‘1’ and the data sampled on the SDAx pin pins. If a Stop condition occurs, the SSPxIF bit will be set.
is ‘0’, then a bus collision has taken place. The master A write to the SSPxBUF will start the transmission of
will set the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLxIF, and data at the first data bit, regardless of where the
reset the I2C port to its Idle state (Figure 15-31). transmitter left off when the bus collision occurred.
If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the
occurred, the transmission is halted, the BF flag is detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the
cleared, the SDAx and SCLx lines are deasserted and determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C
the SSPxBUF can be written to. When the user bus can be taken when the P bit is set in the SSPxSTAT
services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and register, or the bus is Idle and the S and P bits are
if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume cleared.
communication by asserting a Start condition.
FIGURE 15-32: BUS COLLISION TIMING FOR TRANSMIT AND ACKNOWLEDGE

Sample SDAx. While SCLx is high,
Data changes SDAx line pulled low data does not match what is driven
while SCLx = 0 by another source by the master.
Bus collision has occurred.
SDAx released
by master
SDAx
SCLx Set bus collision

interrupt (BCLxIF)
BCLxIF

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.13.1 Bus Collision During a Start If the SDAx pin is sampled low during this count, the
Condition BRG is reset and the SDAx line is asserted early
(Figure 15-34). If, however, a ‘1’ is sampled on the
During a Start condition, a bus collision occurs if:
SDAx pin, the SDAx pin is asserted low at the end of
a) SDAx or SCLx are sampled low at the beginning the BRG count. The Baud Rate Generator is then
of the Start condition (Figure 15-32). reloaded and counts down to zero; if the SCLx pin is
b) SCLx is sampled low before SDAx is asserted sampled as ‘0’ during this time, a bus collision does not
low (Figure 15-33). occur. At the end of the BRG count, the SCLx pin is
asserted low.
During a Start condition, both the SDAx and the SCLx
pins are monitored. Note: The reason that bus collision is not a factor
If the SDAx pin is already low, or the SCLx pin is during a Start condition is that no two bus
already low, then all of the following occur: masters can assert a Start condition at the
exact same time. Therefore, one master
• the Start condition is aborted,
will always assert SDAx before the other.
• the BCLxIF flag is set and This condition does not cause a bus colli-
• the MSSPx module is reset to its Idle state sion because the two masters must be
(Figure 15-32). allowed to arbitrate the first address fol-
The Start condition begins with the SDAx and SCLx lowing the Start condition. If the address is
pins deasserted. When the SDAx pin is sampled high, the same, arbitration must be allowed to
the Baud Rate Generator is loaded and counts down. If continue into the data portion, Repeated
the SCLx pin is sampled low while SDAx is high, a bus Start or Stop conditions.
collision occurs because it is assumed that another
master is attempting to drive a data ‘1’ during the Start
condition.
FIGURE 15-33: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SDAx ONLY)

SDAx goes low before the SEN bit is set.
Set BCLxIF,
S bit and SSPxIF set because
SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1.
SDAx
SCLx
Set SEN, enable Start SEN cleared automatically because of bus collision.
condition if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 SSPx module reset into Idle state.
SEN
SDAx sampled low before
Start condition. Set BCLxIF.
S bit and SSPxIF set because
BCLxIF SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1.
SSPxIF and BCLxIF are
cleared by software
SSPxIF
SSPxIF and BCLxIF are

cleared by software

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 15-34: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SCLx = 0)
SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1
TBRG TBRG
SDAx
SCLx Set SEN, enable Start

sequence if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1
SCLx = 0 before SDAx = 0,
bus collision occurs. Set BCLxIF.
SEN
SCLx = 0 before BRG time-out,
bus collision occurs. Set BCLxIF.
BCLxIF
Interrupt cleared
by software
S ’0’ ’0’
SSPxIF ’0’ ’0’
FIGURE 15-35: BRG RESET DUE TO SDA ARBITRATION DURING START CONDITION
SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1
Set S Set SSPxIF
Less than TBRG
TBRG
SDAx SDAx pulled low by other master.

Reset BRG and assert SDAx.
SCLx S
SCLx pulled low after BRG
time-out
SEN
Set SEN, enable Start
sequence if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1
BCLxIF ’0’
SSPxIF
SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1, Interrupts cleared
set SSPxIF by software

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.13.2 Bus Collision During a Repeated If SDAx is low, a bus collision has occurred (i.e., another
Start Condition master is attempting to transmit a data ‘0’, Figure 15-35).
If SDAx is sampled high, the BRG is reloaded and
During a Repeated Start condition, a bus collision
begins counting. If SDAx goes from high-to-low before
occurs if:
the BRG times out, no bus collision occurs because no
a) A low level is sampled on SDAx when SCLx two masters can assert SDAx at exactly the same time.
goes from low level to high level.
If SCLx goes from high-to-low before the BRG times
b) SCLx goes low before SDAx is asserted low, out and SDAx has not already been asserted, a bus
indicating that another master is attempting to collision occurs. In this case, another master is
transmit a data ‘1’. attempting to transmit a data ‘1’ during the Repeated
When the user releases SDAx and the pin is allowed to Start condition, see Figure 15-36.
float high, the BRG is loaded with SSPxADD and If, at the end of the BRG time-out, both SCLx and SDAx
counts down to zero. The SCLx pin is then deasserted are still high, the SDAx pin is driven low and the BRG
and when sampled high, the SDAx pin is sampled. is reloaded and begins counting. At the end of the
count, regardless of the status of the SCLx pin, the
SCLx pin is driven low and the Repeated Start
condition is complete.
FIGURE 15-36: BUS COLLISION DURING A REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 1)
SDAx
SCLx
Sample SDAx when SCLx goes high.

If SDAx = 0, set BCLxIF and release SDAx and SCLx.
RSEN
BCLxIF
Cleared by software
S ’0’
SSPxIF ’0’
FIGURE 15-37: BUS COLLISION DURING REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 2)
TBRG TBRG
SDAx
SCLx
SCLx goes low before SDAx,

BCLxIF set BCLxIF. Release SDAx and SCLx.
Interrupt cleared
by software
RSEN
S ’0’
SSPxIF

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.6.13.3 Bus Collision During a Stop The Stop condition begins with SDAx asserted low.
Condition When SDAx is sampled low, the SCLx pin is allowed to
float. When the pin is sampled high (clock arbitration),
Bus collision occurs during a Stop condition if:
the Baud Rate Generator is loaded with SSPxADD and
a) After the SDAx pin has been deasserted and counts down to 0. After the BRG times out, SDAx is
allowed to float high, SDAx is sampled low after sampled. If SDAx is sampled low, a bus collision has
the BRG has timed out. occurred. This is due to another master attempting to
b) After the SCLx pin is deasserted, SCLx is drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 15-37). If the SCLx pin is
sampled low before SDAx goes high. sampled low before SDAx is allowed to float high, a bus
collision occurs. This is another case of another master
attempting to drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 15-38).
FIGURE 15-38: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 1)
TBRG TBRG TBRG SDAx sampled

low after TBRG,
set BCLxIF
SDAx
SDAx asserted low

SCLx
PEN
BCLxIF
P ’0’
SSPxIF ’0’
FIGURE 15-39: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 2)
TBRG TBRG TBRG
SDAx
Assert SDAx SCLx goes low before SDAx goes high,

set BCLxIF
SCLx
PEN
BCLxIF
P ’0’
SSPxIF ’0’

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 15-3: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH I2C™ OPERATION

Register
on Page
(1) (1)
ANSELD ANSD7 ANSD6 ANSD5 ANSD4 ANSD3 ANSD2 ANSD1(2) ANSD0(2) 153
2C I2C
SSP1ADD SSP1 Address Register in I Slave Mode. SSP1 Baud Rate Reload Register in Master Mode. 261
SSP1CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 258
SSP1MSK SSP1 MASK Register bits 260
SSP2ADD SSP2 Address Register in I2C Slave Mode. SSP2 Baud Rate Reload Register in I2C Master Mode. 261
SSP2CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 258
SSP2MSK SSP1 MASK Register bits 260
TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1(1) TRISB0(1) 154
TRISD TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1(2) TRISD0(2) 154
Legend: Shaded bits are not used by the MSSPx in I2 C mode.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
15.7 BAUD RATE GENERATOR module clock line. The logic dictating when the reload
signal is asserted depends on the mode the MSSPx is
The MSSPx module has a Baud Rate Generator avail- being operated in.
able for clock generation in both I2C and SPI Master
Table 15-4 demonstrates clock rates based on
modes. The Baud Rate Generator (BRG) reload value
instruction cycles and the BRG value loaded into
is placed in the SSPxADD register (Register 15-6).
SSPxADD.
When a write occurs to SSPxBUF, the Baud Rate Gen-
erator will automatically begin counting down.
EQUATION 15-1:
Once the given operation is complete, the internal clock
will automatically stop counting and the clock pin will FOSC
remain in its last state. FCLOCK = -------------------------------------------------
 SSPxADD + 1   4 
An internal signal “Reload” in Figure 15-39 triggers the
value from SSPxADD to be loaded into the BRG
counter. This occurs twice for each oscillation of the
FIGURE 15-40: BAUD RATE GENERATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM
SSPxM<3:0> SSPxADD<7:0>
SSPxM<3:0> Reload Reload

SCLx Control
SSPxCLK BRG Down Counter FOSC/2
Note: Values of 0x00, 0x01 and 0x02 are not valid

for SSPxADD when used as a Baud Rate
Generator for I2C. This is an implementation
limitation.
TABLE 15-4: MSSPx CLOCK RATE W/BRG

FCLOCK
FOSC FCY BRG Value
(2 Rollovers of BRG)
32 MHz 8 MHz 13h 400 kHz(1)
32 MHz 8 MHz 19h 308 kHz
32 MHz 8 MHz 4Fh 100 kHz
16 MHz 4 MHz 09h 400 kHz(1)
16 MHz 4 MHz 0Ch 308 kHz
Note 1: The I2C interface does not conform to the 400 kHz I2C specification (which applies to rates greater than
100 kHz) in all details, but may be used with care where higher rates are required by the application.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 15-1: SSPxSTAT: SSPx STATUS REGISTER

R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0
SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SMP: SPI Data Input Sample bit

SPI Master mode:
1 = Input data sampled at end of data output time
0 = Input data sampled at middle of data output time
SPI Slave mode:
SMP must be cleared when SPI is used in Slave mode
In I2 C Master or Slave mode:
1 = Slew rate control disabled for standard speed mode (100 kHz and 1 MHz)
0 = Slew rate control enabled for high speed mode (400 kHz)
bit 6 CKE: SPI Clock Edge Select bit (SPI mode only)
In SPI Master or Slave mode:
1 = Transmit occurs on transition from active to Idle clock state
0 = Transmit occurs on transition from Idle to active clock state
In I2 C mode only:
1 = Enable input logic so that thresholds are compliant with SMbus specification
0 = Disable SMbus specific inputs
bit 5 D/A: Data/Address bit (I2C mode only)
1 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was data
0 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was address
bit 4 P: Stop bit
(I2C mode only. This bit is cleared when the MSSPx module is disabled, SSPxEN is cleared.)
1 = Indicates that a Stop bit has been detected last (this bit is ‘0’ on Reset)
0 = Stop bit was not detected last
bit 3 S: Start bit
(I2C mode only. This bit is cleared when the MSSPx module is disabled, SSPxEN is cleared.)
1 = Indicates that a Start bit has been detected last (this bit is ‘0’ on Reset)
0 = Start bit was not detected last
bit 2 R/W: Read/Write bit information (I2C mode only)
This bit holds the R/W bit information following the last address match. This bit is only valid from the address match
to the next Start bit, Stop bit, or not ACK bit.
In I2 C Slave mode:
1 = Read
0 = Write
In I2 C Master mode:
1 = Transmit is in progress
0 = Transmit is not in progress
OR-ing this bit with SEN, RSEN, PEN, RCEN or ACKEN will indicate if the MSSPx is in Idle mode.
bit 1 UA: Update Address bit (10-bit I2C mode only)
1 = Indicates that the user needs to update the address in the SSPxADD register
0 = Address does not need to be updated
bit 0 BF: Buffer Full Status bit
Receive (SPI and I2 C modes):
1 = Receive complete, SSPxBUF is full
0 = Receive not complete, SSPxBUF is empty
Transmit (I2 C mode only):
1 = Data transmit in progress (does not include the ACK and Stop bits), SSPxBUF is full
0 = Data transmit complete (does not include the ACK and Stop bits), SSPxBUF is empty

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 15-2: SSPxCON1: SSPx CONTROL REGISTER 1

R/C/HS-0 R/C/HS-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
WCOL SSPxOV SSPxEN CKP SSPxM<3:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HS = Bit is set by hardware C = User cleared
bit 7 WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit

Master mode:
1 = A write to the SSPxBUF register was attempted while the I2C conditions were not valid for a transmission to
be started
0 = No collision
Slave mode:
1 = The SSPxBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared in software)
0 = No collision
bit 6 SSPxOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit(1)
In SPI mode:
1 = A new byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous data. In case of overflow, the data
in SSPxSR is lost. Overflow can only occur in Slave mode. In Slave mode, the user must read the SSPxBUF, even
if only transmitting data, to avoid setting overflow. In Master mode, the overflow bit is not set since each new recep-
tion (and transmission) is initiated by writing to the SSPxBUF register (must be cleared in software).
0 = No overflow
In I2 C mode:
1 = A byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous byte. SSPxOV is a “don’t care” in
Transmit mode (must be cleared in software).
0 = No overflow
bit 5 SSPxEN: Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit
In both modes, when enabled, these pins must be properly configured as input or output
In SPI mode:
1 = Enables serial port and configures SCKx, SDOx, SDIx and SSx as the source of the serial port pins(2)
0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins
In I2 C mode:
1 = Enables the serial port and configures the SDAx and SCLx pins as the source of the serial port pins(3)
0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins
bit 4 CKP: Clock Polarity Select bit
In SPI mode:
1 = Idle state for clock is a high level
0 = Idle state for clock is a low level
In I2 C Slave mode:
SCLx release control
1 = Enable clock
0 = Holds clock low (clock stretch). (Used to ensure data setup time.)
In I2 C Master mode:
Unused in this mode

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 15-2: SSPxCON1: SSPx CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CONTINUED)
bit 3-0 SSPxM<3:0>: Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits
0000 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/4
0011 = SPI Master mode, clock = TMR2 output/2
0100 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCKx pin, SSx pin control enabled
0101 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCKx pin, SSx pin control disabled, SSx can be used as I/O pin
0110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address
0111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address
1000 = I2C Master mode, clock = FOSC / (4 * (SSPxADD+1))(4)
1001 = Reserved
1010 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/(4 * (SSPxADD+1))
1011 = I2C firmware controlled Master mode (slave idle)
1100 = Reserved
1101 = Reserved
1110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled
1111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled
Note 1: In Master mode, the overflow bit is not set since each new reception (and transmission) is initiated by writing to the
SSPxBUF register.
2: When enabled, these pins must be properly configured as input or output.
3: When enabled, the SDAx and SCLx pins must be configured as inputs.
4: SSPxADD values of 0, 1 or 2 are not supported for I2C Mode.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/S/HC-0 R/S/HC-0 R/S/HC-0 R/S/HC-0 R/W/HC-0
GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN(1) RCEN(1) PEN(1) RSEN(1) SEN(1)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared HC = Cleared by hardware S = User set
bit 7 GCEN: General Call Enable bit (in I2C Slave mode only)
1 = Enable interrupt when a general call address (0x00 or 00h) is received in the SSPxSR
0 = General call address disabled
bit 6 ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit (in I2C mode only)
1 = Acknowledge was not received
0 = Acknowledge was received
bit 5 ACKDT: Acknowledge Data bit (in I2C mode only)
In Receive mode:
Value transmitted when the user initiates an Acknowledge sequence at the end of a receive
1 = Not Acknowledge
0 = Acknowledge
bit 4 ACKEN(1): Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit (in I2C Master mode only)
In Master Receive mode:
1 = Initiate Acknowledge sequence on SDAx and SCLx pins, and transmit ACKDT data bit.
Automatically cleared by hardware.
0 = Acknowledge sequence idle
bit 3 RCEN(1): Receive Enable bit (in I2C Master mode only)
1 = Enables Receive mode for I2C
0 = Receive idle
bit 2 PEN(1): Stop Condition Enable bit (in I2C Master mode only)
SCKx Release Control:
1 = Initiate Stop condition on SDAx and SCLx pins. Automatically cleared by hardware.
0 = Stop condition Idle
bit 1 RSEN(1): Repeated Start Condition Enabled bit (in I2C Master mode only)
1 = Initiate Repeated Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins. Automatically cleared by hardware.
0 = Repeated Start condition Idle
bit 0 SEN(1): Start Condition Enabled bit (in I2C Master mode only)
In Master mode:
1 = Initiate Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins. Automatically cleared by hardware.
0 = Start condition Idle
In Slave mode:
1 = Clock stretching is enabled for both slave transmit and slave receive (stretch enabled)
0 = Clock stretching is disabled
Note 1: For bits ACKEN, RCEN, PEN, RSEN, SEN: If the I2C module is not in the Idle mode, this bit may not be
set (no spooling) and the SSPxBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPxBUF are disabled).

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
ACKTIM PCIE SCIE BOEN SDAHT SBCDE AHEN DHEN
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 ACKTIM: Acknowledge Time Status bit (I2C mode only)(3)

1 = Indicates the I2C bus is in an Acknowledge sequence, set on 8th falling edge of SCLx clock
0 = Not an Acknowledge sequence, cleared on 9th rising edge of SCLx clock
bit 6 PCIE: Stop Condition Interrupt Enable bit (I2C mode only)
1 = Enable interrupt on detection of Stop condition
0 = Stop detection interrupts are disabled(2)
bit 5 SCIE: Start Condition Interrupt Enable bit (I2C mode only)
1 = Enable interrupt on detection of Start or Restart conditions
0 = Start detection interrupts are disabled(2)
bit 4 BOEN: Buffer Overwrite Enable bit
In SPI Slave mode:(1)
1 = SSPxBUF updates every time that a new data byte is shifted in ignoring the BF bit
0 = If new byte is received with BF bit of the SSPxSTAT register already set, SSPxOV bit of the
SSPxCON1 register is set, and the buffer is not updated
In I2C Master mode:
This bit is ignored.
In I2C Slave mode:
1 = SSPxBUF is updated and ACK is generated for a received address/data byte, ignoring the
state of the SSPxOV bit only if the BF bit = 0.
0 = SSPxBUF is only updated when SSPxOV is clear
bit 3 SDAHT: SDAx Hold Time Selection bit (I2C mode only)
1 = Minimum of 300 ns hold time on SDAx after the falling edge of SCLx
0 = Minimum of 100 ns hold time on SDAx after the falling edge of SCLx
bit 2 SBCDE: Slave Mode Bus Collision Detect Enable bit (I2C Slave mode only)
If on the rising edge of SCLx, SDAx is sampled low when the module is outputting a high state, the
BCLxIF bit of the PIR2 register is set, and bus goes idle
1 = Enable slave bus collision interrupts
0 = Slave bus collision interrupts are disabled
bit 1 AHEN: Address Hold Enable bit (I2C Slave mode only)
1 = Following the 8th falling edge of SCLx for a matching received address byte; CKP bit of the
SSPxCON1 register will be cleared and the SCLx will be held low.
0 = Address holding is disabled
Note 1: For daisy-chained SPI operation; allows the user to ignore all but the last received byte. SSPxOV is still
set when a new byte is received and BF = 1, but hardware continues to write the most recent byte to
SSPxBUF.
2: This bit has no effect in Slave modes for which Start and Stop condition detection is explicitly listed as
enabled.
3: The ACKTIM Status bit is active only when the AHEN bit or DHEN bit is set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 15-4: SSPxCON3: SSPx CONTROL REGISTER 3 (CONTINUED)
bit 0 DHEN: Data Hold Enable bit (I2C Slave mode only)
1 = Following the 8th falling edge of SCLx for a received data byte; slave hardware clears the CKP bit
of the SSPxCON1 register and SCLx is held low.
0 = Data holding is disabled
Note 1: For daisy-chained SPI operation; allows the user to ignore all but the last received byte. SSPxOV is still
set when a new byte is received and BF = 1, but hardware continues to write the most recent byte to
SSPxBUF.
2: This bit has no effect in Slave modes for which Start and Stop condition detection is explicitly listed as
enabled.
3: The ACKTIM Status bit is active only when the AHEN bit or DHEN bit is set.
REGISTER 15-5: SSPxMSK: SSPx MASK REGISTER

MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-1 MSK<7:1>: Mask bits

1 = The received address bit n is compared to SSPxADD<n> to detect I2C address match
0 = The received address bit n is not used to detect I2C address match
bit 0 MSK<0>: Mask bit for I2C Slave mode, 10-bit Address
I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address (SSPxM<3:0> = 0111 or 1111):
1 = The received address bit 0 is compared to SSPxADD<0> to detect I2C address match
0 = The received address bit 0 is not used to detect I2C address match
I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address, the bit is ignored

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 15-6: SSPXADD: MSSPx ADDRESS AND BAUD RATE REGISTER (I2C MODE)
ADD<7:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
Master mode:
bit 7-0 ADD<7:0>: Baud Rate Clock Divider bits

SCLx pin clock period = ((ADD<7:0> + 1) *4)/FOSC
10-Bit Slave mode — Most Significant Address byte:
bit 7-3 Not used: Unused for Most Significant Address byte. Bit state of this register is a “don’t care”. Bit
pattern sent by master is fixed by I2C specification and must be equal to ‘11110’. However, those bits
are compared by hardware and are not affected by the value in this register.
bit 2-1 ADD<2:1>: Two Most Significant bits of 10-bit address
bit 0 Not used: Unused in this mode. Bit state is a “don’t care”.
10-Bit Slave mode — Least Significant Address byte:
bit 7-0 ADD<7:0>: Eight Least Significant bits of 10-bit address

7-Bit Slave mode:
bit 7-1 ADD<7:1>: 7-bit address

bit 0 Not used: Unused in this mode. Bit state is a “don’t care”.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.0 ENHANCED UNIVERSAL The EUSART module includes the following capabilities:
SYNCHRONOUS • Full-duplex asynchronous transmit and receive
ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER • Two-character input buffer
TRANSMITTER (EUSART) • One-character output buffer
• Programmable 8-bit or 9-bit character length
The Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous
• Address detection in 9-bit mode
Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) module is a serial I/O
communications peripheral. It contains all the clock • Input buffer overrun error detection
generators, shift registers and data buffers necessary • Received character framing error detection
to perform an input or output serial data transfer • Half-duplex synchronous master
independent of device program execution. The • Half-duplex synchronous slave
EUSART, also known as a Serial Communications • Programmable clock and data polarity
Interface (SCI), can be configured as a full-duplex
asynchronous system or half-duplex synchronous The EUSART module implements the following
system. Full-Duplex mode is useful for additional features, making it ideally suited for use in
communications with peripheral systems, such as CRT Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus systems:
terminals and personal computers. Half-Duplex • Automatic detection and calibration of the baud rate
Synchronous mode is intended for communications • Wake-up on Break reception
with peripheral devices, such as A/D or D/A integrated
• 13-bit Break character transmit
circuits, serial EEPROMs or other microcontrollers.
These devices typically do not have internal clocks for Block diagrams of the EUSART transmitter and
baud rate generation and require the external clock receiver are shown in Figure 16-1 and Figure 16-2.
signal provided by a master synchronous device.
FIGURE 16-1: EUSART TRANSMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM

Data Bus
TXxIE
Interrupt
TXREGx Register TXxIF
8
MSb LSb TXx/CKx pin
(8) 0 Pin Buffer
• • • and Control
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
TXEN
TRMT
Baud Rate Generator FOSC
÷n
TX9
BRG16 n
+1 Multiplier x4 x16 x64
TX9D
SYNC 1 X 0 0 0
SPBRGHx SPBRGx BRGH X 1 1 0 0
BRG16 X 1 0 1 0

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 16-2: EUSART RECEIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM
CREN OERR RCIDL
RXx/DTx pin MSb RSR Register LSb

Pin Buffer Data
and Control Recovery
Stop (8) 7 ••• 1 0 START
Baud Rate Generator FOSC RX9

÷n
BRG16
+1 n
Multiplier x4 x16 x64
SYNC 1 X 0 0 0
SPBRGHx SPBRGx BRGH X 1 1 0 0 FIFO
FERR RX9D RCREGx Register
BRG16 X 1 0 1 0
8
Data Bus
RCxIF Interrupt
RCxIE
The operation of the EUSART module is controlled

through three registers:
• Transmit Status and Control (TXSTAx)
• Receive Status and Control (RCSTAx)
• Baud Rate Control (BAUDCONx)
These registers are detailed in Register 16-1,
Register 16-2 and Register 16-3, respectively.
For all modes of EUSART operation, the TRIS control
bits corresponding to the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pins
should be set to ‘1’. The EUSART control will
automatically reconfigure the pin from input to output, as
needed.
When the receiver or transmitter section is not enabled
then the corresponding RXx/DTx or TXx/CKx pin may be
used for general purpose input and output.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.1 EUSART Asynchronous Mode 16.1.1.2 Transmitting Data
The EUSART transmits and receives data using the A transmission is initiated by writing a character to the
standard non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format. NRZ is TXREGx register. If this is the first character, or the
implemented with two levels: a VOH mark state which previous character has been completely flushed from
represents a ‘1’ data bit, and a VOL space state which the TSR, the data in the TXREGx is immediately
represents a ‘0’ data bit. NRZ refers to the fact that transferred to the TSR register. If the TSR still contains
consecutively transmitted data bits of the same value all or part of a previous character, the new character
stay at the output level of that bit without returning to a data is held in the TXREGx until the Stop bit of the
neutral level between each bit transmission. An NRZ previous character has been transmitted. The pending
transmission port idles in the mark state. Each character character in the TXREGx is then transferred to the TSR
transmission consists of one Start bit followed by eight in one TCY immediately following the Stop bit
or nine data bits and is always terminated by one or transmission. The transmission of the Start bit, data bits
more Stop bits. The Start bit is always a space and the and Stop bit sequence commences immediately
Stop bits are always marks. The most common data following the transfer of the data to the TSR from the
format is 8 bits. Each transmitted bit persists for a period TXREGx.
of 1/(Baud Rate). An on-chip dedicated 8-bit/16-bit Baud
Rate Generator is used to derive standard baud rate 16.1.1.3 Transmit Data Polarity
frequencies from the system oscillator. See Table 16-5 The polarity of the transmit data can be controlled with
for examples of baud rate configurations. the CKTXP bit of the BAUDCONx register. The default
The EUSART transmits and receives the LSb first. The state of this bit is ‘0’ which selects high true transmit
EUSART’s transmitter and receiver are functionally idle and data bits. Setting the CKTXP bit to ‘1’ will invert
independent, but share the same data format and baud the transmit data resulting in low true idle and data bits.
rate. Parity is not supported by the hardware, but can The CKTXP bit controls transmit data polarity only in
be implemented in software and stored as the ninth Asynchronous mode. In Synchronous mode the
data bit. CKTXP bit has a different function.
16.1.1 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS 16.1.1.4 Transmit Interrupt Flag

TRANSMITTER The TXxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1/PIR3 register is
set whenever the EUSART transmitter is enabled and
The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in
no character is being held for transmission in the
Figure 16-1. The heart of the transmitter is the serial
TXREGx. In other words, the TXxIF bit is only clear
Transmit Shift Register (TSR), which is not directly
when the TSR is busy with a character and a new
accessible by software. The TSR obtains its data from
character has been queued for transmission in the
the transmit buffer, which is the TXREGx register.
TXREGx. The TXxIF flag bit is not cleared immediately
16.1.1.1 Enabling the Transmitter upon writing TXREGx. TXxIF becomes valid in the
second instruction cycle following the write execution.
The EUSART transmitter is enabled for asynchronous Polling TXxIF immediately following the TXREGx write
operations by configuring the following three control will return invalid results. The TXxIF bit is read-only, it
bits: cannot be set or cleared by software.
• TXEN = 1 The TXxIF interrupt can be enabled by setting the
• SYNC = 0 TXxIE interrupt enable bit of the PIE1/PIE3 register.
• SPEN = 1 However, the TXxIF flag bit will be set whenever the
TXREGx is empty, regardless of the state of TXxIE
All other EUSART control bits are assumed to be in
enable bit.
their default state.
To use interrupts when transmitting data, set the TXxIE
Setting the TXEN bit of the TXSTAx register enables the
bit only when there is more data to send. Clear the
transmitter circuitry of the EUSART. Clearing the SYNC
TXxIE interrupt enable bit upon writing the last
bit of the TXSTAx register configures the EUSART for
character of the transmission to the TXREGx.
asynchronous operation. Setting the SPEN bit of the
RCSTAx register enables the EUSART and
automatically configures the TXx/CKx I/O pin as an
output. If the TXx/CKx pin is shared with an analog
peripheral the analog I/O function must be disabled by
clearing the corresponding ANSEL bit.
Note: The TXxIF transmitter interrupt flag is set

when the TXEN enable bit is set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.1.1.5 TSR Status 16.1.1.7 Asynchronous Transmission Set-up:
The TRMT bit of the TXSTAx register indicates the 1. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair
status of the TSR register. This is a read-only bit. The and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the
TRMT bit is set when the TSR register is empty and is desired baud rate (see Section 16.3 “EUSART
cleared when a character is transferred to the TSR Baud Rate Generator (BRG)”).
register from the TXREGx. The TRMT bit remains clear 2. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to
until all bits have been shifted out of the TSR register. ‘1’.
No interrupt logic is tied to this bit, so the user needs to 3. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing
poll this bit to determine the TSR status. the SYNC bit and setting the SPEN bit.
Note: The TSR register is not mapped in data 4. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 con-
memory, so it is not available to the user. trol bit. A set ninth data bit will indicate that the 8
Least Significant data bits are an address when
16.1.1.6 Transmitting 9-Bit Characters the receiver is set for address detection.
The EUSART supports 9-bit character transmissions. 5. Set the CKTXP control bit if inverted transmit
When the TX9 bit of the TXSTAx register is set the data polarity is desired.
EUSART will shift 9 bits out for each character transmit- 6. Enable the transmission by setting the TXEN
ted. The TX9D bit of the TXSTAx register is the ninth, control bit. This will cause the TXxIF interrupt bit
and Most Significant, data bit. When transmitting 9-bit to be set.
data, the TX9D data bit must be written before writing 7. If interrupts are desired, set the TXxIE interrupt
the 8 Least Significant bits into the TXREGx. All nine enable bit. An interrupt will occur immediately
bits of data will be transferred to the TSR shift register provided that the GIE/GIEH and PEIE/GIEL bits
immediately after the TXREGx is written. of the INTCON register are also set.
A special 9-bit Address mode is available for use with 8. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit
multiple receivers. See Section 16.1.2.8 “Address should be loaded into the TX9D data bit.
Detection” for more information on the Address mode. 9. Load 8-bit data into the TXREGx register. This
will start the transmission.
FIGURE 16-3: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION
Write to TXREGx
Word 1
BRG Output
(Shift Clock)
TXx/CKx pin
Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit
Word 1
TXxIF bit
(Transmit Buffer 1 TCY
Reg. Empty Flag)
Word 1
TRMT bit
Transmit Shift Reg
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 16-4: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (BACK-TO-BACK)
Write to TXREGx
Word 1 Word 2
BRG Output
(Shift Clock)
TXx/CKx pin Start bit Start bit

bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit bit 0
TXxIF bit 1 TCY Word 1 Word 2
(Interrupt Reg. Flag)
1 TCY
TRMT bit Word 1 Word 2
(Transmit Shift Transmit Shift Reg
Reg. Empty Flag) Transmit Shift Reg
Note: This timing diagram shows two consecutive transmissions.
TABLE 16-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION

Reset
Values
on
Page
SPBRG1 EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, Low Byte —
SPBRGH1 EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator, High Byte —
TXREG1 EUSART1 Transmit Register —
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for asynchronous transmission.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.1.2 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS 16.1.2.2 Receiving Data
RECEIVER The receiver data recovery circuit initiates character
The Asynchronous mode would typically be used in reception on the falling edge of the first bit. The first bit,
RS-232 systems. The receiver block diagram is shown also known as the Start bit, is always a zero. The data
in Figure 16-2. The data is received on the RXx/DTx recovery circuit counts one-half bit time to the center of
pin and drives the data recovery block. The data the Start bit and verifies that the bit is still a zero. If it is
recovery block is actually a high-speed shifter not a zero then the data recovery circuit aborts
operating at 16 times the baud rate, whereas the serial character reception, without generating an error, and
Receive Shift Register (RSR) operates at the bit rate. resumes looking for the falling edge of the Start bit. If
When all 8 or 9 bits of the character have been shifted the Start bit zero verification succeeds then the data
in, they are immediately transferred to a two character recovery circuit counts a full bit time to the center of the
First-In-First-Out (FIFO) memory. The FIFO buffering next bit. The bit is then sampled by a majority detect
allows reception of two complete characters and the circuit and the resulting ‘0’ or ‘1’ is shifted into the RSR.
start of a third character before software must start This repeats until all data bits have been sampled and
servicing the EUSART receiver. The FIFO and RSR shifted into the RSR. One final bit time is measured and
registers are not directly accessible by software. the level sampled. This is the Stop bit, which is always
Access to the received data is via the RCREGx a ‘1’. If the data recovery circuit samples a ‘0’ in the
register. Stop bit position then a framing error is set for this
character, otherwise the framing error is cleared for this
16.1.2.1 Enabling the Receiver character. See Section 16.1.2.5 “Receive Framing
The EUSART receiver is enabled for asynchronous Error” for more information on framing errors.
operation by configuring the following three control bits: Immediately after all data bits and the Stop bit have
• CREN = 1 been received, the character in the RSR is transferred
to the EUSART receive FIFO and the RCxIF interrupt
• SYNC = 0
flag bit of the PIR1/PIR3 register is set. The top charac-
• SPEN = 1 ter in the FIFO is transferred out of the FIFO by reading
All other EUSART control bits are assumed to be in the RCREGx register.
their default state.
Note: If the receive FIFO is overrun, no additional
Setting the CREN bit of the RCSTAx register enables characters will be received until the overrun
the receiver circuitry of the EUSART. Clearing the condition is cleared. See Section 16.1.2.6
SYNC bit of the TXSTAx register configures the “Receive Overrun Error” for more
EUSART for asynchronous operation. Setting the information on overrun errors.
SPEN bit of the RCSTAx register enables the
EUSART. The RXx/DTx I/O pin must be configured as 16.1.2.3 Receive Data Polarity
an input by setting the corresponding TRIS control bit. The polarity of the receive data can be controlled with
If the RXx/DTx pin is shared with an analog peripheral the DTRXP bit of the BAUDCONx register. The default
the analog I/O function must be disabled by clearing state of this bit is ‘0’ which selects high true receive idle
the corresponding ANSEL bit. and data bits. Setting the DTRXP bit to ‘1’ will invert the
receive data resulting in low true idle and data bits. The
DTRXP bit controls receive data polarity only in Asyn-
chronous mode. In Synchronous mode the DTRXP bit
has a different function.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.1.2.4 Receive Interrupts 16.1.2.7 Receiving 9-bit Characters
The RCxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIR1/PIR3 register is The EUSART supports 9-bit character reception. When
set whenever the EUSART receiver is enabled and the RX9 bit of the RCSTAx register is set, the EUSART
there is an unread character in the receive FIFO. The will shift 9 bits into the RSR for each character
RCxIF interrupt flag bit is read-only, it cannot be set or received. The RX9D bit of the RCSTAx register is the
cleared by software. ninth and Most Significant data bit of the top unread
RCxIF interrupts are enabled by setting the following character in the receive FIFO. When reading 9-bit data
bits: from the receive FIFO buffer, the RX9D data bit must
be read before reading the 8 Least Significant bits from
• RCxIE interrupt enable bit of the PIE1/PIE3 the RCREGx.
register
• PEIE/GIEL peripheral interrupt enable bit of the 16.1.2.8 Address Detection
INTCON register A special Address Detection mode is available for use
• GIE/GIEH global interrupt enable bit of the when multiple receivers share the same transmission
INTCON register line, such as in RS-485 systems. Address detection is
The RCxIF interrupt flag bit will be set when there is an enabled by setting the ADDEN bit of the RCSTAx
unread character in the FIFO, regardless of the state of register.
interrupt enable bits. Address detection requires 9-bit character reception.
When address detection is enabled, only characters
16.1.2.5 Receive Framing Error with the ninth data bit set will be transferred to the
Each character in the receive FIFO buffer has a receive FIFO buffer, thereby setting the RCxIF interrupt
corresponding framing error Status bit. A framing error bit. All other characters will be ignored.
indicates that a Stop bit was not seen at the expected Upon receiving an address character, user software
time. The framing error status is accessed via the determines if the address matches its own. Upon
FERR bit of the RCSTAx register. The FERR bit address match, user software must disable address
represents the status of the top unread character in the detection by clearing the ADDEN bit before the next
receive FIFO. Therefore, the FERR bit must be read Stop bit occurs. When user software detects the end of
before reading the RCREG.x the message, determined by the message protocol
The FERR bit is read-only and only applies to the top used, software places the receiver back into the
unread character in the receive FIFO. A framing error Address Detection mode by setting the ADDEN bit.
(FERR = 1) does not preclude reception of additional
characters. It is not necessary to clear the FERR bit.
Reading the next character from the FIFO buffer will
advance the FIFO to the next character and the next
corresponding framing error.
The FERR bit can be forced clear by clearing the SPEN
bit of the RCSTAx register which resets the EUSART.
Clearing the CREN bit of the RCSTAx register does not
affect the FERR bit. A framing error by itself does not
generate an interrupt.
Note: If all receive characters in the receive
FIFO have framing errors, repeated reads
of the RCREGx will not clear the FERR bit.
16.1.2.6 Receive Overrun Error

The receive FIFO buffer can hold two characters. An
overrun error will be generated if a third character, in its
entirety, is received before the FIFO is accessed. When
this happens the OERR bit of the RCSTAx register is
set. The characters already in the FIFO buffer can be
read but no additional characters will be received until
the error is cleared. The error must be cleared by either
clearing the CREN bit of the RCSTAx register or by
resetting the EUSART by clearing the SPEN bit of the
RCSTAx register.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.1.2.9 Asynchronous Reception Set-up: 16.1.2.10 9-bit Address Detection Mode Set-up
1. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair This mode would typically be used in RS-485 systems.
and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the To set up an Asynchronous Reception with Address
desired baud rate (see Section 16.3 “EUSART Detect Enable:
Baud Rate Generator (BRG)”). 1. Initialize the SPBRGHx, SPBRGx register pair
2. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the
‘1’. desired baud rate (see Section 16.3 “EUSART
3. Enable the serial port by setting the SPEN bit Baud Rate Generator (BRG)”).
and the RXx/DTx pin TRIS bit. The SYNC bit 2. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to
must be clear for asynchronous operation. ‘1’.
4. If interrupts are desired, set the RCxIE interrupt 3. Enable the serial port by setting the SPEN bit.
enable bit and set the GIE/GIEH and PEIE/GIEL The SYNC bit must be clear for asynchronous
bits of the INTCON register. operation.
5. If 9-bit reception is desired, set the RX9 bit. 4. If interrupts are desired, set the RCxIE interrupt
6. Set the DTRXP if inverted receive polarity is enable bit and set the GIE/GIEH and PEIE/GIEL
desired. bits of the INTCON register.
7. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. 5. Enable 9-bit reception by setting the RX9 bit.
8. The RCxIF interrupt flag bit will be set when a 6. Enable address detection by setting the ADDEN
character is transferred from the RSR to the bit.
receive buffer. An interrupt will be generated if 7. Set the DTRXP if inverted receive polarity is
the RCxIE interrupt enable bit was also set. desired.
9. Read the RCSTAx register to get the error flags 8. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit.
and, if 9-bit data reception is enabled, the ninth 9. The RCxIF interrupt flag bit will be set when a
data bit. character with the ninth bit set is transferred
10. Get the received 8 Least Significant data bits from the RSR to the receive buffer. An interrupt
from the receive buffer by reading the RCREGx will be generated if the RCxIE interrupt enable
register. bit was also set.
11. If an overrun occurred, clear the OERR flag by 10. Read the RCSTAx register to get the error flags.
clearing the CREN receiver enable bit. The ninth data bit will always be set.
11. Get the received 8 Least Significant data bits
from the receive buffer by reading the RCREGx
register. Software determines if this is the
device’s address.
12. If an overrun occurred, clear the OERR flag by
clearing the CREN receiver enable bit.
13. If the device has been addressed, clear the
ADDEN bit to allow all received data into the
receive buffer and generate interrupts.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 16-5: ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION
Start Start Start
RXx/DTx pin bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit bit 0 bit 7/8 Stop bit bit 7/8 Stop
bit bit bit
Rcv Shift
Reg
Rcv Buffer Reg
Word 1 Word 2
RCREGx RCREGx
RCIDL
Read Rcv
Buffer Reg
RCREGx
RCxIF
(Interrupt Flag)
OERR bit
CREN
Note: This timing diagram shows three words appearing on the RXx/DTx input. The RCREGx (receive buffer) is read after the third
word, causing the OERR (overrun) bit to be set.
TABLE 16-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION

Register
on Page
RCREG1 EUSART1 Receive Register —
TRISB(2) TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 154
(1)
TRISD TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 154
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for asynchronous reception.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.2 Clock Accuracy with The first (preferred) method uses the OSCTUNE
Asynchronous Operation register to adjust the HFINTOSC output. Adjusting the
value in the OSCTUNE register allows for fine resolution
The factory calibrates the internal oscillator block changes to the system clock source. See Section 2.5
output (HFINTOSC). However, the HFINTOSC “Internal Clock Modes” for more information.
frequency may drift as VDD or temperature changes,
The other method adjusts the value in the Baud Rate
and this directly affects the asynchronous baud rate.
Generator. This can be done automatically with the
Two methods may be used to adjust the baud rate
Auto-Baud Detect feature (see Section 16.3.1 “Auto-
clock, but both require a reference clock source of
Baud Detect”). There may not be fine enough
some kind.
resolution when adjusting the Baud Rate Generator to
compensate for a gradual change in the peripheral
clock frequency.
REGISTER 16-1: TXSTAX: TRANSMIT STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-1 R/W-0
CSRC TX9 TXEN(1) SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CSRC: Clock Source Select bit

Asynchronous mode:
Don’t care
Synchronous mode:
1 = Master mode (clock generated internally from BRG)
0 = Slave mode (clock from external source)
bit 6 TX9: 9-bit Transmit Enable bit
1 = Selects 9-bit transmission
0 = Selects 8-bit transmission
bit 5 TXEN: Transmit Enable bit(1)
1 = Transmit enabled
0 = Transmit disabled
bit 4 SYNC: EUSART Mode Select bit
1 = Synchronous mode
0 = Asynchronous mode
bit 3 SENDB: Send Break Character bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Send Sync Break on next transmission (cleared by hardware upon completion)
0 = Sync Break transmission completed
Synchronous mode:
Don’t care
bit 2 BRGH: High Baud Rate Select bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = High speed
0 = Low speed
Synchronous mode:
Unused in this mode
bit 1 TRMT: Transmit Shift Register Status bit
1 = TSR empty
0 = TSR full
bit 0 TX9D: Ninth bit of Transmit Data
Can be address/data bit or a parity bit.
Note 1: SREN/CREN overrides TXEN in Sync mode.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 16-2: RCSTAX: RECEIVE STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R-x
SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SPEN: Serial Port Enable bit

1 = Serial port enabled (configures RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pins as serial port pins)
0 = Serial port disabled (held in Reset)
bit 6 RX9: 9-bit Receive Enable bit
1 = Selects 9-bit reception
0 = Selects 8-bit reception
bit 5 SREN: Single Receive Enable bit
Asynchronous mode:
Don’t care
Synchronous mode – Master:
1 = Enables single receive
0 = Disables single receive
This bit is cleared after reception is complete.
Synchronous mode – Slave
Don’t care
bit 4 CREN: Continuous Receive Enable bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Enables receiver
0 = Disables receiver
Synchronous mode:
1 = Enables continuous receive until enable bit CREN is cleared (CREN overrides SREN)
0 = Disables continuous receive
bit 3 ADDEN: Address Detect Enable bit
Asynchronous mode 9-bit (RX9 = 1):
1 = Enables address detection, enable interrupt and load the receive buffer when RSR<8> is set
0 = Disables address detection, all bytes are received and ninth bit can be used as parity bit
Asynchronous mode 8-bit (RX9 = 0):
Don’t care
bit 2 FERR: Framing Error bit
1 = Framing error (can be updated by reading RCREGx register and receive next valid byte)
0 = No framing error
bit 1 OERR: Overrun Error bit
1 = Overrun error (can be cleared by clearing bit CREN)
0 = No overrun error
bit 0 RX9D: Ninth bit of Received Data
This can be address/data bit or a parity bit and must be calculated by user firmware.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 16-3: BAUDCONX: BAUD RATE CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 ABDOVF: Auto-Baud Detect Overflow bit

Asynchronous mode:
1 = Auto-baud timer overflowed
0 = Auto-baud timer did not overflow
Synchronous mode:
Don’t care
bit 6 RCIDL: Receive Idle Flag bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Receiver is Idle
0 = Start bit has been detected and the receiver is active
Synchronous mode:
Don’t care
bit 5 DTRXP: Data/Receive Polarity Select bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Receive data (RXx) is inverted (active-low)
0 = Receive data (RXx) is not inverted (active-high)
Synchronous mode:
1 = Data (DTx) is inverted (active-low)
0 = Data (DTx) is not inverted (active-high)
bit 4 CKTXP: Clock/Transmit Polarity Select bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Idle state for transmit (TXx) is low
0 = Idle state for transmit (TXx) is high
Synchronous mode:
1 = Data changes on the falling edge of the clock and is sampled on the rising edge of the clock
0 = Data changes on the rising edge of the clock and is sampled on the falling edge of the clock
bit 3 BRG16: 16-bit Baud Rate Generator bit
1 = 16-bit Baud Rate Generator is used (SPBRGHx:SPBRGx)
0 = 8-bit Baud Rate Generator is used (SPBRGx)
bit 1 WUE: Wake-up Enable bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Receiver is waiting for a falling edge. No character will be received but RCxIF will be set on the falling
edge. WUE will automatically clear on the rising edge.
0 = Receiver is operating normally
Synchronous mode:
Don’t care
bit 0 ABDEN: Auto-Baud Detect Enable bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Auto-Baud Detect mode is enabled (clears when auto-baud is complete)
0 = Auto-Baud Detect mode is disabled
Synchronous mode:
Don’t care

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.3 EUSART Baud Rate Generator If the system clock is changed during an active receive
(BRG) operation, a receive error or data loss may result. To
avoid this problem, check the status of the RCIDL bit to
The Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is an 8-bit or 16-bit make sure that the receive operation is Idle before
timer that is dedicated to the support of both the changing the system clock.
asynchronous and synchronous EUSART operation.
By default, the BRG operates in 8-bit mode. Setting the EXAMPLE 16-1: CALCULATING BAUD
BRG16 bit of the BAUDCONx register selects 16-bit RATE ERROR
mode.
For a device with FOSC of 16 MHz, desired baud rate
The SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair determines the of 9600, Asynchronous mode, 8-bit BRG:
period of the free running baud rate timer. In
F OS C
Asynchronous mode the multiplier of the baud rate Desired Baud Rate = --------------------------------------------------------------------------
64  [SPBRGHx:SPBRGx] + 1 
period is determined by both the BRGH bit of the
TXSTAx register and the BRG16 bit of the BAUDCONx Solving for SPBRGHx:SPBRGx:
register. In Synchronous mode, the BRGH bit is ignored.
FOSC
---------------------------------------------
Table contains the formulas for determining the baud Desired Baud Rate
X = --------------------------------------------- – 1
rate. Example 16-1 provides a sample calculation for 64
determining the baud rate and baud rate error. 16000000
------------------------
Typical baud rates and error values for various 9600
= ------------------------ – 1
Asynchronous modes have been computed for your 64
convenience and are shown in Table 16-5. It may be =  25.042  = 25
advantageous to use the high baud rate (BRGH = 1),
or the 16-bit BRG (BRG16 = 1) to reduce the baud rate 16000000
Calculated Baud Rate = ---------------------------
64  25 + 1 
error. The 16-bit BRG mode is used to achieve slow
baud rates for fast oscillator frequencies. = 9615
Writing a new value to the SPBRGHx, SPBRGx
Calc. Baud Rate – Desired Baud Rate
register pair causes the BRG timer to be reset (or Error = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Desired Baud Rate
cleared). This ensures that the BRG does not wait for a
timer overflow before outputting the new baud rate.  9615 – 9600 
= ---------------------------------- = 0.16%
9600
TABLE 16-3: BAUD RATE FORMULAS

Configuration Bits
BRG/EUSART Mode Baud Rate Formula
SYNC BRG16 BRGH
0 0 0 8-bit/Asynchronous FOSC/[64 (n+1)]

0 0 1 8-bit/Asynchronous
FOSC/[16 (n+1)]
1 0 x 8-bit/Synchronous FOSC/[4 (n+1)]
1 1 x 16-bit/Synchronous
Legend: x = Don’t care, n = value of SPBRGHx, SPBRGx register pair.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 16-4: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH BAUD RATE GENERATOR

Reset
on Page
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by the BRG.
TABLE 16-5: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES

SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0
FOSC = 64.000 MHz FOSC = 18.432 MHz FOSC = 16.000 MHz FOSC = 11.0592 MHz
BAUD
RATE SPBRxG SPBRGx SPBRGx SPBRGx
Actual % Actual % Actual % Actual %
value value value value
Rate Error Rate Error Rate Error Rate Error
(decimal) (decimal) (decimal) (decimal)
300 — — — — — — — — — — — —
1200 — — — 1200 0.00 239 1202 0.16 207 1200 0.00 143
2400 — — — 2400 0.00 119 2404 0.16 103 2400 0.00 71
9600 9615 0.16 103 9600 0.00 29 9615 0.16 25 9600 0.00 17
10417 10417 0.00 95 10286 -1.26 27 10417 0.00 23 10165 -2.42 16
19.2k 19.23k 0.16 51 19.20k 0.00 14 19.23k 0.16 12 19.20k 0.00 8
57.6k 58.82k 2.12 16 57.60k 0.00 7 — — — 57.60k 0.00 2
115.2k 111.11k -3.55 8 — — — — — — — — —
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0
BAUD FOSC = 8.000 MHz FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 3.6864 MHz FOSC = 1.000 MHz
RATE SPBRGx SPBRGx SPBRGx SPBRGx
300 — — — 300 0.16 207 300 0.00 191 300 0.16 51
1200 1202 0.16 103 1202 0.16 51 1200 0.00 47 1202 0.16 12
2400 2404 0.16 51 2404 0.16 25 2400 0.00 23 — — —
9600 9615 0.16 12 — — — 9600 0.00 5 — — —
10417 10417 0.00 11 10417 0.00 5 — — — — — —
19.2k — — — — — — 19.20k 0.00 2 — — —
57.6k — — — — — — 57.60k 0.00 0 — — —
115.2k — — — — — — — — — — — —

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 16-5: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED)
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0
RATE SPBRGx SPBRGx SPBRGx SPBRGx
300 — — — — — — — — — — — —
1200 — — — — — — — — — — — —
2400 — — — — — — — — — — — —
9600 — — — 9600 0.00 119 9615 0.16 103 9600 0.00 71
10417 — — — 10378 -0.37 110 10417 0.00 95 10473 0.53 65
19.2k 19.23k 0.16 207 19.20k 0.00 59 19.23k 0.16 51 19.20k 0.00 35
57.6k 57.97k 0.64 68 57.60k 0.00 19 58.82k 2.12 16 57.60k 0.00 11
115.2k 114.29k -0.79 34 115.2k 0.00 9 111.1k -3.55 8 115.2k 0.00 5
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0
RATE SPBRGx SPBRGx SxBRGx SPBRGx
300 — — — — — — — — — 300 0.16 207
1200 — — — 1202 0.16 207 1200 0.00 191 1202 0.16 51
2400 2404 0.16 207 2404 0.16 103 2400 0.00 95 2404 0.16 25
9600 9615 0.16 51 9615 0.16 25 9600 0.00 23 — — —
10417 10417 0.00 47 10417 0.00 23 10473 0.53 21 10417 0.00 5
19.2k 19231 0.16 25 19.23k 0.16 12 19.2k 0.00 11 — — —
57.6k 55556 -3.55 8 — — — 57.60k 0.00 3 — — —
115.2k — — — — — — 115.2k 0.00 1 — — —
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1
RATE SPBRGHx: SPBRGHx: SPBRGHx SPBRGHx:
SPBRGx SPBRGx :SPBRGx SPBRGx
300 300.0 0.00 13332 300.0 0.00 3839 300.03 0.01 3332 300.0 0.00 2303
1200 1200.1 0.01 3332 1200 0.00 959 1200.5 0.04 832 1200 0.00 575
2400 2399 -0.02 1666 2400 0.00 479 2398 -0.08 416 2400 0.00 287
9600 9592 -0.08 416 9600 0.00 119 9615 0.16 103 9600 0.00 71
10417 10417 0.00 383 10378 -0.37 110 10417 0.00 95 10473 0.53 65
19.2k 19.23k 0.16 207 19.20k 0.00 59 19.23k 0.16 51 19.20k 0.00 35
57.6k 57.97k 0.64 68 57.60k 0.00 19 58.82k 2.12 16 57.60k 0.00 11
115.2k 114.29k -0.79 34 115.2k 0.00 9 111.11k -3.55 8 115.2k 0.00 5

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 16-5: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED)
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1
300 299.9 -0.02 1666 300.1 0.04 832 300.0 0.00 767 300.5 0.16 207
1200 1199 -0.08 416 1202 0.16 207 1200 0.00 191 1202 0.16 51
2400 2404 0.16 207 2404 0.16 103 2400 0.00 95 2404 0.16 25
9600 9615 0.16 51 9615 0.16 25 9600 0.00 23 — — —
10417 10417 0.00 47 10417 0.00 23 10473 0.53 21 10417 0.00 5
19.2k 19.23k 0.16 25 19.23k 0.16 12 19.20k 0.00 11 — — —
57.6k 55556 -3.55 8 — — — 57.60k 0.00 3 — — —
115.2k — — — — — — 115.2k 0.00 1 — — —
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1
300 300 0.00 53332 300.0 0.00 15359 300.0 0.00 13332 300.0 0.00 9215
1200 1200 0.00 13332 1200 0.00 3839 1200.1 0.01 3332 1200 0.00 2303
2400 2400 0.00 6666 2400 0.00 1919 2399.5 -0.02 1666 2400 0.00 1151
9600 9598.1 -0.02 1666 9600 0.00 479 9592 -0.08 416 9600 0.00 287
10417 10417 0.00 1535 10425 0.08 441 10417 0.00 383 10433 0.16 264
19.2k 19.21k 0.04 832 19.20k 0.00 239 19.23k 0.16 207 19.20k 0.00 143
57.6k 57.55k -0.08 277 57.60k 0.00 79 57.97k 0.64 68 57.60k 0.00 47
115.2k 115.11k -0.08 138 115.2k 0.00 39 114.29k -0.79 34 115.2k 0.00 23
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1
300 300.0 0.00 6666 300.0 0.01 3332 300.0 0.00 3071 300.1 0.04 832
1200 1200 -0.02 1666 1200 0.04 832 1200 0.00 767 1202 0.16 207
2400 2401 0.04 832 2398 0.08 416 2400 0.00 383 2404 0.16 103
9600 9615 0.16 207 9615 0.16 103 9600 0.00 95 9615 0.16 25
10417 10417 0.00 191 10417 0.00 95 10473 0.53 87 10417 0.00 23
19.2k 19.23k 0.16 103 19.23k 0.16 51 19.20k 0.00 47 19.23k 0.16 12
57.6k 57.14k -0.79 34 58.82k 2.12 16 57.60k 0.00 15 — — —
115.2k 117.6k 2.12 16 111.1k -3.55 8 115.2k 0.00 7 — — —

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.3.1 AUTO-BAUD DETECT and SPBRGx registers are clocked at 1/8th the BRG
base clock rate. The resulting byte measurement is the
The EUSART module supports automatic detection
average bit time when clocked at full speed.
and calibration of the baud rate.
In the Auto-Baud Detect (ABD) mode, the clock to the Note 1: If the WUE bit is set with the ABDEN bit,
BRG is reversed. Rather than the BRG clocking the auto-baud detection will occur on the byte
incoming RXx signal, the RXx signal is timing the BRG. following the Break character (see
The Baud Rate Generator is used to time the period of Section 16.3.3 “Auto-Wake-up on
a received 55h (ASCII “U”) which is the Sync character Break”).
for the LIN bus. The unique feature of this character is 2: It is up to the user to determine that the
that it has five rising edges including the Stop bit edge. incoming character baud rate is within the
Setting the ABDEN bit of the BAUDCONx register range of the selected BRG clock source.
starts the auto-baud calibration sequence Some combinations of oscillator frequency
(Figure 16.3.2). While the ABD sequence takes place, and EUSART baud rates are not possible.
the EUSART state machine is held in Idle. On the first 3: During the auto-baud process, the auto-
rising edge of the receive line, after the Start bit, the baud counter starts counting at 1. Upon
SPBRGx begins counting up using the BRG counter completion of the auto-baud sequence, to
clock as shown in Table 16-6. The fifth rising edge will achieve maximum accuracy, subtract 1
occur on the RXx/DTx pin at the end of the eighth bit from the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair.
period. At that time, an accumulated value totaling the
proper BRG period is left in the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx
register pair, the ABDEN bit is automatically cleared, TABLE 16-6: BRG COUNTER CLOCK
and the RCxIF interrupt flag is set. A read operation on RATES
the RCREGx needs to be performed to clear the RCxIF BRG Base BRG ABD
interrupt. RCREGx content should be discarded. When BRG16 BRGH
Clock Clock
calibrating for modes that do not use the SPBRGHx
register the user can verify that the SPBRGx register 0 0 FOSC/64 FOSC/512
did not overflow by checking for 00h in the SPBRGHx 0 1 FOSC/16 FOSC/128
register.
1 0 FOSC/16 FOSC/128
The BRG auto-baud clock is determined by the BRG16
and BRGH bits as shown in Table 16-6. During ABD, 1 1 FOSC/4 FOSC/32
both the SPBRGHx and SPBRGx registers are used as Note: During the ABD sequence, SPBRGx and
a 16-bit counter, independent of the BRG16 bit setting. SPBRGHx registers are both used as a
While calibrating the baud rate period, the SPBRGHx 16-bit counter, independent of BRG16
setting.
FIGURE 16-6: AUTOMATIC BAUD RATE CALIBRATION
BRG Value XXXXh 0000h 001Ch
Edge #1 Edge #2 Edge #3 Edge #4 Edge #5

RXx/DTx pin Start bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 Stop bit
BRG Clock
Set by User Auto Cleared

ABDEN bit
RCIDL
RCxIF bit
(Interrupt)
Read
RCREGx
SPBRGx XXh 1Ch
SPBRGHx XXh 00h
Note 1: The ABD sequence requires the EUSART module to be configured in Asynchronous mode.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.3.2 AUTO-BAUD OVERFLOW 16.3.3.1 Special Considerations
During the course of automatic baud detection, the Break Character
ABDOVF bit of the BAUDCONx register will be set if the To avoid character errors or character fragments during
baud rate counter overflows before the fifth rising edge a wake-up event, the wake-up character must be all
is detected on the RX pin. The ABDOVF bit indicates zeros.
that the counter has exceeded the maximum count that
can fit in the 16 bits of the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register When the wake-up is enabled the function works
pair. After the ABDOVF has been set, the counter con- independent of the low time on the data stream. If the
tinues to count until the fifth rising edge is detected on WUE bit is set and a valid non-zero character is
the RXx/DTx pin. Upon detecting the fifth RXx/DTx received, the low time from the Start bit to the first rising
edge, the hardware will set the RCxIF interrupt flag and edge will be interpreted as the wake-up event. The
clear the ABDEN bit of the BAUDCONx register. The remaining bits in the character will be received as a
RCxIF flag can be subsequently cleared by reading the fragmented character and subsequent characters can
RCREGx. The ABDOVF flag can be cleared by soft- result in framing or overrun errors.
ware directly. Therefore, the initial character in the transmission must
To terminate the auto-baud process before the RCxIF be all ‘0’s. This must be 10 or more bit times, 13-bit
flag is set, clear the ABDEN bit then clear the ABDOVF times recommended for LIN bus, or any number of bit
bit. The ABDOVF bit will remain set if the ABDEN bit is times for standard RS-232 devices.
not cleared first. Oscillator Startup Time
Oscillator start-up time must be considered, especially
16.3.3 AUTO-WAKE-UP ON BREAK
in applications using oscillators with longer start-up
During Sleep mode, all clocks to the EUSART are intervals (i.e., LP, XT or HS/PLL mode). The Sync
suspended. Because of this, the Baud Rate Generator Break (or wake-up signal) character must be of
is inactive and a proper character reception cannot be sufficient length, and be followed by a sufficient
performed. The Auto-Wake-up feature allows the interval, to allow enough time for the selected oscillator
controller to wake-up due to activity on the RXx/DTx to start and provide proper initialization of the EUSART.
line. This feature is available only in Asynchronous
WUE Bit
mode.
The wake-up event causes a receive interrupt by
The Auto-Wake-up feature is enabled by setting the
setting the RCxIF bit. The WUE bit is cleared by
WUE bit of the BAUDCONx register. Once set, the
hardware by a rising edge on RXx/DTx. The interrupt
normal receive sequence on RXx/DTx is disabled, and
condition is then cleared by software by reading the
the EUSART remains in an Idle state, monitoring for a
RCREGx register and discarding its contents.
wake-up event independent of the CPU mode. A wake-
up event consists of a high-to-low transition on the To ensure that no actual data is lost, check the RCIDL
RXx/DTx line. (This coincides with the start of a Sync bit to verify that a receive operation is not in process
Break or a wake-up signal character for the LIN before setting the WUE bit. If a receive operation is not
protocol.) occurring, the WUE bit may then be set just prior to
entering the Sleep mode.
The EUSART module generates an RCxIF interrupt
coincident with the wake-up event. The interrupt is
generated synchronously to the Q clocks in normal CPU
operating modes (Figure 16-7), and asynchronously if
the device is in Sleep mode (Figure 16-8). The interrupt
condition is cleared by reading the RCREGx register.
The WUE bit is automatically cleared by the low-to-high
transition on the RXx line at the end of the Break. This
signals to the user that the Break event is over. At this
point, the EUSART module is in Idle mode waiting to
receive the next character.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 16-7: AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMING DURING NORMAL OPERATION
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
OSC1
Bit set by user Auto Cleared
WUE bit
RXx/DTx Line
RCxIF
Cleared due to User Read of RCREGx
Note 1: The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set.
FIGURE 16-8: AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING SLEEP
Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4

OSC1
Bit Set by User Auto Cleared
WUE bit
RXx/DTx Line Note 1

RCxIF
Cleared due to User Read of RCREGx
Sleep Command Executed Sleep Ends
Note 1: If the wake-up event requires long oscillator warm-up time, the automatic clearing of the WUE bit can occur while the stposc signal is
still active. This sequence should not depend on the presence of Q clocks.
2: The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.3.4 BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE When the TXREGx becomes empty, as indicated by
the TXxIF, the next data byte can be written to
The EUSART module has the capability of sending the
TXREGx.
special Break character sequences that are required by
the LIN bus standard. A Break character consists of a
16.3.5 RECEIVING A BREAK CHARACTER
Start bit, followed by 12 ‘0’ bits and a Stop bit.
The Enhanced EUSART module can receive a Break
To send a Break character, set the SENDB and TXEN
character in two ways.
bits of the TXSTAx register. The Break character trans-
mission is then initiated by a write to the TXREGx. The The first method to detect a Break character uses the
value of data written to TXREGx will be ignored and all FERR bit of the RCSTAx register and the Received
‘0’s will be transmitted. data as indicated by RCREGx. The Baud Rate
Generator is assumed to have been initialized to the
The SENDB bit is automatically reset by hardware after
expected baud rate.
the corresponding Stop bit is sent. This allows the user
to preload the transmit FIFO with the next transmit byte A Break character has been received when;
following the Break character (typically, the Sync • RCxIF bit is set
character in the LIN specification). • FERR bit is set
The TRMT bit of the TXSTAx register indicates when the • RCREGx = 00h
transmit operation is active or Idle, just as it does during
The second method uses the Auto-Wake-up feature
normal transmission. See Figure 16-9 for the timing of
described in Section 16.3.3 “Auto-Wake-up on
the Break character sequence.
Break”. By enabling this feature, the EUSART will
16.3.4.1 Break and Sync Transmit Sequence sample the next two transitions on RXx/DTx, cause an
RCxIF interrupt, and receive the next data byte fol-
The following sequence will start a message frame lowed by another interrupt.
header made up of a Break, followed by an auto-baud
Sync byte. This sequence is typical of a LIN bus Note that following a Break character, the user will
master. typically want to enable the Auto-Baud Detect feature.
For both methods, the user can set the ABDEN bit of
1. Configure the EUSART for the desired mode. the BAUDCONx register before placing the EUSART in
2. Set the TXEN and SENDB bits to enable the Sleep mode.
Break sequence.
3. Load the TXREGx with a dummy character to
initiate transmission (the value is ignored).
4. Write ‘55h’ to TXREGx to load the Sync charac-
ter into the transmit FIFO buffer.
5. After the Break has been sent, the SENDB bit is
reset by hardware and the Sync character is
then transmitted.
FIGURE 16-9: SEND BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE
Write to TXREGx
Dummy Write
BRG Output
(Shift Clock)
TXx/CKx (pin) Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 11 Stop bit

Break
TXxIF bit
(Transmit
interrupt Flag)
TRMT bit
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)
SENDB Sampled Here Auto Cleared
SENDB
(send Break
control bit)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.4 EUSART Synchronous Mode 16.4.1.2 Clock Polarity
Synchronous serial communications are typically used A clock polarity option is provided for Microwire
in systems with a single master and one or more compatibility. Clock polarity is selected with the CKTXP
slaves. The master device contains the necessary bit of the BAUDCONx register. Setting the CKTXP bit
circuitry for baud rate generation and supplies the clock sets the clock Idle state as high. When the CKTXP bit
for all devices in the system. Slave devices can take is set, the data changes on the falling edge of each
advantage of the master clock by eliminating the clock and is sampled on the rising edge of each clock.
internal clock generation circuitry. Clearing the CKTXP bit sets the Idle state as low. When
the CKTXP bit is cleared, the data changes on the
There are two signal lines in Synchronous mode: a rising edge of each clock and is sampled on the falling
bidirectional data line and a clock line. Slaves use the edge of each clock.
external clock supplied by the master to shift the serial
data into and out of their respective receive and 16.4.1.3 Synchronous Master Transmission
transmit shift registers. Since the data line is
Data is transferred out of the device on the RXx/DTx
bidirectional, synchronous operation is half-duplex
pin. The RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pin output drivers are
only. Half-duplex refers to the fact that master and
automatically enabled when the EUSART is configured
slave devices can receive and transmit data but not
for synchronous master transmit operation.
both simultaneously. The EUSART can operate as
either a master or slave device. A transmission is initiated by writing a character to the
TXREGx register. If the TSR still contains all or part of
Start and Stop bits are not used in synchronous
a previous character the new character data is held in
transmissions.
the TXREGx until the last bit of the previous character
16.4.1 SYNCHRONOUS MASTER MODE has been transmitted. If this is the first character, or the
previous character has been completely flushed from
The following bits are used to configure the EUSART the TSR, the data in the TXREGx is immediately trans-
for Synchronous Master operation: ferred to the TSR. The transmission of the character
• SYNC = 1 commences immediately following the transfer of the
• CSRC = 1 data to the TSR from the TXREGx.
• SREN = 0 (for transmit); SREN = 1 (for receive) Each data bit changes on the leading edge of the
• CREN = 0 (for transmit); CREN = 1 (for receive) master clock and remains valid until the subsequent
leading clock edge.
• SPEN = 1
Setting the SYNC bit of the TXSTAx register configures Note: The TSR register is not mapped in data
the device for synchronous operation. Setting the CSRC memory, so it is not available to the user.
bit of the TXSTAx register configures the device as a
master. Clearing the SREN and CREN bits of the 16.4.1.4 Data Polarity
RCSTAx register ensures that the device is in the The polarity of the transmit and receive data can be
Transmit mode, otherwise the device will be configured controlled with the DTRXP bit of the BAUDCONx
to receive. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCSTAx register register. The default state of this bit is ‘0’ which selects
enables the EUSART. If the RXx/DTx or TXx/CKx pins high true transmit and receive data. Setting the DTRXP
are shared with an analog peripheral the analog I/O bit to ‘1’ will invert the data resulting in low true transmit
functions must be disabled by clearing the corresponding and receive data.
ANSEL bits.
The TRIS bits corresponding to the RXx/DTx and
TXx/CKx pins should be set.
16.4.1.1 Master Clock

Synchronous data transfers use a separate clock line,
which is synchronous with the data. A device configured
as a master transmits the clock on the TXx/CKx line. The
TXx/CKx pin output driver is automatically enabled when
the EUSART is configured for synchronous transmit or
receive operation. Serial data bits change on the leading
edge to ensure they are valid at the trailing edge of each
clock. One clock cycle is generated for each data bit.
Only as many clock cycles are generated as there are
data bits.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.4.1.5 Synchronous Master Transmission 4. Disable Receive mode by clearing bits SREN
Set-up: and CREN.
1. Initialize the SPBRGHx, SPBRGx register pair 5. Enable Transmit mode by setting the TXEN bit.
and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the 6. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 bit.
desired baud rate (see Section 16.3 “EUSART 7. If interrupts are desired, set the TXxIE, GIE/
Baud Rate Generator (BRG)”). GIEH and PEIE/GIEL interrupt enable bits.
2. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to 8. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit
‘1’. should be loaded in the TX9D bit.
3. Enable the synchronous master serial port by 9. Start transmission by loading data to the
setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. Set the TXREGx register.
TRIS bits corresponding to the RXx/DTx and
TXx/CKx I/O pins.
FIGURE 16-10: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION

RXx/DTx
pin bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 7
Word 1 Word 2
TXx/CKx pin
(SCKP = 0)
TXx/CKx pin
(SCKP = 1)
Write to
TXREGx Reg Write Word 1 Write Word 2
TXxIF bit
(Interrupt Flag)
TRMT bit
‘1’ ‘1’
TXEN bit
Note: Sync Master mode, SPBRGx = 0, continuous transmission of two 8-bit words.
FIGURE 16-11: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (THROUGH TXEN)
RXx/DTx pin bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 6 bit 7
TXx/CKx pin
Write to
TXREGx reg
TXxIF bit
TRMT bit
TXEN bit

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 16-7: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION

Register
on Page
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for synchronous master transmission.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.4.1.6 Synchronous Master Reception If the overrun occurred when the CREN bit is set then
the error condition is cleared by either clearing the
Data is received at the RXx/DTx pin. The RXx/DTx pin
CREN bit of the RCSTAx register or by clearing the
output driver must be disabled by setting the
SPEN bit which resets the EUSART.
corresponding TRIS bits when the EUSART is
configured for synchronous master receive operation.
16.4.1.9 Receiving 9-bit Characters
In Synchronous mode, reception is enabled by setting
The EUSART supports 9-bit character reception. When
either the Single Receive Enable bit (SREN of the
the RX9 bit of the RCSTAx register is set the EUSART
RCSTAx register) or the Continuous Receive Enable
will shift 9-bits into the RSR for each character
bit (CREN of the RCSTAx register).
received. The RX9D bit of the RCSTAx register is the
When SREN is set and CREN is clear, only as many ninth, and Most Significant, data bit of the top unread
clock cycles are generated as there are data bits in a character in the receive FIFO. When reading 9-bit data
single character. The SREN bit is automatically cleared from the receive FIFO buffer, the RX9D data bit must
at the completion of one character. When CREN is set, be read before reading the 8 Least Significant bits from
clocks are continuously generated until CREN is the RCREGx.
cleared. If CREN is cleared in the middle of a character
the CK clock stops immediately and the partial charac- 16.4.1.10 Synchronous Master Reception Set-
ter is discarded. If SREN and CREN are both set, then up:
SREN is cleared at the completion of the first character
1. Initialize the SPBRGHx, SPBRGx register pair
and CREN takes precedence.
for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the
To initiate reception, set either SREN or CREN. Data is BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve
sampled at the RXx/DTx pin on the trailing edge of the the desired baud rate.
TXx/CKx clock pin and is shifted into the Receive Shift 2. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to
Register (RSR). When a complete character is ‘1’.
received into the RSR, the RCxIF bit is set and the
3. Enable the synchronous master serial port by
character is automatically transferred to the two
setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. Disable
character receive FIFO. The Least Significant eight bits
RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx output drivers by setting
of the top character in the receive FIFO are available in
the corresponding TRIS bits.
RCREGx. The RCxIF bit remains set as long as there
are un-read characters in the receive FIFO. 4. Ensure bits CREN and SREN are clear.
5. If using interrupts, set the GIE/GIEH and PEIE/
16.4.1.7 Slave Clock GIEL bits of the INTCON register and set
RCxIE.
Synchronous data transfers use a separate clock line,
which is synchronous with the data. A device configured 6. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit RX9.
as a slave receives the clock on the TXx/CKx line. The 7. Start reception by setting the SREN bit or for
TXx/CKx pin output driver must be disabled by setting continuous reception, set the CREN bit.
the associated TRIS bit when the device is configured 8. Interrupt flag bit RCxIF will be set when recep-
for synchronous slave transmit or receive operation. tion of a character is complete. An interrupt will
Serial data bits change on the leading edge to ensure be generated if the enable bit RCxIE was set.
they are valid at the trailing edge of each clock. One data 9. Read the RCSTAx register to get the ninth bit (if
bit is transferred for each clock cycle. Only as many enabled) and determine if any error occurred
clock cycles should be received as there are data bits. during reception.
10. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the
16.4.1.8 Receive Overrun Error
RCREGx register.
The receive FIFO buffer can hold two characters. An 11. If an overrun error occurs, clear the error by
overrun error will be generated if a third character, in its either clearing the CREN bit of the RCSTAx
entirety, is received before RCREGx is read to access register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets
the FIFO. When this happens the OERR bit of the the EUSART.
RCSTAx register is set. Previous data in the FIFO will
not be overwritten. The two characters in the FIFO
buffer can be read, however, no additional characters
will be received until the error is cleared. The OERR bit
can only be cleared by clearing the overrun condition.
If the overrun error occurred when the SREN bit is set
and CREN is clear then the error is cleared by reading
RCREGx.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 16-12: SYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION (MASTER MODE, SREN)
RXx/DTx
pin bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7
TXx/CKx pin
(SCKP = 0)
TXx/CKx pin
(SCKP = 1)
Write to
bit SREN
SREN bit
CREN bit ‘0’ ‘0’
RCxIF bit
(Interrupt)
Read
RCREGx
Note: Timing diagram demonstrates Sync Master mode with bit SREN = 1 and bit BRGH = 0.
TABLE 16-8: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION

Register
on Page
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for synchronous master reception.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.4.2 SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE MODE If two words are written to the TXREGx and then the
SLEEP instruction is executed, the following will occur:
The following bits are used to configure the EUSART
for Synchronous slave operation: 1. The first character will immediately transfer to
the TSR register and transmit.
• SYNC = 1
2. The second word will remain in TXREGx
• CSRC = 0
register.
• SREN = 0 (for transmit); SREN = 1 (for receive)
3. The TXxIF bit will not be set.
• CREN = 0 (for transmit); CREN = 1 (for receive)
4. After the first character has been shifted out of
• SPEN = 1 TSR, the TXREGx register will transfer the
Setting the SYNC bit of the TXSTAx register configures second character to the TSR and the TXxIF bit
the device for synchronous operation. Clearing the will now be set.
CSRC bit of the TXSTAx register configures the device as 5. If the PEIE/GIEL and TXxIE bits are set, the
a slave. Clearing the SREN and CREN bits of the interrupt will wake the device from Sleep and
RCSTAx register ensures that the device is in the execute the next instruction. If the GIE/GIEH bit
Transmit mode, otherwise the device will be configured to is also set, the program will call the Interrupt
receive. Setting the SPEN bit of the RCSTAx register Service Routine.
enables the EUSART. If the RXx/DTx or TXx/CKx pins
are shared with an analog peripheral the analog I/O 16.4.2.2 Synchronous Slave Transmission
functions must be disabled by clearing the corresponding Set-up:
ANSEL bits.
1. Set the SYNC and SPEN bits and clear the
RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pin output drivers must be CSRC bit.
disabled by setting the corresponding TRIS bits. 2. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to
‘1’.
16.4.2.1 EUSART Synchronous Slave
3. Clear the CREN and SREN bits.
Transmit
4. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE/GIEH
The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave and PEIE/GIEL bits of the INTCON register are
modes are identical (see Section 16.4.1.3 set and set the TXxIE bit.
“Synchronous Master Transmission”), except in the
5. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 bit.
case of the Sleep mode.
6. Enable transmission by setting the TXEN bit.
7. If 9-bit transmission is selected, insert the Most
Significant bit into the TX9D bit.
8. Start transmission by writing the Least
Significant 8 bits to the TXREGx register.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 16-9: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION

Register
on Page
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for synchronous slave transmission.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
16.4.2.3 EUSART Synchronous Slave 16.4.2.4 Synchronous Slave Reception Set-
Reception up:
The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave 1. Set the SYNC and SPEN bits and clear the
modes is identical (Section 16.4.1.6 “Synchronous CSRC bit.
Master Reception”), with the following exceptions: 2. Set the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx TRIS controls to
• Sleep ‘1’.
• CREN bit is always set, therefore the receiver is 3. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE/GIEH
never Idle and PEIE/GIEL bits of the INTCON register are
• SREN bit, which is a “don't care” in Slave mode set and set the RCxIE bit.
4. If 9-bit reception is desired, set the RX9 bit.
A character may be received while in Sleep mode by
setting the CREN bit prior to entering Sleep. Once the 5. Set the CREN bit to enable reception.
word is received, the RSR register will transfer the data 6. The RCxIF bit will be set when reception is
to the RCREGx register. If the RCxIE enable bit is set, complete. An interrupt will be generated if the
the interrupt generated will wake the device from Sleep RCxIE bit was set.
and execute the next instruction. If the GIE/GIEH bit is 7. If 9-bit mode is enabled, retrieve the Most
also set, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. Significant bit from the RX9D bit of the RCSTAx
register.
8. Retrieve the 8 Least Significant bits from the
receive FIFO by reading the RCREGx register.
9. If an overrun error occurs, clear the error by
either clearing the CREN bit of the RCSTAx
register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets
the EUSART.
TABLE 16-10: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION

Register
on Page
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used for synchronous slave reception.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
17.0 ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL The ADC voltage reference is software selectable to
either VDD or a voltage applied to the external reference
CONVERTER (ADC) MODULE pins.
The Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) allows The ADC can generate an interrupt upon completion of
conversion of an analog input signal to a 10-bit binary a conversion. This interrupt can be used to wake-up the
representation of that signal. This device uses analog device from Sleep.
inputs, which are multiplexed into a single sample and
hold circuit. The output of the sample and hold is Figure 17-1 shows the block diagram of the ADC.
connected to the input of the converter. The converter
generates a 10-bit binary result via successive
approximation and stores the conversion result into the
ADC result registers (ADRESL and ADRESH).
FIGURE 17-1: ADC BLOCK DIAGRAM

5
CHS<4:0>
11111
FVR BUF2
11110
CTMU
11101
Reserved
11100
AN28(1)
11011
AN27(1)
ADCMD
00101 ADON
AN5(1)
10-Bit ADC GO/DONE
00100
AN4
10
00011
AN3
00010
AN2 0 = Left Justify
ADFM
00001 1 = Right Justify
AN1
00000
AN0 10
2
PVCFG<1:0>
ADRESH ADRESL
AVDD 00
01
VREF+/AN3
10
FVR BUF2
Reserved 11
2
NVCFG<1:0>
AVSS 00
01
VREF-/AN2
10
Reserved
Reserved 11
Note: Additional ADC channels AN5-AN7 and AN20-AN27 are only available on PIC18(L)F4XK22 devices.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
17.1 ADC Configuration 17.1.3 ADC VOLTAGE REFERENCE
When configuring and using the ADC the following The PVCFG<1:0> and NVCFG<1:0> bits of the
functions must be considered: ADCON1 register provide independent control of the
positive and negative voltage references.
• Port configuration
The positive voltage reference can be:
• Channel selection
• ADC voltage reference selection • VDD
• ADC conversion clock source • the fixed voltage reference (FVR BUF2)
• Interrupt control • an external voltage source (VREF+)
• Results formatting The negative voltage reference can be:
• VSS
17.1.1 PORT CONFIGURATION
• an external voltage source (VREF-)
The ANSELx and TRISx registers configure the A/D
port pins. Any port pin needed as an analog input 17.1.4 SELECTING AND CONFIGURING
should have its corresponding ANSx bit set to disable ACQUISITION TIME
the digital input buffer and TRISx bit set to disable the
The ADCON2 register allows the user to select an
digital output driver. If the TRISx bit is cleared, the
acquisition time that occurs each time the GO/DONE
digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be converted.
bit is set.
The A/D operation is independent of the state of the
Acquisition time is set with the ACQT<2:0> bits of the
ANSx bits and the TRIS bits.
ADCON2 register. Acquisition delays cover a range of
Note 1: When reading the PORT register, all pins 2 to 20 TAD. When the GO/DONE bit is set, the A/D
with their corresponding ANSx bit set module continues to sample the input for the selected
read as cleared (a low level). However, acquisition time, then automatically begins a
analog conversion of pins configured as conversion. Since the acquisition time is programmed,
digital inputs (ANSx bit cleared and there is no need to wait for an acquisition time between
TRISx bit set) will be accurately selecting a channel and setting the GO/DONE bit.
converted. Manual acquisition is selected when
2: Analog levels on any pin with the corre- ACQT<2:0> = 000. When the GO/DONE bit is set,
sponding ANSx bit cleared may cause the sampling is stopped and a conversion begins. The user
digital input buffer to consume current out is responsible for ensuring the required acquisition time
of the device’s specification limits. has passed between selecting the desired input
3: The PBADEN bit in Configuration channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. This option is
Register 3H configures PORTB pins to also the default Reset state of the ACQT<2:0> bits and
reset as analog or digital pins by is compatible with devices that do not offer
controlling how the bits in ANSELB are programmable acquisition times.
reset. In either case, when the conversion is completed, the
GO/DONE bit is cleared, the ADIF flag is set and the
17.1.2 CHANNEL SELECTION A/D begins sampling the currently selected channel
The CHS bits of the ADCON0 register determine which again. When an acquisition time is programmed, there
channel is connected to the sample and hold circuit. is no indication of when the acquisition time ends and
the conversion begins.
When changing channels, a delay is required before
starting the next conversion. Refer to Section 17.2
“ADC Operation” for more information.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
17.1.5 CONVERSION CLOCK 17.1.6 INTERRUPTS
The source of the conversion clock is software The ADC module allows for the ability to generate an
selectable via the ADCS bits of the ADCON2 register. interrupt upon completion of an Analog-to-Digital
There are seven possible clock options: Conversion. The ADC interrupt enable is the ADIE bit
• FOSC/2 in the PIE1 register and the interrupt priority is the ADIP
bit in the IPR1 register. The ADC interrupt flag is the
• FOSC/4
ADIF bit in the PIR1 register. The ADIF bit must be
• FOSC/8 cleared by software.
• FOSC/16
Note: The ADIF bit is set at the completion of
• FOSC/32
every conversion, regardless of whether
• FOSC/64 or not the ADC interrupt is enabled.
• FRC (dedicated internal oscillator)
This interrupt can be generated while the device is
The time to complete one bit conversion is defined as operating or while in Sleep. If the device is in Sleep, the
TAD. One full 10-bit conversion requires 11 TAD periods interrupt will wake-up the device. Upon waking from
as shown in Figure 17-3. Sleep, the next instruction following the SLEEP
For correct conversion, the appropriate TAD specification instruction is always executed. If the user is attempting
must be met. See A/D conversion requirements in to wake-up from Sleep and resume in-line code
Table 27-24 for more information. Table gives examples execution, the global interrupt must be disabled. If the
of appropriate ADC clock selections. global interrupt is enabled, execution will switch to the
Interrupt Service Routine.
Note: Unless using the FRC, any changes in the
system clock frequency will change the
ADC clock frequency, which may
adversely affect the ADC result.
TABLE 17-1: ADC CLOCK PERIOD (TAD) VS. DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCIES
ADC Clock Period (TAD) Device Frequency (FOSC)
ADC Clock Source ADCS<2:0> 64 MHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 1 MHz

FOSC/2 000 31.25 ns(2) 125 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 2.0 s
FOSC/4 100 62.5 ns(2) 250 ns(2) 1.0 s 4.0 s(3)
FOSC/8 001 400 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 2.0 s 8.0 s(3)
FOSC/16 101 250 ns(2) 1.0 s 4.0 s(3) 16.0 s(3)
FOSC/32 010 500 ns(2) 2.0 s 8.0 s(3) 32.0 s(3)
FOSC/64 110 1.0 s 4.0 s(3) 16.0 s(3) 64.0 s(3)
FRC x11 1-4 s(1,4) 1-4 s(1,4) 1-4 s(1,4) 1-4 s(1,4)
Legend: Shaded cells are outside of recommended range.
Note 1: The FRC source has a typical TAD time of 1.7 s.
2: These values violate the minimum required TAD time.
3: For faster conversion times, the selection of another clock source is recommended.
4: When the device frequency is greater than 1 MHz, the FRC clock source is only recommended if the
conversion will be performed during Sleep.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
17.1.7 RESULT FORMATTING
The 10-bit A/D conversion result can be supplied in two
formats, left justified or right justified. The ADFM bit of
the ADCON2 register controls the output format.
Figure 17-2 shows the two output formats.
FIGURE 17-2: 10-BIT A/D CONVERSION RESULT FORMAT
ADRESH ADRESL
(ADFM = 0) MSB LSB
bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0
10-bit A/D Result Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
(ADFM = 1) MSB LSB

bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ 10-bit A/D Result

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
17.2 ADC Operation Figure 17-3 shows the operation of the A/D converter
after the GO bit has been set and the ACQT<2:0> bits
17.2.1 STARTING A CONVERSION are cleared. A conversion is started after the following
instruction to allow entry into SLEEP mode before the
To enable the ADC module, the ADON bit of the
conversion begins.
ADCON0 register must be set to a ‘1’. Setting the GO/
DONE bit of the ADCON0 register to a ‘1’ will, depend- Figure 17-4 shows the operation of the A/D converter
ing on the ACQT bits of the ADCON2 register, either after the GO bit has been set and the ACQT<2:0> bits
immediately start the Analog-to-Digital conversion or are set to ‘010’ which selects a 4 TAD acquisition time
start an acquisition delay followed by the Analog-to- before the conversion starts.
Digital conversion.
Note: The GO/DONE bit should not be set in the
same instruction that turns on the ADC.
Refer to Section 17.2.10 “A/D Conver-
sion Procedure”.
FIGURE 17-3: A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT<2:0> = 000, TACQ = 0)

TCY - TAD TAD1 TAD2 TAD3 TAD4 TAD5 TAD6 TAD7 TAD8 TAD9 TAD10 TAD11 2 TAD
b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Conversion starts Discharge

Holding capacitor is disconnected from analog input (typically 100 ns)
Set GO bit
On the following cycle:
ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO bit is cleared,
ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input.
FIGURE 17-4: A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT<2:0> = 010, TACQ = 4 TAD)
TACQT Cycles TAD Cycles
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 TAD
b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Automatic
Acquisition Conversion starts Discharge
Time (Holding capacitor is disconnected from analog input)
Set GO bit
(Holding capacitor continues On the following cycle:
acquiring input) ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO bit is cleared,
ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
17.2.2 COMPLETION OF A CONVERSION 17.2.7 ADC OPERATION DURING SLEEP
When the conversion is complete, the ADC module will: The ADC module can operate during Sleep. This
• Clear the GO/DONE bit requires the ADC clock source to be set to the FRC
option. When the FRC clock source is selected, the
• Set the ADIF flag bit
ADC waits one additional instruction before starting the
• Update the ADRESH:ADRESL registers with new conversion. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be
conversion result executed, which can reduce system noise during the
conversion. If the ADC interrupt is enabled, the device
17.2.3 DISCHARGE will wake-up from Sleep when the conversion
The discharge phase is used to initialize the value of completes. If the ADC interrupt is disabled, the ADC
the capacitor array. The array is discharged after every module is turned off after the conversion completes,
sample. This feature helps to optimize the unity-gain although the ADON bit remains set.
amplifier, as the circuit always needs to charge the When the ADC clock source is something other than
capacitor array, rather than charge/discharge based on FRC, a SLEEP instruction causes the present
previous measure values. conversion to be aborted and the ADC module is
turned off, although the ADON bit remains set.
17.2.4 TERMINATING A CONVERSION
If a conversion must be terminated before completion, 17.2.8 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER
the GO/DONE bit can be cleared by software. The Two Special Event Triggers are available to start an A/D
ADRESH:ADRESL registers will not be updated with conversion: CTMU and CCP5. The Special Event
the partially complete Analog-to-Digital conversion Trigger source is selected using the TRIGSEL bit in
sample. Instead, the ADRESH:ADRESL register pair ADCON1.
will retain the value of the previous conversion.
When TRIGSEL = 0, the CCP5 module is selected as
Note: A device Reset forces all registers to their the Special Event Trigger source. To enable the Special
Reset state. Thus, the ADC module is Event Trigger in the CCP module, set CCP5M<3:0> =
turned off and any pending conversion is 1011, in the CCP5CON register.
terminated.
When TRIGSEL = 1, the CTMU module is selected.
The CTMU module requires that the CTTRIG bit in
17.2.5 DELAY BETWEEN CONVERSIONS
CTMUCONH is set to enable the Special Event Trigger.
After the A/D conversion is completed or aborted, a
In addition to TRIGSEL bit, the following steps are
2 TAD wait is required before the next acquisition can
required to start an A/D conversion:
be started. After this wait, the currently selected
channel is reconnected to the charge holding capacitor • The A/D module must be enabled (ADON = 1)
commencing the next acquisition. • The appropriate analog input channel selected
• The minimum acquisition period set one of these
17.2.6 ADC OPERATION IN POWER- ways:
MANAGED MODES - Timing provided by the user
- Selection made of an appropriate TACQ time
The selection of the automatic acquisition time and A/D
conversion clock is determined in part by the clock With these conditions met, the trigger sets the GO/DONE
source and frequency while in a power-managed mode. bit and the A/D acquisition starts.
If the A/D is expected to operate while the device is in If the A/D module is not enabled (ADON = 0), the
a power-managed mode, the ACQT<2:0> and module ignores the Special Event Trigger.
ADCS<2:0> bits in ADCON2 should be updated in
accordance with the clock source to be used in that 17.2.9 PERIPHERAL MODULE DISABLE
mode. After entering the mode, an A/D acquisition or When a peripheral module is not used or inactive, the
conversion may be started. Once started, the device module can be disabled by setting the Module Disable
should continue to be clocked by the same clock bit in the PMD registers. This will reduce power
source until the conversion has been completed. consumption to an absolute minimum. Setting the PMD
If desired, the device may be placed into the bits holds the module in Reset and disconnects the
corresponding Idle mode during the conversion. If the module’s clock source. The Module Disable bit for the
device clock frequency is less than 1 MHz, the A/D FRC ADC module is ADCMD in the PMD2 Register. See
clock source should be selected. Section 3.0 “Power-Managed Modes” for more
information.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
17.2.10 A/D CONVERSION PROCEDURE EXAMPLE 17-1: A/D CONVERSION
This is an example procedure for using the ADC to ;This code block configures the ADC
perform an Analog-to-Digital conversion: ;for polling, Vdd and Vss as reference, Frc
clock and AN0 input.
1. Configure Port: ;
• Disable pin output driver (See TRIS register) ;Conversion start & polling for completion
• Configure pin as analog ; are included.
;
2. Configure the ADC module: MOVLW B’10101111’ ;right justify, Frc,
• Select ADC conversion clock MOVWF ADCON2 ; & 12 TAD ACQ time
• Configure voltage reference MOVLW B’00000000’ ;ADC ref = Vdd,Vss
MOVWF ADCON1 ;
• Select ADC input channel
BSF TRISA,0 ;Set RA0 to input
• Select result format BSF ANSEL,0 ;Set RA0 to analog
• Select acquisition delay MOVLW B’00000001’ ;AN0, ADC on
• Turn on ADC module MOVWF ADCON0 ;
BSF ADCON0,GO ;Start conversion
3. Configure ADC interrupt (optional): ADCPoll:
• Clear ADC interrupt flag BTFSC ADCON0,GO ;Is conversion done?
• Enable ADC interrupt BRA ADCPoll ;No, test again
; Result is complete - store 2 MSbits in
• Enable peripheral interrupt ; RESULTHI and 8 LSbits in RESULTLO
• Enable global interrupt(1) MOVFF ADRESH,RESULTHI
4. Wait the required acquisition time(2). MOVFF ADRESL,RESULTLO
5. Start conversion by setting the GO/DONE bit.
6. Wait for ADC conversion to complete by one of
the following:
• Polling the GO/DONE bit
• Waiting for the ADC interrupt (interrupts
enabled)
7. Read ADC Result
8. Clear the ADC interrupt flag (required if interrupt
is enabled).
Note 1: The global interrupt can be disabled if the

user is attempting to wake-up from Sleep
and resume in-line code execution.
2: Software delay required if ACQT bits are
set to zero delay. See Section 17.3 “A/D
Acquisition Requirements”.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
17.2.11 ADC REGISTER DEFINITIONS
The following registers are used to control the
operation of the ADC.
Note: Analog pin control is determined by the
ANSELx registers (see Register 10-2)
REGISTER 17-1: ADCON0: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 0

— CHS<4:0> GO/DONE ADON
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6-2 CHS<4:0>: Analog Channel Select bits
00000 = AN0
00001 = AN1
00010 = AN2
00011 = AN3
00100 = AN4
00101 = AN5(1)
00110 = AN6(1)
00111 = AN7(1)
01000 = AN8
01001 = AN9
01010 = AN10
01011 = AN11
01100 = AN12
01101 = AN13
01110 = AN14
01111 = AN15
10000 = AN16
10001 = AN17
10010 = AN18
10011 = AN19
10100 = AN20(1)
10101 = AN21(1)
10110 = AN22(1)
10111 = AN23(1)
11000 = AN24(1)
11001 = AN25(1)
11010 = AN26(1)
11011 = AN27(1)
11100 = Reserved
11101 = CTMU
11110 = DAC
11111 = FVR BUF2 (1.024V/2.048V/2.096V Volt Fixed Voltage Reference)(2)
bit 1 GO/DONE: A/D Conversion Status bit
1 = A/D conversion cycle in progress. Setting this bit starts an A/D conversion cycle.
This bit is automatically cleared by hardware when the A/D conversion has completed.
0 = A/D conversion completed/not in progress

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 17-1: ADCON0: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 0 (CONTINUED)
bit 0 ADON: ADC Enable bit
1 = ADC is enabled
0 = ADC is disabled and consumes no operating current

2: Allow greater than 15 s acquisition time when measuring the Fixed Voltage Reference.

R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
TRIGSEL — — — PVCFG<1:0> NVCFG<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 TRIGSEL: Special Trigger Select bit

1 = Selects the special trigger from CTMU
0 = Selects the special trigger from CCP5
bit 3-2 PVCFG<1:0>: Positive Voltage Reference Configuration bits
00 = A/D VREF+ connected to internal signal, AVDD
01 = A/D VREF+ connected to external pin, VREF+
10 = A/D VREF+ connected to internal signal, FVR BUF2
11 = Reserved (by default, A/D VREF+ connected to internal signal, AVDD)
bit 1-0 NVCFG0<1:0>: Negative Voltage Reference Configuration bits
00 = A/D VREF- connected to internal signal, AVSS
01 = A/D VREF- connected to external pin, VREF-
10 = Reserved (by default, A/D VREF+ connected to internal signal, AVSS)
11 = Reserved (by default, A/D VREF+ connected to internal signal, AVSS)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
ADFM — ACQT<2:0> ADCS<2:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 ADFM: A/D Conversion Result Format Select bit

1 = Right justified
0 = Left justified
bit 5-3 ACQT<2:0>: A/D Acquisition time select bits. Acquisition time is the duration that the A/D charge hold-
ing capacitor remains connected to A/D channel from the instant the GO/DONE bit is set until conver-
sions begins.
000 = 0(1)
001 = 2 TAD
010 = 4 TAD
011 = 6 TAD
100 = 8 TAD
101 = 12 TAD
110 = 16 TAD
111 = 20 TAD
bit 2-0 ADCS<2:0>: A/D Conversion Clock Select bits
000 = FOSC/2
001 = FOSC/8
010 = FOSC/32
011 = FRC(1) (clock derived from a dedicated internal oscillator = 600 kHz nominal)
100 = FOSC/4
101 = FOSC/16
110 = FOSC/64
111 = FRC(1) (clock derived from a dedicated internal oscillator = 600 kHz nominal)
Note 1: When the A/D clock source is selected as FRC then the start of conversion is delayed by one instruction
cycle after the GO/DONE bit is set to allow the SLEEP instruction to be executed.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 17-4: ADRESH: ADC RESULT REGISTER HIGH (ADRESH) ADFM = 0

R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x
ADRES<9:2>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 ADRES<9:2>: ADC Result Register bits

Upper 8 bits of 10-bit conversion result
REGISTER 17-5: ADRESL: ADC RESULT REGISTER LOW (ADRESL) ADFM = 0

ADRES<1:0> — — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

Lower 2 bits of 10-bit conversion result
bit 5-0 Reserved: Do not use.
REGISTER 17-6: ADRESH: ADC RESULT REGISTER HIGH (ADRESH) ADFM = 1

— — — — — — ADRES<9:2>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-2 Reserved: Do not use.

Upper 2 bits of 10-bit conversion result
REGISTER 17-7: ADRESL: ADC RESULT REGISTER LOW (ADRESL) ADFM = 1

ADRES<7:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

Lower 8 bits of 10-bit conversion result

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
17.3 A/D Acquisition Requirements an A/D acquisition must be done before the conversion
can be started. To calculate the minimum acquisition
For the ADC to meet its specified accuracy, the charge time, Equation 17-1 may be used. This equation
holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to fully assumes that 1/2 LSb error is used (1024 steps for the
charge to the input channel voltage level. The Analog ADC). The 1/2 LSb error is the maximum error allowed
Input model is shown in Figure 17-5. The source for the ADC to meet its specified resolution.
impedance (RS) and the internal sampling switch (RSS)
impedance directly affect the time required to charge the
capacitor CHOLD. The sampling switch (RSS) impedance
varies over the device voltage (VDD), see Figure 17-5.
The maximum recommended impedance for analog
sources is 10 k. As the source impedance is
decreased, the acquisition time may be decreased.
After the analog input channel is selected (or changed),
EQUATION 17-1: ACQUISITION TIME EXAMPLE
Assumptions: Temperature = 50°C and external impedance of 10k  3.0V V DD
T ACQ = Amplifier Settling Time + Hold Capacitor Charging Time + Temperature Coefficient
= T AMP + T C + T COFF
= 5µs + T C +   Temperature - 25°C   0.05µs/°C  
The value for TC can be approximated with the following equations:
1
V AP PLIE D  1 – ------------ = V CHOLD ;[1] VCHOLD charged to within 1/2 lsb
 2047
–TC
 ----------
RC ;[2] VCHOLD charge response to VAPPLIED
V AP P LI ED  1 – e  = V CHOLD
 
– Tc
 ---------
1
V AP P LIED  1 – e  = V A P PLIE D  1 – ------------
RC
;combining [1] and [2]
   2047
Solving for TC:
T C = – C HOLD  R IC + R SS + R S  ln(1/2047)
= – 13.5pF  1k  + 700  + 10k   ln(0.0004885)
= 1.20 µs
Therefore:
T ACQ = 5µs + 1.20µs +   50°C- 25°C   0.05  s/ °C  
= 7.45µs
Note 1: The reference voltage (VREF) has no effect on the equation, since it cancels itself out.
2: The charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) is discharged after each conversion.
3: The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 10 k. This is required to meet the pin
leakage specification.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 17-5: ANALOG INPUT MODEL
VDD
Sampling
Switch
Rs ANx RIC  1k SS Rss
VA CPIN I LEAKAGE(1) CHOLD = 13.5 pF

5 pF
Discharge VSS/VREF-
Switch
3.5V
Legend: CPIN = Input Capacitance 3.0V
I LEAKAGE = Leakage current at the pin due to
VDD
various junctions 2.5V
RIC = Interconnect Resistance 2.0V
SS = Sampling Switch 1.5V
CHOLD = Sample/Hold Capacitance
.1 1 10 100
Rss (k)
Note 1: See Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics”.
FIGURE 17-6: ADC TRANSFER FUNCTION
Full-Scale Range
3FFh
3FEh
3FDh
3FCh
ADC Output Code
1/2 LSB ideal

3FBh
Full-Scale
004h Transition
003h
002h
001h
000h Analog Input Voltage
1/2 LSB ideal
VSS/VREF- Zero-Scale VDD/VREF+

Transition

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 17-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH A/D OPERATION

Register
on Page
ADCON0 — CHS<4:0> GO/DONE ADON 298
ADCON1 TRIGSEL — — — PVCFG<1:0> NVCFG<1:0> 299
ADCON2 ADFM — ACQT<2:0> ADCS<2:0> 300
ADRESH A/D Result, High Byte 301
ADRESL A/D Result, Low Byte 301
ANSELD(1) ANSD7 ANSD6 ANSD5 ANSD4 ANSD3 ANSD2 ANSD1 ANSD0 153
ANSELE(1) — — — — — ANSE2 ANSE1 ANSE0 154
CCP5CON — — DC5B<1:0> CCP5M<3:0> 201
PMD2 — — — — CTMUMD CMP2MD CMP1MD ADCMD 58
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by this module.
TABLE 17-3: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE ADC MODULE

Register
on Page
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by the ADC module.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
18.0 COMPARATOR MODULE FIGURE 18-1: SINGLE COMPARATOR
Comparators are used to interface analog circuits to a
digital circuit by comparing two analog voltages and VIN+ +
providing a digital indication of their relative magnitudes. Output
The comparators are very useful mixed signal building VIN- –
blocks because they provide analog functionality
independent of the program execution. The analog
comparator module includes the following features:
• Independent comparator control VIN-
• Programmable input selection VIN+
• Comparator output is available internally/externally
• Programmable output polarity
• Interrupt-on-change
• Wake-up from Sleep Output
• Programmable Speed/Power optimization
• PWM shutdown
Note: The black areas of the output of the
• Programmable and fixed voltage reference
comparator represents the uncertainty
• Selectable Hysteresis due to input offsets and response time.
18.1 Comparator Overview
A single comparator is shown in Figure 18-1 along with
the relationship between the analog input levels and
the digital output. When the analog voltage at VIN+ is
less than the analog voltage at VIN-, the output of the
comparator is a digital low level. When the analog
voltage at VIN+ is greater than the analog voltage at
VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital high level.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 18-2: COMPARATOR C1/C2 SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM
CxCH<1:0>
2 CxON(1)
To CMxCON0 (CxOUT)
CxSP CM2CON1 (MCxOUT)
C12IN0- 0
D Q
C12IN1- 1 CxVIN- Q1 (2),(3)
EN
-
C12IN2- 2 Cx
CxVIN+
C12IN3- +
3
D Q
To Interrupts
Q3(2)
EN (CxIF)
CxR
CL
Read or Write
of CMxCON0
CxIN+ 0 Reset
Cx Output
DAC 1 CxPOL
0 to PWM Logic
CxSYNC
FVR BUF1 1 CxOE TRIS bit
CXVREF
0
CXRSEL
D Q 1 CxOUT
Timer1 Clock
SYNCCxOUT
- to SR Latch
- to TxG MUX(4)
Note 1: When C1ON = 0, the C1 comparator will produce a ‘0’ output to the XOR Gate.
2: Q1 and Q3 are phases of the four-phase system clock (FOSC).
3: Q1 is held high during Sleep mode.
4: Synchronized comparator output should not be used to gate Timer1 in conjunction with synchronized T1CKI.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
18.2 Comparator Control
Each comparator has a separate control and Note 1: The CxOE bit overrides the PORT data
Configuration register: CM1CON0 for Comparator C1 latch. Setting the CxON has no impact on
and CM2CON0 for Comparator C2. In addition, the port override.
Comparator C2 has a second control register, 2: The internal output of the comparator is
CM2CON1, for controlling the interaction with Timer1 and latched with each instruction cycle.
simultaneous reading of both comparator outputs. Unless otherwise specified, external
The CM1CON0 and CM2CON0 registers (see Registers outputs are not latched.
18-1 and 18-2, respectively) contain the control and
status bits for the following: 18.2.5 COMPARATOR OUTPUT POLARITY
• Enable Inverting the output of the comparator is functionally
• Input selection equivalent to swapping the comparator inputs. The
polarity of the comparator output can be inverted by
• Reference selection
setting the CxPOL bit of the CMxCON0 register.
• Output selection Clearing the CxPOL bit results in a non-inverted output.
• Output polarity
Table 18-1 shows the output state versus input
• Speed selection conditions, including polarity control.
18.2.1 COMPARATOR ENABLE TABLE 18-1: COMPARATOR OUTPUT
STATE VS. INPUT
Setting the CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register enables
CONDITIONS
the comparator for operation. Clearing the CxON bit
disables the comparator resulting in minimum current Input Condition CxPOL CxOUT
consumption. CxVIN- > CxVIN+ 0 0
18.2.2 COMPARATOR INPUT SELECTION CxVIN- < CxVIN+ 0 1
The CxCH<1:0> bits of the CMxCON0 register direct CxVIN- > CxVIN+ 1 1
one of four analog input pins to the comparator CxVIN- < CxVIN+ 1 0
inverting input.
18.2.6 COMPARATOR SPEED SELECTION
Note: To use CxIN+ and C12INx- pins as analog
inputs, the appropriate bits must be set in The trade-off between speed or power can be
the ANSEL register and the corresponding optimized during program execution with the CxSP
TRIS bits must also be set to disable the control bit. The default state for this bit is ‘1’ which
output drivers. selects the normal speed mode. Device power
consumption can be optimized at the cost of slower
18.2.3 COMPARATOR REFERENCE comparator propagation delay by clearing the CxSP bit
SELECTION to ‘0’.
Setting the CxR bit of the CMxCON0 register directs an

18.3 Comparator Response Time
internal voltage reference or an analog input pin to the
non-inverting input of the comparator. See The comparator output is indeterminate for a period of
Section 21.0 “Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)” for time after the change of an input source or the selection
more information on the Internal Voltage Reference of a new reference voltage. This period is referred to as
module. the response time. The response time of the
comparator differs from the settling time of the voltage
18.2.4 COMPARATOR OUTPUT reference. Therefore, both of these times must be
SELECTION considered when determining the total response time
The output of the comparator can be monitored by to a comparator input change. See the Comparator and
reading either the CxOUT bit of the CMxCON0 register Voltage Reference Specifications in Section 27.0
or the MCxOUT bit of the CM2CON1 register. In order “Electrical Characteristics” for more details.
to make the output available for an external connection,
the following conditions must be true:
• CxOE bit of the CMxCON0 register must be set
• Corresponding TRIS bit must be cleared
• CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register must be set

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
18.4 Comparator Interrupt Operation 18.4.1 PRESETTING THE MISMATCH
LATCHES
The comparator interrupt flag will be set whenever
there is a change in the output value of the comparator. The comparator mismatch latches can be preset to the
Changes are recognized by means of a mismatch desired state before the comparators are enabled.
circuit which consists of two latches and an exclusive- When the comparator is off the CxPOL bit controls the
or gate (see Figure 18-2). The first latch is updated with CxOUT level. Set the CxPOL bit to the desired CxOUT
the comparator output value, when the CMxCON0 non-interrupt level while the CxON bit is cleared. Then,
register is read or written. The value is latched on the configure the desired CxPOL level in the same instruc-
third cycle of the system clock, also known as Q3. This tion that the CxON bit is set. Since all register writes are
first latch retains the comparator value until another performed as a read-modify-write, the mismatch
read or write of the CMxCON0 register occurs or a latches will be cleared during the instruction read
Reset takes place. The second latch is updated with phase and the actual configuration of the CxON and
the comparator output value on every first cycle of the CxPOL bits will be occur in the final write phase.
system clock, also known as Q1. When the output
value of the comparator changes, the second latch is FIGURE 18-3: COMPARATOR
updated and the output values of both latches no INTERRUPT TIMING W/O
longer match one another, resulting in a mismatch CMxCON0 READ
condition. The latch outputs are fed directly into the
inputs of an exclusive-or gate. This mismatch condition Q1
is detected by the exclusive-or gate and sent to the Q3
interrupt circuitry. The mismatch condition will persist CxIN+ TRT
until the first latch value is updated by performing a CxIN
read of the CMxCON0 register or the comparator Set CxIF (edge)
output returns to the previous state.
CxIF
Note 1: A write operation to the CMxCON0 Reset by Software
register will also clear the mismatch
condition because all writes include a read
operation at the beginning of the write FIGURE 18-4: COMPARATOR
cycle. INTERRUPT TIMING WITH
CMxCON0 READ
2: Comparator interrupts will operate correctly
regardless of the state of CxOE. Q1
When the mismatch condition occurs, the comparator Q3
interrupt flag is set. The interrupt flag is triggered by the CxIN+ TRT
edge of the changing value coming from the exclusive- CxOUT
or gate. This means that the interrupt flag can be reset
Set CxIF (edge)
once it is triggered without the additional step of read-
CxIF
ing or writing the CMxCON0 register to clear the mis-
match latches. When the mismatch registers are Cleared by CMxCON0 Read Reset by Software
cleared, an interrupt will occur upon the comparator’s
return to the previous state, otherwise no interrupt will
be generated.
Note 1: If a change in the CMxCON0 register
Software will need to maintain information about the
(CxOUT) should occur when a read oper-
status of the comparator output, as read from the
ation is being executed (start of the Q2
CMxCON0 register, or CM2CON1 register, to determine
cycle), then the CxIF interrupt flag of the
the actual change that has occurred. See Figures 18-3
PIR2 register may not get set.
and 18-4.
2: When either comparator is first enabled,
The CxIF bit of the PIR2 register is the comparator
bias circuitry in the comparator module
interrupt flag. This bit must be reset by software by
may cause an invalid output from the
clearing it to ‘0’. Since it is also possible to write a ‘1’ to
comparator until the bias circuitry is stable.
this register, an interrupt can be generated.
Allow about 1 s for bias settling then clear
In mid-range Compatibility mode the CxIE bit of the the mismatch condition and interrupt flags
PIE2 register and the PEIE/GIEL and GIE/GIEH bits of before enabling comparator interrupts.
the INTCON register must all be set to enable compar-
ator interrupts. If any of these bits are cleared, the inter-
rupt is not enabled, although the CxIF bit of the PIR2
register will still be set if an interrupt condition occurs.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
18.5 Operation During Sleep 18.6 Effects of a Reset
The comparator, if enabled before entering Sleep mode, A device Reset forces the CMxCON0 and CM2CON1
remains active during Sleep. The additional current registers to their Reset states. This forces both
consumed by the comparator is shown separately in comparators and the voltage references to their Off
Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics”. If the states.
comparator is not used to wake the device, power
consumption can be minimized while in Sleep mode by
turning off the comparator. Each comparator is turned off
by clearing the CxON bit of the CMxCON0 register.
A change to the comparator output can wake-up the
device from Sleep. To enable the comparator to wake
the device from Sleep, the CxIE bit of the PIE2 register
and the PEIE/GIEL bit of the INTCON register must be
set. The instruction following the SLEEP instruction
always executes following a wake from Sleep. If the
GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON register is also set, the
device will then execute the Interrupt Service Routine.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 18-1: CM1CON0: COMPARATOR 1 CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 C1ON: Comparator C1 Enable bit

1 = Comparator C1 is enabled
0 = Comparator C1 is disabled
bit 6 C1OUT: Comparator C1 Output bit
If C1POL = 1 (inverted polarity):
C1OUT = 0 when C1VIN+ > C1VIN-
C1OUT = 1 when C1VIN+ < C1VIN-
If C1POL = 0 (non-inverted polarity):
bit 5 C1OE: Comparator C1 Output Enable bit
1 = C1OUT is present on the C1OUT pin(1)
0 = C1OUT is internal only
bit 4 C1POL: Comparator C1 Output Polarity Select bit
1 = C1OUT logic is inverted
0 = C1OUT logic is not inverted
bit 3 C1SP: Comparator C1 Speed/Power Select bit
1 = C1 operates in normal power, higher speed mode
0 = C1 operates in low-power, low-speed mode
bit 2 C1R: Comparator C1 Reference Select bit (non-inverting input)
1 = C1VIN+ connects to C1VREF output
0 = C1VIN+ connects to C12IN+ pin
bit 1-0 C1CH<1:0>: Comparator C1 Channel Select bit
00 = C12IN0- pin of C1 connects to C1VIN-
Note 1: Comparator output requires the following three conditions: C1OE = 1, C1ON = 1 and corresponding port
TRIS bit = 0.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 18-2: CM2CON: COMPARATOR 2 CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
C2ON C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 C2ON: Comparator C2 Enable bit

1 = Comparator C2 is enabled
0 = Comparator C2 is disabled
bit 6 C2OUT: Comparator C2 Output bit
If C2POL = 1 (inverted polarity):
If C2POL = 0 (non-inverted polarity):
bit 5 C2OE: Comparator C2 Output Enable bit
1 = C2OUT is present on C2OUT pin(1)
0 = C2OUT is internal only
bit 4 C2POL: Comparator C2 Output Polarity Select bit
1 = C2OUT logic is inverted
0 = C2OUT logic is not inverted
bit 3 C2SP: Comparator C2 Speed/Power Select bit
1 = C2 operates in normal power, higher speed mode
0 = C2 operates in low-power, low-speed mode
bit 2 C2R: Comparator C2 Reference Select bits (non-inverting input)
1 = C2VIN+ connects to C2VREF
0 = C2VIN+ connects to C2IN+ pin
bit 1-0 C2CH<1:0>: Comparator C2 Channel Select bits
Note 1: Comparator output requires the following three conditions: C2OE = 1, C2ON = 1 and corresponding port
TRIS bit = 0.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
18.7 Analog Input Connection
Considerations Note 1: When reading a PORT register, all pins
configured as analog inputs will read as a
A simplified circuit for an analog input is shown in
‘0’. Pins configured as digital inputs will
Figure 18-5. Since the analog input pins share their
convert as an analog input, according to
connection with a digital input, they have reverse
the input specification.
biased ESD protection diodes to VDD and VSS. The
analog input, therefore, must be between VSS and VDD. 2: Analog levels on any pin defined as a
If the input voltage deviates from this range by more digital input, may cause the input buffer to
than 0.6V in either direction, one of the diodes is consume more current than is specified.
forward biased and a latch-up may occur.
A maximum source impedance of 10 k is recommended
for the analog sources. Also, any external component
connected to an analog input pin, such as a capacitor or
a Zener diode, should have very little leakage current to
minimize inaccuracies introduced.
FIGURE 18-5: ANALOG INPUT MODEL

VDD
VT  0.6V RIC
Rs < 10K
To Comparator
AIN
CPIN ILEAKAGE(1)
VA VT  0.6V
5 pF
Vss
Legend: CPIN = Input Capacitance

ILEAKAGE = Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions
RIC = Interconnect Resistance
RS = Source Impedance
VA = Analog Voltage
VT = Threshold Voltage
Note 1: See Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics”.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
18.8 Additional Comparator Features 18.8.3 COMPARATOR HYSTERESIS
There are four additional comparator features: Each Comparator has a selectable hysteresis feature.
The hysteresis can be enabled by setting the CxHYS
• Simultaneous read of comparator outputs bit of the CM2CON1 register. See Section 27.0 “Elec-
• Internal reference selection trical Characteristics” for more details.
• Hysteresis selection
• Output Synchronization 18.8.4 SYNCHRONIZING COMPARATOR
OUTPUT TO TIMER1
18.8.1 SIMULTANEOUS COMPARATOR The Comparator Cx output can be synchronized with
OUTPUT READ Timer1 by setting the CxSYNC bit of the CM2CON1
The MC1OUT and MC2OUT bits of the CM2CON1 register. When enabled, the Cx output is latched on
register are mirror copies of both comparator outputs. the falling edge of the Timer1 source clock. To prevent
The ability to read both outputs simultaneously from a a race condition when gating Timer1 clock with the
single register eliminates the timing skew of reading comparator output, Timer1 increments on the rising
separate registers. edge of its clock source, and the falling edge latches
the comparator output. See the Comparator Block
Note 1: Obtaining the status of C1OUT or C2OUT Diagram (Figure 18-2) and the Timer1 Block Diagram
by reading CM2CON1 does not affect the (Figure 12-1) for more information.
comparator interrupt mismatch registers.
18.8.2 INTERNAL REFERENCE Note 1: The comparator synchronized output

SELECTION should not be used to gate the external
There are two internal voltage references available to Timer1 clock when the Timer1
the non-inverting input of each comparator. One of synchronizer is enabled.
these is the Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) and the 2: The Timer1 prescale should be set to 1:1
other is the variable Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC). when synchronizing the comparator
The CxRSEL bit of the CM2CON1 register determines output as unexpected results may occur
which of these references is routed to the Comparator with other prescale values.
Voltage reference output (CXVREF). Further routing to
the comparator is accomplished by the CxR bit of the
CMxCON0 register. See Section 21.0 “Fixed Voltage
Reference (FVR)” and Figure 18-2 for more detail.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 18-3: CM2CON1: COMPARATOR 1 AND 2 CONTROL REGISTER

R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
MC1OUT MC2OUT C1RSEL C2RSEL C1HYS C2HYS C1SYNC C2SYNC
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 MC1OUT: Mirror Copy of C1OUT bit

bit 6 MC2OUT: Mirror Copy of C2OUT bit
bit 5 C1RSEL: Comparator C1 Reference Select bit
1 = FVR BUF1 routed to C1VREF input
0 = DAC routed to C1VREF input
bit 4 C2RSEL: Comparator C2 Reference Select bit
1 = FVR BUF1 routed to C2VREF input
0 = DAC routed to C2VREF input
bit 3 C1HYS: Comparator C1 Hysteresis Enable bit
1 = Comparator C1 hysteresis enabled
0 = Comparator C1 hysteresis disabled
bit 2 C2HYS: Comparator C2 Hysteresis Enable bit
1 = Comparator C2 hysteresis enabled
0 = Comparator C2 hysteresis disabled
bit 1 C1SYNC: C1 Output Synchronous Mode bit
1 = C1 output is synchronized to rising edge of TMR1 clock (T1CLK)
0 = C1 output is asynchronous
bit 0 C2SYNC: C2 Output Synchronous Mode bit
1 = C2 output is synchronized to rising edge of TMR1 clock (T1CLK)
0 = C2 output is asynchronous

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 18-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR MODULE

Register
on Page
CM2CON1 MC1OUT MC2OUT C1RSEL C2RSEL C1HYS C2HYS C1SYNC C2SYNC 314
VREFCON2 — — — DACR<4:0> 342
VREFCON0 FVREN FVRST FVRS<1:0> — — — — 338
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by the Comparator Module.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
19.0 CHARGE TIME • Time measurement resolution of 1 nanosecond
MEASUREMENT UNIT (CTMU) • High precision time measurement
• Time delay of external or internal signal
The Charge Time Measurement Unit (CTMU) is a asynchronous to system clock
flexible analog module that provides accurate
• Accurate current source suitable for capacitive
differential time measurement between pulse sources,
measurement
as well as asynchronous pulse generation. By working
with other on-chip analog modules, the CTMU can be The CTMU works in conjunction with the A/D Converter
used to precisely measure time, measure capacitance, to provide up to 28(1) channels for time or charge
measure relative changes in capacitance or generate measurement, depending on the specific device and
output pulses with a specific time delay. The CTMU is the number of A/D channels available. When config-
ideal for interfacing with capacitive-based sensors. ured for time delay, the CTMU is connected to the
C12IN1- input of Comparator 2. The level-sensitive
The module includes the following key features:
input edge sources can be selected from four sources:
• Up to 28(1) channels available for capacitive or two external input pins (CTED1/CTED2) or the ECCP1/
time measurement input (E)CCP2 Special Event Triggers.
• On-chip precision current source Figure 19-1 provides a block diagram of the CTMU.
• Four-edge input trigger sources
• Polarity control for each edge source
• Control of edge sequence Note 1: PIC18(L)F2XK22 devices have up to 17
channels available.
• Control of response to edges
FIGURE 19-1: CTMU BLOCK DIAGRAM
CTMUCONH/CTMUCONL
EDGEN CTMUICON
EDGSEQEN
ITRIM<5:0> TGEN
EDG1SELx
EDG1POL IRNG<1:0> IDISSEN
EDG2SELx EDG1STAT CTTRIG
EDG2POL EDG2STAT Current Source
CTED1 Edge
CTMU
Control Control
CTED2 Logic Current Logic
Control
ECCP2
Pulse CTPLS
ECCP1 Generator
A/D Converter Comparator 2
Input
Comparator 2 Output

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
19.1 CTMU Operation 19.1.2 CURRENT SOURCE
The CTMU works by using a fixed current source to At the heart of the CTMU is a precision current source,
charge a circuit. The type of circuit depends on the type designed to provide a constant reference for measure-
of measurement being made. In the case of charge ments. The level of current is user-selectable across
measurement, the current is fixed, and the amount of three ranges or a total of two orders of magnitude, with
time the current is applied to the circuit is fixed. The the ability to trim the output in ±2% increments
amount of voltage read by the A/D is then a measure- (nominal). The current range is selected by the
ment of the capacitance of the circuit. In the case of IRNG<1:0> bits (CTMUICON<1:0>), with a value of
time measurement, the current, as well as the capaci- ‘00’ representing the lowest range.
tance of the circuit, is fixed. In this case, the voltage Current trim is provided by the ITRIM<5:0> bits
read by the A/D is then representative of the amount of (CTMUICON<7:2>). These six bits allow trimming of
time elapsed from the time the current source starts the current source in steps of approximately 2% per
and stops charging the circuit. step. Note that half of the range adjusts the current
If the CTMU is being used as a time delay, both source positively and the other half reduces the current
capacitance and current source are fixed, as well as the source. A value of ‘000000’ is the neutral position (no
voltage supplied to the comparator circuit. The delay of change). A value of ‘100000’ is the maximum negative
a signal is determined by the amount of time it takes the adjustment (approximately -62%) and ‘011111’ is the
voltage to charge to the comparator threshold voltage. maximum positive adjustment (approximately +62%).
19.1.1 THEORY OF OPERATION 19.1.3 EDGE SELECTION AND CONTROL

The operation of the CTMU is based on the equation CTMU measurements are controlled by edge events
for charge: occurring on the module’s two input channels. Each
channel, referred to as Edge 1 and Edge 2, can be con-
dV figured to receive input pulses from one of the edge
C = I  -------
dT input pins (CTED1 and CTED2) or ECCPx Special
More simply, the amount of charge measured in Event Triggers. The input channels are level-sensitive,
coulombs in a circuit is defined as current in amperes responding to the instantaneous level on the channel
(I) multiplied by the amount of time in seconds that the rather than a transition between levels. The inputs are
current flows (t). Charge is also defined as the selected using the EDG1SEL and EDG2SEL bit pairs
capacitance in farads (C) multiplied by the voltage of (CTMUCONL<3:2 and 6:5>).
the circuit (V). It follows that: In addition to source, each channel can be configured for
event polarity using the EDGE2POL and EDGE1POL
I  t = C  V. bits (CTMUCONL<7,4>). The input channels can also
be filtered for an edge event sequence (Edge 1 occur-
The CTMU module provides a constant, known current ring before Edge 2) by setting the EDGSEQEN bit
source. The A/D Converter is used to measure (V) in (CTMUCONH<2>).
the equation, leaving two unknowns: capacitance (C)
and time (t). The above equation can be used to calcu- 19.1.4 EDGE STATUS
late capacitance or time, by either the relationship
The CTMUCONL register also contains two Status bits:
using the known fixed capacitance of the circuit:
EDG2STAT and EDG1STAT (CTMUCONL<1:0>).
t = C  V  I Their primary function is to show if an edge response
has occurred on the corresponding channel. The
or by: CTMU automatically sets a particular bit when an edge
response is detected on its channel. The level-sensitive
C = I  t  V nature of the input channels also means that the Status
bits become set immediately if the channel’s configura-
tion is changed and is the same as the channel’s
using a fixed time that the current source is applied to
current state.
the circuit.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
The module uses the edge Status bits to control the 19.2 CTMU Module Initialization
current source output to external analog modules (such
as the A/D Converter). Current is only supplied to The following sequence is a general guideline used to
external modules when only one (but not both) of the initialize the CTMU module:
Status bits is set, and shuts current off when both bits 1. Select the current source range using the IRNG
are either set or cleared. This allows the CTMU to bits (CTMUICON<1:0>).
measure current only during the interval between 2. Adjust the current source trim using the ITRIM
edges. After both Status bits are set, it is necessary to bits (CTMUICON<7:2>).
clear them before another measurement is taken. Both
3. Configure the edge input sources for Edge 1 and
bits should be cleared simultaneously, if possible, to
Edge 2 by setting the EDG1SEL and EDG2SEL
avoid re-enabling the CTMU current source.
bits (CTMUCONL<3:2 and 6:5>).
In addition to being set by the CTMU hardware, the 4. Configure the input polarities for the edge inputs
edge Status bits can also be set by software. This is using the EDG1POL and EDG2POL bits
also the user’s application to manually enable or (CTMUCONL<4,7>). The default configuration
disable the current source. Setting either one (but not is for negative edge polarity (high-to-low
both) of the bits enables the current source. Setting or transitions).
clearing both bits at once disables the source.
5. Enable edge sequencing using the EDGSEQEN
bit (CTMUCONH<2>). By default, edge
19.1.5 INTERRUPTS
sequencing is disabled.
The CTMU sets its interrupt flag (PIR3<2>) whenever 6. Select the operating mode (Measurement or
the current source is enabled, then disabled. An Time Delay) with the TGEN bit. The default
interrupt is generated only if the corresponding mode is Time/Capacitance Measurement.
interrupt enable bit (PIE3<2>) is also set. If edge
7. Discharge the connected circuit by setting the
sequencing is not enabled (i.e., Edge 1 must occur
IDISSEN bit (CTMUCONH<1>); after waiting a
before Edge 2), it is necessary to monitor the edge
sufficient time for the circuit to discharge, clear
Status bits and determine which edge occurred last and
IDISSEN.
caused the interrupt.
8. Disable the module by clearing the CTMUEN bit
(CTMUCONH<7>).
9. Enable the module by setting the CTMUEN bit.
10. Clear the Edge Status bits: EDG2STAT and
EDG1STAT (CTMUCONL<1:0>).
11. Enable both edge inputs by setting the EDGEN
bit (CTMUCONH<3>).
Depending on the type of measurement or pulse
generation being performed, one or more additional
modules may also need to be initialized and configured
with the CTMU module:
• Edge Source Generation: In addition to the
external edge input pins, both Timer1 and the
Output Compare/PWM1 module can be used as
edge sources for the CTMU.
• Capacitance or Time Measurement: The CTMU
module uses the A/D Converter to measure the
voltage across a capacitor that is connected to one
of the analog input channels.
• Pulse Generation: When generating system clock
independent output pulses, the CTMU module
uses Comparator 2 and the associated
comparator voltage reference.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
19.3 Calibrating the CTMU Module FIGURE 19-2: CTMU CURRENT SOURCE
CALIBRATION CIRCUIT
The CTMU requires calibration for precise
measurements of capacitance and time, as well as for
accurate time delay. If the application only requires PIC18(L)FXXK22 Device
measurement of a relative change in capacitance or CTMU
Current Source
time, calibration is usually not necessary. An example of
this type of application would include a capacitive touch
switch, in which the touch circuit has a baseline
capacitance, and the added capacitance of the human
body changes the overall capacitance of a circuit.
A/D Converter
If actual capacitance or time measurement is required,
two hardware calibrations must take place: the current
source needs calibration to set it to a precise current, ANx
A/D
and the circuit being measured needs calibration to
measure and/or nullify all other capacitance other than RCAL MUX
that to be measured.
19.3.1 CURRENT SOURCE CALIBRATION

The current source on board the CTMU module has a A value of 70% of full-scale voltage is chosen to make
range of ±60% nominal for each of three current sure that the A/D Converter was in a range that is well
ranges. Therefore, for precise measurements, it is above the noise floor. Keep in mind that if an exact cur-
possible to measure and adjust this current source by rent is chosen, that is to incorporate the trimming bits
placing a high precision resistor, RCAL, onto an unused from CTMUICON, the resistor value of RCAL may need
analog channel. An example circuit is shown in to be adjusted accordingly. RCAL may also be adjusted
Figure 19-2. The current source measurement is to allow for available resistor values. RCAL should be of
performed using the following steps: the highest precision available, keeping in mind the
amount of precision needed for the circuit that the
1. Initialize the A/D Converter. CTMU will be used to measure. A recommended
2. Initialize the CTMU. minimum would be 0.1% tolerance.
3. Enable the current source by setting EDG1STAT The following examples show one typical method for
(CTMUCONL<0>). performing a CTMU current calibration. Example 19-1
4. Issue settling time delay. demonstrates how to initialize the A/D Converter and
5. Perform A/D conversion. the CTMU; this routine is typical for applications using
6. Calculate the current source current using both modules. Example 19-2 demonstrates one
I = V/ RCAL, where RCAL is a high precision method for the actual calibration routine.
resistance and V is measured by performing an
A/D conversion.
The CTMU current source may be trimmed with the
trim bits in CTMUICON using an iterative process to get
an exact desired current. Alternatively, the nominal
value without adjustment may be used; it may be
stored by the software for use in all subsequent
capacitive or time measurements.
To calculate the value for RCAL, the nominal current
must be chosen, and then the resistance can be
calculated. For example, if the A/D Converter reference
voltage is 3.3V, use 70% of full scale, or 2.31V as the
desired approximate voltage to be read by the A/D
Converter. If the range of the CTMU current source is
selected to be 0.55 A, the resistor value needed is cal-
culated as RCAL = 2.31V/0.55 A, for a value of 4.2 MΩ.
Similarly, if the current source is chosen to be 5.5 A,
RCAL would be 420,000Ω, and 42,000Ω if the current
source is set to 55 A.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
EXAMPLE 19-1: SETUP FOR CTMU CALIBRATION ROUTINES
#include "p18cxxx.h"
/**************************************************************************/
/*Setup CTMU *****************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************/
void setup(void)
{ //CTMUCONH/1 - CTMU Control registers
CTMUCONH = 0x00; //make sure CTMU is disabled

CTMUCONL = 0x90;
//CTMU continues to run when emulator is stopped,CTMU continues
//to run in idle mode,Time Generation mode disabled, Edges are blocked
//No edge sequence order, Analog current source not grounded, trigger
//output disabled, Edge2 polarity = positive level, Edge2 source =
//source 0, Edge1 polarity = positive level, Edge1 source = source 0,
//CTMUICON - CTMU Current Control Register

CTMUICON = 0x01; //0.55uA, Nominal - No Adjustment
/**************************************************************************/
//Setup AD converter;
/**************************************************************************/
TRISA=0x04; //set channel 2 as an input
// Configure AN2 as an analog channel

ANSELAbits.ANSA2=1;
TRISAbits.TRISA2=1;
// ADCON2
ADCON2bits.ADFM=1; // Results format 1= Right justified
ADCON2bits.ACQT=1; // Acquition time 7 = 20TAD 2 = 4TAD 1=2TAD
ADCON2bits.ADCS=2; // Clock conversion bits 6= FOSC/64 2=FOSC/32
// ADCON1
ADCON1bits.PVCFG0 =0; // Vref+ = AVdd
ADCON1bits.NVCFG1 =0; // Vref- = AVss
// ADCON0
ADCON0bits.CHS=2; // Select ADC channel
ADCON0bits.ADON=1; // Turn on ADC

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
EXAMPLE 19-2: CURRENT CALIBRATION ROUTINE
#define COUNT 500 //@ 8MHz = 125uS.

#define DELAY for(i=0;i<COUNT;i++)
#define RCAL .027 //R value is 4200000 (4.2M)
//scaled so that result is in
//1/100th of uA
#define ADSCALE 1023 //for unsigned conversion 10 sig bits
#define ADREF 3.3 //Vdd connected to A/D Vr+
int main(void)
{
int i;
int j = 0; //index for loop
unsigned int Vread = 0;
double VTot = 0;
float Vavg=0, Vcal=0, CTMUISrc = 0; //float values stored for calcs
//assume CTMU and A/D have been setup correctly

//see Example 25-1 for CTMU & A/D setup
setup();
CTMUCONHbits.CTMUEN = 1; //Enable the CTMU

CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 0; // Set Edge status bits to zero
CTMUCONLbits.EDG2STAT = 0;
for(j=0;j<10;j++)
{
CTMUCONHbits.IDISSEN = 1; //drain charge on the circuit
DELAY; //wait 125us
CTMUCONHbits.IDISSEN = 0; //end drain of circuit
CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 1; //Begin charging the circuit

//using CTMU current source
DELAY; //wait for 125us
CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 0; //Stop charging circuit
PIR1bits.ADIF = 0; //make sure A/D Int not set

ADCON0bits.GO=1; //and begin A/D conv.
while(!PIR1bits.ADIF); //Wait for A/D convert complete
Vread = ADRES; //Get the value from the A/D

PIR1bits.ADIF = 0; //Clear A/D Interrupt Flag
VTot += Vread; //Add the reading to the total
}
Vavg = (float)(VTot/10.000); //Average of 10 readings

Vcal = (float)(Vavg/ADSCALE*ADREF);
CTMUISrc = Vcal/RCAL; //CTMUISrc is in 1/100ths of uA

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
19.3.2 CAPACITANCE CALIBRATION
There is a small amount of capacitance from the
internal A/D Converter sample capacitor as well as
stray capacitance from the circuit board traces and
pads that affect the precision of capacitance
measurements. A measurement of the stray
capacitance can be taken by making sure the desired
capacitance to be measured has been removed. The
measurement is then performed using the following
steps:
1. Initialize the A/D Converter and the CTMU.
2. Set EDG1STAT (= 1).
3. Wait for a fixed delay of time t.
4. Clear EDG1STAT.
5. Perform an A/D conversion.
6. Calculate the stray and A/D sample capacitances:
C OFFSET = C STRAY + C AD =  I  t   V
where I is known from the current source measurement

step, t is a fixed delay and V is measured by performing
an A/D conversion.
This measured value is then stored and used for
calculations of time measurement or subtracted for
capacitance measurement. For calibration, it is
expected that the capacitance of CSTRAY + CAD is
approximately known. CAD is approximately 4 pF.
An iterative process may need to be used to adjust the
time, t, that the circuit is charged to obtain a reasonable
voltage reading from the A/D Converter. The value of t
may be determined by setting COFFSET to a theoretical
value, then solving for t. For example, if CSTRAY is
theoretically calculated to be 11 pF, and V is expected
to be 70% of VDD, or 2.31V, then t would be:
(4 pF + 11 pF) • 2.31V/0.55 A
or 63 s.
See Example 19-3 for a typical routine for CTMU
capacitance calibration.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
EXAMPLE 19-3: CAPACITANCE CALIBRATION ROUTINE
#define COUNT 25 //@ 8MHz INTFRC = 62.5 us.

#define ETIME COUNT*2.5 //time in uS
#define ADSCALE 1023 //for unsigned conversion 10 sig
bits
#define ADREF 3.3 //Vdd connected to A/D Vr+
#define RCAL .027 //R value is 4200000 (4.2M)
//scaled so that result is in
//1/100th of uA
int main(void)
{
int i;
int j = 0; //index for loop
unsigned int Vread = 0;
float CTMUISrc, CTMUCap, Vavg, VTot, Vcal;

setup();
CTMUCONHbits.CTMUEN = 1; //Enable the CTMU

for(j=0;j<10;j++)
{
DELAY; //wait 125us



PIR1bits.ADIF = 0; //Clear A/D Interrupt Flag
VTot += Vread; //Add the reading to the total
}
Vavg = (float)(VTot/10.000); //Average of 10 readings

Vcal = (float)(Vavg/ADSCALE*ADREF);
CTMUISrc = Vcal/RCAL; //CTMUISrc is in 1/100ths of uA
CTMUCap = (CTMUISrc*ETIME/Vcal)/100;
}

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
19.4 Measuring Capacitance with the 19.4.2 RELATIVE CHARGE
CTMU MEASUREMENT
There are two separate methods of measuring An application may not require precise capacitance
capacitance with the CTMU. The first is the absolute measurements. For example, when detecting a valid
method, in which the actual capacitance value is press of a capacitance-based switch, detecting a rela-
desired. The second is the relative method, in which tive change of capacitance is of interest. In this type of
the actual capacitance is not needed, rather an application, when the switch is open (or not touched),
indication of a change in capacitance is required. the total capacitance is the capacitance of the combina-
tion of the board traces, the A/D Converter, etc. A larger
19.4.1 ABSOLUTE CAPACITANCE voltage will be measured by the A/D Converter. When
MEASUREMENT the switch is closed (or is touched), the total
capacitance is larger due to the addition of the
For absolute capacitance measurements, both the capacitance of the human body to the above listed
current and capacitance calibration steps found in capacitances, and a smaller voltage will be measured
Section 19.3 “Calibrating the CTMU Module” by the A/D Converter.
should be followed. Capacitance measurements are
then performed using the following steps: Detecting capacitance changes is easily accomplished
with the CTMU using these steps:
1. Initialize the A/D Converter.
1. Initialize the A/D Converter and the CTMU.
2. Initialize the CTMU.
2. Set EDG1STAT.
3. Set EDG1STAT.
3. Wait for a fixed delay.
4. Wait for a fixed delay, T.
4. Clear EDG1STAT.
5. Clear EDG1STAT.
7. Calculate the total capacitance, CTOTAL = (I * T)/V, The voltage measured by performing the A/D
where I is known from the current source conversion is an indication of the relative capacitance.
measurement step (see Section 19.3.1 “Current Note that in this case, no calibration of the current
Source Calibration”), T is a fixed delay and V is source or circuit capacitance measurement is needed.
measured by performing an A/D conversion. See Example 19-4 for a sample software routine for a
capacitive touch switch.
8. Subtract the stray and A/D capacitance
(COFFSET from Section 19.3.2 “Capacitance
Calibration”) from CTOTAL to determine the
measured capacitance.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
EXAMPLE 19-4: ROUTINE FOR CAPACITIVE TOUCH SWITCH
#define COUNT 500 //@ 8MHz = 125uS.

#define OPENSW 1000 //Un-pressed switch value
#define TRIP 300 //Difference between pressed
//and un-pressed switch
#define HYST 65 //amount to change
//from pressed to un-pressed
#define PRESSED 1
#define UNPRESSED 0
int main(void)
{
unsigned int Vread; //storage for reading
unsigned int switchState;
int i;

setup();
CTMUCONHbits.CTMUEN = 1; // Enable the CTMU

DELAY; //wait 125us


if(Vread < OPENSW - TRIP)

{
switchState = PRESSED;
}
else if(Vread > OPENSW - TRIP + HYST)
{
switchState = UNPRESSED;
}
}

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
19.5 Measuring Time with the CTMU It is assumed that the time measured is small enough
Module that the capacitance, COFFSET, provides a valid voltage
to the A/D Converter. For the smallest time measure-
Time can be precisely measured after the ratio (C/I) is ment, always set the A/D Channel Select register
measured from the current and capacitance calibration (AD1CHS) to an unused A/D channel; the correspond-
step by following these steps: ing pin for which is not connected to any circuit board
1. Initialize the A/D Converter and the CTMU. trace. This minimizes added stray capacitance, keep-
ing the total circuit capacitance close to that of the A/D
2. Set EDG1STAT.
Converter itself (4-5 pF). To measure longer time
3. Set EDG2STAT. intervals, an external capacitor may be connected to an
4. Perform an A/D conversion. A/D channel and this channel selected when making a
5. Calculate the time between edges as T = (C/I) * V, time measurement.
where I is calculated in the current calibration step
(Section 19.3.1 “Current Source Calibration”),
C is calculated in the capacitance calibration step
(Section 19.3.2 “Capacitance Calibration”) and
V is measured by performing the A/D conversion.
FIGURE 19-3: TYPICAL CONNECTIONS AND INTERNAL CONFIGURATION FOR TIME

MEASUREMENT
PIC18(L)FXXK22 Device
CTMU
CTED1 EDG1
Current Source
CTED2 EDG2
Output Pulse
A/D Converter
ANX
CAD
RPR

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
19.6 Creating a Delay with the CTMU An example use of this feature is for interfacing with
Module variable capacitive-based sensors, such as a humidity
sensor. As the humidity varies, the pulse width output
A unique feature on board the CTMU module is its on CTPLS will vary. The CTPLS output pin can be con-
ability to generate system clock independent output nected to an input capture pin and the varying pulse
pulses based on an external capacitor value. This is width is measured to determine the humidity in the
accomplished using the internal comparator voltage application.
reference module, Comparator 2 input pin and an
Follow these steps to use this feature:
external capacitor. The pulse is output onto the CTPLS
pin. To enable this mode, set the TGEN bit. 1. Initialize Comparator 2.
See Figure 19-4 for an example circuit. CPULSE is 2. Initialize the comparator voltage reference.
chosen by the user to determine the output pulse width 3. Initialize the CTMU and enable time delay
on CTPLS. The pulse width is calculated by generation by setting the TGEN bit.
T = (CPULSE /I)*V, where I is known from the current 4. Set EDG1STAT.
source measurement step (Section 19.3.1 “Current 5. When CPULSE charges to the value of the voltage
Source Calibration”) and V is the internal reference reference trip point, an output pulse is generated
voltage (CVREF). on CTPLS.
FIGURE 19-4: TYPICAL CONNECTIONS AND INTERNAL CONFIGURATION FOR PULSE

DELAY GENERATION
PIC18(L)FXXK22 Device
CTMU
CTED1 EDG1 CTPLS
Current Source
Comparator
C12IN1-
C2
CPULSE CVREF
19.7 Operation During Sleep/Idle module is performing an operation when Idle mode is
Modes invoked, in this case, the results will be similar to those
with Sleep mode.
19.7.1 SLEEP MODE AND DEEP SLEEP
MODES 19.8 CTMU Peripheral Module Disable
When the device enters any Sleep mode, the CTMU (PMD)
module current source is always disabled. If the CTMU When this peripheral is not used, the Peripheral
is performing an operation that depends on the current Module Disable bit can be set to disconnect all clock
source when Sleep mode is invoked, the operation may sources to the module, reducing power consumption to
not terminate correctly. Capacitance and time an absolute minimum. See Section 3.6 “Selective
measurements may return erroneous values. Peripheral Module Control”.
19.7.2 IDLE MODE
The behavior of the CTMU in Idle mode is determined
by the CTMUSIDL bit (CTMUCONH<5>). If CTMUSIDL
is cleared, the module will continue to operate in Idle
mode. If CTMUSIDL is set, the module’s current source
is disabled when the device enters Idle mode. If the

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
19.9 Effects of a Reset on CTMU 19.10 Registers
Upon Reset, all registers of the CTMU are cleared. This There are three control registers for the CTMU:
leaves the CTMU module disabled, its current source is • CTMUCONH
turned off and all configuration options return to their
• CTMUCONL
default settings. The module needs to be re-initialized
following any Reset. • CTMUICON
If the CTMU is in the process of taking a measurement at The CTMUCONH and CTMUCONL registers
the time of Reset, the measurement will be lost. A partial (Register 19-1 and Register 19-2) contain control bits
charge may exist on the circuit that was being measured, for configuring the CTMU module edge source selec-
and should be properly discharged before the CTMU tion, edge source polarity selection, edge sequencing,
makes subsequent attempts to make a measurement. A/D trigger, analog circuit capacitor discharge and
The circuit is discharged by setting and then clearing the enables. The CTMUICON register (Register 19-3) has
IDISSEN bit (CTMUCONH<1>) while the A/D Converter bits for selecting the current source range and current
is connected to the appropriate channel. source trim.
REGISTER 19-1: CTMUCONH: CTMU CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0
CTMUEN — CTMUSIDL TGEN EDGEN EDGSEQEN IDISSEN CTTRIG
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CTMUEN: CTMU Enable bit

1 = Module is enabled
0 = Module is disabled
bit 5 CTMUSIDL: Stop in Idle Mode bit
1 = Discontinue module operation when device enters Idle mode
0 = Continue module operation in Idle mode
bit 4 TGEN: Time Generation Enable bit
1 = Enables edge delay generation
0 = Disables edge delay generation
bit 3 EDGEN: Edge Enable bit
1 = Edges are not blocked
0 = Edges are blocked
bit 2 EDGSEQEN: Edge Sequence Enable bit
1 = Edge 1 event must occur before Edge 2 event can occur
0 = No edge sequence is needed
bit 1 IDISSEN: Analog Current Source Control bit
1 = Analog current source output is grounded
0 = Analog current source output is not grounded
bit 0 CTTRIG: CTMU Special Event Trigger Control Bit
1 = CTMU Special Event Trigger is enabled
0 = CTMU Special Event Trigger is disabled

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 19-2: CTMUCONL: CTMU CONTROL REGISTER 1
EDG2POL EDG2SEL<1:0> EDG1POL EDG1SEL1 EDG1SEL0 EDG2STAT EDG1STAT
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 EDG2POL: Edge 2 Polarity Select bit

1 = Edge 2 programmed for a positive edge response
0 = Edge 2 programmed for a negative edge response
bit 6-5 EDG2SEL<1:0>: Edge 2 Source Select bits
11 = CTED1 pin
10 = CTED2 pin
01 = ECCP1 Special Event Trigger
bit 4 EDG1POL: Edge 1 Polarity Select bit
1 = Edge 1 programmed for a positive edge response
0 = Edge 1 programmed for a negative edge response
bit 3-2 EDG1SEL<1:0>: Edge 1 Source Select bits
11 = CTED1 pin
10 = CTED2 pin
bit 1 EDG2STAT: Edge 2 Status bit
1 = Edge 2 event has occurred
0 = Edge 2 event has not occurred
bit 0 EDG1STAT: Edge 1 Status bit
1 = Edge 1 event has occurred
0 = Edge 1 event has not occurred

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 19-3: CTMUICON: CTMU CURRENT CONTROL REGISTER
ITRIM<5:0> IRNG<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-2 ITRIM<5:0>: Current Source Trim bits

011111 = Maximum positive change from nominal current
011110
.
.
.
000001 = Minimum positive change from nominal current
000000 = Nominal current output specified by IRNG<1:0>
111111 = Minimum negative change from nominal current
.
.
.
100010
100001 = Maximum negative change from nominal current
bit 1-0 IRNG<1:0>: Current Source Range Select bits
11 = 100  Base current
10 = 10  Base current
01 = Base current level (0.55 A nominal)
00 = Current source disabled
TABLE 19-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CTMU MODULE

Reset
on Page

CTMUCONL EDG2POL EDG2SEL<1:0> EDG1POL EDG1SEL<1:0> EDG2STAT EDG1STAT 330
CTMUICON ITRIM<5:0> IRNG<1:0> 331
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used during CTMU operation.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
20.0 SR LATCH 20.2 Latch Output
The module consists of a single SR Latch with multiple The SRQEN and SRNQEN bits of the SRCON0 register
Set and Reset inputs as well as separate latch outputs. control the Q and Q latch outputs. Both of the SR Latch
The SR Latch module includes the following features: outputs may be directly output to I/O pins at the same
time. Control is determined by the state of bits SRQEN
• Programmable input selection
and SRNQEN in the SRCON0 register.
• SR Latch output is available internally/externally
The applicable TRIS bit of the corresponding port must
• Selectable Q and Q output
be cleared to enable the port pin output driver.
• Firmware Set and Reset
The SR Latch can be used in a variety of analog 20.3 DIVSRCLK Clock Generation
applications, including oscillator circuits, one-shot
circuit, hysteretic controllers, and analog timing The DIVSRCLK clock signal is generated from the
applications. peripheral clock which is pre-scaled by a value
determined by the SRCLK<2:0> bits. See Figure 20-2
20.1 Latch Operation and Table for additional detail.
The latch is a Set-Reset Latch that does not depend on 20.4 Effects of a Reset
a clock source. Each of the Set and Reset inputs are
active-high. The latch can be set or reset by: Upon any device Reset, the SR Latch is not initialized,
and the SRQ and SRNQ outputs are unknown. The
• Software control (SRPS and SRPR bits)
user’s firmware is responsible to initialize the latch
• Comparator C1 output (SYNCC1OUT) output before enabling it to the output pins.
• Comparator C2 output (SYNCC2OUT)
• SRI Pin
• Programmable clock (DIVSRCLK)
The SRPS and the SRPR bits of the SRCON0 register
may be used to set or reset the SR Latch, respectively.
The latch is Reset-dominant. Therefore, if both Set and
Reset inputs are high, the latch will go to the Reset
state. Both the SRPS and SRPR bits are self resetting
which means that a single write to either of the bits is all
that is necessary to complete a latch Set or Reset
operation.
The output from Comparator C1 or C2 can be used as
the Set or Reset inputs of the SR Latch. The output of
either Comparator can be synchronized to the Timer1
clock source. See Section 18.0 “Comparator
Module” and Section 12.0 “Timer1/3/5 Module with
Gate Control” for more information.
An external source on the SRI pin can be used as the
Set or Reset inputs of the SR Latch.
An internal clock source, DIVSRCLK, is available and it
can periodically set or reset the SR Latch. The
SRCLK<2:0> bits in the SRCON0 register are used to
select the clock source period. The SRSCKE and
SRRCKE bits of the SRCON1 register enable the clock
source to set or reset the SR Latch, respectively.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 20-1: DIVSRCLK BLOCK DIAGRAM
3
SRCLK<2:0>
Programmable
SRCLK divider
Peripheral 1:4 to 1:512 DIVSRCLK
Clock 4-512 cycles
...
t0 t0+4 t0+8 t0+12
Tosc
SRCLK<2:0> = "001"
1:8
FIGURE 20-2: SR LATCH SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM
SRLEN
SRPS Pulse SRQEN
Gen(2)
SRI
SRSPE S Q
DIVSRCLK SRQ
SRSCKE
SYNCC2OUT(3)
SRSC2E
SYNCC1OUT(3)
SR
SRSC1E
Latch(1)
SRPR Pulse
Gen(2)
SRI
SRRPE R Q
DIVSRCLK SRNQ
SRRCKE SRLEN
SYNCC2OUT(3) SRNQEN
SRRC2E
SYNCC1OUT(3)
SRRC1E
Note 1: If R = 1 and S = 1 simultaneously, Q = 0, Q = 1

2: Pulse generator causes a pulse width of 2 TOSC clock cycles.
3: Name denotes the connection point at the comparator output.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 20-1: DIVSRCLK FREQUENCY TABLE

SRCLK<2:0> Divider FOSC = 20 MHz FOSC = 16 MHz FOSC = 8 MHz FOSC = 4 MHz FOSC = 1 MHz
111 512 25.6 s 32 s 64 s 128 s 512 s

110 256 12.8 s 16 s 32 s 64 s 256 s
101 128 6.4 s 8 s 16 s 32 s 128 s
100 64 3.2 s 4 s 8 s 16 s 64 s
011 32 1.6 s 2 s 4 s 8 s 32 s
010 16 0.8 s 1 s 2 s 4 s 16 s
001 8 0.4 s 0.5 s 1 s 2 s 8 s
000 4 0.2 s 0.25 s 0.5 s 1 s 4 s
REGISTER 20-1: SRCON0: SR LATCH CONTROL REGISTER

SRLEN SRCLK<2:0> SRQEN SRNQEN SRPS SRPR
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SRLEN: SR Latch Enable bit(1)

1 = SR latch is enabled
0 = SR latch is disabled
bit 6-4 SRCLK<2:0>: SR Latch Clock Divider Bits
000 = Generates a 2 TOSC wide pulse on DIVSRCLK every 4 peripheral clock cycles
bit 3 SRQEN: SR Latch Q Output Enable bit
1 = Q is present on the SRQ pin
0 = Q is internal only
bit 2 SRNQEN: SR Latch Q Output Enable bit
1 = Q is present on the SRNQ pin
0 = Q is internal only
bit 1 SRPS: Pulse Set Input of the SR Latch bit(2)
1 = Pulse set input for 2 TOSC clock cycles
0 = No effect on set input
bit 0 SRPR: Pulse Reset Input of the SR Latch bit(2)
1 = Pulse reset input for 2 TOSC clock cycles
0 = No effect on Reset input
Note 1: Changing the SRCLK bits while the SR latch is enabled may cause false triggers to the set and Reset
inputs of the latch.
2: Set only, always reads back ‘0’.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 20-2: SRCON1: SR LATCH CONTROL REGISTER 1

SRSPE SRSCKE SRSC2E SRSC1E SRRPE SRRCKE SRRC2E SRRC1E
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 SRSPE: SR Latch Peripheral Set Enable bit

1 = SRI pin status sets SR Latch
0 = SRI pin status has no effect on SR Latch
bit 6 SRSCKE: SR Latch Set Clock Enable bit
1 = Set input of SR latch is pulsed with DIVSRCLK
0 = Set input of SR latch is not pulsed with DIVSRCLK
bit 5 SRSC2E: SR Latch C2 Set Enable bit
1 = C2 Comparator output sets SR Latch
0 = C2 Comparator output has no effect on SR Latch
bit 4 SRSC1E: SR Latch C1 Set Enable bit
1 = C1 Comparator output sets SR Latch
bit 3 SRRPE: SR Latch Peripheral Reset Enable bit
1 = SRI pin resets SR Latch
0 = SRI pin has no effect on SR Latch
bit 2 SRRCKE: SR Latch Reset Clock Enable bit
1 = Reset input of SR latch is pulsed with DIVSRCLK
0 = Reset input of SR latch is not pulsed with DIVSRCLK
bit 1 SRRC2E: SR Latch C2 Reset Enable bit
1 = C2 Comparator output resets SR Latch
bit 0 SRRC1E: SR Latch C1 Reset Enable bit
1 = C1 Comparator output resets SR Latch
TABLE 20-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SR LATCH

Reset
on page
SRCON0 SRLEN SRCLK<2:0> SRQEN SRNQEN SRPS SRPR 335
SRCON1 SRSPE SRSCKE SRSC2E SRSC1E SRRPE SRRCKE SRRC2E SRRC1E 336
WPUB WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0 155
Legend: Shaded bits are not used with this module.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
21.0 FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE 21.1 Independent Gain Amplifiers
(FVR) The output of the FVR supplied to the ADC,
The Fixed Voltage Reference, or FVR, is a stable Comparators and DAC is routed through an
voltage reference, independent of VDD, with 1.024V, independent programmable gain amplifier. The
2.048V or 4.096V selectable output levels. The output amplifier can be configured to amplify the 1.024V
of the FVR can be configured to supply a reference reference voltage by 1x, 2x or 4x, to produce the three
voltage to the following: possible voltage levels.
• ADC input channel The FVRS<1:0> bits of the VREFCON0 register are
used to enable and configure the gain amplifier settings
• ADC positive reference
for the reference supplied to the DAC and Comparator
• Comparator positive input modules. When the ADC module is configured to use
• Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) the FVR output, (FVR BUF2) the reference is buffered
The FVR can be enabled by setting the FVREN bit of through an additional unity gain amplifier. This buffer is
the VREFCON0 register. disabled if the ADC is not configured to use the FVR.
For specific use of the FVR, refer to the specific module
sections: Section 17.0 “Analog-to-Digital Converter
(ADC) Module”, Section 22.0 “Digital-to-Analog
Converter (DAC) Module” and Section 18.0 “Com-
parator Module”.
21.2 FVR Stabilization Period

When the Fixed Voltage Reference module is enabled, it
requires time for the reference and amplifier circuits to
stabilize. Once the circuits stabilize and are ready for use,
the FVRST bit of the VREFCON0 register will be set. See
Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for the
minimum delay requirement.
FIGURE 21-1: VOLTAGE REFERENCE BLOCK DIAGRAM
X1 FVR BUF2
(To ADC Module)
FVRS<1:0> 2
X1
X2 FVR BUF1
X4 (To Comparators, DAC)
FVREN +
1.024V Fixed
FVRST _ Reference

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 21-1: VREFCON0: FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
FVREN FVRST FVRS<1:0> — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 FVREN: Fixed Voltage Reference Enable bit

0 = Fixed Voltage Reference is disabled
1 = Fixed Voltage Reference is enabled
bit 6 FVRST: Fixed Voltage Reference Ready Flag bit
0 = Fixed Voltage Reference output is not ready or not enabled
1 = Fixed Voltage Reference output is ready for use
bit 5-4 FVRS<1:0>: Fixed Voltage Reference Selection bits
00 = Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is off
01 = Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is 1x (1.024V)
10 = Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is 2x (2.048V)(1)
11 = Fixed Voltage Reference Peripheral output is 4x (4.096V)(1)
bit 3-2 Reserved: Read as ‘0’. Maintain these bits clear.
bit 1-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’.
Note 1: Fixed Voltage Reference output cannot exceed VDD.
TABLE 21-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE

Register
on Page
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by the FVR module.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
22.0 DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG The negative voltage source is disabled by setting the
DACLPS bit in the VREFCON1 register. Clearing the
CONVERTER (DAC) MODULE
DACLPS bit in the VREFCON1 register disables the
The Digital-to-Analog Converter supplies a variable positive voltage source.
voltage reference, ratiometric with the input source,
with 32 selectable output levels. 22.4 Output Clamped to Positive
The input of the DAC can be connected to: Voltage Source
• External VREF pins The DAC output voltage can be set to VSRC+ with the
• VDD supply voltage least amount of power consumption by performing the
• FVR (Fixed Voltage Reference) following:
The output of the DAC can be configured to supply a • Clearing the DACEN bit in the VREFCON1
reference voltage to the following: register.
• Comparator positive input • Setting the DACLPS bit in the VREFCON1
register.
• ADC input channel
• Configuring the DACPSS bits to the proper
• DACOUT pin
positive source.
The Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) can be enabled • Configuring the DACRx bits to ‘11111’ in the
by setting the DACEN bit of the VREFCON1 register. VREFCON2 register.
This is also the method used to output the voltage level
22.1 Output Voltage Selection from the FVR to an output pin. See Section 22.6 “DAC
The DAC has 32 voltage level ranges. The 32 levels Voltage Reference Output” for more information.
are set with the DACR<4:0> bits of the VREFCON2
register. 22.5 Output Clamped to Negative
The DAC output voltage is determined by the following Voltage Source
equations:
The DAC output voltage can be set to VSRC- with the
least amount of power consumption by performing the
EQUATION 22-1: DAC OUTPUT VOLTAGE following:
DACR<4:0>
VOUT =   VSRC+ – VSRC-   ------------------------------- + VSRC- • Clearing the DACEN bit in the VREFCON1
5
2 register.
• Clearing the DACLPS bit in the VREFCON1
VSRC+ = VDD, VREF+ or FVR1 register.
• Configuring the DACPSS bits to the proper
VSRC- = VSS or VREF- negative source.
• Configuring the DACRx bits to ‘00000’ in the
VREFCON2 register.
22.2 Ratiometric Output Level This allows the comparator to detect a zero-crossing
while not consuming additional current through the DAC
The DAC output value is derived using a resistor ladder module.
with each end of the ladder tied to a positive and
negative voltage reference input source. If the voltage 22.6 DAC Voltage Reference Output
of either input source fluctuates, a similar fluctuation will
result in the DAC output value. The DAC can be output to the DACOUT pin by setting
the DACOE bit of the VREFCON1 register to ‘1’.
The value of the individual resistors within the ladder
Selecting the DAC reference voltage for output on the
can be found in Section 27.0 “Electrical
DACOUT pin automatically overrides the digital output
Characteristics”.
buffer and digital input threshold detector functions of
that pin. Reading the DACOUT pin when it has been
22.3 Low-Power Voltage State configured for DAC reference voltage output will always
In order for the DAC module to consume the least return a ‘0’.
amount of power, one of the two voltage reference input Due to the limited current drive capability, a buffer must
sources to the resistor ladder must be disconnected. be used on the DAC voltage reference output for
Either the positive voltage source, (VSRC+), or the external connections to DACOUT. Figure 22-2 shows
negative voltage source, (VSRC-) can be disabled. an example buffering technique.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 22-1: DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER BLOCK DIAGRAM
Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)
Reserved 11
FVR BUF1 10 VSRC+
VREF+ 01
DACR<4:0>
5
VDD 00
R
2
11111
R
DACPSS<1:0>
11110
R
DACEN
DACLPS R
32-to-1 MUX
32
Steps DAC
(To Comparator, CSM and
ADC Modules)
R
R
00001 DACOUT
R
00000
DACOE
DACNSS
VREF- 1 VSRC-
VSS 0
FIGURE 22-2: VOLTAGE REFERENCE OUTPUT BUFFER EXAMPLE
PIC® MCU
DAC
R
Module
+
Voltage DACOUT Buffered DAC Output
–
Reference
Output
Impedance

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
When the device wakes up from Sleep through an A device Reset affects the following:
interrupt or a Watchdog Timer time-out, the contents of • DAC is disabled
the VREFCON1 register are not affected. To minimize
• DAC output voltage is removed from the
current consumption in Sleep mode, the voltage
DACOUT pin
reference should be disabled.
• The DAC1R<4:0> range select bits are cleared
REGISTER 22-1: VREFCON1: VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER 0

R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0
DACEN DACLPS DACOE — DACPSS<1:0> — DACNSS
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 DACEN: DAC Enable bit

1 = DAC is enabled
0 = DAC is disabled
bit 6 DACLPS: DAC Low-Power Voltage Source Select bit
1 = DAC Positive reference source selected
0 = DAC Negative reference source selected
bit 5 DACOE: DAC Voltage Output Enable bit
1 = DAC voltage level is also an output on the DACOUT pin
0 = DAC voltage level is disconnected from the DACOUT pin
bit 3-2 DACPSS<1:0>: DAC Positive Source Select bits
00 = VDD
01 = VREF+
10 = FVR BUF1 output
11 = Reserved, do not use
bit 0 DACNSS: DAC Negative Source Select bits
1 = VREF-
0 = VSS

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 22-2: VREFCON2: VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER 1

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0
— — — DACR<4:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-0 DACR<4:0>: DAC Voltage Output Select bits
VOUT = ((VSRC+) - (VSRC-))*(DACR<4:0>/(25)) + VSRC-
TABLE 22-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH DAC MODULE

Register
on Page
VREFCON2 — — — DACR<4:0> 342
Legend: — = Unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by the DAC module.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
23.0 HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT The High/Low-Voltage Detect Control register
(Register 23-1) completely controls the operation of the
(HLVD)
HLVD module. This allows the circuitry to be “turned
The PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices have a High/Low-Volt- off” by the user under software control, which
age Detect module (HLVD). This is a programmable cir- minimizes the current consumption for the device.
cuit that sets both a device voltage trip point and the The module’s block diagram is shown in Figure 23-1.
direction of change from that point. If the device experi-
ences an excursion past the trip point in that direction, an
interrupt flag is set. If the interrupt is enabled, the pro-
gram execution branches to the interrupt vector address
and the software responds to the interrupt.
REGISTER 23-1: HLVDCON: HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CONTROL REGISTER

R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-1
VDIRMAG BGVST IRVST HLVDEN HLVDL<3:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 VDIRMAG: Voltage Direction Magnitude Select bit

1 = Event occurs when voltage equals or exceeds trip point (HLVDL<3:0>)
0 = Event occurs when voltage equals or falls below trip point (HLVDL<3:0>)
bit 6 BGVST: Band Gap Reference Voltages Stable Status Flag bit
1 = Internal band gap voltage references are stable
0 = Internal band gap voltage reference is not stable
bit 5 IRVST: Internal Reference Voltage Stable Flag bit
1 = Indicates that the voltage detect logic will generate the interrupt flag at the specified voltage range
0 = Indicates that the voltage detect logic will not generate the interrupt flag at the specified voltage
range and the HLVD interrupt should not be enabled
bit 4 HLVDEN: High/Low-Voltage Detect Power Enable bit
1 = HLVD enabled
0 = HLVD disabled
bit 3-0 HLVDL<3:0>: Voltage Detection Level bits(1)
1111 = External analog input is used (input comes from the HLVDIN pin)
1110 = Maximum setting
.
.
.
0000 = Minimum setting
Note 1: See Table 27-4 for specifications.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
The module is enabled by setting the HLVDEN bit trip point voltage. The “trip point” voltage is the voltage
(HLVDCON<4>). Each time the HLVD module is level at which the device detects a high or low-voltage
enabled, the circuitry requires some time to stabilize. event, depending on the configuration of the module.
The IRVST bit (HLVDCON<5>) is a read-only bit used When the supply voltage is equal to the trip point, the
to indicate when the circuit is stable. The module can voltage tapped off of the resistor array is equal to the
only generate an interrupt after the circuit is stable and internal reference voltage generated by the voltage
IRVST is set. reference module. The comparator then generates an
The VDIRMAG bit (HLVDCON<7>) determines the interrupt signal by setting the HLVDIF bit.
overall operation of the module. When VDIRMAG is The trip point voltage is software programmable to any of
cleared, the module monitors for drops in VDD below a 16 values. The trip point is selected by programming the
predetermined set point. When the bit is set, the HLVDL<3:0> bits (HLVDCON<3:0>).
module monitors for rises in VDD above the set point.
The HLVD module has an additional feature that allows
the user to supply the trip voltage to the module from an
23.1 Operation
external source. This mode is enabled when bits,
When the HLVD module is enabled, a comparator uses HLVDL<3:0>, are set to ‘1111’. In this state, the
an internally generated reference voltage as the set comparator input is multiplexed from the external input
point. The set point is compared with the trip point, pin, HLVDIN. This gives users the flexibility of configur-
where each node in the resistor divider represents a ing the High/Low-Voltage Detect interrupt to occur at
any voltage in the valid operating range.
FIGURE 23-1: HLVD MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM (WITH EXTERNAL INPUT)

Externally Generated
Trip Point
VDD
VDD HLVDL<3:0> HLVDCON

Register
HLVDEN VDIRMAG
HLVDIN
Set
16-to-1 MUX
HLVDIF
HLVDEN
Internal Voltage
BOREN Reference
1.024V Typical

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
23.2 HLVD Setup 23.3 Current Consumption
To set up the HLVD module: When the module is enabled, the HLVD comparator
1. Select the desired HLVD trip point by writing the and voltage divider are enabled and consume static
value to the HLVDL<3:0> bits. current. The total current consumption, when enabled,
is specified in Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteris-
2. Set the VDIRMAG bit to detect high voltage
tics”. Depending on the application, the HLVD module
(VDIRMAG = 1) or low voltage (VDIRMAG = 0).
does not need to operate constantly. To reduce current
3. Enable the HLVD module by setting the requirements, the HLVD circuitry may only need to be
HLVDEN bit. enabled for short periods where the voltage is checked.
4. Clear the HLVD interrupt flag (PIR2<2>), which After such a check, the module could be disabled.
may have been set from a previous interrupt.
5. If interrupts are desired, enable the HLVD 23.4 HLVD Start-up Time
interrupt by setting the HLVDIE and GIE/GIEH
bits (PIE2<2> and INTCON<7>, respectively). The internal reference voltage of the HLVD module,
specified in Section 27.0 “Electrical
An interrupt will not be generated until the Characteristics”, may be used by other internal
IRVST bit is set. circuitry, such as the programmable Brown-out Reset.
Note: Before changing any module settings If the HLVD or other circuits using the voltage reference
(VDIRMAG, HLVDL<3:0>), first disable the are disabled to lower the device’s current consumption,
module (HLVDEN = 0), make the changes the reference voltage circuit will require time to become
and re-enable the module. This prevents stable before a low or high-voltage condition can be
the generation of false HLVD events. reliably detected. This start-up time, TIRVST, is an
interval that is independent of device clock speed.
The HLVD interrupt flag is not enabled until TIRVST has
expired and a stable reference voltage is reached. For
this reason, brief excursions beyond the set point may
not be detected during this interval (see Figure 23-2 or
Figure 23-3).
FIGURE 23-2: LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT OPERATION (VDIRMAG = 0)

CASE 1:
HLVDIF may not be set
VDD
VHLVD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
TIRVST
IRVST
HLVDIF cleared in software
Internal Reference is stable
CASE 2:
VDD
VHLVD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
IRVST TIRVST
HLVDIF cleared in software,
HLVDIF remains set since HLVD condition still exists

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 23-3: HIGH-VOLTAGE DETECT OPERATION (VDIRMAG = 1)
CASE 1:
HLVDIF may not be set
VHLVD
VDD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
IRVST TIRVST

CASE 2:
VHLVD
VDD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
IRVST TIRVST

HLVDIF cleared in software,

HLVDIF remains set since HLVD condition still exists
23.5 Applications FIGURE 23-4: TYPICAL LOW-VOLTAGE

DETECT APPLICATION
In many applications, it is desirable to detect a drop
below, or rise above, a particular voltage threshold. For
example, the HLVD module could be periodically
enabled to detect Universal Serial Bus (USB) attach or
detach. This assumes the device is powered by a lower
voltage source than the USB when detached. An attach VA
would indicate a high-voltage detect from, for example, VB
3.3V to 5V (the voltage on USB) and vice versa for a
Voltage
detach. This feature could save a design a few extra

components and an attach signal (input pin).
For general battery applications, Figure 23-4 shows a
possible voltage curve. Over time, the device voltage
decreases. When the device voltage reaches voltage
VA, the HLVD logic generates an interrupt at time, TA.
The interrupt could cause the execution of an ISR, TA TB
Time
which would allow the application to perform “house-
keeping tasks” and a controlled shutdown before the Legend: VA = HLVD trip point
device voltage exits the valid operating range at TB. VB = Minimum valid device
This would give the application a time window, operating voltage
represented by the difference between TA and TB, to
safely exit.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
When enabled, the HLVD circuitry continues to operate A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state.
during Sleep. If the device voltage crosses the trip This forces the HLVD module to be turned off.
point, the HLVDIF bit will be set and the device will
wake-up from Sleep. Device execution will continue
from the interrupt vector address if interrupts have
been globally enabled.
TABLE 23-1: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT MODULE
Reset
on page
HLVDCON VDIRMAG BGVST IRVST HLVDEN HLVDL<3:0> 343
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are unused by the HLVD module.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
24.0 SPECIAL FEATURES OF 24.1 Configuration Bits
THE CPU The Configuration bits can be programmed (read as
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices include several features ‘0’) or left unprogrammed (read as ‘1’) to select various
intended to maximize reliability and minimize cost through device configurations. These bits are mapped starting
elimination of external components. These are: at program memory location 300000h.
• Oscillator Selection The user will note that address 300000h is beyond the
user program memory space. In fact, it belongs to the
• Resets: configuration memory space (300000h-3FFFFFh), which
- Power-on Reset (POR) can only be accessed using table reads and table writes.
- Power-up Timer (PWRT)
Programming the Configuration registers is done in a
- Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) manner similar to programming the Flash memory. The
- Brown-out Reset (BOR) WR bit in the EECON1 register starts a self-timed write
• Interrupts to the Configuration register. In normal operation mode,
• Watchdog Timer (WDT) a TBLWT instruction with the TBLPTR pointing to the
Configuration register sets up the address and the data
• Code Protection
for the Configuration register write. Setting the WR bit
• ID Locations starts a long write to the Configuration register. The
• In-Circuit Serial Programming™ Configuration registers are written a byte at a time. To
The oscillator can be configured for the application write or erase a configuration cell, a TBLWT instruction
depending on frequency, power, accuracy and cost. All can write a ‘1’ or a ‘0’ into the cell. For additional details
of the options are discussed in detail in Section 2.0 on Flash programming, refer to Section 6.5 “Writing
“Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)”. to Flash Program Memory”.
A complete discussion of device Resets and interrupts
is available in previous sections of this data sheet.
In addition to their Power-up and Oscillator Start-up
Timers provided for Resets, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
devices have a Watchdog Timer, which is either
permanently enabled via the Configuration bits or
software controlled (if configured as disabled).
The inclusion of an internal RC oscillator also provides
the additional benefits of a Fail-Safe Clock Monitor
(FSCM) and Two-Speed Start-up. FSCM provides for
background monitoring of the peripheral clock and
automatic switchover in the event of its failure. Two-
Speed Start-up enables code to be executed almost
immediately on start-up, while the primary clock source
completes its start-up delays.
All of these features are enabled and configured by
setting the appropriate Configuration register bits.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 24-1: CONFIGURATION BITS AND DEVICE IDs

Default/
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Unprogrammed
Value
300000h CONFIG1L — — — — — — — — 0000 0000
300001h CONFIG1H IESO FCMEN PRICLKEN PLLCFG FOSC<3:0> 0010 0101
300002h CONFIG2L — — — BORV<1:0> BOREN<1:0> PWRTEN 0001 1111
300003h CONFIG2H — — WDPS<3:0> WDTEN<1:0> 0011 1111
300004h CONFIG3L — — — — — — — — 0000 0000
300005h CONFIG3H MCLRE — P2BMX T3CMX HFOFST CCP3MX PBADEN CCP2MX 1011 1111
300006h CONFIG4L DEBUG XINST — — — LVP(1) — STRVEN 1000 0101
300007h CONFIG4H — — — — — — — — 1111 1111
300008h CONFIG5L — — — — CP3(2) CP2(2) CP1 CP0 0000 1111
300009h CONFIG5H CPD CPB — — — — — — 1100 0000
30000Ah CONFIG6L — — — — WRT3(2) WRT2(2) WRT1 WRT0 0000 1111
30000Bh CONFIG6H WRTD WRTB WRTC(3) — — — — — 1110 0000
30000Ch CONFIG7L — — — — EBTR3(2) EBTR2(2) EBTR1 EBTR0 0000 1111
30000Dh CONFIG7H — EBTRB — — — — — — 0100 0000
3FFFFEh DEVID1(4) DEV<2:0> REV<4:0> qqqq qqqq
3FFFFFh DEVID2(4) DEV<10:3> 0101 qqqq
Legend: – = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Shaded bits are unimplemented, read as '0'.
2: Available on PIC18(L)FX5K22 and PIC18(L)FX6K22 devices only.
3: In user mode, this bit is read-only and cannot be self-programmed.
4: See Register 24-12 and Register 24-13 for DEVID values. DEVID registers are read-only and cannot be programmed by the
user.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 24-1: CONFIG1H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 HIGH

R/P-0 R/P-0 R/P-1 R/P-0 R/P-0 R/P-1 R/P-0 R/P-1
IESO FCMEN PRICLKEN PLLCFG FOSC<3:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit P = Programmable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed x = Bit is unknown
bit 7 IESO(1): Internal/External Oscillator Switchover bit

1 = Oscillator Switchover mode enabled
0 = Oscillator Switchover mode disabled
bit 6 FCMEN(1): Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Enable bit
1 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor enabled
0 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor disabled
bit 5 PRICLKEN: Primary Clock Enable bit
1 = Primary Clock is always enabled
0 = Primary Clock can be disabled by software
bit 4 PLLCFG: 4 x PLL Enable bit
1 = 4 x PLL always enabled, Oscillator multiplied by 4
0 = 4 x PLL is under software control, PLLEN (OSCTUNE<6>)
bit 3-0 FOSC<3:0>: Oscillator Selection bits
1111 = External RC oscillator, CLKOUT function on RA6
1110 = External RC oscillator, CLKOUT function on RA6
1101 = EC oscillator (low power, <500 kHz)
1100 = EC oscillator, CLKOUT function on OSC2 (low power, <500 kHz)
1011 = EC oscillator (medium power, 500 kHz-16 MHz)
1010 = EC oscillator, CLKOUT function on OSC2 (medium power, 500 kHz-16 MHz)
1001 = Internal oscillator block, CLKOUT function on OSC2
1000 = Internal oscillator block
0111 = External RC oscillator
0110 = External RC oscillator, CLKOUT function on OSC2
0101 = EC oscillator (high power, >16 MHz)
0100 = EC oscillator, CLKOUT function on OSC2 (high power, >16 MHz)
0011= HS oscillator (medium power, 4 MHz-16 MHz)
0010= HS oscillator (high power, >16 MHz)
0001= XT oscillator
0000= LP oscillator
Note 1: When FOSC<3:0> is configured for HS, XT, or LP oscillator and FCMEN bit is set, then the IESO bit
should also be set to prevent a false failed clock indication and to enable automatic clock switch over from
the internal oscillator block to the external oscillator when the OST times out.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
REGISTER 24-2: CONFIG2L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 LOW

U-0 U-0 U-0 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1
— — — BORV<1:0>(1) BOREN<1:0>(2) PWRTEN(2)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 4-3 BORV<1:0>: Brown-out Reset Voltage bits(1)
11 = VBOR set to 1.9V nominal
bit 2-1 BOREN<1:0>: Brown-out Reset Enable bits(2)
11 = Brown-out Reset enabled in hardware only (SBOREN is disabled)
10 = Brown-out Reset enabled in hardware only and disabled in Sleep mode
(SBOREN is disabled)
01 = Brown-out Reset enabled and controlled by software (SBOREN is enabled)
00 = Brown-out Reset disabled in hardware and software
bit 0 PWRTEN: Power-up Timer Enable bit(2)
1 = PWRT disabled
0 = PWRT enabled
Note 1: See Section 27.1 “DC Characteristics: Supply Voltage, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22” for specifications.
2: The Power-up Timer is decoupled from Brown-out Reset, allowing these features to be independently controlled.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

U-0 U-0 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1
— — WDTPS<3:0> WDTEN<1:0>
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 5-2 WDTPS<3:0>: Watchdog Timer Postscale Select bits
1111 = 1:32,768
1110 = 1:16,384
1101 = 1:8,192
1100 = 1:4,096
1011 = 1:2,048
1010 = 1:1,024
1001 = 1:512
1000 = 1:256
0111 = 1:128
0110 = 1:64
0101 = 1:32
0100 = 1:16
0011 = 1:8
0010 = 1:4
0001 = 1:2
0000 = 1:1
bit 1-0 WDTEN<1:0>: Watchdog Timer Enable bits
11 = WDT enabled in hardware; SWDTEN bit disabled
10 = WDT controlled by the SWDTEN bit
01 = WDT enabled when device is active, disabled when device is in Sleep; SWDTEN bit disabled
00 = WDT disabled in hardware; SWDTEN bit disabled

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
R/P-1 U-0 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1 R/P-1
MCLRE — P2BMX T3CMX HFOFST CCP3MX PBADEN CCP2MX
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 MCLRE: MCLR Pin Enable bit

1 = MCLR pin enabled; RE3 input pin disabled
0 = RE3 input pin enabled; MCLR disabled
bit 5 P2BMX: P2B Input MUX bit
1 = P2B is on RB5(1)
P2B is on RD2(2)
0 = P2B is on RC0
bit 4 T3CMX: Timer3 Clock Input MUX bit
1 = T3CKI is on RC0
0 = T3CKI is on RB5
bit 3 HFOFST: HFINTOSC Fast Start-up bit
1 = HFINTOSC starts clocking the CPU without waiting for the oscillator to stabilize
0 = The system clock is held off until the HFINTOSC is stable
bit 2 CCP3MX: CCP3 MUX bit
1 = CCP3 input/output is multiplexed with RB5
0 = CCP3 input/output is multiplexed with RC6(1)
CCP3 input/output is multiplexed with RE0(2)
bit 1 PBADEN: PORTB A/D Enable bit
1 = ANSELB<5:0> resets to 1, PORTB<5:0> pins are configured as analog inputs on Reset
0 = ANSELB<5:0> resets to 0, PORTB<4:0> pins are configured as digital I/O on Reset
bit 0 CCP2MX: CCP2 MUX bit
1 = CCP2 input/output is multiplexed with RC1
0 = CCP2 input/output is multiplexed with RB3

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

R/P-1 R/P-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/P-1 U-0 R/P-1
(2) (1)
DEBUG XINST — — — LVP — STVREN
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 DEBUG: Background Debugger Enable bit(2)

1 = Background debugger disabled, RB6 and RB7 configured as general purpose I/O pins
0 = Background debugger enabled, RB6 and RB7 are dedicated to In-Circuit Debug
bit 6 XINST: Extended Instruction Set Enable bit
1 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode enabled
0 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode disabled (Legacy mode)
bit 2 LVP: Single-Supply ICSP Enable bit
1 = Single-Supply ICSP enabled
0 = Single-Supply ICSP disabled
bit 0 STVREN: Stack Full/Underflow Reset Enable bit
1 = Stack full/underflow will cause Reset
0 = Stack full/underflow will not cause Reset
Note 1: Can only be changed by a programmer in high-voltage programming mode.
2: The DEBUG bit is managed automatically by device development tools including debuggers and programmers. For
normal device operations, this bit should be maintained as a ‘1’.

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/C-1 R/C-1 R/C-1 R/C-1
— — — — CP3(1) CP2(1) CP1 CP0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed C = Clearable only bit

bit 3 CP3: Code Protection bit(1)
1 = Block 3 not code-protected
0 = Block 3 code-protected
bit 2 CP2: Code Protection bit(1)
bit 1 CP1: Code Protection bit
bit 0 CP0: Code Protection bit
Note 1: Available on PIC18(L)FX5K22 and PIC18(L)FX6K22 devices.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

R/C-1 R/C-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
CPD CPB — — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 CPD: Data EEPROM Code Protection bit

1 = Data EEPROM not code-protected
0 = Data EEPROM code-protected
bit 6 CPB: Boot Block Code Protection bit
1 = Boot Block not code-protected
0 = Boot Block code-protected

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/C-1 R/C-1 R/C-1 R/C-1
— — — — WRT3(1) WRT2(1) WRT1 WRT0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3 WRT3: Write Protection bit(1)
1 = Block 3 not write-protected
0 = Block 3 write-protected
bit 2 WRT2: Write Protection bit(1)
bit 1 WRT1: Write Protection bit
bit 0 WRT0: Write Protection bit

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

R/C-1 R/C-1 R-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
(1)
WRTD WRTB WRTC — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7 WRTD: Data EEPROM Write Protection bit

1 = Data EEPROM not write-protected
0 = Data EEPROM write-protected
bit 6 WRTB: Boot Block Write Protection bit
1 = Boot Block not write-protected
0 = Boot Block write-protected
bit 5 WRTC: Configuration Register Write Protection bit(1)
1 = Configuration registers not write-protected
0 = Configuration registers write-protected
Note 1: This bit is read-only in normal execution mode; it can be written only in Program mode.

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/C-1 R/C-1 R/C-1 R/C-1
— — — — EBTR3(1) EBTR2(1) EBTR1 EBTR0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 3 EBTR3: Table Read Protection bit(1)
1 = Block 3 not protected from table reads executed in other blocks
0 = Block 3 protected from table reads executed in other blocks
bit 2 EBTR2: Table Read Protection bit(1)
bit 1 EBTR1: Table Read Protection bit
bit 0 EBTR0: Table Read Protection bit

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

U-0 R/C-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0
— EBTRB — — — — — —
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 6 EBTRB: Boot Block Table Read Protection bit
1 = Boot Block not protected from table reads executed in other blocks
0 = Boot Block protected from table reads executed in other blocks
REGISTER 24-12: DEVID1: DEVICE ID REGISTER 1

R R R R R R R R
DEV2 DEV1 DEV0 REV4 REV3 REV2 REV1 REV0
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-5 DEV<2:0>: Device ID bits

These bits, together with DEV<10:3> in DEVID2, determine the device ID.
See Table 24-2 for complete Device ID list.
bit 4-0 REV<4:0>: Revision ID bits
These bits indicate the device revision.
REGISTER 24-13: DEVID2: DEVICE ID REGISTER 2

R R R R R R R R
DEV10 DEV9 DEV8 DEV7 DEV6 DEV5 DEV4 DEV3
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:
bit 7-0 DEV<10:3>: Device ID bits

These bits, together with DEV<2:0> in DEVID1, determine the device ID.
See Table 24-2 for complete Device ID list.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 24-2: DEVICE ID TABLE FOR THE PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 FAMILY
DEV<10:3> DEV<2:0> Part Number
000 PIC18F46K22
001 PIC18LF46K22
0101 0100
010 PIC18F26K22
011 PIC18LF26K22
000 PIC18F45K22
001 PIC18LF45K22
0101 0101
010 PIC18F25K22
011 PIC18LF25K22
000 PIC18F44K22
001 PIC18LF44K22
0101 0110
010 PIC18F24K22
011 PIC18LF24K22
000 PIC18F43K22
001 PIC18LF43K22
0101 0111
010 PIC18F23K22
011 PIC18LF23K22

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
24.2 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
For PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices, the WDT is driven by
the LFINTOSC source. When the WDT is enabled, the
clock source is also enabled. The nominal WDT period
is 4 ms and has the same stability as the LFINTOSC
oscillator.
The 4 ms period of the WDT is multiplied by a 16-bit
postscaler. Any output of the WDT postscaler is
selected by a multiplexer, controlled by bits in Configu-
ration Register 2H. Available periods range from 4 ms
to 131.072 seconds (2.18 minutes). The WDT and
postscaler are cleared when any of the following events
occur: a SLEEP or CLRWDT instruction is executed, the
IRCF bits of the OSCCON register are changed or a
clock failure has occurred.
Note 1: The CLRWDT and SLEEP instructions
clear the WDT and postscaler counts
when executed.
2: Changing the setting of the IRCF bits of
the OSCCON register clears the WDT
and postscaler counts.
3: When a CLRWDT instruction is executed,
the postscaler count will be cleared.
FIGURE 24-1: WDT BLOCK DIAGRAM
SWDTEN Enable WDT

WDTEN
WDT Counter
LFINTOSC Source 128 Wake-up

from Power
Managed Modes
Change on IRCF bits
Programmable Postscaler Reset WDT
CLRWDT Reset
1:1 to 1:32,768
All Device Resets
WDTPS<3:0> 4
Sleep

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
24.2.1 CONTROL REGISTER
Register 24-14 shows the WDTCON register. This is a
readable and writable register which contains a control
bit that allows software to override the WDT enable
Configuration bit, but only if the Configuration bit has
disabled the WDT.
REGISTER 24-14: WDTCON: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER

U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0
— — — — — — — SWDTEN(1)
bit 7 bit 0
Legend:

bit 0 SWDTEN: Software Enable or Disable the Watchdog Timer bit(1)
1 = WDT is turned on
0 = WDT is turned off (Reset value)
Note 1: This bit has no effect if the Configuration bit, WDTEN, is enabled.
TABLE 24-3: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH WATCHDOG TIMER

Reset
on Page

WDTCON — — — — — — — SWDTEN 361
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by the Watchdog Timer.
TABLE 24-4: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH WATCHDOG TIMER

Reset
on Page
CONFIG2H — — WDPS<3:0> WDTEN<1:0> 353

Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded bits are not used by the Watchdog Timer.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
24.3 Program Verification and Each of the blocks has three code protection bits asso-
Code Protection ciated with them. They are:
• Code-Protect bit (CPn)
The overall structure of the code protection on the
PIC18 Flash devices differs significantly from other • Write-Protect bit (WRTn)
PIC® microcontroller devices. • External Block Table Read bit (EBTRn)
The user program memory is divided into three or five Figure 24-2 shows the program memory organization
blocks, depending on the device. One of these is a for 8, 16 and 32-Kbyte devices and the specific code
Boot Block of 0.5K or 2K bytes, depending on the protection bit associated with each block. The actual
device. The remainder of the memory is divided into locations of the bits are summarized in Table .
individual blocks on binary boundaries.
FIGURE 24-2: CODE-PROTECTED PROGRAM MEMORY FOR PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

MEMORY SIZE/DEVICE
Block Code Protection
8 Kbytes 16 Kbytes 32 Kbytes 64 Kbytes Controlled By:
(PIC18(L)FX3K22) (PIC18(L)FX4K22) (PIC18(L)FX5K22) (PIC18(L)FX6K22)
Boot Block Boot Block Boot Block Boot Block
CPB, WRTB, EBTRB
(000h-1FFh) (000h-7FFh) (000h-7FFh) (000h-7FFh)
Block 0 Block 0 Block 0 Block 0
CP0, WRT0, EBTR0
(200h-FFFh) (800h-1FFFh) (800h-1FFFh) (800h-3FFFh)
Block 1 Block 1 Block 1 Block 1
CP1, WRT1, EBTR1
(1000h-1FFFh) (2000h-3FFFh) (2000h-3FFFh) (4000h-7FFFh)
Block 2 Block 2
CP2, WRT2, EBTR2
(4000h-5FFFh) (8000h-BFFFh)
Block 3 Block 3
CP3, WRT3, EBTR3
(6000h-7FFFh) (C000h-FFFFh)
Unimplemented Unimplemented
Read ‘0’s Read ‘0’s
(2000h-1FFFFFh) (4000h-1FFFFFh)
Unimplemented Unimplemented (Unimplemented
Read ‘0’s Read ‘0’s Memory Space)
(8000h-1FFFFFh) (10000h-1FFFFFh)
TABLE 24-5: CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CODE PROTECTION

File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
300008h CONFIG5L — — — — CP3(1) CP2(1) CP1 CP0

300009h CONFIG5H CPD CPB — — — — — —
30000Ah CONFIG6L — — — — WRT3(1) WRT2(1) WRT1 WRT0
30000Bh CONFIG6H WRTD WRTB WRTC(2) — — — — —
30000Ch CONFIG7L — — — — EBTR3(1) EBTR2(1) EBTR1 EBTR0
30000Dh CONFIG7H — EBTRB — — — — — —
Legend: Shaded bits are unimplemented.
Note 1: Available on PIC18(L)FX5K22 and PIC18(L)FX6K22 devices only.
2: In user mode, this bit is read-only and cannot be self-programmed.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
24.3.1 PROGRAM MEMORY instruction that executes from a location outside of that
CODE PROTECTION block is not allowed to read and will result in reading ‘0’s.
Figures 24-3 through 24-5 illustrate table write and table
The program memory may be read to or written from
read protection.
any location using the table read and table write
instructions. The device ID may be read with table Note: Code protection bits may only be written to
reads. The Configuration registers may be read and a ‘0’ from a ‘1’ state. It is not possible to
written with the table read and table write instructions. write a ‘1’ to a bit in the ‘0’ state. Code pro-
In normal execution mode, the CPn bits have no direct tection bits are only set to ‘1’ by a full chip
effect. CPn bits inhibit external reads and writes. A block erase or block erase function. The full chip
of user memory may be protected from table writes if the erase and block erase functions can only
WRTn Configuration bit is ‘0’. The EBTRn bits control be initiated via ICSP™ or an external
table reads. For a block of user memory with the EBTRn programmer.
bit cleared to ‘0’, a table READ instruction that executes
from within that block is allowed to read. A table read
FIGURE 24-3: TABLE WRITE (WRTn) DISALLOWED
Register Values Program Memory Configuration Bit Settings

000000h
WRTB, EBTRB = 11
0007FFh
000800h
TBLPTR = 0008FFh
WRT0, EBTR0 = 01
PC = 001FFEh TBLWT* 001FFFh

002000h
WRT1, EBTR1 = 11
003FFFh
004000h
PC = 005FFEh TBLWT* WRT2, EBTR2 = 11
005FFFh
006000h
WRT3, EBTR3 = 11
007FFFh
Results: All table writes disabled to Blockn whenever WRTn = 0.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 24-4: EXTERNAL BLOCK TABLE READ (EBTRn) DISALLOWED
000000h
WRTB, EBTRB = 11
0007FFh
000800h
TBLPTR = 0008FFh
WRT0, EBTR0 = 10
001FFFh
002000h
PC = 003FFEh TBLRD* WRT1, EBTR1 = 11
003FFFh
004000h
WRT2, EBTR2 = 11
005FFFh
006000h
WRT3, EBTR3 = 11
007FFFh
Results: All table reads from external blocks to Blockn are disabled whenever EBTRn = 0.
TABLAT register returns a value of ‘0’.
FIGURE 24-5: EXTERNAL BLOCK TABLE READ (EBTRn) ALLOWED

000000h
WRTB, EBTRB = 11
0007FFh
000800h
TBLPTR = 0008FFh WRT0, EBTR0 = 10
PC = 001FFEh TBLRD* 001FFFh

002000h
WRT1, EBTR1 = 11
003FFFh
004000h
WRT2, EBTR2 = 11
005FFFh
006000h
WRT3, EBTR3 = 11
007FFFh
Results: Table reads permitted within Blockn, even when EBTRBn = 0.

TABLAT register returns the value of the data at the location TBLPTR.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
24.3.2 DATA EEPROM To use the In-Circuit Debugger function of the
CODE PROTECTION microcontroller, the design must implement In-Circuit
Serial Programming connections to the following pins:
The entire data EEPROM is protected from external
reads and writes by two bits: CPD and WRTD. CPD • MCLR/VPP/RE3
inhibits external reads and writes of data EEPROM. • VDD
WRTD inhibits internal and external writes to data • VSS
EEPROM. The CPU can always read data EEPROM • RB7
under normal operation, regardless of the protection bit
• RB6
settings.
This will interface to the In-Circuit Debugger module
24.3.3 CONFIGURATION REGISTER available from Microchip or one of the third party
PROTECTION development tool companies.
The Configuration registers can be write-protected.
The WRTC bit controls protection of the Configuration 24.7 Single-Supply ICSP Programming
registers. In normal execution mode, the WRTC bit is The LVP Configuration bit enables Single-Supply ICSP
readable only. WRTC can only be written via ICSP or Programming (formerly known as Low-Voltage ICSP
an external programmer. Programming or LVP). When Single-Supply Program-
ming is enabled, the microcontroller can be programmed
24.4 ID Locations without requiring high voltage being applied to the
MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin. See “PIC18(L)F2XK22/4XK22
Eight memory locations (200000h-200007h) are
Flash Memory Programming” (DS41398) for more
designated as ID locations, where the user can store
details about low voltage programming.
checksum or other code identification numbers. These
locations are both readable and writable during normal Note 1: High-voltage programming is always
execution through the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions available, regardless of the state of the
or during program/verify. The ID locations can be read LVP bit, by applying VIHH to the MCLR
when the device is code-protected. pin.
2: By default, Single-Supply ICSP is
24.5 In-Circuit Serial Programming enabled in unprogrammed devices (as
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices can be serially supplied from Microchip) and erased
programmed while in the end application circuit. This is devices.
simply done with two lines for clock and data and three 3: While in Low-Voltage ICSP mode, MCLR
other lines for power, ground and the programming is always enabled, regardless of the
voltage. This allows customers to manufacture boards MCLRE bit, and the RE3 pin can no
with unprogrammed devices and then program the longer be used as a general purpose
microcontroller just before shipping the product. This input.
also allows the most recent firmware or a custom The LVP bit may be set or cleared only when using
firmware to be programmed. standard high-voltage programming (VIHH applied to
the MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin). Once LVP has been disabled,
24.6 In-Circuit Debugger only the standard high-voltage programming is
available and must be used to program the device.
When the DEBUG Configuration bit is programmed to
a ‘0’, the In-Circuit Debugger functionality is enabled. Memory that is not code-protected can be erased using
This function allows simple debugging functions when either a block erase, or erased row by row, then written
used with MPLAB® IDE. When the microcontroller has at any specified VDD. If code-protected memory is to be
this feature enabled, some resources are not available erased, a block erase is required.
for general use. Table 24-6 shows which resources are
required by the background debugger.
TABLE 24-6: DEBUGGER RESOURCES

I/O pins: RB6, RB7

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
25.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY The literal instructions may use some of the following
operands:
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices incorporate the standard
• A literal value to be loaded into a file register
set of 75 PIC18 core instructions, as well as an extended
(specified by ‘k’)
set of 8 new instructions, for the optimization of code that
is recursive or that utilizes a software stack. The • The desired FSR register to load the literal value
extended set is discussed later in this section. into (specified by ‘f’)
• No operand required
25.1 Standard Instruction Set (specified by ‘—’)
The control instructions may use some of the following
The standard PIC18 instruction set adds many
operands:
enhancements to the previous PIC® MCU instruction
sets, while maintaining an easy migration from these • A program memory address (specified by ‘n’)
PIC® MCU instruction sets. Most instructions are a • The mode of the CALL or RETURN instructions
single program memory word (16 bits), but there are (specified by ‘s’)
four instructions that require two program memory • The mode of the table read and table write
locations. instructions (specified by ‘m’)
Each single-word instruction is a 16-bit word divided • No operand required
into an opcode, which specifies the instruction type and (specified by ‘—’)
one or more operands, which further specify the All instructions are a single word, except for four
operation of the instruction. double-word instructions. These instructions were
The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped made double-word to contain the required information
into four basic categories: in 32 bits. In the second word, the 4 MSbs are ‘1’s. If
• Byte-oriented operations this second word is executed as an instruction (by
itself), it will execute as a NOP.
• Bit-oriented operations
• Literal operations All single-word instructions are executed in a single
instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the
• Control operations
program counter is changed as a result of the instruc-
The PIC18 instruction set summary in Table 25-2 lists tion. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction
byte-oriented, bit-oriented, literal and control cycles, with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed
operations. Table 25-1 shows the opcode field as a NOP.
descriptions.
The double-word instructions execute in two instruction
Most byte-oriented instructions have three operands: cycles.
1. The file register (specified by ‘f’) One instruction cycle consists of four oscillator periods.
2. The destination of the result (specified by ‘d’) Thus, for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, the normal
3. The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) instruction execution time is 1 s. If a conditional test is
true, or the program counter is changed as a result of
The file register designator ‘f’ specifies which file an instruction, the instruction execution time is 2 s.
register is to be used by the instruction. The destination Two-word branch instructions (if true) would take 3 s.
designator ‘d’ specifies where the result of the opera-
tion is to be placed. If ‘d’ is zero, the result is placed in Figure 25-1 shows the general formats that the instruc-
the WREG register. If ‘d’ is one, the result is placed in tions can have. All examples use the convention ‘nnh’
the file register specified in the instruction. to represent a hexadecimal number.
All bit-oriented instructions have three operands: The Instruction Set Summary, shown in Table 25-2,
lists the standard instructions recognized by the
1. The file register (specified by ‘f’) Microchip Assembler (MPASMTM).
2. The bit in the file register (specified by ‘b’)
Section 25.1.1 “Standard Instruction Set” provides
3. The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) a description of each instruction.
The bit field designator ‘b’ selects the number of the bit
affected by the operation, while the file register
designator ‘f’ represents the number of the file in which
the bit is located.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 25-1: OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Field Description
a RAM access bit
a = 0: RAM location in Access RAM (BSR register is ignored)
a = 1: RAM bank is specified by BSR register
bbb Bit address within an 8-bit file register (0 to 7).
BSR Bank Select Register. Used to select the current RAM bank.
C, DC, Z, OV, N ALU Status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative.
d Destination select bit
d = 0: store result in WREG
d = 1: store result in file register f
dest Destination: either the WREG register or the specified register file location.
f 8-bit Register file address (00h to FFh) or 2-bit FSR designator (0h to 3h).
fs 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the source address.
fd 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the destination address.
GIE Global Interrupt Enable bit.
k Literal field, constant data or label (may be either an 8-bit, 12-bit or a 20-bit value).
label Label name.
mm The mode of the TBLPTR register for the table read and table write instructions.
Only used with table read and table write instructions:
* No change to register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes)
*+ Post-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes)
*- Post-Decrement register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes)
+* Pre-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes)
n The relative address (2’s complement number) for relative branch instructions or the direct address for
CALL/BRANCH and RETURN instructions.
PC Program Counter.
PCL Program Counter Low Byte.
PCH Program Counter High Byte.
PCLATH Program Counter High Byte Latch.
PCLATU Program Counter Upper Byte Latch.
PD Power-down bit.
PRODH Product of Multiply High Byte.
PRODL Product of Multiply Low Byte.
s Fast Call/Return mode select bit
s = 0: do not update into/from shadow registers
s = 1: certain registers loaded into/from shadow registers (Fast mode)
TBLPTR 21-bit Table Pointer (points to a Program Memory location).
TABLAT 8-bit Table Latch.
TO Time-out bit.
TOS Top-of-Stack.
u Unused or unchanged.
WDT Watchdog Timer.
WREG Working register (accumulator).
x Don’t care (‘0’ or ‘1’). The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for
compatibility with all Microchip software tools.
zs 7-bit offset value for indirect addressing of register files (source).
zd 7-bit offset value for indirect addressing of register files (destination).
{ } Optional argument.
[text] Indicates an indexed address.
(text) The contents of text.
[expr]<n> Specifies bit n of the register indicated by the pointer expr.
 Assigned to.
< > Register bit field.
 In the set of.
italics User defined term (font is Courier).

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 25-1: GENERAL FORMAT FOR INSTRUCTIONS
Byte-oriented file register operations Example Instruction
15 10 9 8 7 0
OPCODE d a f (FILE #) ADDWF MYREG, W, B
d = 0 for result destination to be WREG register
d = 1 for result destination to be file register (f)
a = 0 to force Access Bank
a = 1 for BSR to select bank
f = 8-bit file register address
Byte to Byte move operations (2-word)

15 12 11 0
OPCODE f (Source FILE #) MOVFF MYREG1, MYREG2
15 12 11 0
1111 f (Destination FILE #)
Bit-oriented file register operations

15 12 11 9 8 7 0
OPCODE b (BIT #) a f (FILE #) BSF MYREG, bit, B
b = 3-bit position of bit in file register (f)

a = 0 to force Access Bank
a = 1 for BSR to select bank
Literal operations
15 8 7 0
OPCODE k (literal) MOVLW 7Fh
k = 8-bit immediate value
Control operations
CALL, GOTO and Branch operations
15 8 7 0
OPCODE n<7:0> (literal) GOTO Label
15 12 11 0
1111 n<19:8> (literal)
n = 20-bit immediate value
15 8 7 0
OPCODE S n<7:0> (literal) CALL MYFUNC
15 12 11 0
1111 n<19:8> (literal)
S = Fast bit
15 11 10 0
OPCODE n<10:0> (literal) BRA MYFUNC
15 8 7 0
OPCODE n<7:0> (literal) BC MYFUNC

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 25-2: PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 INSTRUCTION SET

Mnemonic, 16-Bit Instruction Word Status
Description Cycles Notes
Operands MSb LSb Affected
BYTE-ORIENTED OPERATIONS
ADDWF f, d, a Add WREG and f 1 0010 01da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2
ADDWFC f, d, a Add WREG and CARRY bit to f 1 0010 00da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2
ANDWF f, d, a AND WREG with f 1 0001 01da ffff ffff Z, N 1,2
CLRF f, a Clear f 1 0110 101a ffff ffff Z 2
COMF f, d, a Complement f 1 0001 11da ffff ffff Z, N 1, 2
CPFSEQ f, a Compare f with WREG, skip = 1 (2 or 3) 0110 001a ffff ffff None 4
CPFSGT f, a Compare f with WREG, skip > 1 (2 or 3) 0110 010a ffff ffff None 4
CPFSLT f, a Compare f with WREG, skip < 1 (2 or 3) 0110 000a ffff ffff None 1, 2
DECF f, d, a Decrement f 1 0000 01da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2, 3, 4
DECFSZ f, d, a Decrement f, Skip if 0 1 (2 or 3) 0010 11da ffff ffff None 1, 2, 3, 4
DCFSNZ f, d, a Decrement f, Skip if Not 0 1 (2 or 3) 0100 11da ffff ffff None 1, 2
INCF f, d, a Increment f 1 0010 10da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2, 3, 4
INCFSZ f, d, a Increment f, Skip if 0 1 (2 or 3) 0011 11da ffff ffff None 4
INFSNZ f, d, a Increment f, Skip if Not 0 1 (2 or 3) 0100 10da ffff ffff None 1, 2
IORWF f, d, a Inclusive OR WREG with f 1 0001 00da ffff ffff Z, N 1, 2
MOVF f, d, a Move f 1 0101 00da ffff ffff Z, N 1
MOVFF fs, fd Move fs (source) to 1st word 2 1100 ffff ffff ffff None
fd (destination) 2nd word 1111 ffff ffff ffff
MOVWF f, a Move WREG to f 1 0110 111a ffff ffff None
MULWF f, a Multiply WREG with f 1 0000 001a ffff ffff None 1, 2
NEGF f, a Negate f 1 0110 110a ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
RLCF f, d, a Rotate Left f through Carry 1 0011 01da ffff ffff C, Z, N 1, 2
RLNCF f, d, a Rotate Left f (No Carry) 1 0100 01da ffff ffff Z, N
RRCF f, d, a Rotate Right f through Carry 1 0011 00da ffff ffff C, Z, N
RRNCF f, d, a Rotate Right f (No Carry) 1 0100 00da ffff ffff Z, N
SETF f, a Set f 1 0110 100a ffff ffff None 1, 2
SUBFWB f, d, a Subtract f from WREG with 1 0101 01da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
borrow
SUBWF f, d, a Subtract WREG from f 1 0101 11da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2
SUBWFB f, d, a Subtract WREG from f with 1 0101 10da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
borrow
SWAPF f, d, a Swap nibbles in f 1 0011 10da ffff ffff None 4
TSTFSZ f, a Test f, skip if 0 1 (2 or 3) 0110 011a ffff ffff None 1, 2
XORWF f, d, a Exclusive OR WREG with f 1 0001 10da ffff ffff Z, N
Note 1: When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value
present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an
external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’.
2: If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, ‘d’ = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if
assigned.
3: If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is
executed as a NOP.
4: Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the
first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory
locations have a valid instruction.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 25-2: PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED)
BIT-ORIENTED OPERATIONS
BCF f, b, a Bit Clear f 1 1001 bbba ffff ffff None 1, 2
BSF f, b, a Bit Set f 1 1000 bbba ffff ffff None 1, 2
BTFSC f, b, a Bit Test f, Skip if Clear 1 (2 or 3) 1011 bbba ffff ffff None 3, 4
BTFSS f, b, a Bit Test f, Skip if Set 1 (2 or 3) 1010 bbba ffff ffff None 3, 4
BTG f, d, a Bit Toggle f 1 0111 bbba ffff ffff None 1, 2
CONTROL OPERATIONS
BC n Branch if Carry 1 (2) 1110 0010 nnnn nnnn None
BN n Branch if Negative 1 (2) 1110 0110 nnnn nnnn None
BNC n Branch if Not Carry 1 (2) 1110 0011 nnnn nnnn None
BNN n Branch if Not Negative 1 (2) 1110 0111 nnnn nnnn None
BNOV n Branch if Not Overflow 1 (2) 1110 0101 nnnn nnnn None
BNZ n Branch if Not Zero 1 (2) 1110 0001 nnnn nnnn None
BOV n Branch if Overflow 1 (2) 1110 0100 nnnn nnnn None
BRA n Branch Unconditionally 2 1101 0nnn nnnn nnnn None
BZ n Branch if Zero 1 (2) 1110 0000 nnnn nnnn None
CALL n, s Call subroutine 1st word 2 1110 110s kkkk kkkk None
2nd word 1111 kkkk kkkk kkkk
CLRWDT — Clear Watchdog Timer 1 0000 0000 0000 0100 TO, PD
DAW — Decimal Adjust WREG 1 0000 0000 0000 0111 C
GOTO n Go to address 1st word 2 1110 1111 kkkk kkkk None
2nd word 1111 kkkk kkkk kkkk
NOP — No Operation 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 None
NOP — No Operation 1 1111 xxxx xxxx xxxx None 4
POP — Pop top of return stack (TOS) 1 0000 0000 0000 0110 None
PUSH — Push top of return stack (TOS) 1 0000 0000 0000 0101 None
RCALL n Relative Call 2 1101 1nnn nnnn nnnn None
RESET Software device Reset 1 0000 0000 1111 1111 All
RETFIE s Return from interrupt enable 2 0000 0000 0001 000s GIE/GIEH,
PEIE/GIEL
RETLW k Return with literal in WREG 2 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk None
RETURN s Return from Subroutine 2 0000 0000 0001 001s None
SLEEP — Go into Standby mode 1 0000 0000 0000 0011 TO, PD
assigned.
executed as a NOP.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 25-2: PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED)
LITERAL OPERATIONS
ADDLW k Add literal and WREG 1 0000 1111 kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z, OV, N
ANDLW k AND literal with WREG 1 0000 1011 kkkk kkkk Z, N
IORLW k Inclusive OR literal with WREG 1 0000 1001 kkkk kkkk Z, N
LFSR f, k Move literal (12-bit) 2nd word 2 1110 1110 00ff kkkk None
to FSR(f) 1st word 1111 0000 kkkk kkkk
MOVLB k Move literal to BSR<3:0> 1 0000 0001 0000 kkkk None
MOVLW k Move literal to WREG 1 0000 1110 kkkk kkkk None
MULLW k Multiply literal with WREG 1 0000 1101 kkkk kkkk None
RETLW k Return with literal in WREG 2 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk None
SUBLW k Subtract WREG from literal 1 0000 1000 kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z, OV, N
XORLW k Exclusive OR literal with WREG 1 0000 1010 kkkk kkkk Z, N
DATA MEMORY  PROGRAM MEMORY OPERATIONS
TBLRD* Table Read 2 0000 0000 0000 1000 None
TBLRD*+ Table Read with post-increment 0000 0000 0000 1001 None
TBLRD*- Table Read with post-decrement 0000 0000 0000 1010 None
TBLRD+* Table Read with pre-increment 0000 0000 0000 1011 None
TBLWT* Table Write 2 0000 0000 0000 1100 None
TBLWT*+ Table Write with post-increment 0000 0000 0000 1101 None
TBLWT*- Table Write with post-decrement 0000 0000 0000 1110 None
TBLWT+* Table Write with pre-increment 0000 0000 0000 1111 None
assigned.
executed as a NOP.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
25.1.1 STANDARD INSTRUCTION SET
ADDLW ADD literal to W ADDWF ADD W to f

Syntax: ADDLW k Syntax: ADDWF f {,d {,a}}
Operands: 0  k  255 Operands: 0  f  255
d  [0,1]
Operation: (W) + k  W
a  [0,1]
Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z
Operation: (W) + (f)  dest
Encoding: 0000 1111 kkkk kkkk
Description: The contents of W are added to the
Encoding: 0010 01da ffff ffff
8-bit literal ‘k’ and the result is placed in
W. Description: Add W to register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the
Words: 1 result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the
result is stored back in register ‘f’
Cycles: 1 (default).
Q Cycle Activity: If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
GPR bank.
Decode Read Process Write to W If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
literal ‘k’ Data set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
Example: ADDLW 15h Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Before Instruction Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
W = 10h Literal Offset Mode” for details.
After Instruction Words: 1
W = 25h Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write to
register ‘f’ Data destination
Example: ADDWF REG, 0, 0

Before Instruction
W = 17h
REG = 0C2h
After Instruction
W = 0D9h
REG = 0C2h
Note: All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in
symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s).

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
ADDWFC ADD W and CARRY bit to f ANDLW AND literal with W

Syntax: ADDWFC f {,d {,a}} Syntax: ANDLW k
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: 0  k  255
d [0,1]
Operation: (W) .AND. k  W
a [0,1]
Status Affected: N, Z
Operation: (W) + (f) + (C)  dest
Status Affected: N,OV, C, DC, Z
Description: The contents of W are AND’ed with the
8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W.
Description: Add W, the CARRY flag and data mem-
Words: 1
ory location ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is Cycles: 1
placed in data memory location ‘f’. Q Cycle Activity:
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
GPR bank. Decode Read literal Process Write to W
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction ‘k’ Data
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing Example: ANDLW 05Fh
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Before Instruction
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed W = A3h
Literal Offset Mode” for details. After Instruction
Words: 1 W = 03h
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: ADDWFC REG, 0, 1

Before Instruction
CARRY bit = 1
REG = 02h
W = 4Dh
After Instruction
CARRY bit = 0
REG = 02h
W = 50h

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
ANDWF AND W with f BC Branch if Carry

Syntax: ANDWF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: BC n
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: -128  n  127
d [0,1]
Operation: if CARRY bit is ‘1’
a [0,1]
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Operation: (W) .AND. (f)  dest
Status Affected: None
Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 1110 0010 nnnn nnnn
Description: If the CARRY bit is ‘1’, then the program
Description: The contents of W are AND’ed with will branch.
register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back added to the PC. Since the PC will have
in register ‘f’ (default). incremented to fetch the next
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. instruction, the new address will be
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
GPR bank. two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
Words: 1
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing Cycles: 1(2)
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Q Cycle Activity:
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and If Jump:
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
Words: 1 ‘n’ Data
Cycles: 1 No No No No
operation operation operation operation
Q Cycle Activity:
If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process No
‘n’ Data operation
Example: ANDWF REG, 0, 0

Example: HERE BC 5
Before Instruction
Before Instruction
W = 17h PC = address (HERE)
REG = C2h
After Instruction
After Instruction
If CARRY = 1;
W = 02h PC = address (HERE + 12)
REG = C2h If CARRY = 0;
PC = address (HERE + 2)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
BCF Bit Clear f BN Branch if Negative

Syntax: BCF f, b {,a} Syntax: BN n
0b7
Operation: if NEGATIVE bit is ‘1’
a [0,1]
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Operation: 0  f
Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0110 nnnn nnnn
Encoding: 1001 bbba ffff ffff
Description: If the NEGATIVE bit is ‘1’, then the
Description: Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is cleared. program will branch.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the added to the PC. Since the PC will have
GPR bank. incremented to fetch the next
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction instruction, the new address will be
set is enabled, this instruction operates PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing two-cycle instruction.
Words: 1
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Cycles: 1(2)
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity:
Words: 1 If Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Cycles: 1
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
Q Cycle Activity:
‘n’ Data
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No No No No
Decode Read Process Write operation operation operation operation
register ‘f’ Data register ‘f’ If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: BCF FLAG_REG, 7, 0 Decode Read literal Process No
Before Instruction ‘n’ Data operation
FLAG_REG = C7h
After Instruction Example: HERE BN Jump
FLAG_REG = 47h
Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE)
After Instruction
If NEGATIVE = 1;
PC = address (Jump)
If NEGATIVE = 0;

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
BNC Branch if Not Carry BNN Branch if Not Negative

Syntax: BNC n Syntax: BNN n
Operands: -128  n  127 Operands: -128  n  127
Operation: if CARRY bit is ‘0’ Operation: if NEGATIVE bit is ‘0’
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Status Affected: None Status Affected: None
Encoding: 1110 0011 nnnn nnnn Encoding: 1110 0111 nnnn nnnn
Description: If the CARRY bit is ‘0’, then the program Description: If the NEGATIVE bit is ‘0’, then the
will branch. program will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction. two-cycle instruction.
Words: 1 Words: 1
Cycles: 1(2) Cycles: 1(2)
Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump: If Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
‘n’ Data ‘n’ Data
No No No No No No No No
operation operation operation operation operation operation operation operation
If No Jump: If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process No Decode Read literal Process No
‘n’ Data operation ‘n’ Data operation
Example: HERE BNC Jump Example: HERE BNN Jump

Before Instruction Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE) PC = address (HERE)
After Instruction After Instruction
If CARRY = 0; If NEGATIVE = 0;
PC = address (Jump) PC = address (Jump)
If CARRY = 1; If NEGATIVE = 1;
PC = address (HERE + 2) PC = address (HERE + 2)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
BNOV Branch if Not Overflow BNZ Branch if Not Zero

Syntax: BNOV n Syntax: BNZ n
Operands: -128  n  127 Operands: -128  n  127
Operation: if OVERFLOW bit is ‘0’ Operation: if ZERO bit is ‘0’
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Encoding: 1110 0101 nnnn nnnn Encoding: 1110 0001 nnnn nnnn
Description: If the OVERFLOW bit is ‘0’, then the Description: If the ZERO bit is ‘0’, then the program
program will branch. will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction. two-cycle instruction.
Words: 1 Words: 1
If Jump: If Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
‘n’ Data ‘n’ Data
If No Jump: If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process No Decode Read literal Process No
‘n’ Data operation ‘n’ Data operation
Example: HERE BNOV Jump Example: HERE BNZ Jump

If OVERFLOW = 0; If ZERO = 0;
PC = address (Jump) PC = address (Jump)
If OVERFLOW = 1; If ZERO = 1;
PC = address (HERE + 2) PC = address (HERE + 2)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
BRA Unconditional Branch BSF Bit Set f

Syntax: BRA n Syntax: BSF f, b {,a}
Operands: -1024  n  1023 Operands: 0  f  255
0b7
Operation: (PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
a [0,1]
Operation: 1  f
Encoding: 1101 0nnn nnnn nnnn
Description: Add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to
Encoding: 1000 bbba ffff ffff
the PC. Since the PC will have incre-
mented to fetch the next instruction, the Description: Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is set.
new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
instruction is a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank.
Words: 1
Cycles: 2 set is enabled, this instruction operates
Q Cycle Activity: in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
‘n’ Data Literal Offset Mode” for details.
No No No No
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Example: HERE BRA Jump
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Before Instruction
Decode Read Process Write
PC = address (HERE)
register ‘f’ Data register ‘f’
After Instruction
PC = address (Jump)
Example: BSF FLAG_REG, 7, 1
Before Instruction
FLAG_REG = 0Ah
After Instruction
FLAG_REG = 8Ah

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
BTFSC Bit Test File, Skip if Clear BTFSS Bit Test File, Skip if Set
Syntax: BTFSC f, b {,a} Syntax: BTFSS f, b {,a}
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: 0  f  255
0b7 0b<7
a [0,1] a [0,1]
Operation: skip if (f) = 0 Operation: skip if (f) = 1
Encoding: 1011 bbba ffff ffff Encoding: 1010 bbba ffff ffff
Description: If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘0’, then the next Description: If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘1’, then the next
instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘0’, then instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘1’, then
the next instruction fetched during the the next instruction fetched during the
current instruction execution is discarded current instruction execution is discarded
and a NOP is executed instead, making and a NOP is executed instead, making
this a two-cycle instruction. this a two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If
‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank. GPR bank.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates in set is enabled, this instruction operates
Indexed Literal Offset Addressing in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). mode whenever f 95 (5Fh).
See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words: 1 Words: 1
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction. by a 2-word instruction.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process No Decode Read Process No
register ‘f’ Data operation register ‘f’ Data operation
If skip: If skip:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: HERE BTFSC FLAG, 1, 0 Example: HERE BTFSS FLAG, 1, 0

FALSE : FALSE :
TRUE : TRUE :
If FLAG<1> = 0; If FLAG<1> = 0;
PC = address (TRUE) PC = address (FALSE)
If FLAG<1> = 1; If FLAG<1> = 1;
PC = address (FALSE) PC = address (TRUE)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
BTG Bit Toggle f BOV Branch if Overflow

Syntax: BTG f, b {,a} Syntax: BOV n
0b<7
Operation: if OVERFLOW bit is ‘1’
a [0,1]
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC
Operation: (f)  f
Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0100 nnnn nnnn
Encoding: 0111 bbba ffff ffff Description: If the OVERFLOW bit is ‘1’, then the
Description: Bit ‘b’ in data memory location ‘f’ is program will branch.
inverted. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. added to the PC. Since the PC will have
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the incremented to fetch the next
GPR bank. instruction, the new address will be
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
set is enabled, this instruction operates two-cycle instruction.
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing Words: 1
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Cycles: 1(2)
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Q Cycle Activity:
Literal Offset Mode” for details. If Jump:
Words: 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Cycles: 1 Decode Read literal Process Write to PC
‘n’ Data
Q Cycle Activity:
No No No No
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 operation operation operation operation
Decode Read Process Write If No Jump:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process No
Example: BTG PORTC, 4, 0 ‘n’ Data operation
Before Instruction:
PORTC = 0111 0101 [75h]
Example: HERE BOV Jump
After Instruction:
PORTC = 0110 0101 [65h] Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE)
After Instruction
If OVERFLOW = 1;
PC = address (Jump)
If OVERFLOW = 0;

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
BZ Branch if Zero CALL Subroutine Call

Syntax: BZ n Syntax: CALL k {,s}
Operands: -128  n  127 Operands: 0  k  1048575
s [0,1]
Operation: if ZERO bit is ‘1’
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC Operation: (PC) + 4  TOS,
k  PC<20:1>,
if s = 1
Encoding: 1110 0000 nnnn nnnn (W)  WS,
Description: If the ZERO bit is ‘1’, then the program (Status)  STATUSS,
will branch. (BSR)  BSRS
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is Status Affected: None
added to the PC. Since the PC will
have incremented to fetch the next Encoding:
1st word (k<7:0>) 1110 110s k7kkk kkkk0
instruction, the new address will be
2nd word(k<19:8>) 1111 k19kkk kkkk kkkk8
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction. Description: Subroutine call of entire 2-Mbyte
memory range. First, return address
Words: 1
(PC + 4) is pushed onto the return
Cycles: 1(2) stack. If ‘s’ = 1, the W, Status and BSR
Q Cycle Activity: registers are also pushed into their
If Jump: respective shadow registers, WS,
STATUSS and BSRS. If ‘s’ = 0, no
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
update occurs (default). Then, the
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC 20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>.
‘n’ Data CALL is a two-cycle instruction.
No No No No
Words: 2
If No Jump: Cycles: 2
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q Cycle Activity:
Decode Read literal Process No Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
‘n’ Data operation Decode Read literal PUSH PC to Read literal
‘k’<7:0>, stack ‘k’<19:8>,
Example: HERE BZ Jump Write to PC
No No No No
Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE) operation operation operation operation
After Instruction
If ZERO = 1; Example: HERE CALL THERE, 1
PC = address (Jump)
If ZERO = 0; Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE + 2) PC = address (HERE)
After Instruction
PC = address (THERE)
TOS = address (HERE + 4)
WS = W
BSRS = BSR
STATUSS = Status

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
CLRF Clear f CLRWDT Clear Watchdog Timer

Syntax: CLRF f {,a} Syntax: CLRWDT
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: None
a [0,1]
Operation: 000h  WDT,
Operation: 000h  f 000h  WDT postscaler,
1Z 1  TO,
Status Affected: Z 1  PD
Status Affected: TO, PD
Encoding: 0110 101a ffff ffff
Description: Clears the contents of the specified Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0100
register. Description: CLRWDT instruction resets the
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. Watchdog Timer. It also resets the
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the postscaler of the WDT. Status bits, TO
GPR bank. and PD, are set.
Words: 1
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing Cycles: 1
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Decode No Process No
operation Data operation
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Example: CLRWDT
Q Cycle Activity:
Before Instruction
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 WDT Counter = ?
Decode Read Process Write After Instruction
register ‘f’ Data register ‘f’ WDT Counter = 00h
WDT Postscaler = 0
TO = 1
Example: CLRF FLAG_REG, 1 PD = 1
Before Instruction
FLAG_REG = 5Ah
After Instruction
FLAG_REG = 00h

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
COMF Complement f CPFSEQ Compare f with W, skip if f = W

Syntax: COMF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: CPFSEQ f {,a}

d  [0,1] a  [0,1]
a  [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W),
Operation: (f)  dest skip if (f) = (W)
(unsigned comparison)
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are Description: Compares the contents of data memory
complemented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is location ‘f’ to the contents of W by
stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is performing an unsigned subtraction.
stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘f’ = W, then the fetched instruction is
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. discarded and a NOP is executed
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the instead, making this a two-cycle
GPR bank. instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
set is enabled, this instruction operates If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing GPR bank.
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and set is enabled, this instruction operates
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Literal Offset Mode” for details. mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
Words: 1 Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Words: 1
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Cycles: 1(2)
Decode Read Process Write to Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
register ‘f’ Data destination by a 2-word instruction.
Q Cycle Activity:
Example: COMF REG, 0, 0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Before Instruction Decode Read Process No
REG = 13h register ‘f’ Data operation
After Instruction If skip:
REG = 13h Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
W = ECh No No No No
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
No No No No
Example: HERE CPFSEQ REG, 0

NEQUAL :
EQUAL :
Before Instruction
PC Address = HERE
W = ?
REG = ?
After Instruction
If REG = W;
PC = Address (EQUAL)
If REG  W;
PC = Address (NEQUAL)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
CPFSGT Compare f with W, skip if f > W CPFSLT Compare f with W, skip if f < W
Syntax: CPFSGT f {,a} Syntax: CPFSLT f {,a}
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) –W), Operation: (f) –W),
skip if (f) > (W) skip if (f) < (W)
(unsigned comparison) (unsigned comparison)
Description: Compares the contents of data memory
Description: Compares the contents of data memory
location ‘f’ to the contents of the W by
location ‘f’ to the contents of W by
performing an unsigned subtraction.
performing an unsigned subtraction.
If the contents of ‘f’ are greater than the
If the contents of ‘f’ are less than the
contents of WREG, then the fetched
contents of W, then the fetched
instruction is discarded and a NOP is
instruction is discarded and a NOP is
executed instead, making this a
executed instead, making this a
two-cycle instruction.
two-cycle instruction.
GPR bank.
GPR bank.
set is enabled, this instruction operates Words: 1
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing Cycles: 1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and by a 2-word instruction.
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity:
Cycles: 1(2) Decode Read Process No
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed register ‘f’ Data operation
by a 2-word instruction. If skip:
Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process No operation operation operation operation
register ‘f’ Data operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No operation operation operation operation
operation operation operation operation No No No No
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: operation operation operation operation
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
Example: HERE CPFSLT REG, 1
operation operation operation operation NLESS :
No No No No LESS :
Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
Example: HERE CPFSGT REG, 0 W = ?
NGREATER : After Instruction
GREATER :
If REG < W;
Before Instruction PC = Address (LESS)
PC = Address (HERE) If REG  W;
W = ? PC = Address (NLESS)
After Instruction
If REG  W;
PC = Address (GREATER)
If REG  W;
PC = Address (NGREATER)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
DAW Decimal Adjust W Register DECF Decrement f

Syntax: DAW Syntax: DECF f {,d {,a}}
Operands: None Operands: 0  f  255
d  [0,1]
Operation: If [W<3:0> > 9] or [DC = 1] then
a  [0,1]
(W<3:0>) + 6  W<3:0>;
else Operation: (f) – 1  dest
(W<3:0>)  W<3:0>; Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z
If [W<7:4> + DC > 9] or [C = 1] then Encoding: 0000 01da ffff ffff

(W<7:4>) + 6 + DC  W<7:4>; Description: Decrement register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the
else result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the
(W<7:4>) + DC  W<7:4> result is stored back in register ‘f’
Status Affected: C (default).
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0111 If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
Description: DAW adjusts the eight-bit value in W, GPR bank.
resulting from the earlier addition of two If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
variables (each in packed BCD format) set is enabled, this instruction operates
and produces a correct packed BCD in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
result. mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
Words: 1
Cycles: 1 Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Q Cycle Activity: Words: 1
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
register W Data W
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example1:
DAW Decode Read Process Write to
Before Instruction
W = A5h
Example: DECF CNT, 1, 0
C = 0
DC = 0 Before Instruction
After Instruction CNT = 01h
W = 05h Z = 0
C = 1 After Instruction
DC = 0 CNT = 00h
Example 2: Z = 1
Before Instruction
W = CEh
C = 0
DC = 0
After Instruction
W = 34h
C = 1
DC = 0

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
DECFSZ Decrement f, skip if 0 DCFSNZ Decrement f, skip if not 0

Syntax: DECFSZ f {,d {,a}} Syntax: DCFSNZ f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1] d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) – 1  dest, Operation: (f) – 1  dest,
skip if result = 0 skip if result  0
Encoding: 0010 11da ffff ffff Encoding: 0100 11da ffff ffff
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are
decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’ (default). placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction, If the result is not ‘0’, the next
which is already fetched, is discarded instruction, which is already fetched, is
and a NOP is executed instead, making discarded and a NOP is executed
it a two-cycle instruction. instead, making it a two-cycle
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction GPR bank.
set is enabled, this instruction operates If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing set is enabled, this instruction operates
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Words: 1 Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed Cycles: 1(2)
by a 2-word instruction. Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
Q Cycle Activity: by a 2-word instruction.
Decode Read Process Write to Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
register ‘f’ Data destination Decode Read Process Write to
If skip: register ‘f’ Data destination
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 If skip:
No No No No Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: operation operation operation operation
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
No No No No Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No operation operation operation operation
Example: HERE DECFSZ CNT, 1, 1
GOTO LOOP Example: HERE DCFSNZ TEMP, 1, 0
CONTINUE ZERO :
NZERO :
Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE) Before Instruction
After Instruction TEMP = ?
CNT = CNT - 1 After Instruction
If CNT = 0; TEMP = TEMP – 1,
PC = Address (CONTINUE) If TEMP = 0;
If CNT  0; PC = Address (ZERO)
PC = Address (HERE + 2) If TEMP  0;
PC = Address (NZERO)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
GOTO Unconditional Branch INCF Increment f

Syntax: GOTO k Syntax: INCF f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1]
Operation: k  PC<20:1>
a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) + 1  dest
Encoding:
1st word (k<7:0>) 1110 1111 Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z
k7kkk kkkk0
2nd word(k<19:8>) 1111 k19kkk kkkk kkkk8 Encoding: 0010 10da ffff ffff
Description: GOTO allows an unconditional branch Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are
anywhere within entire incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
2-Mbyte memory range. The 20-bit placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>. placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
GOTO is always a two-cycle If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank.
Words: 2
Cycles: 2 set is enabled, this instruction operates
Q Cycle Activity: in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal No Read literal Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
‘k’<7:0>, operation ‘k’<19:8>, Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Write to PC
Words: 1
No No No No
operation operation operation operation Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Example: GOTO THERE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
After Instruction Decode Read Process Write to
PC = Address (THERE) register ‘f’ Data destination
Example: INCF CNT, 1, 0

Before Instruction
CNT = FFh
Z = 0
C = ?
DC = ?
After Instruction
CNT = 00h
Z = 1
C = 1
DC = 1

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
INCFSZ Increment f, skip if 0 INFSNZ Increment f, skip if not 0

Syntax: INCFSZ f {,d {,a}} Syntax: INFSNZ f {,d {,a}}

d  [0,1] d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) + 1  dest, Operation: (f) + 1  dest,

skip if result  0
skip if result = 0
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is not ‘0’, the next
If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction, instruction, which is already fetched, is
which is already fetched, is discarded discarded and a NOP is executed
and a NOP is executed instead, making instead, making it a two-cycle
it a two-cycle instruction. instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank. GPR bank.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words: 1 Words: 1
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction. by a 2-word instruction.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write to Decode Read Process Write to
register ‘f’ Data destination register ‘f’ Data destination
If skip: If skip:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: HERE INCFSZ CNT, 1, 0 Example: HERE INFSNZ REG, 1, 0

NZERO : ZERO
ZERO : NZERO
PC = Address (HERE) PC = Address (HERE)
CNT = CNT + 1 REG = REG + 1
If CNT = 0; If REG  0;
PC = Address (ZERO) PC = Address (NZERO)
If CNT  0; If REG = 0;
PC = Address (NZERO) PC = Address (ZERO)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
IORLW Inclusive OR literal with W IORWF Inclusive OR W with f

Syntax: IORLW k Syntax: IORWF f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1]
Operation: (W) .OR. k  W
a  [0,1]
Operation: (W) .OR. (f)  dest
Description: The contents of W are ORed with the
eight-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in
W. Description: Inclusive OR W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is
‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’,
Words: 1
the result is placed back in register ‘f’
Cycles: 1 (default).
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
GPR bank.
Example: IORLW 35h mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
Before Instruction
W = 9Ah Literal Offset Mode” for details.
After Instruction
Words: 1
W = BFh
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: IORWF RESULT, 0, 1

Before Instruction
RESULT = 13h
W = 91h
After Instruction
RESULT = 13h
W = 93h

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
LFSR Load FSR MOVF Move f

Syntax: LFSR f, k Syntax: MOVF f {,d {,a}}
Operands: 0f2 Operands: 0  f  255
0  k  4095 d  [0,1]
a  [0,1]
Operation: k  FSRf
Operation: f  dest
Encoding: 1110 1110 00ff Status Affected: N, Z
k11kkk
1111 0000 k7kkk kkkk Encoding: 0101 00da ffff ffff
Description: The 12-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are moved to
File Select Register pointed to by ‘f’. a destination dependent upon the
status of ‘d’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
Words: 2
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
Cycles: 2 placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
Q Cycle Activity: Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the
256-byte bank.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read literal Process Write If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
‘k’ MSB Data literal ‘k’ GPR bank.
MSB to If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
FSRfH set is enabled, this instruction operates
Decode Read literal Process Write literal in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
‘k’ LSB Data ‘k’ to FSRfL mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
Example: LFSR 2, 3ABh
After Instruction
Words: 1
FSR2H = 03h
FSR2L = ABh Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write W
register ‘f’ Data
Example: MOVF REG, 0, 0

Before Instruction
REG = 22h
W = FFh
After Instruction
REG = 22h
W = 22h

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
MOVFF Move f to f MOVLB Move literal to low nibble in BSR

Syntax: MOVFF fs,fd Syntax: MOVLW k
Operands: 0  fs  4095 Operands: 0  k  255
0  fd  4095
Operation: k  BSR
Operation: (fs)  fd
Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0001 kkkk kkkk
Encoding:
Description: The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the
1st word (source) 1100 ffff ffff ffffs Bank Select Register (BSR). The value
2nd word (destin.) 1111 ffff ffff ffffd of BSR<7:4> always remains ‘0’,
Description: The contents of source register ‘fs’ are regardless of the value of k7:k4.
moved to destination register ‘fd’.
Words: 1
Location of source ‘fs’ can be anywhere
in the 4096-byte data space (000h to Cycles: 1
FFFh) and location of destination ‘fd’ Q Cycle Activity:
can also be anywhere from 000h to
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
FFFh.
Either source or destination can be W Decode Read Process Write literal
(a useful special situation). literal ‘k’ Data ‘k’ to BSR
MOVFF is particularly useful for
transferring a data memory location to a Example: MOVLB 5
peripheral register (such as the transmit
Before Instruction
buffer or an I/O port).
BSR Register = 02h
The MOVFF instruction cannot use the
After Instruction
PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the
BSR Register = 05h
destination register.
Words: 2
Cycles: 2 (3)
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process No
register ‘f’ Data operation
(src)
Decode No No Write
operation operation register ‘f’
No dummy (dest)
read
Example: MOVFF REG1, REG2

Before Instruction
REG1 = 33h
REG2 = 11h
After Instruction
REG1 = 33h
REG2 = 33h

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
MOVLW Move literal to W MOVWF Move W to f

Syntax: MOVLW k Syntax: MOVWF f {,a}
a  [0,1]
Operation: kW
Operation: (W)  f
Encoding: 0000 1110 kkkk kkkk Status Affected: None
Description: The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into W.
Words: 1 Description: Move data from W to register ‘f’.
Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the
Cycles: 1 256-byte bank.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
GPR bank.
Example: MOVLW 5Ah mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
After Instruction
W = 5Ah Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: MOVWF REG, 0

Before Instruction
W = 4Fh
REG = FFh
After Instruction
W = 4Fh
REG = 4Fh

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
MULLW Multiply literal with W MULWF Multiply W with f

Syntax: MULLW k Syntax: MULWF f {,a}
a  [0,1]
Operation: (W) x k  PRODH:PRODL
Operation: (W) x (f)  PRODH:PRODL
Encoding: 0000 1101 kkkk kkkk Status Affected: None
Description: An unsigned multiplication is carried
out between the contents of W and the Description: An unsigned multiplication is carried
8-bit literal ‘k’. The 16-bit result is out between the contents of W and the
placed in the PRODH:PRODL register register file location ‘f’. The 16-bit
pair. PRODH contains the high byte. result is stored in the PRODH:PRODL
W is unchanged. register pair. PRODH contains the
None of the Status flags are affected. high byte. Both W and ‘f’ are
Note that neither overflow nor carry is unchanged.
possible in this operation. A zero result None of the Status flags are affected.
is possible but not detected. Note that neither overflow nor carry is
possible in this operation. A zero
Words: 1
result is possible but not detected.
Cycles: 1 If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
Q Cycle Activity: selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used
to select the GPR bank.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write set is enabled, this instruction
literal ‘k’ Data registers operates in Indexed Literal Offset
PRODH: Addressing mode whenever
PRODL f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3
“Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented
Example: MULLW 0C4h Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset
Mode” for details.
Before Instruction
Words: 1
W = E2h
PRODH = ? Cycles: 1
PRODL = ?
Q Cycle Activity:
After Instruction
W = E2h Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
PRODH = ADh Decode Read Process Write
PRODL = 08h register ‘f’ Data registers
PRODH:
PRODL
Example: MULWF REG, 1

Before Instruction
W = C4h
REG = B5h
PRODH = ?
PRODL = ?
After Instruction
W = C4h
REG = B5h
PRODH = 8Ah
PRODL = 94h

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NEGF Negate f NOP No Operation

Syntax: NEGF f {,a} Syntax: NOP
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: None
a  [0,1]
Operation: No operation
Operation: (f)+1f
Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Encoding: 0110 110a ffff ffff 1111 xxxx xxxx xxxx
Description: Location ‘f’ is negated using two’s Description: No operation.
complement. The result is placed in the
Words: 1
data memory location ‘f’.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. Cycles: 1
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the Q Cycle Activity:
GPR bank.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
set is enabled, this instruction operates Decode No No No
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing operation operation operation
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Example:
None.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: NEGF REG, 1

Before Instruction
REG = 0011 1010 [3Ah]
After Instruction
REG = 1100 0110 [C6h]

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
POP Pop Top of Return Stack PUSH Push Top of Return Stack
Syntax: POP Syntax: PUSH
Operands: None Operands: None
Operation: (TOS)  bit bucket Operation: (PC + 2)  TOS
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0110 Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0101
Description: The TOS value is pulled off the return Description: The PC + 2 is pushed onto the top of
stack and is discarded. The TOS value the return stack. The previous TOS
then becomes the previous value that value is pushed down on the stack.
was pushed onto the return stack. This instruction allows implementing a
This instruction is provided to enable software stack by modifying TOS and
the user to properly manage the return then pushing it onto the return stack.
stack to incorporate a software stack.
Words: 1
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity:
Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode PUSH No No
Decode No POP TOS No PC + 2 onto operation operation
operation value operation return stack
Example: POP Example: PUSH

GOTO NEW
Before Instruction
Before Instruction TOS = 345Ah
TOS = 0031A2h PC = 0124h
Stack (1 level down) = 014332h
After Instruction
After Instruction PC = 0126h
TOS = 014332h TOS = 0126h
PC = NEW Stack (1 level down) = 345Ah

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
RCALL Relative Call RESET Reset

Syntax: RCALL n Syntax: RESET
Operands: -1024  n  1023 Operands: None
Operation: (PC) + 2  TOS, Operation: Reset all registers and flags that are
(PC) + 2 + 2n  PC affected by a MCLR Reset.
Status Affected: None Status Affected: All
Encoding: 1101 1nnn nnnn nnnn Encoding: 0000 0000 1111 1111
Description: Subroutine call with a jump up to 1K Description: This instruction provides a way to
from the current location. First, return execute a MCLR Reset by software.
address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the
Words: 1
stack. Then, add the 2’s complement
number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will Cycles: 1
have incremented to fetch the next Q Cycle Activity:
instruction, the new address will be
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a
two-cycle instruction. Decode Start No No
Reset operation operation
Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Example: RESET
Q Cycle Activity:
After Instruction
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Registers = Reset Value
Decode Read literal Process Write to PC Flags* = Reset Value
‘n’ Data
PUSH PC to
stack
No No No No
Example: HERE RCALL Jump

Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
After Instruction
PC = Address (Jump)
TOS = Address (HERE + 2)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
RETFIE Return from Interrupt RETLW Return literal to W

Syntax: RETFIE {s} Syntax: RETLW k
Operands: s  [0,1] Operands: 0  k  255
Operation: (TOS)  PC, Operation: k  W,
1  GIE/GIEH or PEIE/GIEL, (TOS)  PC,
if s = 1 PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged
(WS)  W,
(STATUSS)  Status,
(BSRS)  BSR, Encoding: 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk
PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged. Description: W is loaded with the eight-bit literal ‘k’.
Status Affected: GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL. The program counter is loaded from the
top of the stack (the return address).
Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 000s The high address latch (PCLATH)
Description: Return from interrupt. Stack is popped remains unchanged.
and Top-of-Stack (TOS) is loaded into
Words: 1
the PC. Interrupts are enabled by
setting either the high or low priority Cycles: 2
global interrupt enable bit. If ‘s’ = 1, the Q Cycle Activity:
contents of the shadow registers, WS,
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
STATUSS and BSRS, are loaded into
their corresponding registers, W, Decode Read Process POP PC
Status and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update of literal ‘k’ Data from stack,
these registers occurs (default). Write to W
No No No No
Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity: Example:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No No POP PC CALL TABLE ; W contains table
operation operation from stack ; offset value
; W now has
Set GIEH or
; table value
GIEL
:
No No No No TABLE
operation operation operation operation ADDWF PCL ; W = offset
RETLW k0 ; Begin table
Example: RETFIE 1 RETLW k1 ;
:
After Interrupt
:
PC = TOS
W = WS RETLW kn ; End of table
BSR = BSRS
Status = STATUSS
GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL = 1 Before Instruction
W = 07h
After Instruction
W = value of kn

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
RETURN Return from Subroutine RLCF Rotate Left f through Carry

Syntax: RETURN {s} Syntax: RLCF f {,d {,a}}
Operands: s  [0,1] Operands: 0  f  255
d  [0,1]
Operation: (TOS)  PC,
a  [0,1]
if s = 1
(WS)  W, Operation: (f<n>)  dest<n + 1>,
(STATUSS)  Status, (f<7>)  C,
(BSRS)  BSR, (C)  dest<0>
PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged
Status Affected: C, N, Z
Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 001s Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated
Description: Return from subroutine. The stack is one bit to the left through the CARRY
popped and the top of the stack (TOS) flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in
is loaded into the program counter. If W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back
‘s’= 1, the contents of the shadow in register ‘f’ (default).
registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS, If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
are loaded into their corresponding selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to
registers, W, Status and BSR. If select the GPR bank.
‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
occurs (default). set is enabled, this instruction
operates in Indexed Literal Offset
Words: 1
Addressing mode whenever
Cycles: 2 f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3
Q Cycle Activity: “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented
Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No Process POP PC
operation Data from stack C register f
No No No No
operation operation operation operation Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Example: RETURN Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
After Instruction: Decode Read Process Write to
PC = TOS register ‘f’ Data destination
Example: RLCF REG, 0, 0

Before Instruction
REG = 1110 0110
C = 0
After Instruction
REG = 1110 0110
W = 1100 1100
C = 1

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
RLNCF Rotate Left f (No Carry) RRCF Rotate Right f through Carry
Syntax: RLNCF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: RRCF f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1] d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f<n>)  dest<n + 1>, Operation: (f<n>)  dest<n – 1>,
(f<7>)  dest<0> (f<0>)  C,
Status Affected: N, Z (C)  dest<7>
Status Affected: C, N, Z
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated
one bit to the left. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated
is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is one bit to the right through the CARRY
stored back in register ‘f’ (default). flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the register ‘f’ (default).
GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
set is enabled, this instruction operates GPR bank.
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See set is enabled, this instruction operates
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
register f
Words: 1 C register f
Cycles: 1
Words: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Cycles: 1
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process Write to Q Cycle Activity:
register ‘f’ Data destination Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: RLNCF REG, 1, 0 register ‘f’ Data destination
Before Instruction
REG = 1010 1011 Example: RRCF REG, 0, 0
After Instruction Before Instruction
REG = 0101 0111 REG = 1110 0110
C = 0
After Instruction
REG = 1110 0110
W = 0111 0011
C = 0

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
RRNCF Rotate Right f (No Carry) SETF Set f

Syntax: RRNCF f {,d {,a}} Syntax: SETF f {,a}
d  [0,1] a [0,1]
a  [0,1]
Operation: FFh  f
Operation: (f<n>)  dest<n – 1>,
(f<0>)  dest<7>
Description: The contents of the specified register
are set to FFh.
Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
one bit to the right. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is GPR bank.
placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank will be set is enabled, this instruction operates
selected (default), overriding the BSR in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
value. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, then the bank will be mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
selected as per the BSR value. Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
set is enabled, this instruction operates Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words: 1
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Cycles: 1
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
register f Decode Read Process Write
Words: 1
Cycles: 1 Example: SETF REG, 1
Q Cycle Activity: Before Instruction
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 REG = 5Ah
After Instruction
REG = FFh
Example 1: RRNCF REG, 1, 0

Before Instruction
REG = 1101 0111
After Instruction
REG = 1110 1011
Example 2: RRNCF REG, 0, 0

Before Instruction
W = ?
REG = 1101 0111
After Instruction
W = 1110 1011
REG = 1101 0111

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
SLEEP Enter Sleep mode SUBFWB Subtract f from W with borrow

Syntax: SLEEP Syntax: SUBFWB f {,d {,a}}
Operands: None Operands: 0 f 255
d  [0,1]
Operation: 00h  WDT,
a  [0,1]
0  WDT postscaler,
1  TO, Operation: (W) – (f) – (C) dest
0  PD
Status Affected: TO, PD
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0011 Description: Subtract register ‘f’ and CARRY flag
Description: The Power-down Status bit (PD) is (borrow) from W (2’s complement
cleared. The Time-out Status bit (TO) method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored
is set. Watchdog Timer and its in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored in
postscaler are cleared. register ‘f’ (default).
The processor is put into Sleep mode If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
with the oscillator stopped. selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used
to select the GPR bank.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1 set is enabled, this instruction
Q Cycle Activity: operates in Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode whenever
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3
Decode No Process Go to “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented
operation Data Sleep Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset
Example: SLEEP Words: 1
Before Instruction Cycles: 1
TO = ?
Q Cycle Activity:
PD = ?
After Instruction Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
TO = 1† Decode Read Process Write to
PD = 0 register ‘f’ Data destination
Example 1: SUBFWB REG, 1, 0
† If WDT causes wake-up, this bit is cleared.
Before Instruction
REG = 3
W = 2
C = 1
After Instruction
REG = FF
W = 2
C = 0
Z = 0
N = 1 ; result is negative
Before Instruction
REG = 2
W = 5
C = 1
After Instruction
REG = 2
W = 3
C = 1
Z = 0
N = 0 ; result is positive
Before Instruction
REG = 1
W = 2
C = 0
After Instruction
REG = 0
W = 2
C = 1
Z = 1 ; result is zero
N = 0

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
SUBLW Subtract W from literal SUBWF Subtract W from f

Syntax: SUBLW k Syntax: SUBWF f {,d {,a}}
Operands: 0 k 255 Operands: 0 f 255
d  [0,1]
Operation: k – (W) W
a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) – (W) dest
Description W is subtracted from the eight-bit
literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W.
Description: Subtract W from register ‘f’ (2’s
Words: 1
complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the
Cycles: 1 result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the
Q Cycle Activity: result is stored back in register ‘f’
(default).
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
Decode Read Process Write to W selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used
literal ‘k’ Data to select the GPR bank.
Example 1: SUBLW 02h
set is enabled, this instruction
Before Instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset
W = 01h Addressing mode whenever
C = ?
f 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3
After Instruction
W = 01h “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented
C = 1 ; result is positive Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset
Z = 0 Mode” for details.
N = 0
Words: 1
Example 2: SUBLW 02h
Cycles: 1
Before Instruction
W = 02h Q Cycle Activity:
C = ?
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
After Instruction
W = 00h Decode Read Process Write to
C = 1 ; result is zero register ‘f’ Data destination
Z = 1
N = 0 Example 1: SUBWF REG, 1, 0
Example 3: SUBLW 02h Before Instruction
REG = 3
Before Instruction W = 2
W = 03h C = ?
C = ? After Instruction
After Instruction REG = 1
W = FFh ; (2’s complement) W = 2
C = 0 ; result is negative C = 1 ; result is positive
Z = 0 Z = 0
N = 1 N = 0
Example 2: SUBWF REG, 0, 0
Before Instruction
REG = 2
W = 2
C = ?
After Instruction
REG = 2
W = 0
C = 1 ; result is zero
Z = 1
N = 0
Example 3: SUBWF REG, 1, 0
Before Instruction
REG = 1
W = 2
C = ?
After Instruction
REG = FFh ;(2’s complement)
W = 2
C = 0 ; result is negative
Z = 0
N = 1

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
SUBWFB Subtract W from f with Borrow SWAPF Swap f

Syntax: SUBWFB f {,d {,a}} Syntax: SWAPF f {,d {,a}}
d  [0,1] d  [0,1]
a  [0,1] a  [0,1]
Operation: (f) – (W) – (C) dest Operation: (f<3:0>)  dest<7:4>,
Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z (f<7:4>)  dest<3:0>
Encoding: 0101 10da ffff ffff Status Affected: None
Description: Subtract W and the CARRY flag Encoding: 0011 10da ffff ffff
(borrow) from register ‘f’ (2’s comple-
ment method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is Description: The upper and lower nibbles of register
stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is ‘f’ are exchanged. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result
stored back in register ‘f’ (default). is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. placed in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction GPR bank.
set is enabled, this instruction operates If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing set is enabled, this instruction operates
mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Words: 1
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode Read Process Write to Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
register ‘f’ Data destination Decode Read Process Write to
Example 1: SUBWFB REG, 1, 0 register ‘f’ Data destination
Before Instruction
REG = 19h (0001 1001) Example: SWAPF REG, 1, 0
W = 0Dh (0000 1101)
C = 1 Before Instruction
After Instruction REG = 53h
REG = 0Ch (0000 1100) After Instruction
W = 0Dh (0000 1101)
C = 1 REG = 35h
Z = 0
N = 0 ; result is positive
Example 2: SUBWFB REG, 0, 0
Before Instruction
REG = 1Bh (0001 1011)
W = 1Ah (0001 1010)
C = 0
After Instruction
REG = 1Bh (0001 1011)
W = 00h
C = 1
Z = 1 ; result is zero
N = 0
Example 3: SUBWFB REG, 1, 0
Before Instruction
REG = 03h (0000 0011)
W = 0Eh (0000 1110)
C = 1
After Instruction
REG = F5h (1111 0101)
; [2’s comp]
W = 0Eh (0000 1110)
C = 0
Z = 0
N = 1 ; result is negative

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TBLRD Table Read TBLRD Table Read (Continued)

Syntax: TBLRD ( *; *+; *-; +*) Example1: TBLRD *+ ;
Operands: None Before Instruction
TABLAT = 55h
Operation: if TBLRD *,
TBLPTR = 00A356h
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; MEMORY (00A356h) = 34h
TBLPTR – No Change; After Instruction
if TBLRD *+, TABLAT = 34h
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; TBLPTR = 00A357h
(TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR;
Example2: TBLRD +* ;
if TBLRD *-,
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; Before Instruction
(TBLPTR) – 1  TBLPTR; TABLAT = AAh
TBLPTR = 01A357h
if TBLRD +*,
MEMORY (01A357h) = 12h
(TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; MEMORY (01A358h) = 34h
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR))  TABLAT; After Instruction
Status Affected: None TABLAT = 34h
TBLPTR = 01A358h
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 10nn
nn=0 *
=1 *+
=2 *-
=3 +*
Description: This instruction is used to read the contents
of Program Memory (P.M.). To address the
program memory, a pointer called Table
Pointer (TBLPTR) is used.
The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to
each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR
has a 2-Mbyte address range.
TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte
of Program Memory
Word
TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte
of Program Memory
Word
The TBLRD instruction can modify the value
of TBLPTR as follows:
• no change
• post-increment
• post-decrement
• pre-increment
Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No No No
operation operation operation
No No operation No No operation
operation (Read Program operation (Write TABLAT)
Memory)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TBLWT Table Write TBLWT Table Write (Continued)

Syntax: TBLWT ( *; *+; *-; +*) Example1: TBLWT *+;
Operands: None Before Instruction
Operation: if TBLWT*, TABLAT = 55h
(TABLAT)  Holding Register; TBLPTR = 00A356h
TBLPTR – No Change; HOLDING REGISTER
(00A356h) = FFh
if TBLWT*+,
After Instructions (table write completion)
(TABLAT)  Holding Register;
TABLAT = 55h
(TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; TBLPTR = 00A357h
if TBLWT*-, HOLDING REGISTER
(TABLAT)  Holding Register; (00A356h) = 55h
(TBLPTR) – 1  TBLPTR; Example 2: TBLWT +*;
if TBLWT+*,
(TBLPTR) + 1  TBLPTR; Before Instruction
(TABLAT)  Holding Register; TABLAT = 34h
TBLPTR = 01389Ah
Status Affected: None HOLDING REGISTER
(01389Ah) = FFh
Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 11nn
HOLDING REGISTER
nn=0 * (01389Bh) = FFh
=1 *+ After Instruction (table write completion)
=2 *- TABLAT = 34h
=3 +* TBLPTR = 01389Bh
HOLDING REGISTER
Description: This instruction uses the 3 LSBs of (01389Ah) = FFh
TBLPTR to determine which of the HOLDING REGISTER
8 holding registers the TABLAT is written (01389Bh) = 34h
to. The holding registers are used to
program the contents of Program
Memory (P.M.). (Refer to Section 6.0
“Flash Program Memory” for additional
details on programming Flash memory.)
The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to
each byte in the program memory.
TBLPTR has a 2-MByte address range.
The LSb of the TBLPTR selects which
byte of the program memory location to
access.
TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant
Byte of Program
Memory Word
TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant
Byte of Program
Memory Word
The TBLWT instruction can modify the
value of TBLPTR as follows:
• no change
• post-increment
• post-decrement
• pre-increment
Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode No No No
operation operation operation
No No No No
(Read (Write to
TABLAT) Holding
Register )

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TSTFSZ Test f, skip if 0 XORLW Exclusive OR literal with W

Syntax: TSTFSZ f {,a} Syntax: XORLW k
Operands: 0  f  255 Operands: 0 k 255
a  [0,1]
Operation: (W) .XOR. k W
Operation: skip if f = 0
Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 1010 kkkk kkkk
Description: The contents of W are XORed with
Description: If ‘f’ = 0, the next instruction fetched the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed
during the current instruction execution in W.
is discarded and a NOP is executed, Words: 1
making this a two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. Cycles: 1
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the Q Cycle Activity:
GPR bank.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
set is enabled, this instruction operates Decode Read Process Write to W
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing literal ‘k’ Data
Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Example: XORLW 0AFh
Literal Offset Mode” for details. Before Instruction
W = B5h
Words: 1
After Instruction
Cycles: 1(2)
W = 1Ah
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read Process No
register ‘f’ Data operation
If skip:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
No No No No
No No No No
Example: HERE TSTFSZ CNT, 1

NZERO :
ZERO :
Before Instruction
PC = Address (HERE)
After Instruction
If CNT = 00h,
PC = Address (ZERO)
If CNT  00h,
PC = Address (NZERO)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
XORWF Exclusive OR W with f

Syntax: XORWF f {,d {,a}}
Operands: 0  f  255
d  [0,1]
a  [0,1]
Operation: (W) .XOR. (f) dest
Description: Exclusive OR the contents of W with
register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored
in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back
in the register ‘f’ (default).
GPR bank.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: XORWF REG, 1, 0

Before Instruction
REG = AFh
W = B5h
After Instruction
REG = 1Ah
W = B5h

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
25.2 Extended Instruction Set A summary of the instructions in the extended instruc-
tion set is provided in Table 25-3. Detailed descriptions
In addition to the standard 75 instructions of the PIC18 are provided in Section 25.2.2 “Extended Instruction
instruction set, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 devices also Set”. The opcode field descriptions in Table 25-1 apply
provide an optional extension to the core CPU to both the standard and extended PIC18 instruction
functionality. The added features include eight sets.
additional instructions that augment indirect and
indexed addressing operations and the implementation Note: The instruction set extension and the
of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode for many of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode
the standard PIC18 instructions. were designed for optimizing applications
written in C; the user may likely never use
The additional features of the extended instruction set
these instructions directly in assembler.
are disabled by default. To enable them, users must set
The syntax for these commands is pro-
the XINST Configuration bit.
vided as a reference for users who may be
The instructions in the extended set can all be reviewing code that has been generated
classified as literal operations, which either manipulate by a compiler.
the File Select Registers, or use them for indexed
addressing. Two of the instructions, ADDFSR and 25.2.1 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SYNTAX
SUBFSR, each have an additional special instantiation
Most of the extended instructions use indexed
for using FSR2. These versions (ADDULNK and
arguments, using one of the File Select Registers and
SUBULNK) allow for automatic return after execution.
some offset to specify a source or destination register.
The extended instructions are specifically implemented When an argument for an instruction serves as part of
to optimize re-entrant program code (that is, code that indexed addressing, it is enclosed in square brackets
is recursive or that uses a software stack) written in (“[ ]”). This is done to indicate that the argument is used
high-level languages, particularly C. Among other as an index or offset. MPASM™ Assembler will flag an
things, they allow users working in high-level error if it determines that an index or offset value is not
languages to perform certain operations on data bracketed.
structures more efficiently. These include:
When the extended instruction set is enabled, brackets
• dynamic allocation and deallocation of software are also used to indicate index arguments in byte-
stack space when entering and leaving oriented and bit-oriented instructions. This is in addition
subroutines to other changes in their syntax. For more details, see
• function pointer invocation Section 25.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with
• software Stack Pointer manipulation Standard PIC18 Commands”.
• manipulation of variables located in a software Note: In the past, square brackets have been
stack used to denote optional arguments in the
PIC18 and earlier instruction sets. In this
text and going forward, optional
arguments are denoted by braces (“{ }”).
TABLE 25-3: EXTENSIONS TO THE PIC18 INSTRUCTION SET

Description Cycles
ADDFSR f, k Add literal to FSR 1 1110 1000 ffkk kkkk None

ADDULNK k Add literal to FSR2 and return 2 1110 1000 11kk kkkk None
CALLW Call subroutine using WREG 2 0000 0000 0001 0100 None
MOVSF zs, fd Move zs (source) to 1st word 2 1110 1011 0zzz zzzz None
fd (destination) 2nd word 1111 ffff ffff ffff
MOVSS zs, zd Move zs (source) to 1st word 2 1110 1011 1zzz zzzz None
zd (destination) 2nd word 1111 xxxx xzzz zzzz
PUSHL k Store literal at FSR2, 1 1110 1010 kkkk kkkk None
decrement FSR2
SUBFSR f, k Subtract literal from FSR 1 1110 1001 ffkk kkkk None
SUBULNK k Subtract literal from FSR2 and 2 1110 1001 11kk kkkk None
return

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
25.2.2 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET
ADDFSR Add Literal to FSR ADDULNK Add Literal to FSR2 and Return
Syntax: ADDFSR f, k Syntax: ADDULNK k
Operands: 0  k  63 Operands: 0  k  63
f  [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operation: FSR2 + k  FSR2,
Operation: FSR(f) + k  FSR(f) (TOS) PC
Encoding: 1110 1000 ffkk kkkk Encoding: 1110 1000 11kk kkkk
Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the
contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’. contents of FSR2. A RETURN is then
Words: 1 executed by loading the PC with the
Cycles: 1 TOS.
The instruction takes two cycles to
Q Cycle Activity:
execute; a NOP is performed during
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 the second cycle.
Decode Read Process Write to This may be thought of as a special
literal ‘k’ Data FSR case of the ADDFSR instruction,
where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates
only on FSR2.
Example: ADDFSR 2, 23h Words: 1
Before Instruction Cycles: 2
FSR2 = 03FFh
After Instruction
Q Cycle Activity:
FSR2 = 0422h
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
literal ‘k’ Data FSR
No No No No
Operation Operation Operation Operation
Example: ADDULNK 23h

Before Instruction
FSR2 = 03FFh
PC = 0100h
After Instruction
FSR2 = 0422h
PC = (TOS)
Note: All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in
symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction syntax then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s).

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
CALLW Subroutine Call Using WREG MOVSF Move Indexed to f

Syntax: CALLW Syntax: MOVSF [zs], fd
Operands: None Operands: 0  zs  127
0  fd  4095
Operation: (PC + 2)  TOS,
(W)  PCL, Operation: ((FSR2) + zs)  fd
(PCLATH)  PCH,
(PCLATU)  PCU
Encoding:
1st word (source) 1110 1011 0zzz zzzzs
Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 0100 2nd word (destin.) 1111 ffff ffff ffffd
Description First, the return address (PC + 2) is Description: The contents of the source register are
pushed onto the return stack. Next, the moved to destination register ‘fd’. The
contents of W are written to PCL; the actual address of the source register is
existing value is discarded. Then, the determined by adding the 7-bit literal
contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are offset ‘zs’ in the first word to the value of
latched into PCH and PCU, FSR2. The address of the destination
respectively. The second cycle is register is specified by the 12-bit literal
executed as a NOP instruction while the ‘fd’ in the second word. Both addresses
new next instruction is fetched. can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data
Unlike CALL, there is no option to space (000h to FFFh).
update W, Status or BSR. The MOVSF instruction cannot use the
PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the
Words: 1
Cycles: 2 If the resultant source address points to
Q Cycle Activity: an indirect addressing register, the
value returned will be 00h.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read PUSH PC to No Words: 2
WREG stack operation Cycles: 2
No No No No Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Determine Determine Read
Example: HERE CALLW source addr source addr source reg
Decode No No Write
Before Instruction
PC = address (HERE) operation operation register ‘f’
PCLATH = 10h No dummy (dest)
PCLATU = 00h read
W = 06h
After Instruction
PC = 001006h
TOS = address (HERE + 2) Example: MOVSF [05h], REG2
PCLATH = 10h Before Instruction
PCLATU = 00h FSR2 = 80h
W = 06h
Contents
of 85h = 33h
REG2 = 11h
After Instruction
FSR2 = 80h
Contents
of 85h = 33h
REG2 = 33h

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
MOVSS Move Indexed to Indexed PUSHL Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2
Syntax: MOVSS [zs], [zd] Syntax: PUSHL k
Operands: 0  zs  127 Operands: 0k  255
0  zd  127
Operation: k  (FSR2),
Operation: ((FSR2) + zs)  ((FSR2) + zd) FSR2 – 1  FSR2
Encoding:
1st word (source) 1110 1011 1zzz zzzzs
2nd word (dest.) 1111 xxxx xzzz zzzzd Description: The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is written to the data
memory address specified by FSR2. FSR2
Description The contents of the source register are
is decremented by 1 after the operation.
moved to the destination register. The
This instruction allows users to push values
addresses of the source and destination
onto a software stack.
registers are determined by adding the
7-bit literal offsets ‘zs’ or ‘zd’, Words: 1
respectively, to the value of FSR2. Both
Cycles: 1
registers can be located anywhere in
the 4096-byte data memory space Q Cycle Activity:
(000h to FFFh). Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
The MOVSS instruction cannot use the Decode Read ‘k’ Process Write to
PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the data destination
If the resultant source address points to
an indirect addressing register, the Example: PUSHL 08h
value returned will be 00h. If the
resultant destination address points to Before Instruction
an indirect addressing register, the FSR2H:FSR2L = 01ECh
Memory (01ECh) = 00h
instruction will execute as a NOP.
Words: 2 After Instruction
Cycles: 2 FSR2H:FSR2L = 01EBh
Memory (01ECh) = 08h
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Determine Determine Read
source addr source addr source reg
Decode Determine Determine Write
dest addr dest addr to dest reg
Example: MOVSS [05h], [06h]

Before Instruction
FSR2 = 80h
Contents
of 85h = 33h
Contents
of 86h = 11h
After Instruction
FSR2 = 80h
Contents
of 85h = 33h
Contents
of 86h = 33h

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
SUBFSR Subtract Literal from FSR SUBULNK Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return
Syntax: SUBFSR f, k Syntax: SUBULNK k
Operands: 0  k  63 Operands: 0  k  63
f  [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operation: FSR2 – k  FSR2
Operation: FSR(f) – k  FSRf (TOS) PC
Encoding: 1110 1001 ffkk kkkk Encoding: 1110 1001 11kk kkkk
Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the
the contents of the FSR specified by contents of the FSR2. A RETURN is then
‘f’. executed by loading the PC with the TOS.
Words: 1 The instruction takes two cycles to
execute; a NOP is performed during the
Cycles: 1
second cycle.
Q Cycle Activity: This may be thought of as a special case of
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 the SUBFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary
Decode Read Process Write to ‘11’); it operates only on FSR2.
register ‘f’ Data destination Words: 1
Cycles: 2
Q Cycle Activity:
Example: SUBFSR 2, 23h
Before Instruction Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
FSR2 = 03FFh Decode Read Process Write to
After Instruction
FSR2 = 03DCh No No No No
Operation Operation Operation Operation
Example: SUBULNK 23h

Before Instruction
FSR2 = 03FFh
PC = 0100h
After Instruction
FSR2 = 03DCh
PC = (TOS)

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
25.2.3 BYTE-ORIENTED AND 25.2.3.1 Extended Instruction Syntax with
BIT-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS IN Standard PIC18 Commands
INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE When the extended instruction set is enabled, the file
Note: Enabling the PIC18 instruction set register argument, ‘f’, in the standard byte-oriented and
extension may cause legacy applications bit-oriented commands is replaced with the literal offset
to behave erratically or fail entirely. value, ‘k’. As already noted, this occurs only when ‘f’ is
less than or equal to 5Fh. When an offset value is used,
In addition to eight new commands in the extended set, it must be indicated by square brackets (“[ ]”). As with
enabling the extended instruction set also enables the extended instructions, the use of brackets indicates
Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode (Section 5.5.1 to the compiler that the value is to be interpreted as an
“Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”). This has index or an offset. Omitting the brackets, or using a
a significant impact on the way that many commands of value greater than 5Fh within brackets, will generate an
the standard PIC18 instruction set are interpreted. error in the MPASM assembler.
When the extended set is disabled, addresses If the index argument is properly bracketed for Indexed
embedded in opcodes are treated as literal memory Literal Offset Addressing, the Access RAM argument is
locations: either as a location in the Access Bank (‘a’ = never specified; it will automatically be assumed to be
0), or in a GPR bank designated by the BSR (‘a’ = 1). ‘0’. This is in contrast to standard operation (extended
When the extended instruction set is enabled and ‘a’ = instruction set disabled) when ‘a’ is set on the basis of
0, however, a file register argument of 5Fh or less is the target address. Declaring the Access RAM bit in
interpreted as an offset from the pointer value in FSR2 this mode will also generate an error in the MPASM
and not as a literal address. For practical purposes, this assembler.
means that all instructions that use the Access RAM bit
as an argument – that is, all byte-oriented and bit- The destination argument, ‘d’, functions as before.
oriented instructions, or almost half of the core PIC18 In the latest versions of the MPASM™ assembler,
instructions – may behave differently when the language support for the extended instruction set must
extended instruction set is enabled. be explicitly invoked. This is done with either the
When the content of FSR2 is 00h, the boundaries of the command line option, /y, or the PE directive in the
Access RAM are essentially remapped to their original source listing.
values. This may be useful in creating backward
compatible code. If this technique is used, it may be 25.2.4 CONSIDERATIONS WHEN
necessary to save the value of FSR2 and restore it ENABLING THE EXTENDED
when moving back and forth between C and assembly INSTRUCTION SET
routines in order to preserve the Stack Pointer. Users It is important to note that the extensions to the instruc-
must also keep in mind the syntax requirements of the tion set may not be beneficial to all users. In particular,
extended instruction set (see Section 25.2.3.1 users who are not writing code that uses a software
“Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 stack may not benefit from using the extensions to the
Commands”). instruction set.
Although the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode Additionally, the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
can be very useful for dynamic stack and pointer mode may create issues with legacy applications
manipulation, it can also be very annoying if a simple written to the PIC18 assembler. This is because
arithmetic operation is carried out on the wrong instructions in the legacy code may attempt to address
register. Users who are accustomed to the PIC18 registers in the Access Bank below 5Fh. Since these
programming must keep in mind that, when the addresses are interpreted as literal offsets to FSR2
extended instruction set is enabled, register addresses when the instruction set extension is enabled, the
of 5Fh or less are used for Indexed Literal Offset application may read or write to the wrong data
Addressing. addresses.
Representative examples of typical byte-oriented and When porting an application to the PIC18(L)F2X/
bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset 4XK22, it is very important to consider the type of code.
Addressing mode are provided on the following page to A large, re-entrant application that is written in ‘C’ and
show how execution is affected. The operand condi- would benefit from efficient compilation will do well
tions shown in the examples are applicable to all when using the instruction set extensions. Legacy
instructions of these types. applications that heavily use the Access Bank will most
likely not benefit from using the extended instruction
set.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
ADD W to Indexed Bit Set Indexed

ADDWF BSF
(Indexed Literal Offset mode) (Indexed Literal Offset mode)
Syntax: ADDWF [k] {,d} Syntax: BSF [k], b
d  [0,1] 0b7
Operation: (W) + ((FSR2) + k)  dest Operation: 1  ((FSR2) + k)
Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Status Affected: None
Encoding: 0010 01d0 kkkk kkkk Encoding: 1000 bbb0 kkkk kkkk
Description: The contents of W are added to the Description: Bit ‘b’ of the register indicated by FSR2,
contents of the register indicated by offset by the value ‘k’, is set.
FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’.
Words: 1
If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’
is ‘1’, the result is stored back in Cycles: 1
register ‘f’ (default). Q Cycle Activity:
Cycles: 1 Decode Read Process Write to
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Example: BSF [FLAG_OFST], 7
Decode Read ‘k’ Process Write to
Before Instruction
Data destination
FLAG_OFST = 0Ah
FSR2 = 0A00h
Example: ADDWF [OFST] , 0 Contents
of 0A0Ah = 55h
Before Instruction
After Instruction
W = 17h Contents
OFST = 2Ch of 0A0Ah = D5h
FSR2 = 0A00h
Contents
of 0A2Ch = 20h
After Instruction
W = 37h
Contents
Set Indexed
SETF
of 0A2Ch = 20h (Indexed Literal Offset mode)
Syntax: SETF [k]
Operands: 0  k  95
Operation: FFh  ((FSR2) + k)
Description: The contents of the register indicated by
FSR2, offset by ‘k’, are set to FFh.
Words: 1
Cycles: 1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Decode Read ‘k’ Process Write
Data register
Example: SETF [OFST]

Before Instruction
OFST = 2Ch
FSR2 = 0A00h
Contents
of 0A2Ch = 00h
After Instruction
Contents
of 0A2Ch = FFh

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
25.2.5 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS WITH
MICROCHIP MPLAB® IDE TOOLS
The latest versions of Microchip’s software tools have
been designed to fully support the extended instruction
set of the PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 family of devices. This
includes the MPLAB C18 C compiler, MPASM
assembly language and MPLAB Integrated
Development Environment (IDE).
When selecting a target device for software
development, MPLAB IDE will automatically set default
Configuration bits for that device. The default setting for
the XINST Configuration bit is ‘0’, disabling the
extended instruction set and Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode. For proper execution of applications
developed to take advantage of the extended
instruction set, XINST must be set during
programming.
To develop software for the extended instruction set,
the user must enable support for the instructions and
the Indexed Addressing mode in their language tool(s).
Depending on the environment being used, this may be
done in several ways:
• A menu option, or dialog box within the
environment, that allows the user to configure the
language tool and its settings for the project
• A command line option
• A directive in the source code
These options vary between different compilers,
assemblers and development environments. Users are
encouraged to review the documentation accompanying
their development systems for the appropriate
information.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
26.0 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT 26.1 MPLAB Integrated Development
Environment Software
The PIC® microcontrollers and dsPIC® digital signal
controllers are supported with a full range of software The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software
and hardware development tools: development previously unseen in the 8/16/32-bit
• Integrated Development Environment microcontroller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows®
operating system-based application that contains:
- MPLAB® IDE Software
• Compilers/Assemblers/Linkers • A single graphical interface to all debugging tools
- MPLAB C Compiler for Various Device - Simulator
Families - Programmer (sold separately)
- HI-TECH C for Various Device Families - In-Circuit Emulator (sold separately)
- MPASMTM Assembler - In-Circuit Debugger (sold separately)
- MPLINKTM Object Linker/ • A full-featured editor with color-coded context
MPLIBTM Object Librarian • A multiple project manager
- MPLAB Assembler/Linker/Librarian for • Customizable data windows with direct edit of
Various Device Families contents
• Simulators • High-level source code debugging
- MPLAB SIM Software Simulator • Mouse over variable inspection
• Emulators • Drag and drop variables from source to watch
- MPLAB REAL ICE™ In-Circuit Emulator windows
• In-Circuit Debuggers • Extensive on-line help
- MPLAB ICD 3 • Integration of select third party tools, such as
- PICkit™ 3 Debug Express IAR C Compilers
• Device Programmers The MPLAB IDE allows you to:
- PICkit™ 2 Programmer • Edit your source files (either C or assembly)
- MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer • One-touch compile or assemble, and download to
• Low-Cost Demonstration/Development Boards, emulator and simulator tools (automatically
Evaluation Kits, and Starter Kits updates all project information)
• Debug using:
- Source files (C or assembly)
- Mixed C and assembly
- Machine code
MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a
single development paradigm, from the cost-effective
simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to
full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning
curve when upgrading to tools with increased flexibility
and power.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
26.2 MPLAB C Compilers for Various 26.5 MPLINK Object Linker/
Device Families MPLIB Object Librarian
The MPLAB C Compiler code development systems The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable
are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip’s PIC18, objects created by the MPASM Assembler and the
PIC24 and PIC32 families of microcontrollers and the MPLAB C18 C Compiler. It can link relocatable objects
dsPIC30 and dsPIC33 families of digital signal control- from precompiled libraries, using directives from a
lers. These compilers provide powerful integration linker script.
capabilities, superior code optimization and ease of The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and
use. modification of library files of precompiled code. When
For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide a routine from a library is called from a source file, only
symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE the modules that contain that routine will be linked in
debugger. with the application. This allows large libraries to be
used efficiently in many different applications.
26.3 HI-TECH C for Various Device The object linker/library features include:
Families • Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many
The HI-TECH C Compiler code development systems smaller files
are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip’s PIC • Enhanced code maintainability by grouping
family of microcontrollers and the dsPIC family of digital related modules together
signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful • Flexible creation of libraries with easy module
integration capabilities, omniscient code generation listing, replacement, deletion and extraction
and ease of use.
For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide 26.6 MPLAB Assembler, Linker and
symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE Librarian for Various Device
debugger. Families
The compilers include a macro assembler, linker, pre-
MPLAB Assembler produces relocatable machine
processor, and one-step driver, and can run on multiple
code from symbolic assembly language for PIC24,
platforms.
PIC32 and dsPIC devices. MPLAB C Compiler uses
the assembler to produce its object file. The assembler
26.4 MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object files that can then be
The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal archived or linked with other relocatable object files and
macro assembler for PIC10/12/16/18 MCUs. archives to create an executable file. Notable features
of the assembler include:
The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object
files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel® standard HEX • Support for the entire device instruction set
files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol • Support for fixed-point and floating-point data
reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines • Command line interface
and generated machine code and COFF files for • Rich directive set
debugging.
• Flexible macro language
The MPASM Assembler features include: • MPLAB IDE compatibility
• Integration into MPLAB IDE projects
• User-defined macros to streamline
assembly code
• Conditional assembly for multi-purpose
source files
• Directives that allow complete control over the
assembly process

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
26.7 MPLAB SIM Software Simulator 26.9 MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger
The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator allows code
System
development in a PC-hosted environment by simulat- MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger System is Micro-
ing the PIC MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs on an instruction chip's most cost effective high-speed hardware
level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be debugger/programmer for Microchip Flash Digital Sig-
examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from nal Controller (DSC) and microcontroller (MCU)
a comprehensive stimulus controller. Registers can be devices. It debugs and programs PIC® Flash microcon-
logged to files for further run-time analysis. The trace trollers and dsPIC® DSCs with the powerful, yet easy-
buffer and logic analyzer display extend the power of to-use graphical user interface of MPLAB Integrated
the simulator to record and track program execution, Development Environment (IDE).
actions on I/O, most peripherals and internal registers.
The MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger probe is con-
The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator fully supports nected to the design engineer's PC using a high-speed
symbolic debugging using the MPLAB C Compilers, USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with a
and the MPASM and MPLAB Assemblers. The soft- connector compatible with the MPLAB ICD 2 or MPLAB
ware simulator offers the flexibility to develop and REAL ICE systems (RJ-11). MPLAB ICD 3 supports all
debug code outside of the hardware laboratory envi- MPLAB ICD 2 headers.
ronment, making it an excellent, economical software
development tool. 26.10 PICkit 3 In-Circuit Debugger/
Programmer and
26.8 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit
PICkit 3 Debug Express
Emulator System
The MPLAB PICkit 3 allows debugging and program-
MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System is ming of PIC® and dsPIC® Flash microcontrollers at a
Microchip’s next generation high-speed emulator for most affordable price point using the powerful graphical
Microchip Flash DSC and MCU devices. It debugs and user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development
programs PIC® Flash MCUs and dsPIC® Flash DSCs Environment (IDE). The MPLAB PICkit 3 is connected
with the easy-to-use, powerful graphical user interface of to the design engineer's PC using a full speed USB
the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE), interface and can be connected to the target via an
included with each kit. Microchip debug (RJ-11) connector (compatible with
The emulator is connected to the design engineer’s PC MPLAB ICD 3 and MPLAB REAL ICE). The connector
using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected uses two device I/O pins and the reset line to imple-
to the target with either a connector compatible with in- ment in-circuit debugging and In-Circuit Serial Pro-
circuit debugger systems (RJ11) or with the new high- gramming™.
speed, noise tolerant, Low-Voltage Differential Signal The PICkit 3 Debug Express include the PICkit 3, demo
(LVDS) interconnection (CAT5). board and microcontroller, hookup cables and CDROM
The emulator is field upgradable through future firmware with user’s guide, lessons, tutorial, compiler and
downloads in MPLAB IDE. In upcoming releases of MPLAB IDE software.
MPLAB IDE, new devices will be supported, and new
features will be added. MPLAB REAL ICE offers signifi-
cant advantages over competitive emulators including
low-cost, full-speed emulation, run-time variable
watches, trace analysis, complex breakpoints, a rugge-
dized probe interface and long (up to three meters) inter-
connection cables.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
26.11 PICkit 2 Development 26.13 Demonstration/Development
Programmer/Debugger and Boards, Evaluation Kits, and
PICkit 2 Debug Express Starter Kits
The PICkit™ 2 Development Programmer/Debugger is A wide variety of demonstration, development and
a low-cost development tool with an easy to use inter- evaluation boards for various PIC MCUs and dsPIC
face for programming and debugging Microchip’s Flash DSCs allows quick application development on fully func-
families of microcontrollers. The full featured tional systems. Most boards include prototyping areas for
Windows® programming interface supports baseline adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware
(PIC10F, PIC12F5xx, PIC16F5xx), midrange and source code for examination and modification.
(PIC12F6xx, PIC16F), PIC18F, PIC24, dsPIC30, The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs,
dsPIC33, and PIC32 families of 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232
microcontrollers, and many Microchip Serial EEPROM interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional
products. With Microchip’s powerful MPLAB Integrated EEPROM memory.
Development Environment (IDE) the PICkit™ 2
enables in-circuit debugging on most PIC® microcon- The demonstration and development boards can be
trollers. In-Circuit-Debugging runs, halts and single used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom
steps the program while the PIC microcontroller is circuits and for learning about various microcontroller
embedded in the application. When halted at a break- applications.
point, the file registers can be examined and modified. In addition to the PICDEM™ and dsPICDEM™ demon-
The PICkit 2 Debug Express include the PICkit 2, demo stration/development board series of circuits, Microchip
board and microcontroller, hookup cables and CDROM has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software
with user’s guide, lessons, tutorial, compiler and for analog filter design, KEELOQ® security ICs, CAN,
MPLAB IDE software. IrDA®, PowerSmart battery management, SEEVAL®
evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate
sensing, plus many more.
26.12 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer
Also available are starter kits that contain everything
The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal, needed to experience the specified device. This usually
CE compliant device programmer with programmable includes a single application and debug capability, all
voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for on one board.
maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display
(128 x 64) for menus and error messages and a modu- Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com)
lar, detachable socket assembly to support various for the complete list of demonstration, development
package types. The ICSP™ cable assembly is included and evaluation kits.
as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB
PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program
PIC devices without a PC connection. It can also set
code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3
connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable.
The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and
optimized algorithms for quick programming of large
memory devices and incorporates an MMC card for file
storage and data applications.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Absolute Maximum Ratings (†)

Ambient temperature under bias.............................................................................................................-40°C to +125°C
Storage temperature .............................................................................................................................. -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on any pin with respect to VSS (except VDD, and MCLR) .................................................. -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V)
Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS
PIC18LF46K22 ......................................................................................................... -0.3V to +4.5V
PIC18F46K22 ........................................................................................................... -0.3V to +6.5V
Voltage on MCLR with respect to VSS (Note 2) ............................................................................................0V to +11.0V
Total power dissipation (Note 1) ...............................................................................................................................1.0W
Maximum current out of VSS pin (-40°C to +85°C) .............................................................................................. 300 mA
Maximum current out of VSS pin (+85°C to +125°C)............................................................................................ 125 mA
Maximum current into VDD pin (-40°C to +85°C) ................................................................................................ 200 mA
Maximum current into VDD pin (+85°C to +125°C) ................................................................................................85 mA
Input clamp current, IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VDD) 20 mA
Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VDD)  20 mA
Maximum output current sunk by any I/O pin..........................................................................................................25 mA
Maximum output current sourced by any I/O pin ....................................................................................................25 mA
Maximum current sunk byall ports (-40°C to +85°C)........................................................................................... 200 mA
Maximum current sunk byall ports (+85°C to +125°C)......................................................................................... 110 mA
Maximum current sourced by all ports (-40°C to +85°C) ......................................................................................185 mA
Maximum current sourced by all ports (+85°C to +125°C) .....................................................................................70 mA
Note 1: Power dissipation is calculated as follows:

Pdis = VDD x {IDD –  IOH} +  {(VDD – VOH) x IOH} + (VOL x IOL)
2: Voltage spikes below VSS at the MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin, inducing currents greater than 80 mA, may cause
latch-up. Thus, a series resistor of 50-100 should be used when applying a “low” level to the MCLR/VPP/
RE3 pin, rather than pulling this pin directly to VSS.
† NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the
device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those
indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for
extended periods may affect device reliability.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 27-1: PIC18(L)F46K22 FAMILY VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY GRAPH
5.5V
3.6V
3.5V
3.0V
2.7V
Voltage
2.2V
1.8V
10 20 30 32 40 50 60 64
Frequency (MHz)
Note 1: Maximum Frequency 20 MHz, 1.8V to 3.0V, -40°C to +125°C (PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22).

2: Maximum Frequency 64 MHz, 3.0V to 3.6V, -40°C to +125°C (PIC18LF2X/4XK22).
3: Maximum Frequency 64 MHz, 3.0V to 5.5V, -40°C to +125°C (PIC18F2X/4XK22).

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.1 DC Characteristics: Supply Voltage, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise
PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 stated)
Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +125°C
Param
Symbol Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions
No.
D001 VDD Supply Voltage PIC18LF2X/4XK22 1.8 — 3.6 V
PIC18F2X/4XK22 1.8 — 5.5 V
D002 VDR RAM Data Retention Voltage(1) 1.5 — — V
D003 VPOR VDD Start Voltage to ensure internal — — 0.7 V See section on Power-on Reset
Power-on Reset signal for details
D004 SVDD VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal 0.05 — — V/ms See section on Power-on Reset
Power-on Reset signal for details
D005 VBOR Brown-out Reset Voltage
BORV<1:0> = 11(2) — 1.9 — V
BORV<1:0> = 10 — 2.2 — V
BORV<1:0> = 01 — 2.5 — V
BORV<1:0> = 00(3) — 2.85 — V
Note 1: This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered in Sleep mode, or during a device Reset, without losing RAM
data.
2: With BOR enabled, operation is supported until a BOR occurs. This is valid although VDD may be below
the minimum rated supply voltage.
3: With BOR enabled, full-speed operation (FOSC = 64 MHz) is supported until a BOR occurs. This is valid
although VDD may be below the minimum voltage for this frequency.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
PIC18LF2X/4XK22
PIC18F2X/4XK22
Param Typ Typ Max Max Conditions

Device Characteristics Units
No. +25°C +60°C +85°C +125°C VDD Notes
(1)
Power-down Base Current (IPD)
D006 Sleep mode 0.02 2 10 A 1.8V WDT, BOR, FVR and
0.02 2 10 A 3.0V SOSC disabled, all Periph-
erals inactive
10 25 35 A 1.8V
11 25 35 A 3.0V
12 25 35 A 5.0V
Power-down Module Differential Current (delta IPD)
D007 Watchdog Timer 0.3 2.5 2.5 A 1.8V
0.5 2.5 2.5 A 3.0V
0.3 2.5 2.5 A 1.8V
0.5 2.5 2.5 A 3.0V
0.5 2.5 2.5 A 5.0V
(2)
D008 Brown-out Reset 10 20 20 A 2.0V
12 20 20 A 3.0V
25 40 40 A 2.0V
30 50 50 A 3.0V
65 90 90 A 5.0V
(2)
D009 Brown-out Reset 0.0 0.0 0.0 A 1.8V- Sleep mode,
3.6V BOREN<1:0> = 10
0.0 0.0 0.0 A 1.8V-
5.5V
D010 High/Low Voltage Detect (2) TBD TBD TBD A 2.0V
TBD TBD TBD A 3.0V
Note 1: The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is
measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS
and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 Oscillator, BOR, etc.).
2: BOR, HLVD and FVR enable internal band gap reference. With both modules enabled, current consump-
tion will be less than the sum of both specifications.
3: A/D converter differential currents apply only in Run mode. In Sleep or Idle mode both the ADC and the
FRC turn off as soon as conversion (if any) is complete.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 (Continued)
PIC18LF2X/4XK22
PIC18F2X/4XK22

No. +25°C +60°C +85°C +125°C VDD Notes
D011 Secondary Oscillator 0.8 3 3 A 1.8V
0.9 4 4 A 3.0V
32 kHz on SOSC
0.8 3 3 A 1.8V
0.9 4 4 A 3.0V
1 5 5 A 5.0V
D013 A/D Converter (3) 200 A 1.8V
260 A 3.0V
A/D on, not converting
200 A 1.8V
260 A 3.0V
260 A 5.0V
(3)
D014 A/D Converter A 1.8V
A 3.0V
Adder to A/D current for
A 1.8V FRC conversion clock.
A 3.0V
A 5.0V
D015 Comparators 9 15 15 A 1.8V
9 15 15 A 3.0V
LP mode
9 15 15 A 1.8V
9 15 15 A 3.0V
9 15 15 A 5.0V
D16 Comparators 50 80 80 A 1.8V
50 80 80 A 3.0V
HP mode
50 80 80 A 1.8V
50 80 80 A 3.0V
50 80 80 A 5.0V

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 (Continued)
PIC18LF2X/4XK22
PIC18F2X/4XK22

No. +25°C +60°C +85°C +125°C VDD Notes
D017 DAC 12 20 20 A 1.8V
20 30 30 A 3.0V
12 20 20 A 1.8V
20 30 30 A 3.0V
33 50 50 A 5.0V
D018 FVR 15 25 25 A 1.8V
15 25 25 A 3.0V
30 45 45 A 1.8V
35 55 55 A 3.0V
70 100 100 A 5.0V

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.3 DC Characteristics: RC Run Supply Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

PIC18LF2X/4XK22

PIC18F2X/4XK22
Param
Device Characteristics Typ Max Units Conditions
No.
D020 Supply Current (IDD)(1),(2) 5.0 14 A -40°C
4.0 14 A +25°C
4.0 — A +60°C VDD = 1.8V
4.5 18 A +85°C
7.0 30 A 125°C FOSC = 31 kHz
(RC_RUN mode,
D021 8.0 20 A -40°C LFINTOSC source)
7.0 20 A +25°C
7.0 — A +60°C VDD = 3.0V
7.5 22 A +85°C
10.0 35 A +125°C
D022 12 50 A -40°C
15 50 A +25°C
VDD = 1.8V
17 50 A +85°C
20 60 A +125°C
D023 16 50 A -40°C
19 50 A +25°C FOSC = 31 kHz
VDD = 3.0V (RC_RUN mode,
23 50 A +85°C LFINTOSC source)
25 60 A +125°C
17 50 A -40°C
21 50 A +25°C
D024 VDD = 5.0V
24 50 A +85°C
28 60 A +125°C
D025 0.12 0.25 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 1.8V FOSC = 500 KHz
(RC_RUN mode,
D026 0.15 0.30 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V MFINTOSC source)
D027 0.16 0.30 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 1.8V
FOSC = 500 KHz
D028 0.20 0.40 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (RC_RUN mode,
D029 0.50 -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V MFINTOSC source)
0.25 mA
D030 0.30 0.50 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 1.8V FOSC = 1 MHz
(RC_RUN mode,
D031 0.40 0.70 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V HFINTOSC source)
HFINTOSC source)
D034 0.55 0.90 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V
Note 1: The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an
impact on the current consumption.
Test condition: All Peripheral Module Control bits in PMD0, PMD1 and PMD2 set to ‘1’.
2: The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
All I/O pins set as outputs driven to Vss;
MCLR = VDD;
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail (PRI_RUN and PRI_IDLE only).

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.3 DC Characteristics: RC Run Supply Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 (Continued)
PIC18LF2X/4XK22

PIC18F2X/4XK22
Param
No.
1.7 (RC_RUN mode,
D036 2.8 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V
HFINTOSC source)
HFINTOSC source)
D039 2.3 3.6 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V
FOSC = 64 MHz
(RC_RUN mode,
D041 6.5 10 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V
HFINTOSC + PLL
source)
7.9 (RC_RUN mode,
D044 12.0 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V HFINTOSC + PLL
source)
Note 1: The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an
impact on the current consumption.
Test condition: All Peripheral Module Control bits in PMD0, PMD1 and PMD2 set to ‘1’.
All I/O pins set as outputs driven to Vss;
MCLR = VDD;

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.4 DC Characteristics: RC Idle Supply Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

PIC18LF2X/4XK22
PIC18F2X/4XK22
Param
No.
1.5 8 A +25°C
1.5 — A +60°C VDD = 1.8V
2.0 10 A +85°C
4.0 25 A +125°C FOSC = 31 kHz
(RC_IDLE mode,
D046 3.0 10 A -40°C LFINTOSC source)
2.0 10 A +25°C
2.0 — A +60°C VDD = 3.0V
2.5 12 A +85°C
5.0 30 A +125°C
D047 10 50 A -40°C
13 50 A +25°C
VDD = 1.8V
15 50 A +85°C
18 60 A +125°C
D048 12 50 A -40°C
14 50 A +25°C FOSC = 31 kHz
VDD = 3.0V (RC_IDLE mode,
17 50 A +85°C LFINTOSC source)
20 60 A +125°C
D049 13 50 A -40°C
16 50 A +25°C
VDD = 5.0V
18 50 A +85°C
23 60 A +125°C
(RC_IDLE mode,
D053 0.15 0.30 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (RC_IDLE mode,

(RC_IDLE mode,
D056 0.35 0.60 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V HFINTOSC source)
Note 1: The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as
I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temper-
ature, also have an impact on the current consumption.
The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD;
MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified.
2: For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can
be estimated by the formula Ir = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.4 DC Characteristics: RC Idle Supply Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 (Continued)
PIC18LF2X/4XK22
PIC18F2X/4XK22
Param
No.
D058 0.4 0.70 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (RC_IDLE mode,
HFINTOSC source)
D059 0.45 0.80 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V
0.8 (RC_IDLE mode,
D061 1.4 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V HFINTOSC source)
0.9 (RC_IDLE mode,
D063 1.4 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V
HFINTOSC source)
D064 1.1 1.7 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V
FOSC = 64 MHz
(RC_IDLE mode,
D066 2.5 4 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V
HFINTOSC + PLL
source)
(RC_IDLE mode,
D069 3.5 6.0 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V HFINTOSC + PLL
source)
2: For RC oscillator configurations, current through REXT is not included. The current through the resistor can
be estimated by the formula Ir = VDD/2REXT (mA) with REXT in k.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.5 DC Characteristics: Primary Run Supply Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

PIC18LF2X/4XK22 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
PIC18F2X/4XK22 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Param
No.
D070 Supply Current (IDD)(1),(2) 0.07 0.14 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 1.8V FOSC = 1 MHz
D071 (PRI_RUN,
0.12 0.25 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V EC oscillator)
D073 0.13 0.25 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (PRI_RUN,
EC oscillator)
D074 0.15 0.30 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V
D076 (PRI_RUN,
D078 2.4 4.0 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (PRI_RUN,
EC oscillator)
D079 2.7 4.5 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V
D080 FOSC = 64 MHz
6.5 11 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (PRI_RUN,
EC oscillator)
D081 6.8 11 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V FOSC = 64 MHz
D082 (PRI_RUN,
7.5 13 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V EC oscillator)
D084 16 MHz Internal
1.8 3.2 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (PRI_RUN, EC +
PLL)
D086 1.9 3.5 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V 16 MHz Internal
(PRI_RUN, EC +
D087 2.2 4.0 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V PLL)
D088 FOSC = 16 MHz
64 MHz Internal
6.5 10 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V
(PRI_RUN, EC +
PLL)
All I/O pins set as outputs driven to VSS;
MCLR = VDD;
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail (PRI_RUN and PRI-IDLE only).

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.5 DC Characteristics: Primary Run Supply Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 (Continued)
PIC18LF2X/4XK22 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
PIC18F2X/4XK22 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Param
No.
D089 6.8 11 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V FOSC = 16 MHz
7.5 13 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V (PRI_RUN, EC +
PLL)
MCLR = VDD;

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.6 DC Characteristics: Primary Idle Supply Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

PIC18LF2X/4XK22
PIC18F2X/4XK22
Param
No.
D100 Supply Current (IDD)(1),(2) 0.025 0.07 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 1.8V FOSC = 1 MHz
D101 (PRI_IDLE mode,
D103 0.06 0.15 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (PRI_IDLE mode,
EC oscillator)
D104 0.07 0.17 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V
D106 (PRI_IDLEmode,
D108 0.9 1.5 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (PRI_IDLEmode,
EC oscillator)
D109 1.1 1.8 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V
D110 FOSC = 64 MHz
2.5 4 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (PRI_IDLEmode,
EC oscillator)
D112 (PRI_IDLEmode,
0.65 1.10 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V (PRI_IDLE, EC +
PLL)
D116 0.7 1.2 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V 16 MHz Internal
(PRI_IDLE, EC +
D117 0.9 1.5 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V PLL)
D118 FOSC = 16 MHz
64 MHz Internal
2.5 4 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 3.0V
(PRI_IDLE, EC +
PLL)
3.3 6.0 mA -40°C to +125°C VDD = 5.0V (PRI_IDLE, EC +
PLL)
MCLR = VDD;

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.7 DC Characteristics: Secondary Oscillator Supply Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

PIC18LF2X/4XK22
PIC18F2X/4XK22
Param
No.
4.5 14 A +25°C
5.0 — A +60°C VDD = 1.8V
5.5 18 A +85°C
9.0 30 A +125°C FOSC = 32 kHz
(SEC_RUN mode,
D131 7.0 20 A -40°C SOSC source)
7.5 20 A +25°C
8.0 — A +60°C VDD = 3.0V
8.5 22 A +85°C
11.0 35 A +125°C
D132 12 50 A -40°C
16 50 A +25°C
VDD = 1.8V
19 50 A +85°C
22 60 A +125°C
D133 16 50 A -40°C
20 50 A +25°C FOSC = 32 kHz
VDD = 3.0V (SEC_RUN mode,
23 50 A +85°C SOSC source)
27 60 A +125°C
D134 18 50 A -40°C
22 50 A +25°C
VDD = 5.0V
25 50 A +85°C
30 60 A +125°C
D135 1.5 8 A -40°C
2.0 8 A +25°C
2.5 — A +60°C VDD = 1.8V
3.0 10 A +85°C
6.0 25 A +125°C FOSC = 32 kHz
(SEC_IDLE mode,
D136 2.0 10 A -40°C SOSC source)
2.5 10 A +25°C
3.0 — A +60°C VDD = 3.0V
3.5 12 A +85°C
7.0 30 A +125°C
MCLR = VDD;

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.7 DC Characteristics: Secondary Oscillator Supply Current, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
PIC18LF2X/4XK22
PIC18F2X/4XK22
Param
No.
D137 10 50 A -40°C
13 50 A +25°C
VDD = 1.8V
16 50 A +85°C
19 60 A +125°C
D138 11 50 A -40°C
15 50 A +25°C FOSC = 32 kHz
VDD = 3.0V (SEC_IDLE mode,
18 50 A +85°C SOSC source)
22 60 A +125°C
D139 13 50 A -40°C
17 50 A +25°C
VDD = 5.0V
20 50 A +85°C
24 60 A +125°C
MCLR = VDD;

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.8 DC Characteristics:Input/Output Characteristics, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

DC CHARACTERISTICS
Operating temperature -40°C TA  +125°C
Param
Symbol Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions
No.
VIL Input Low Voltage
I/O ports:
D140 with TTL buffer — V
D141 with Schmitt Trigger — V
D142 MCLR — V
D143 OSC1 — V HS, HSPLL modes
D144 OSC1 — V RC, EC modes(1)
D145 OSC1 — V XT, LP modes
D146 TXCKI — V
VIH Input High Voltage
I/O ports:
D147 with TTL buffer — V
D148 VIH with Schmitt Trigger: — V 2.4V < VDD < 3.6V
— V VDD < 2.4V
D149 VIH MCLR — V 2.4V < VDD < 3.6V
— V VDD < 2.4V
D150 OSC1 — V HS, HSPLL modes
D151 OSC1 — V EC mode
D152 OSC1 — V RC mode(1)
D153 OSC1 — V XT, LP modes
D154 TXCKI — V
IIL Input Leakage I/O and VSS VPIN VDD,
MCLR(2),(3) Pin at high-
impedance
D155 I/O ports 5 nA +25°C
10 nA +60°C
30 nA +85°C
100 nA +125°C
Input Leakage RA2
D156 IIL 10 nA +25°C
35 nA +60°C
200 nA +85°C
400 nA +125°C
Input Leakage RA3
D157 IIL 10 nA +25°C
25 nA +60°C
70 nA +85°C
300 nA +125°C
Note 1: In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKIN pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended that
the PIC® device be driven with an external clock while in RC mode.
2: The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified
levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input
voltages.
3: Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin.
4: Parameter is characterized but not tested.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.8 DC Characteristics:Input/Output Characteristics, PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 (Continued)
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Operating temperature -40°C TA  +125°C
Param
Symbol Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions
No.
IPU Weak Pull-up Current
D158 IPURB PORTB weak pull-up 90 A VDD = 3.0V, VPIN =
current VSS
VOL Output Low Voltage
D159 I/O ports — V IOL = 8.5 mA, VDD
= 3.0V,
-40C to +85C
D160 OSC2/CLKOUT — V IOL = 1.6 mA, VDD
(RC, RCIO, EC, ECIO = 3.0V,
modes) -40C to +85C
VOH Output High Voltage(3)
D161 I/O ports — V IOH = -3.0 mA, VDD
= 3.0V,
-40C to +85C
D162 OSC2/CLKOUT — V IOH = -1.3 mA, VDD
(RC, RCIO, EC, ECIO = 3.0V,
modes) -40C to +85C
Capacitive Loading
Specs
on Output Pins
D163(4) COSC2 OSC2 pin — pF In XT, HS and LP
modes when
external clock is
used to drive
OSC1
D164 CIO All I/O pins and OSC2 — pF To meet the AC
(in RC mode) Timing
Specifications
D165 CB SCL, SDA — pF I2C™ Specifica-
tion
Note 1: In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKIN pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended that
the PIC® device be driven with an external clock while in RC mode.
2: The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified
levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input
voltages.
3: Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin.
4: Parameter is characterized but not tested.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.9 Memory Programming Requirements

DC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions
No.
Internal Program Memory
Programming Specifications(1)
D170 VPP Voltage on MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin VDD + 4.5 — 9 V (Note 3), (Note 4)
D171 IDDP Supply Current during — — 10 mA
Programming
Data EEPROM Memory
D172 ED Byte Endurance 100K — — E/W -40C to +85C
D173 VDRW VDD for Read/Write (PIC18LF) 1.8 — 3.6 V Using EECON to
read/write
D174 VDRW VDD for Read/Write (PIC18F) 1.8 — 5.5 V
D175 TDEW Erase/Write Cycle Time — 4 — ms
D176 TRETD Characteristic Retention 40 — — Year Provided no other
specifications are violated
D177 TREF Number of Total Erase/Write 1M 10M — E/W -40°C to +85°C
Cycles before Refresh(2)
Program Flash Memory
D178 EP Cell Endurance 10K — — E/W -40C to +85C (Note 5)
D179 VPR VDD for Read (PIC18LF) 1.8 — 3.6 V
D180 VPR VDD for Read (PIC18F) 1.8 — 5.5 V
D181 VIW VDD for Row Erase or Write 2.2 — 3.6 V
(PIC18LF)
D182 VIW VDD for Row Erase or Write 2.2 — 5.5 V
(PIC18F)
D183 TIW Self-timed Write Cycle Time — 2 — ms
D184 TRETD Characteristic Retention 40 — — Year Provided no other
specifications are violated
† Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance
only and are not tested.
Note 1: These specifications are for programming the on-chip program memory through the use of table write instruc-
tions.
2: Refer to Section 7.8 “Using the Data EEPROM” for a more detailed discussion on data EEPROM
endurance.
3: Required only if single-supply programming is disabled.
4: The MPLAB ICD 2 does not support variable VPP output. Circuitry to limit the ICD 2 VPP voltage must be
placed between the ICD 2 and target system when programming or debugging with the ICD 2.
5: Self-write and Block Erase.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.10 Analog Characteristics
TABLE 27-1: COMPARATOR SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Conditions: 1.8V < VDD < 5.5V, -40°C < TA < +125°C (unless otherwise stated)
Param
Sym Characteristics Min Typ Max Units Comments
No.
CM01 VIOFF Input Offset Voltage — 12 mV High-Power mode
— 18 mV Low-Power mode
CM02 VICM Input Common-mode Voltage — VDD V
CM03 CMRR Common-mode Rejection Ratio — — dB
CM04 TRESP Response Time — 200 ns High-Power mode(1)
— 300 ns Low-Power mode
CM05 TMC2OV Comparator Mode Change to — — s
Output Valid*
* These parameters are characterized but not tested.
Note 1: Response time measured with one comparator input at VDD/2, while the other input transitions from VSS to VDD.
TABLE 27-2: DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER (DAC) SPECIFICATIONS

Param
No.
CV01* CLSB Step Size(2) — VDD/32 — V
CV02* CACC Absolute Accuracy — — 1/2 LSb
CV03* CR Unit Resistor Value (R) — 5k — 
CV04* CST Settling Time(1) — — 10 s
Note 1: Settling time measured while CVRR = 1 and CVR3:CVR0 transitions from ‘0000’ to ‘1111’.
2: See Section 22.0 “Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module” for more information.
TABLE 27-3: FIXED VOLTAGE REFERENCE (FVR) SPECIFICATIONS


VR Voltage Reference Specifications
Param
No.
VR01 VROUT VR voltage output 0.92 1.024 1.13 V 1x output, VDD 1.8V
1.84 2.048 2.26 V 2x output, VDD 2.5V
3.70 4.096 4.50 V 4x output, VDD 4.75V
VR04* TSTABLE Settling Time — 25 100 s 0 to 125°C

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 27-2: HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CHARACTERISTICS
VDD
(HLVDIF can be
VHLVD cleared by software)
(HLVDIF set by hardware)
HLVDIF
TABLE 27-4: HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CHARACTERISTICS

Param
Symbol Characteristic HLVDL<3:0> Min Typ† Max Units Conditions
No.
HLVD Voltage on VDD 0000 1.80 V
Transition High-to- 0001 2.05 V
Low
0010 2.25 V
0011 2.40 V
0100 2.50 V
0101 2.75 V
0110 2.80 V
0111 2.95 V
1000 3.25 V
1001 3.45 V
1010 3.65 V
1011 3.80 V
1100 4.10 V
1101 4.35 V
1110 4.70 V
1111 V(HLVDIN pin) v
† Production tested at TAMB = 25°C. Specifications over temperature limits ensured by characterization.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.11 AC (Timing) Characteristics
27.11.1 TIMING PARAMETER SYMBOLOGY
The timing parameter symbols have been created
using one of the following formats:
1. TppS2ppS 3. TCC:ST (I2C™ specifications only)

2. TppS 4. Ts (I2C specifications only)
T
F Frequency T Time
Lowercase letters (pp) and their meanings:
pp
cc CCP1 osc OSC1
ck CLKOUT rd RD
cs CS rw RD or WR
di SDI sc SCK
do SDO ss SS
dt Data in t0 T0CKI
io I/O port t1 T13CKI
mc MCLR wr WR
Uppercase letters and their meanings:
S
F Fall P Period
H High R Rise
I Invalid (High-impedance) V Valid
L Low Z High-impedance
I2C only
AA output access High High
BUF Bus free Low Low
TCC:ST (I2C specifications only)
CC
HD Hold SU Setup
ST
DAT DATA input hold STO Stop condition
STA Start condition

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.11.2 TIMING CONDITIONS
The temperature and voltages specified in Table 27-5
apply to all timing specifications unless otherwise
noted. Figure 27-3 specifies the load conditions for the
timing specifications.
TABLE 27-5: TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS – AC

Operating temperature -40°C  TA +125°C
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Operating voltage VDD range as described in DC spec Section 27.1 and
Section 27.9.
FIGURE 27-3: LOAD CONDITIONS FOR DEVICE TIMING SPECIFICATIONS

Load Condition 1 Load Condition 2
VDD/2
RL Pin CL
VSS
CL Legend:
Pin
RL = 464
VSS CL = 50 pF for all pins except OSC2/CLKOUT
and including D and E outputs as ports

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
27.11.3 TIMING DIAGRAMS AND SPECIFICATIONS
FIGURE 27-4: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING (ALL MODES EXCEPT PLL)

Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
OSC1
1 3 3 4 4
2
CLKOUT
TABLE 27-6: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS

Param.
Symbol Characteristic Min Max Units Conditions
No.
1A FOSC External CLKIN DC 64 MHz EC, ECIO Oscillator mode
Frequency(1)
Oscillator Frequency(1) DC 4 MHz RC Oscillator mode
0.1 4 MHz XT Oscillator mode
4 25 MHz HS Oscillator mode
4 16 MHz HS + PLL Oscillator mode
5 200 kHz LP Oscillator mode
1 TOSC External CLKIN Period(1) 15.6 — ns EC, ECIO Oscillator mode
Oscillator Period(1) 250 — ns RC Oscillator mode
250 10,000 ns XT Oscillator mode
40 250 ns HS Oscillator mode
62.5 250 ns HS + PLL Oscillator mode,
5 200 s LP Oscillator mode
2 TCY Instruction Cycle Time(1) 62.5 — ns TCY = 4/FOSC
3 TOSL, External Clock in (OSC1) 30 — ns XT Oscillator mode
TOSH High or Low Time 2.5 — s LP Oscillator mode
10 — ns HS Oscillator mode
4 TOSR, External Clock in (OSC1) — 20 ns XT Oscillator mode
TOSF Rise or Fall Time — 50 ns LP Oscillator mode
— 7.5 ns HS Oscillator mode
Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period for all configurations
except PLL. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under
standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result
in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested
to operate at “min.” values with an external clock applied to the OSC1/CLKIN pin. When an external clock
input is used, the “max.” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-7: PLL CLOCK TIMING SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 1.8V TO 5.5V)

Param.
Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions
No.
F10 FOSC Oscillator Frequency Range 4 — 5 MHz VDD = 1.8-3.0V
4 — 16 MHz VDD = 3.0-3.6V,
-40°C to +125°C
PIC18LF2X/4XK22
4 — 16 MHz VDD = 3.0-5.5V,
-40°C to +125°C
PIC18F2X/4XK22
F11 FSYS On-Chip VCO System Frequency 16 — 20 MHz VDD = 1.8-3.0V
16 — 64 MHz VDD = 3.0-3.6V,
-40°C to +125°C
PIC18LF2X/4XK22
16 — 64 MHz VDD = 3.0-5.5V,
-40°C to +125°C
PIC18F2X/4XK22
F12 trc PLL Start-up Time (Lock Time) — — 2 ms
F13 CLK CLKOUT Stability (Jitter) -2 — +2 %
† Data in “Typ” column is at 3V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance
only and are not tested.
TABLE 27-8: AC CHARACTERISTICS:INTERNAL OSCILLATORS ACCURACY PIC18(L)F46K22

PIC18(L)F46K22
Param.
Min Typ Max Units Conditions
No.
OA1 HFINTOSC Accuracy @ Freq = 16 MHz, 8 MHz, 4 MHz, 2 MHz, 1 MHz, 500 kHz, 250 kHz(1)
-2 0 +2 % +0°C to +70°C
-3 — +2 % +70°C to +85°C
-5 — +5 % -40°C to 0°C and
+85°C to 125°C
OA2 LFINTOSC Accuracy @ Freq = 31 kHz
26.562 — 35.938 kHz -40°C to +125°C
Legend: Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
Note 1: Frequency calibrated at 25°C. OSCTUNE register can be used to compensate for temperature drift.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 27-5: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING
Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3
OSC1
10 11
CLKOUT
13 12
14 19 18
16
I/O pin
(Input)
17 15
I/O pin Old Value New Value

(Output)
20, 21
Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions.
TABLE 27-9: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS

Param.
No.
10 TosH2ckL OSC1  to CLKOUT  — 75 200 ns (Note 1)

11 TosH2ckH OSC1  to CLKOUT  — 75 200 ns (Note 1)
12 TckR CLKOUT Rise Time — 35 100 ns (Note 1)
13 TckF CLKOUT Fall Time — 35 100 ns (Note 1)
14 TckL2ioV CLKOUT  to Port Out Valid — — 0.5 TCY + 20 ns (Note 1)
15 TioV2ckH Port In Valid before CLKOUT  0.25 TCY + 25 — — ns (Note 1)
16 TckH2ioI Port In Hold after CLKOUT  0 — — ns (Note 1)
17 TosH2ioV OSC1  (Q1 cycle) to Port Out Valid — 50 150 ns
18 TosH2ioI OSC1  (Q2 cycle) to Port Input Invalid 100 — — ns
(I/O in hold time)
19 TioV2osH Port Input Valid to OSC1 (I/O in setup time) 0 — — ns
20 TioR Port Output Rise Time — 10 25 ns
21 TioF Port Output Fall Time — 10 25 ns
22† TINP INTx pin High or Low Time 20 — — ns
23† TRBP RB<7:4> Change KBIx High or Low Time TCY — — ns
† These parameters are asynchronous events not related to any internal clock edges.
Note 1: Measurements are taken in RC mode, where CLKOUT output is 4 x TOSC.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 27-6: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND
POWER-UP TIMER TIMING
VDD
MCLR
30
Internal
POR
33
PWRT
Time-out 32
OSC
Time-out
Internal
Reset
Watchdog
Timer
Reset 31
34 34
I/O pins
FIGURE 27-7: BROWN-OUT RESET TIMING
VDD BVDD
35
VBGAP = 1.2V
VIVRST
Enable Internal
Reference Voltage
Internal Reference
Voltage Stable 36

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-10: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER
AND BROWN-OUT RESET REQUIREMENTS
Param.
No.
30 TmcL MCLR Pulse Width (low) 2 — — s

31 TWDT Watchdog Timer Time-out Period 3.5 4.1 4.7 ms 1:1 prescaler
(no postscaler)
32 TOST Oscillation Start-up Timer Period 1024 — 1024 TOSC — TOSC = OSC1 period
TOSC
33 TPWRT Power-up Timer Period 54.8 64.4 74.1 ms
34 TIOZ I/O High-Impedance from MCLR — 2 — s
Low or Watchdog Timer Reset
35 TBOR Brown-out Reset Pulse Width 200 — — s VDD  BVDD (see
D005)
36 TIVRST Internal Reference Voltage Stable — 25 35 s
37 THLVD High/Low-Voltage Detect Pulse 200 — — s VDD  VHLVD
Width
38 TCSD CPU Start-up Time 5 — 10 s
39 TIOBST Time for HF-INTOSC to Stabilize — 0.25 1 ms
FIGURE 27-8: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMINGS
T0CKI
40 41
42
T1OSO/T13CKI
45 46
47 48
TMR0 or
TMR1

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-11: TIMER0 AND TIMER1/3/5 EXTERNAL CLOCK REQUIREMENTS

Param.
No.
40 Tt0H T0CKI High Pulse Width No prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns
With prescaler 10 — ns
41 Tt0L T0CKI Low Pulse Width No prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns
With prescaler 10 — ns
42 Tt0P T0CKI Period No prescaler TCY + 10 — ns
With prescaler Greater of: — ns N = prescale
20 ns or value
(TCY + 40)/N (1, 2, 4,..., 256)
45 Tt1H TxCKI High Synchronous, no prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns
Time Synchronous, 10 — ns
with prescaler
Asynchronous 30 — ns
46 Tt1L TxCKI Low Synchronous, no prescaler 0.5 TCY + 5 — ns
Time Synchronous, 10 — ns
with prescaler
47 Tt1P TxCKI Input Synchronous Greater of: — ns N = prescale
Period 20 ns or value (1, 2, 4, 8)
(TCY + 40)/N
Ft1 TxCKI Clock Input Frequency Range DC 50 kHz
48 Tcke2tmrI Delay from External TxCKI Clock Edge to Timer 2 TOSC 7 TOSC —
Increment
FIGURE 27-9: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM TIMINGS (ALL CCP MODULES)
CCPx
(Capture Mode)
50 51
52
CCPx
(Compare or PWM Mode)
53 54

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-12: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM REQUIREMENTS (ALL CCP MODULES)

Param .
No.
50 TccL CCPx Input Low No prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns
Time With 10 — ns
prescaler
51 TccH CCPx Input No prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns
High Time With 10 — ns
prescaler
52 TccP CCPx Input Period 3 TCY + 40 — ns N = prescale
N value (1, 4 or
16)
53 TccR CCPx Output Fall Time — 25 ns
54 TccF CCPx Output Fall Time — 25 ns
FIGURE 27-10: EXAMPLE SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 0)
SS
70
SCK
(CKP = 0)
71 72
78 79
SCK
(CKP = 1)
79 78
80
SDO MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 LSb
75, 76
SDI MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In

74
73

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-13: EXAMPLE SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE, CKE = 0)

Param.
No.
70 TssL2scH, SS  to SCK  or SCK  Input TCY — ns

TssL2scL
71 TscH SCK Input High Time Continuous 1.25 TCY + 30 — ns
71A (Slave mode) Single Byte 40 — ns (Note 1)
72 TscL SCK Input Low Time Continuous 1.25 TCY + 30 — ns
73 TdiV2scH, Setup Time of SDI Data Input to SCK Edge 100 — ns
TdiV2scL
73A Tb2b Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the 1st Clock Edge 1.5 TCY + 40 — ns (Note 2)
of Byte 2
74 TscH2diL, Hold Time of SDI Data Input to SCK Edge 100 — ns
TscL2diL
75 TdoR SDO Data Output Rise Time — 25 ns
76 TdoF SDO Data Output Fall Time — 25 ns
78 TscR SCK Output Rise Time — 25 ns
(Master mode)
79 TscF SCK Output Fall Time (Master mode) — 25 ns
80 TscH2doV, SDO Data Output Valid after SCK Edge — 50 ns
TscL2doV
Note 1: Requires the use of Parameter #73A.
2: Only if Parameter #71A and #72A are used.
FIGURE 27-11: EXAMPLE SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 1)
SS
81
SCK
(CKP = 0)
71 72
79
73
SCK
(CKP = 1)
80
78
75, 76
74

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-14: EXAMPLE SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE, CKE = 1)

Param.
No.
TdiV2scL
73A Tb2b Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the 1st Clock Edge 1.5 TCY + 40 — ns (Note 2)
of Byte 2
TscL2diL
(Master mode)
TscL2doV
81 TdoV2scH, SDO Data Output Setup to SCK Edge TCY — ns
TdoV2scL
FIGURE 27-12: EXAMPLE SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 0)
SS
70
SCK
(CKP = 0) 83
71 72
78 79
SCK
(CKP = 1)
79 78
80
75, 76 77

74
73

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-15: EXAMPLE SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE TIMING, CKE = 0)
Param.
No.

TssL2scL
TdiV2scL
73A Tb2b Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the First Clock Edge of Byte 2 1.5 TCY + 40 — ns (Note 2)
TscL2diL
77 TssH2doZ SS to SDO Output High-Impedance 10 50 ns
78 TscR SCK Output Rise Time (Master mode) — 25 ns
TscL2doV
83 TscH2ssH, SS  after SCK edge 1.5 TCY + 40 — ns
TscL2ssH
FIGURE 27-13: EXAMPLE SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 1)

82
SS
70
SCK 83
(CKP = 0)
71 72
SCK
(CKP = 1)
80
75, 76 77
SDI
MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In
74

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-16: EXAMPLE SPI SLAVE MODE REQUIREMENTS (CKE = 1)

Param.
No.

TssL2scL
73A Tb2b Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the First Clock Edge of Byte 2 1.5 TCY + 40 — ns (Note 2)
TscL2diL
77 TssH2doZ SS to SDO Output High-Impedance 10 50 ns
(Master mode)
TscL2doV
82 TssL2doV SDO Data Output Valid after SS  Edge — 50 ns
83 TscH2ssH, SS  after SCK Edge 1.5 TCY + 40 — ns
TscL2ssH
FIGURE 27-14: I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING
SCL
91 93
90 92
SDA
Start Stop
Condition Condition

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-17: I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE)

Param.
No.
90 TSU:STA Start Condition 100 kHz mode 4700 — ns Only relevant for Repeated
Setup Time 400 kHz mode 600 — Start condition
91 THD:STA Start Condition 100 kHz mode 4000 — ns After this period, the first
Hold Time 400 kHz mode 600 — clock pulse is generated
92 TSU:STO Stop Condition 100 kHz mode 4700 — ns
Setup Time 400 kHz mode 600 —
93 THD:STO Stop Condition 100 kHz mode 4000 — ns
Hold Time 400 kHz mode 600 —
FIGURE 27-15: I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING
103 100 102

101
SCL
90
106 107
91 92
SDA
In
110
109 109
SDA
Out

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-18: I2C™ BUS DATA REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE)

Param.
No.
100 THIGH Clock High Time 100 kHz mode 4.0 — s Must operate at a minimum
of 1.5 MHz
400 kHz mode 0.6 — s Must operate at a minimum
of 10 MHz
SSP Module 1.5 TCY —
101 TLOW Clock Low Time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — s Must operate at a minimum
of 1.5 MHz
400 kHz mode 1.3 — s Must operate at a minimum
of 10 MHz
SSP Module 1.5 TCY —
102 TR SDA and SCL Rise 100 kHz mode — 1000 ns
Time 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns CB is specified to be from
10 to 400 pF
103 TF SDA and SCL Fall 100 kHz mode — 300 ns
Time 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns CB is specified to be from
10 to 400 pF
90 TSU:STA Start Condition 100 kHz mode 4.7 — s Only relevant for Repeated
Setup Time 400 kHz mode 0.6 — s Start condition
91 THD:STA Start Condition 100 kHz mode 4.0 — s After this period, the first
Hold Time 400 kHz mode 0.6 — s clock pulse is generated
106 THD:DA Data Input Hold 100 kHz mode 0 — ns
T Time 400 kHz mode 0 0.9 s
107 TSU:DAT Data Input Setup 100 kHz mode 250 — ns (Note 2)
Time 400 kHz mode 100 — ns
92 TSU:STO Stop Condition 100 kHz mode 4.7 — s
Setup Time 400 kHz mode 0.6 — s
109 TAA Output Valid from 100 kHz mode — 3500 ns (Note 1)
Clock 400 kHz mode — — ns
110 TBUF Bus Free Time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — s Time the bus must be free
400 kHz mode 1.3 — s before a new transmission
can start
D102 CB Bus Capacitive Loading — 400 pF
Note 1: As a transmitter, the device must provide this internal minimum delay time to bridge the undefined region
(min. 300 ns) of the falling edge of SCL to avoid unintended generation of Start or Stop conditions.
2: A fast mode I2C bus device can be used in a standard mode I2C bus system but the requirement,
TSU:DAT  250 ns, must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the
LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must
output the next data bit to the SDA line, TR max. + TSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the
standard mode I2C bus specification), before the SCL line is released.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 27-16: MASTER SSP I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING WAVEFORMS
SCL
91 93
90 92
SDA
Start Stop
Condition Condition
TABLE 27-19: MASTER SSP I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS REQUIREMENTS

Param.
No.
90 TSU:STA Start Condition 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ns Only relevant for
Setup Time 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — Repeated Start
condition
1 MHz mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) —
91 THD:STA Start Condition 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ns After this period, the
Hold Time 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — first clock pulse is
generated
92 TSU:STO Stop Condition 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ns
Setup Time 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) —
93 THD:STO Stop Condition 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ns
Hold Time 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) —
Note 1: Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C pins.
FIGURE 27-17: MASTER SSP I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING

103 100 102
101
SCL
90 106
91 107 92
SDA
In
109 109 110
SDA
Out

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-20: MASTER SSP I2C™ BUS DATA REQUIREMENTS

Param.
No.
100 THIGH Clock High Time 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms
400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms
1 MHz mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms
101 TLOW Clock Low Time 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms
400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms
102 TR SDA and SCL 100 kHz mode — 1000 ns CB is specified to be
Rise Time 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns from
10 to 400 pF
1 MHz mode(1) — 300 ns
103 TF SDA and SCL 100 kHz mode — 300 ns CB is specified to be
Fall Time 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns from
10 to 400 pF
1 MHz mode(1) — 100 ns
90 TSU:STA Start Condition 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms Only relevant for
Setup Time 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms Repeated Start
condition
91 THD:STA Start Condition 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms After this period, the first
Hold Time 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms clock pulse is generated
106 THD:DAT Data Input 100 kHz mode 0 — ns
Hold Time 400 kHz mode 0 0.9 ms
107 TSU:DAT Data Input 100 kHz mode 250 — ns (Note 2)
Setup Time 400 kHz mode 100 — ns
92 TSU:STO Stop Condition 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms
Setup Time 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms
109 TAA Output Valid 100 kHz mode — 3500 ns
from Clock 400 kHz mode — 1000 ns
1 MHz mode(1) — — ns
110 TBUF Bus Free Time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — ms Time the bus must be
400 kHz mode 1.3 — ms free before a new trans-
mission can start
D102 CB Bus Capacitive Loading — 400 pF
Note 1: Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C pins.
2: A fast mode I2C bus device can be used in a standard mode I2C bus system, but parameter 107  250 ns
must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the
SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit
to the SDA line, parameter 102 + parameter 107 = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (for 100 kHz mode), before the
SCL line is released.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
FIGURE 27-18: EUSART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING
TXx/CKx
pin 121 121
RXx/DTx
pin
120
122
TABLE 27-21: EUSART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION REQUIREMENTS

Param.
No.
120 TckH2dtV SYNC XMIT (MASTER & SLAVE)
Clock High to Data Out Valid — 40 ns
121 Tckrf Clock Out Rise Time and Fall Time — 20 ns
(Master mode)
122 Tdtrf Data Out Rise Time and Fall Time — 20 ns
FIGURE 27-19: EUSART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING
TXx/CKx
pin 125
RXx/DTx
pin
126
TABLE 27-22: EUSART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE REQUIREMENTS

Param.
No.
125 TdtV2ckl SYNC RCV (MASTER & SLAVE)
Data Setup before CK  (DT setup time) 10 — ns
126 TckL2dtl Data Hold after CK  (DT hold time) 15 — ns

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-23: A/D CONVERTER CHARACTERISTICS:PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

Param .
No.
A01 NR Resolution — — 10 bits -40°C to +85°C,
VREF  2.0V
A03 EIL Integral Linearity Error — ±0.5 — LSb -40°C to +85°C,
VREF  2.0V
A04 EDL Differential Linearity Error — ±0.4 — LSb -40°C to +85°C,
VREF  2.0V
A06 EOFF Offset Error — 0.4 — LSb -40°C to +85°C,
VREF  2.0V
A07 EGN Gain Error — 0.3 — LSb -40°C to +85°C,
VREF  2.0V
A08 ETOTL Total Error — 1 — LSb -40°C to +85°C,
VREF  2.0V
A20 VREF Reference Voltage Range 1.8 — — V Absolute Minimum
(VREFH – VREFL) 2.0 — — V Minimum for 1LSb
Accuracy
A21 VREFH Reference Voltage High VDD/2 — VDD + 0.3 V
A22 VREFL Reference Voltage Low VSS – 0.3V — VDD/2 V
A25 VAIN Analog Input Voltage VREFL — VREFH V
A30 ZAIN Recommended Impedance of — — 3 k -40°C to +85°C
Analog Voltage Source
Note 1: The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage and has no missing
codes.
2: VREFH current is from RA3/AN3/VREF+ pin or VDD, whichever is selected as the VREFH source.
VREFL current is from RA2/AN2/VREF-/CVREF pin or VSS, whichever is selected as the VREFL source.
FIGURE 27-20: A/D CONVERSION TIMING
BSF ADCON0, GO
(Note 2)
131
Q4
130
A/D CLK 132
A/D DATA 9 8 7 .. . ... 2 1 0
ADRES OLD_DATA NEW_DATA
ADIF TCY
GO DONE
SAMPLING STOPPED
SAMPLE
Note 1: If the A/D clock source is selected as RC, a time of TCY is added before the A/D clock starts.
This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed.
2: This is a minimal RC delay (typically 100 ns), which also disconnects the holding capacitor from the analog input.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
TABLE 27-24: A/D CONVERSION REQUIREMENTS

Param.
No.
130 TAD A/D Clock Period 0.7 25.0(1) s TOSC based,
-40C to +85C
0.7 4.0(1) s TOSC based,
+85C to +125C
1.0 4.0 s FRC mode, VDD2.0V
131 TCNV Conversion Time 12 12 TAD
(not including acquisition time) (Note 2)
132 TACQ Acquisition Time (Note 3) 1.4 — s VDD = 3V, Rs = 50
135 TSWC Switching Time from Convert  Sample — (Note 4)
136 TDIS Discharge Time 2 2 TAD
Legend: TBD = To Be Determined
Note 1: The time of the A/D clock period is dependent on the device frequency and the TAD clock divider.
2: ADRES register may be read on the following TCY cycle.
3: The time for the holding capacitor to acquire the “New” input voltage when the voltage changes full scale
after the conversion (VDD to VSS or VSS to VDD). The source impedance (RS) on the input channels is 50 .
4: On the following cycle of the device clock.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
28.0 DC AND AC
CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHS
AND TABLES
Graphs and tables are not available at this time.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
29.0 PACKAGING INFORMATION
29.1 Package Marking Information
28-Lead PDIP Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PIC18F25K22-E/SP
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX e3
YYWWNNN 0810017
28-Lead SOIC (7.50 mm) Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PIC18F25K22-E/SO e3
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 0810017
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
28-Lead SSOP Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PIC18F25K22-E/SS
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX e3
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN 0810017
Legend: XX...X Customer-specific information

Y Year code (last digit of calendar year)
YY Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year)
WW Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’)
NNN Alphanumeric traceability code
e3 Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn)
* This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 )
can be found on the outer packaging for this package.
Note: In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will
be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available
characters for customer-specific information.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Package Marking Information (Continued)
28-Lead QFN Example
XXXXXXXX 18F24K22
XXXXXXXX -E/ML e3
YYWWNNN 0810017
28-Lead UQFN Example
XXXXX PIC18
XXXXXX F23K22
XXXXXX -E/MV e3
YWWNNN 810017
40-Lead PDIP Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PIC18F45K22-E/P e3
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 0810017
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
44-Lead QFN Example
XXXXXXXXXX PIC18F45K22
XXXXXXXXXX -E/ML e3
XXXXXXXXXX 0810017
YYWWNNN
44-Lead TQFP Example
XXXXXXXXXX PIC18F44K22
XXXXXXXXXX -E/PT e3
XXXXXXXXXX 0810017
YYWWNNN

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
29.2 Package Details
The following sections give the technical details of the packages.
/HDG6NLQQ\3ODVWLF'XDO,Q/LQH63±PLO%RG\>63',3@
1RWH )RUWKHPRVWFXUUHQWSDFNDJHGUDZLQJVSOHDVHVHHWKH0LFURFKLS3DFNDJLQJ6SHFLILFDWLRQORFDWHGDW
KWWSZZZPLFURFKLSFRPSDFNDJLQJ
NOTE 1
E1
1 2 3
A A2
L c
A1 b1
b e eB
8QLWV ,1&+(6
'LPHQVLRQ/LPLWV 0,1 120 0$;
1XPEHURI3LQV 1
3LWFK H %6&
7RSWR6HDWLQJ3ODQH $ ± ±
0ROGHG3DFNDJH7KLFNQHVV $
%DVHWR6HDWLQJ3ODQH $ ± ±
6KRXOGHUWR6KRXOGHU:LGWK (
0ROGHG3DFNDJH:LGWK (
2YHUDOO/HQJWK '
7LSWR6HDWLQJ3ODQH /
/HDG7KLFNQHVV F
8SSHU/HDG:LGWK E
/RZHU/HDG:LGWK E
2YHUDOO5RZ6SDFLQJ H% ± ±
1RWHV
3LQYLVXDOLQGH[IHDWXUHPD\YDU\EXWPXVWEHORFDWHGZLWKLQWKHKDWFKHGDUHD
6LJQLILFDQW&KDUDFWHULVWLF
'LPHQVLRQV'DQG(GRQRWLQFOXGHPROGIODVKRUSURWUXVLRQV0ROGIODVKRUSURWUXVLRQVVKDOOQRWH[FHHGSHUVLGH
'LPHQVLRQLQJDQGWROHUDQFLQJSHU$60(<0
%6& %DVLF'LPHQVLRQ7KHRUHWLFDOO\H[DFWYDOXHVKRZQZLWKRXWWROHUDQFHV
0LFURFKLS 7HFKQRORJ\ 'UDZLQJ &%

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
/HDG3ODVWLF6PDOO2XWOLQH62±:LGHPP%RG\>62,&@
D
N
E
E1
NOTE 1
1 2 3
e
b
h
α
h
φ c
A A2
L
A1 L1 β
8QLWV 0,//,0(7(56
1XPEHURI3LQV 1
3LWFK H %6&
2YHUDOO+HLJKW $ ± ±
0ROGHG3DFNDJH7KLFNQHVV $ ± ±
6WDQGRII $ ±
2YHUDOO:LGWK ( %6&
0ROGHG3DFNDJH:LGWK ( %6&
2YHUDOO/HQJWK ' %6&
&KDPIHURSWLRQDO K ±
)RRW/HQJWK / ±
)RRWSULQW / 5()
)RRW$QJOH7RS ±
/HDG7KLFNQHVV F ±
/HDG:LGWK E ±
0ROG'UDIW$QJOH7RS ±
0ROG'UDIW$QJOH%RWWRP ±
1RWHV
'LPHQVLRQV'DQG(GRQRWLQFOXGHPROGIODVKRUSURWUXVLRQV0ROGIODVKRUSURWUXVLRQVVKDOOQRWH[FHHGPPSHUVLGH
5() 5HIHUHQFH'LPHQVLRQXVXDOO\ZLWKRXWWROHUDQFHIRULQIRUPDWLRQSXUSRVHVRQO\

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
/HDG3ODVWLF6KULQN6PDOO2XWOLQH66±PP%RG\>6623@
D
N
E
E1
1 2
b
NOTE 1
e
c
A A2
φ
A1
L1 L
8QLWV 0,//,0(7(56
1XPEHURI3LQV 1
3LWFK H %6&
6WDQGRII $ ± ±
2YHUDOO:LGWK (
0ROGHG3DFNDJH:LGWK (
2YHUDOO/HQJWK '
)RRW/HQJWK /
)RRWSULQW / 5()
/HDG7KLFNQHVV F ±
)RRW$QJOH
/HDG:LGWK E ±
1RWHV

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
/HDG3ODVWLF4XDG)ODW1R/HDG3DFNDJH0/±[PP%RG\>4)1@
ZLWKPP&RQWDFW/HQJWK
D D2
EXPOSED
PAD
E
b
E2
2 2
1 1 K
N N
NOTE 1 L
TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW
A3 A1
8QLWV 0,//,0(7(56
1XPEHURI3LQV 1
3LWFK H %6&
2YHUDOO+HLJKW $
6WDQGRII $
&RQWDFW7KLFNQHVV $ 5()
2YHUDOO:LGWK ( %6&
([SRVHG3DG:LGWK (
2YHUDOO/HQJWK ' %6&
([SRVHG3DG/HQJWK '
&RQWDFW:LGWK E
&RQWDFW/HQJWK /
&RQWDFWWR([SRVHG3DG . ± ±
1RWHV
3DFNDJHLVVDZVLQJXODWHG

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
ZLWKPP&RQWDFW/HQJWK

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at
http://www.microchip.com/packaging

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at
http://www.microchip.com/packaging

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
/HDG3ODVWLF'XDO,Q/LQH3±PLO%RG\>3',3@
NOTE 1
E1
1 2 3
A A2
L c
b1
A1
b e eB
8QLWV ,1&+(6
1XPEHURI3LQV 1
3LWFK H %6&
7RSWR6HDWLQJ3ODQH $ ± ±
0ROGHG3DFNDJH7KLFNQHVV $ ±
%DVHWR6HDWLQJ3ODQH $ ± ±
6KRXOGHUWR6KRXOGHU:LGWK ( ±
0ROGHG3DFNDJH:LGWK ( ±
2YHUDOO/HQJWK ' ±
7LSWR6HDWLQJ3ODQH / ±
/HDG7KLFNQHVV F ±
8SSHU/HDG:LGWK E ±
/RZHU/HDG:LGWK E ±
2YHUDOO5RZ6SDFLQJ H% ± ±
1RWHV
'LPHQVLRQV'DQG(GRQRWLQFOXGHPROGIODVKRUSURWUXVLRQV0ROGIODVKRUSURWUXVLRQVVKDOOQRWH[FHHGSHUVLGH

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
D D2
EXPOSED
PAD
E2
b
2 2
1 1
N N K
NOTE 1 L
TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW
A3 A1
8QLWV 0,//,0(7(56
1XPEHURI3LQV 1
3LWFK H %6&
2YHUDOO+HLJKW $
6WDQGRII $
&RQWDFW7KLFNQHVV $ 5()
2YHUDOO:LGWK ( %6&
([SRVHG3DG:LGWK (
2YHUDOO/HQJWK ' %6&
([SRVHG3DG/HQJWK '
&RQWDFW:LGWK E
&RQWDFW/HQJWK /
&RQWDFWWR([SRVHG3DG . ± ±
1RWHV
3DFNDJHLVVDZVLQJXODWHG

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
/HDG3ODVWLF7KLQ4XDG)ODWSDFN37±[[PP%RG\PP>74)3@
D
D1
E
e
E1
N
b
NOTE 1 1 2 3
NOTE 2
A α
c φ
β A1 A2
L L1
8QLWV 0,//,0(7(56
1XPEHURI/HDGV 1
/HDG3LWFK H %6&
6WDQGRII $ ±
)RRW/HQJWK /
)RRWSULQW / 5()
)RRW$QJOH
2YHUDOO:LGWK ( %6&
2YHUDOO/HQJWK ' %6&
0ROGHG3DFNDJH:LGWK ( %6&
0ROGHG3DFNDJH/HQJWK ' %6&
/HDG7KLFNQHVV F ±
/HDG:LGWK E
0ROG'UDIW$QJOH7RS
0ROG'UDIW$QJOH%RWWRP
1RWHV
&KDPIHUVDWFRUQHUVDUHRSWLRQDOVL]HPD\YDU\

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
/HDG3ODVWLF7KLQ4XDG)ODWSDFN37±[[PP%RG\PP>74)3@

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
APPENDIX A: REVISION HISTORY
Revision A (February 2010)
Initial release of this document.
Revision B (April 2010)

Updated Figures 2-4, 12-1 and 18-2; Updated
Registers 2-2, 10-4, 10-5, 10-7, 17-2, 24-1 and 24-5;
Updated Sections 10.3.2, 18.8.4, Synchronizing
Comparator Output to Timer1; Updated Sections 27.2,
27-3, 27-4, 27-5, 27-6, 27-7 and 27-9; Updated Tables
27-2, 27-3, 27-4 and 27-7; Other minor corrections.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
APPENDIX B: DEVICE
DIFFERENCES
The differences between the devices listed in this data
sheet are shown in Table B-1.
TABLE B-1: DEVICE DIFFERENCES

PIC18F23K22 PIC18F24K22 PIC18F25K22 PIC18F26K22 PIC18F43K22 PIC18F44K22 PIC18F45K22 PIC18F46K22
Features(1) PIC18LF23K22 PIC18LF24K22 PIC18LF25K22 PIC18LF26K22 PIC18LF43K22 PIC18LF44K22 PIC18LF45K22 PIC18LF46K22
Program Memory 8192 16384 32768 65536 8192 16384 32768 65536
(Bytes)
SRAM (Bytes) 512 768 1536 3896 512 768 1536 3896
EEPROM (Bytes) 256 256 256 1024 256 256 256 1024
Interrupt Sources 26 26 33 33 26 26 33 33
I/O Ports Ports A, B, C, Ports A, B, C, Ports A, B, C, Ports A, B, C, Ports A, B, C, Ports A, B, C, Ports A, B, C, Ports A, B, C,
(E) (E) (E) (E) D, E D, E D, E D, E
Capture/Compare/PWM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Modules (CCP)
Enhanced CCP Modules 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
(ECCP) Full Bridge
ECCP Module 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
Half Bridge
10-bit Analog-to-Digital 17 input 17 input 17 input 17 input 28 input 28 input 28 input 28 input
Module channels channels channels channels channels channels channels channels
Packages 28-pin PDIP 28-pin PDIP 28-pin PDIP 28-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP 40-pin PDIP
28-pin SOIC 28-pin SOIC 28-pin SOIC 28-pin SOIC 44-pin TQFP 44-pin TQFP 44-pin TQFP 44-pin TQFP
28-pin SSOP 28-pin SSOP 28-pin SSOP 28-pin SSOP 44-pin QFN 44-pin QFN 44-pin QFN 44-pin QFN
28-pin QFN 28-pin QFN 28-pin QFN 28-pin QFN
28-pin UQFN 28-pin UQFN
Note 1: PIC18FXXK22: operating voltage, 1.8V-5.5V.

PIC18LFXXK22: operating voltage, 1.8V-3.6V.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
INDEX BF ............................................................................ 242, 244
BF Status Flag ......................................................... 242, 244
A Block Diagrams
(CCP) Capture Mode Operation .............................. 178
A/D
ADC ......................................................................... 291
Analog Port Pins, Configuring .................................. 304
ADC Transfer Function ............................................ 303
Associated Registers ............................................... 304
Analog Input Model .......................................... 303, 312
Conversions ............................................................. 295
CCP PWM ............................................................... 184
Converter Characteristics ........................................ 459
Comparator 1 ........................................................... 306
Discharge ................................................................. 296
Compare .................................................................. 181
Selecting and Configuring Acquisition Time ............ 292
Crystal Operation ....................................................... 35
Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................. 421
CTMU ...................................................................... 317
AC (Timing) Characteristics ............................................. 441
CTMU Current Source Calibration Circuit ............... 320
Load Conditions for Device Timing Specifications ... 442
CTMU Typical Connections and Internal
Parameter Symbology ............................................. 441
Configuration for Pulse Delay Generation ....... 328
Temperature and Voltage Specifications ................. 442
CTMU Typical Connections and Internal
Timing Conditions .................................................... 442
Configuration for Time Measurement .............. 327
AC Characteristics
Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) .......................... 340
Internal RC Accuracy ............................................... 444
EUSART Receive .................................................... 264
Access Bank
EUSART Transmit ................................................... 263
Mapping with Indexed Literal Offset Mode ................. 94
External POR Circuit (Slow VDD Power-up) .............. 61
ACKSTAT ........................................................................ 242
External RC Mode ..................................................... 36
ACKSTAT Status Flag ..................................................... 242
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) ................................ 44
ADC ................................................................................. 291
Generic I/O Port ....................................................... 133
Acquisition Requirements ........................................ 302
High/Low-Voltage Detect with External Input .......... 344
Block Diagram .......................................................... 291
Interrupt Logic .......................................................... 114
Calculating Acquisition Time .................................... 302
On-Chip Reset Circuit ................................................ 59
Channel Selection .................................................... 292
PIC18F46K22 ............................................................ 16
Configuration ............................................................ 292
PWM (Enhanced) .................................................... 188
Conversion Clock ..................................................... 293
Reads from Flash Program Memory ......................... 99
Conversion Procedure ............................................. 297
Resonator Operation ................................................. 35
Internal Sampling Switch (RSS) IMPEDANCE ............. 302
Interrupts .................................................................. 293 Table Read Operation ............................................... 95
Operation ................................................................. 295 Table Write Operation ............................................... 96
Table Writes to Flash Program Memory .................. 101
Operation During Sleep ........................................... 296
Port Configuration .................................................... 292 Timer0 in 16-Bit Mode ............................................. 159
Power Management ................................................. 296 Timer0 in 8-Bit Mode ............................................... 158
Timer1 ..................................................................... 161
Reference Voltage (VREF) ........................................ 292
Result Formatting ..................................................... 294 Timer1 Gate ............................................. 167, 168, 169
Source Impedance ................................................... 302 Timer2/4/6 ............................................................... 173
Voltage Reference ................................................... 337
Special Event Trigger ............................................... 296
Starting an A/D Conversion ..................................... 294 Voltage Reference Output Buffer Example ............. 340
ADCON0 Register ............................................................ 298 Watchdog Timer ...................................................... 360
BN .................................................................................... 376
ADCON1 Register ............................................................ 299
ADCON2 Register ............................................................ 300 BNC ................................................................................. 377
ADDFSR .......................................................................... 410 BNN ................................................................................. 377
BNOV .............................................................................. 378
ADDLW ............................................................................ 373
ADDULNK ........................................................................ 410 BNZ ................................................................................. 378
ADDWF ............................................................................ 373 BOR. See Brown-out Reset.
BOV ................................................................................. 381
ADDWFC ......................................................................... 374
ADRESH Register (ADFM = 0) ........................................ 301 BRA ................................................................................. 379
ADRESH Register (ADFM = 1) ........................................ 301 Break Character (12-bit) Transmit and Receive .............. 282
Brown-out Reset (BOR) ..................................................... 62
ADRESL Register (ADFM = 0) ......................................... 301
ADRESL Register (ADFM = 1) ......................................... 301 Detecting ................................................................... 62
Analog Input Connection Considerations ......................... 312 Disabling in Sleep Mode ............................................ 62
Analog-to-Digital Converter. See ADC Minimum Enable Time ............................................... 62
ANDLW ............................................................................ 374 Software Enabled ...................................................... 62
BSF .................................................................................. 379
ANDWF ............................................................................ 375
Assembler BTFSC ............................................................................. 380
MPASM Assembler .................................................. 418 BTFSS ............................................................................. 380
BTG ................................................................................. 381
B BZ .................................................................................... 382
Bank Select Register (BSR) ............................................... 76 C
BAUDCON Register ......................................................... 274
C Compilers
BC .................................................................................... 375
MPLAB C18 ............................................................. 418
BCF .................................................................................. 376
CALL ................................................................................ 382

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
CALLW ............................................................................. 411 Capacitive Touch Switch Routine ............................ 326
Capture Module. See Enhanced Capture/Compare/ Changing Between Capture Prescalers ................... 179
PWM(ECCP) Clearing RAM Using Indirect Addressing .................. 90
Capture/Compare/PWM ................................................... 177 Computed GOTO Using an Offset Value ................... 73
Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) Current Calibration Routine ..................................... 322
Associated Registers w/ Capture .... 179, 180, 183, 187, Data EEPROM Read ............................................... 107
201 Data EEPROM Refresh Routine .............................. 108
Associated Registers w/ Compare ........................... 182 Data EEPROM Write ............................................... 107
Associated Registers w/ PWM ......................... 187, 200 Erasing a Flash Program Memory Row ................... 100
Capture Mode .......................................................... 178 Fast Register Stack ................................................... 73
CCPx Pin Configuration ........................................... 178 Initializing PORTA .................................................... 133
Compare Mode ........................................................ 181 Initializing PORTB .................................................... 138
CCPx Pin Configuration ................................... 181 Initializing PORTC ................................................... 142
Software Interrupt Mode .......................... 178, 181 Initializing PORTD ................................................... 146
Special Event Trigger ....................................... 182 Initializing PORTE .................................................... 149
Timer1 Mode Resource ........................... 178, 181 Reading a Flash Program Memory Word .................. 99
Prescaler .................................................................. 179 Saving Status, WREG and BSR Registers
PWM Mode in RAM ............................................................. 131
Duty Cycle ........................................................ 185 Setup for CTMU Calibration Routines ..................... 321
Effects of Reset ................................................ 186 Writing to Flash Program Memory ................... 102–103
Example PWM Frequencies and Code Protection ............................................................... 349
Resolutions, 20 MHZ ............................... 186 COMF .............................................................................. 384
Example PWM Frequencies and Comparator
Resolutions, 32 MHZ ............................... 186 Associated Registers ............................................... 315
Example PWM Frequencies and Operation ................................................................. 305
Resolutions, 8 MHz .................................. 186 Operation During Sleep ........................................... 309
Operation in Sleep Mode ................................. 186 Response Time ........................................................ 307
Resolution ........................................................ 186 Comparator Module
System Clock Frequency Changes .................. 186 C1 Output State Versus Input Conditions ................ 307
PWM Operation ....................................................... 184 Comparator Specifications ............................................... 439
PWM Overview ........................................................ 184 Comparator Voltage Reference (CVREF)
PWM Period ............................................................. 185 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 309
PWM Setup .............................................................. 184 Comparator Voltage Reference (CVREF)
CCPTMRS0 Register ....................................................... 204 Response Time ........................................................ 307
CCPTMRS1 Register ....................................................... 204 Comparators
CCPxCON (ECCPx) Register .......................................... 201 C2OUT as T1 Gate .................................................. 164
Clock Accuracy with Asynchronous Operation ................ 272 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 309
Clock Sources Compare Module. See Enhanced Capture/Compare/
External Modes .......................................................... 34 PWM (ECCP)
EC ...................................................................... 34 Computed GOTO ............................................................... 73
HS ...................................................................... 35 CONFIG1H Register ........................................................ 351
LP ....................................................................... 35 CONFIG2H Register ........................................................ 353
OST .................................................................... 34 CONFIG2L Register ........................................................ 352
RC ...................................................................... 36 CONFIG3H Register ........................................................ 354
XT ...................................................................... 35 CONFIG4L Register ........................................................ 355
Internal Modes ........................................................... 36 CONFIG5H Register ........................................................ 356
Frequency Selection .......................................... 38 CONFIG5L Register ........................................................ 355
INTOSC ............................................................. 36 CONFIG6H Register ........................................................ 357
INTOSCIO .......................................................... 36 CONFIG6L Register ........................................................ 356
LFINTOSC ......................................................... 38 CONFIG7H Register ........................................................ 358
Selecting the 31 kHz Source ...................................... 29 CONFIG7L Register ........................................................ 357
Selection Using OSCCON Register ........................... 29 Configuration Bits ............................................................ 349
Clock Switching .................................................................. 41 Configuration Register Protection .................................... 365
CLRF ................................................................................ 383 Context Saving During Interrupts ..................................... 131
CLRWDT .......................................................................... 383 CPFSEQ .......................................................................... 384
CM1CON0 Register ......................................................... 310 CPFSGT .......................................................................... 385
CM2CON0 Register ......................................................... 311 CPFSLT ........................................................................... 385
CM2CON1 Register ......................................................... 314 CTMU
Code Examples Associated Registers ............................................... 331
16 x 16 Signed Multiply Routine .............................. 112 Calibrating ............................................................... 320
16 x 16 Unsigned Multiply Routine .......................... 112 Creating a Delay with ............................................... 328
8 x 8 Signed Multiply Routine .................................. 111 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 329
8 x 8 Unsigned Multiply Routine .............................. 111 Initialization .............................................................. 319
A/D Conversion ........................................................ 297 Measuring Capacitance with .................................... 325
Capacitance Calibration Routine ............................. 324 Measuring Time with ................................................ 327

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Operation ................................................................. 318 DEVID2 Register ............................................................. 358
Operation During Idle Mode ..................................... 328 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) .................................. 339
Operation During Sleep Mode ................................. 328 Associated Registers ............................................... 342
Customer Change Notification Service ............................ 489 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 340
Customer Notification Service .......................................... 489 Direct Addressing .............................................................. 91
Customer Support ............................................................ 489
CVREF Voltage Reference Specifications ........................ 439 E
ECCP/CCP. See Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM
D ECCPxAS Register .......................................................... 205
Data Addressing Modes ..................................................... 90 EECON1 Register ...................................................... 97, 106
Comparing Addressing Modes with the Effect on Standard PIC Instructions ................................. 414
Extended Instruction Set Enabled ..................... 93 Effects of Power Managed Modes on Various Clock
Direct .......................................................................... 90 Sources ..................................................................... 40
Indexed Literal Offset ................................................. 92 Effects of Reset
Instructions Affected .......................................... 92 PWM mode .............................................................. 186
Indirect ....................................................................... 90 Electrical Characteristics ................................................. 421
Inherent and Literal .................................................... 90 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) .................... 177
Data EEPROM Enhanced PWM Mode ............................................. 188
Code Protection ....................................................... 365 Auto-Restart .................................................... 196
Data EEPROM Memory Auto-shutdown ................................................ 195
Associated Registers ............................................... 109 Direction Change in Full-Bridge Output Mode . 194
EEADR and EEADRH Registers ............................. 105 Full-Bridge Application ..................................... 192
EECON1 and EECON2 Registers ........................... 105 Full-Bridge Mode ............................................. 192
Operation During Code-Protect ............................... 108 Half-Bridge Application .................................... 191
Protection Against Spurious Write ........................... 108 Half-Bridge Application Examples ................... 197
Reading .................................................................... 107 Half-Bridge Mode ............................................. 191
Using ........................................................................ 108 Output Relationships (Active-High and
Write Verify .............................................................. 107 Active-Low) .............................................. 189
Writing ...................................................................... 107 Output Relationships Diagram ......................... 190
Data Memory ..................................................................... 76 Programmable Dead Band Delay .................... 197
Access Bank .............................................................. 82 Shoot-through Current ..................................... 197
and the Extended Instruction Set ............................... 92 Start-up Considerations ................................... 199
Bank Select Register (BSR) ....................................... 76 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous
General Purpose Registers ........................................ 82 Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) ............................. 263
Map for PIC18F/LF23K22 and PIC18F/LF43K22 Errata ................................................................................. 12
Devices ............................................................. 77 EUSART .......................................................................... 263
Map for PIC18F/LF24K22 and PIC18F/LF44K22 Asynchronous Mode ................................................ 265
Devices ............................................................. 78 12-bit Break Transmit and Receive ................. 282
Special Function Registers ........................................ 82 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 271
DAW ................................................................................. 386 Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 267
DC and AC Characteristics Auto-Wake-up on Break .................................. 280
Graphs and Tables .................................................. 461 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) ........................... 275
DC Characteristics Clock Accuracy ................................................ 272
Input/Output ............................................................. 436 Receiver .......................................................... 268
Power-Down Current ............................................... 424 Setting up 9-bit Mode with Address Detect ..... 270
Primary Idle Supply Current ..................................... 433 Transmitter ...................................................... 265
Primary Run Supply Current .................................... 431 Baud Rate Generator (BRG)
RC Idle Supply Current ............................................ 429 Associated Registers ....................................... 276
RC Run Supply Current ........................................... 427 Auto Baud Rate Detect .................................... 279
Secondary Oscillator Supply Current ....................... 434 Baud Rate Error, Calculating ........................... 275
Supply Voltage ......................................................... 423 Baud Rates, Asynchronous Modes ................. 276
DCFSNZ .......................................................................... 387 Formulas .......................................................... 275
DECF ............................................................................... 386 High Baud Rate Select (BRGH Bit) ................. 275
DECFSZ ........................................................................... 387 Clock polarity
Development Support ...................................................... 417 Synchronous Mode .......................................... 283
Device Differences ........................................................... 478 Data polarity
Device Overview Asynchronous Receive .................................... 268
Details on Individual Family Members ....................... 14 Asynchronous Transmit ................................... 265
Features (table) .......................................................... 15 Synchronous Mode .......................................... 283
New Core Features .................................................... 13 Interrupts
Other Special Features .............................................. 14 Asychronous Receive ...................................... 269
Device Reset Timers .......................................................... 63 Asynchronous Receive .................................... 269
PLL Lock Time-out ..................................................... 63 Asynchronous Transmit ................................... 265
Power-up Timer (PWRT) ........................................... 63 Synchronous Master Mode .............................. 283, 288
Time-out Sequence .................................................... 63 Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 287
DEVID1 Register .............................................................. 358 Associated Registers, Transmit ............... 284, 289

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Reception ......................................................... 286 Typical Low-Voltage Detect Application .................. 346
Transmission .................................................... 283 HLVD. See High/Low-Voltage Detect. ............................. 343
Synchronous Slave Mode
Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 290 I
Reception ......................................................... 290 I2C Mode (MSSPx)
Transmission .................................................... 288 Acknowledge Sequence Timing .............................. 246
Extended Instruction Set Bus Collision
ADDFSR .................................................................. 410 During a Repeated Start Condition .................. 251
ADDULNK ................................................................ 410 During a Stop Condition .................................. 252
and Using MPLAB Tools .......................................... 416 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 247
CALLW ..................................................................... 411 I2C Clock Rate w/BRG ............................................. 254
Considerations for Use ............................................ 414 Master Mode
MOVSF .................................................................... 411 Operation ......................................................... 238
MOVSS .................................................................... 412 Reception ........................................................ 244
PUSHL ..................................................................... 412 Start Condition Timing ............................. 240, 241
SUBFSR .................................................................. 413 Transmission ................................................... 242
SUBULNK ................................................................ 413 Multi-Master Communication, Bus Collision and
Syntax ...................................................................... 409 Arbitration ........................................................ 248
Multi-Master Mode ................................................... 247
F Read/Write Bit Information (R/W Bit) ....................... 223
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor .............................................. 44, 349 Slave Mode
Fail-Safe Condition Clearing ...................................... 44 Transmission ................................................... 228
Fail-Safe Detection .................................................... 44 Sleep Operation ....................................................... 247
Fail-Safe Operation .................................................... 44 Stop Condition Timing ............................................. 246
Reset or Wake-up from Sleep .................................... 44 ID Locations ............................................................. 349, 365
Fast Register Stack ............................................................ 72 INCF ................................................................................ 388
Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) INCFSZ ............................................................................ 389
Associated Registers ............................................... 338 In-Circuit Debugger .......................................................... 365
Flash Program Memory ...................................................... 95 In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) ...................... 349, 365
Associated Registers ............................................... 103 Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
Control Registers ....................................................... 96 and Standard PIC18 Instructions ............................. 414
EECON1 and EECON2 ..................................... 96 Indexed Literal Offset Mode ............................................. 414
TABLAT (Table Latch) Register ......................... 98 Indirect Addressing ............................................................ 91
TBLPTR (Table Pointer) Register ...................... 98 INFSNZ ............................................................................ 389
Erase Sequence ...................................................... 100 Instruction Cycle ................................................................ 74
Erasing ..................................................................... 100 Clocking Scheme ....................................................... 74
Operation During Code-Protect ............................... 103 Instruction Flow/Pipelining ................................................. 74
Reading ...................................................................... 99 Instruction Set .................................................................. 367
Table Pointer ADDLW .................................................................... 373
Boundaries Based on Operation ........................ 98 ADDWF .................................................................... 373
Table Pointer Boundaries .......................................... 98 ADDWF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) .................... 415
Table Reads and Table Writes .................................. 95 ADDWFC ................................................................. 374
Write Sequence ....................................................... 101 ANDLW .................................................................... 374
Writing To ................................................................. 101 ANDWF .................................................................... 375
Protection Against Spurious Writes ................. 103 BC ............................................................................ 375
Unexpected Termination .................................. 103 BCF ......................................................................... 376
Write Verify ...................................................... 103 BN ............................................................................ 376
BNC ......................................................................... 377
G BNN ......................................................................... 377
GOTO ............................................................................... 388 BNOV ...................................................................... 378
BNZ ......................................................................... 378
H BOV ......................................................................... 381
Hardware Multiplier .......................................................... 111 BRA ......................................................................... 379
Introduction .............................................................. 111 BSF .......................................................................... 379
Operation ................................................................. 111 BSF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) .......................... 415
Performance Comparison ........................................ 111 BTFSC ..................................................................... 380
High/Low-Voltage Detect ................................................. 343 BTFSS ..................................................................... 380
Applications .............................................................. 346 BTG ......................................................................... 381
Associated Registers ............................................... 347 BZ ............................................................................ 382
Characteristics ......................................................... 440 CALL ........................................................................ 382
Current Consumption ............................................... 345 CLRF ....................................................................... 383
Effects of a Reset ..................................................... 347 CLRWDT ................................................................. 383
Operation ................................................................. 344 COMF ...................................................................... 384
During Sleep .................................................... 347 CPFSEQ .................................................................. 384
Setup ........................................................................ 345 CPFSGT .................................................................. 385
Start-up Time ........................................................... 345 CPFSLT ................................................................... 385

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
DAW ......................................................................... 386 TMR1 ....................................................................... 166
DCFSNZ .................................................................. 387 IORLW ............................................................................. 390
DECF ....................................................................... 386 IORWF ............................................................................. 390
DECFSZ ................................................................... 387 IPR Registers ................................................................... 127
Extended Instruction Set .......................................... 409 IPR1 Register .................................................................. 127
General Format ........................................................ 369 IPR2 Register .................................................................. 128
GOTO ...................................................................... 388 IPR3 Register .................................................................. 129
INCF ......................................................................... 388 IPR4 Register .................................................................. 130
INCFSZ .................................................................... 389 IPR5 Register .................................................................. 130
INFSNZ .................................................................... 389
IORLW ..................................................................... 390 L
IORWF ..................................................................... 390 LFSR ............................................................................... 391
LFSR ........................................................................ 391 Low-Voltage ICSP Programming. See Single-Supply
MOVF ....................................................................... 391 ICSP Programming
MOVFF .................................................................... 392
MOVLB .................................................................... 392
M
MOVLW ................................................................... 393 Map .............................................................................. 79, 80
MOVWF ................................................................... 393 Master Clear (MCLR) ......................................................... 61
MULLW .................................................................... 394 Master Synchronous Serial Port. See MSSPx
MULWF .................................................................... 394 Memory Organization
NEGF ....................................................................... 395 Data Memory ............................................................. 76
NOP ......................................................................... 395 Program Memory ....................................................... 69
Opcode Field Descriptions ....................................... 368 Microchip Internet Web Site ............................................. 489
POP ......................................................................... 396 MOVF .............................................................................. 391
PUSH ....................................................................... 396 MOVFF ............................................................................ 392
RCALL ..................................................................... 397 MOVLB ............................................................................ 392
RESET ..................................................................... 397 MOVLW ........................................................................... 393
RETFIE .................................................................... 398 MOVSF ............................................................................ 411
RETLW .................................................................... 398 MOVSS ............................................................................ 412
RETURN .................................................................. 399 MOVWF ........................................................................... 393
RLCF ........................................................................ 399 MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker, Librarian .................. 418
RLNCF ..................................................................... 400 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software . 417
RRCF ....................................................................... 400 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer ................................... 420
RRNCF .................................................................... 401 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System ............... 419
SETF ........................................................................ 401 MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ............... 418
SETF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) ........................ 415 MSSPx ............................................................................. 207
SLEEP ..................................................................... 402 SPI Mode ................................................................. 210
SUBFWB .................................................................. 402 SSPxBUF Register .................................................. 213
SUBLW .................................................................... 403 SSPxSR Register .................................................... 213
SUBWF .................................................................... 403 MULLW ............................................................................ 394
SUBWFB .................................................................. 404 MULWF ............................................................................ 394
SWAPF .................................................................... 404
N
TBLRD ..................................................................... 405
TBLWT ..................................................................... 406 NEGF ............................................................................... 395
TSTFSZ ................................................................... 407 NOP ................................................................................. 395
XORLW .................................................................... 407 O
XORWF .................................................................... 408
OSCCON Register ....................................................... 32, 33
INTCON Register ............................................................. 115
Oscillator Configuration
INTCON Registers ................................................... 115–117
EC .............................................................................. 27
INTCON2 Register ........................................................... 116
ECIO .......................................................................... 27
INTCON3 Register ........................................................... 117
HS .............................................................................. 27
Internal Oscillator Block
HSPLL ....................................................................... 27
HFINTOSC Frequency Drift ....................................... 38
LP .............................................................................. 27
PLL in HFINTOSC Modes .......................................... 39
RC ............................................................................. 27
Internal RC Oscillator
XT .............................................................................. 27
Use with WDT .......................................................... 360
Oscillator Selection .......................................................... 349
Internal Sampling Switch (RSS) IMPEDANCE ..................... 302
Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ................................... 40, 63
Internet Address ............................................................... 489
Interrupt Sources ............................................................. 349 Oscillator Switching
ADC ......................................................................... 293 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ............................................. 44
Two-Speed Clock Start-up ........................................ 42
Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB4) .............................. 138
INTn Pin ................................................................... 131 OSCTUNE Register ........................................................... 37
PORTB, Interrupt-on-Change .................................. 131
TMR0 ....................................................................... 131
TMR0 Overflow ........................................................ 159
Interrupts

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
P Program Memory
P1A/P1B/P1C/P1D.See Enhanced Capture/Compare/ and Extended Instruction Set .................................... 94
PWM (ECCP) ........................................................... 188 Code Protection ....................................................... 363
Instructions ................................................................ 75
Packaging Information ..................................................... 463
Marking .................................................................... 463 Two-Word .......................................................... 75
PIE Registers ................................................................... 123 Interrupt Vector .......................................................... 69
Look-up Tables .......................................................... 73
PIE1 Register ................................................................... 123
PIE2 Register ................................................................... 124 Map and Stack (diagram) .......................................... 70
PIE3 Register3 ................................................................. 125 Reset Vector .............................................................. 69
Program Verification and Code Protection ...................... 362
PIE4 Register ................................................................... 126
PIE5 Register ................................................................... 126 Associated Registers ............................................... 362
PIR Registers ................................................................... 118 PSTRxCON Register ....................................................... 206
PUSH ............................................................................... 396
PIR1 Register ................................................................... 118
PIR2 Register ................................................................... 119 PUSH and POP Instructions .............................................. 72
PLL Frequency Multiplier ................................................... 39 PUSHL ............................................................................. 412
PWM (ECCP Module)
POP .................................................................................. 396
POR. See Power-on Reset. PWM Steering .......................................................... 198
PORTA Steering Synchronization ......................................... 198
PWM Mode. See Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM ..... 188
PORTA Register ...................................................... 133 PWM Steering .................................................................. 198
TRISA Register ........................................................ 133 PWMxCON Register ........................................................ 206
PORTB R
RAM. See Data Memory.
PORTB Register ...................................................... 138
RC_IDLE Mode .................................................................. 53
PORTC
RC_RUN ............................................................................ 48
RCALL ............................................................................. 397
PORTC Register ...................................................... 142
RCON Register .................................................................. 60
PORTD
Bit Status During Initialization .................................... 67
RCREG ............................................................................ 270
PORTD Register ...................................................... 146
RCSTA Register .............................................................. 273
TRISD Register ........................................................ 146
Reader Response ............................................................ 490
PORTE
Register
RCREG Register ..................................................... 279
PORTE Register ...................................................... 149
Register File ....................................................................... 82
Power Managed Modes ..................................................... 47
Registers
and A/D Operation ................................................... 296
ADCON0 (ADC Control 0) ....................................... 298
Effects on Clock Sources ........................................... 40
Entering ...................................................................... 47
Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes .................................... 54
ADRESH (ADC Result High) with ADFM = 0) ......... 301
by Interrupt ......................................................... 54
ADRESH (ADC Result High) with ADFM = 1) ......... 301
by Reset ............................................................. 54
ADRESL (ADC Result Low) with ADFM = 0) ........... 301
by WDT Time-out ............................................... 54
ADRESL (ADC Result Low) with ADFM = 1) ........... 301
Without a Start-up Delay .................................... 54
BAUDCON (Baud Rate Control) .............................. 274
Idle Modes ................................................................. 51
BAUDCON (EUSART Baud Rate Control) .............. 274
PRI_IDLE ........................................................... 52
CCPTMRS0 (PWM Timer Selection Control 0) ....... 204
RC_IDLE ............................................................ 53
CCPTMRS1 (PWM Timer Selection Control 1) ....... 204
SEC_IDLE .......................................................... 52
CCPxCON (ECCPx Control) .................................... 201
Multiple Sleep Functions ............................................ 48
CM1CON0 (C1 Control) ........................................... 310
Run Modes ................................................................. 48
CM2CON0 (C2 Control) ........................................... 311
PRI_RUN ........................................................... 48
CM2CON1 (C2 Control) ........................................... 314
SEC_RUN .......................................................... 48
CONFIG1H (Configuration 1 High) .......................... 351
Selecting .................................................................... 47
Sleep Mode ................................................................ 51
CONFIG2L (Configuration 2 Low) ........................... 352
Summary (table) ........................................................ 47
Power-on Reset (POR) ...................................................... 61
Power-up Timer (PWRT) ........................................... 63
Time-out Sequence .................................................... 63
Power-up Delays ................................................................ 40
Power-up Timer (PWRT) .................................................... 40
Prescaler, Timer0 ............................................................. 159
PRI_IDLE Mode ................................................................. 52
PRI_RUN Mode ................................................................. 48
CTMUCONH (CTMU Control High) ......................... 329
Program Counter ................................................................ 70
CTMUCONL (CTMU Control Low) .......................... 330
PCL, PCH and PCU Registers ................................... 70
CTMUICON (CTMU Current Control) ...................... 331
PCLATH and PCLATU Registers .............................. 70
DEVID1 (Device ID 1) .............................................. 358

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
DEVID2 (Device ID 2) .............................................. 358 SETF ............................................................................... 401
ECCPxAS (CCPx Auto-Shutdown Control) ............. 205 Shoot-through Current ..................................................... 197
EECON1 (Data EEPROM Control 1) ................. 97, 106 Single-Supply ICSP Programming.
HLVDCON (High/Low-Voltage Detect Control) ........ 343 SLEEP ............................................................................. 402
INTCON (Interrupt Control) ...................................... 115 Sleep
INTCON2 (Interrupt Control 2) ................................. 116 OSC1 and OSC2 Pin States ...................................... 41
INTCON3 (Interrupt Control 3) ................................. 117 Sleep Mode ....................................................................... 51
IPR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 1) ........................ 127 Slew Rate ........................................................................ 151
IPR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 2) ........................ 128 SLRCON Register ........................................................... 156
IPR3 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority) ........................... 129 Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM) ................................... 419
IPR4 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority) ........................... 130 SPBRG ............................................................................ 275
IPR5 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority) ........................... 130 SPBRGH ......................................................................... 275
OSCCON (Oscillator Control) .............................. 32, 33 Special Event Trigger ...................................................... 296
OSCTUNE (Oscillator Tuning) ................................... 37 Special Function Registers ................................................ 82
PIE1 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 1) ........................ 123 Map ............................................................................ 83
PIE2 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 2) ........................ 124 SPI Mode (MSSPx)
PIE3 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable] ........................... 125 Associated Registers ............................................... 217
PIE4 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable) ........................... 126 SPI Clock ................................................................. 213
PIE5 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable) ........................... 126 SR Latch
PIR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Request 1) ..................... 118 Associated Registers ............................................... 336
PIR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Request 2) ..................... 119 Effects of a Reset .................................................... 333
PSTRxCON (PWM Steering Control) ...................... 206 SRCON0 Register ........................................................... 335
PWMxCON (Enhanced PWM Control) .................... 206 SRCON1 Register ........................................................... 336
RCON (Reset Control) ....................................... 60, 130 SSPxADD Register .......................................................... 261
RCSTA (Receive Status and Control) ...................... 273 SSPxCON1 Register ....................................................... 256
SLRCON (PORT Slew Rate Control) ....................... 156 SSPxCON2 Register ....................................................... 258
SRCON0 (SR Latch Control 0) ................................ 335 SSPxMSK Register .......................................................... 260
SRCON1 (SR Latch Control 1) ................................ 336 SSPxOV .......................................................................... 244
SSPxADD (MSSPx Address and Baud Rate, SSPxOV Status Flag ....................................................... 244
I2C Mode) ........................................................ 261 SSPxSTAT Register ........................................................ 255
SSPxCON1 (MSSPx Control 1) ............................... 256 R/W Bit .................................................................... 223
SSPxCON2 (SSPx Control 2) .................................. 258 Stack Full/Underflow Resets .............................................. 72
SSPxMSK (SSPx Mask) .......................................... 260 Standard Instructions ....................................................... 367
SSPxSTAT (SSPx Status) ....................................... 255 STATUS Register .............................................................. 89
STATUS ..................................................................... 89 STKPTR Register .............................................................. 72
STKPTR (Stack Pointer) ............................................ 72 SUBFSR .......................................................................... 413
T0CON (Timer0 Control) .......................................... 157 SUBFWB ......................................................................... 402
T1CON (Timer1 Control) .......................................... 170 SUBLW ............................................................................ 403
T1GCON (Timer1 Gate Control) .............................. 171 SUBULNK ........................................................................ 413
TXCON .................................................................... 175 SUBWF ............................................................................ 403
TXSTA (Transmit Status and Control) ..................... 272 SUBWFB ......................................................................... 404
VREFCON0 ............................................................. 338 SWAPF ............................................................................ 404
VREFCON1 ............................................................. 341
VREFCON2 ............................................................. 342 T
WDTCON (Watchdog Timer Control) ...................... 361 T0CON Register .............................................................. 157
RESET ............................................................................. 397 T1CON Register .............................................................. 170
Reset State of Registers .................................................... 67 T1GCON Register ........................................................... 171
Resets .............................................................................. 349 Table Pointer Operations (table) ........................................ 98
Brown-out Reset (BOR) ........................................... 349 Table Reads/Table Writes ................................................. 73
Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ............................... 349 TBLRD ............................................................................. 405
Power-on Reset (POR) ............................................ 349 TBLWT ............................................................................ 406
Power-up Timer (PWRT) ......................................... 349 Time-out in Various Situations (table) ................................ 64
RETFIE ............................................................................ 398 Timer0 ............................................................................. 157
RETLW ............................................................................ 398 Associated Registers ............................................... 159
RETURN .......................................................................... 399 Operation ................................................................. 158
Return Address Stack ........................................................ 70 Overflow Interrupt .................................................... 159
Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) ........................................ 71 Prescaler ................................................................. 159
Revision History ............................................................... 477 Prescaler Assignment (PSA Bit) .............................. 159
RLCF ................................................................................ 399 Prescaler Select (T0PS2:T0PS0 Bits) ..................... 159
RLNCF ............................................................................. 400 Prescaler. See Prescaler, Timer0.
RRCF ............................................................................... 400 Reads and Writes in 16-Bit Mode ............................ 158
RRNCF ............................................................................ 401 Source Edge Select (T0SE Bit) ............................... 158
Source Select (T0CS Bit) ........................................ 158
S Switching Prescaler Assignment ............................. 159
SEC_IDLE Mode ................................................................ 52 Timer1 ............................................................................. 161
SEC_RUN Mode ................................................................ 48 Associated registers ................................................ 172

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Asynchronous Counter Mode .................................. 163 I2C Bus Data ............................................................ 454
Reading and Writing ........................................ 163 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits ............................................ 453
Clock Source Selection ............................................ 162 I2C Master Mode (7 or 10-Bit Transmission) ........... 243
Interrupt .................................................................... 166 I2C Master Mode (7-Bit Reception) .......................... 245
Operation ................................................................. 162 I2C Stop Condition Receive or Transmit Mode ........ 247
Operation During Sleep ........................................... 166 Internal Oscillator Switch Timing ............................... 43
Oscillator .................................................................. 163 Low-Voltage Detect Operation (VDIRMAG = 0) ...... 345
Prescaler .................................................................. 163 Master SSP I2C Bus Data ........................................ 456
Timer1 Gate Master SSP I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits ........................ 456
Selecting Source .............................................. 164 PWM Auto-shutdown ............................................... 196
TMR1H Register ...................................................... 161 Firmware Restart ............................................. 196
TMR1L Register ....................................................... 161 PWM Direction Change ........................................... 194
Timer2 PWM Direction Change at Near 100% Duty Cycle .. 195
Associated registers ................................................. 176 PWM Output (Active-High) ...................................... 189
Timer2/4/6 ........................................................................ 173 PWM Output (Active-Low) ....................................... 190
Associated registers ................................................. 176 Repeat Start Condition ............................................ 241
Timers Reset, Watchdog Timer (WDT), Oscillator Start-up
Timer1 Timer (OST), Power-up Timer (PWRT) ........... 446
T1CON ............................................................. 170 Send Break Character Sequence ............................ 282
T1GCON .......................................................... 171 Slow Rise Time (MCLR Tied to VDD, VDD Rise >
Timer2/4/6 TPWRT) ............................................................... 65
TXCON ............................................................ 175 SPI Mode (Master Mode) ......................................... 213
Timing Diagrams Synchronous Reception (Master Mode, SREN) ...... 287
A/D Conversion ........................................................ 459 Synchronous Transmission ..................................... 284
Acknowledge Sequence .......................................... 246 Synchronous Transmission (Through TXEN) .......... 284
Asynchronous Reception ......................................... 271 Time-out Sequence on POR w/PLL Enabled
Asynchronous Transmission .................................... 266 (MCLR Tied to VDD) .......................................... 66
Asynchronous Transmission (Back to Back) ........... 267 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not
Auto Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Normal Tied to VDD, Case 1) ......................................... 64
Operation ......................................................... 281 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not
Auto Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Sleep ................... 281 Tied to VDD, Case 2) ......................................... 65
Automatic Baud Rate Calculator .............................. 280 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Tied
Baud Rate Generator with Clock Arbitration ............ 239 to VDD, VDD Rise < TPWRT) ............................... 64
BRG Reset Due to SDA Arbitration During Start Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock .......................... 447
Condition .......................................................... 250 Timer1 Incrementing Edge ...................................... 167
Brown-out Reset (BOR) ........................................... 446 Transition for Entry to SEC_RUN Mode .................... 49
Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition Transition for Entry to Sleep Mode ............................ 51
(Case 1) ........................................................... 251 Transition for Wake from Sleep (HSPLL) .................. 52
Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition Transition from RC_RUN Mode to PRI_RUN Mode .. 50
(Case 2) ........................................................... 251 Transition from SEC_RUN Mode to PRI_RUN
Bus Collision During a Start Condition (SCL = 0) .... 250 Mode (HSPLL) ................................................... 49
Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 1) ...... 252 Transition Timing for Entry to Idle Mode .................... 52
Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 2) ...... 252 Transition Timing for Wake from Idle to Run Mode ... 53
Bus Collision During Start Condition (SDA only) ..... 249 Timing Diagrams and Specifications ............................... 443
Bus Collision for Transmit and Acknowledge ........... 248 A/D Conversion Requirements ................................ 460
Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) ................................ 448 Capture/Compare/PWM Requirements ................... 449
CLKO and I/O .......................................................... 445 CLKO and I/O Requirements ................................... 445
Clock Synchronization ............................................. 236 EUSART Synchronous Receive Requirements ....... 458
Clock/Instruction Cycle .............................................. 74 EUSART Synchronous Transmission
Comparator Output .................................................. 305 Requirements .................................................. 458
EUSART Synchronous Receive (Master/Slave) ...... 458 Example SPI Mode Requirements
EUSART Synchronous Transmission (Master Mode, CKE = 0) .................................. 450
(Master/Slave) .................................................. 458 (Master Mode, CKE = 1) .................................. 451
Example SPI Master Mode (CKE = 0) ..................... 449 (Slave Mode, CKE = 0) .................................... 452
Example SPI Master Mode (CKE = 1) ..................... 450 (Slave Mode, CKE = 1) .................................... 453
Example SPI Master Mode Timing .......................... 449 External Clock Requirements .................................. 443
Example SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ....................... 451 I2C Bus Data Requirements (Slave Mode) .............. 455
Example SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ....................... 452 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits Requirements
External Clock (All Modes except PLL) .................... 443 (Slave Mode) ................................................... 454
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) ................................ 45 Master SSP I2C Bus Data Requirements ................ 457
First Start Bit Timing ................................................ 240 Master SSP I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits
Full-Bridge PWM Output .......................................... 193 Requirements .................................................. 456
Half-Bridge PWM Output ................................. 191, 197 PLL Clock ................................................................ 444
High/Low-Voltage Detect Characteristics ................ 440
High-Voltage Detect Operation (VDIRMAG = 1) ...... 346

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
Reset, Watchdog Timer, Oscillator Start-up Timer,
Power-up Timer and Brown-out Reset
Requirements .................................................. 447
Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock Requirements ... 448
Top-of-Stack Access .......................................................... 71
TSTFSZ ........................................................................... 407
Two-Speed Clock Start-up Mode ....................................... 42
Two-Speed Start-up ......................................................... 349
Two-Word Instructions
Example Cases .......................................................... 75
TXCON (Timer2/4/6) Register ......................................... 175
TXREG ............................................................................. 265
TXSTA Register ............................................................... 272
BRGH Bit ................................................................. 275
V
Voltage Reference (VR)
Specifications ........................................................... 439
VREF. SEE ADC Reference Voltage
VREFCON0 Register ....................................................... 338
VREFCON1 (Digital-to-Analog Converter Control 0)
Register .................................................................... 341
VREFCON2 (Digital-to-Analog Converter Control 1)
Register .................................................................... 342
W
Wake-up on Break ........................................................... 280
Watchdog Timer (WDT) ........................................... 349, 360
Control Register ....................................................... 361
Programming Considerations .................................. 360
WCOL ...................................................... 239, 242, 244, 246
WCOL Status Flag ................................... 239, 242, 244, 246
WDTCON Register .......................................................... 361
WWW Address ................................................................. 489
WWW, On-Line Support .................................................... 12
X
XORLW ............................................................................ 407
XORWF ............................................................................ 408

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
NOTES:

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at Users of Microchip products can receive assistance
www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means through several channels:
to make files and information easily available to • Distributor or Representative
customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet
• Local Sales Office
browser, the web site contains the following
information: • Field Application Engineer (FAE)
• Technical Support
• Product Support – Data sheets and errata,
application notes and sample programs, design • Development Systems Information Line
resources, user’s guides and hardware support Customers should contact their distributor,
documents, latest software releases and archived representative or field application engineer (FAE) for
software support. Local sales offices are also available to help
• General Technical Support – Frequently Asked customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is
Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, included in the back of this document.
online discussion groups, Microchip consultant Technical support is available through the web site
program member listing at: http://support.microchip.com
• Business of Microchip – Product selector and
ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases,
listing of seminars and events, listings of
Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory
representatives
CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION

SERVICE
Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep
customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers
will receive e-mail notification whenever there are
changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a
specified product family or development tool of interest.
To register, access the Microchip web site at
www.microchip.com, click on Customer Change
Notification and follow the registration instructions.

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
READER RESPONSE
It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip prod-
uct. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation
can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150.
Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document.
To: Technical Publications Manager Total Pages Sent ________

RE: Reader Response
From: Name
Company
Address
City / State / ZIP / Country
Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________ FAX: (______) _________ - _________
Application (optional):
Would you like a reply? Y N
Device: PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22 Literature Number: DS41412B
Questions:
1. What are the best features of this document?
2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs?
3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why?
4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject?
5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness?
6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)?
7. How would you improve this document?

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office.
PART NO. X - X /XX XXX

Examples:
Device Packaging Temperature Package Pattern a) PIC18F46K22-E/P 301 = Extended temp.,
Option Range PDIP package, QTP pattern #301.
b) PIC18F46K22-I/SO = Industrial temp., SOIC
package.
c) PIC18F46K22-E/P = Extended temp., PDIP
Device: PIC18F46K22, PIC18LF46K22
package.
PIC18F45K22, PIC18LF45K22
PIC18F44K22, PIC18LF44K22 d) PIC18F46K22T-I/ML = Tape and reel,
PIC18F43K22, PIC18LF43K22 Industrial temp., QFN package.
Packaging blank = standard packaging (tube or tray)

Option: T = Tape and Reel(1)
Note 1: Tape and Reel option is available for ML,

Temperature E = -40C to +125C (Extended) MV, PT, SO and SS packages with industrial
Range: I = -40C to +85C (Industrial) Temperature Range only.
Package: ML = QFN
MV = UQFN
P = PDIP
PT = TQFP (Thin Quad Flatpack)
SO = SOIC
SP = Skinny Plastic DIP
SS = SSOP
Pattern: QTP, SQTP, Code or Special Requirements

(blank otherwise)

WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE
AMERICAS ASIA/PACIFIC ASIA/PACIFIC EUROPE
Corporate Office Asia Pacific Office India - Bangalore Austria - Wels
2355 West Chandler Blvd. Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tel: 91-80-3090-4444 Tel: 43-7242-2244-39
Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tower 6, The Gateway Fax: 91-80-3090-4123 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393
Tel: 480-792-7200 Harbour City, Kowloon Denmark - Copenhagen
India - New Delhi
Fax: 480-792-7277 Hong Kong Tel: 45-4450-2828
Tel: 91-11-4160-8631
Technical Support: Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 45-4485-2829
Fax: 91-11-4160-8632
http://support.microchip.com Fax: 852-2401-3431
India - Pune France - Paris
Web Address:
Australia - Sydney Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20
www.microchip.com
Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79
Atlanta Fax: 61-2-9868-6755
Japan - Yokohama Germany - Munich
Duluth, GA
China - Beijing Tel: 49-89-627-144-0
Tel: 678-957-9614 Tel: 81-45-471- 6166
Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44
Fax: 678-957-1455 Fax: 81-45-471-6122
Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 Italy - Milan
Boston Korea - Daegu
China - Chengdu Tel: 39-0331-742611
Westborough, MA Tel: 82-53-744-4301
Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 Fax: 39-0331-466781
Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 82-53-744-4302
Fax: 86-28-8665-7889 Netherlands - Drunen
Fax: 774-760-0088 Korea - Seoul
China - Chongqing Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Tel: 31-416-690399
Chicago
Tel: 86-23-8980-9588 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or Fax: 31-416-690340
Itasca, IL
Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 86-23-8980-9500 82-2-558-5934 Spain - Madrid
Fax: 630-285-0075 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 34-91-708-08-90
Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur
Tel: 852-2401-1200 Tel: 60-3-6201-9857 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91
Cleveland
Independence, OH Fax: 852-2401-3431 Fax: 60-3-6201-9859 UK - Wokingham
Tel: 216-447-0464 China - Nanjing Tel: 44-118-921-5869
Malaysia - Penang
Fax: 216-447-0643 Tel: 86-25-8473-2460 Fax: 44-118-921-5820
Tel: 60-4-227-8870
Dallas Fax: 86-25-8473-2470 Fax: 60-4-227-4068
Addison, TX China - Qingdao Philippines - Manila
Tel: 972-818-7423 Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Tel: 63-2-634-9065
Fax: 972-818-2924 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 Fax: 63-2-634-9069
Detroit China - Shanghai Singapore
Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Tel: 65-6334-8870
Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 Fax: 65-6334-8850
Fax: 248-538-2260
China - Shenyang Taiwan - Hsin Chu
Kokomo Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Tel: 886-3-6578-300
Kokomo, IN Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 Fax: 886-3-6578-370
Tel: 765-864-8360
Fax: 765-864-8387 China - Shenzhen Taiwan - Kaohsiung
Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Tel: 886-7-536-4818
Los Angeles Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 Fax: 886-7-536-4803
Mission Viejo, CA
Tel: 949-462-9523 China - Wuhan Taiwan - Taipei
Fax: 949-462-9608 Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Tel: 886-2-2500-6610
Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102
Santa Clara
Santa Clara, CA China - Xian Thailand - Bangkok
Tel: 408-961-6444 Tel: 86-29-8833-7252 Tel: 66-2-694-1351
Fax: 408-961-6445 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 Fax: 66-2-694-1350
Toronto China - Xiamen

Mississauga, Ontario, Tel: 86-592-2388138
Canada Fax: 86-592-2388130
Tel: 905-673-0699 China - Zhuhai
Fax: 905-673-6509 Tel: 86-756-3210040
Fax: 86-756-3210049
01/05/10

Datasheet PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Datasheet PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Datasheet PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PIC18(L)F2X/4XK22

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B

Information contained in this publication regarding device Trademarks

DS41412B-page 2 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 3

DS41412B-page 4 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

28-pin QFN, UQFN(1)

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 5

DS41412B-page 6 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 7

TABLE 1: PIC18(L)F2XK22 PIN SUMMARY

2 27 RA0 AN0 C12IN0-

5 2 RA3 AN3 C1IN+ VREF+

DS41412B-page 8 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 9

10 27 27 RE2 AN7 CCP5

DS41412B-page 10 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 11

TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS

Most Current Data Sheet

Customer Notification System

DS41412B-page 12 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 13

DS41412B-page 14 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

(ADC) 17 input 17 input 17 input 17 input 28 input 28 input 28 input 28 input

ROM Latch Address

BOR Data Timer1 Timer2

FVR ECCP1 CCP4

Note 1: RE3 is only available when MCLR functionality is disabled.

DS41412B-page 16 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 1-2: PIC18(L)F2XK22 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 17

DS41412B-page 18 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 19

DS41412B-page 20 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 1-3: PIC18(L)F4XK22 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 21

DS41412B-page 22 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 23

DS41412B-page 24 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 25

DS41412B-page 26 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 27

Primary Clock Module Secondary

Clock Switch MUX

LFINTOSC LF-31.25 kHz

Note 1: Details in Figure 2-4.

DS41412B-page 28 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

2.2.2 INTERNAL FREQUENCY

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 29

IRCF<2:0> FOSC<3:0> = 100x

TABLE 2-1: PLL SELECT TRUTH TABLE

DS41412B-page 30 Preliminary  2010 Microchip Technology Inc.

 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41412B-page 31

REGISTER 2-1: OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER

bit 7 IDLEN: Idle Enable bit

If INTSRC = 0 and MFIOSEL = 0:

If INTSRC = 1 and MFIOSEL = 0: